GIFT  OF 
Dr.   Horace  Ivie 


>UC»-vY"- 


>T-    --.>t-,- 


^/^  ^^/' 


Cy.  -'oi.U 


Jf:..^ 


^lW^s>rniy 


(Charles  W.  Wendte 
OTTO'S 


F  E  E  :^  C  H 


CONYERSATION  GRAMMAR. 


REVISED    BY 


FEKDINAND    BOCIIER 


INSTRUCTOR  LN  FRENCH  AT  HARVARD  COLLEGE. 


BOSTON: 
S.  R.  URBINO,  13  SCHOOL  STREET. 

NEW   YORK:     F.   W.    CHRISTEKN.      PHILADELPHIA:     F.   LEYPOLDT. 
BALTIMORE:   J.  S.  -WATERS.      CINCINNATI:    R.  CLARKE  &  CO. 

18G4. 


Entered  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1864,  by 

S.    R.    URBINO, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  District 
of  Massachusetts. 


EDUCATION  DEFT 
GIFT  OF 


PREFACE. 


The  first  edition  of  Dr.  Emile  Otto's  "  French 
Conversation  Grammar  "  appeared  at  Heidelberg  in 
1859.  A  second  edition  was  issued  in  1863,  upon 
which  this  first  American  edition  is  based.  The  pres- 
ent editor  has  not  hesitated  in  making  such  changes 
as  he  deemed  proper  in  the  body  of  the  work,  abandon- 
ing, among  other  things,  the  names  of  the  Latin  cases, 
genitive,  dative,  etc.,  which,  although  they  may  be  of 
help  to  the  German  student,  can  only  confuse  the  Amer- 
ican learner.  The  names  of  the  tenses  have  also  been 
changed,  and,  it  is  hoped,  simplified.  A  few  lessons 
have  been  added  to  Part  I.,  and  the  chapter  upon  the 
Past  Participle  has  been  re-written.  The  preliminary 
lesson  upon  Pronunciation  is  also  entirely  new,  and  an 
English  and  French  Vocabulary  of  the  words  ^that 
occur  in  the  Themes  has  been  added. 

Boston,  August,  1864. 


924164 


CONTENTS 


PRONU^^ClA|T]to>J. :;,';';. ;','_;  l.j  I  ,.;, 


Paob. 

The  Alphabet 13 

Division  of  Syllables H 

Syllabic  Accent,  or  Stress 14 

Accents  —  Orthographic  Marks 15 

Simple  Vowels 15 

Compound  Vowels 18  • 

Diphthongs 18 

Nasal  Vowls 19 

Consonants.— General  Rules ?l 

Consonants.  —  Special  Rules 5f2 

Linking  of  Final  Consonants t 2(5 

Observations  on  E  mute 26 


3?A.I2.T     I. 

LsBsov.  Pack. 

I.  The  Article 28 

II.  Formation  of  the  Plural .30 

III.  Case  — .4  — D^ 33 

IV.  Prepositions 36 

V.  The  Partitive  Article 39 

VI.  Further  use  of  de 42 

VII.  Proper  Nouns 44 

VIII.  Conjugation  of  avoir,  to  liave —  affirmatively 48 

IX.  Idiomatic  use  of  avoir 51 

X.  Conjugation  of  etre,  to  be  —  affirmatively 54 

XI.  Negations.  —  Tlie  Negative  and  Interrogative  forms  of  the  Aux- 
iliaries      57 

IX 


X  ,  CONTENTS. 

Ltsaos.  Fagi. 

XII.  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Adjectives .62 

XIII.  Possessive  Adjectives 64 

XIV.  Cardinal  Numbers 67 

XV.  Ordinal  Numbers 71 

XVI.  Indefinite  Adjectives 75 

XVII.  Adjeotives.  —  Foraaatioaoftlie  feminine  and  of  the  plural  ....  78 

XVIII.  tie  place  of  Adjt?fct;lve,3.., 82 

XTX.  Degrees  of  Compjjj-isQn 80 

;Xi5,',^&iilJ'.rV«r?^s. -'■i^'irst  Cciviuga.tion.  —  Donner 88 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  chameau  et  le  chat 95 

XXI.  Remarks  on  the  Orthograpliy  of  some  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjuga- 
tion    96 

XXII.  Second  Conjugation :  Fiiiir 100 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  Moineau  et  ses  Petits 104 

XXIII.  Third  Conjugation :  Vendre 105 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  roi  de  Perse 110 

XXIV.  Disjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 110 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  Rosier 113 

XXV.  Conjunctive  Personal  Pronouns 114 

Reading  Lesson:  Suite  du  Rosier 118 

XXVI.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 119 

XXVII.  Interrogative  Pronouns 122 

XXVIII.  Possessive  and  Relative  Pronouns 125 

XXIX.  Indefinite  Pronouns 129 

Reading  Lesson :  Puissance  de  la  Concorde 132 

XXX.  Passive  and  Neuter  Verbs 133 

XXXI.  Reflective  Verbs 138 

Reading  Lesson:  Le  Sansonnet 144 

XXXII.  Impersonal  Verbs 145 

Reading  Lesson :  Productions  de  divers  climats 150 

XXXIII.  Formation  of  Adverbs 151 

XXXIV.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  of  Time 155 

XXXV.  Adverbs  of  Number,  of  Quality,  of  JS'egation,  etc 158 

XXXVI.  Conjunctions .162 

Reading  Lesson :  Lafitte 166 

XXXVII.  Conjunctive  Phrases 167 

XXXVIII.  Irregular  Verbs,  — First  Class 170 

XXXIX.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  First  Class  continued 174 

XL.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  First  Class  continued 177 

XLI.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  First  Class  continued ISO 


CONTENTS.  XI 

liESBOK.  FaOI. 

XLII.  Irregular  Verbs. —  Second  Class 183 

XLIir.  Irregular  Verb's.  —  Third  Class 188 

XLIV.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  Thu'd  Class  continued 189 

XLV.  Irregular  Verbs.  —  Third  Class  continued 194 

XL VI.  Defective  Verbs 197 

Alphabetical  List  of  Irregular  and  Defective  Verbs 199 

XL VII.  How  to  render  do,  did,  shall,  will,  etc 201 

Supplementary  Tenses 203 


PA.RT     II. 

Elision .205 

I.  On  the  Gender  of  Substantives 206 

II.  Plural  of  Nouns 214 

Reading'  Lesson:  Le  Castor  -. 216 

III.  Use  of  the  Article 218 

Heading  Lesson :  Demosthfene 226 

IV.  Special  use  of  de  and  a 228 

V.  Peculiarities  in  the  use  of  names  of  Countries,  Towns,  etc. .  .  .   235 

Reading  Lesson :  Charles  XII 238 

VI.  Possessive  Adjectives 239 

Reading  Lesson :  Eudamidas 242 

Til.  Numerals 244 

VIII.  Adjectives 246 

Reading  Lesson :  L'elephaut ., 253 

IX.  1.  Personal  Pronouns 255 

2.  Particular  use  of  en  and  y 258 

3.  The  supplying  Pronouns  le,la,les 260 

Reading  Lesson :  L'elephant  {continuation) 262 

X.  Interrogative  Pronouns 263 

Reading  Lesson :  Servilius  se  defend  devant  le  peuple 266 

XI.  Relative  Pronouns *.  .  .  i 267 

Reading  Lesson :  Suite  de  "Servilius," 272 

XII.  Indefinite  Pronouns 274 

XIII.  Indefinite  Pronouns,  continued 278 

XIV.  Adverbs 284 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  Connetable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard 288 


XII  CONTENTS. 

IiiBioir.  Paoi. 

XV.  Syntax  of  Negations 289 

Reading  Lesson :  Le  Connetable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard.  (Suite)  .  295 

XVI.  Kemarks  on  some  Prepositions  .  .  .^ 296 

XVII.  Different  uses  of  the  Coiyunction  que 307 

Readings  Lesson:  Le  Connetable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard.    (Fil)  .  311 

XVIII.  Use  of  the  Tenses  of  the  Indicative 313 

Reading  Lesson :  Alexandre  Selkirk 324 

XIX.  The  Subjunctive  Mood 325 

Reading  Lesson :  Alexandre  Selkirk,  (Suite) .336 

XX.  The  Infinitive 338 

•♦           "         preceded  by  rfe 342 

'                       "           "         preceded  by  a 347 

"           "         preceded  by  other  Prepositions 354 

Reading  Lesson :  Alexandre  Selkirk.  (Suite) 355 

XXI.  The  Present  Participle 357 

Reading  Lesson :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnach 360 

XXII.  The  Past  Participle 363 

XXIII.  The  Participle  Absolute .  367 

Reading  Lesson :  Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnacli 369 

XXIV.  Government  of  Verbs 371 

XXV.  Idiomatical  Expressions .  380 

English  Vocabulary  of  the  Words  that  occur  in  the  Themes 385 


FRENCH    GRAMMAR 


PRONUNCIATION 


THE  ALPHABET. 

1.  The  written  French  alphabet  is  the  same  as  the  English.  W 
and  K  are  found  only  in  words  borrowed  from  other  languages. 

The  names  of  the  letters  are  given  below  in  the  French  spelling  as  they 
are  of  little  or  no  value  to  the  beginner.  In  the  new  names  the  e  in  he,  ke, 
de,  gue,  etc.,  is  only  sounded  enough  to  allow  the  utterance  of  the  consonant 
that  precedes  it,  as  in  globe,  cake,  raade,  fatigue  ,•  j  is  sounded  as  s  in  pleosiire. 
The  vowels  have  their  normal  French  sounds. —  W  when  spoken  of  is 
called  double  V. 


OLD  NAMES.     NEW  NAMES. 

OLI 

)  NAMES.     NEW  NAMES. 

A 

a 

a 

a 

N 

n. 

enne 

ne 

B 

b 

U 

be 

0 

0 

0 

0 

C 

c 

06 

ke  (se) 

P 

P 

p4 

pe 

D 

d 

d6 

de 

Q 

q 

ku      ' 

ke 

E 

e 

6 

e 

B 

r 

erre 

re 

F 

f 

effe 

fe 

S 

s 

esse 

se  (ze) 

a 

g 

g^ 

gue(je) 

T 

t 

te 

te 

H 

h 

ache 

he 

U 

u 

u 

u 

I 

i 

i 

i 

V 

V 

v^ 

ve 

J 

J 

ji 

je 

X 

X 

ics 

kse 

K 

k 

ka 

ke 

Y 

y 

igrec 

i 

L 

1 

elle 

le 

Z 

z 

zede 

ze 

M 

m 

emme 

me 

13 


14  PRONUNCIATION. 


DIVISION  OF  SYLLABLES. 

2.  Words  are  generally  divided  as  in  English ;  but  whenever  it 
is  possible  .q. syllable  must  l^ffii}  with  a  consonant.  Hence,  verbal 
and  other  teitainaiions  ibcginmag  with  a  vowel  nrnst  be  joined  to  the 
conspf^aaji  Jt)h.^t:  precedes  ;,  tl\iis  m'-wer,  but  ai-me-rai  ;  chan-ter^ 
chari-t^Vai,  '(^dn4^-ron^r « • « •  ,  ^  -  -^ 

As  to  X  equal  to  gs,  cs,  its  compound  nature  prevents  its  separation  from 
the  vowel  that  precedes  :  hence  the  following  division  ex-em-ple. 

In  writing,  silent  k  apparently  begins  a  syllable,  as  in  in-h€-rent ;  but  in 
the  spoken  syllables,  silent  h  has  no  value  whatever ;  and  a  consonant  be- 
tween a  vowel  and  a  silent  h  is  separated  from  that  vowel  in  the  spoken 
though  not  in  the  written  language ;  hence  the  following  divisions. 

Written.  Pronounced. 

in-hu-main  i-nhu-main 

in-ha-bi-le  i-nha-bile 

in-he'-rent  i-nhe-rent 

bon-heur  bo-nheur 

If  these  words  were  pronounced  according  to  the  written  divisions,  they 
would  begin  with  a  nasal  sound ;  but  they  do  not.     (See  Nasal  vowels,  37.) 


SYLLABIC   ACCENT,   OR  STRESS. 

♦ 

As  compared  with  English,  French  is  generally  said  to  have  no  syllabic 
accent.  Such  a  stress  of  voice  as  is  heard  in  the  words  ac^cent  and  accentf 
does  not  occur  in  French ;  but  the  following  rule  explains  the  uniformity 
of  the  English  accent  on  the  last  syllable  in  words  newly  introduced  from 
the  French,  such  as  barouche,  surtout,  machine,  fatigue,  etc. 

3.  In  French  each  syllable  of  a  word  must  be  pronounced 
smoothly,  the  voice  resting  upon  the  last,  unless  it  ends  in  e  mute, 
in  which  case  the  syllable  before  the  last  is  slightly  accented.  Ex. 
constitution,  indubitable.  ' 


ACCENTS  —  SIMPLE  VOWELS.  15 


ACCENTS,  —  ORTHOGRAPHIC   MARKS. 

4.  Three  orthographic  marks,  the  acute  ('),  {h^  grave  Q),  and 
the  circumflex  (*),  have  received  the  name  of  accents. 

These  marks  never  affect  a  syllable ;  they  can  only  modify  the  sound  of 
a  vowel  over  which  they  are  placed.  Sometimes  they  have  a  mere  ortho- 
graphic value.     They  must  never  be  neglected  in  writing. 

5.  The  ACUTE  (')  is  used  only  over  the  vowel  e  (e"),  which  then 
has  the  sound  of  a  in  date.     Ex,  ete,  donne. 

6.  The  Grave  Q)  or  open  accent  is  used  principally  over  e  (e), 
which  then  has  the  sound  of  e  in  ehb  or  of  e  in  there.  'Ex.  f eve, 
pere.  Over  a  and  u  it  is  only  used  to  distinguish  words  otherwise 
similarly  spelled,  and  does  not  affect  the  pronunciation.  Ex.  la, 
the  ;  la,  there  ;  a,  has  ;  a,  to  ;  ou,  o**;  ou,  where. 

7.  The  Circumflex  (")  is  used  over  all  the  vowels,  which  are 
then  long.     Ex.  age,  cote,  sur. 

The  circumflex  denotes  that  a  contraction  has  taken  place ;  thus  age  and 
sur  were  formerly  spelled  aage  and  seur.  Often  an  s  has  been  dropped  in 
modern  French  which  still  remains  in  the  English  word  taken  from  the  old 
French.     Ex.  ile,  isle;  hate,  haste;  foret,  forest ;  tempete,  tempest. 

8.  The  Cedilla  is  placed  under  the  c  (9)  when  it  has  the  sound 
of  s  before  a,  0,  u.     Ex.  fa^ad^,  gargon,  regu. 

9.  The  DiiERESis  ("  Trema)  is  used  over  e,  i,  and  u;  in  which 
case  these  letters  do  not  coalesce  with  the  preceding  vowel,  but  be- 
gin a  new  syllable.  Ex.  haiir,  Noel,  aigue,  are  pronounced  horir. 
No-el,  ai-gu-e,  (the  last  e  is  silent.) 


'  SIMPLE  VOWELS. 
A. 

10.  A  long  has  the  sound  of  a  in  far.     Ex.  ame,  soul ;  pate, 
paste;  cas,  case. 

11.  Short  a  differs  from  long  a  principally  in  quantity.     It  has 


16  PRONUNCIATION. 

the  sound  of  a  in  tHe  Interjection  ha  !  pronounced  quick.     Ex.  la, 
the  ;  patte,  paw. 
A  is  silent  in  Saone,  taon,  aout,  aoriste,  Cura9ao. 

E. 

12.  E  unaccented,  when  it  ends  a  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a 
■word,  and  in  the  monosyllables  ce,  de,  je,  le,  me,  ne,  que,  se  and  te, 
has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in  Battery.  Ex.  lever,  to  raise;  re- 
gard, look. 

13.  E  unaccented  final  is  mute.     Ex.  table,  table. 

14.  E  with  an  acute  accent  (e)  has  the  sound  of  a  in  date.  Ex. 
ete,  summer  ;  donne,  given. 

E  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  €  {a  in  date)  before  final  d,  r,  z,  mute, 
also  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  before  a  double  consonant.  Ex.  pied,  foot ; 
donner,  to  give ;  assez,  enough ;  eflfet,  effect ;  et,  and,  is  always  pronounced  ^. 

15.  E  with  the  grave  (e)  or  with  the  circumflex  accent  (e)  is 
more  or  less  open,  varying  between  e  in  ebb,  and  e  in  where.  Ex. 
reve,  dream  ;  -phre,  father  ;  foret,  forest ;  apres,  after. 

E  unaccented  takes  the  sound  of  e  (e  in  ebb)  when  preceding  c,f,  I,  r,  s,  t, 
or  X  in  the  same  syllable  and  in  the  middle  of  a  word  before  any  double 
consonant.  Before  r,  the  sound  is  more  open  than  before  the  other  letters. 
Ex.  fer,  iron;  dessert,  dessert;  terre,  earth;  tendresse,  tenderness ;  sonnette, 
bell ;  chef,  chief;  mes,  my ;  est,  is ;  esprit,  spirit.  In  the  last  words  the  e  is 
pronounced  by  many  persons  very  nearly  like  ^  especially  in  rapid  conver- 
sation.   Even  e  often  loses  its  broad,  long  sound. 

16.  E  takes  the  sound  of  French  a  mfemme,  solemiel,  indemniser, 
and  in  all  adverbial  terminations  in  emment. 

17.  E  is  silent  between  g  and  a  or  o.  Ex.  pigeon,  pigeon ; 
mangeons,  (we)  eat;  mangeant,  eating.  In  these  words  the  e 
merely  serves  to  prevent  g  from  having  the  hard  sound  of  g  in  go. 

Eor  further  observations  on  e  mute,  see  page  26. 

I. 

18.  I  has  only  one  sound,  that  of  ^  in  machine  ;  —  long  in  vie, 
life  ;  rire,  to  laugh ; ~  short  in  %x\\,  finished  ;  ici,  here. 


SIMPLE   VOWELS.  17 

o. 

19.  0,  when  long,  has  the  sound  of  o  in  rose.  Ex.  c6t6,  side  / 
dose,  dose. 

20.  0  short  has  a  sound  between  the  o  in  roh  and  the  u  in  ruh. 
Ex.  Rome,  robe,  mode. 

21.  0  before  final  re  or  r  and  a  final  consonant  has  the  sound  of 
0  in  lord.     Ex.  aurore,  dawn  ;  alors,  then  ;  bord,  border. 

O  is  silent  in  Laon,  paon,  and  faon. 

u. 

22.  French  u  has  no  equivalent  in  English.  To  acquire  the 
sound,  place  the  lips  as  if  about  to  whistle,  leaving  the  aperture  very 
small;  keeping  the  lips  in  this  position  try  to  utter  e  as  in  me. 
Ex.  murmure,  murmur. 

U  may  be  long  as  in  mixr,  ripe  ;  or  short  as  in  Tcrtu,  virtue. 

2S.  U  is  silent  after  q  and  between  g  and  e  or  i.  Ex.  guide, 
guide';  question,  question;  quatre, jfowr;  iviiiguQ,  fatigue. 

Exceptions.  —  U  is  sounded  when  the  vowel  after  it  is  marked  with  the 
diseresis,  as  aigue,  acute ;  also  in  arguer,  to  argue ;  aiguille,  needle ;  aiguiser, 
to  sharpen ;  etc.  Qu  is  sounded  as  in  English  in  a  few  words  directly  de- 
rived from  the  Latin.  These  words  are  alike  or  nearly  alike  in  French  and 
English.  Ex.  equateur,  equation,  quadrupede,  etc.  In  equitation, 
ubiquite,  and  a  few  other  words,  u  retains  the  proper  French  sound. 


24.  Y,  initial,  or  between  two  consonants,  has  the  sound  of 
French  i.  ^  Ex.  style,  style;  y,  there. 

25.  Y  between  two  vowels  is  equivalent  to  ii,  the  first  i  forming 
a  diphthong  with  the  preceding,  the  second  with  the  following  vow- 
el. Thus,  essayer,  to  try;  royal,  royal;  appuyer,  to  lean;  are 
pronounced  as  if  written  essai-ier,  roi-ial,  appui-ier.  (See  ai  and 
ot.) 

In  pays,  country ;  paysage,  landscape  /  paysan,  peasant ;  ay  is  equivalent 
to  ai-i. 


18  PRONUNCIATION. 

COMPOUND  VOWELS. 
AI  and  EI  (ay). 

26.  Ai  and  ei  are  equivalent  sometimes  to  e,  sometimes  to  6. 
Ai  final  is  always  like  e ;  in  other  cases  it  takes  the  sound  of  e,  — - 
whenever  e  unaccented  would  have  that  sound.  (See  under  E.) 
Ex.  reine,  queen;  j'aimai,  I  loved  ;  j'avais,  I  had;  lait,  milk. 

Ay,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  equivalent  to  ai-i.     Ex.  rayer. 

Ai  in  the  present  participle  of  the  verb  faire  and  in  tlie  corresponding 
syllables  of  all  the  forms  derived  from  it,  has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in 
battery.  Ex.  faisant,  je  faisais,  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  je  defaisais,  bienfaisant, 
etc.  These  forms  were  all  written  formerly  as  they  are  pronounced  :  fesant, 
je  defesais,  etc.;  compare  the  future  of  the  same  verb,  which  is  jeferai  and 
notjuirai. 

AU. 

27.  Au  and  eau  sound  like  o  in  note.  Ex.  haut,  high;  beau, 
handsome. 

EU   (EU,  (ce.) 

28.  Eu  (oeu)  has  no  exact  equivalent  in  English ;  it  is  some- 
what like  the  u  in  fur.  It  is  longer  in  jeune,  fast,  peur,  fear, 
cceur,  heart,  than  in  jeune,  young,  feu,  fre,  and  oeuf,  egg. 

CE  has  the  sound  of  eu  before  liquid  I,  — as  in  ceil,  eye. 

Eu,  whenever  it  occurs  in  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  avoir,  to  have,  has 
the  sound  of  simple  French  u,  so  that  J'eus,  tu  eus,  il  eut,  etc.,  must  be'pro- 
nounced  as  if  written  f  us,  tu  us,  il  ut,  etc. 

ou. 

29.  Ou  has  the  sound  of  oo  in  poor.  It  is  long  in  roue,  wheel ; 
boule,  hall;  short  in  mou,  soft;  cou,  neck. 


DIPHTHONGS. 

30.    The  vowels  i,  u,  ou,  a,  preceding  a  vowel  sound,  may  co- 
alesce with  it  and  produce  a  diphthong. 

These  vowel  sounds  (i,  u,  ou,  o,)  are  the  only  ones  that  can  be  initial  in 


NASAL   VOWELS.  19 

a  true  diphthong ;  i.  e.  one  in  which  two  vowels  are  heard  but  coalesce  into 
one  syllable. 

31.  In  French  diphthongs  the  first  vowel  (^,  u,  ou,  o)  is  uttered 
quick  and  short  and  the  voice  rests  upon  the  second  vowel  element. 
The  dipthongal  combinations  are  :  i-a,  i-e  (i-ai),  —  i-o  (i-aii),  i-eu, 
i-ou,  —  o-a,  o-e,  o-i  (wa) ,  —  ou-a,  ou-ai,  oiv-e^  ou-i,  —  w-a,  u-e,  u-i. 
The  e  in  these  combinations  is  not  the  e  mute. 

By  paying  attention  to  the  above  remark  the  diphthongs  present  no  dif- 
ficulty, as  each  vowel  retains  its  proper  sound,  the  first  being  very  short ;  oi 
is  the  only  exception. 

01.  (oy.) 

32.  Oi  is  nearly  like  wa  in  water  ;  more  accurately  oi  is  equiva- 
lent to  French  a  preceded  by  a  «^;  sound.  The  a  (ah)  is  more  pro- 
longed in  voir,  to  see  ;  poire,  pear  ;  than  in  roi,  king  ;  moi,  me. 

Or,  followed  by  a  vowel,  is  equivalent  to  oi-i.     Ex,  royal. 


NASAL  VOWELS. 

33.  M  and  N,  following  a  vowel  in  the  same  syllable,  lose 
their  power  as  consonants,  and  form  with  that  vowel  a  nasal  sound 
which  is  in  every  respect  a  vowel. 

34.  The  nasals  form  four  groups,  viz.:  — 

A.  E,  AI.  O.  EXT. 

an,  am.  am,  aim.  on,  om.  eun. 

en,  em.  in,  im.  (ym.)  un,  iim. 

To  acquire  these  sounds  the  organs  of  speech  should  be  kept  in  the  same 
position  as  they  are  in  uttering  the  simple  vowel  that  is  to  be  nasalized ;  the 
back  part  of  the  tongue  being  raised  enough  to  close  the  passage  between 
the  mouth  and  the  nose.  The  same  is  done  in  English  in  such  words  as 
anger,  ink,  want ;  but  in  English  the  nasal  sound  is  not  detached  from  the 
next  consonant,  while  in  French  it  is.  No  m  or  n  consonant  sound  must 
be  heard.  To  avoid  this,  the  tip  of  the  tongue  must  be  kept  motionless 
and  the  lips  disposed  to  articulate  a  vowel.  French  a,  thus  uttered,  will 
give  an,'  —  e  (ai),  (not  i  in  machine)  gives  in  (ain) ; — ogives  on;  —  eu 
(not  French  u)  gives  un  (eun). 


20 


PRONUNCIATION. 


an 
am 
en 
em 
ian 
ien 


aim 
ein 


anm 
want 


i-an  \  patient.     (See  special  nde  for  ^e^^.) 


The  nasal  sounds  may  coalesce  with  a  previous  ^,  u,  ou,  or  o,  and 
form  a  nasal  diphthong,  to  which  all  that  has  been  said  of  the  other 
diphthongs  is  applicable. 

35,  The  following  list  presents  the  nasal  combinations. 

N.  B.  The  English  equivalents  of  the  French  nasal  vowels  are  all  neces- 
sarily imperfect,  as  no  consonant  m  or  n  must  be  heard  in  the  French  sound 
they  are  meant  to  explain. 

'  dans,  lance,  manger,  vanter. 
camp,  ambre,  ample,  lampe. 
en,  enfant,  mentir,  dent, 
temps,  empire,  membre,  trembler, 
\  is  equivalent  to  J  viande. 

m    1  fpi^'  crin,  vin,  rincer. 

im  impie,  importe,  imposer,  imbu. 

ym  1    aw  in  J  thym,  nymphe,  symphonic, 
ain  (    awger  )  sain,  bain,  saint,  crainte. 

faim,  essaim,  daim. 

sein,  peindre,  feindre,  ceinture. 
ien  is  equivalent  to  i-in,  rien.     (See  special  rule  for  ien.) 
oin  '*         "         "  w-in,  foin,  coin,  point,  moins. 
on   \  on  in  (  non,  conte,  chanson,  ronde. 
om  )    song   (nom,  comte,  plomb,  compris. 
ion  is  equivalent  to  i-on,  action,  passion,  question. 
un   1      no  equivalent      C  un,  brun,  tribun,  chacun. 
um  >-in  English,  French  •<  parfum,  humble, 
eun  )  eu  nasal.  (  k  jeun. 

The  nasal  diphthongs  ian,  ion,  are  the  simple  sounds  an,  on, 
preceded  by  a  short  French  i  ;  oin  is  in  preceded  by  a  t^  sound. 
All  other  combinations  may  be  decomposed  in  the  same  manner,  as 
ou-in,  ou-en,  etc. 

36.  Ien  final,  and  in  verbs  in  enir,  is  equivalent  to  i-in  or  yin, 
(yan  in  yankee).     Ex.  chien,  Men,  viendrai,  tiendront ;  in  other 

•cases,  when  followed  by  a  consonant  (not  n) ,  it  is  equivalent  to  i-an 
(yan)  nasal.  Ex.  science,  audience,  patient,  and  all  words  in 
ient. 


CONSONANTS.  21 

Remark.  In  compound  words,  as  hientot,  chiendent,  ten  retains  the  sound 
of  the  primitive  words  hien,  chien. 

37.  M  and  N  are  not  nasal  when  double  or  wlien  between  two 
vowels  or  a  vowel  and  a  silent  h.  Ex.  annee,  innocent,  homme, 
line,  inoui,  inutile,  inhumain. 

,    Exceptions.   The  nasal  sound  is  heard  in  ennui  and  its  derivatives ;  in 
emmener  and  all  words  beginning  in  emm  ;  in  enivrer  and  enorgiieillir. 

38.  Ent  in  the  third  person  plural  of  verbs  is  silent.  Ex.  ils 
aiment,  they  love ;  ils  unirent,  etc.  In  other  cases  ent  final  is 
equivalent  to  nasal  an.  Ex.  content,  contented  ;  president,  'presi- 
dent ;  —  while  in  the  verbs,  ils  content,  they  relate,  ils  president, 
they  preside,  ent  is  silent. 

39.  En  and  em  in  a  few  foreign  names  have  the  sound  of  in. 
Ex.  Mentor,  Benjamin,  Memphis.  Em  final,  and  sometimes  am 
and  im  in  foreign  proper  names,  are  not  nasal.  Ex.  Jerusalem, 
Abraham,  Selim.  Um  in  words  that  still  preserve  their  Latin  form 
is  not  nasal,  u  having  the  sound  of  o.  Ex.  album,  triumvir.  In 
many  other  foreign  words  m  and  n  final  are  not  nasal.  'EiX.Edeny 
Hymen,  amen,  etc. 

CONSONANTS.  * 

GENERAL     RULES. 

40.  Final  consonants  are  silent  except  c,  f,  I,  r.  Ex.  etait, 
apres,  croix,  pronounced  as  if  written  etai,  apre,  croi. 

Remark.  When  several  consonants  occur  at  the  end  of  a  word  with  no 
vowel  after  them,  they  are  all  silent,  except  c,  f,  I,  r.  Ex.  est,faits,  ils, 
dards,  pronounced  as  if  written  e,fai,  il,  dar. 

Exceptions.  In  foreign  proper  names  the  final  consonant  is  generally 
sounded.    Ex.  Brutus,  Job. 

41.  A  double  consonant  is  pronounced  as  one  letter.  Ex.  ahhe, 
frapper,  pronounced  as  if  written  a-he,  fra-per. 

42.  B,  c,  d,  f,  1,  m,  n,  p,  (ph,)  q,  v,  and  z  are  pronounced  as 
in  English. 


22  PRONUNCIATION. 

Exceptions  to  the  above  general  rules  wril  be  given  under  the  various  let- 
ters. 

43.  In  English,  consonants  in  the  middle  or  at  the  beginning  of 
words  are  often  silent,  as  p  and  I  in  psalm  ;  g  in  phlegm  ;  I  in  calm. 
In  French,  consonants  in  a  like  position  retain  their  proper  sound. 
Thus  in  psaume,  fiegme,  calme,  the  p,  the  g,  and  the  I  are  fully 
sounded. 

SPECIAL     RULES. 

B  final  is  pronounced  in  radouh,  rumb. 

C  has  the  sound  of  g  in  second  and  its  derivatives. 

44.  C  is  pronounced  as  c  in  facade.     Ex.  gargon,  legon. 

45.  Ch  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  machine.     Ex.  chaise,  chercher. 

Ch  in  many  words  derived  from  the  Greek  and  in  several  proper  names 
has  the  sound  of  k.  Ex.  chaos,  cJioeur,  Michel-Ange.  But  ch  has  the  sound 
of  sh  in  Achille,  patriarche,  archeveque.     It  is  silent  in  almanach. 

Cc  before  e,  i,  and  y  is  equivalent  to  h-s-     Ex.  acces,  accident. 

C  final  is  silent  after  n.  Ex.  banc.  It  is  silent  in  accroc,  broc,  clerc, 
eslomac,  lacs,  tabac. 

1)  final  is  heard  in  sud. 

Dd.  Two  d's  are  heard  v/hen  ad  precedes  a  syllable  beginning  with  a  d. 
Ex.  addition.  * 

-  F  final  is  silent  in  clef,  chef-cToeuvre,  bomfs,  ceufs ;  though  sounded  in  chef, 
baiuf,  mif.  F  is  silent  in  neuf,  nine,  only  when  the  next  word  begins  with  a 
consonant,  before  a  vowel  it  has  the  sound  of  u.     Ex.  neuf  homines. 

G  before  a,  o,  u,  sounds  like  g  in  game.    Ex.  gargon. 

46.  G  before  e,  i,  and  y,  sounds  like  s  in  pleasure.  Ex.  genre, 
gihet,  general. 

47.  Gn  has  a  liquid  sound  something  like  ni  in  union.  Ex. 
agneau,  magnijique.  This  sound  is  produced  with  the  body,  not 
with  the  tip  of  the  tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth. 

G  is  hard  before  n  at  the  beginning  of  a  word.  Ex.  gnomon  ;  also  in  stag- 
nant, inexpugnable,  and  in  several  words  in  eg  and  ig  that  seldom  occur. 

Gg.  Two  g's  are  heard  in  suggerer :  the  first  hard,  the  last  like  s  in 
pleasure. 

G  final  is  sounded  in  joug. 


CONSONANTS. 


23 


48.  H  is  said  to  be  mute  or  aspirate.  When  mute  it  is'  entirely 
disregarded  in  pronunciation,  and  the  vowel  that  comes  after  it  is 
pronounced  with  the  preceding  consonant,  or  causes  the  preceding 
vowel  to  be  elided  as  if  no  letter  intervened.  Ex.  Vhomme,  deux 
habits. 

49.  When  h  is  aspirated  no  real  aspiration  i^  heard  as  in  Eng- 
lish ;  but  the  vowel  that  comes  after  it  is  pronounced  strongly.  H 
aspirate  prevents  linking  and  elision.     Ex.  le  heros,  deux  heros. 

50.  There  are  about  300  words  beginning  with  h  aspirate. 
These  comprise  many  marine  terms,  foreign  words,  and  the  words  in 
the  following  list,  and  their  derivatives. 

Remark .  The  derivatives  of  h&os — heroine,  Mroique,  heroism, — are  not  as- 
pirated. But  hahlear,haine,  hausser,  etc.,  follow  the  anology  of"  their  prim- 
itives habler,  hair,  haut,  which  alone  are  given  in  the  list. 


habler 

hameau 

hargneux 

hennir 

hache 

hanche 

haricot 

Henri 

hagard 

hangar 

haridelle 

heraut 

haie 

hanneton 

hamais 

herisson 

haillons 

hanter 

harpe 

herisser 

hair 

harangue 

harpie 

heron 

haire 

haras 

hasard 

heros 

hale 

harasser 

hate 

herse 

halle 

harceler 

haut 

heurter 

hallebarde 

hardes 

have 

hibou 

hallier 

hardi 

havre 

hideux 

halte 

hareng 

havresac 

hierarchie 

homard 

houblon 

houx 

huraer 

honte 

houille 

huche 

huppe 

horde 

houlette 

huee 

hure 

hers 

houppe 

huguenot 

hurler 

hotte 

housse 

huit 

hussard 

51.  J  is  pronounced  like  s  in  pleasure;  it  is  never  silent  nor 
double.     Ex.  dejd,  joujou. 

L  when  not  liquid  sounds  as  in  English.     Ex.  livre. 

52.  Ill  not  initial,  and  il  final,  have  a  liquid  sound  somewhat  like 
//  in  William,  brilliant.     This  sound,  still  prevalent  in  the  southern 


24  PRONUNCIATION. 

and  central  parts  of  France,  has  been  softened  down  to  nearly  a  y 
in  the  north  and  especially  in  Paris,  so  that  there,  ill  in  taiUeur  is 
scarcely  more  audible  than  i  in  pat  en.     l^x.  JUle,  famille,  gentille, 

53.  The  vowel  that  precedes  liquid  ill  or  il,  retains  its  proper 
sound  and  does  not  coalesce  with  the  i  ;  ue  and  ce  are  then  equivalent 
to  eu.     Ex.  muraille,  patrouille,  orgueil,  oeil. 

54.  Ill  is  not  liquid,  that  is,  I  retains  its  proper  sound, in  words 
that  begin  with  il.  Ex.  illustre,  illisihle  ;  also  in  mille,  ville,  tran- 
quille,  pupiUe,  Achille,  osciller,  vaciller,  etc. 

II  is  not  liquid  in  mil,  Jil,  civil,  profiL 

L  final  is  silent  in  haril,  chenil,  coutU,  four  nil,  fusil,  gril,gentil,  sourcil,per- 
sil,  outil.  It  is  also  silent  in  soul,  pouls,  fils,  and  in  the  terminations  auld, 
ault,  ould,  oult. 

M  and  N,  when  not  nasal,  are  pronounced  as  in  English.    Ex.  manier. 

M  is  silent  in  damner,  automne,  and  their  derivatives. 

P  is  silent  in  bapteme,  sept,  compte,  dompter,  exempter,  sculpter. 

Q  is  always  followed  by  ic  except  in  coq  and  cinq,  when  it  sounds  like  k. 
CEor  qu  see  u,  23.^ 

55.  R  is  rolled,  but  with  less  force  at  the  end  than  at  the  begin- 
ning of  a  syllable.  Ex.  grand,  sceur  ;  rr  and  rh  are  generally  pro- 
nounced with  more  force  than  r  alone.     Ex.  arriver,  rhume. 

In  the  future  and  conditional  of  the  verbs  acquerir,  to  acquire,  courir,  to 
run,  mourir,  to  die,  the  two  r's  must  be  distinctly  heard  to  distinguish 
them  from  other  forms  that  have  but  one  r.  Thus  nous  courrons,  vous 
acquerrez,  ils  mourraient,  must  not  be  pronounced  like  nous  courons,  vous 
acqu^rez,  ilts  mouraient. 

R  final  is  generally  pronounced,  but  final  er  is  equivalent  to  ^.  Ex. 
parler,  aimer.  In  monosyllables  in  er  the  r  is  sounded,  Ex.j^r,  cher,  mer. 
It  is  also  sounded  in  amer,  enfer,hier,  hiver,  and  in  a  few  words  of  foreign 
origin,  as  magister,  etc.     R  is  silent  in  monsieur. 

56.  S  is  generally  sounded  as  in  English ;  but  in  words  ending 
isme,  asme,  etc.,  it  has  not  the  sound  of  z.    Ex.  prisme,  miasme. 

-    57.    S  between  two  vowels  has  the  sound  of  z.     Ex.  rose,  base^ 
vase. 
S  has  also  the  sound  of  z  in  words  compounded  with  the  Latin  proposi- 


CONSONANTS.  25 

tion  trans,  followed  by  a  vowel.  Ex.  transitif,  transition.  It  has  the  samo 
sound  before  h,  d,  v,  and  after  /.     Ex.  presijhtere,  svelte,  balsamique. 

As  s  initial  has  the  hissing  sound  as  in  English,  —  when  a  word  beginning 
with  an  s  takes  a  prefix,  the  s,  though  between  two  vowels,  retains  its  hiss- 
ing sound.  Ex.  vraisemhlable  ("compounded  of  vrai  and  semblable),  mono- 
syUahe.  * 

Sck  is  generally  pronounced  like  sh.  Ex.  schisme.  It  has  the  sound  of 
st  in  a  few  words. 

S  final  is  sounded  in  words  that  have  been  taken  from  Greek  and  Latin 
without  any  change  of  orthography.  Ex.  atlas,  blocus,  gratis,  etc.  S  is 
also  sounded  in  cens,  en-sus,  mats,  moeurs,  vis,  Bheims,Jils,  sens  (^in  some  of 
its  meanings),  lis  (not  \n  fleur-de-lis) ,  tons  (when  used  without  a  noun). 

T  is  generally  sounded  as  in  English. 

58.  In  words  corresponding  in  form  to  those  in  which  t  has  in 
English  an  sh  sound,  it  has  in  French  the  sound  of  ss.  This  occurs 
in  tial,  tiehtier,  tion,  not  initial  or  preceded  by  x  or  s.  Ex.  partial, 
essentiel,  initier,  nation.  But  bestial,  bastion,  mixtion,  have  the 
pure  t  sortnd. 

59.  T  has  also  the  sound  of  s  in  words  in  tie,  that  have  in  Eng- 
lish cy,  or  tia,  in  which  t  sounds  like  sh.  Ex.  prophetie,  democra- 
tie,  minvtie,  initier,  —  also  in  balbutier.  In  other  words  in  tie 
and  tier,  t  retains  the  proper  sound.     Ex.  moitie,  metier. 

Th  is  never  pronounced  as  in  English,  but  always  like  t  alone,  as  paih€- 
tique. 

T  final  is  heard  in  brut,  chut,  correct,  dot,  direct,  deficit,  fat,  exact,  net,  sus- 
pect, strict.  In  sept  and  huit,  t  is  silent  only  when  they  precede  a  noun  com- 
mencing with  a  consonant.  Ex.  huit  gargons.  In  Christ,  s  and  t  are  both 
pronounced;  but  in  Jesus-Christ  they  are  both  silent.  In  vi7igt,  tis  pro- 
nounced only  in  the  series  between  20  and  30.     Ex.  vingt-cinq. 

X  has  the  sound  oi  gs  in  words  beginning  with  x  ox  ex  before  a  vowel  or 
an  h  mute.     Ex.  Xavier,  exil,  exhumer. 

In  a  few  proper  names  x  has  the  sound  of  ss.  Ex.  Bruxelles,  Auxerre;  it 
has  also  this  sound  in  soixante, —  and  in  six  and  dix  when  standing  alone. 
In  dix-huit  and  dix-neuf,  x  sounds  like  z. 

X  in  other  cases  has  the  sound  of  ^s.    Ex.  luxe,  Aix-la-Chapdle. 

Z  is  pronounced  in  gaz.  When  final  in  proper  names  it  has  the 
sound  of  s.     Ex.  Metz,  Suez,  etc. 


26  PRONUNCIATION. 


LINKING  OF  FINAL   CONSONANTS. 

60.  The  final  consonant  of  a  word,  closely  connected  in  senses 
witli  the  next  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h  must  general- 
ly be  carried  over.  "  In  that  case  s  and  x  are  sounded  like  z  ;  d  like 
t,  and  g  (seldom  linked)  like  h.  Ex.  un  grand  homme,  vous  avez, 
Us  ont,  aux  armes. 

No  general  rule  can  be  given  embracing  all  the  cases  in  which  a  final  con- 
sonant must  be  thus  linked.  In  poetry  and  in  impressive  reading,  the  link- 
ing must  be  made  in  many  cases  where  it  would  sound  unnatural  and  af- 
fected in  daily  conversation.  It  may  be  stated  in  general  terms  that  the 
more  closely  connected  the  words  are  in  sense,  the  more  imperative  it  is  to 
link  them  together  in  pronunciation.  Certain  words,  such  as  et,  riz,  clef, 
plomb,  hup,  etc.,  can  never  be  linked.  Words  ending  in  a  nasal  sound  are 
seldom  linked,  except  short  words  that  recur  frequently,  such  as  on,  en,  un, 
mon,  ton,  son,  hien,  hon,  etc.  When  a  nasal  n  is  linked,  either  the  nasal 
sound  is  heard  and  an  additional  n  pronounced  before  the  next  vowel,  or 
the  nasal  is  dropped  altogether,  thus  un  homme,  on  a,  as  if  written  un 
nhomme,  on  na ;  or  u-nhomme,  o-na.  In  rapid  speech  the  nasal  sound  almost 
always  disappears ;  many  omit  it  altogether.  In  some  combinations,  such 
as  hon  homme,  hien  heureux,  it  is  never  heard.  ^- 


OBSERVATIONS   ON  ^  MUTE. 

We  have  seen  that  e  unaccented  when  final  is  mute,  and  that  in  the  words 
ce,  de,  je,  le,  me,  ne,  que,  se  and  te,  and  when  it  terminates  a  syllable  not 
final,  it  has  the  indistinct  sound  of  e  in  battery.  In  rapid  utterance,  however, 
even  this  feeble  sound  is  not  heard  whenever  the  articulation  connected  with  it 
can  he  distinctly  uttered  without  it. 

Hence  the  following  rule  :  — 
^  61 .    E  unaccented  ending  a  syllable  is  silent  whenever  the  con- 
sonant before  it  can  be  pronounced  either  with  a  vowel  that  precedes 
or  one  that  comes  after  it  in  the  next  syllable  or  word. 

Practice  and  oral  teaching  only  can  make  this  law  of  euphony  perfectly 
clear.  In  the  following  examples  the  e*s  printed  in  italics  are  not  pro- 
nounced. 


27 


Yoilk  \e  chemin  de  fer. 

Je  le  sais. 

Je  ne  te  le  donne  pas. 

Beaucoup  de  monde. 

Je  ne  me  le  propose  pas. 

Etre  attentif. 

Noble  ardeur. 


There  is  the  railway. 

I  know  it. 

I  do  not  give  it  to  thee. 

Many  persons. 

I  do  not  propose  it  to  myself. 

To  be  attentive. 

Noble  ardor. 


In  the  last  two  examples  the  r  and  I  that  precede  the  e  are  virtually  car- 
ried over  to  the  next  word  as  if  no  e  intervened,  and  tr  and  bl  were  final. 

Note.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  pronounce  tre,  dre,  hie,  pie,  a-e,  etc.,  as 
they  are  in  English,  that  is  as  ter,  der,  hd,  pd,  etc.,  in  order,  temple,  noble. 
In  French  the  I  and  r  must  not  be  separated  by  any  intervening  sound  from 
the  consonant  that  precedes.    Ex.  ordre,  aimabk,  quatre,  nacre,  peuple. 


I.    PREMIERE    LE9ON, 


THE    ARTICLE. 


1.  In  the  French  language  there  are  only  two  genders,  viz., 
the  masculine  and  the  feminine.  This  distinction  applies  also  to 
inanimate  objects,  which  are  either  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  The  definite  article  has  a  peculiar  form  for  each  gender :  le 
before  a  masculine,  la  before  a  feminine  substantive ;  les  is  the  plu- 
ral of  both  genders.     Ex. :  — 

Masc.  Le  roi,  the  king.  Fern.  La  reine,  the  queen. 

le  pere,  the  father.  la  mere,  the  mother. 

3.  Le  and  la  in  the  singular  lose  their  vowels  and  take  the  apos- 
trophe (/')  before  a  noun  beginning  either  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute. 
Ex.  :  — 

Masc.  Uami,  the  friend.  Fern.  L'amie,  the  (female)  friend. 

I'homme,  the  man.  Vhistoire,  (the)  history. 

4.  The  indefinite  article,  answering  to  the  English  a  or  an,  is 
un  for  the  masculine ;  une  for  the  feminine.     Ex.  : 

Masc.  Un  roi,  a  king.  Fern.  Une  reine,  a  queen. 

un  pere,  a  father.  une  mere,  a  mother. 

un  ami,  a  friend.  une  amie,  a  (female)  friend. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  livre,  the  book.  un  chapeau,  a  hat,  bonnet. 

le  pain,  the  bread.  la  rose,  the  rose. 

le  cheval,  the  horse.  lajleur,  the  flower. 

le  chien,  the  dog.  la  plume,  the  pen,  feather. 

I'oncle,  the  uncle.  la  tante,  the  aunt. 

V enfant,  the  child.  une  poire,  a  pear. 

Vor,  the  gold.  une  pomme,  an  apple. 

unjardin,  a  garden.  et,  and. 

28 


THE   AETICLE.  29 

S.  Tai,  I  have.  -^t-je,  have  1 1 

tu  as,  thou  hast.  as-tu,  hast  thou  ? 

e7  a,  he  has.  a-^^7,  has  he  ? 

e//e  a,  she  has.  a-t-elle,  has  she  1 

PI.  nous  avons,  we  have.  avons-nous,  have  we  ? 

170MS  avez,  you  have.  avez-vous,  have  youl 

27s  onf,  they  have.  ont-ils,  have  they  ? 

eZ/es  ont,  they  (fcm)  have.  ont-elles,  have  they  ? 

Remark  1 .  J*ai  is  for  Je  ai.  The  e  of  /e,  I,  is  elided  when  the  verb 
begins  with  a  vowel  or  silent  h. 

2.  Observe  the  hyphen  by  which  the  verb  and  pronoun  are  always  joined 
in  interrogations. 

3.  The  t  in  a4-il,  a-t-elle,  is  merely  euphonic.  It  is  inserted  to  prevent 
the  hiatus  between  two  vowel  sounds,  when  the  third  person  singular  of  a 
verb  ends  in  a  vowel,  and  is  followed  by  il,  die,  on. 

4.  The  use  of  the  2d  person  singular  is  much  more  frequent  in  Trench 
than  in  English.  It  generally  denotes  familiarity  and  intimacy.  In  ad- 
dressing inferiors,  it  denotes  authority ;  in  poetry,  its  use  is  the  same  as  in 
English. 

5.  When,  in  a  question  not  beginning  with  an  interrogative  pronoun  or 
an  adverb,  the  subject  is  expressed  by  a  substantive,  it  must  begin  the  sen- 
tence, and  the  pronoun  still  be  put  after  the  verb.  Ex. :  — U enfant  a-t-il  f 
has  the  child  ?    La  mere  a-t-elle  ?  has  the  mother  ? 

READING  EXERCISE    1. 

J'ai  le  livre.  Tu  as  un  livre.  J'ai  la  rose.  As-tu  la  rose  ? 
II  a  le  cheval.  EUe  a  le  pain.  Le  perea  un  cheval.  La  mere  a 
un  jardin.  L'enfant  a  une  poire.  Nous  avons  un  chien.  Avez- 
vous  un  chapeau  ?  lis  ont  un  oncle  et  une  tante.  Elles  ont  une 
tante.  L'enfant  a-t-il  une  plume  ?  La  mere  a-t-elle  la  fleur  ?  Le 
roi  a-t-il  un  cheval  ?  II  a  le  cheval.  Les  amis  (j>lu.)  ont  les  livres. 
Les  enfants  ont  les  plumes. 

THEME    1. 

1.  I  have  the  horse.  2.  I  have  a  friend.  8.  Thou  hast  the  book. 
4.  He  has  a  dog.  5.  She  has  the  bonnet.  6.  The  father  has  a 
garden.     7.  The  mother  has  the  rose.     8.  The  king  has  the  gold. 


30 


II.  DEUXIEME  LEpON. 


9.  The  uncle  has  a  friend.  10.  "VVe  have  the  bread.  11.  You 
have  a  pear.  12.  They  (w2a5c.)  have  an  apple.  13.  Thej  (fern.) 
have  a  flower.  14.  Has  the  friend  a  horse  ?  15.  The  friend  has 
a  horse  and  a  dog. 


CONVEESATION. 


Ai-je  la  rose  ? 

As-tu  le  pain  ? 

A-t-ellelafleur? 

L 'enfant  a-t-il  le  livre  ? 

Avez-vous  un  cheval  ? 

L 'enfant  a-t-il  une  poire  ? 


Yous  avez  la  rose. 

J'ai  le  pain. 

Elle  a  la  fleur. 

II  a  le  livre. 

Nous  avons  un  cheval  et  un  chien. 

L'enfant  a  une  poire  et  une  pomme. 


II.    DEUXIEME    LE9ON. 


FORMATION  OF   THE   PLURAL. 

1.  General  Rule.     The  plural  is  formed  in  French  as  in  Eng- 
lish, by  the  addition  of  an  s  to  the  singular.     Ex. :  — 


Le  roi, 

Plur.  les  rois. 

la  pomme, 

Plur.  les  pommes. 

le  livre, 

les  livres. 

Venfant, 

les  enfants. 

riiomme, 

les  hommes. 

Vami, 

les  amis. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  s,  x,  z,  in  the  singular,  remain  unchanged. 
Lejils,  the  son.  Plur.  les  Jils,  the  sons. 


la  noix,  the  walnut, 
le  nez,  the  nose. 


les  noix,  the  walnuts. 
les  nez,  the  noses. 


3.  Words  ending  in  au,  eu,  form  their  plural  by  adding  x  instead 
of  s,  as :  — 

Le  chapeau,  the  hat  (yr  bonnet.      Plur.  les  chapeaux. 
le  feu,  the  fire.  les  feux. 

le  lieu,  the  place.  les  lieux. 


FORMATION   OP  THE  PLUEAL'.  31 

Bemakk.     Seven  nouns  in  ow  take  x  in  tlie  plural,  viz. : 
Le  cTiou,  the  cabbage.  le  pou,  the  louse. 

le  bijou,  the  jewel.  le  genou,  the  knee. 

le  caillou,  the  pebble.  le  joujou,  the  plaything. 

le  hibou,  the  owl. 

Plural :  les  choux,  les  bijoux,  les  cailloux,  etc. 

The  others  ending  in  ou  follow  the  general  rule  and  take  s  in  the  plural, 
as  :  le  cloii,  the  nail ;  plur.  les  clous ;  le  trou,  the  hole ;  plur.  les.  trous,  etc. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  al,  ail,  change  these  terminations  into  aux, 
to  form  the  plural,  as  : 

Le  cheval,  the  horse.  Plur.  Les  chevaux. 

Vanimal,  the  animal.  les  animaux. 

le  travail,  the  work.  les  travaux. 

Kemabk.  This  rule,  however,  has  a  few  exceptions,  which  follow  the 
general  rule,  simply  taking  s  in  the  plural,  as  :  le  bal,  the  ball ;  le  camaval, 
the  carnival ;  le  portail,  the  doorway ;  le  gouvernail,  the  helm  ;  V^ventail,  the 
fan,  etc.    Plur.  les  bals,  les  camavals,  etc. 

5.  The  following  words  form  their  plural  irregularly.  (The  first 
three  have  also  a  regular  plural.     See  Part  ii,  L.  ii.) 

Le  del,  heaven.  Plur.  Les  deux,  heavens. 
VcbH,  the  eye.  les  yeux,  the  eyes. 

I'aJieul,  the  great-grandfather.  les  aieux,  the  ancestors.. 

le  b€tail,  the  cattle.  les  bestiaux,  the  cattle. 


VOCABULARY. 

Le  canif,  the  penknife.  lejeu,  the  play,  game. 

lefrere,  the  brother.  la  souris,  the  mouse. 

la  soeur,  the  sister.  le  mm,  the  name. 

la  porte,  the  door,  gate.  le  chameau,  the  camel. 

la  maison,  the  house.  le  couteau,  the  knife. 

le  chateau,  the  castle.  mon,  ma,  my. 

le  paJais,  the  palace.  vu,  seen,    ou,  or. 

un  tableau,  a  picture.  deux,  two.     trois,  three. 

le  chat,  the  cat.  quatre,  four,     cinq,  five. 

le  g€n€ral,  the  general.  le  bras,  the  arm. 
la  mix,  the  walnut. 


32  II.  DEUXIEME  LECON. 

Void,  here  is,  this  is,  here  are,  these  are. 

Voila,  there  is,  that  is,  there  are,  those  are. 

Void  is  compounded  of  the  imperative  of  voir,  to  see,  and  id,  here.  It 
means  therefore  literally,  see  here.  Voila  means  see  there.  They  both  gov- 
ern the  objective  case.    Ex.  me  void,  here  am  I ;  literally,  Behold  me  here. 

S.  J^avais,  I  had.  Avais-je,  had  II 

tu  avais,  thou  hadst.  avais-tu,  hadst  thou  ? 

il  avait,  he  had.  avait-il,  had  he  ? 

die  avait,  she  had.  avait-dle,  had  she  ? 

PI.  nous  avians,  we  had.  avions-nous,  had  we  1 

vous  aviez,  you  had.  aviez-vous,  had  you  ? 

lis  avaient,  they  had.  avaient-ils,  had  they? 

elles  avaient,  they  had.  avaient-elles,  had  they? 

HEADING  EXERCISE  2. 

Nous  avwis  Tin  canif.  Yous  aviez  deux  canifs.  Mon  frere  a  les 
couteaux.  La  maison  a  deux  portes.  Avais-je  les  noix  ?  Aviez- 
vous  les  joujoux  ?  Oui,  nous  avions  les  joujoux.  Le  roi  avait  trois 
chateaux.  La  reine  a  les  bijoux.  Voici  quatre  souris.  Les  enfants 
avaient  trois  pommes.  Mon  oncle  avait  deux  chevaux.  Ma  tante 
a  cinq  tableaux.  Les  cbameaux  ont  une  bosse  {hump).  Ma  mere 
a  deux  soeurs  et  trois  freres. 


THEME  2. 

1.  I  have  three  brothers.  2.  (The)*  man  has  two  arms.  3.  I 
had  four  horses.  4.  Hadst  thou  the  flowers?  5.  I  had  the  roses. 
6.  There  are  the  apples,  the  pears,  and  the  walnuts.  7.  There  are 
also  the  games  and  the  pictures.  8.  Have  you  seen  the  houses,  the 
castles,  and  the  gardens?  9.  My  uncle  has  four  pictures.  10.  I 
have  seen  five  horses  and  two  camels.  11.  The  children  have  three 
mice.     12.  Have   you   seen   the   games   of  the    {des)    children? 

*  In  the  Themes,  words  placed  in  parentheses  ( — )  must  be  expressed  in 
French,  though  redundant  in  English.  English  words  printed  in  italics 
must  be  omitted  in  French. 


CASE. 


33 


13.  Has  my  aunt  three  dogs  or  three  cats?  14.  She  has  three  dogs 
and  two  cats.  15.  The  eye  is  blue  (est  hleu).  16.  I  have  two 
eyes.     17.  My  brother  has  two  knives,  and  I  have  two  penknives. 


CONVERSATION. 


Avez-vous  tin  canif  ? 
Avais-je  les  couteaux  ? 
As-tu  vu  les  chameaux  1 

Avez-vous  aussi  vu  les  cha- 
teaux? 

Avez-vous  les  bijoux  ? 

Les  enfants  ont  ils  les  habits 
(coats)  ou  les  chapeaux? 

Avaient-ils  vu  les  feux  ? 

Avez-vous  les  tableaux  ? 

Mon  pere  art-il  un  chat  ? 

Combien  de  (how  many)  freres 
avez-vous  ? 

Combien  de  soeurs  avez-vous  ? 

Avez-vous  vu  les  amis  ? 


J'ai  deux  canifs. 

Vous  aviez  les  couteaux. 

J'ai  vu  les  chameaux  et  les  che- 

vaux. 
J'ai  vu  les  chateaux    et  les  pa- 

lais. 
Ma  tante  a  les  bijoux. 
Les  enfants  ont  les  habits  et  les 

chapeaux. 
Ils  avaient  vu  les  feux. 
Je  n'ai  pas  (not)  les  tableaux. 
II  a  un  chat  et  un  chien. 
J'ai  trois  freres. 

J'ai  deux  soeurs. 

Nous  n'avons  pas  vu  les  amis. 


III.    TROISIEMB    LE9ON 


CASE  — ^  — i)^. 

1.  French  nouns  have  no  variation  of  termination  to  indicate 
case ;  the  nominative  and  objective  are,  as  in  English,  ahke  in  form, 
and  the  possessive  is  expressed  by  the  preposition  de  (of)  and  its 
object. 

2.  The  possessor  must,  in  French,  follow  the  object  possessed. 


.34  III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

and  be  preceded  by  the  article,  e.  g.  The  king's  throne,  must  be 
transposed  as  if  it  were,  the  throne  of  the  king ;  Le  trone  du  roi. 

3.  The  preposition  de  (of,  from,)  appears  either  unchanged  or 
contracted  with  the  article.  A  contraction  takes  place  whenever  de 
occurs  before  the  article  le  or  les  ;  in  the  first  case,  it  takes  the  form 
du  (singular) ,  in  the  second  des  (plural) .     Ex. 

S.  du  roi  (instead  of  c?e  le  roi,)  of  the  king,  or  the.king's. 
dupere  (instead  of  Je  lepere,)  of  the  father,  or  the  father's. 

PI.  des  rois  (instead  of  de  les  rois,)  of  the  kings,  or  the  kings'. 
des  meres  (instead  of  de  les  meres,)  of  the  mothers. 

4.  Before  la  and  V,  de  remains  unaltered,  as  :  — 

de  la  mere,  of  the  mother,  or  the  mother's. 
de  Vami,  of  the  friend,  the  friend's. 
de  Vhomme,  of  (the)  man,  the  man's. 

5.  Before  the  indefinite  article  un,  une,  an  apostrophe  is  put  in- 
stead of  the  e  oi  de,  as  :  — 

d'un  roi,  of  a  king.  d*une  reine,  of  a  queen. 

d'un  ami,  of  a  friend.  d'une  amie,  of  a  female  friend. 

6.  Before  le,  the  preposition  k  (to)  is  contracted  with  this  article 
to  au  ;  and  before  les  into  aux  ;  as :  — 

au  (a  le)  roi,  to  the  king.  aux  (a  les)  rois,  to  the  kings. 

au      "     frere,  to  the  brother,        aux      "     freres,  to  the  brothers. 

7.  The  definite  article  must  be  used  in  French  before  all  nouna 
used  in  a  general  sense  or  denoting  a  whole  species  of  objects,  though 
in  English  the  article  is  not  employed  j  as  :  — 

Man,  Vhomme,  nature,  la  nature. 

life,  la  vie.  summer,  V  €t€. 

fortune,  la  fortune.  dinner,  le  diner. 

Hence,  of  man,  of  life,  of  fortune,  etc.,  are  to  be  translated  in  French 
de  Vhomme,  de  la  vie,  de  la  fortune,  etc. ;  to  man,  to  life,  to  nature,  etc.,  a 
Vhomme,  a  la  vie,  a  la  nature. 

8.  In  French  the  article  is  to  be  repeated  before  each  substantive 
of  a  sentence,  as  :  — 


case/  *35 

The  salt,  pepper  and  vinegar,  —  Je  sd,  lepoivreet  le  vinaigre. 

The  men,  women  and  children,  — les  hommes,  lesfemmes  et  les  enfants. 

VOCABULARY. 

Dieu,  God.  lafenetre,  the  window. 

le  cre'ateur,  the  creator.  le  cousin,  the  cousin. 

le  monde,  the  world.  la  cousine,  the  cousin,  f. 

I'ennemi,  the  enemy.  laJiUe,  the  daughter. 

le  sommeil,  sleep.  la  ville,  the  town. 

Vimage,  f.  the  image.  je  donne,  I  give. 

la  mort,  death.  le  voisin,  the  neighbor. 

lafeuiUe,  the  leaf.  est,  is.  (belongs)     sont,  are. 

a  qui,  to  whom,  whose "?  out,  yes.     non,  no. 

Voiseau,  the  bird.  Monsieur,  Sir. 

rofre,  your.  Madame,  Madam. 

I'arbre,  the  tree.  Mademoiselle,  Miss. 


BEADING  EXERCISE  3. 

Le  pere  de  I'enfant.  La  mere  des  enfants.  La  porte  de  la  mai- 
son.  Les  portes  des  maisons.  Les  fenetres  du  palais.  Le  chat 
est  un  animal.  Les  chats  sont  les  ennemis  des  souris.  Le  sommeil 
est  I'image  de  la  mort.  Le  chateau  est  au  roi  et  a  la  reine.  Je 
donne  la  plume  h  I'enfant.  Je  donne  le  jeu  aux  enfants.  Le  jar- 
din  est  aux  freres  et  aux  soeurs.  Les  images  des  rois.  Les  feuilles 
des  arbres.     Les  fenetres  de  la  maison. 

THEME  3. 

1.  The  father  of  the  son.  2.  The  mother  of  the  daughter. 
3.  The  mother  of  the  children.  4.  The  door  of  the  house.  5.  The 
gates  of  the  town.  6.  The  houses  of  the  towns.  7.  The  windows 
of  the  houses.  8.  God  is  the  creator  of  the  world.  9.  The  dog  is 
the  enemy  of  the  cat.  10.  I  give  the  book  to  the  brother.  11.  I 
give  the  coats  to  the  brothers  and  sisters.  12.  The  dog  is  the  friend 
of  man.  13.  The  feathers  of  the  birds.  14.  My  cousin's  bonnet. 
15.  My  cousins'  bonnets  (the  bonnets  of  my  cousins).  16.  Sleep 
is  the  brother  of  death.     17.  Of  the  trees  of  the  garden.     18.  The 


36 


IV.      QUATillEME    LEgON. 


eyes  of  tlie  horses  are  large  {grands).  19.  The  friend's  name, 
20.  The  windows  of  the  castle.  21.  The  neighbor's  house  and 
garden.  22.  I  give  the  roses  to  the  sister  of  the  general.  23.  Give 
(donnez)  the  pen  to  the  father. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  le  livre  du  cousin  ?  Tu  as  le  livre  du  cousin. 


As-tu  I'image  de  la  tante  ? 
A-t-il  vu  le  jardui  du  roi  ? 
Les  enfants  ont-ils  les  jeux  ? 


Oui    M  — *  j'ai   I'image   de   la 

tante. 
Non  M  —  il  a  yu  le   chateau  du 

roi. 
Oui    M —    les    enfants   ont  les 

jeux. 

Qui  (who)  a  les  ciseaux  (scis-    Voici  les  ciseaux  de  votre  soeur. 
sors)  de  ma  soeur? 

Elles  sont  a  I'enfant. 
EUes  sont  aux  enfants  du  voisin. 
II  est  au  roi  et  a  la  reine. 
Voila  le  chien  de  I'oncle. 


A  qui  sont  les  noix  ? 
A  qui  sont  les  poires  ? 
A  qui  est  ce  (this)  jardin  ? 
Avez-vous  vu  le  chien  de  I'on- 
cle? 
A  qui  sontces  (these)  roses  ? 


Elles  sont  a  ma  cousine. 


IV.     QUATRIEME    LE9ON. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

1.    The  following  list  includes  the  French  prepositions  of  most 
frequent  occurrence. 

d,  to,  at,  in.  dans,  in,  into.  par,  through,  by 

apres,  after.  de,  of,  from.  parmi,  among. 


*  This  M — ,  which  will  always  be  inserted  after  Oui  and  Non  should 
be  read  Monsieur,  Madame,  or  Mademoiselle,  as  the  case  may  require. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


37 


ava/nt,  before,  (time).  devant,hQiore>,(j^\2iQ,B) .  pendant,  during. 
avec,  with.  derriere,  behind.  pour,  for. 

chez,  at,  with,  at  the  en,  in.  sans,  without. 

house  of.  entre,  between.  sous,  under. 

contre,  against.  envers,  vers,  towards,   sur,  on,  upon. 

As  to  the  contraction  of  a  and  le  into  au,  of  a  and  les  into  aux,  of  de  with 
le  into  du,  of  de  with  les  into  c?es,  see  page  34. 

2.  After  prepositions  no  article  is  used  whenever  the  noun  is  taken  in  a 
wide  and  indeterminate  sense,  and  forms  with  the  preposition  a  sort  of  ad- 
verbial phrase,  as  :  avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure ;  sans  erainte,  without  fear. 

3.  Chez  means  at  the  house  of.  It  governs  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun as  any  other  preposition.  Ex.  chez  mot,  at  my  house,  (at  the 
house  of  me);  chez  vous,  at  your  house;  chez  mon  oncle,  at  my 
uncle's,  (at  the  house  of  my  uncle). 

Tor  remarks  on  the  employment  of  some  prepositions,  see  P.  ii.,  L.  16. 


VOCABULARY. 


La  cour,  the  court,  yard. 

recole,  f.  the  school. 

le  maitre,  the  master,  teacher. 

I'eau,  f.  the  water. 

la  main,  the  hand. 

lapluie,  the  rain. 

le  toit,  the  roof. 

oil,  where. 

S.  Je  suis,  I  am. 
tu  es,  thou  art. 
il  est,  he  is. 
die  est,  she  is. 


PI. 


nous  sommes,  we  are. 
vous  etes,  you  are. 
ilssont,  they  are. 
dies  sont,  they  are. 


la  cliamhre,  the  room. 
V€glise,  f.  the  church. 
la  nuit,  the  night. 
lejour,  the  day. 
la  cuisine,  the  kitchen. 
la  poche,  the  pocket. 
demeure,  lives,     notre,  our. 
qui,  who,  whom  1 

Suis-je,  am  I  ? 
es-tu,  art  thou  1 
est-il,  is  he  ? 
est-dle,  is  she  1 

sommes-nous,  are  we  1 
etes-vous,  are  you  ? 
sont-ils,  are  they  ? 
sont-dles,  arc  they  1 


38  IV.      QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  4. 

Je  suis  dans  la  eour.  L'oiseau  est  sur  le  toit.  Es-tii  au  jardin 
(dans  le  jardin)  ?  Louis  est  chez  mon  pere.  Les  chevaux  sont  de- 
vant  la  porte.  Apres  la  pluie.  Pendant  la  nuit.  Avant  le  jour. 
L'enfant  est  sous  I'arbre.  Parmi  les  enfants.  Nous  sommes  der- 
riere  les  arbres.  Us  sont  entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre.  Ce  livre  est 
pour  mon  frere.  Ma  tante  est  a  F^glise.  Sans  argent  (money.) 
Avec  les  chevaux  de  mon  oncle.  Contre  I'ennemi.  Notre  ami 
demeure  k  Paris  dans  la  maison  de  sa  tante. 

THEME  4. 

I.  In  the  yard.  2.  During  the  night.  3.  I  am  before  the 
house.  4.  Louis  is  in  the  garden.  &:  Are  you  in  the  yard  ?  6. 
Before  night.  7.  I  speak  (je  parle)  of  the  house,  —  of  the  coat,  — 
of  the  flowers,  —  of  my  father,  —  of  my  mother.  8.  The  two  knives 
are  in  my  pocket.  9.  Where  are  the  cats?  10.  They  are  in  the 
kitchen.  11.  The  birds  are  on  the  roof.  12.  The  thi-ee  children 
of  my  cousin  (m.)  are  in  (the)  town.  13.  Against  tlie  rain.  14. 
With  my  father.  15.  Without  a  master.  16.  Louis  is  in  his  (so) 
room.  17.  The  book  is  for  my  sister.  18.  Between  the  two  win- 
dows. 19.  Under  the  roof  of  the  house.  20.  Are  they  before  the 
door  of  the  church  ?  21.  No;  they  are  behind  the  church.  22. 
The  children  are  at  (the)  school. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ou  est  Louis  ?  II  est  dans  la  cour. 

Oil  est  mon  fils  ?  II  est  au  jardin. 

Oil  sont  les  enfants?  Ilsjouent  (j>lay)  devant  la  mai 

son. 
Votre  cousine  est-elle  a  I'ecole  ?    Non  M  — ,  elle  est  a  I'eglise. 
Etes-vous  dans  le  jardin  ?  Non  M  — ,  nous  sommes  dans  la 

cour. 
Ton  pere  est-il  au  jardin  ?  Non  M  — ,  il  est  dans  sa  cham- 

bre. 
Sont-ils  a  la  fenetre  ?  Oui  M  — ,  ils  sont  a  la  fenetre. 

Avez-vous     vu     les     canards     Nous  avons  vu  les  canards  ct  les 
(ducks),  dans  la  cour  ?  oies  (geese). 


THE  PARTITIYE  ARTICLE.  39 

V.     CINQUIEME    LEOON. 


THE  PARTITIVE  ARTICLE 

1.  The  partitive  article  answers  to  the  English  some  or  any,  ex- 
pressed in  French  by  du  before  a  noun  mascuhne  beginning  with  a 
consonant,  by  de  la  before  a  noun  feminine  beginning  with  a  conso- 
nant, and  by  de  V  before  a  noun  of  either  gender  beginning  with  a 
vowel  or  an  h  mute.     Ex :  — 

Du  pain,  some  or  atiy  bread.  de  la  hiere,  some  beer. 

dxi  vin,  (some  or  any)  wine.  de  la  viande,  some  meat. 

de  V argent,  some  money  (Silver).  de  Vhuile,  some  oil. 

In  the  plural  the  partitive  article  is  des  for  both  genders.     Ex. 
Des  livres,  (some)  books.  desjieurs,  flowers. 

des  enfants,  children.  des  roses,  roses. 

Some  is  not  always  used  in  English,  whereas  du,  de  la,  de  V,  des,  must 
always  be  expressed  in  French. 

2.  In  questions  the  English  use  any  instead  of  sonfie  ;  in  French 
it  must  be  rendered  by  the  sam'fe  article,  as  :  — 

Have  you  any  bread  1  avez-vous  dupain  ? 
Is  there  any  watei  1  y  a-t-il  de  I'eau  ? 

3.  The  partitive  article  must  be  used  whenever  in  English  some 
or  any  is  expressed  or  understood  before  a  substantive ;  it  must  be 
repeated  before  every  substantive  in  a  sentence.     Ex. :  — • 

Have  you  bread  and  cheese  1  Avez-vous  du  pain  et  dujromage  ? 
Bring  me  some  mustard,  oil  and  vinegar. 
Apportez-moi  de  la  moutarde,  de  Vhuile  et  du  vinaigre. 

4.  However,  when  the  substantive  is  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
the  simple  preposition  de  or  c?'  takes  the  place  of  the  partitive  article, 
in  the  singular  as  well  as  in  the  plural,  as  :  — 

S.  debon  vin,  some  or  any  good  wine. 
de  bonne  viande,  some  or  any  good  meat. 
de  mauvais  cafg,  some  or  any  bad  coffee. 
d*  excellentefarine,  some  or  any  excellent  flour. 


40 


V.      CINQUIEME  LEgON. 


PI.  de  bons  Uvres,  some  or  any  good  books. 

de  hdles  Jleurs,  some  or  any  beautiful  flowers. 

£f  excdlents  vaisseaux,  some  or  any  excellent  vessels. 


VOCABULARY. 


Lafariney  the  flour. 
lefer,  (the)  iron. 
U argent,  m.  silver. 
le  papier,  the  paper. 
I'encre,  f.  the  ink. 
lefromage,  the  cheese. 
U  gar^on,*  the  boy. 
fc  plomh,  the  lead, 
/e  seZ,  the  salt. 
le  canard,  the  duck. 
I'cBuf,  m.  the  egg. 
ily  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

S  J^aurai,  I  shall  have 
tu  auras,  thou  wilt  have. 
il  aura,  he  will  have. 
die  aura,  she  will  have 

PL  nous  aurons,  we  shall  have. 
vous  aurez,  you  will  have. 
ils  auront,  they  will  have. 
dies  auront,  they  will  have. 


le  fruit,  the  fruit. 
le  Sucre,  the  sugar. 
Ze  caf^,  the  cofibe. 
fo  prune,  the  plum. 
Ze  beurre,  the  butter. 
Ze  crayon,  the  pencil, 
/e  Soulier,  the  shoe. 
Ze  ias,  the  stocking. 
achete,  boaght. 
que,  what,     wais,  but. 
Za,  there,    six,  six. 
c'esf,  this  is,  that  is. 

Aurai-je,  shall  I  have  ? 
auras-tu,  wilt  thou  have  ? 
aura-t-il,  will  he  have  ? 
aura-t-elle,  will  she  have  1 

aurons-nous,  shall  we  have  ? 
aurez-vous,  will  you  have  ? 
auront-ils,  will  they  have  ? 
auront-dles,  will  thev  have  1 


KEADmG  EXERCISE  5. 

J'avais  de  la  farine  et  du  sel.  Aviez-vous  aussi  du  sel  ?  Le  roi 
a  de  For  et  de  I'argent.  H  a  aussi  des  bijoux.  Tu  auras  du 
fromage.  Louis  a  achete  du  papier  et  de  Fencre.  Nous  aurons 
des  livres,  des  plumes  et  des  crayons.  Avaient-elles  des  fleurs  et 
des  fruits  ?  Je  donne  a  ton  cousin  des  noix  et  des  pommes.  Dans 
la  cour  il  y  a  des  canards.  Mon  cousin  avait  des  chevaux  et  des 
chiens.  Ma  cousine  aura  des  chats,  mais  ma  tante  aura  des  oiseaux. 
Dans  les  jardins  il  y  a  des  arbres,  des  fruits  et  des  fleurs. 


*  Gargon  means  waiter  and  bachelor  as  well  as  boy. 
fore  generally  prefixed  in  speaking  of  a  young  boy. 


Petit,  small,  is  there- 


PREPOSITIONS. 


41 


THEME  5. 

1.  We  liad  some  butter  and  (some)  cheese.  2.  You  had 
butter  and  eggs.  3.  Here  is  (L.  ii.)  bread.  4.  There  is  some 
bread.  5.  My  father  bought  lead  and  iron.  6.  The  child  has 
flowers.  7.  My  cousin  (/.)  will  have  some  flour  and  bread.  8. 
There  are  eggs 'and  fruits.  9.  The  man  has  sugar  and  coffee. 
10.  The  queen  has  gold  and  silver.  11.  I  gave  (to)  the  boys 
books,  pencils  and  pens.  12.  They  will  also  have  some  paper  and 
ink.  13.  Louis  has  horses  and  dogs.  14.  My  sister  will  have 
shoes  and  stockings.  15.  I  give  (to)  the  boy  stockings,  clothes, 
(habits)  and  hats.  16.  Have  you  (any)  friends  (m).  17.  They 
(f.)  will  have  friends  (f ).  18.  At  my  uncle's  (L.  iv.  3.)  house 
there  are  books  and  pictures.  19.  Will  you  haye  (voulez-vous) 
some  money?  20.  No;  give  me  (wo^)  some  bread.  21.  Eead 
(lisez)  good  books.  22.  This  is  bad  coffee.  23.  We  have  seen 
beautiful  roses. 

CONVERSATION. 


Avons-nous  de  la  farine  ? 
Avons-nous  aussi  du  sel  ? 
Aurons-nous  du  beurre  et  du 

pain? 
Qu'avez-vous  Ik  (there)  ? 

A-t-elle  des  crayons  ? 

Les  enfants  ont-ils  des  poires  ? 
Qu'as-tu  sous  le  bras  (arm)  ? 
Pour  qui  sont  ces  livres  ? 
Ta  sceur  a-t-elle  du  sucre  ? 
Ton  cousin  a-t-il  du  papier  ? 

Qui  a  du  fromage  ? 

Y  a-t-il  des  fruits  ? 

Qu'y  a-tril  chez  mon  oncle  ? 


Nous  avons  de  la  farine. 
Nous  avons  aussi  du  sel. 
Non  M — ,  mais  vous   aurez  des 

fruits. 
Nous  avons  de  la  viande  et  du 

pain. 
Non    M — ,    mais     elle     a    des 

plumes. 
Non  M — ,  ils  ont  des  pommes. 
J'ai  des  livres. 
Ils  sont  pour  mon  maitre. 
Elle  a  du  sucre  et  du  cafe. 
Mon    cousin    a    du    papier,    des 

plumes  et  de  I'encre. 
Le  gargon  a  du  fromage. 
Oui  M — ,  il  y  a  des  fruits. 
II  y  a  des  livres  et  des  images. 


42  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 


YI.    SIXIEME    LE9ON 


FURTHER  USE  OF  DE. 

De  is  used  without  the  article. 

1.  After  nouns  expressing  measure,  weight,  number,  as  : 

TJne  houteille  de  vin,  a  bottle  of  wine.    Une  livre  de  sucre,  a  pound  of  sugar, 
Un  morceau  de  pain,  a  piece  of  bread.  Une  paire  de  has,  a  pair  of  stockings . 

2.  After  adverbs  of  quantity. 

Assez,  enough.  moins,  less. 

beaucoup,  much,  many,  a  great  many,        ne — rien,  nothing. 

a  great  deal.  quelque  chose,  something. 

comhien,  how  much,  how  many.  trop,  too,  too  much,  too  many. 

guere,  but  little,  but  few.  trop  peu,  too  little,  too  few. 

peu,  little,  few.  tant,  so  much,  so  many. 

plus,  more.  autant,  as  much,  as  many. 

Ex. :  — Assez  de  vin,  wine  enough,  {assez  before  the  noun). 

Comhien  d' argent,  how  much  money  1 

Tant  de  Jleurs,  so  many  flowers.       Trop  defautes,  too  many  mistakes. 

Remark.    But  after  hien,  much,  many,  and  la  plupart,  most,  the  article 
must  be  used.    Ex. :  — 

Bien  des  hommes,  many  men.  La  plupart  du  temps,  most  of  the  time. 

3.  After  pas,  point,  Jamais,  de  alone  must  be  used  instead  of 
the  partitive  du,  de  la,  des.     Ex,  r  — 

Je  n'aipasde  sucre,  I  have  no  sugar.  N'avez-vous  point  d'encre,  have  you  no 

ink? 

4.  De  is  used  as  a  connective  of  a  word  denoting  a  material. 

Une  bague  d'or,  a  gold  ring.  Une  miller  d' argent,  a  silver  spoon. 

Une  bourse  de-  sole,  a  silk  purse.  Une  table  de  hois,  a  wooden  table. 

Un  chapeau  de  velours,  a  velvet  bonnet. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

VOCABULARY.  - 

Une  feuille,  &  sheet. 

I'aune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

un  verre,  a  glass. 

une  douzaine,  a  dozen. 

le  th€,  tea. 

la  hotte,  the  boot. 

une  hoite,  a  box. 

la  pei-sonne,  the  person 

la  montre,  the  watch 

le  hois,  the  wood. 

le  drap,  the  cloth. 

que,  than. 

rejM,  received. 

hu,  drunk. 

43 


READING  EXERCISE  6. 

Voici  Tine  bouteille  de  vin.  Nous  avons  trois  livres  de  sucre. 
Nous  aurons  aussi  deux  livres  de  cafe.  La  reine  avait  beaucoup  de 
bijoux.  Aviez-vous  assez  d'argent  ?  Mon  oncle  aura  une  douzaine 
de  bas.  Avez-vous  re^u  la  boite  de  crayons?  Yous  aurez  une 
feuille  de  papier.  Aviez-vous  assez  de  pain  ?  Les  enfants  avaient 
moins  de  poires  que  de  noix.  Je  donne  assez  d'argent  h  mon  fils. 
II  a  bu  trop  de  vin.  Nous  aurons  une  chaine  d'argent.  Yous  au- 
rez une  montre  d'or.  Ma  mere  a  un  chapeau  de  velours.  La  plu- 
part  des  hommes  sont  heureux. 

THEME  6. 

1.  I  have  a  dozen  (of)  pens.  2.  Thou  wilt  have  a  sheet  of  pa- 
per. 3.  She  has  cheese  and  butter  enough.  4.  We  had  a  glass  of 
wine.  6.  I  shall  have  also  a  piece  of  meat  and  two  glasses  of  wine. 
6.  He  had  a  bottle  of  oil.  7.  We  had  two  pounds  of  sugar,  six 
pounds  of  coffee,  and  five  pounds  of  tea.  8.  You  will  have  a  great 
many  pencils  and  books.  9.  I  have  bought  a  dozen  stockings  and 
two  pairs  of  shoes.  10.  In  this  {cette)  box  there  are  six  yards  of 
cloth.  11.  I  had  a  silver  watch  and  a  gold  ring.  12.  This  is  a 
wooden  table.  13,  How  many  persons  have  you  seen  (vues)  ? 
14.  We  have  seen  few  persons.  15.  My  cousin  had  a  wooden  box. 
16.  Have  you  drunk  a  bottle  of  wine?  17.  Give  me  a  sheet 
of  paper.  18.  My  brother  will  have  something.  19.  My  sis- 
ter has  bought  two  gold  rings  and  three  silver  spoons.  20.  The 
child  has  as  many  pears  as  (que  de)  apples. 


44 


VI.      SIXIEME    LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 

Qu'avez-vous  Ik  ?  Nous  avons  un  verre  d'eau. 

Qu'avez-vous  achet^  ?  J'ai  achete  deux  livres  de  sucre. 

Avez-vous  aussi  du  cafe  ?  Oui  M — ,  j'ai  du  cafe. 

Avez-vous    de    Fargent,    mon  Oui  mon  pere,  j'ai  de  I'argent. 

fils? 

Combien  d'argent  avez-vous  ?  J'ai  six  francs. 

Est-ce  assez  pour  vous?  C'est  assez  pour  moi  (me). 

Oil  avez-vous  vu  le  maitre  de  J'ai  vu  mon  maitre  de  musique 


musique 


Avaitril  des  fleurs  ? 

Combien  de  chevaux  avez-vous  ? 
Avez-vous  une  paire  de  bottes  ? 


au  jardin. 
Oui  M — ,  il  avait  des  fruits  et  des 

fleurs.  ' 
Nous  avons  trois  chevaux. 
J'ai  une  paire  de  bottes  et  deux 

paires  de  souliers. 


VII.    SEPTIEME    LE9ON, 


PROPER  NOUNS. 

A  distinction  must  be  made  between  names  of  persons  and  towns, 
and  names  of  countries,  provinces,  mountains,  rivers,  lakes. 
1.    The  former,  as  in  English,  take  no  article,  such  are  :  — 


Guillaume,  William. 
Henri,  Henry. 
George,  George. 
Jean,  John. 


Vienne,  Vienna. 
Geneve,  Geneva. 


CHRISTIAN   NAMES. 

Frangois,  Francis. 
Elise,  Eliza. 
Hdene,  Helen,  Ellen. 
Jeanne,  Jane. 


NAMES    OF    TOWNS. 


Lyon,  Lyons. 
Bruxelles,  Brussels. 


PROPER  NOUNS.  45 

2.  We  must  except  from  the  above  rule  the  names  of  several 
Itahan  authors  before  which  the  article  is  used  :  le  Tasse,  Tasso  {dzt 
Tasse,  etc)  ;  VArioste,  Ariosto  ;  le  Dante,  Dante ;  —  titles  of  books 
or  plays,  as  :  le  TeUmaque  de  Fenelon,  VAthalie  de  Racine^  etc. ; 
some  names  of  towns,  as :  le  Havre,  Havre ;  le  Gaire,  Cairo ;  la 
Nouvelle  Orleans,  New  Orleans. 

3.  Before  proper  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers  and  moun- 
tains, the  definite  article  is  used  in  French,  as  :  — 

iLa  jFVance,  France.  fo  Prwsse,  Prussia. 

la  Belgique,  Belgium.  V Europe,  Europe. 

VAngleterre,  England.  VAfrique,  Africa. 

I'ltalie,  Italy.  VAsie,  Asia. 

la  Suisse,  Switzerland.  VAm€nque,  America. 

V Allemagne,  Germany.  la  Seine,  the  Seine. 

VEspange,  Spain.  le  Rhin,  the  Rhine. 

la  Suede,  Sweden.  les  Alpes,  the  Alps,  etc. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

4.  The  names  of  countries  and  provinces  take  no  article  when 
they  are  preceded  by  the  preposition  en,  which  corresponds  to  both 
to  and  in.     Ex. :  — 

Je  vais  en  Italie,  I  am  going  to  Italy. 

II  demeure  en  Allemagne,  he  lives  in  Germany. 

5.  To  and  at  or  in,  before  names  of  cities,  towns,  and  vil- 
lages, are  rendered  by  a.     Ex. :  — 

Nous  allons  a  Londres,        a  Paris,        a  Bade,  etc. 

We  go  to  London  to  Paris,       to  Baden,  etc. 

Mon  oncle  demeure  a  Berlin  a  Lyon,  etc. 

My  uncle  lives  at  (in)  Berlin,      at  (in)  Lyons,  etc. 

(Further  explanations  will  be  given  in  the  second  part.) 
Most  names  of  towns  are  spelled  in  French  as  in  English,  with  a  few  ex- 
ceptions ;  those  that  end  in  e  mute  are  feminine,  the  rest  are  masculine. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  cahier,  the  copy-book.  la  ville,  the  city,  town. 

la  carte,  the  map.  le  cours,  the  course. 

la  fable,  the  fable.  le  marchand,  the  dealer,  tradesman. 


46  VII.    SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

le  manteau,  the  cloak.  le  n^gociant,  the  merchant. 

le  gant,  the  glove.  la  capitale,  the  capital. 

le  pays,  the  country.  donnez,  give,     voire,  your. 

ou,  where,    lu,  read.  dlait,  was.    diez-vous,  were  you  ?  i 

EEADING  EXERCISE  7. 

J'ai  le  caMer  de  Frederic.  Yoici  les  fables  de  La  Fontaine. 
J'ai  vu  le  chateau  du  roi  de  Belgique.  Donnez  la  boite  d  Sophie. 
Donnez  la  plume  a  Henri.  Ou  est  Monsieur  H?  C'est  le  cha- 
peau  de  mademoiselle  Elise.  C'est  le  canif  de  George.  Nous 
sommes  a  Paris.  Etiez-vous  h  Vienne  ?  Mon  cousin  est  en 
Amerique.  Le  cours  du  Rhin  est  long.  Yoici  une  carte  d'AUe- 
magne.  Louis  Phillippe,  roi  de  France,  est  mort  (died)  en  Angle- 
terre.  Yoici  les  chevaux  de  Charles.  Avez-vous  lu  les  oeuvres 
(the  works)  de  Comeille  ?     Domiez  ces  gants  k  Henri. 

THEME  7. 

1.  William  is  my  friend.  2.  I  am  William's  friend  (the  friend  of 
William).  3.  Here  is  John's  brother.  4.  Where  is  my  sister  Ellen  ? 
5.  She  is  with  Caroline.  6.  Where  are  Eliza's  gloves?  7.  Speak 
(parlez)  to  Henry  and  Francis.  8.  I  have  received  the  book  from 
Paris.  9  Brussels  is  the  capital  of  Belgium.  10.  Florence  is  a 
city  in  Italy.  11.  I  am  going  to  Switzerland.  12.  The  merchants 
of  New  York.  13.  My  uncle  lives  in  Germany.  14.  Are  you  go- 
ing (allez-vous)  to  Berlin  or  to  Yienna?  15.  I  am  going  to 
Frankfort  and  to  Yienna.  16.  Paris  is  the  capital  of  France.  17. 
Is  your  aunt  in  America?  18.  Yes;  she  is  in  New  Orleans. 
19.  My  brother  has  travelled  (voyage)  in  Russia,  in  Sweden,  and 
in  Germany.  20.  This  is  John's  hat.  21.  I  have  seen  Geneva, 
Lyons,  and  Rome.  22.  Give  me  Mary's  copy-book  and  George's 
pencil.     23.  I  have  seen  the  apple-vender  (dealer  in  (de)  apples). 

CONVERSATION. 

Ou  etiez-vous  ?  J'^tais  k  Paris. 

Et  ton  frere  ou  etait-il  t  H  etait  aussi  a  Paris. 


PROPER  NOUNS. 


4T 


Us  sont  sur  la  table. 
C'est  Bruxelles. 


Oh  sont  les  gants  d'Helene  ? 

Quelle   est  la  capitale  *de   la 
Belgique  ? 

Quelle   est   la   capitale    de  la     C'est  Berlin. 
Prusse  ? 

Qui  est  la  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  livres  ? 

A  qui  est  ee  chapeau? 

Ou  trouve-t-on  {is found)  beau- 
coup  d'or? 

Ou  trouve-t-on  de  bon  fer  ? 


Les  enfants  de  madame  B. 
Je  les  (them)  donne  a  Marie. 
Ce  cbapeau  est  k  Guillaume. 
En  Californie. 


Quels  pays  ave^vous  vus  ? 
Avez-vous  lu  les  poemes  de  Be- 

ranger  ? 
Combien  de  crayons  Caroline 

a-t-elle  achetes  ? 

Oil  sont  les  enfants  de  Ma- 
dame L  ? 

Donnez  moi  (me)  mes  gants 
s'il .  vous  plait  ( if  you 
please  ) . 

Avez-vous  lu  cette  (this)  fa- 
ble? 


En  Suede  (Sweden)  et  en  An- 
gle terre. 

J'ai  vu  la  Suisse  et  I'ltalie. 

Non  M — ,  mais  j'ai  lu  les  poemes 
de  Victor  Hugo. 

Caroline  a  achete  quatre  crayons 
et  Jeannette  a  acbet^  six 
plumes. 

Bs  sont  au  jardin. 

Les  voici,  M — ,  (Here  they  are). 


Oui  M — ,  j'ai  lu  toutes  (all)  les 
fables  de  La  Fontaine, 


48 


VIII.      HUITIEME    LEgON. 


YIII.    HUITIEME    LE9ON 


CONJUGATION  OF  AVOIR,  TO  HAVE,  —  AFFIRMATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

COMPOUND    OF    THE   PRESENT. 


PKESENT. 

J'ai, 

I  have 

Tuas, 

thou  hast 

11  a  (elle  a,  on  a). 

he  has 

Nous  avons. 

we  have 

Vous  avez, 

you  have 

Us  ont, 

they  have 

IMPERFECT. 

J'avais,  /  had,  was  having,  or  used  to 

have 


J'ai  eu, 
Tu  as  eu, 
II  a  eu, 

Nous  avons  eu, 
Vous  avez  eu, 
lis  ont  eu, 


/  have  had 

thou  hast  had 

he  has  had 

we  have  had 

you  have  had 

they  have  had 


COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  eu,  /  had  had 


Tu  avais, 

thou  hadst 

Tu  avais  eu, 

thou  hadst  had 

11  avait. 

he  had 

11  avait  eu. 

he  had  had 

Nous  avions. 

we  had 

Nous  avions  eu. 

we  had  had 

Vous  aviez. 

you  had 

Vous  aviez  eu. 

you  had  had 

lis  avaient. 

they  had 

lis  avaient  eu. 

they  had  had 

PRETERITE. 

COMPOUND   OF 

THE   PRETERITE. 

J'eus, 

I  had 

J'eus  eu, 

/  had  had 

Tu  eus, 

thou  hadst,  etc. 

Tu  eus  eu. 

thou  hadst  had 

11  cut. 

he  had 

11  eut  eu, 

he  had  had 

Nous  eumes, 

we  had 

Nous  eumes  eu. 

we  had  had 

Vous  eutes. 

you  had 

Vous  eutes  eu. 

you  had  had 
they  had  had 

lis  eurent. 

they  had 

lis  eurent  eu. 

FUTURE. 

COMPOUND   OF 

THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai, 

I  shall  or  will  have 

J'aurai  eu,        I  shall  or  will  have  had 

Tu  auras, 

thou  wilt  have 

Tu  auras  eu, 

thou  wilt  have  had 

11  aura. 

he  will  have 

II  aura  eu. 

he  will  have  had 

Nous  aurons. 

we  shall  have 

Nous  aurons  eu, 

we  shall  have  had 

Vous  aurez, 

you  will  have 
mey  will  have 

Vous  aurez  eu, 

you  will  have  had 

Us  auront, 

lis  auront  eu, 

ilmj  will  have  had 

CONTITIONAL  MOOD. 
PRESENT.  COMPOUND  OF  THE  PRESENT. 


J'aurais, 
Tu  aurais, 
II  aurait, 
Nous  aurions, 
Vous  auriez, 
lis  auraient, 


/  should  have 

thou  wouldst  have 

ha  would  have 

we  should  have 

you  would  have 

tliey  would  have 


J'aurais  eu,  /  should  have  had 

Tu  aurais  eu,      thou  ivoiddst  have  had 


II  aurait  cu, 
Nous  aurions  eu, 
Vous  auriez  eu, 
lis  auraient  eu. 


he  would  have  had 

we  should  have  had 

you  would  have  had 

they  would  have  had 


CONJUGATION  OF  AVOIR. 


49 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Aie,  have  (thou). 

Ayons,  let  us  have. 

Ayez,      have  (ye  or  you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


Que  j'aie,  that  I  may 

Que  tu  aies,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'il  ait,  that  he  may 

Que  nous  ayons,  that  we  may 
Que  vous  ayez,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient,  that  they  may 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse,  that  I  might 

Que  tu  eusses,    that  thou  mightest 


Qu'il  eut,  that  he 

Que  nous  eussions,  that  we  might 

Que  vous  eussiez,  that  you  might 
Qu'ils  eussent,       that  they  might 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  eu,  that  I  may ' 

Que  tu  aies  eu,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'il  ait  eu,  that  he  may 

Que  nous  ayons  eu,  that  ice  may 
Que  vous  ayez  eu,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient  eu,         that  they  may 


COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 


that  I  might 
that  thou 


Que  j'eusse  eu, 
Que  tu  eusses  eu. 


Qu'il  eut  eu,  that  he  might 

Que  nous  eussions  eu,       that  we 
might  [might 
Que  vous  eussiez  eu,        that  you 
Qu'ils  eussent  eu,  that  they  might 


Avoir, 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT.  COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

to  have  \  Avoir  eu,  to  have  had 


Ayant, 


PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT.  COMPOUND. 

having  \  Ayant  eu,  having  had 


PAST   OR   PASSIVE. 

Eu,  had 


It  would  be  a  good  plan  to  conjugate  the  whole  verb  avoir  together  with 
a  noun,  as ;  JTai  une  pomme,  j'avais  une  pomme,  etc.  —  After  that,  with  the 
pronoun  I'  {le),  it,  and  les,  them,  as  :  je  Vai,  I  have  it;  tu  Vas,  il  I'a,  etc.; 
je  Ics  aurai,  tu  les  auras,  etc. 


50  VIII.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

VOCABULAEY.  • 

Le  temps,  time.  demain,  to-morrow. 

le  courage,  the  courage.  Vencrier,  the  inkstand. 

U  plaisir,   the  pleasure.  la  regie,  the  ruler. 

la  voiture,  the  carriage.  perdu,  lost. 

la  bourse,  the  purse.  aujourd'hui,  to-day. 

hier,  yesterday.  et,  and.        si,  if. 

THEME  8. 

Pres.  1.  I  have  a  book.  2.  He  has  a  hat.  3.  We  have  a 
house  and  (a)  garden.  4.  They  (masc.)  have  ahorse.  5.  They 
(/em.)  have  flowers  and  fruit. — Imperf.  6.  I  had  a  friend.  7. 
Thou  hadst  a  friend.  8.  Louisa  had  two  cats.  9.  You  had  money 
enough.  10.  The  children  had  bread. — Pret.  11.  He  had  the 
courage.  12.  You  had  the  pleasure.  13.  The  son  of  the  king  had 
a  carriage.  —  Put.  and  Cond.  14.  I  shall  have  apples.  15.  He 
would  have  seen  the  castle.  16,  We  shall  have  some  coflfee  to-day. 
17.  We  would  have  some  sugar.     18.  You  will  have  two  horses. 

19.  They  would  have  an  inkstand  and  a  ruler.  —  Compound  Tenses. 

20.  We  have  had  much  trouble  (^peine).  21.  You  have  had  a  great 
(^grand)  pleasure.  22.  She  has  had  a  great  many  nuts.  23. 
They  had  had  two  copy  books.  24.  I  shall  have  paper  and  pens. 
25.  You  will  have  had  my  horse.  26.  Charles's  sisters  will  have 
many  flowers.  27.  I  should  have  had  a  great  deal  of  (beaucoup 
<?e)  trouble.  28.  Thou  wouldst  have  had  more  pleasure.  29.  You 
would  have  had  a  good  friend.  30.  The  boy  would  have  had  a 
penknife. 

ADDITIONAL  THEME  UPON  AVOIR. 

1.  My  (ma)  aunt  has  apples,  I  have  many  plums  and  you  have 
flowers  enough  (L.  VI.  2).  2.  The  merchant's  cousin  will  have  a 
ball  to-morrow.  3.  Yesterday  I  had  money,  but  I  have  lost  my 
purse  to-day.  4.  To-morrow  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
(de  voir)  my  cousin,  (f)  my  aunt  and  my  sister ;  I  should  have  had 
the  pleasure  of  seeing  them  (des  les  voir)  yesterday  if  I  had  been  in 
(en  without  article)  town.  5.  We  shall  have  time  enough  to-mor- 
row.    6.  We  had  too  much  time  yesterday.     7.  Have  the  cour- 


IDIOMATIC  USE   OP  AVOIR.  51 

age  to  do  it  (de  lefaire)  ;  you  have  time  enough.  8.  Let  us  have 
the  carriage  and  we  shall  have  much  pleasure.  9.  We  should  have 
had  the  carriage  yesterday  if  we  had  wished  (youlu).  10.  Though 
{c[uoique)  you  may  have  had  time,  you  have  not  had  the  courage. 
11.  Though  we  have  (pres.  Subj.)  two  horses,  we  have  not 
(n'avonspas)  the  courage  to  ride  them  (c?e  les  monter).  12.  We 
have  money  to-day,  and  to-morrow  we  shall  have  bread,  meat,  and 
wine.  13.  It  is  you,  who  (^qui)  will  have  the  most  (le  plus  de) 
pleasure.  14.  I  do  not  think  (^je  ne  crois  pas)  that  he  would  have 
had  the  courage.  15.  During  the  night  he  had  lost  his  (sa)  purse. 
16.  If  he  had  had  an  inkstand  he  would  have  had  ink.  17.  They 
will  have  silver  spoons  on  the  table.  18.  They  would  have  jewels 
if  (s')  they  had  money. 


IX.    NEUyi:fiME    LE9ON 


IDIOMATIC   USE  OF  AVOIR. 
1.   Avoir  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  nouns  chaud,  warmth ; 
froid,   cold;  faim,  hunger;    soif,   thirst;    raison,  reason;  tort, 
wrong ;  peur,  fear ;  honte,  shame ;    envie,  desire ;   sommeil,  sleep ; 
hesoin,  need  ;  as  :  — 

J'ai  chaud.  I  am  warm. 

J'avais  froid.  I  was  cold. 

II  aura  faim.  He  will  be  hungry. 

EUe  aurait  soif.  She  would  be  thirsty. 

Nous  avons  raison.  We  are  right. 

Vous  avez  tort.  You  are  wrong. 

Nous  avons  eu  peur.  We  were  (have  been)  afraid. 

lis  ont  honte.  They  are.  ashamed. 

Elles  avaient  envie.  They  were  desirous, 

Avez-vous  sommeil  ?  Are  you  sleepy  ? 

Nous  avons  besoin.  We  need.    We  want. 


52 


IX.      NEUVIEME   LEpON. 


2.    Avoir  quelque  chose,  literally,  to  have  something,  is  also  used 
idiomatically  in  the  sense  of  to  he  the  matter  with  ;  thus  :  — 


Qu'  avez-vous? 
J'ai  quelque  chose. 
Vous  avez  quelque  chose. 

II  a  "  " 

EUe  a  "  " 

Nous  avions    "  " 

Vous  aviez      "  " 

lis  auront        "  " 


What  is  the  matter  with  you  1 

Something  is  the  matter  with  me. 
u  «     «         U         <c     y^^^ 

"         «  U  U        Jjijjj^ 

"  "     «        "        «    her. 

**  was  the  matter  with  us. 

a  U  «  U  U  yQ^^ 

"  will  be  the  matter  with 

them. 
Remark.     The  opposite  of  avoir  quelque  chose  is  ri' avoir  rien  (ne  before 
the  verb  and  rien  after  it.     See  L.  XI.  2).    As  :  — 

Jc  n'ai  rien.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 


Vous  n'avez  rien. 
II  n'a  rien. 
Elle  n'a  rien. 
Nous  n'avions  rien 
Vous  n'aviez  rien. 
lis  n'auront  rien. 


was  the 


you. 
him. 
her. 
us. 


"     "      "        "    you. 
will  be  the  matter  with  them. 


3.  Avoir  Vair  means  to  have  the  appearance,  to  look ;  —  avoir 
V intention  de,  to  have  the  intention,  to  intend;  —  avoir  soin  de,  to 
take  care  of;  — avoir  mal  a,  to  have  a  sore,  an  ache,  or  a  pain  in. 

As:  — 


II  avait  I'air  content. 

Vous  avez  I'air  heureux. 

lis  ont  Fair  malheureux. 

A-t-elle     I'intention     d'aller     en 

.    Trance  ? 

Non,  Monsieur;   elle  a  I'intention 

d'aller  en  Italic. 
Ayez  soin  de  mon  chapeau. 
J'aurai  soin  de  votre  chapeau  et  de 

votre  canne. 
J'ai  mal  a  la  tete. 
Avez-vous  mal  aux  dents  ? 
J'avais  mal  au  bras. 
II  avait  mal  au  genou. 


He  looked  glad. 

You  look  happy. 

They  look  unhappy. 

Does  she  intend  to  go  to  France  ? 

No,  sir ;  she  intends  to  go  to  Italy. 

Take  care  of  my  hat. 

I  shall  take  care  of  your  hat  and  cane. 

I  have  a  headache. 
Have  you  the  toothache  ? 
I  had  a  sore  arm. 
He  had  a  sore  knee. 


IDIOMATIC   USE   OF  AVOIR.  58 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  chien,  the  dog.  content,  glad,  pleased. 

la  tete,  the  head.  malade,  sick,  ill. 

le  bras,  the  ami.  aUer,  to  go. 

la  gorge,  the  throat.  voire,  your. 

la  dent,  the  tooth.  mxm,  my. 

le  manteau,  the  cloak.  le  parapluie,  the  umbrella. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  9. 

A-t-il  peur?  Oui  Madame;  il  a  peur.  Avez-vous  honte  de 
parler  (to  speak)  fran5ais  ?  Non,  Mademoiselle ;  mais  j'ai  peiir  de 
parler  fran^ais.  Aviez-vous  froid  hier  ?  Oui,  Monsieur,  j'avais  froid 
hier  mais  j'ai  cbaud  aujourd  'hui.  Avez-vous  eu  peur  du  chien  ? 
Non,  nous  avons  eu  peur  du  cheval.  Yotre  ami,  a-t-il  quelque 
chose?  Oui,  il  a  quelque  chose.  Qu'  a-t-il?  II  a  mal  a  la  tete. 
Qu'  avez-vous  ?  J'ai  sommeil.  Votre  ami  a-t-il  besoin  de  moi  ?  Au- 
rez-vous  soin  de  mon  cheval  ?  Oui,  Monsieur ;  j'aurai  soin  de  votre 
cheval.  Qui  a  besoin  de  I'encrier  ?  Votre  cousine  a-t-elle  mal  au 
bras  ?  Elle  a  mal  au  bras.  Le  negociant  a  Fair  content.  Mon 
frere  a  I'intention  d'aller  a  Paris  et  h  Londres.  Votre  frere, 
qu'  a-t-il ?     Ha  honte. 

THEME  9. 

1.  Where  do  you  intend  to  go  to-morrow?  2.  I  intend  to  go 
and  see  (voir)  the  merchant.  3.  I  was  wrong  and  you  were 
right.  4.  Was  he  sleepy  ?  5.  He  was  sleepy.  6,  Were  you  glad? 
7.  I  was  glad.  8.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  father  ?  9.  Noth- 
ing is  the  matter  with  him.  10.  What  was  the  matter  with  that 
(ce)  boy?  11.  He  was  ashamed.  12.  Was  he  afraid  of  the 
horse?  13,  No,  sir;  he  was  afraid  of  the  dog.  14.  Do  I  look 
sick?  15.  Yes,  sir;  you  look  sick.  16.  Have  you  a  headache  ?  17. 
No,  sir;  I  have  a  sore  throat.  18.  Has  that  young  lady  the  tooth- 
ache? 19.  She  has  the  toothache.  20.  Take  care  of  my  wateh. 
21.  We  shall  take  care  of  your  watch,  your  cloak,  and  your  um- 
brella. 


54 


DIXIEME  LECON. 


X.    DIXIEME    LE9ON. 


CONJUGATION  OF  ETRE,   TO  5^— AFFIRMATIVELY. 
INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


PRESENT. 

Je  suis,  /  am 

Tu  es,  thou  art 

II  est  (elle  est,  on  est),  he  is 

Nous  sommes,  we  are 
Vous  etes,                         ye  or  you  are 

lis  sont,  they  are 


IMPERFECT. 


J'etais, 
Tu  etais, 
II  etait, 
Nous  etions, 
Vous  etiez, 
lis  etaient. 


I  was  or  used  to  he 

thou  wast 

he  was 

we  vjere 

you  were 

they  were 


PRETERITE. 


Je  fus, 
Tu  fus, 
II  fut, 

Nous  fumes, 
Vous  futes, 
lis  furent. 


Je  serai, 
Tu  seras, 
II  sera. 
Nous  serons, 
Vous  serez, 
lis  seront. 


I  was 

thou  wast 

he  was 

we  were 

you  were 

they  were 

FUTURE. 

/  shall  he,  will  he 
thou  wilt  he 
he  will  he 
we  shall  he 
you  will  he 
they  will  he 


COMPOUND    OF   THE   PRESENT. 


J'ai  ete, 
Tu  as  et^, 
II  a  ete', 

Nous  avons  ete, 
Vous  avez  ete, 
lis  out  ete. 


I  have  been 

thou  hast  heen 

he  has  been 

we  have  been 

you  have  heen 

they  have  heen 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   IMPERFECT. 


J'avais  et^, 
Tu  avals  e'te, 
II  avait  ^te, 
Nous  avions  ete, 
Vous  avicz  ete, 
lis  avaient  ete. 


I  had  been 

thou  hadst  heen 

he  had  been 

we  had  heen 

you  had  heen 

they  had  heen 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRETERITE. 


J'eus  ete, 
Tu  eus  ete, 
II  eut  ete. 
Nous  eumes  4t4, 
Vous  eutes  ete, 
lis  eurent  ete. 


I  had  been 

thou  hadst  been 

he  had  been 

we  had  heen 


yoi 


had  heen 


they  had  been 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE 

I  shall 

thou  wilt 

he  will 


J'aurai  et^, 
Tu  auras  et^, 
II  aura  ete, 
Nous  aurons  ete, 
Vous  aurez  ete, 
lis  auront  ete. 


we  shall 
you  will 
they  will 


CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 


PRESENT. 


Je  serais, 
Tu  serais, 
111  serait, 
Nous  serious, 
Vous  seriez, 
lis  seraient, 


I  should  be 

thou  wouldst  he 

he  would  he 

we  should  be 

you  would  be 

they  would  be 


COMPOUND   OF  THE   PRESENT 

J'aurais  ete,  /  should 

Tu  aurais  ete,  thou  wouldst 

II  aurait  ete,  he  would 

Nous  aurions  et^,  we  should 

Vous  auriez  ete,  yoa  would 

lis  auraient  ete,  they  would 


^ 


CONJUGATION   OF  ETRE,  TO   BE. 


55 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Sois, 

Soyons, 

Soyez, 


be  (thou). 

let  us  be. 

be  (ye  or  you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 


Que  je  sois,  that  I  may  be 

Que  tu  sois,  that  thou  mayest  be 

Qu'il  soit,  that  he  may  be 

Que  nous  soyons,  that  we  may  be 

Que  vous  soyez,  that  you  may  be 

Qu'ils  soient,  that  they  may  be 

IMPERFECT. 


Que  je  fusse, 
Que  tu  fusses, 

Qu'il  fut 

Que  nous  fussions, 


that  I  might  be 
that  thou  mightest  be 

that  he  might  be 
that  we  might  be 


Que  vous  fussiez,       that  you  might  he 
Qu'ils  fussent,         .  thai  they  might  he 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  ete,  that  I  may 

Que  tu  aies  ete,  that  thou  mayest 
Qu'il  ait  ete,  that  he  may 

Que  nous  &jon%4t6,thatwemay 
Que  vous  ayez  ete,  that  you  may 
Qu'ils  aient  ete,     thut  they  may 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  ete,        that  I  might 
Que    tu    eusses  ^te,  that  thou 

mightest 
Qu'il  eut  ete,  that  he  might       g- 

Que  nous  eussions  ete,  that  we 

migid 
Que  vous  eussiez  ^te,  that  you 

might 
Qu'ils   eussent    ete,    that    they 

might 


Etre, 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 
PRESENT.  I        COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

to  be  I  Avoir  ete',  to  have  been 


Etant, 


PARTICIPLE. 
PRESENT.  j  COMPOUND. 

being  j  Ayant  ete,  having  heen\ 


PAST   OR   PASSIVE. 
]6t^,  (invariable^ 


VOCABULARY. 

Miche,  rich.  paresseux,  lazy,  idle. 

appliqu€,  diligent.  heureux,  happy. 

malheureux,  unhappy.  jeune,  young. 

content,  pleased,  contented.-  sage,  good. 

Jaible,  w^eak.  encore,  still,  again. 


56  X.   DIXIEME  LEgON. 

THEME  10. 

I  am  ill.  Thou  art  young.  Charles  is  my  friend.  We  are  hap- 
py. You  are  also  happy.  The  child  will  be  good.  Louisa  was  ill. 
William  and  Julius  have  also  been  ill.  This  boy  has  been  idle. 
This  girl  was  very  good.  He  will  be  contented.  You  would  also 
be  contented.  She  has  been  at  Paris.  Her  (son)  brother  has  been 
in  London.  We  have  been  in  France.  Your  mother  may  {pent) 
have  been (Comp. Inf.)  ill.  Yes,  indeed  (en  effet)  she  has  been  ill 
long.  Who  was  (has  been)  with  (chez)  your  father  ?  A  merchant 
has  been  with  my  father.  He  had  been  before  (auparavant)  with 
my  uncle. 

ADDITIONAL   THEME   ON    ETRE    CONJUGATED   AFFIRMATIVELY. 

1.  Having  been  sick,  he  is  still  weak.  2.  The  spoons  were  on 
the  table.  3.  We  were  still  sick.  4.  The  young  boy  was  at  the 
helm.  5.  I  am  among  my  (mes)  friends.  6.  I  shall  be  with  my 
friends  to-morrow.  7.  I  was  at  your  (voire)  father's  house  yester- 
day (L.  IV.  3).  8.  She  is  in  the  room.  9.  My  neighbor's  name 
is  William.  10.  I  should  be  happy  if  you  were  pleased.  11.  If 
you  are  unhappy,  how  can  you  (pourrez-vous)he  (inf.)  contented? 
12.  I  shall  be  pleased  to  see  you  (de  vous  voir)  to-morrow.  13. 
The  merchant  has  been  here  (ici)  to-day.  14.  He  had  been  at  his 
friend's  yesterday.  15.  Be  at  my  house  (chez-moi)  to-morrow. 
16.  Let  us  be  happy.  17.  Though  he  is  (Pres.  Subj.)  rich,  he  is 
more  (plus)  unhappy  than  you. 


NEGATIONS.  .57 

XI.     ONZ'IEME    LE9ON. 


NEGATIONS.  — THE    NEGATIVE    AND    INTERROGA^ 
TIYE  FORMS  OF  THE  AUXILIARIES. 

1.  -The  negation  not  is  rendered  by  the  two  words  ne  .  .  ,  pas.  Ne 
is  placed  before  the  verb  and  becomes  rC  before  a  vowel  or  silent  h  ; 
jpas  is  placed  immediately  after  the  verb.  In  compound  tenses  pas 
is  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle.  In  the  infinitive 
ne  and  pas  generally  both  precede  the  verb.  Ex. 
Je  ne  suis  pas.  I  am  not. 

Je  w'ai  pas  eu.  I  have  not  had. 

Ne  pas  etre,  less  frequently,  n'etre  pas.  Not  to  be. 

.  2.  The  words  jamais^  ever,  personne,  person,  and  rien,  any- 
thing, used  with  a  verb  preceded  by  ne  mean  respectively  never^ 
nohody,  nothing.  When  the  verb  is  understood,  as  in  answers,  the 
ne  is  omitted,  and  they  have  none  the  less  a  negative  meaning. 
When  used  with  a  verb  not  preceded  by  ne  they  are  always  affirmar 
tive.     Ex. 

Avez-vous  jamais  rien  vu  de  pareil  1  Have  you  ever  seen  anything  similar  % 

Je  n'ai  rien.  I  have  nothing. 

II  n'a  jamais  tort.  He  is  never  wrong. 

Pei-sonne  n'a  sommeil.  Nobody  is  sleepy. 

C'est  une  personne  qui  a  sommeil.  It  is  a  person  that  is  sleepy. 

Qui  a  sommeil  ?    Personne.  Who  is  sleepy  ?    Nobody. 

Qu'  avez-vous  1    Eien.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Noth- 
ing. 

8.  The  words  aucun,  nul,  no ;  nullement,  nowise,  not  at  all ;  9^^ .  .  . 
ni,  neither  .  .  .  nor ;  guere,  but  little,  but  few ;  and  que  in  the 
sense  of  but  or  only  ;  also  require  the  verb  to  be  preceded  by  ne, 
JH^e  (the  verb)  plus  means,  no  more,  not  any  more  left.     Ex. 

Je  n'ai  plus  de  pain.  I  have  no  more  bread. 

II  n'a  ni  pain  ni  vin.  ^        He  has  neither  bread  nor  wine. 
Elle  n'a  guere  de  patience.  She  has  but  little  patience. 

Nul  n'est  parfait.  No  one  is  perfect. 


58  XI.      ONZIEME   LEgON. 

Remark.    After  m  .  .  .  m  nouns  used  in  a  partitive  sense  take  neither 
preposition  nor  article ;  as,  ni  pain  ni  vin.  * 
For  further  rules  on  the  negative  see  P.  I.  L.  33,  and  P.  II.  L.  15. 

4.  In  interrogations  the  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  the  verb 
is  placed  after  it,  and  both  are  joined  by  a  hyphen,  as  :  aurez-^ous  ? 
avez-vous  eu  ?  When  the  verb  ends  with  a  vowel,  -t-  is  placed 
between  the  verb  and  il,  elle,  or  on,  as :  aura-t-iU  a-t-on  f  See  also 
L.  I.  Rem.  5. 

5.  AVOIR  AND  ETRE  CONJUGATED  NEGATIVELY. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT    TENSE. 


Je  n'ai  pas,  /  have  not 

Tu  n'as  pas,      •  thou  hast  not 

II  n'a  pas,  he  has  not 

Nous  n'avons  pas,  we  have  not 

Vous  n'avez  pas,  you  have  not 

Us  n'ont  pas,  they  have  not 


Je  ne  suis  pas,  I  am  not 

Tu  n'es  pas,  thou  art  not 

II  n'est  pas,  he  is  not 

Nous  ne  sommes  pas,  .      we  are  not 

Vous  n'etes  pas,  you  are  not 

lis  ne  sont  pas,  they  are  not 


COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  n'ai  pas  eu,      /  have  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'ai  pas  ete,     I  have  not  been,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Je  n'avais  pas,  I  had  not  or  did  not  I  Je  n'etais  pas,  I  was  not,  etc. 

have,  etc.  | 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Je  n'avais  pas  eu,  /  had  not  had,  etc.  |  Je  n'avais  pas  ete,  I  had  not  been,  etc. 
And  thus  with  all  compound  tenses. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  n'eus  pas,  /  had  not,  etc.  |  Je  ne  fus  pas,  I  was  not,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  n'aurai  pas,  etc.  |  Je  ne  serai  pas,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL    MOOD. 
Je  n'aurais  pas,  etc.  j  Je  ne  serais  pas,  etc. 


NEGATIONS. 


59 


Que  je  n*aie  pas,  etc. 
Que  je  n'eusse  pas,  etc. 
N*aie  pas,  etc. 


Ne  pas  avoir. 
(N'avoir  pas.) 


N'ayant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  eu. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
PRESENT. 

I  Que  je  ne  sois  pas,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

j  Que  je  ne  fusse  pas,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

I  Ne  sois  pas,  etc. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Ne  pas  etre. 
(N'etre  pas.) 

PARTICIPLES. 


N'etant  pas. 
N'ayant  pas  ete. 


INTERROGATIVE  CONJUGATION. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


PRESENT    TENSE. 

Ai-je, 
As-tu, 
A-t-il, 

have  19 

host  ihoxi  9 

has  he  ?  etc. 

Suis-je, 

Es-tu, 

Est-il, 

COMPOUNB    OP   THE    PRESEN 

Ai-je  eu, 

have  I  had?  etc.  |  Ai-je  ete. 

IMPERFECT. 

Avais-je,  etc. 

1  Etais-je,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Eus-je,  etc. 

1  Fus-je,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Aurai-je,  etc. 

Serai-je,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL   MOOD. 

Aurais-je,  etc. 

1 

Serais-je,  etc. 

ami? 

art  thou  ? 

is  he  ?  etc. 


have  I  been  ?  etc. 


60 


XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 


NEGATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  CONJUGATION. 

PRESENT. 


N'ai-je  pas, 
N'as-tu  pas, 
N'a-t-il  pas, 


N*avais-je  pas,  etc. 
N'eus-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurai-je  pas,  etc. 
N'aurais-je  pas,  etc. 


have  I  not  ? 

hast  thou  not  ? 

has  he  notf  etc. 


Ne  suis-je  pas, 
N'es-tu  pas, 
N'est-il  pas. 


am  I  not  ? 

art  thou  not? 

is  he  not  ?  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

J  N'etais-je  pas,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

I  Ne  fus-je  pas,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

I  Ne  serai-je  pas,  etc, 

CONDITIONAL. 

I  Ne  serais-je  pas,  etc. 


VOCABULAKY. 


Im  nouvdle,  the  news. 
la  lettre,  the  letter. 
le  chagrin,  the  grief. 
les  parents,  the  parents. 
le  tailleur,  the  tailor. 
le  bottler,  the  boot-maker. 
la  cerise,  the  cherry. 


tres,  very. 
pauvre,  poor. 
m€content,  discontented. 
mang€,  eaten. 
autrefois,  formerly. 
longtemps,  long,  a  long  time. 
vos,  plural  of  votre,  your. 


THEME  11. 


1.  I  have  a  friend.  2.  Hasfc  thou  also  a  friend  ?  3.  We  have 
friends.  4.  Have  you  also  friends  ?  5.  I  am  happy.  6.  I  am 
not  happy.  7.  Are  you  happy?  8.  Are  you  not  happy?  9. 
No,  we  are  not  happy ;  we  are  poor.^  10.  Formerly  we  were  very 
happy.  11.  You  are  not  rich.^  12.  Thou  hast  been  poor.  13. 
She  has  been  rich.  14.  Have  you  had  any  cherries?  15.  You 
have  been  idle.  16.  Hast  thou  been  ill  ?  No,  I  have  not  been 
ill  long.  17.  They  have  not  received  the  letter.  18.  Were  you 
(have  you  been)  at  (chez)  the  tailor's  ?  19.  I  have  not  been 
at  the  tailor's.     20.  I  have  been  at  the  boot-maker's;  but  (mais) 


1  These  adjectives  take  s  in  the  plural  (pauvres  — riches  J, 


NEGATIONS. 


61 


lie  was  not  at  home  (a  la  maison) .  21.  How  many  horses  had 
you?  22.  I  had  two  horses.  23.  Charles  would  not  have  been 
ill,  if  he  had  not  eaten  too  much  (^rojo).  24.  Be  contented.  25. 
Take  care  of  your  books. 


CONVERSATION. 


Quand  (when)  avez-vous  ^t^ 

au  spectacle  (theatre)  ? 
Charles,  seras-tu  content  ? 
Avez-vous  un  ami  ? 
Avez-vous  re9u  une  lettre  ? 
Ou  ^tait  ton  ami  Louis  ? 
Yos  parents  sont-ils  riches  ? 
Ou  avez-vous  ^te  hier  ? 
Oil  serez-vous  demain  ? 
Ta  soDur  a-t-elle  ^t^  malade  ? 
Avez-vous  des  affaires  (husiness)1 

N'etes-vous  pas  contents  ? 

Pourquoi  (y)hy)  etes-vous  me- 

contents  ? 
Pourquoi  avez-vous  du  chagrin  ? 
Serais-tu   content,    si    tu  avals 

beaucoup  de  livres  ? 


Nous  avons  ^t^  hier  au  spectacle. 

Oui,  M — ,  je  serai  content. 

Nous  avons  beaucoup  d'amis. 

J'ai  regu  une  lettre  de  Paris, 

II  4tait  k  Berhn. 

Nqn,  M — ,  ils  sont  pauvres. 

Nous  avons  ete  a  I'eglise. 

Nous  serons  a  I'ecole. 

Oui,  elle  a  ete  longtemps  malade. 

Oui,  M — ,  nous  avons   beaucoup 

d'affaires. 
Non,  M — ,  nous  sommes  mecon- 

tents. 
Nous  avons  eu  une  triste  (sad) 

nouvelle. 
Notre  mere  est  tres-malade. 
Oui,  M — ,  je  serais  bien  content. 


62.  XII.      DOUZIEME   LEgON. 

XII.    DOUZIEME    LE9ON 


DEMONSTRATIVE  AND  INTERROGATIVE  ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

Adjectives  in  French  agree  in  gendcir  and  number  with  the  notins  they 
limit ;  —  form  the  plural  according  to  the  rules  given  for  nouns  (L.  11.) ;  — • 
form  the  feminine  by  adding  e  mute  to  the  masculine.  If  the  masculine 
ends  in  e,  the  feminine  is  the  same.  Irregular  formations  will  be  given  in 
the  vocabularies  until  the  full  rules  are  given,  L.  xvii. 

1.'  The  Demonstrative  Adjectives  are  : — - 

Ce,  fem.  cette,  this,  that ;  plur.  ces,  these,  those. 
Ce — ci,  fem.  cette — ci,  this  (Here) ;  plur.  ces — cL 
Ce — /a,  fem.  cette  —  la,  that;  plur.  ces  —  la,  those. 

2.  As  ce  means  either  this  or  that,  whenever  in  English  Ihe 
words  this,  that,  these,  those  are  emphatic,  either  ci  (abbreviated  form 
of  id,  here)  or  la  (there)  are  appended  to  the  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Ce  chapeau,  this  hat.  ces  hommes,  these  men. 

cette  ville,  this  town.  ce  mime  livre,  this  same  book. 

Ce  gargon-ci,  this  boy  (here).  ce  gargon-la,  that  boy. 

cette  femme-ci,  this  woman  (here).  cette  femme-la,  that  woman. 

ces  arhres-ci,  these  trees.  ces  arbres-la,  those  trees. 

3.  Before  a  masculine  noun  which  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute, 
cet  is  used  instead  ce.     Ex. :  — 

Cet  arhre,  this  tree  (instead  of  ce  arhre.) 

Cet  habit,  this  or  that  coat  (instead  of  ce  hahit). 

4.  The  Interrogative  Adjective  is,  in  the  singular,  quel,  fem. 
quelle  ;  plur.  quels,  quelles,  which  or  what  ?     Ex. :  — 

Quel  livre,  which  book  1  plur.  quels  livres,  which  or  what  books  1 
Quelle  fleur,  which  or  what  flower  ? 
It  answers  also  to  the  exclamative  what  a  —  /    Ex. :  — 
Qud  beau  tableau  !  what  a  Ijeautiful  picture ! 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES.  63 


VOCABULARY. 

La  plante,  the  plant.  Vceuf,  m.  the  egg. 

le  champ,  the  field.  haut,  f.  haute,  high. 

la  cauleur,  the  color.  beau,  f.  belle,  beautiful. 

lajille,  the  girl.  grand,  f.  grande,  large,  great, 

fe  6cEt{/^  the  ox.  •                    bon,  f.  6onne,  good. 

la  vache,  the  cow.  <rop,  too.     mais,  but. 

I'heurg,  f .  the  hour.  connaissez-vous,  do  you  know  1 
/a  ro6e,  the  dress. 


READING  EXERCISE  12. 

Ceverre.  Cette  pomme-ci.  Cethomme.  Cesbas.  CesbotteS' 
Ik.  Cette  boite  est  haute.  Ces  enfants  sont  pauvres.  Le  frere  da 
ce  gar9on.  Deux  livres  de  ce  caf^.  Je  donne  ces  poires  k  cetta 
fille^i.  La  meme  eouleur.  Nous  avons  achet^  les  memes  plumes. 
J'ai  vu  ces  chiens-la.  Quels  chiens  avez-vous  vus  ?  Quel  beau 
cheval !  Quelle  belle  maison  !  Le  fils  de  cet  homme-lk  est  trea 
grand.  Quelle  heure  est-il?  H  est  trois  heures  (^o'clock).  U  est 
une  heure. 

THEME  12. 

1.  This  king  is  rich.  2.  This  queen  is  also  rich.  3.  This  man 
is  poor.  4.  These  men  are  poor.  5.  That  child  is  not  good  (sa^e). 
6.  That  woman  is  not  contented.  7.  This  tre^  is  very  high.  8. 
Those  trees  are  not  very  high.  9.  Whose  (a  qui)  is  this  pencil  1 
10.  Whose  are  these  pens?  11.  The  color  of  that  dress  is  beauti- 
ful (6eZ^e).  12.  The  field  of  that  man  is  large.  13.  These  oxen 
are  larger  (plus  grands')  than  those  cows.  14.  I  give  the  bread 
to  this  boy.  15.  I  give  these  flowers  to  those  girls.  16.  The 
parents  of  those  children  are  very  good.  17.  Which  boy?  18, 
Which  apples?  19.  What  a  beautiful  picture  !  20.  The  pleasure 
of  those  girls  was  not  very  great.  21.  What  o'clock  is  it  (transl. 
which  hour  is  it?)  22.  It  is  four  o'clock  (transl.  four  hours).  23. 
We  have  read  (lu)  the  same  books. 


64 


XIII,       TREIZEME   LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 


A  qui  (whose)  est  ce  canif  ? 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ? 

Oil  est  la  fille  de  cette  femme  ? 

Connaissez-vous  cette  fleur  ? 

Connaissez-vous  le  pere  de  ce 
gargon-la  ? 

Quel  papier  voulez-vous  ? 

Ces  plumes-ci  sont-elles  bonnes  ? 

Cette  ^glise  est-elle  haute  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  fleurs  ? 

A  qui  donnez-vous  ces  crayons  ? 

Trouve-ton  de  For  dans  ce 
pays? 

Voulez-vous  {do  you  wish,  lit- 
erally, wish  you)  ces  bas-ci 
ou  ces  gants-la  ? 

Trouvez-vous  ces  couleurs  belles  ? 

Quelle  heure  est-il  V 


II  est  k  ma  soeur. 

lis  sont  a  Mademoiselle  Julie. 

EUe  est  au  jardin. 

C'est  une  rose. 

Non  M — ,   mais  je    connais  (/ 

know)  sa  mere. 
Donnez-moi  ce  papier-lk. 
Oui,  M — ,  elles  sont  tres-bonnes 
Oui,  elle  est  tres-haute. 
Je  les  donne  h  cette  fiUe-ci. 
Je  les  donne  a  ce  gar9on-la. 
Oui,  M — ,   ce  pays-ci   est  riche 

en  or. 
Donnez-moi  ces  gants-lk. 


Oui,  ces  couleurs  sont  tres-belles. 
II  est  quatre  heures. 


XIII.    TREIZIEME    LE9ON 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.. 

I.   The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  :  — 

mon,  fern,  wa,  plur.  mes,  my. 


ton, 

son, 

noire 

voire, 

leur, 


notre, 
voire, 
leur. 


tes,  thy. 

ses,  his,  her,  its. 

nos,  our. 

vos,  your. 

leurs,  their. 


Ex. :  —  Mon  pere,  ta  mere,  ses  freres,  notre  ami,  vos  livres,  leurs  parents. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  65 

2.  The  possessive  adjectives  are  repeated  in  French  before  each 
substantive,  and  agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number  :  — 

Monfrere  et  ma  sceur,  my  brother  and  sister. 

3.  Man,  ton,  son,  are  used  instead  of  ma,  ta,  sa,  before  feminine 
words  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  in  order  to  avoid  the  hiatus 
which  would  result  from*  the  meeting  of  the  two  vowels.     Ex.  :  — 

Mon  amie,  my  (female)  friend;  son  dme,  his  soul. 

4.  Son,  sa,  ses,  each  mean  his,  her,  and  its ;  they  agree  in  gen- 
der with  the  following  noun,  as  :  — 

Lepere  aime  sonJUs,  the  father  loves  his  son. 

La  mere  aime  sonJUs  et  sajille,  the  mother  loves  her  son  and  her  daughter. 

5.  In  French,  votre  is,  from  politeness,  often  preceded  by  the 
words :  Monsieur,  Madame,  Mademoiselle ;  plur.  Messieurs,  Mes- 
dameSf  Mesdemoiselles,  which  are  not  expressed  in  English,  as,  — 

Monsieur  votre  p€re,  your  father. 
Mademoiselle  votre  sceur,  your  sister. 
Messieurs  vosfreres,  your  brothers. 

6.  In  expressions  such  as  "a  friend  of  yours,"  the  possessive  ad- 
jective must  be  used  in  French,  preceded  by  de,  as,  un  de  vos 
amis,  une  de  mes  tantes,  an  aunt  of  mine. 

7.  A  possessive  adjective 'must  always  precede  a  noun  denoting  a 
degree  of  relationship  when  a  relative  or  friend  is  addressed,  though 
none  is  used  in  English.  Ex.  Bonjour  ma  soeur,  good  morning, 
sister;  adieu,  mon  cousin,  good-by,  cousin.  The  words  papa, 
maman,  and  a  few  terms  of  endearment  are  excepted,  as,  bonjour 
papa,  honsoir  maman. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  demoiselle,  the  young  lady.  la  grand'mere,  the-grandmother. 

ia  tante,  the  aunt.  la  poche,  the  pocket. 

la  canne,  the  cane.  arrive,  e,  arrived. 

la  casquette,  the  cap.  pa7'ti,  e,  departed,  gone. 

le  (p-and-pere,  the  grandfather.  perdu,  lost. 

vieux,  old.  trouv^,  found. 


66  XITI.      TRETZIEME  LEgON. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  13. 

Mon  pere  est  bon.  Ma  mere  est  bonne.  Ton  frere  est  grand. 
Ta  soeur  n'est  pas  grande.  Notre  oncle  a  ete  riche.  Votre  tante 
est  pauvre.  Leurs  parents  seront  contents.  Mes  cousins  et  mes 
cousines  sont  arrives.  '  Les  peres  aiment  (love)  leurs  enfants.  No- 
tre grand'raere  a  perdu  sa  bourse.  J'ai  troHve  la  bourse  de  votre 
grand'mere.  Mon  amie  est  arrivee.  Madame  votre  mere  est-elle 
ici  (Jiere)  ?  Non,  elle  n'est  pas  ici ;  elle  est  a  Londres.  Mesde- 
moiselles  vos  soeurs  sont  parties. 

THEME  13. 

1.  My  dog  is  old.  2.  Thy  book  is  good.  3.  My  book  and 
(my)  pen.  4.  My  books  and  pens.  5.  Your  garden  is  beautiful. 
6.  Your  flowers  are  beautiful  (belles).  7.  My  sister  has  lost  her 
watch.  8.  Our  sisters  have  found  their  letters.  9.  These  children 
have  lost  their  father.  10.  These  parents  have  lost  their  children. 
11.  Here  is  (void)  thy  stick.  12.  Your  cousins  (f.)  have  been 
in  our  garden.  13.  My  soul  is  immortal  (immortelle).  14.  We 
have  received  this  letter  from  our  aunt.  15.  Our  uncle's  horse  (the 
horse  of  our  uncle)  is  old.  16.  Where  is  your  father  ?  17.  Where 
is  your  sister?     18.  I  have  found  the  purse  of  your  mother. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oil  est  mon  frere  ?  II  est  alM  (gone)  au  jardin. 

Oil  est  ton  hvre  ?  Le  voila  sur  la  table. 

Qui  a  perdu  sa  casquette  ?  Charles  a  perdu  sa  casquette. 

Qui  a  trouve  nos  crayons  ?  Henri  les  (them)  a  trouves. 

Que    cherchez-vous    (are  you  Je  cherche  mes  plumes.  ' 

looking  for)  ? 

A  qui  est  cette  canne  ?  Elle  est  k  Monsieur  votre  oncle. 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ?  Ds  sont    k    Mademoiselle    votre 

soeur.  J 

Youlez-vous  mes  crayons  ?  Non,  merci  (thank  you) . 

Connaissez-vous  mon  amie  ?  Oui,  je  la  connais  (know  her) . 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 


67 


Oh  etait  Monsieur  votre  pere  ? 
Oil  as-tu  trouve  ta  bourse  ? 
Qui  est  arrive  aujourd'hui  ? 
Avez-vous  ete  dans  voire  champ  ? 


U  etait  h  Berlin. 
EUe  etait  dans  ma  poche. 
La  fiUe  de  mon  oncle. 
Non,    Monsieur,  nous  avons   ^t^ 
dans  notre  jardin. 
Be  qui  avez-vous  re^u  cette  belle  C'est  un  cadeau  {present)  de  ma 
canne  ?  grand'mere. 


XIY.    QUATORZIEME    LE9ON. 


CAEDINAL  NUMBERS. 


1.    The  Cardinal  Numbers  are  :  — 


Un,  une,  one. 

deux,  two. 

trois,  three. 

quatre,  four. 

cinq,  five. 

six,  six. 

sept,  seven. 

huit,  eight. 

neuf,  nine. 

dix,  ten. 

onze,  eleven. 

douze,  twelve. 

treize,  thirteen. 

qiiatorze,  fourteen. 

quinze,  fifteen. 

seize,  sixteen. 

dix-sept,  seventeen. 

dix-huit,  eighteen. 

dix-nenf,  nineteen. 

vincji,  twenty. 

vingt  et  un,  twenty-one. 


vingt-deiix,  twenty-two. 
vingt-trois,  twenty-three. 
vingt-quatre,  twenty-four. 
vingt-cinq,  twenty-five,  etc. 
trente,  thirty. 
quarante,  forty. 
cinquante,  fifty. 
soixante,  sixty. 
soixante-dix,  seventy. 
soixante-onze,  seventy-one. 
soixante-douze,  seventy-two. 
soixante-treize,  seventy-three. 
soixante-quatorze,  seventy -four. 
soixante-quinze,  seventy-five. 
soixante- seize,  seventy-six. 
soixante-dix-sept,  seventy-seven. 
soixante-dix-huit,  seventy-eight. 
soixante-dix-nevf,  seventy-nine. 
quatre-vingt,  eighty. 
qvatre-vingt-un,  eighty-one. 
quatre-vingt-deux,  eighty-two. 


68  XIV.    quatoezi:eme    LEgoN. 

qaatre-vingt-dix,  ninety.  cent  deux,  a  hundred  and  two,  etc. 

quatre-vingt-onze,  ninety-one.  deux  cents,  two  hundred. 

qnatre-vingt-douze,  ninety-two.  trois  cents,  three  hundred,  etc. 

quatre-vingt-treize,  ninety-three,  etc.  quinze  cents,  fifteen  hundred. 
cent,  a  hundred.  mille,  mil,  a  thousand. 

cent  un,  a  hundred  and  one.  un  million,  a  million. 

Ex.:  Cinq  en/ants,  five  children. 

Trente-six  chevaux,  thirty-six  horses. 
Trois  cent  quatre-vingt-quinze  aunes,  395  yards. 
L'an  mil  huit  cent  soixante-cinq,  the  year  1865. 
Et,  and,  must  be  expressed  before  un  after  vingt,  trente,  quarante,  cinquante, 
soixante,  as  :  vingt  el  un,  etc.    Et  is  also  often  used  in  soixante  et  onze. 

2.  The  cardinal  numerals  do  not  admit  of  change  in  their  termi- 
nations except  un,  which  takes  an  e  in  the  feminine,  and  cent  and 
quatre^ingt.  Cent  takes  an  s  when  several  hundreds,  not  followed 
by  another  number,  are  mentioned,  as  :  — 

Trois  cents  francs,  300  francs. 

Sept  cents  personnel,  700  persons.  — But : 

Sept  cent  vingt  per sonnes,  720  persons. 

3.  Quatre-vingts  loses  its  s  when  followed  by  another  numeral. 

Ex.:  — 

Quatre-vingts  ^coliers,  80  pupils.  —  But : 
Quatre-vingt-deux  aunes,  82  yards. 

4.  Cent  and  miUe  are  not  accompanied  by  the  indefinite  article 
as  in  English,     Ex.:  — 

A  hundred  or  S^^sj^sand  pounds,  cent  ou  mille  livres. 

5.  When  one  thousand  is  U|ed  for  dates  it  is  rendered  in  French 
by  mil,  with  one  I  only,  thus  :  — -^ 

L'an  or  en  mil  huit  cent  cinquante-huit,  in  the  year  1858. 

6.  The  expression,  "I  am  20,  30,  40,  etc.,  years  old,"  cannot 
be  rendered  literally,  but  must  be  expressed  thus :  J'ai  vingt  ans,  — 
trente  ans,  etc.  How  old  are  you  ?  is  translated  thus  :  Quel  age 
avez-vous?     Ex.:  — 

Quel  age  a  votrefrere,  how  old  is  your  brother  ? 
II  a  dix-huit  ans,  he  is  eighteen  years  old. 


CARDINAL   NUMBERS. 


69 


7.    Collective  numbers  are  : 
Une  huitaine,  a  series  of  eight. 
Une  dizaine,   a  series  of  ten, 
half  a  score. 
V5     Une  dotizaine.  a  dozen. 


Une  vingtaine,  a  score. 
Une  centaine,  a  hundred. 
Un  millier,  a  thousand, 
Un  million,  a  million.. 


VOCABULARY. 


Lajille,  the  daughter. 

le  veau,  the  calf. 

le  cochon,  the  pig,  swine. 

la  hrehis,  the  sheep. 

le  lievre,  the  hare. 

le  chevreuil,  the  deer,  the  roe. 

ne",  f.  n^e,  born. 

la  rue,  the  street. 

V habitant,  m.  the  inhabitant. 

Ta^e,  m.  the  age. 

la  semaine,  the  week. 

encore,  still,    yois,  times. 

compte,  contains. 

environ,  about. 


chasse,  hunting. 

lejour,  the  day. 

la  nuit,  the  night. 

le  mois,  the  month. 

lejievre,  the  fever. 

Van,  m.  and  I'annee,  f.  the  year. 

I'heure,  the  hour. 

Za  minute,  the  minute. 

/e  p«W,  the  foot. 

vivait,  lived,     mourut,  died. 

combien,  how  much,  how  many, 

ybnf,  make,     ou,  or. 

vendue,  sold. 

en,  in.    en,  of  them. 


READING  EXERCISE  14. 

J'ai  trois  fils.  Vous  avez  quatre  filles.  Mon  oncle  a  eu  dix  en- 
fants.  II  a  perdu  cinq  fils  et  deux  filles.  Nous  avons  vu  35  boeufs, 
42  vaches,  88  veaux,  et  76  cochons.  Notre  voisin  a  eu  495 
brebis.  Combien  de  lievres  avez-vous  tues  (killed)  1  Nous  avons 
tu4  23  lievres  et  14  chevreuils.  Sept  et  huit  font  quinze.  24  et 
36  font  60.— 4  fois  8  font  32.-7  fois  9  font  63.  — 21  fois  32 
font  672.  Je  suis  ne  en  1814,  et  mon  frere  en  1818.  Ma  mere 
est  nee  en  1829.  La  ville  de  Londres  compte  10,000  rues,  600 
^glises,  249,500  maisons  et  plus  de  (more  than)  deux  millions 
d'habitants.  Lycurgue  vivait  en  880  avant  Jesus-Christ.  Quel 
age  ave^vous  ?    J'ai  quinze  ans.      / 

THEME  H.  fU 

1.  I  have  had  three  horses  and  five  dogs.     2.  My  cousin  has  34 
3.  My  neighbor  (m.)  had  36  Qxen.     4.  A  week  has  7 


70 


XIV.      QUATORZIEME   LEgON. 


days.  5.  80  days  make  a  month.  6.  12  months  or  52  weeks 
make  a  year.  7.  A  year  has  365  days.  8.  I  was  (^je  suis)  born 
in  the  year  {en)  1828.  9.  I  am  35  years  old.  10.  My  sister  was 
born  (f.)  in  the  year  1841 ;  she  is  17  years  old.  11.  How  much 
is  (font)  three  times  nine  ?  12.  3  times  9  make  27.  13.  6  times 
8  are  48.  14.  35  and  42  are  77.  15.  How  much  is  125  and 
264?  16.  My  mother  has  had  the  fever  during  6  weeks.  17.  A 
(the)  day  has  24  hours,  an  (the)  hour  60  minutes.  18.  Give 
(to)  Charles  32  florins  and  (to)  Louis  33  florins.  19.  Here  are 
200  pounds  of  sugar. 

CONVERSATION. 

Combien   de    fils    votre   oncle     II  a  encore  trois  fils. 

a-t-il  ? 
Combien  d'enfants  a-t-il  eus  ? 
Ou  sont  vos  deux  cousines  ? 
Quelle    est    la    hauteur    {the 

height)  de  cette  eglise  ? . 
Combien  font  5  et  7  ? 
Combien  font  15  et  25? 
Combien  font  20,  35  et  45  ? 
Combien  font  6  fois  8  ? 
Combien  font  12  fois  24? 
Quel  age  avez-vous  ? 
Quel  age  a  votre  soeur  ? 
Combien  de    florins    avez-vous 

regus  de  votre  pere  ? 
Combien  de  jours  a  une  annee  ? 


Combien  de  semaines  font  un 
mois? 

Combien  de  mois  font  une  an- 
nee? 

Avez-vous  ete  h  la  chasse 
hier? 


11  a  eu  sept  enfants. 
EUes  sont  a  1' eglise. 
Elle  a  327  pieds  de  hauteur. 

5  et  7  font  12. 
15  et  25  font  40. 
20  et  35  et  45  font  cent. 

6  fois  8  font  48. 

12  fois  24  font  288. 
J'ai  quatorze  ans. 
Elle  a  18  ans. 
J'ai  re9u  50  florins. 

Une  annee  a  365  jours  et  six 

heures. 
Quatre  semaines  et  deux  ou  trois 

jours  font  un  mois. 
Douze  mois  font  une  annee. 

Oui,   Monsieur,   toute  la  journee 
{all  day) . 


OEDINAL   NUMBERS. 


Avez-vous    tue    beaucoup    de     Nous  avons  tue  35  lievres. 

lievres  ? 
Charles  a-t-il  assez  d'argent  ?        Oh,  oui,  il  a  22  francs. 


XY.     QUINZIEME    LE9ON 


ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 

1.  Except  le  premier  and  le  second,  the  ordinal  numbers  are 
formed  from  the  cardinal  by  changing  e  mute  into  ieme  ;  and  by  add- 
ing this  syllable  to  those  which  end  in  another  letter.  But  cinq 
takes  u  before  ieme  (cinquieme) ,  and  neuf  changes  the  f  into  0 
(neuvieme) .     They  are  as  follows :  — 


'^^^^  I  the  first. 
.{ere,  ) 

\ 


the  second. 


Le  premier, 

la  premiere, 

le  second, 

la  seconde, 

le,  la  deuxieme, 

le  troisieme,  the  thu-d. 

le  quatrieme,  the  fourth. 

le  cinquieme,  the  fifth. 

le  sixieme,  the  sixth. 

le  septieme,  the  seventh. 

le  huitieme,  the  eighth. 

le  neuvieme,  the  ninth. 

le  dixieme,  the  tenth. 

le  onzieme,  the  eleventh. 

le  douzieme,  the  twelfth. 

le  treizieme,  the  thirteenth. 

le  quatorzieme,  the  fourteenth. 

le  quinzihne,  the  fifteenth. 

le  seizieme,  the  16th. 

le  dix-septieme,  the  17th. 

le  dix-huitieme,  the  18th. 

le  dix-neuvieme,  the  19th. 


le  vingtieme,  the  20th. 

le  vingtet  unieme,  the  21st. 

le  vingt-deuxihne,  the  22d,  etc. 

le  trentieme,  the  30th. 

le  quarantieme,  the  40th. 

le  cinquantieme,  the  50th. 

le  soixantieme,  the  60th. 

le  soixante-dixieme,  the  70th. 

le  soixante-onzieme,  the  71st. 

le  soixante-douzieme,  the  72d,  etc. 

le  quatre-vingtieme,  the  80th. 

le  quatre-vingt-unieme,  the  81st. 

le  quatre-vingt-dixieme,  the  90th. 

le  centieme,  the  100th. 

le  cent  et  unieme,  the  lOlst. 

le  cent  deuxieme,  the  102d,  etc. 

le  cent  vingtieme,  the  120th. 

le  deux  centieme,  the  200th. 

le  six  cent  soixante-quinzieme,    the 

675th. 
le  millieme,  the  lOOOth. 
le  dernier,  the  last. 


72  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEpON. 

2.  Unieme  is  used  only  after  vingt,  trente,  quar ante,  etc.,  sls: 
Charles  est  le  vingt  et  unieme  de  sa  classe. 

3.  Days  of  the  month  (except  le  premier  and  le  dernier)  are 
expressed  by  cardinal  numbers,  as  :  — 

The  first  of  April,  le  premier  Avril.  —  But : 

The  2d,  3d,  4th,  etc.,  of  May,  le  deux,  trois,  quatre,  etc.,  mai  (or  de  mai). 

The  eleventh  of  Maxch,  le  onze  (without  apostrophe)  mars. 

The  twentieth  of  June,  le  vingt  juin. 

The  question,  "  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?  "  is  trans- 
lated :  Quel  quantieme  avons-nous  aujourd^hui  ?  or,  Quel  jour  du 
mois  avons-nous  ? 

The  English  "  on  the  sixth,"  etc.,  is  rendered  in  French,  without  prepo- 
sition, le  six Ex. :  On  the  sixth  of  May,  le  six  mai. 

4.  Proper  names  of  princes,  etc.,  take  in  French  the  cardinal 
numbers  without  the  article,  except  the  first  and  semetimes  the  sec- 
ond, as :  — 

Henri  premier,  Henry  the  first. 
Henri  second  or  deux,  Henry  the  second. 
Henri  quatre,  Henri  the  fourth. 
Louis  quatorze,  Louis  the  fourteenth. 

Note.    The  German  Emperor,  Charles  V.,  bears  in  French  the  name  of  Charles- 
Quint,  and  the  Pope  Sixtua  V.  that  of  Sixte-  Quint. 

5.  Numeral  adverbs  are  formed  from  ordinal  numbers  by  adding 
-^nent  or  -ement  to  the  final :  — 

Premierement,  firstly.  Deuxiemement,  secondly.    Troisiemement,  thirdly,  etc. 

6.  Fractional  numbers  are  expressed  by  ordinal  numbers,  as  in 
English,  but  only  from  five  upwards,  as  :  — 

Tin  cinquieme,  a  fifth.  Un  sixieme,  a  sixth. 

Un  hultieme,  an  eighth.  Un  dixieme,  a  tenth. 

The  others  are  as  follows  :  — 

Half  (adj.),  demi.  f.  demie.     The  half,  la  moiti^  (noun). 
A  third,  un  tiers.     A  quartdV  or  fourth,  un  quart. 
One  pound  and  a  half,  une  livre  et  demie. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS.  73 

7.  The  hours  of  the  day  or  night  are  expressed  thus  :  — 

Two  o'clock,  deux  heures. 

A  quarter  past  two,  deux  heures  et  (un)  quart. 

Half  past  two,  deux  heures  et  demie. 

A  quarter- to  three,  trois  heures  moins  un  quart. 

At  twelve  o'clock  (at  noon),  a  midi. 

At  twelve  o'clock  (midnight),  a  minuit. 

8.  Proportional  numbers  which  express  a  quantity   multiplied, 

are:  — 

Simple,  simple.  quadruple,  fourfold. 

double,  double,  twofold.  centuple,  centuple,  a  hundred-fold. 

triple,  triple,  threefold. 

VOCABULARY. 

Janvier,  January.  Dimanche,  Sunday. 

Fevrier,  February.  Lundi,  Monday. 

Mars,  March.  Mardi,  Tuesday  (and  on  Tuesday). 

Avril,  April.  „      Mercredi,  Wednesday. 

Mai,  May.  Jeudi,  Thursday. 

Juin,  June.  Vendredi,  Friday. 

Juillet,  July.  Samedi,  Saturday. 

Aoitt,  August.  le  siecle,  the  century. 

Septembre,  September.  Vincendie,  m.  a  fire,  conflagration. 

Octobre,  October.  la  partie,  the  part,  portion. 

Novemhre,  November.  la  place,  the  place. 

Decembre,  December.  la  classe,  the  class. 

en  Janvier,  in  January.  a  present,  at  present. 

nous  vivons,  we  live.  numero,  number  (denoting  order,  as 
nombre,  number.  number  of  a  house,  of  a  rule,  of  a 

page). 

9.  Rule  for  ^7  and  ce  as  expletive  subjects  of  etre.  Use  il 
if  the  verb  is  followed :  1.  hy  mi  adjective  Wmiting  something  which 
comes  after  it  in  the  sentence ;  2.  by  temps  or  by  the  hour  of  the 
day.  In  all  other  cases  use  ce.  Ex.  Faites  cela,  c^est  facile,  do 
that,  it  is  easy.  But,  II  est  facile  de  faire  cela,  it  is  easy  to  do 
that.  II  est  temps  de  le  faire,  it  is  time  to  do  it.  II  est  six  heures, 
it  is  six  o'clock.      Cest  vous,  ce  71* est  pas  moi,  it  is  you,  it  is  not  T. 


74  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  15. 

Je  suis  dans  ma  soixante-douzieme  annee.  Charles  est  le  pre- 
mier de  sa  classe.  Louis  est  le  neuvieme,  Henri  le  dix-huitieme  et 
Jules  le  dernier.  Le  pape  (  pope)  Gr^goire  VII  etait  Fennemi  de 
Henri  IV.  Nous  vivons  dans  le  dix-neuvieme  siecle.  Romulus 
fut  le  premier,  Numa  Pompilius  le  second  roi  de  Rome.  Pierre 
premier  fut  surnomme  (was  surnamed)  le  grand.  Avril  est  le 
quatrieme,  Juin  le  sixieme  et  Decembre  le  dernier  mois  de  I'annee. 
La  semaine  est  la  cinquante-deuxieme  partie  de  I'annee.  Ma  soeur 
Elisabeth  est  n^e  le  vingt-huit  juillet,  mil  huit  cent  trente-cinq. 
J'ai  rcQu  trois  livres  et  demie  de  caf(^  et  cinq  livres  et  un  quart  de 
Sucre.  Charles  XII  etait  roi  de  Suede.  Le  27  (de)  septembre 
1829,  un  incendie  detruisit  (destroyed)  k  Constantinople  11,000 
maisons;  700  personnes  perirent  (perished)  dans  les  flammes. 

THEME  15! 

1.  A  month  is  the  twelfth  part  of  a  year.  2.  What  day  of  the 
month  is  it  to-day?  3.  It  is  the  24th  [of]  June.  4.  I  am  the 
third,  my  cousin  John  the  seventh.  5.  January  is  the  first,  Febra- 
ary  the  second,  March  the  third  month  of  the  year.  6.  Napoleon 
died  at  St.  Helena  (Sainte-Helene)  the  5th  of  May,  1821.  7.  My 
grandmother  is  at  present  in  her  78th  year.  8.  What  o'clock 
(quelle  heure)  is  it  now  ?  It  is  four  o'clock,  or  half  past  four. 
9.  Louis  the  Sixteenth,  king  of  (de)  France,  was  beheaded  (fut  de- 
capite)  at  Paris  the  21st  of  January,  1793.  10.  Frederick  the 
Second  was  king  of  Prussia.  11.  Peter  the  Great  of  Russia  died  at 
St.  Petersburgh  (St.  Petershourg)  the  8th  of  February,  1725,  in 
the  53d  year  of  his  age.  12.  We  have  received  62  pounds  of  cof- 
fee, \l  pounds  of  sugar,  and  2  J  pounds  of  tea. 

CONVERSATION. 

Quand  etes-vous  arriv^.  ?  Je  suis  arrive  le  premier  juin. 

Quand  avez-vous  vu  votre  mere  ?  Hier  a  cinq  heures. 

Mademoiselle  Sophie  est-elle  la  Je  crois  (/  think)  qu'elle  est  la 
premiere  ou  la  deuxieme  ?  deuxieme. 


INDEFINITE   ADJECTIVES. 


75 


Quel  ^ge  a-t-elle  ? 

Dans  quelle  annee  est-elle  nee  ? 

Dans  quel  mois  ? 

Quel  jour  ? 

De  quel  roi  parlez-vous  ? 

Quand  mourut-il  ? 

Quelle  ^heure  est-il? 

A  quelle  heure  etes-vous  parti  ? 

Quel  quantieme  avons-nous  au- 

jourd'hui  ? 
Combien  d'aunes  voulez-vous  ? 
Quand  mourut  Charlemagne  ? 
Quel  age  a  votre  gi'and-pere  ? 


Elle  a  quinze  ans. 

EUe  est  nee  en  1851. 

Au  mois  d'Octobre. 

Le  onze. 

Nous  parlons  de  Louis  XVI. 

En  1793. 

II  est  sept  heures  et  (un)  quart  ou 

sept  heures  et  demie. 
Je  suis  parti  a  huit  heures  moins 

un  quart. 
Nous  avons  le  vingt-cinq.     . 
C'est  le  vingt-cinq. 
Donnez-moi  seize  aunes  et  demie. 
II  mourut  en  814,  le  28  Janvier. 
II  est  a  present  dans  sa  quatre- 


XVI.     SEIZIEME    LE9ON 


INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  The  Indefinite  adjectives  precede  the  noun  to  which  they  he- 
long,  and  agree  with  it  in  number  and  gender.  They  are  sometimes 
used  pronominally  without  a  noun.     They  are  as  follows  :  — 


Chaqae,  m.  and  f.  > 
tout,ttoute,  I  every,  all. 


;,} 


not  one,  no. 


aucun,  e 

mil,  nulle 

maint,  e,  many  a. 

qudque,  some,  any. 


quelques,  pi,  some. 
certain,  e,  a  certain. 
plusieurs,  pi.  m.  and  f.  several. 
divers,  f.  -es,         .) 
differents,  f.  -ies,    )  ^ 


different. 


76  XVI.      SEIZIEME   LEgON. 

Ex.  Chague  maison,  every  house.  quelques  pommes,  some  apples. 

toute  ville,  every  town.  phisieurs  €coliers,  several  pupils. 

aucun  pays,  no  country.  certains  mots,  cei'tain  words. 

nulle  regie,  no  rule.  differentes  enireprises,  different  en- 
maint  homme,  many  a  man.  terprises. 

quelque  argent,  some  money. 

2.  Tout  has  the  double  meaning  of  every  and  all  or  whole ;  in 
the  latter  case  it  is  accompanied  by  an  article  or  a  possessive  adjec- 
tive. Toute  ville  (without  article)  signifies  every  town ;  toute  la 
ville  means  all  the  town  or  the  whole  town.  The  plural  of  tout  is 
masc.  tous,  fern,  toutes.  Ex. :  Tous  les  hommes,  all  men ;  toutes 
les  lettres,  all  the  letters ;   Tous  ses  enfants,  all  his  children. 

3.  Aucun  and  nul  can  only  be  used  of  individual  things,  and  an- 
swer to  the  English  not  one.  They  require  the  particle  ne  to  be 
prefixed  to  the  verb.  (In  most  cases  the  English  no  is  translated 
point  de  or  pas  de.)     Ex.  :  — 

Je  n'ai  aucunefaute,  I  have  not  one  mistake. 

Je  n'ai  pas  de  (or  point  de)faute,  I  have  no  mistake. 

4.  Quelconque,  whatever,  takes  its  place  after  the  noun.  Ex. 
Un  livre  quelconque,  a  (any)  book  whatever. 

VOCABULAEY. 

L'€pine,  f.  the  thorn.  mortel,  -le,  mortal. 

.  la  chose,  the  thing.  lafemme,  the  woman. 

le  temps,  time,  weather.  le  motif,  the  motive. 

la  nouvelle,  the  news.  ,         I'ennemi,  m.  the  enemy. 

le  nom,  the  name.  rare,  rare. 

le  paysan,  the  peasant.  froid,  e,  cold. 

pretez,  lend.  le  meme,  the  same. 

lafaute,  the  fault,  mistake.  depuis,  since. 

I'erreur,  f.  the  error.  aime,  loves. 

la  version,  the  translation.  quelque  chose,  something. 

READING  EXERCISE  J6. 

Nulle  rose  n'est  sans  epines.  Notre  maitre  de  musique  donne 
chaque  jour  six  legons.  Plusieurs  personnes  sont  arrivees  de  Vien- 
ne.  Dieu  est  le  pere  de  tous  les  hommes.  Chaque  age  a  ses  plai- 
sirs  et  ses  chagrins.  Tous  les  hommes  sont  mortels.  Tout  ce  pays 
est  pauvre.     Toute  chose  a  son  temps.     Je  n'ai  aucune  nouvelle  de 


INDEFINITE   ADJECTIVES.  77 

! 
mon  frere.  Je  connais  quelques  families  riches  dans  cette  ville. 
Nous  avons  re9u  aujourd'hui  diverses  lettres.  Plusieurs  hommes 
ont  le  meme  nom.  Maint  paysan  est  tres  pauvre.  On  a  parle 
(^spoken)  de  differentes  entreprises.     Pretez-moi  quelques  livres. 

THEME  16. 

1.  Every  child  likes  playing  (Je  jeu).  2.  Each  town  has  a 
church.  3.  You  have  several  faults  in  your  translation.  4.  Every 
man  is  liable  {sujet)  to  error.  5.  My  brother  has  found  some  pen- 
cils, whose  (a  qui)  are  they?  6.  The  whole  night  was  cold 
(froide).  7.  All  the  houses  of  this  town  are  very  high  (Jiautes). 
8.  I  do  not  know  the  names  of  all  animals.  9.  John  has  lost  sev- 
eral pens.  10.  The  king  had  different  motives.  11.  This  father 
has  lost  all  his  children.  12.  No  rule  without  exception  (^excep- 
tion). 13.  Certain  books  are  not  good  for  young  people  (la  jeun- 
esse).  14.  I  have  not  one  enemy.  15.  Every  mother  loves  her 
children.  16.  All  the  children  love  (aiment)  their  parents.  17. 
It  is  rare  to  (d')  have  several  good  friends. 

CONVERSATION. 

Ai-je  des  fautes  dans  ma  ver-  Oui,  mon  ami,  vous  avez  plusieurs 

sion  ?  fautes. 

Quelles  sont  les  fautes  ?  Les  voici. 

Qui  a  dit  cela  (^said  so)  ?  Tous  les  enfants  Font  dit. 

Oil  trouve-t-on  cette  plante?  On  la  (it)  trouve  dans  tous  les 

pays  de  F Europe. 

A  qui  sont  ces  maisons  ?  Toutes  ces  maisons  sont  a  mon  on- 

cle. 

Quels  motifs  ave&vous  eus  ?  Nous  avons  eu  divers  motifs. 

As-tu  beaucoup  de  fautes  ?  Non,  M  — ,  je  n'ai  aucune  faute. 

Qui  est  mortel  ?  Tous  les  hommes  sont  mortels. 

A-t-elle  trouv^  quelque  chose  ?  Oui,  elle  a  trouve  une  bourse. 

Ou   avez-vous   ete   la  semaine  •  J'ai   4te   dans  plusieurs  endroits 

demiere  ?  (  places) . 

A  quoi  (to  what)  les  hommes  lis  sont  sujets  k  I'erreur. 

sont-ils  sujets  ? 


78  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 


XYII.    DIX-SEPTIEME    LE9ON 


ADJECTIVES.  — FORMATION   OF   THE  FEMININE 
AND   OF   THE   PLURAL. 

1.  General  rule.  The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  formed  by 
adding  an  e  to  the  masculine  termination,  if  this  does  not  end  in  e 
mute.  Ex.  :  Petit,  small,  little,  fem.  petite ;  joli,  pretty,  fem. 
jolie;  applique,  diligent,  appliquee, 

2.  Particular  rules.  Adjectives  which  end  in  e  mute  are 
alike  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  gender :  facile,  easy,  fem.  /a- 
die  ;  sage,  wise,  fem.  sage. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  el,  eil,  and  w, — further,  monosyllables 
ending  in  s  and  t,  double  their  final  consonant  before  e  mute  of  the 
feminine, as:  Gruel,  cruel,  fem.  cruelle ; pareil,  like,  such,  i^m.  pa- 
reiUe ;  hon,  good,  fem.  bonne ;  gros,  big,  fem.  grosse ;  has,  low, 
fem.  basse  ;  sot,  stupid,  fem.  sotte. 

4.  Adjectives  which  end  in  f  become  feminine  by  changing  f 
into  ve,  as :  vif  quick,  lively,  f.  vive  ;  neuf,  new,  f.  neui-^e ;  actif, 
active,  f.  active;  href,  short,  f.  breve. 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  x,  change  this  x  into  se,  as :  Heureux, 
happy,  lucky,  f.  heureuse  ;  jaloux,  jealous,  f.  jalouse. 

6.  Adjectives  which  end  in  er  and  et,  take  in  the  feminine  the 
grave  accent,  as  :  Leger,  light,  f.  legere  ;  complet,  complete,  f.  com- 
plete. Those  in  gu  have  gue  in  the  fem.  to  preserve  the  sound  of  m 
(see  p.  17,  Excep.),  as :  aigu,  acute,  f.  aigu'e. 

7.  Of  the  adjectives  ending  in  c,  three  change  this  c  into  che, 
viz  :  Blanc,  white,  f.  blanche  ;  franc,  frank,  f.  franche  ;  sec,  dry, 
f.  seche. 

The  others  ending  in  c  take -que,  as:  Turc,  Turkish,  f.  turque ; 
public,  pubhc,  f.  publique  ;   Grec,  Greek,  has  in  the  fem.  ^recque. 


ADJECTIVES.  79 

8.  The  following  adjectives  do  not  quite  agree  with  the  foregoing 
rules:  — 

Long,  long,  f.  longue.  €xpr€s,  express,  f.  expresse. 

Jrais,  fresh,  f.  fraiche.  muet,  dumb,  mute,  f.  muette. 

^pais,  thick,  f.  €paisse.  sujet,  subject,  f.  sujette. 

doux,  sweet,  soft,  f.  douce.  malin,  wicked,  f.  maligne, 

faux,  false,  i.fausse.  h€nin,  benign,  f.  b€nlghe. 

9.  The  following  are  more  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their  fem- 
inine, as :  — 

Beau  (hd),  beautiful,  f.  belle, 
nouveau  (nouvel),  new,  f.  nouvelle. 
mou  (mol),  soft,  f.  moHe. 
fou  (fol),  mad,  foolish,  i.folle. 
vieux  (vieil),  old,  f.  vieille. 

Note.  The  forms  in  parentheses,  hd,  nouvel,  etc.,  are  used  before  mascu- 
line nouns  beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  as  :  un  hd  arhre,  a  fine  tree ; 
un  nouvel  ai-dre,  a  new  order ;  unfol  espoir,  a  mad,  wild  hope. 

10.  The  rules  given  for  the  plural  of  substantives  apply  also  to 
adjectives.     Ex.  :  — 

Grand,  f.  grande ;  plur.  grands,  f.  grandes. 
appliqu€,  f.  appliqu€e ;  plur.  appliques,  f.  appliqu€es. 
gras,  f.  grasse,  fat ;  plur.  gras,  f.  grasses, 
royal,  f.  royale,  royal ;  plur.  royaux,  f,  royales. 
beau,  f.  belle,  beautiful ;  plur.  beaux,  f.  belles, 
vieux,  f.  vieille,  old ;  plur.  vieux,  f.  vieilles. 
Fm,  mou,  and  bleu  make  in  the  plural  fous,  mous,  and  bleus. 

11.  The  adjective  must  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
substantive  which  it  qualifies,  as  :  — 

La  grande  maison,  the  large  house. 

La  maison  est  grande,  the  house  is  large. 

T-ja  jolie  rose,  the  pretty  rose. 

Ces  roses  sont  tr^-jolies,  these  roses  are  very  pretty. 

The  adjective  is  more  frequently  used  substantively  in  French  than  in 
English.    Ex.  Le paresseux,  the  lazy  (one). 


80  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME    LEgON. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  m^dedne,  the  medicine.  agrrahle,  agreeable. 

I'ivoire,  m.  irory.  amer,  amere,  bitter. 


la  violette,  the  violet. 


mur,  e. 


ripe. 


la  montagne,  the  mountain.  aimahle,  amiable. 

la  liberty,  liberty.  immortel,  -le,  immortal. 

la  robe,  the  dress,  gown.  cher,  chere,  dear. 

I'herbe,  f.  the  grass.  obe'issant,  e,  obedient. 

vrai,  e,  true.  precieux,  -se,  precious. 

la  voix,  the  voice.  corps,  m.  body. 
utile,  useful. 

READING  EXERCISE  17. 

Cet  arbre  est  tres-gros.  Yoici  deux  gros  arbres.  La  m^decine 
n'etait  pas  bonne  ;  elle  etait  tres-araere.  Nos  enfants  sont  heureux. 
Yos  fiUes  ne  sont  pas  beureuses;  elles  sont  tres  -  malbeureuses. 
Vous  seriez  aimable,  si  (if)  vous  etiez  appliquee.  Voici  nne  tres- 
jolie  maison,  elle  est  encore  neuve.  Cette  eglise  est  vieille.  Yos 
chevaux  sont  vieux.  Les  chateaux  royaux  sont  tres-beaux.  Les 
dents  longues  et  blanches  de  1' elephant  fournissent  (^furnish) 
rivou-e.  La  fiUe  de  notre  voisin  est  muette.  lis  ne  sont  pas 
obeissants.     J'avais  une  oie  qui  (which)  etait  grosse  et  grasse. 

THEME  17. 

1.  The  rose  is  pretty;  the  violets  are  also  pretty.  2.  My  room 
is  small;  your  house  is  large.  3.  This  news  is  not  true.  4.  My 
father  is  good;  my  mother  is  also  good.  5.  These  geese  are  big 
and  fat.  6.  What  beautiful  houses  !  7.  Henry's  books  are  useful 
and  agreeable.  8.  Your  windows  are  very  small  and  low.  9.  My 
body  is  mortal,  but  my  soul  is  immortal.  10.  Our  town  is  very  old. 
11.  Her  sister  is  not  handsome.  12.  This  house  is  well  situated 
(hien  situee).  13.  This  apple  is  not  ripe,  but  these  pears  are  too 
(trop)  ripe.  14.  Is  this  butter  fresh  ?  15.  The  grass  is  very  thick. 
16.  Ivory  is  white ;  my  teeth  are  not  so  (sz)  white.  17.  Her  voice 
is  very  sweet.  18.  I  have  received  a  long  letter  from  my  father. 
19.  What  a  foolish  (§  9,  Note)  hope  !    20.  That  medicine  was  very 


ADJECTIVES. 


81 


bitter.  21.  Louisa's  dress  is  beautiful,  but  her  bonnet  is  not  very 
beautiful.  22.  My  shoes  are  very  old.  23.  The  leaf  is  dry.  24. 
My  mother  is  happy ;  my  sisters  are  also  happy.  25.  Your  letter 
was  too  short.     26.  That  girl  is  very  foolish  and  idle. 

CONVERSATION. 

Non,  elle  est  immortelle. 


L'ame  de  I'homme  est-elle  mor- 

telle  ? 
Qui  est  malade  chez  vous  ? 
Prend-elle  (^does  she  take)  de  la 

medecine  ? 
Qui  est  arrive  ? 
A-t-il  apporte  quelque  chose  ? 

Etes-vous  heureux  ? 

Comment  trouvez-vous  (^how  do 

you  like)  cette  rose  ? 
Votre  robe  est-elle  vieille   ou 

neuve  ? 
Notre  version  est-elle  longue  ? 
Comment  trouvez-vous  ces  deux 

^coliers  ? 
Sont-ils  obeissants  ? 


C'est  ma  tante  qui  est  malade. 

Oui,  M — ,  elle  prend  une  mede- 
cine tres-amere. 

Mon  oncle  Richard. 

II  a  apporte  un  bel  oiseau,  un 
perroquet  {parrot). 

Oh !  non,  nous  sommes  malheU' 
reux! 

Je  la  trouve  trfes-belle. 

Elle  n'est  pas  vieille ;    elle  est 

toute  neuve. 
Non,  elle  n'est  pas  bien  longue. 
lis  sont  tres-paresseux. 


Non,  M — ,  lis  ne  sont  pas  obeis- 
sants. 
A vez-vous  perdu  quelque  chose  ?    Oui,   Monsieur,   j'ai    perdu    raa 

vieille  casquette  {cap). 


82  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

XYIII.    DIX-HUITIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  PLACE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

1.  General  rule.      Adjectives   generally  follow   their 

NOUNS. 

2.  Particular  rules.  The  following  generally  precede  the 
substantive : 

Beau,  fine.  merchant,  wicked. 

bon,  good.  mei/leur,  better. 

grand,  great,  large.  moindre,  less,  least. 

gros,  big.  petit,  little. 

jeune,  young.  saint  holy. 

mauvais,  bad.  vieux,  old.    vrai,  true. 

Ex. :  —  Un  beau  pays,  a  fine  country. 

Une  grande  ville,  a  large  town  or  city. 
Un  jeune  lion,  a  young  lion. 
Vn  mauvais  lit,  a  bad  bed. 
Un  meilleur  avis,  a  better  advice. 
Un  vieux  soldat,.  an  old  soldier,  etc. 
Note.     Grand  is  placed  after  its  noun,  when  it  signifies  tall :  un  homme 
grand,  a  tall  man. 

N.  B.  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  substantives  preceded  by  an  adjective, 
when  used  in  the  partitive  sense,  take  only  de  before  them,  instead  of  duj  de, 
la,  or  des.  (See  L.  v.,  4.)  Ex. :  De  bon  vin,  (some)  good  wine;  de  belles 
Jleurs,  beautiful  flowers. 

Note.  Exceptions  to  this  rule  are :  du  bon  sens,  good  sense ;  des  jeunes 
gens,  young  men ;  des  petitspois,  green  peas ;  and  other  expressions  in  which 
the  noun  and  adjective  form  really  but  one  compound  word. 

3.  Monosyllabic  adjectives,  except  those  denoting  some  physical 
property  (color,  taste,  form,  etc.') ,  precede  the  noun.  Ex.  :  Uit 
long  discours,  unfol  amour. 

4.  Adjectives  qualifying  a  noun  followed  by  a  limiting  phrase  or 
clause,  precede  the  noun.  Ex. :  Vimmoriel  auteur  du  Paradis 
perdu. 


THE   PLACE   OF   ADJECTIVES.  83 

5.  Many  adjectives,  when  taken  in  their  literal  sense,  follow, 
when  taken  figuratively,  precede  the  substantive,  as  :  — 

FIGURATIVELY.  LITERALLY. 

Un  tendre  amitie,  a  tender  friend-    De  la  viande  tendre,  tender  meat. 

ship. 
mon  pmivre  enfant,  mj  "poor  child.        un  enfant  pauvre,  a  poor  (indigent) 

child. 
un  prof  and  silence,  a  deep  silence.  un  foss€  profond,  a  deep  ditch. 

6.  Many  adjectives  take  their  place  sometimes  before,  sometimes 
after  the  noun,  without  changing  their  signification,  simply  for  the 
sake  of  euphony  or  stress.  This  is  mostly  to  be  seen  when  the  ad- 
jective is  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  by  ce,  cette.  We  say, 
for  instance  :  une  verite  aff reuse,  a  frightful  truth,  but,  Vaffreuse  or 
cette  affreuse  verite: 

L' inflexible  dureM  des  riches. 

The  inflexible  hardness  of  the  rich. 

Cette  affligeante  nouvelle  se  r€pandit  dans  la  ville. 

This  afflicting  news  spread  (soon)  in  the  town. 

7.  Some  adjectives  have  a  different  meaning,  according  as  they 
Btand  before  or  after  their  noun  :  — 

Mon  cher  ami,  my  dear  friend  (de-     Un  livre  cher,  a  dear  book  (denoting 

noting  affection).  the  price). 

«ti  brave  homme,  a  worthy  man.  un  homme  brave,  a  brave  (courageous) 

man. 
un  honnete  homme,  an  honest  man.         un  homme  honnete,   a  civil  or  polite 

man. 
la  dernier c  ann€e,  i\iQ  last  jQQX  {oi  a.    I'ann^e  derniere,  last  year  (the  past 
certain  space  of  time),^  year). 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  soldat,  the  soldier.  am&icain,  e,  American. 

les  gens,  people.  simple,  simple. 

attentif  -ve,  attentive.  modeste,  modest. 

vert,  e,  green.  •       vertueux,  -se,  virtuous. 
bleu,  e,  blue.  .      laborieux,  -se,  laborious 

1    For  instance :  He  spent  the  last  year  of  his  life  at  Paris,  ilpassa  la  derniert 
annee  de  sa  vie  a  Paris, 


84  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEMB  LEgON. 

aveugle,  blind.  nature!,  -le,  natural. 

ta  musique,  the  music.  le  sentiment,  the  sentiment. 

noir,  e,  black.  la  fum€e,  the  smoke. 

remain,  e,  Roman.  incroyable,  incredible. 

Varm^e,  f.  the  army.  I'application,  f.  the  application. 

le  malheur,  misfortune.  deja,  already. 
le  vaisseau,  the  vessel. 
Note.    Adjectives  denoting  nationality  are  not  written  with  a  capital. 
Ex.:  Lalanguefrangaise. 

READING  EXERCISE  18. 

J'ai  des  raisins  doux.  Ce  sont  des  jeunes  gens  attentifs.  La 
couleur  verte  est  la  couleur  de  la  nature.  Notre  voisin  a  un  habit 
bleu  et  une  casquette  rouge.  Yoici  une  jeune  fille  aveugle.  You- 
lez-vous  cette  petite  boite  ?  EUe  a  regu  une  lettre  amusante  de 
sa  vieille  (^old)  cousine.  Avez-vous  de  bonne  encre?  J'aime  la 
musique  italienne.  Voici  deux  aunes  de  drap  vert  et  quatre  aunes 
de  drap  noir.  Les  soldats  remains  etaient  tres-braves.  Un  ete  sec 
est  tres-nuisible  aux  plantes.  Mon  maitre  de  musique  est  un  brave 
homme.  Voici  de  grands  vaisseaux  americains.  Les  colibris 
(humming  birds)  sont  de  beaux  petits  oiseaux.  J'aime  les  jeunes 
fiUes  douces,  simples  et  modestes. 

THEME  18. 

1.  France  is  a  fine  country.  2.  We  have  a  large  house. 
3.  Henry  has  a  bad  pen.  4.  My  aunt  is  a  virtuous  woman.  5.  She 
is  also  very  active  and  laborious.  6.  Frank  is  an  attentive  boy. 
7.  Miss  B.  is  an  amiable  young  lady.  8.  Is  Mr.  A.  a  polite  man? 
9.  Yes,  he  is  very  polite.  10.  The  wasp  {la  guepe)  is  a  hurtful 
insect.  11.  Our  neighbor  has  three  small  horses.  12.  This  is  a 
natural  sentiment.  13.  The  young  man  studies  (etudie)  with  (an) 
incredible  application.  14.  I  have  bought  a  round  table.  15.  Give 
me  some  red  paper  and  four  black  pencils.  16.  Yesterday  we  had 
an  easy  translation,  but  our  exercise  for  to-morrow  is  difficult.  17.  I 
like  the  blue  sky,  (the)  high  trees  and  (the)  green  fields.  18.  Have 
you  ripe  pears?      19.  No,  sir,  the  pears  are  not  yet  (jpas  encore) 


THE   PLACE   OF  ADJECTIVES. 


85 


ripe,  but  we  have  ripe  cherries.  20.  Italian  music  is  very  agreea- 
ble. 21.  The  French  soldiers  under  Napoleon  [the]  first  were  very 
brave.  22.  Here  are  beautiful  flowers  and  beautiful  fruit  {pi.). 
23.  The  English  have  large  vessels.  24.  The  rose,  and  [the]  lily 
are  beautiful  flowers. 


CONVERSATION. 


Avez-vous  des  noix  mures  ? 
Quand  seront-elles  mures  ? 
Aimez-vous   la    musique    alle- 

mande  ? 
Ce    marchand    a-t-il    de    bon 

beurre  ? 
Comment      trouvez-vous      ces 

jeunes  lions  ? 
Votre  theme  est-il  difficile  ? 
Combien  coute  cet  habit  ? 

Oil  est  mon  cher  ami  Lucien  ? 
A  qui  est  ce  livre  amusant  ? 
Qui    a    perdu    une   casquette 

rouge  ? 
Avez-vous  de  bon  pain  et  du 
? 


Elles  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures. 

Dans  huit  jours. 

J'aime  mieux  (better)  la  musique 

italienne. 
Son  beurre  n'est  pas  frais,  mais  sa 

creme  (cream)  est  fraiche. 
lis  sont  tres-beaux. 

Non,  Monsieur,  il  est  facile. 

II  coute   cent  francs.     C'est   un 

habit  cher. 
II  est  alle  au  concert. 
II  est  k  mon  oncle. 
C'est  Jules  qui  I'a  perdue. 

Voici  un  gros  morceau  de  pain  et 
du  fromage. 


86  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

XIX.    DIX-NEUVIEME    LE9ON 


DEGREES   OF   COMPARISON. 

1.  The  comparative  is  formed  by  placing  tbe  adverb  plus,  more, 
before  an  adjective.  The  superlative  by  placing  the  article  before 
the  comparative,  as : 

Haut,  e,  high;  comp.  plus  haut,  higher;  sup.  le  plus  haut,  the  highest; 
fern,  haute,  comip.  plus  haute,  sup.  la  plus  haute. 

Mauvais,  e,  bad ;  comp.  plus  mauvais,  e,  worse ;  sup.  le  plus  mauvais,  f.  la 
plus  mauvaise,  the  worst. 

Rem.  When  a  possessive  adjective  is  placed  before  the  superlative,  the 
article  le,  la,  les,  is  dropped,  as :  Mon  plus  jeune  fr ere,  my  youngest  brother. 

2.  There  is  in  French  also  a  lower  and  lowest  degree  which  is  ef- 
fected by  the  words  moinSy  less,  for  the  comparative  degree,  and  le 
moins,  f.  la  moms,  the  lest,  for  the  superlative,  as : 

Cruel,  -le,  cruel ;  comp.  moins  cruel,  f.  moins  crudle,  less  cruel  or  not  so 
cruel;  sup.  le  moins  cruel,  f.  la  moins  crudle,  the  least  cruel. 

3.  The  following  adjectives  have  an  irregular  comparison : 

Bon,  f.  bonne,  good;  comp.  meilleur,  e,  better;  sup.  le  meilleur,  f.  la  meil- 
leure,  the  best. 

(Mauvais,  e,  in  the  sense  of  wicked},  comp.  pire,  worse;  sup.  lepire,  f.  la 
pire,  the  worst. 

(Petit,  e,);  comp.  moindre,  less ;  sup.  le  moindre,  f.  la  moindre,  the  least. 

Petit  and  mauvais  are  also  regular. 

4.  As  before  an  adjective  is  rendered  aussi  ;  as  after  it,  and  than 
are  both  translated  que.  Ex. :  —  //  est  aussi  heureux  que  moi,  he 
is  as  happy  as  I  am.  Charles  est  plus  fort  que  sonfrere^  Charles 
is  stronger  than  his  brother. 

5.  In  after  a  superlative  and  before  the  name  of  a  place  is  ren- 
dered by  de  and  not  by  dans.  Ex. :  Les  plus  belles  eglises  de 
Paris,  the  finest  churches  in  Paris. 


DEGREES  OF  COMPARISON.  87 

VOCABUIARY. 

La  ^oZ?anc?e,  Holland.  fon,  e,  strong. 

Vaheille,  f.  the  bee.  chaud,  warm. 

le  m€taly  the  metal.  encore,  still. 

Velephant,  the  elephant.  toujours,  always. 

«        Jidele,  faithful.  Vautre,  the  other. 

peupU,  e,  peopled,  populous.  le  matin,  the  morning. 

lepays,  the  country.  le  soir,  the  evening, 

pesant,  e,  heavy.  court,  short. 

READING  EXERCISE  19. 

L'Europe  est  plus  petite  que  I'Asie.  L*AUemagne  est  plus  fer- 
tile que  la  Hollande.  L'abeille  est  rinsecte  le  plus  utile.  L'or  est 
le  metal  le  plus  pesant.  Ta  robe  est  moins  belle  que  la  robe  de  ta 
goeur.  Monsieur  S  est  un  homme  tres-fort.  Son  frere  ain^  (elder) 
est  encore  plus  fort ;  c'est  I'liomme  le  plus  fort  que  (that)  je  con- 
naisse.  L'elephant  est  le  plus  grand  de  tons  les  animaux  terrestres. 
Les  livres  d'Emilie  sent  plus  amusants  que  les  notres  (ours).  Les 
cbats  sont  moins  fideles  que  les  cbiens.  Ces  pommes-ci  sont  meil- 
leures  que  vos  poires.  Les  notres  sont  les  meilleures.  Votre  tante 
est  plus  laborieuse  que  sa  fiUe.  Londres  et  Paris  sont  les  villes  les 
plus  grandes  et  les  plus  peuplees  de  TEurope. 

THEME  19. 

1.  Tbe  morning  was  warm;  the  evening  was  warmer.  2.  This 
cbureb  is  higher  than  the  other.  3.  Mary  is  the  happiest  girl  in  the 
world.  4.  She  is  prettier  than  Louisa ;  she  is  the  prettiest  of  the 
sisters.  5.  This  house  is  not  so  (si)  old  as  (que)  the  other.  6. 
This  mountain  is  very  high,  higher"  than  all  the  other  mountains  of 
this  country.  7.  The  22d  [of]  June  is  the  longest,  and  the  22d 
of  December  the  shortest  day  of  the  year.  8.  The  rose  is  the  finest 
of  all  (the)  flowers.  9.  This  wine  is  worse  than  water.  10.  Have 
you  any  (de)  better  wine?  11.  Yes,  the  red  wine  is  better.  12. 
My  wine  is  the  best.     13.  John  is  my  best  friend. 


88 


XX.      VINGTIEME   LECON, 


CONVERSATION. 

Mademoiselle  Marie,  etes-vous     Oh  ! 

heureuse  ? 
Votre  voisin  est^il  malheureux  ? 


Quel  est  le  metal  le  plus  utile  ? 
Quels  metaux  sont  les  plus  pe- 

sants  ? 
Quelle  est  la  plus  attentive  de 

toutes  vos  ecolieres  ? 
Quel  est  le  plus  fort  d,es  ani- 

maux  terrestres. 

Quel  est  le  mois  le  plus  froid  de 

I'annee  ? 
Yotre  robe  est-elle  aussi  belle 

que  la  robe  de  Julie  ? 
Le  tigre  est-il  cruel  ? 

Ou  trouve-t-on  le  meilleur  fer  ? 


oui,  je  suis  tres-heureuse, 
plus  heureuse  que  ma  soeur. 

II  est  moins  malheureux  que  son 
frere  qui  est  en  Amerique.    , 

C'estlefer? 

L'or,  le  platine  et  le  plomb  sont 
les  plus  pesants. 

C'est  Madeleine,  la  fllle  de  Mon- 
sieur B. 

C'est  I'elephant;  c'est  le  plus 
grand  et  le  plus  fort  de  tons  les 
animaux  terrestres. 

C'est  le  mois  de  Janvier. 

Non,  elle  est  moins  belle. 

Oui,  c'est  le  plus  cruel  de  tons  les 

animaux. 
Le    meilleur  fer  se   trouve    (is 
found)  en  Suede. 


XX.    VINGTIEME    LE9ON 


REGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST   CONJUGATION.— 
DONNER. 

1.  There  are  in  French  three  regular  conjugations,  viz. :  in  er,  ir,  and  re. 
Verbs  in  -oir  belong  to  the  irregular  ones,  as  their  root  undergoes  manifold 
changes.*     The  Infinitive  mood  is  to  be  considered  as  the  radical  part  or 


*  Only  six  other  verbs  are  coujugated  like  recevoir,  which  is  often  given  as  the 
model  of  one  conjugation.    They  will  all  be  found  L.  XL. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  89 

ground-form  on  which  the  conjugation  depends.  What  precedes  the  ter- 
mination er,  ir,  or  re,  is  the  root,  which,  with  regular  verbs,  always  remains 
unaltered.  To  this  are  added  the  different  terminations,  by  which  persons, 
tenses,  and  moods  are  distinguished,  «nd  which  are  common  to  all  the  verbs 
of  that  same  conjugation. 

FORMATION    OF   THE   TENSES    OF   REGULAR   VERBS.  '-■ 

2.  There  are  primitive  tenses  and  derived  tenses.  The  primitive  tensea 
are  :  the  infinitive,  the  participle  present,  the  past  participle,  the  present  indica- 
tive, the  pretei'ite. 

3.  From  the  present  infinitive  are  formed  :  the  future,  by  adding  ai,  and 
the  conditional,  by  adding  ais,  as  :  Inf.  donner:  Fut.  je  donnerai,  and  Cond. 
je  donnerais;  finir :  Fut.  je  finirai,  Cond.  je  finirais.  In  the  third  conju- 
gation the  final  e  is  dropped :  vendre:  Fut.  je  vendrai,  Cond.  je  vendrais. 

4.  From  the  participle  present  are  formed :  the  present  of  the  subjunctive, 
by  changing  ant  into  e,  as  :  donnant:  queje  donne;  finissant:  que  je  finisse  ; 
vendant :  que  je  vende ;  and  the  Imperfect  Indicative  by  changing  ant  into 
ais,  as  :  finissant:  jefinissais,  e?c. 

5.  With  the  participle  past  are  formed  all  the  compound  tenses,  by  means 
of  the  auxiliaries  avoir  or  etre,  as :  Part,  past ;  donn€,  fini,  vendu  — ;  j'ai 
donn€,  j' avals  fini,  j'aurai  vendu,  etc. 

6.  From  the  present  of  the  Indicative,  viz. :  from  its  1st  person  singular 
and  the  1st  and  2d  persons  plural,  the  Imperative  is  formed,  by  suppress- 
ing the  pronouns  je,  nous,  vous,  as:  donne  (give),  donnons,  donnez;  finis  {^n- 
ish),  finissonSjfinissez,  etc. 

7:  From  the  pretente  is  formed  the  Subjunctive  imperfect,  by  changing  the 
final  ai  into  asse  for  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  is  into  isse  for 
the  second  and  third  conjugations.  Ex.:  je  donnai:  que  je  donnasse;  je 
finis:  que  je  finisse  ;  je  vendis :  queje  vendisse. 


CONJUGATION  OF  DONNER,-^TO   GIVE. 

INDICATIVE. 
PBESENT  TENSE. 

Je.  donne,  I  give,  nous  donnons,  we  give. 

tu  donnes,  thou  givest.  vous  donnez,  you  give. 

il  donne,  he  gives,  lis  donnent,         )  ^. 

n    1  7      .  1,      H  ?•  *hey  give, 

elle  donne,  she  gives.  elles  donnent,     J 


90  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 


IMPERFECT. 


Je  donnais,  I  gave  or  was  giving,  nous  donnions,  we  gave. 
tu  donnais,  thou  gavest.  vous  donniez,  you  gave. 

il  donnait,  he  gave.  ils  donnaient,  they  gave. 

PBETEKITE. 

Je  donnai,  I  gave  or  did  give.      nous  donnames,  we  gave. 
tu  donnas,  thou  gavest.  vous  donnates,  you  gave. 

il  donna,  he  gave.  ils  donnerent,  they  gave. 


Je  donnerai,  I  shall  give.  nous  donnerons,  tf^e  shall  give. 

tu  donneras,  ^Aoi«  wilt  give.  vous  donnerez,  yoz«  will  give. 

il  donnera,  ^e  will  give.  Ds  donneront,  ^Aey  will  give. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  donnerais,  I  should  give.  nous  donnerions,  we  should  give. 

tu  donnerais,         etc.  vous  donneriez,  etc. 

il  donnerait,  etc.  ils  donneraient,  e^c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Donne,  give.  donnons,  let  us  give. 

(donnes-en),*  ^iVe  (o/'^V).  donnez,  y^^;e. 

INFINITIVE. 

Donner,  to  give.  (de  or  ^  donner) ,  to  give. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  donne,  that  I  {may)  give,  que  nous  donnions,  that  we  (may) 
que  tu  donnes,  etc.  que  vous  donniez,        etc.      Igive. 

qu'il  donne,  etc.  qu'ils  donnent,  etc. 

*  The  Impei-ative  mood  of  the  first  conjugation  talces  an  s,  in  the  singular,  when 
followed  by  en  (of  it,  of  them,  some),  or  1/  (to  or  of  it,  to  them).  Ex. :  offres-ertf 
offer  some,  penses-y,  think  of  it. 


REGULAR   VERBS.  91 

IMPERFECT. 


Que  je  donnasse,  that  I  (mighty  que  nous  donnassions. 
que  tu  dollnasses,      etc.     [^ive.  que  vous  donnassiez. 
qu'il  donnat,  etc.  qu'ils  donnassent. 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

DoxmSiUi, giving.  Dunne,  f.  donnee,  given. 

(en  donnant) ,  hy  or  in  giving,  etc. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

In  active  verbs  these  are  formed  with  the  Part,  past  and  the  auxiliary 
avoir,  to  have. 

INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  donne,  to  have  given. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

J'ai  donne,  I  Jiave  given. 

tu  as  donne,  tkou  hast  given. 

il  a  donne,  he  has  given. 

n-ms  avons  donne,  ive  have  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  donnd,  /  had  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRETERITE. 

J'eus  donne,  I  had  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE    FUTURE. 

J'aurai  donne,  /  shall  have  given,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais  donne,  )  r   ?     7^  r 

'   1 1  should  have  giv^n. 
J'eussc  donne', 


92      ~  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  donne,  tliat  I  (may)  have  given,  etc. 

Que  tu  aies  donne,  that  thou  (mayest)  have  given,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  donne,  that  I  (might)  have  given,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ayant  donne,  e,  liaving  given. 
Remark  1 .     There  is  but  one  way  to  render  the  expressions  :  I  give,  I 
do  give,  I  am  giving ;  viz. :  je  donne :  —  /  was  giving ;  je  donnais,  etc. 

2.   In  the  interrogative  and  negative  form  the  auxiliary  do  is  not  ex- 
pressed.    (See  also  the  11th  Lesson,  4.)     Ex. : 


INTERROGATIVELY. 

Est-cc  que  je  donne,  do  I  give  ?  donnons-nous,  do  we  give  ? 

donnes-tu,  dost  thou  give  ?  donnez-vous,  do  you  give  ? 

donne-t-il,  does  he  give  f  donnent-ils,       ]  ^^ ^^^^  ^.^^  , 

donne-t-elle,  does  she  give  ?  donnent-elles,  ) 

NEGATIVELY. 

Je  ne  donne  pas,  /  do  not  give. 

tu  ne  donnes  pas,  thou  dost  not  give. 

11  ne  donne  pas,  fie  does  not  give,  etc. 

NEGATIVE-INTERROGATIVE. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  donne  pas,  do  I  not  give  ? 

ne  donnes-tu  pas,  dost  thou  not  give  ? 

ne  donne-t-il  pas,  does  he  not  give? 
3.  The  forms  donn€ je  (acute  on  the  e),  donnais-je,  donnai-je,  are  little 
used,  except  in  poetry  and  in  studied  prose ;  they  are  replaced  by  Est-ce  que 
(is  it  that)  prefixed  to  the  common  form,  as:  est-ce  queje  donne,  do  I  give; 
est-ce  que  je  donnais,  did  I  give  (was  I  giving),  etc.  The  future  and  condi- 
tional donnerai-je,  donnerais-je  are  more  common,  though  est-ce  que  may  be 
used  in  all  cases  to  form  an  interrogation,  especially  in  common  conversa- 
tion, as  :  est-ce  que  je  donnerai,  shall  I  give ;  est-ce  qu'il  donne,  does  he  give ; 
est-ce  que  vous  donnez,  est-ce  que-  tu  ne  donnes  pas,  etc. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  93 


COMPOUND    OF   THE    PRESENT. 

Ai-je  donne  1    as-tu  donne  ?    a-t-il  donne'?  etc. 
Je  n'ai  pas  donne,     tu  n'as  pas  donne,  etc. 
N'ai-je  pas  donne  ?    n'as-tu  pas  donne  ?  etc. 
Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  parler,  to  speak ;  porter,  to  carry,  to  take ; 
admirer,  to  admire ;  aimer,  to  love,  etc.  , 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  prochain,  the  neighbor.  magnijique^  magnificent. 

apporter,  to  bring.  manger,  to  eat. 

tomber,  to  fall.  chercher^  to  look  for. 

Vescalier,  m.  the  stairs.  trouver,  to  find. 

la  sant€,  health.  penser,  to  think. 

le  coeur,  the  heart.  jouer,  to  play,    pleurer,  to  cry. 

le  canif,  the  penknife.  arriver,  to  arrive. 

les  gens,  the  people.  »        prier,  to  pray. 

la  chasse,  the  chase.  I'autre,  the  other. 

le  chasseur,  the  hunter.  pas  encore,  not  yet. 

la  poste,  the  post-office. 

READING  EXERCISE  20. 

Aimez  Dieu  et  votre  prochain.  Les  parents  aiment  leurs  enfants. 
Portez  cette  lettre  k  la  poste.  Tu  porteras  cette  robe  k  ta  soeur. 
J'apporterai  ees  livres  k  mon  maitre.  Apportez-lui  {Mm)  aussi 
cette  boite.  L'enfant  tomba  de  I'escalier.  J'ai  pense  a  mon  ami. 
Pensez  a  votre  cousin.  Jouons.  Nous  cberchions  longtemps  votre 
chien.  Yous  ne  le  (Mm)  trouverez  pas.  Les  jeunes  gens  parlaient 
souvent  de  leurs  amis.  Les  chasseurs  parlerent  de  la  chasse.  Tu 
ne  mangeras  pas  cette  poire-ci ;  elle  n'est  pas  mure.  Qui  a  mange 
I'autre  '^     N'admirez-vous  pas  cette  magaific[ue  couleur  ? 

THEME  20. 

1.  I  love  my  father.  2.  Thou  lovest  ^hy  mother.  3.  He  loves 
his  sister.  4.  We  love  our  parents.  5.  Do  you  like  flowers  ?  6. 
I  give  an  apple  to  my  brother.  7.  We  were  speaking  of  your  aunt. 
8.  I  admired  the  beautiful  palace  of  the  king.  9.  We  played  yes- 
terday.    10.  The  child  cried.     11.  The  children  cried.     12.  The 


94 


XX.      VTNGTIEME   LECON. 


boy  will  look  for  his  copy-book.  13.  The  boys  will  look  for  their 
copy-books.  14.  I  have  found  my  knife.  15.  Have  you  found 
your  gloves?  16.  We  have  not  found  our  gloves.  17.  Play,  my 
child,  18.  Eat  these  apples.  19.  Do  not  eat  these  pears ;  they 
are  not  ripe.  20.  She  would  fall.  21.  We  should  admire  your 
garden.  22.  They  would  have  eaten  some  bread  and  butter.  23. 
I  think  that  our  friends  will  arrive  to-day.  24.  They  will  ar- 
rive to-morrow.  25.  Will  you  take  this  letter  to  the  post-office  ? 
26.  Pray  [to]  God  every  morning  and  every  evening.  27.  Why 
do  you  cry  ?  28.  Why  have  you  not  brought  your  money  ?  29.  I 
have  not  brought  my  purse. 

CONVERSATION. 

Avez-vous  cherche  votre  mon-     Je  la  (it)  cherche  encore. 

tre  d'or  ? 
Qu' avez-vous  apporte  ? 


Voulez-vous  (will  you)  manger 
du  pain  ? 

Yotre  mere  parle-t-elle  fran- 
^ais  ? 

Quel  comraandement  Jesus- 
Christ  a-t-il  donne  ? 

Qui  est  notre  prochain  ? 

Qui  portera  cette  lettre  a  la 
poste,  Antoine  ou  Theodore  ? 

Qu' apporte  le  chasseur? 

Avez-vous  aussi  ete  a  la  chasse  ? 

A  quoi  pensez-vous  ? 
A  quel  jeu  joucrons-nou^  de- 
main  ? 
Que  chcrchcz-vous  ? 
Qu'admirez-vous  la? 


J'ai  apporte  les  gants  de  Ma- 
demoiselle Mathilde. 

J'ai  deja  mange  un  gros  morceau 
de  pain. 

Oui,  elle  parle  fran9ais  et  anglais. 

II  a  dit :    Aimez  Dieu  et  votre 

prochain. 
Tous  les  hommes. 
Ce  sera  Theodore. 

II  apporte  deux  lievres, 

Oui,  Monsieur,  nous  avons  et^  k 

la  chasse  hier. 
Je  pense  a  mon  theme  frangais. 
Nous  jouerons  a  la  balle  (hall). 

Jo  cherche  mes  gants. 
Nous     admirons    ce     magnifique 
vaisseau  anglais. 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


95 


READING  LESSON. 


LE    CHAMEAU    ET    LE    CHAT. 


Le  chat  au  chameau.     Soyez  le  bieu-venu,  mon  frere. 

Le  chameau.     Comment,  moi  (/)  ton  frere  ! 

Le  chat.  Oui,  certes.  Yoyez  un  pen  (see  a  little) :  ne  puls-je 
pas  {cannot  I)  faire  une  aussi  jolie  bosse  que  vous  ? 

Le  chaineau.  Cela  pent  (can)  etre ;  mais  peut-elle  aussi  porter 
autant  que  la  mienne  {mine)  ? 

Le  chat.  La  sotte  deraande  !  donnez-moi  seulement  {only)  votro 
petit  paquet,  je  le  porterai,  comme  si  ce  n'etait  rien. 

Le  chameau.  Mais  penses-y  bien  :  n'est-il  pas  trop  gros  pour  toi 
{you)  f 

Le  chat.     Ah  !  quel  conte  !  donnez-moi,  vous  dis-je,  donnez. 

Le  chameau.     C 'est  bien;  approche  un  peu,  le  voiR. 

Le  chat.     Ah  !  quelle  charge  !  je  suis  eerase  ! 

Le  chameau.     Tu  as  ce  que  {what)  tu  m^rites  ! 

Celui  qui  veut  entreprendre  de  grandes  choses,  doit  {must)  au- 
paravant  eprouver  ses  forces. 


Le  chameau,  the  camel. 
le  chat,  the  cat. 
le  bien-venu,  e,  welcome. 
comment,  how. 
cej-tes,  to  be  sure. 
/aire,  to  make. 
une  bosse,  a  hump. 
la  demands,  the  question. 
le  paquet,  the  pack. 
comme  si,  as  if. 


y,  of  it  (to  it). 
le  conte,  the  tale. 
approche)-,  approach. 
la  charge,  the  weight. 
€cras€,  crushed. 
m€riter,  to  deserve. 
entreprendre,  to  undertake. 
auparavant,  before. 
€prouver,  to  try. 
la  force,  the  strength. 


96  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEME   LEgON. 

XXI.     YINGT  ET  UNIEME    LE9ON. 


HEMARKS   ON  THE  ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  SOME 
VERBS   OF  THE  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

Some  regular  verbs  in  -er  are,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  liable  to  the  fol- 
lowing modifications : 

1 .  Some  verbs  ending  in  -ter,  as  :  jeter,  to  throw ;  rejeter,  to  throw  back ; 
and  those  polysyllabic  verbs  ending  in  eler,  as  :  appeler,  to  call;  renouveler, 
to  renew,  etc.;  double  the  t  or  Z,  when  they  are  followed  by  an  e  mute. 

This  is  the  case  in  some  persons  of  the  Present,  Future,  and  Imperative, 
viz.:  — 

PRESENT.  IMPERATIVE.  FUTURE. 

Je  je^te  —  nous  jetons.  Jefte.  Je  je^ferai. 

tuje^tes — vousjetez.       ^  /)/.  jetons.  tujetteras. 

il  jefte    —  ils  je«ent.  jetez.  etc. 

J'appeffe    —  nous  appelons.  Appe/Ze.  J'appeZferai. 

tu  appeZ/es  —  vous  appelez.  pi.  appelons.  tu  appeZ/eras. 

il  appe/Ze    —  ils  appeZZent.  •        appelez.  etc. 

Except  the  verb  acheter,  to  buy,  and  a  few  others  that  seldom  occur, 
which  never  double  the  t,  but  take  the  grave  accent  e  : 

Pres.  J'achete,  tu  achetes,  il  achete,  nous  achetons,  vous  achetez,  ils 
ache  tent, 
Fut.   J'acheterai.    Imper.  achete,  pi.  achetez. 

2.  Dissyllabic  verbs  ending  in  -der,  as  ;  geler,  to  freeze,  and  all  others 
that  have  an  e  mute  in  the  last  syllable  but  one,  such  as :  semer,  to  sow ; 
memr,  to  lead  ;  lever  to  lift  up,  take  the  grave  accent,^,  when  the  final  con- 
sonant of  the  root  is  followed  by  an  e  mute  : 

Infinitive:  Mener,  to  lead,  to  conduct. 

Pres.  Je  mene,  tu  menes,  il  mene,  nous  menons,  vous  menez,  ils  menent. 

Imperf.  Je  menais,  tu  menais. 

Fut.  Je  menerai,  tu  meneras.    Imp.  mene,  menons,  menez. 

The  same  change  takes  place  with  those  verbs  which  have  ^  in  the  last 
syllable  but  one.  They,  however,  retain  the  ^  in  the  Future  and  Condi- 
tional. 


ORTHOGRAPHY  OF  SOME  VERBS.  97 

Infinitive:  ^sperer,  to  hoi^e. 

Pres.  J'espere,  tu  esperes,  il  espere,  nous  esperons,  vous  esperez,  ils  es- 
perent.     Zmperf.  J'esperais. 

Imper.   Espere,  esperons,  esperez.     Fut.  J'espererai. 
Verbs  in  e'ger  retain  the  e,  as  :  je  proMge. 

3.  In  verbs  ending  in  -ger,  as  :  juger,  to  judge ;  partager,  to  share,  divide, 
the  e  is  retained  in  those  tenses  where  g  is  followed  by  the  vowels  a  or  o,  in 
order  to  give  the  g  the  same  soft  sound  as  in  all  other  tenses  and  persons. 
Ex.: 

Infinitive:  Manger,  to  Q2ii. 

Pres.  Je  mange ;  pi.  nous  mangeons.    P.  pr.  Mangeant. 

Impf.  Je  mangeais,  tu  mangeais,  il  mangeait,  nous  mangions,  vous  man- 
giez,  ils  mangeaient. 

Pret.  Je  mangeai,  tu  mangeas,  il  mangea,  nous  mangeames,  vous  man- 
geates,  ils  mangerent.     Imp.  Mangeons. 

4.  In  verbs  ending  in  -cer,  as  :  commencer,  to  begin,  a  cedilla  must  be 
placed  under  the  c,  when  this  letter  is  followed  by  a  or  o.    Ex. :  — 

Infinitive:  Placer,  to  place. 

Pres.  Je  place,  tu  places,  etc.;  pi.  nous  plapons,  etc. 
Imp/.  Je  plapais,  tu  pla^ais,  il  plapait,  nous  placions,  vous  placiez,  ils 
plafaient.    Imper.  Plafons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  plajr ai,  tu  plazas,  il  plaf  a,  nous  plaf  ames,  etc. 

5.  Verbs  ending  in  -ayer,  -oyer,  -uyer  change  the  y  into  i,  whenever  the 
letter  y  would  be  immediately  followed  by  an  e  mute.     Such  are  :  — 

Payer,  to  pay.  employer,  to  employ. 

effrayer,  to  frighten.  essuyer,  to  wipe. 

Pres.   Je  paie,  tu  pa^es,  il  pa/e,  pi.  nous  payons,  vous  payez,  ils  paient. 
Part.  pr.  Payant. 
J'emploie,  tu  emploies,  il  emploie,  pi.  nous  employons,  vous  em- 
ployez,  ils  emploient.    P.  pr.  Eraployant.  , 

J'essuie,  tu  essuies,  etc.;  pi.  ils  essuient. 
Impf.  Je  payais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  payions,  vous  payiez,  etc. 
J'employais,  etc.;  pi.  nouns  employions,  etc. 
J'essuyais,  etc.;  pi.  nous  essuyions,  etc. 
Fut.     Je  paierai,  etc.;  j'emploierai,  etc.;  j'essuierai,  etc.  ^ 

Imper.  l^sde  —  payez.     Emploie  —  employez.     Essuie  —  essuyez. 

6.  Verbs  which  in  the  Infinitive  end  in  -ier,  as  :  prier,  to  pray ;  crier,  to 
cry,  are  in  some  cases  spelled  with  a  double  it.     This  takes  place  in  the  1st 

7 


98  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 

and  2d  persons  plural  of  the  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  and  of  the  Present 
of  the  Subjunctive :  — 

Infinitive:-  Ouhlier,  to  forget. 

Ind.  Imperf.  pi.  nous  oubliVons,  vous  oubhVez,  ils  oubliaient. 
Svhj.  Pres.  pi.  que  nous  pruons,  que  vous  pnVez,  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  vertu,  virtue.  la  force,  strength. 

la  heaut€,  beauty.  le  bt-uit,  the  noise. 

pr€ferer,  to  prefer.  la  servante,  the  servant. 

Vamiti€,  f.  friendship.  la  chamhre,  the  room. 

le  vent,  the  wind.  le  chemin;  the  way,  road. 

la  pluie,  the  rain.  nettoyer,  to  clean. 

la  terre,  the  earth.  la  pierre,  the  stone 

dever,  to  bring  up,  to  educate.  la  cuisiniere,  the  cook. 

s€cher,  to  dry.  poss^der,  to  possess. 

6jew,  well.  lejardinier,  the  gardener. 

READING  EXERCISE  21. 

Le  sage  prefere  la  vertu  a  la  beaute.  L'amitie  se  paie  {is  paid) 
par  Famitie.  Les  parents  elevent  leurs  enfants.  II  gelera  cette 
nuit.  II  a  gele.  Elle  achete  un  livre.  Les  vents  sechent  la  terre 
trempee  (wet)  par  la  pluie.  Nous  achetons  des  fruits.  Vous 
acheteriez  cette  maison,  si  elle  n'etait  pas  si  chere.  Appelez  Jean. 
Nous  partageons  avec  nos  amis  tout  ce  que  (all  that)  nous  avons. 
Ce  jeune  homme  emploie  bien  son  temps.  Nous  emploierons 
toutes  nos  forces.  Cela  m'effraie.  Ce  bruit  m'a  effray^.  La  ser- 
vante nettoie  les  chambres,  Les  maitres  aiment  les  ecoliers  qui 
emploient  bien  leur  temps. 

THEME  21. 

1.  The  boy  throws  a  stone.  2.  You  always  throw  (throw  al- 
ways) stones.  3.  Call  thy  brother.  4.  Call  the  servant.  5.  I 
shall  call  John.  6.  The  cook  buys  eggs.  7.  I  buy  a  horse.  8. 
My  father  will  also  buy  a  horse.  9.  Where  dost  thou  take  ^  this 
iiorse?     10.  I  hope  to  see  you  (vous  voir)  to-morrow.     11.  What 

1  Mener  is  applied  to  what  moves  of  itself,  joorier,  to  what  is  carried  by  lifting 
from  the  ground. 


ORTHOGRAPHY   OF  SOME  VERBS. 


99 


do  you  hope?  12.  We  hope  nothing,  13.  What  are  you  eatmg 
there  {la)  ?  14.  The  child  ate  an  apple.  15.  You  ate  walnuts. 
16.  I  placed  the  books  on  the  table*  17.  I  pay  everything  (tout). 
18.  Thou  payest  nothing.  19.  Let  us  well  employ  iour  time. 
20.  My  sons  pay  [for]  what  (ce  que)  they  buy.  21.  My  uncle  pos- 
sesses a  large  garden.  22.  The  gardener  cleans  the  ways.  23. 
Wipe  your  tears  (larmes).  24.  The  dog  frightens  the  children. 
25.  We  wiped  the  table.     26.  I  prefer  coffee  to  tea  (the). 

CONVERSATION. 


Qui  a  appel4  ? 

Avez-vous  nettoye  les  chemins  ? 

Qui  me  protegera  (protect)  ? 
Nettoies-tu  la  chambre  ? 
TroTlvez-vous  cela  cher? 
Que  mangeais-tu? 
Oil  mene-t-on  ce  cheval  ? 

Crois-tu   (do  you  think)   qu'il 

gele  cette  nuit? 
Acheterez-vous  du  th^   ou  du 

cafe? 
Ou  achetez-vous  cette  farine  ? 
Qui  a  jete  cette  pierre  ? 
Que  fit  (did — do)  un  jour  un 

pere  ? 


Ton  pere  a  appele. 

Pas  encore;    je  les  nettoierai  ce 

soir. 
Dieu  te  protegera. 
Je  nettoie  toute  la  maison. 
J'appelle  cela  tres-cher. 
Je  mangeais  des  noix. 
On  le  mene  chez  le  marechal-fer- 

rant  (farrier). 
H  a  deja  gele. 

Je  n'aime  pas  le  the,  j'acheterai 

du  cafe. 
Chez  le  meunier  (miller) . 
Je  crois  que  c'est  Richard. 
II  partagea  ses  biens  entre  ses  trois 

fils. 


100  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME    LEgON. 


XXII.    yiNGT-DEUXIEME    LE9ON. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION:  FINIR. 

INDICATIVE. 
PKESENT     TENSE. 

Je  finis,  I  finish.  nous  finissons,  we  finish. 

tu  finis,  thou  finishest.  vous  finissez,  you  finish. 

TX^mt,  he  finishes.  ilsfinissent,     )    7      ^   '  % 

qVlq  %mt  J  she  finishes.  ellesfinissent,  J 

IMPEKFECT. 

Je  finissais,  I  finished  (was  fin-  nous  finissions,  we  finished. 
tu  finissais,         etc.       [ishing) .  vous  finissiez,  etc. 

il  finissait,  etc.  ils  finissaient,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  finis,  I  finished  (did  finish),  nous  finimes,  we  finished. 
tu  finis,         etc.  vous  finites,  etc. 

il  finit,  etc*  ils  finirent,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  finirai,  I  shall  finish.  nous  finirons,  we  shall  finish. 

tu  finiras,  etc.  vous  finirez,  etc. 

il  finira,  etc.  ils  finiront,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  finirais,  I  should  finish.  nous  finirions,  we  should  finish. 

tu  finirais,  etc.  vous  finiriez,  etc. 

il  finirait,  cte.  ils  finlraient,  etc. 

INFINITIVE. 

Finir,  to  finish.  de  or  a  finir,  to  finish. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  101 

IMPERATIVE. 

Finis,  finish.  finissons,  let  us  finish. 

finissez,  finish. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  finisse,  that  I  (may)  fin-  que  nous  finissions,  that  we  finish. 
que  tu  finisses,  etc.    [ish.  que  vous  finissiez,  etc. 

qu'il  finisse,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  finisse,  that  I  (might)  que,  n.  finissions,  that  we  (might) 
que  tu  finisses,  etc.  \_finish.  que  vous  finissiez,  etc.  [finish. 
qu'il  finit,  etc.  qu'ils  finissent,  etc, 

PARTICIPLES. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

Y'missdiTii,  finishing.  Fini,  f.  ^nie,  finished. 

en  finissant,  hy  finishing. 

COMPOUND  TENSES, 
INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  fini,  to  have  finished. 

INDICATIVE.  '.,.,.  '      ' 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESEl^T,'   '.  *'*    *      V    *  '•'    > 

J'&i&m,  I  have  Jimshed.  ,' ' '     -     ^      '!''»"'*"'*'? 

tu  as  fini,  thou  ha^t  finished.         •,•/''.  J ,,  i  !      » >  ^  ^  *',  5   '  > 
i\  a.  fva\,  he  has  finished. 
nous  avons  fini,  we  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  fini,  /  had  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF    THE   PRETERITE. 

J'eus  fini,  /  had  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OP   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  fini,  /  shall  have  finished,  etc. 


102  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON 


CONDITIONAL. 


T,  ^   .  '  >•  I  should  have  finished,  etc. 

J  eusse  nm,    ) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
C03IP0UND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  fini,  that  I  (may)  have  finished,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j 'eusse  fini,  that  I  (might)  have  finished,  etc. 

PAETICIPLE. 
Ayant  fini,  having  finished,  etc. 
Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  hdtir,  to  build ;  choisir,  to  choose ;  remplir, 
to  fill,  etc. 

Rem.  1.  The  verb  hair,  to  hate,  loses  in  the  Present  and  Imperative  sin- 
gular its  diaeresis.     Otherwise  it  is  quite  regular  and  retains  the  two  dots. 

Pres.  Je  hais,  tu  hais,  il  hait,  nous  ha'issons,  vous  haissez,  etc. 

Imper.  Hais;  pi.  ha'issons,  haissez.     Pret.  Je  hais,  I  hated. 

Rem.  2.  The  yerhfieurir,  to  flourish,  has  a  second  form  for  the  Imperfect 
tense :  Jeflorissais;  and  also  a  second  for  the  Part,  present :  florissant,  e, — 
both  of  which  are  only  used  in  a  figurative  sense,  as  :  une  ville  fiorissante, 
etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

Nourrir,  to  feed,  nourish.  saisir,  to  seize. 

;  /  '.,    ob^ivj  to  rth^y,  rendre,  to  render,  return. 

reniplir,  to  fili,  f^fil.  la  tdche,  the  task. 

,,  .;;    ,  6fli%  to  build.   ■      ^  la  pomme  de  terre,  the -potsito. 

> '  *' .''  <et/dxMir.,  to  ftttil/€f]isl?,*:  V occasion,  f.  the  opportunity. 

punir,  to  punish.  salir,  to  soil. 

le  vice,  vice.  la  palais,  the  palace. 

le  devoir,  the  duty.  choisir,  to  choose. 

lafiatterie,  flattery.  la  couleur,  the  color. 

le  menteur,  the  liar. 

BEADING  EXERCISE  22. 

Le  pain  nourrit  les  hommes.  Les  bons  enfants  ob^issent  a  leurs 
parents  et  k  leurs  maitres.  Remplis  ce  verre.  Remplissez  ces  ver- 
res.     Qui  a  rempli  les  bouteilles?     Romulus  et  Remus  batircnt 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  103 

la  ville  de  Rome,  Fan  753  avant  Jesus-Christ.  Les  fleurs  embel- 
lissent  les  jardins  et  les  prairies.  On  punira  les  enfants  qui  n'obeis- 
sent  pas  k  leur  maitre.  J'espere  que  vous  aurez  puni  ce  mechanfc 
gar9on.  Le  maitre  a  puni  le  petit  menteur.  Notre  voisin  batit  une 
grande  maison.  Nos  voisins  batissent  de  grandes  maisons.  Je 
bMirais  aussi,  si  j'avais  plus  d'argent.  Je  hais  le  vice,  j'aimerai 
toujours  la  vertu.  Hai'ssez  le  vice,  il  vous  rend  malheureux.  J'ai 
toujours  hai*  le  vice.  Nous  hai'ssions  la  flatterie.  Ne  salissez  pas 
vos  habits.  Les  sciences  nourrissent  la  jeunesse  et  rejouissent  la 
vieillesse, 

THEME  22. 

1.  I  finish  my  exercise.  2.  The  pupils  finish  their  translations. 
3.  We  seize  the  opportunity.  4.  We  seized  the  opportunity.  5. 
Why  have  have  you  not  seized  the  good  opportunity  V  6.  The  chil- 
dren soil  their  clothes.  7.  Bread  and  potatoes  nourish  a  great 
many  men.  8.  Do  not  punish  Henry ;  he  has  been  ill.  9.  Fill 
the  glasses.  10.  We  should  fill  the  bottles,  if  we  had  wine  enough. 
11.  The  king  builds  a  new  palace.  12.  Will  you  build  a  house  ? 
13.  I  should  build  a  large  house,  if  I  were  rich.  14.  Here  are 
two  colors :  choose.  15.  Which  Qaquelle)  will  you  choose  ?  16.  I 
shall  choose  the  blue.  17.  If  I  had  to  (a)  choose,  I  should  choose 
the  green  color.  18.  Obey  your  {a  vos)  parents  and  (your)  mas- 
ters. 19.  I  hate  nobody.  20.  Hate  nobody.  21.  We  hate  vice. 
22.  We  have  always  hated  vice. 

CONVERSATION. 

Voici  deux  couteaux :  un  grand  Je  choisu-ai  le  petit  qui  est  le  plus 

et  un  petit.     Lequel  (which)       joh. 

choisirez-vous  ? 

Cet    homme    remplit-il   ses   de-  Pas  toujours. 

voirs? 

Avez-vous  rempli  toutes  les  bou-  Non,  Monsieur,  je  n'avais  pas  as- 

tcilles  ?  sez  de  vin  pour  les  remplir. 

Qui  batit  cette  belle  maison?  C'est  mon  voisin  qui  la  batit. 


104  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

Ne  batirez-vous  pas  aussi  ?  Oui,  je  batirai  aussi  Tannee  pro- 

chaine  (next). 
Pourquoi  ne  batissez-votis  pas  k  Je  batirais  encore  cette  annee,  si 

present  (now')l,  j'avais  assez  d'argent. 

Qui  a  sali  ce  livre  ?  C'est  Martin. 

Comment  as-tu  fait  (done)  cela  ?  La  plume  est  tomb^e  dessus  (up- 
on it). 
Avez-vous  fini  votre  theme  ?  Nous  finirons  notre  theme  ce  soir. 

Qui  a  bati  la  ville  de  Rome  ?         Romulus  et  Remus. 
Qui  a  puni  mon  fils  ?  Le  maitre  de  musique. 

Ne  trouvez-vous  pas  que  j'ai  em-  Certainement,  ce  jet  d'eau  (foun- 

belli  mon  jardin  ?  tain)  embellit  beaucoup  votre 

jardin. 
Haissez-vous  le  vice  ?  Oui,  je  hais  tons  les  vices. 

Pourquoi  haissez-vous  votre  voi-  Je  ne  le  (him)  hais  pas ;  je  hais 

sin  ?  seulement  ses  flatteries. 


•'  READING  LESSON. 

LE   MOINEAU    ET   SBS    PETITS. 

Un  moineau  avait  plac^  son  nid  dans  le  trou  d'un  mur.  H 
elevait  tranquillement  sa  famiUe.  II  aurait  ete  bien  heureux,  si  ses 
petits  eussent  voulu  I'^couter :  mais  a  chaque  instant  ils  venaient 
sur  le  bord  du  nid.  Le  pauvre  oiseau  tremblait  dans  le  crainte  dp 
les  voir  tomber.  II  leur  disait  de  rester  dans  le  fond  du  nid,  mais 
ils  ne  le  voulaient  point  (would  not  do  so.) 

Un  jour  qu'il  4tait  sorti,  ils  profiterent  de  son  absence  et  s'avan- 
cerent  tant  qu'ils  tomberent  h  terre.  lis  n'avaient  pas  encore  de 
plumes  aux  ailes ;  ainsi  ils  ne  purent  (could  not)  se  sauver.  Un 
gros  chat,  qui  passait  par-la,  les  vit  (saw  them);  il  n'avait  pas  din^, 
il  les  saisit,  etlesmangea  sur-le-champ.  C'est  ainsi  qu'ils  furent 
punis  de  (for)  leur  desobeissance. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


105 


Le  moineau,  the  sparrow. 
les  petits,  the  young  ones. 
le  nid,  the  nest. 
le  trou,  the  hole. 
le  mur,  the  wall. 
tranquillement,  quietly. 
€couter,  to  listen,  obey. 
V instant,  m.  the  moment. 
ils  venaient,  they  came. 
la  crainte,  the  fear. 


Tester,  to  remain. 

lefond,  the  bottom. 

tant,  so  much. ., 

Vaile,  f.  the  wing. 

sauver,  to  save ;  se — ,  to  fly  away. 

passer,  to  pass  by. 

par-la,  there. 

diner,  to  dine. 

sur-le-champ,  at  once,  immediately. 

/a  d€soh€issance,  disobedience. 


XXIII.    YINGT-TROISIEME    LE9ON 


THIRD   CONJUGATION ;    VENDRE, 

INDICATIVE. 
PBESENT   TENSE. 

Je  vends,  IseU.  nous  vendons,  we  sell. 

tu  vends,  thou  seUest.  vous  vendez,  you 

il  vend,  he  sells.  ils  vendent, 

elle  (on)  vend,  she  (one)  sells,  elles  vendent, 


b,  [  ^^'^ 


IMPERFECT. 


Je  vendais,  Isold  (was  selling),  nous  vendions,  we  sold. 
tu  vendais,  thou  soldst.  vous  vendiez,  you  sold. 

il  vendait,  he  sold.  ils  vendaient,  they  sold. 


PRETERITE. 

Je  vendis,  I  sold  (did  sell).         nous  vendimes,  we  sold. 
tu  vendis,     e^c.  vous  vendites,      etc. 

il  vendit,      etc.  ils  vendirent,        e^c. 


106  XXIII.      VINGT-TROISIEME  LECON. 

rUTUKE. 

Je  vendrai,  I  shall  sell,  nous  vendrons,  we  shall  sell. 

tu  vendras,  eki.  vous  vendrez,  etc. 

il  vendra,  etc.  ils  vendront,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je  vendrais,  I  should  sell.  nous  vendrions,  we  should  sell. 

tu  vendrais,  etc.  vous  vendriez,  etc.  • 

il  vendrait,  etc.  ils  vendraient,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Vends,  sell.  vendons,  let  us  sell. 

vendez,  sell. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  vende,  that  I  {may)  sell,  que  n.  vendions,  that  we(may)sell. 


que  tu  vendes, 

etc.              que  vous  vendiez,           etc. 

qu'il  vende, 

etc.              qu'ils  vendent,                etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  vendisse,  that 

I  might  sell,  que  nous  vendissions. 

que  tu  vendisses, 

etc.          que  vous  vendissiez. 

qu'il  vendit, 

etc.          qu'ils  veadissent. 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT 

PAST. 

Yendant,  selling. 

Yendu,  f.  vendue,  sold. 

en  vendant,  hy  selling. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  vendu,  to  have  sold. 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OP   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  vendu,  /  have  sold. 

tu  as  vendu,  thou  hast  sold. 

il  a  vendu,  he  has  sold. 

nous  avons  vendu,  we  have  sold,  etc. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION.  107 

COMPOUND    OP   THF    IMPERFECT. 

J'avais  vendu,  I  had  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  PRETERITE. 

J'eus  vendu,  I  had  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  vendu,  I  shall  have  sold,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais  vendu,  >       ,     , , , 

J'eusse  vendu,    \  ^  '^"^  ^"^^  ^^^'  ^• 

PARTICIPLE. 
Ayant  vendu,  having  sold, 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF    THE   PRESENT. 

•Que  j'aie  vendu,  that  I  (may)  have  sold,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  vendu,  that  I  (might)  have  sold,  etc. 

Conjugate  after  this  model :  perdre,  to  lose ;  attendre,  to  wait,  to  expect ; 
r€pondre,  to  answer,  etc. 

Rem.  1.  The  verb  hattre,  to  beat,  is  regularly  conjugated,  except  that  in 
the  singular  of  the  Present  Indicative  and  in  the  Imperative  it  loses  one  t. 

Pres.  Je  bats,  tu  bats,  il  bat,  nous  battons,  vous  battez,  etc.  Imp.  bats. 
Part,  battu. 

Rem.  2.  The  verb  rompre,  to  break,  is  conjugated  in  the  Pres.  Indicative 
as  follows : 

Je  romps,  tu  romps,  il  rompt,  nous  rompons,  etc.      (All  the  rest  is  regular.) 

Rem.  3.  The  verb  rire,  to  laugh,  is  of  the  3d  conjugation :  Pres.  Je  m, 
tu  ris,  il  rit,  nous  rions,  etc.  But  the  Part,  past  is  ri,  and  the  Pret.  Je  ris,  tu 
ris,  il  rit,  nous  rimes,  vous  rites,  ils  rirent.    Put.  Je  rirai,  etc. 

Rem.  4.  Conclure,  to  conclude,  is  regular,  as:. Pres.  Je  conclus,  tu  con- 
clus,  il  conclut,  nous  concluons,  etc.  Put.  Je  conclurai.  Except  that  in  the 
Preterite,  it  has  je  conclus  (not  Je  concluis). 


9 


108  XXIII.      VINGT-TEOISIEME  LE^ON, 

VOCABULARY. 

La  bague,  the  ring.  droit,  e,  right. 

r€pandre,  to  spread,  to  shed.  les  amies,  the  arms. 

le  bruit,  the  report;  the  noise.  la  sagesse,  wisdom. 

la  mort,  death.  la  Grece,  Greece. 

d€fendre,  to  forhid,  to  defend.  I'honneur,  m.  the  honor. 

entendre,  to  hear.  perdre,  to  lose. 

furner,  to  smoke.  attendre,  to  wait  for,  expect. 

r^pondre,  to  answer.  unpen,  a  little. 

le  sang,  the  blood.  'le  tonnerre,  the  thunder. 

Voeil,  the  eye.  le  travail,  the  work. 

gauche,  left.  desirer,  to  wish. 

READING  EXERCISE  23. 

J'ai  vendu  mon  cheval.  Nous  avons  vendu  nos  chevaux.  Je 
perdis  hier  ma  bourse.  Yous  perdites  voire  bague.  La  vieille 
femme  vendait  des  cerises.  Nous  vendions  du  fromage  et  du  beurre. 
On  a  r^pandu  le  bruit  de  la  mort  du  roi.  II  est  defendu  de  fumer 
ici.  Qui  defend  cela  ?  Entendez-vous  le  bruit  ?  Qui  a  battu  mon 
chien?  H  bat  son  cheval.  Repondez-moi  (me),  mon  fils.  Re- 
ponds  h  ton  maitre.  Je  repondis  que  j'etais  malade.  Ce  tyran 
cruel  a  repandu  beaucoup  de  sang  innocent.  Jules  a  deja  perdu 
son  oeil  gauche,  il  perdra  aussi  son  ceil  droit.  Tu  perds  ton  argent. 
Nous  perdons  tout  notre  temps.  Le  bataillon  prit  les  armes  et  de- 
fendit  la  ville.  Socrate  repandit  beaucoup  de  sagesse  k  Athenes  et 
dans  toute  la  Grece.  Pourquoi  riez-vous  ?  Je  ne  ris  pas.  Je  n'ai 
pas  ri. 

THEME  23. 

1.  I  sell  my  dogs.  2.  My  friend  sells  his  horses.  3.  We  sell 
our  houses.  4.  I  defend  my  honor.  5.  Do  you  defend  your 
friends  ?  6.  Thou  losest  thy  time.  7.  You  lose  your  time.  8.  I 
lost  my  money.  9.  My  brother  has  lost  his  cane.  10.  He  will 
lose  everything.  11.  The  pupils  will  lose  their  places.  12.  We 
expect  a  letter  from  our  grandfather.  13.  Do  you  also  expect  a 
letter?  14.  No,  sir,  I  expect  nothing.  16.  James  {Jacques)  and 
William  expect  (a)  good  news.     16.   We  have  waited  an  hour. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


109 


17.  Wait  a  little.  18.  Why  don't  you  wait?  19.  Do  you  hear 
the  music?  20.  I  hear  nothing.  21.  I  did  not  hear  the  thunder. 
22.  Have  you  answered  (to)  her  letter?  23.  I  have  not  yet  an- 
swered. 24.  I  shall  answer  to-morrow.  25.  Answer  me  (moi), 
26.  When  {quand)  I  heard  the  thunder,  I  came  down  from  the 
mountain.  27.  The  poor  children  have  lost  their  father.  28. 
They  will  lose  also  their  mother ;  she  is  very  ill.  29.  Do  not  break 
my  stick. 

CONVERSATION. 


Qui  a  perdu  cette  bourse  ? 

A-t-il  aussi  perdu  de  I'argent  ? 
Pourquoi     perdez-vous     votre 

temps  ^  jouer  ? 
A  quoi  (at  what)  jouez-vous  ? 
Qui  defend  les  brebis  {sheep)  ? 
As-tu  fini  ton  travail  ? 
Ton  frere  a-t-il  fini  sa  version  ? 

Avez-vous  entendu  le  bruit  du 

vent  (wind)  f 
Qui  a  defendu  de  manger  de 

ces  pommes? 
Comment  etes-vous  descendu  ? 

Pourquoi      salissez-vous      vos 

mains  ? 
Pourquoi   ne   punit-on   pas   ce 

m^chant  enfant. 
Qui  {whom)  attendez-vous  ? 
Attendicz-vous  quelqu'un(some 

one)  ? 


Je  crois  (/  think)  que  Jules  a 

perdu  une  bourse. 
Je  crois  qu'il  a  perdu  deux  francs. 
Nous  n'avons  rien  k  faire  {to  do) , 

nous  avons  fini  notre  tache. 
Nous  battens  le  cerceau  {hoop). 
Le  chien  du  berger  {shepherd) . 
Oui,  M — ,  mon  travail  est  fini. 
Je  ne  crois  pas;  il  la  {it)  finura 

demain. 
Le  vent  est  terrible. 

Notre  mere  I'a  defendu  ce  matin. 

Je   suis   descendu   par   I'escaliet 

{stairs). 
Nous   nettoyons  la  cage  de   nos 

oiseaux. 
II  sera  puni  apres  la  le9on. 

J'attends  Monsieur  le  professeur. 
J'attendais  mon  cousin  de  Paris. 


110  XXIV.      VINGT-QUATRIEME   LEgON. 

READING  LESSON. 
•      LE      ROI     DE     PERSE. 

Un  roi  de  Perse  certain  jour 

Chassait  avee  toute  sa  cour ; 

II  eut  soif,  mais  dans  cette  plaine 

On  ne  trouvait  point  de  fontaine, 

Pres  de  Ik  seulement  ^tait  un  grand  jardin 

Rempli  de  beaux  cedrats,  d'oranges,  de  raisins : 

"A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que  j'en  mange  !" 

Bit  le  roi ;  "  ce  jardin  courrait  trop  de  danger  : 

Si  je  me  permettais  d'y  cueillir  une  orange, 

Mes  visirs  aussitot  mangeraient  le  verger." 

Cei-iain  jour,  one  day.  le  cedrat,  the  lemon. 

chasser,  to  go  a  hunting.  a  Dieu  ne  plaise,  God  forbid. 

la  soif,  thirst.  courrait,  would  run. 

seulement,  only.  pei-mettre,  to  permit. 

la  plaine,  the  plain.  cueillir,  to  gather,    y,  there. 

la  fontaine,  fountain,  spring.  aussitot,  immediately. 

pres  de  la,  in  the  neighborhood.  le  verger,  the  orchard. 


XXIY.     VINGT-QUATRIEME    LE9ON 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.^* 

With  personal  pronouns  it  must  be  observed  whether  they  are  intimately 
connected  with  or  governed  by  a  verb,  as  :  I  speak,  we  go,  I  give  you,  etc. ;  if 
this  be  the  case,  they  are  conjunctive  (pronoms  conjoints) ;  or  if  they  are  em- 
ployed by  themselves  or  with  a  preposition;  in  this  case  they  are  termed  dis- 
junctive (pronoms  disjoints).    We  begin  with  the  latter. 

1.  The  disjunctive  personal  pronouns  are:  moi  (I  or  me),  toi 
(thou  or  thee),  nous  (we  or  us),  vous,  (you),  lui  (he  or  him),  elle 
(she  or  her),  eux  (they  or  them,  masculine),  elles  (they  or  them, 

*  See  p.  II,  L.*ix.     ^ 


DISJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  Ill 

feminine),  and  soi  (self,  one's  self).  These  pronouns,  it  will  be 
perceived,  do  not  change  their  form  to  indicate  case,  the  nominative 
and  objective  being  the  same. 

Ex. :  Qui  a  dit  cela  ?        Moi,  ltd,  elk,  nous,  etc. 
Who  lias  said  this  ?     I,  he,  she,  we,  etc. 
Cest  pour  moi,  pour  toi,  pour  die,  etc. 
That  is  for  me,  for  thee,  for  her,  etc. 
Je  parle  de  toi,  de  vous,  d'dles,  d'eux,  etc. 
I  speak  of  thee,  of  you,  of  them,  of  them,  etc. 
Nous  pensons  a  lui,  a  vous,  a  eux,  etc. 
We  think  of  him,  of  you,  of  them,  etc. 

2.  All  these  disjunctive  pronouns  may  take  the  word  -meme,  pi.  -memes, 
whenever  in  English  the  word  selfia  joined  to  a  pronoun.    Ex. :  — 

S.  moi-meme,  (I)  myself.  PI.  nous-memes,  ourselves. 

toi-meme,  thyself.  vous-memes,  yourselves. 

lui-mime,  himself.  eux-memes,  \  tijej^g^lves. 

dle-meme,  herself.  elles-memes,  ) 

soi-meme,  one's  self. 

3.  When  a  stress  is  laid  upon  personal  pronouns,  they  are  often  preced- 
ed by  c'est,  c'€tait,  etc.,  as  in  English :  — 

S.  c'est  moi,  it  is  I.  PI.  c'est  nous,  it  is  we. 

c'est  toi,  it  is  thou.  c'est  vous,  it  is  you. 

c'est  lui,  it  is  he.  ce  sont  eux,  >  ..  .    . j^ 

c'est  die,  it  is  she.  ce  sont  dies,  y 

The  verb  etre  following  ce  is  put  in  the  plural  only  when  the  pronoun  or 
noun  which  follows  that  verb  is  in  the  third  person  plural :  c'€taient  mes  amis 
ce  sont  eux,  but,  c'est  nous. 

4.  Soi  is  only  used  of  mankind  in  a  general  sense,  and  of  inanimate  ob- 
jects in  the  singular.    Ex.:  — 

Doit-on  toujours  penser  a  soi,  ought  one  always  to  think  of  one's  self  T 

VOCABULARY. 

Inconstant,  inconstant.  la  pdote,  the  ball. 

ressembler,  to  resemble.  venez,  come. 

envoyer,  to  send.  casser,  to  break. 

demeurer,  to  live.  sorti,  gone  out. 

la  corbeille,  the  basket.  ag^,  old. 

Vaimant,  m.  the  loadstone.  ni  —  ni,  neither,  nor. 
attirer,  to  attract. 


112  XXIV.     VINGT-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

READING  EXERCISE  24. 

Qui  dit  (says)  cela  ?  Moi,  —  lui,  —  elle,  —  eux-memes,  —  elles- 
m^mes.  Penses-tu  h  moi  ?  Je  pense  k  toi.  Je  pense  a  vous,  —  a  elles, 
—  a  eux.  Je  n'ai  pas  pense  k  toi,  mon  pauvre  enfant.  L'homme 
inconstant  ne  ressemble  jamais  h  lui-meme.  Nous  nous  souvenons 
(we  remember)  de  vous,  —  de  lui,  —  d'elles,  —  d'eux.  Envoyez- 
moi  de  Fargent.  Sans  moi,  elle  serait  tombee.  Je  suis  plus  grand 
que  toi,  —  que  lui,  —  qu'elle.  Qui  a  4t4  ici,  lui  ou  elle  ?  Venez 
avec  moi,  —  avec  nous.  Joue  avec  lui.  Jouez  avec  elles.  On 
parle  de  nous.  Tu  paries  de  lui  et  d'elle.  Nous  parlons  souvent 
(often)  de  vous.  Je  defends  mon  honneur  moi-meme.  L'aimant 
attire  le  fer  h  soi.  Nous  nous  moquons  (we  mock  at)  d'eux.  Ah ! 
vous  vous  moquez  de  nous  ! 

THEME  24. 

1.  My  brother  and  I  (we)  have  heard  the  noise.  2.  Who  will 
have  the  ball,  thou  or  he  ?  3.  Who  has  broken  the  stick  ?  4.  Not 
I !  5.  You  and  he,  (you)  were  not  attentive.  6.  She  and  Emily 
have  gone  out.  7.  Who  has  gone  out  with  them  ?  8.  Come  with  me. 
9.  Come  to  our  house  (c^es;  wows) .  10.  Who  speaks  of  me  ?  11. 
I  speak  of  you.  12.  You  speak  of  her  and  of  her  sister.  13.  For 
whom  is  the  medicine?  14.  It  (elle)  is  for  yourself.  15.  Does 
she  live  with  you  ?  16.  She  lives  with  us.  17.  He  is  older  than 
I.  18.  I  think  of  (a)  you.  19.  You  do  not  think  of  me.  20. 
Youal\vays'*  think  of  yourself.  21.  One  must  not  (il  ne  faut 
pas)  always  think  of  one's  self.  22.  Have  you  brought  the  book 
yourself?  23.  Yes,  I  myself.  24.  Does  she  play  with  us  ?  25. 
She  plays  with  them  (m.)  26.  Is  it  himself?  27.  Yes,  it  is  him- 
self.    28.  It  is  I ;  it  is  not  he. 

CONVERSATION. 

Qui  a  difcela  ?  Moi.  —  Lui.  —  Elle. 

Quivientla?  C 'est  nous. 

Pensez-vous  h,  vos  amis  ?  Je  pense  souvent  a  eux. 

*  In  French,  the  adverb  usually  follows  the  verb. 


DISJUNCTIVE   PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


113 


Est-elle  tombee  ? 

Pour  qui  sont  ces  bottes  ? 

A  qui  pensez-vous  ? 

De  qui  parle-t-on  ? 

Qui  a  apport^  cette  corbeille  ? 

Qui  a  fait  cela  ? 

Est-elle  arrivee  seule  ? 

Qui    a    ecrit    (written)    cette 

lettre  ? 
Que  fait  raimant  ? 
Qui  a  battu  cet  enfant  ? 
Qui  est  venu  avec  toi  ? 
Ou  demeure-t-il  ? 
Est-ce  vous  qui  avez  perdu  cet 

argent  ? 


Heureusement    non !    mais    sans 

moi  elle  serait  tombee. 
EUes  sont  pour  moi. 
Je  pense  a  vous  et  a  votre  mere. 
On  parle  d'eux,  —  d'elles. 
Ma  soeur  elle-meme. 
Ni  lui,  ni  elle,  ni  nous,  ni  eux. 
Non,  elle  est  arrivee  avec  moi. 
Mon  pere  lui-meme. 

H  attire  le  fer  h.  soi. 
Ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  Leopold. 
Mon  amie  Jules. 
II  demeure  chez  son  oncle. 
Non,  ce  n'est  pas  moi,  c'est  ma 
cousine  Emilie. 


READING  LESSON. 
LE  ROSIER.      (The  rose-hush.) 

"  Qui  veut  (toill)  me  donner  un  petit  arbre  pour  mon  jardin  ?" 
disait  Frederic  a  ses  freres  et  h  sa  soeur. 

Leur  pere  leur  (them)  avait  donne  a  chacun  un  petit  coin  de  terra 
a  planter. 

"  Ce  n'est  pas  moi !  "  dit  Auguste.  —  "  Ni  moi !  "  s'^cria  Louis. 
—  "  Ce  sera  moi !  "  dit  la  bonne  Charlotte ;  "  de  quelle  espece  le 
(^0  veux-tu?" 

"Je  voudrais  (^I  should  like)  avoir  un  rosier,"  repondit  Fre- 
deric ;  **  le-mien  est  tout  jauni." 

"  C'est  bon,"  repliqua  Charlotte.  Puis  elle  prit  (then  she  took) 
une  pelle  et  alia  (went)  le  retirer  de  terre. 

"  Que  vois-je  (what  do  Isee)V'  dit  Frederic,  "  tu  n'en  as  toi- 
meme  que  (only)  deux,  et  encore  (besides)  il  y  en  a  un  si  petit  I 
Du  moins  ne  me  donne  pas  le  plus  grand." 


114  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME   LEgON. 

*'  Non,  non  !  "  s'ecria  sa  soeur,  "  il  pourrait  encore  (could  again) 
se  secher ;  je  puis  jouir  du  plaisir  de  le  voir  fleurir  dans  ton  jardin." 

(To  he  continued.) 

Chaciin,  e,  each.  puis,  then. 

un  petit  coin  de  terre,  a  corner  of  land,  la  pelle,  the  spade. 

ni  moi,  nor  I  either.  retirer,  to  take  out. 

s'^crier,  to  call  out,  to  cry.  du  mffins,  at  least. 

I'espece,  f.  the  sort,  kind.  secher,  to  dry. 

le  mien,  mine,     tout,  quite.  se  se'cher,  to  get  dry,  to  wither* 

jauni,  e,  yellow,  withered.  jepuis,  I  can  (from  pouvoir). 

r€pliquer,  to  reply.  jouir,  to  enjoy,    voir,  to  see. 


XXY.    YINGT-CINQUIEME    LE9ON, 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

These  are/e  (T),nous  (we),  tu  (thou),  vous  (you),  il  (he),  plu. 
Us  (they,  m.),  elle  (she),  plu.  elles  (they,  f.).* 

Unlike  the  disjunctive  personal  pronouns,  these,  except  vous  and 
nous,  vary  to  express  different  cases. 

Je  has  me  when  used  either  as  the  direct  or  indirect  object  of  the 
verb  :  tu  has  te  m  the  same  cases. 

Of  him,  of  her,  of  them,  of  it  (m.  or  f.),  are  each  represented  by 
the  pronoun  en,  generally  referring  to  things :  to  him,  to  her,  each 
by  lui:  to  them  (m.  or  f.),  by  leur. 

The  objective  case  (direct  object)  of  il,  is  le  (him),  and  of  elle,  is 
la,  (her):  les  (them)  is  the  obj.  plu.  of  both  genders. 

POSITION  OF   CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

General  Rule.  Conjunctive  pronouns  precede  the  verb  except 
in  the  Imperative  affirmative.  In  the  interrogative  form  the  subject 
comes  after  the  verb. 

*  For  on,  of  which  se  is  used  as  the  object  and  soi  as  the  disjunctive,  see  Pai't  ii. 

li.  XII. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PEESONAL   PEONOUNS.  115 

SPECIAL   RULES. 
A.    WITH   ONE   PRONOUN. 

1.  The  nominative  cases  je,  tu,  il,  elle,  nous,  vous,  Us,  or  elles, 
usually  precede  the  verb  of  which  they  are  the  subject :  in  an  inter- 
rogative sentence,  however,  they  are  placed  immediately  after  the 
verb.     Ex. :  — 

Je  pense,  I  think.  nous  parlons,  we  speak. 

tu  esperes,  thou  hopest.  vous  jouez,  you  play. 

■Interrogative: 
Finis-tu,  dost  thou  finish  ? 
Vient-elle,  does  she  come  ? 

2.  The  direct  and  indirect  objects  are  placed  immediately  before 
the  verb  in  a  simple  tense,  and  before  the  auxiliary  in  a  compound 

one.     Ex. :  — 

Tu  me  dis,  you  tell  me. 

Je  vous  donne,  I  give  you. 

Elle  m'a  r^pondu,  she  has  answered  me. 

Charles  nous  a  dit,  Charles  has  told  us. 

3.  If  the  sentence  is  negative,  ne  is  put  directly  after  the  subject, 
before  the  governed  pronoun,  as : 

Je  ne  vous  donne  pas,  I  do  not  give  you. 

Vou^  ne  les  avez  pas  vus,  you  have  not  seen  them. 
Elle  ne  m'a  pas  repondu,  she  has  not  answered  me. 

Charles  ne  nous  avail  pas  dit,  Charles  had  not  told  us. 

4.  In  the  interrogative  form,  the  object  begins  the  sentence,  then 
follows  the  verb  with  its  subject.  If  the  question  is  a  negative  one, 
ne  begins  the  sentence  : 

Me  connaissez-vous,  do  you  know  me  ? 

Me  bldme-t-il,  does  he  blame  me  ? 

Les  vois-tu,  do  you  see  them  ? 

Vous  a-t-il  repondu,  has  he  answered  you  ? 

Ne  vous  a-t-il  pas  repondu,  has  he  not  answered  you  ? 

6.  When  the  verb  is  in  the  Imperative  affirmative,  the  governed 
pronouns  are  put  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.     In  this  case  me 


116  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

and  te  are  changed  into  moi  and  toi  for  the  du-ect  and  indirect 
objects.     Ex.  :  — 

Donnez-moi,  give  me.  Apportez-lui,  bring  (to)  him. 

Mangez-les,  eat  them.  Parlez-leur,  speak  to  them. 

6.  But  when  the  Imperative  is  negative,  the  governed  pronoun 
precedes  the  verb.     Ex.  :  — 

Ne  me  donnezpas,  do  not  give  me. 
Ne  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  him. 
Ne  les  mangez  pas,  do  not  eat  them. 
Ne  leur  parlez  pas,  do  not  speak  to  them. 

B.    WITH   TWO   PRONOUNS. 

1.  When  a  verb,  which  is  not  in  the  Imperative  affirmative, 
governs  two  pronouns,  they  are  both  placed  immediately  before  the 
verb,  so  that  the  indirect  object  comes  first,  and  the  direct  follows. 
Ex.:  — 

Je  te  le  donne,  I  give  it  to  thee  (you). 

Vous  Vapporte-t-elle,  does  she  bring  it    to    you  ? 

Ne  nous  Vapportera-t-il  pas,  will  he  not  bring  it  to  us  1 

On  vous  le  dira,  they  will  tell  (it)  you. 

On  ne  vous  le  dira  pas,  they  will  not  tell  (it  to)  you. 

2.  An  exception  to  the  foregoing  rule  are  the  two  indirect  objects, 
lui  (to  him,  to  her),  and  leur  (to  them),  which  always  follow  the 
other  governed  pronoun.     Ex.:  — 

Je  le  lui  donne,  I  give  it  to  him  or  her. 

Je  ne  le  lui  donne  pas,  I  do  not  give  it  him. 

La  lui  donne-t-dle,  does  she  give  it  him  1 

La  leur  donnera-t-il,  will  he  give  it  to  them? 

Je  ne  la  leur  ai  pas  donn€,  I  have  not  given  it  to  them. 

Ne  le  lui  donnez  pas,  do  not  give  it  him. 

Pourquoi  ne  la  leur  pretez-vous  pas,  why  do  you  not  lend  it  to  them  ? 

3.  Of  two  personal  pronouns  governed  by  the  Imperative  affirma- 
tive the  indirect  object  always  stands  last : 

Donnez-le-moi,  give  it  me. 

Apportez-les-lui  (leur),  bring  them  to  him  (to  them). 

4.  If  the  Imperative  is  negative,  both  of  them  precede  the  verb 


CONJUNCTIVE  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  117 

according  to  §  6,  and  lui  and  leur  follow  the  direct  object,  according 
toB,  §2.     Ex.  :  — 

Ne  me  le  donnez  pas,  do  not  give  it  me. 

Ne  la  lui  apportez  pas,  do  not  bring  it  to  him. 

Ne  les  leur  envoyez  pas,  do  not  send  them  to  them. 

\ 

VOCABULARY.    •» 

Pardonner  (k),*  to  paxdon.  tailler,  to  cut,  mend. 

prefer  (a),  to  lend.  louer,  to  praise;  to  let. 

r^compenser,  to  reward.  accompagner,  to  accompany. 

corriger,  to  correct.  je  promets,  I  promise. 
€couter,  to  listen  to.  Vhistoire,/.  history; 

la  v&it€,  the  truth.  volontiers,  willingly. 

READING  EXERCISE  25. 

Je  vous  entends.  II  me  pardonnera.  Elle  m'a  pardonne.  Al- 
fred m'a  prete  un  livre  amusant.  Pretez-moi  votre  livre.  Je  vous 
le  preterai.  II  me  le  donne.  Tu  me  Fas  donne.  Elle  me  les  don- 
nerait,  si  elle  les  avait  encore.  Vous  a-t-il  pardonne  ?  Lui  as-tu 
dit  (told)  cela  ?  Je  le  lui  ai  dit.  Leur  a-t-on  repondu  ?  Appelez 
ces  ecoliers.  Je  les  recompenserai ;  je  leur  donnerai  de  belles 
images.  Tu  les  leur  donneras  demain.  Ne  te  loue  pas  toi-meme. 
On  ne  se  loue  pas  soi-meme.  Elle  ne  vous  ecoute  pas.  Elle  ne 
m'a  pas  ecout^.  Nous  ecoutera-t-il  ?  Vous  ne  me  dites  pas  la 
verite.  Je  vous  la  dis.  Cette  plume  est  trop  molle ;  voulez-vous 
avoir  la  bonte  (kindness)  de  me  la  tailler  ?  Je  vous  la  taillerai  vo- 
lontiers. 

THEME  25. 

1.  I  praise  thee.  2.  Thou  praisest  me.  3.  Do  you  play?  4. 
Do  you  hear?  5.  Do  you  hear  me  ?  6.  I  hear  you.  7.  I  do  not 
sell  my  house.  8.  I  do  not  sell  it.  9.  Do  you  sell  your  horses  ? 
10.  I  do  not  sell  them.  11.  We  hear  thee.  12.  I  call  him.  13. 
Will  you  accompany  me?      14.    My  father  will  accompany  you. 

*  This  mark  (a)  denotes  that  the  verb  after  which  it  is  placed  takes  an  indirect 
personal  object. 


118  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME    LEgON. 

15.  Have  you  mended  my  pen?  16.  I  have  mended  it.  17. 
Lend  me  a  pencil.  18.  Lend  him  a  pen.  19.  Do  not  give  him 
my  book.  20.  Do  not  give  it  him.  21.  I  promise  you.  22.  I 
promise  it  [to]  you.  23.  Tell  {dites-)  him  (to  him).  24.  Tell 
them.  25.  Tell  it  him.  26.  Do  not  tell  it  [to]  them.  27.  I 
should  give  you  some  money,  if  you  were  more  industrious.  28. 
Has  she  given  him  the  gloves?  29.  She  has  given  them  to  him. 
30.  She  has  not  given  them  to  him;  she  has  given  them  to  his 
brother.  31.  Your  translation  is  badly  done  (malfaite)  ;  correct 
it  (^fem.).  32.  Pardon  (me)  my  mistakes.  33.  Have  you  cor- 
rected them  ?     34.  Yes,  I  have  (corrected  them) . 

CONVERSATION. 

M'entendez-vous  ?  Oui,  je  vous  entends. 

Ne  m'entendez-vous  pas  ?  Je  ne  vous  ai  pas  antendu. 

Me  pardonnerez-vous  ?  Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas. 

De  qui  avez-vous  refu  ce  livre  C'est  Alfred  qui  me  I'a  prete. 

amusant  ? 

Youlez-vous   preter  ce  livre   k  Je  le  lui  preterai  volontiers. 

ma  soeur  ? 

Qui  veut  cette  plume  ?  Donnez-la-moi,  s'il  vous  plait  (if 

you  please). 

Les  aimez-vous  ?  Oui,  je  les  aime  beaucoup. 

Dites-vous  la  verite  ?  Je  la  dis  toujours. 

Qui  vous  accompagnera  ?  Mon  cousin  m'aceompagnera  jus- 

qu'a  (as  far  as)  Bruxelles. 

Vous  a-t-on  raconte  (told)  une  Oui,  notre  grand'mere  nous  a  ra- 

histoire  ?  conte  une  tres-belle  histoire. 


EEADING  LESS05?. 
SUITE    DU     RO  SIER. 

Frederic,  transportc  do  joie,  emporta  le  rosier;  et  Charlotte  le 
suivit  plus  joyeuse  encore  que  lui. 

Le  jardinier  avait  vu  le  trait  d'amitic  de  la  petite  fiUe.  II  alia 
chercher  (he  went  for)  un  beau  sureau  d'Espagne. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


119 


**  Voulez-vous  que  je  mette  (^piit)  ceci  a  la  place  de  votre  rosier?  " 
demanda-t-il  h  Charlotte. 

**  Si  vous  n'en  avez  pas  besoin." 

"  Non,"  r<^pondit-il,  *' je  n'en  ai  pas  besoin."  — II  le  planta. 

Le  mois  de  Mai  suivant,  le  rosier  de  Frederic  porta  les  plus  belles 
roses,  et  tous  les  matins,  Charlotte  recevait  un  bouton  h.  moitie  ou- 
vert,  pour  le  mettre  dans  ses  cheveux. 

Le  sureau  prit  (took)  racine  aussi  et  devint  (hecame)  bient6t  si 
grand  et  si  epais  que  Charlotte  y  trouva  de  Fombrage  dans  la  grande 
chaleur  du  jour. 


Transports,  enraptured. 

emporter,  to  carry  off. 

le  suivit,  followed  him. 

joyeux,  joyful. 

le  trait,  the  trait. 

I'amHiS,  friendship. 

un  sureau  d'Espagne,  a  lilac-tree, 

ceci,  this. 


demander,  to  ask. 
un  bouton,  a  bud. 
la  moiti€,  half. 
ouvert,  open,  opened. 
la  racine,  the  root. 
hlentot,  soon. 
I'omhrage,  the  shade. 
la  chaleur,  the  heat. 


XXYI.    YINGT-SIXIEME    LE9ON 


DExMONSTRATiVE  PRONOUNS. 

.    These  are : 

masculine. 

feminine. 

Celui, 

celle,  that. 

pi.  ceux, 

ceJles,  those. 

cdui-ci, 

celle-ci,  this,  the  lattef. 

{)1.  ceux-ci, 

celles-ci,  these. 

cdui-la. 

celle-la,  that  (one),  the  former. 

pi.  ceux-la. 

celles-la,  those. 

2.  The  pronouns  he,  she,  they,  preceding  a  relative,  must  be 
translated  by  celui,  celle,  ceux,  celles.  Ex.  :  celui  qui,  he  who ; 
celle  qui,  she  who  ;  ceux  qui,  celles  qui,  they  who. 


120  XXVI.      VINGT-SIXIEME  LEgON. 

3.  Celui,  ceTle,  ceux,  celles,  are  used  with  the  preposition  de.voc 
Btead  of  the  English  possessive  case, when  the  governing  noun  is  not 
expressed.  Ex.  :  mon  chapeau  et  celui  de  monfrere,  my  hat  and 
my  brother's ;  ma  plume  et  celle  de  ma  soeur,  my  pen  and  my 
sister's. 

Eemark.  Cdui,  celle,  ^c,  are  used  only  before  a  relative  or  the  prepo- 
sition de;  in  all  other  cases  celui-ci,  celle-ci,  cdui-la,  celle-la,  Sfc,  must  be 
used.  Ex. :  J^ai  cdui-ci,  je  n'ai  pas  cdui-la,  I  have  this  one,  I  have  not 
that  one. 

4.  Ce,  which  we  have  seen  as  an  adjective,  is  also  a  pronoim. 
It  is  then  invariable,  meaning  this,  that,  it.  —  It  is  used  before  the 
relative,  as  :  ce  qui  (subj.),  ce  que  (obj,),  that  which  (what)  ;  ce 
dont,  that  of  which. 

For  the  use  of  ce  or  il  before  the  verb  to  be,  see  Kule  after  the  vocabulary 
of  Lesson  xv.     See  also  Lesson  xxiv.  3. 

5.  The  compounds  of  ce,  ceci,  this,  and  cela,  that,  are  used  abso- 
lutely, without  reference  to  any  particular  noun. 

Ex. :  Je  ne  veux  pas  ceci,  je  veux  cela. 
I  do  not  want  this,  I  want  that. 
Ce  gueje  dis,  what  I  say. 

Que  dites-vous  de  cela,  what  do  you  say  of  that  ? 
Est-ce  la  voire  plume,  is  this  your  pen  1 
Cest  ma  plume,  that  is  my  pen. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants,  are  these  your  gloves  ? 
Ce  sont  mes  gants,  these  are  my  gloves. 

6.  In  place  of  de  and  a  with  ce,  ceci,  cela,  ceux-ci,  and  ceux-la, 
two  other  conjunctive  pronouns  are  used,  viz. :  en  and  y.  En  ia 
rendered  in  English  by  some,  of  it,  of  them,  about  it,  about  them, 
etc.  T  corresponds  to  the  English  to  it,  to  them,  in  it,  in  them, 
there,  therein,  etc.     Ex. :  — 

Void  du  jamhon :  en  voulez-vous  9 
Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  1 
J'eti  prendrai  un  petit  morceau. 
I  shall  take  a  little  piece  of  it. 

Votre  pere  est-il  aujardin  ? Qui,  il  y  est. 

Is  your  father  in  the  garden  ?    Yes,  he  is  there. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS.  121 

Ty  vais  aussi,  I  am  going  there  also. 

Donnez-m'en  —  donnez-lui-en. 

Give  me  some  —  give  him  some. 

Y penses-tu,  do  you  think  of  that  1 

Je  lui  en  ai  donne,  I  have  given  him  some  of  them  (it). 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  porte-feinlle,  the  pocket-book.  la  recompense,  the  reward. 

lapeur,  fear.  b€nir,  to  bless. 

Vdme,  the  soul.  perse'cuter,  to  persecute. 

la  noblesse,  nobility.  souhaiter,  to  wish. 

le  corps,  the  body.  enrichir,  to  enrich. 

commode,  comfortable.  V agriculture,  f.  agriculture. 

le  conqu&ant,  the  conqueror.  egalement,  equally. 

jaune,  yellow.  tout  de  suite,  directly. 

joU,  e,  nice,  pretty.  promet,  promises. 
le  commerce,  the  commerce. 

READING  EXERCISE  26. 

Yoici  mon  porte-feuille  et  celui  de  mon  pere.  Yoici  mes  gants  et 
ceux  de  ma  soeur.  Youlez-vous  ceux-ci  ou  ceux-la?  Celui  qui 
remplit  ses  devoirs  est  un  honnete  homme.  Youlez-vous  ceci  ou 
cela  ?  Ceux  qui  sont  contents,  sent  toujours  heureux.  Heureux  ce- 
lui qui  trouve  un  vrai  ami !  Je  prefere  la  noblesse  de  I'ame  h.  celle 
de  la  naissance  {birth).  On  croit  (^believes)  ce  qu'on  espere.  Ce 
que  vous  dites  me  fait  pour.  Qui  vient  la  ?  C'est  moi.  —  Ce  sont 
eux.  Ce  qui  est  beau  n'est  pas  toujours  utile.  Ne  parlez  pas  de 
ce  qui  ne  vous  regarde  (concern)  pas.  Alexandre-le-Grand  et 
Jules  Cesar  furent  de  grands  conquerants;  celui-la  mourut  dans-sa 
jeunesse,  celui-ci  fut  assassine  (murdered). 

THEME  26. 

1.  Here  is  your  hat  and  your  brother's.  2.  I  shall  sell  my  house 
and  my  uncle's.  3.  We  speak  of  these,  you  speak  of  those.  4: 
Give  me  that  one.  5.  This  is  my  pen.  6.  These  (ce)  arc  your  pen- 
cils.    7.  Is  this  the  garden  of  your  aunt?     8.  Are  these  the  shoes 


122  XXVII.      VINGT-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 

of  your  sister?  9.  No,  these  are  the  shoes  of  my  cousin  Eliza.  10. 
This  ink  (cette  encre-ci)  is  blacker  than  that,  11.  These  gloves  are 
white,  those  are  yellow.  12.  I  prefer  the  beauty  of  the  soul  to  that 
(y.)  of  the  body.  13.  Agriculture  and  commerce  are  equally  use- 
ful to  man;  the  former  nourishes  us,  the  latter  enriches  us.  14. 
My  mother  prefers  this  house  to  that ;  this  is  smaller,  but  that  is 
more  comfortable.  15.  Have  you  (any)  butter  ?  16.  Yes,  I  have 
some.  17.  Give  me  some.  18.  Here  is  black  cloth.  19.  I  shall 
take  ten  yards  of  it  {fen  prendrai  .  .  .).  20.  Were  you  at  the 
theatre  yesterday?  21.  Yes,  I  was  there.  22.  Is  your  master  in 
that  room?     23.  Yes,  he  is  there. 


XXYII.    VINGT-SEPTIEME    LE9ON. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

They  are  :  1.  lequel  f.  laquelle,  which  (of)  ?  2.  qui,  who?  que 
and  quoi,  what  ? 

1.  Lequel  is  used  either  without  a  noun,  or  is  at  least  separated 
from  it  by  de ;  but  it  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number.  When 
the  pronoun  which  is  used  interrogatively,  it  is  always  expressed  by 
lequel^  laquelle,  etc.,  as:  — 

Void  deux  appartements,  leqiid  choisirez-vous  ? 
Here  are  two  apartments,  which  will  you  choose  ? 
Une  de  ses  sanirs  est  marie'e.    Laquelle  est-ce  ? 
One  of  his  sisters  is  married.     Which  is  it  ? 
Laquelle  de  vos  ecolieres  est  malade  ? 
Which  of  your  pupils  is  ill  ? 

■  The  same  contractions  take  place  in  the  article  le  compounded  with  qud, 
as  when  used  by  itself:  thus,  by  contraction  with  the  prepositions  a  and  de, 
arc  formed  auquel,  auxquels,  auxquelles,  duquel,  desquelsf  and  desquelles. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  123 

2.  The   interrogative   pronoun   quC^   is  only  used  of  persons. 

Ex.:  — 

Qui  est  la,  who  is  there? 

A  qui-pretez-vous  cela,  to  whom  do  you  lend  this  ? 
Qui  clierchez-vous,  whom  are  you  looking  for? 
Pour,  qui  est  ce  crayon,  for  whom  is  this  pencil  ? 

3.  Whose,  when  used  interrogatively,  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  a  qui.     Ex. :  — 

Whose  book  is  this  ?    a  qui  est  ce  livre  ? 

4.  Que  and  quoi  are  neuter.''^  Quoi,  what,  is  disjunctive,  and 
used  either  by  itself  or  after  a  preposition,  as  :  —  ' 

De  quoi  parlez-vous,  of  what  are  you  speaking  ? 
Sur  quoi,  upon  what  ?    Avec  quoi,  with  what  ? 

5.  Que,  what,  is  conjunctive,  and  is  only  used  before  verbs :  it 
never  follows  a  preposition.     Ex. :  — 

Que  voulez-vous,  what  do  you  wish  or  want  ? 
Que  dit-on,  what  do  people  say  ? 
Que  demande-t-il,  what  does  he  ask  ? 

VOCABULARY. 
Mari€,  e,  married.  le  cahier,  the  copy-book. 

lev^,  got  up,  risen.  la  niece,  the  niece. 

Jrapper,  to  strike,  to  beat.  le  porte-plume,  the  penholder. 

KGADING  EXERCISE  27. 

Lequel  de  vos  fils  est  malade  ?  Laquelle  de  vos  soeurs  est  ma- 
riee  ?  Lesquels  de  vos  ^coliers  n'ont  pas  fait  leurs  themes  ?  Yoici 
plusieurs  canifs  :  lequel  voulez-vous  acheter  ?  Qui  est  arrive  ?  Qui 
a  trouve  ma  bourse  ?  De  qui  avez-vous  parle  ?  A  qui  est  la  gram- 
maire  que  vous  avez  k  la  main  ?  Que  souhaitez-vous,  Monsieur  ? 
Qu'avez-vous  port4  h  la  poste  ?  Quoi !  vous  etes  dejk  leve  !  A 
quoi  pensez-vous  done  ?  Auquel  de  ces  ecoliers  avez-vous  promis 
une  recompense  ? 

*  The  neuter  gender  is  recognized  as  existing  in  French  only  by  very  few  gram- 
marians. But  que  and  quoi,  the  pronoun  ce,  and  sometimes  le,  are  certainly 
neither  masculine  nor  feminine. 


124 


XXVII.      VINGT-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 


THEME  27. 

1.  Which  of  your  horses  have  you  sold?  2.  Which  of  these  col- 
ors is  the  finest?  3.  Which  of  my  copy-books  will  you  have?  4. 
To  'which  of  your  nieces  do  you  write  {ecrivez-vous)  a  letter  ?  5. 
Wliich  of  your  pupils  are  the  most  diligent  ?  6.  Here  are  several 
pictures,  which  will  you  choose?  7.  Who  is  at  (a)  the  door?  8. 
Whom  do  you  love  most  {le  mieux)  ?  9.  From  whom  have  you 
received  this  ring?  10.  To  whom  do  you  speak?  11.  To  whom 
will  you  give  this  nice  pen-holder?  12.  What  do  you  carry  under 
your  arm  {bras) 'I  13.  With  what  has  he  beaten  the  dog?  14. 
What !  ^re  you  still  {encore)  in  bed  (au  lit)  ? 


CONVERSATION. 


Lequel  de  ces  deux  porte-feuil- 

les  est  a  vous  ? 
Laquelle    de   ces   deux   robes 

preferez-vous  ? 
Est-ce  Ik  votre  bague  ? 
SontKje  Ih,  vos  gants  ? 


Avez-vous  re9u  ma  lettre  ? 

Le  commerce   est-il  utile   aux 

bommes  ? 
Quelle  maison  vendez-vous  ? 


A  qui  donnerez-vous  ce  canif  ? 
Voici  du  jambon  et  du  pain,  en 

voulez-vous  ? 
Avez-vouz  apporte  les  verres  ? 
Madame  votre  mere  est-elle  a  la 

maison  {or  chez  elle)  ? 


Celui  que  vous  avez  a  la  main. 

Je  prefere  celle-ci  h  celle-la. 

Oui,  M — ,  c'est  ma  bague  d'or. 
Non,   M — ,  ce  ne  sont  pas  mes 

gants,  ce  sont  ceux  de  ma  cou- 

sine. 
Je  n'ai  re^u  ni  la  v6tre  {yours) 

ni  celle  de  votre  pere. 
Oui,  tres-utile ;  il  les  enrichit. 

J'ai  deux  maisons  a  vendre,  celle 
de  mon  oncle  et  celle  de  mon 
grand-pere. 

Je  le  donnerai  a  Guillaume. 

Merci,  nous  en  avons  deja. 

Non,  M — ,  je  n'y  ai  pas  pensd. 
Oui,  M — ,  elle  y  est. 


POSSESSIVE   AND   RELATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


125 


XXYIII.     YINGT-HUITIEME    LE9ON, 


POSSESSIVE  AND 

RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

1.    The  possessive  pronouns 

:  are  formed  from  the  possessive  adjec- 

lives  mon,  ton 

,  son,  etc. 

They  are :  — 

SING 

PLUR. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Masc.                   Fern. 

le  mien, 

la  mienne, 

les  miens,        les  miennes,    mine. 

le  tien, 

la  ticnne. 

les  tiens,          les  tiennes,      thine. 

le  sien, 

la  sienne, 

les  siens,          les  siennes.      Us,  hers,  its, 

le  notre, 

la  notre, 

les  notres,                       ours. 

le  votre, 

la  votre. 

les  votres,                       yours. 

le  leur, 

la  lour. 

les  leurs,                          theirs. 

These  are  not,  as  in  English,  of  the  same  gender  as  the  possessor.     They 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  object  possessed.    Ex. :  — 
Cette  dame  a  mon  crayon  et  le  sien. 
That  lady  has  mv  pencil  and  hers. 
Avez-vous  ma  montre  ou  la  votre  ? 
Have  you  my  watch  or  yours  ? 
J^ai  la  mienne,  I  have  mine. 
Ma  sceur  a  la  sienne,  my  sister  has  hers. 

2.  The  interrogative  pronouns  qui,  quoi,  and  lequel,  serve  at  the 
same  time  as  relative  pronouns,  when  they  have  a  reference  to  some 
other  noun  or  pronoun  preceding. 

3.  As  a  relative  qui  is  a  subject  and  que  the  direct  object.  Qui 
and  que  are  used  for  persons  and  things  of  both  genders  and  num- 
bers.    Ex. :  — 

Un  enfant  qui  pleure,  a  child  that  cries. 
Laporte  qui  est  ouverte,  the  door  which  is  open. 
Le  voyageur  que  fai  quitt^,  the  traveller  whom  I  have  left. 
Le  chapeauquej'ai  achet€,  the  hat  (which)  I  have  bought. 
Les  maisons  que  vous  avez  vues,  the  houses  (which)  you  have  seen. 
The  relative  que,  whom,  which,  or  that,  is  sometimes  understood  in  Eng- 
lish, but  it  must  always  be  expressed  in  French. 


126  XXVIII.      VINGT-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

4.  Dont,  whose,  of  which,  is  used  for  persons  and  things  of 
both  genders  and  numbers ;  but  de  qui,  from  whom  or  of  whom, 
which  is  sometimes  required  instead  of  dont,  has  only  reference  to 
persons. 

Remark.  When  dont  signifies  whose  the  noun  "which  it  limits  must  be 
preceded  by  the  article ;  if  the  noun  is  the  object  of  a  verb  it  must  come 
after  that  verb,  and  not  immediately  after  dont  as  in  English.     Ex. :  — 

Je  connais  lafemme  dont  vous  avez  requ  la  lettre. 

I  know  the  woman  whose  letter  you  have  received. 

Je  connais  lafemme  de  qui  vous  avezregu  la  lettre. 

I  know  the  woman  from  whom  you  have  received  the  letter. 

L'homme  —  /es  hommes  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  man  —  the  men  of  whom  you  speak. 

La  lettre  —  les  Itttres  dont  vous  parlez. 

The  letter  —  the  letters  of  which  you  speak. 

5.  After  prepositions,  qui  refers  to  persons,  lequel,  to  things  and 
animals.     Ex. :  — 

Le  niarchand  avec  quifai  voyage. 

The  merchant  with  whom  I  travelled.    But : 

L'arhre  sur  lequel  (not  sur  qui)  je  montai. 

The  tree  upon  which  I  climbed. 

La  clef  avec  laquelle  on  ouvrit  la  porte. 

The  key  with  which  they  opened  the  door. 

Voila  Vhoinme  a  quifai pret€  mon  livre. 

Tliere  is  the  man  to  whom  I  have  lent  my  book. 

C'est  le  chien  auquel  vous  avez  donne  a  manger. 

That  is  the  dog  to  which  you  gave  to  eat. 

6.  Lequel,  laquelle,  etc.,  must  also  be  used  instead  of  qui  in  the 
Nominative,  when  the  relative  is  separated  from  its  noun  by  another 
Bubstantive  to  which  it  might  seem  to  relate.     Ex.  :  — 

La  tante  de  mon  ami  laquelle  demeure  a  Paris. 

My  friend's  aunt  who  lives  at  Paris. 

(qui  demeure  a  Paris  might  relate  to  man  ami.) 

7.  That  which,  and  what,  meaning  the  thing  which,  are  ex- 


POSSESSIVE   AND   RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  127 

pressed  by  ce  qui  for  the  Nominative,  and  ce  que  for  the  Objective. 
All  that'll  rendered  :  Nom.  tout  ce  qui,  Obj.  tout  ce  que.     Ex. :  — 

What  renders  men  miserable,  is  cupidity. 
Ce  qui  rend  les  hommes  mis^rables,  c'est  la  cupidity. 
I  like  all  that  is  fine,  faime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
Do  what  I  tell  yoxi,fait€s  ce  quej'e  vous  dis. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'agr^ment,    m.    the    comfort,  inviter,  to  invite. 

pleasure.  chdtier,  to  chastise. 

le  tigre,  the  tiger.  demeurer,  to  live. 

le  talent,  the  talent.  vanter,  to  praise. 

I'amiral,  the  admiral.  fertiliser,  to  fertilize. 

la  victoire,  the  victory.  d^chirer,  to  tear. 

le  propri€taire,  the  owner.  gagner,  to  win,  gain. 

les  moeurs,  f.  the  manners.  s'appelle,  is  called. 

le  repas,  the  meal,  tout,  adv.  quite. 

cdebre,  celebrated.  trop,  adv.  too  much. 

aussi,  as.  maintenant,  —  a  pr€sent,  now. 
n€gliger,  to  neglect. 

READING  EXERCISE  28. 

Men  fr^re  est  aussi  grand  que  le  tien.  Ma  soeur  est  du  mSme 
Hge  que  la  v6tre.  Vos  roses  sent  tres-belles,  mais  elles  sent  moins 
belles  que  les  miennes.  Nos  chiens  sent  aussi  fideles  que  les  leurs. 
Chaque  plante  a  sa  propriete  {peculiarity)  ;  la  violette  a  la  sienne, 
les  roses  ont  les  leurs.  Le  petit  gar9on  dont  le  pere  est  mort,  de- 
meure  maintenant  chez  nous.  Les  moours  des  anciens  peuples 
^taient  tres-differentes  des  ndtres.  La  ville  a  ses  agrements,  et  la 
campagne  a  les  siens.  Le  marchand  que  vous  avez  vu  hier  chez 
moi,  et  chez  qui  demeure  mon  ami  E.. ,  est  parti  pour  Paris. 

THEME  28. 

1.  Your  house  is  finer  than  mine,  but  my  garden  is  finer  than 
yours.  2.  I  have  read  (lu')  your  letter  and  his.  8.  Do  you  prefer 
your  knife  to  mine?  4.  Yes,  I  prefer  mine  to  yours.  6.  Which 
bonnet  is  thine  ?     6.  Your  rooms  are  more  spacious  {grandes)  than 


128 


XXVIII.      VINGT-HUITIEME   LEgON. 


ours,  but  ours  are  higher.  7.  I  think  (trouve)  your  garden  very 
small.  8.  I  beg  your  pardon  (/e  vous  demande  pardon) ,  Sir,  it  is 
not  smaller  than  yoTirs;  it  is  quite  as  {aussi)  large  as  that  of  my  neigh- 
bor. 9.  Where  is  your  pen  and  where  is  mine ?  10.  Which  one? 
,11.  That  which  I  have  made  {taillee)  this  morning.  12.  The  man 
of  whom  you  are  speaking,  is  dead  (rnort).  13.  Is  this  the  book 
(which)  you  have  lost  ?  14.  No,  it  was  a  French  book.  15.  You 
speak  of  the  lady  whose  husband  {le  mari)  has  been  so  ill.  16. 
The  horse  to  which  you  have  given  some  drink  {a  ooire)  is  mine. 
17.  The  window  upon  which  you  lean  {vous  vous  appuyez)  is 
broken. 

CONVERSATION. 


Trouvez-vous  mon  jardin  plus 

grand  que  le  votre  ? 
Est-il  aussi  plus  petit  que  celui 

de  votre  tante  ? 
Comment  s'appelle  cet  amiral 

qui  a  remporte  la  victoire  de 

Trafalgar? 
Que  fait  le  tigre  ? 
Ta  soeur  est-elle  plus  agee  que 

la  mienne  ? 
Quel  age  a-t-elle  done  ? 
Avec  quoi  le  voleur  a-t-il  ouvert 

(opened)  la  porte  ? 
Comment    s'appelle    le   fleuve 

dont     les     eaux     fertilisent 

I'Egypte? 
Avez-vous  reellement  une  bonne 

intention  ? 


Au  contraire,  je  le  trouve  plus  pe- 
tit que  le  mien. 
Non,  le  sien  est  moins  grand. 

Le  nom  de  ce  celebre   amural  an- 
glais est  Nelson. 

n  dechire  la  main  qui  le  chatie. 
EUe  est  plus  jeune  que  la  votre. 

EUe  a  pnze  ans  et  demi. 

II  I'a  ouverte  avec  une  fausse  clef. 

Ce  fleuve  s'appelle  le  Nil. 


Je  vous  assure  que  mon  intention 
est  aussi  bonne  que  la  votre. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  129 


XXIX.    YINGT-NEUYIEME    LE9ON, 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

1.  These  are  used  by  themselves,  without  a  noun.    They  are  :  — 

On  or  Von,  one,  they,  people. 

Chacun,  f.  chacune,  each,  every-one.         • 

Aucun,  f.  aucune  (with  ne),  uone,  not  one. 

Qudqu'un,  f.  quelqu'une,  some  one,  somebody,  anybody,  pi.  quelquee- 

uns,  f.  quelques-unes,  some. 
Personne,  (with  ne),  nobody. 
L'un,  e  —  I' autre,  the  one  —  the  other,  pi.  les  iins  (unes) — les  metres, 

the  ones  —  the  others. 
L*un  (I'une)  et  I'autre,  both. 
L'un  (I'une)  on  I'autre,  either. 
Ni  l'un  (I'une)  ni  I'autre,  neither. 
L'un  (I'une)  I'autre,  —  pi.  les  uns  (les  unes)  les  autres,  each  other,  one 

another. 
Un  autre,  f.  une  autre,  another. 
D'autres,  pi.  others,  other  people. 
Autrui,  others,  another. 
Td,  f.  telle,  many  a  man. 
Plusieurs,  several. 
Laplupart,  most,  followed  by  de  with  the  def.  art.,  as  :  Laplupart  des 

kommes,  most  men. 
Qmconque,  whoever. 

Tout,  f.  toute,  all,  everything,  pi.  tons,  toutes,  all. 
Qudque  chose,  f.  something,  anything  :  when  followed  by  de  and  an 

adj.  it  is  masc. 
Rien  (with  ne),  nothing. 
Le,  la  mime,  the  same. 

2.  L^on  is  used  for  euphony  instead  of  on  after  et,  ou,  ou,  si,  unless 
the  next  word  begins  with  1}  also  after  que  if  the  next  word  begins 
with  Si  c  OT  q.  Ex. :  si  Von  voit,  if  one  sees ;  et  Von  dit,  and  they 
say.     But :  si  on  le  voit,  not  si  Von  le  voit. 

L'on  is  also  sometimes  used  after  mais,  ni,  qui,  and  other  vowel  sounds. 
8 


130  XXIX.      VINGT-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

3.  Several  of  the  indefinite  adjectives  have  been  enumerated  hero 
again  among  the  indefinite  pronouns,  because  they  may  be  used  as 
such,  viz. :  aucun,  plusieurs,  tout,  and  le  mhne.     Ex.  :  — 

Combien  de  plumes  avez-vous,  how  many  pens  have  you  1 

Je  n'en  ai  auctine,  I  have  none. 

J'en  ai  plusieurs,  I  have  several. 

Avez-vous  appel€  tons  les  enfants,  have  you  called  all  the  children  1 

Oui,  je  les  ai  appd€s  tons,  yes,  I  have  called  them  all. 

4.  When  personne  and  rien  are  used  by  themselves,  they  do  not 
take  ne,  but  they  retain  their  negative  meaning,  as  : 

Qui  avejz-vous  rencontre?    Personne. 
Whom  have  you  met  ?     Nobody. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  defaid,  the  fault.  '     chanter,  to  sing. 

le  ve)-be,  the  verb.  bldmer,  to  blame. 

le  camarade,  the  comrade.  rire,  to  laugh. 

la  confiance,  the  confidence.  arriver,  to  arrive. 

venu,  come  (part.  p.).  gdler,  to  spoil. 

me'chant,  e,  naughty.  secourir,  to  assist. 

jaloux,  -se,  jealous.  nuire,  to  hurt,  injure. 

r^gulier,  -ere,  regular.  je  veux,  I  will. 

rencontrer,  to  meet.  pourri,  e,  rotten. 

READING  EXERCISE  29. 

On  chante,  on  joue  et  Ton  danse.  Tout  le  monde  vent  (wishes) 
6tre  heureux.  Chacun  veut  avoir  raison.  L'un  etait  riche,  I'autre 
etait  pauvre ;  l'un  et  I'autre  etaient  malheureux.  Les  unes  dan- 
saient,  les  autres  jouaient.  Ne  blamez  pas  les  travaux  d'autrui. 
Avez-vous  vu  quelqu'un?  Je  n'ai  vu  personne.  Nous  avons 
quelque  chose  de  meilleur.  Tel  rit  aujourd'hui  qui  ne  rira  plus  de- 
main.  Chacun  a  ses  defauts.  Tout  le  monde  (everybody)  a  son 
faible  (weakness).  La  plupart  de  ces  pommes  sont  pourries.  Ne 
savez-vous  (^do  you  know)  rion  de  nouveau?  Nous  ne  savons 
(kriow)  rien.  Nous  n'avons  rencontre  personne.  Quiconque  salira 
ses  cahiers,  sera  puni.  Donnez-moi  quelquos-unes  de  vos  belles 
poires.     Quelques-uns  de  mes  camai-ades  sont  malades. 


INDEFINITE  PEONOUNS. 


131 


THEME  29. 

1.  One  is  happy  when  one  is  contented.  2.  They  speak  of 
peace  {dela  'paix),  3.  They  say  so  (Ze).  4.  Everybody  likes 
him.  5.  Eveiy  one  thinks  of  himself  (a  so^) .  6.  Everybody  has 
his  [own]  faults.  7.  Somebody  has  told  {dii)  it  to  me.  8. 
Those  apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  9.  Whoever  knows  {corv- 
nait)  this  man,  has  little  (joew  de)  confidence  in  him.  10.  No- 
body knows  that  woman.  11.  Henry  thinks  of  {a)  nobody.  12. 
(The)  one  arrives,  the  other  sets  out  (^part  ).  13.  These  two 
girls  love  one  another.  14.  I  do  not  know  them  all,  but  I  know 
several  of  them  (en).  15.  Most  verbs  are  regular.  16.  The 
princes  were  jealous  of  one  another.  17.  Will  you  have  anything  ? 
18.  I  thank  you,  I  will  have  (^je  ne  veux)  nothing.  19.  These 
people  (gens)  speak  ill  (mal)  of  one  another  (i.  e.  the  one  of  the 
other). 

CONVERSATION. 


Que  fait-on  \k  ? 

Qui  a  dit  cela  ? 

Qui  veut  ce  papier  ? 

Vos    deux     neveux      sont-ils 

riches  ? 
As-tu   vu   quolqu'un   dans  ce 

jardin  ? 
Qu'y  a-t-il  de  nouveau  ? 

Ou  sont  vos  deux  fils  ? 

Voulez-vous  quel  que  chose  ? 
Avez-vous  retrouve  les  lettres 

perdues  ? 
Avec  qui  etes-vous  venu  ? 
Qui  est  la  ? 
Avez-vous  toutes  les  boites  ? 


On  joue  et  Ton  danse. 

Tout  le  monde  le  dit. 

Chacun  le  veut. 

L'un  est  riche,  I'autre  est  pauvre. 


Non, 


je  n  y  ai  vu  personne. 


Je  ne  sais  (know)  rien  du   tout 

(at  all). 
lis  sont  partis  tons  les  deux.    (Us 

sont  partis  Fun  et  I'autre.) 
Non,  merci ;  je  ne  veux  rien. 
J 'en   ai  retrouve  quelqucs-unes ; 

la  plupart  sont  perdues. 
Je  ne  suis  venu  avec  personne. 
Personne. 
Je  n'en  ai  aucune. 


132 


XXIX.      VINGT-NEUVIEME    LEgON. 


Comment  etaient  les  princes  ? 

Avez-vous  d'autres  plumes  ? 
Avez-vous      rencontre      quel- 
qu'un  ? 


lis  etaient  jaloux  Fun  de  fautre 

(or  les  uns  des  autres.) 
Non,  ce  sont  encore  les  memes. 
Je  n'ai  rencontre  personne. 


BEADING  LESSON. 


PUISSANCE   DE   LA   CONCORDE. 


Un  homme  qui  avait  douze  fils,  les  fit  (had  them)  rassembler  au- 
tour  de  son  lit  de  mort,  et  comme  (as)  ils  attendaien't  sa  derniero 
benediction,  il  leur  montra  un  faisceau  de  fleches  et  ordonna  a  cha- 
cun  d'essayer  de  les  rompre  ainsi  liees,  toutes  a  la  fois.  Aucun 
d'eux  ne  put  (could)  y  parvenir.  II  leur  dit  ensuite  de  faire  le 
memo  essai,  en  les  prenant  (hy  taking  them)  I'une  apres  I'autre. 
Ils  les  rompirent  de  cette  maniere  avec  facilite.  Le  pere  les  rendit 
alors  attentifs  a  cet  embleme  du  pouvoir  de  la  concorde.  *'  Ob- 
servez,  mes  enfants,"  leur  dit-il,  "  qu'aussi  longtemps  que  vous 
resterez  unis,  personne  ne  pourra  (will  he  able)  vous  vaincre." 

a  la  fois,  at  once. 
parvenir,  to  succeed. 


Le  pouvoir,  the  power,  might. 
rassembler,  to  assemble. 
autour  de,  round,  about. 
le  lit  de  mort,  the  death-bed. 
la  benediction,  the  blessing. 
un  faisceau,  a  bundle. 
lafleche,  the  arrow. 
rompre,  to  break. 
pinsi  lie,  thus  bound  together. 


ensuite,  at  length,  finally. 

I'essai,  the  attempt. 

la  facility,  (the)  easiness. 

alors,  then. 

V embleme,  the  emblem. 

unir,  to  unite. 

vaincre,  to  conquer,  vanquish. 


PASSIVE   AND  NEUTER  VERBS.  133 


XXX.    TRENTIEME    LE9ON. 


PASSIVE  AND  NEUTER  VERBS. 

1.  Passive  verbs  are  formed,  in  French  as  in  English,  by  joining 
the  Participle  past  of  an  active  verb  to  the  auxiliary  verb  etre,  to  be ; 
for  instance,  of  the  verb  donner,  the  passive  voice  is  etre  donne,  to 
be  given ;  of  Jinir :  etre  jini,  to  be  finished,  etc.  The  Participle 
past  varies  according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun  or  pro- 
noun which  stands  as  the  nominative  to  the  verb. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  PASSIVE  VERB. 

INFINITIVE. 

Etre  hue,  to  be  praised. 

INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  suis  loue  or  louee,  /  am  praised, 

tu  es  loue  or  louee,  thou  art  praised. 

il  est  loue,  he  is  praised. 

elle  est  louee,  she  is  praised. 

nous  sommes  loues  or  louees,  we  are  praised. 

vous  etes  loues  or  louees,  you  are  praised. 

ils  sont  loues,        ") 

elles  sont  louees,    I  ^%  «^^  P^«^'^^- 

IMPERFECT. 

J*^tais  loue  or  louee,  /  was  praised,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  fus  loue  or  louee,  /  was  praised,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  serai  loue  or  louc'e,  /  shall  be  praised,  etc. 


134 


CONDITIONAL. 
Je  serais  loue  or  louee,  1  should  be  praised,  etc.  

IMPERATIVE. 

Sois  lou^  or  lou^e,  be  praised. 

soyons  loues  or  louees,  let  us  be  praised. 

soyez  loues  or  louees,  be  praised. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  sois  loue  or  louee,  that  /  (may)  be  praised,  etc. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  fusse  lou^  or  louee,  that  I  (might)  be  praised,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Etant  \ovl4  or  louee,  being  praised. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE. 

Avoir  ^te  lou^,  e,  to  have  been  praised.        ^^^ 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

J'ai  4t4  lou^,  e,  I  have  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J*avais  4t4  loue,  e,  I  had  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND    OF   THE   PRETERITE. 

J'eus  ete  loue,  e,  /  had  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

J'aurai  4t4  loue,  e,  I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 


CONDITIONAL. 
J'aurais  ete  lou^,  e, 
J'eusse  ete 


;e  lou^,  e,  } 

i  loue  e      \  ^  should  or  I  would  have  been  praised,  etc. 


PASSIVE   AND   NEUTER  VERBS.  135 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    PRESENT. 

Que  j'aie  ete  loue,  e,  that  I  (may)  have  been  praised,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  j'eusse  ete  loue,  e,  that  I  (might)  have  been  praised. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Ayant  ete  loue,  e,  having  been  praised. 

2.  The  English  preposition  h/,  with  the  passive  voice,  is  to  be  ren- 
dered by  de,  when  the  verb  denotes  a,  sentiment  or  an  inward  act  of 
soul,  and  hy  par,  when  it  expresses  an  outward  action.  Ex.:  He  is 
esteemed  by  everybody,  //  est  estime  de  tout  le  monde  ;  the  city  of 
Troy  was  taken  by  the  Greeks,  La  ville  de  Troie  fut  prise  par  les 
Grecs. 

NEUTER  VERBS. 

8.  There  are  about  six  hundred  neuter  verbs  in  French,  of  which 
about  five  hundred  and  fifty  are  conjugated  with  avoir  in  the  com- 
pound tenses.  Of  the  remainder,  some  take  either  etre  or  avoir, 
according  as  the  idea  expressed  is  condition   or  state,  or  action. 

4.    The  following  neuter  verbs  invariably  require  etre : 

Aller,  to  go.  venir,  to  come. 

arriver,  to  arrive,  to  happen.  devenir,  to  become. 

choir,  to  fall  (rarely  used).  intervenir,  to  intervene. 

d€c€d€r,  to  decease.  parvenir,  to  succeed. 

€clore,  to  hatch.  provenir,  to  arise. 

mourir,  to  die.  revenir,  to  come  back. 

naitre,  to  be  bom.  survenir,  to  happen. 
'•   tomber,  to  fall. 
»                                                    Examples: 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  suis  arrive  or  arrivee,  Z  have  (am)  arrived. 
tu  es  arriv^  or  arrivee,  etc. 

COMPOUND  OF  THE  IMPERFECT. 

J'etais  arrive  or  arrivee,  /  had  arrived,  etc. 


136  XXX.      TRENTIEME  LEgON. 

COMPOUND   OP   THE   FUTURE. 

Je  serai  arrive  or  arrivee,  I  shall  have  arrived,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  serais  arrive  or  arrive'e,  I  should  have  arrived,  etc. 

5.  Accourir,  cesser,  croitre,  dechoir,  dege'nerer,  descendre,  disparaitre, 
echapper,  ech^r,  empirer,  entrer,  grandir,  monter,  partir,  passer,  perir, 
tester,  sortir,  vieillir,  and  a  few  others,  are  conjugated  with  avoir  when  it  is 
the  action  or  fact,  with  etre  when  it  is  the  state  or  condition  expressed  by  the 
verb,  which  is  uppermost  in  the  mind.  Ex. :  La  riviere  a  mont€  rapidement, 
the  river  has  risen  rapidly.    II  est  mont^,  he  has  (is)  gone  up. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  bataille,  the  battle.  offenser,  to  offend. 

la  hi,  law.  envoyer,  to  send. 

le  voleur,  the  thief.  mordre,  to  bite. 

le  voyageur,  the  traveller.  '  blesser,  to  wound. 

lejlatteur,  the  flatterer.  d^molir,  to  demolish. 

la  langue,  the  language.  rebdtir,  to  rebuild. 

la  cour,  the  court.  maltraiter,  to  treat  ill,  abuse. 

le  chemin,  the  road.  enlever,  to  take  away. 

vertueux,  -se,  virtuous.  sauver,  to  save. 

inconnu,  unknown.  attaquer,  to  attack. 

Tester,  to  remain.  assassin^,  murdered. 

tuer,  to  kill.  parce  que,  because. 

enrag€f  mad. 

EEADING  EXERCISE  80. 

Men  fils  Theodore  est  aim4  et  loue  de  ses  maitres,  parce  qu'il  est 
appliqu^  et  attentif.  Gustavo  Adolphe,  roi  de  Suede,  fut  tue  h.  la 
bataille  de  Lutzen,  a  I'age  de  trente-sept  ans.  Si  vous  6tes  ver- 
tueux, vous  serez  aimes  et  estimes  de  tout  le  monde.  Ayez  soin 
que  les  lois  soient  ponctuellement  observees.  Quiconque  les  trans- 
gresse,  sera  puni.  Le  soldat  qui  a  et^  blesse,  est  mort.  La  mai- 
son  qui  a  ete  demolie,  a  ete  rebatie.  Ce  pauvre  chien  est  bien 
maltraite  par  son  maitre.  Hier  je  fus  attaque  par  un  voleur.  Mon 
argent,  ma  montre,  tout  me  fut  enleve.  Deux  des  voyageurs  sont 
restes  en  chemin ;  ils  ne  sont  pas  encore  arrives. 


PASSIVE   AND  NEUTER  VERBS. 


i3r 


THEME  30. 

1.  I  am  loved  by  my  parents.  2.  Mr.  Bell  is  esteemed  by 
everybody.  3.  The  French  language  is  spoken  at  all  the  courts  of 
Europe.  4.  Charles  was  bitten  by  a  mad  dog.  5.  That  dog  must 
{doit)  be  killed.  6.  This  ring  was  given  me  by  my  gi-andfather. 
7.  By  whom  was  this  letter  written  (Jcrite)  ?  8.  It  was  written 
by  a  little  boy.  9.  Frederic  has  been  punished  by  his  teacher.  10. 
Have  you  been  invited  to  the  ball?  11.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  been 
invited.  12.  I  shall  perhaps  (^peut-etre)  be  invited  to-morrow. 
13.  This  letter  must  be  sent  to  the  post-office.  14.  Flatterers  are 
not  esteemed.  15.  The  child  has  not  been  saved.  16.  It  would 
have  been  saved,  if  it  had  cried  for  help  {au  secours).  17.  The 
castle  was  built  in  the  year  1620.  18.  Those  brave  soldiers  will  be 
praised  and  rewarded.  19.  Will  Mr.  B.'s  garden  be  sold  ?  20.  It 
is  already  sold. 

CONVERSATION. 

Etes-voTis  aim^s  de  vos  amis  ?  Nous  avons  toujours  ^te  aimes  de 
J  tons  nos  amis. 

1^       Croyez-vous    que    mes    ordres  Je  ne  le  crois  pas. 
soient  executes  ? 

Par  qui  as-tu  ^te  offense  ?    ,  Par  un  homme  inconnu. 

Les  bons  rois  sont-ils  aimes  ?  lis    sont    toujours    aimds   et  es- 

times. 

Ces  objets  seront-ils  vendus?  Non,  M — ,  ils  ne  seront  pas  ven- 


Par  qui  Henri  IV  fut-il  assas-    II  fut  assassin^  par  Ravaillac. 

sine  (murdered)  ? 
Dans  quelle  annee  ? 
Quel  fut  le  sort  de  Charles  X  ? 


Par  qui  ces  jeunes  gens  ont-ils 
^te  blames? 


Henri  IV.  fut  assassine  en  1610. 
Ce   roi  fut  exile  {banished)    de 

France  en  1830. 
Je  crois  qu'ils  ont  et^  blames  par 

leur  maitre. 


138  XXXI.      TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 

La  bataille  de  Leipsic  fut-elle     Tr^s-sanglante.       Beaucoup    de 
sanglante  (bloody)  ?  soldats  et  d'officiers  furent  tues, 

et  encore  {still)  un  plus  grand 
nombre  furent  blesses. 
Voyez  cette  pauvre  fille  !  Qu'a-    Elle  a  ete  mordue  par  un  chien 

t-elle  done  ?  enrage. 

N'a-t-on  pas  tu^  ce  chien?  On  ne  I'a  pas  encore  tue,  mais  il 

sera  tue  tout  de  suite. 
Que  va-ton  (are  they  going)     Elk  sera  demolie  et  puis  rebatie 

faire  de  cette  vieille  maison?         h  neuf  (anew). 
Avez-vous  bien  dormi  ?  Non,  je  n'ai  pas  bien  dormi. 


XXXI.    TEENTE    ET    UNIEME    LE9ON 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

Some  verbs  are  called  reflective,  because  their  subject  and  object 
are  the  same  person  or  thing,  so  that  the  subject  acts  upon  itself, 
and  is,  at  the  same  time,  the  agent  and  the  object  of  the  action. 
Reflective  verbs,  therefore,  have  always,  besides  the  subject,  another 
personal  pronoun,  viz.  :  me,  te,  se,  myself,  thyself,  himself,  herself, 
itself,  for  the  singular ;  nous,  vous,  se,  ourselves,  yourselves,  them- 
selves, for  the  plural.  But  it  frequently  happens  that  in  English 
the  second  pronoun  is  only  implied,  whereas  it  must  be  expressed 
in  French.  Ex. :  to  repent,  se  repentir ;  Pres.  I  repeat,  je  me 
repens,  etc. 

Observe  that  all  reflective  verbs,  without  exception,  are  conjugat- 
ed with  the  auxiliary  etre,  as :  I  have  hurt  myself,  je  me  suis 
bless e,  and  not^e  m'ai  blesse. 

The  conjugation  of  the  following  verb  may  serve  as  a  model  for  all  the 
reflective  verbs. 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS.  139 

Se  rejouir,  to  rejoice, 

INDICATITE. 
PRESENT   TENSE. 

Je  me  r^jouis,  I  rejoice. 

tu  te  rejouis,  thou  rejoicest. 

il  (elle)  se  rejouit,  he  (she)  rejoices, 

nous  nous  rejouissons,  we  rejoice. 

vous  vous  rejouissez,  you  rejoice. 

ils  (elles)  se  rejouissent,  they  rejoice, 

IMPEEPECT, 

Je  me  r^jouissais,  /  rejoiced,  etc. 

PRETERITE. 

Je  me  rejouis,  /  rejoiced,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

Je  me  r^jouirai,  I  shall  rejoice,  etc 

CONDITIONAL. 
Je  me  r<^ouirais,  I  should  rejoice,  etc 

IMPERATIVE. 

Rejouis-toi,  rejoice. 
rejouissons-nous,  let  us  rejoice. 
rejouissez-vous,  rejoice. 

SUBJUNCTIVK 
PRESENT. 

Que  je  me  rejouisse,  that  I  (may)  rejoice,  etc 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  rejouisse,  that  I  (might)  rejoice,  etc 

PARTICIPLE. 
Se  (me,  te,  etc.)  rejouissant,  rejoicing, 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 
INFINITIVE. 

S'^tre  r^joui,  e,  to  have  rejoiced,. 


140  XXXI.      TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  LEgON* 

INDICATIVE. 
COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT, 

Je  me  suis  rejoui,  e,  /  have  rejoiced. 

tu  t'es  rejoui,  e,  thou  hast  rejoiced. 

il  s'est  rejoui,  he  has  rejoiced. 

elle  s'est  rejouie,  she  has  rejoiced. 

nous  nous  sommes  rejouis,  ies,  we  have  rejoiced. 

vous  vous  etes  rejoui(s),  ie{s^,  you  haverejoiced. 

lis  se  sont  rejouis,      ") 

eUes  se  sont  rejouies,  I '%  ^^^  ^^>'^^- 

COMPOUND  OP  THE  IMPERFECT- 

Je  m'etais  rejoui,  e,  /  had  rejoiced. 

tu  t'etais  rejoui,  e,  thou  hadst  rejoiced,  efc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRETERITE.  ' 

Je  me  fus  rejoui,  e,  I  had  rejoiced, 
tu  te  fus  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   FUTURE. 

Je  me  serai  rejoui,  e,  /  shall  have  rejoiced, 
tu  te  seras  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL, 

Je  me  serais  rejoui,  e,  I  should  have  rejoiced^ 
tu  te  serais  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
COMPOUND    OF    THE   PRESENT, 

Que  je  me  sois  rejoui,  e,  that  I  (may)  have  rejoiced' 
que  tu  te  sois  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

qu'il  se  soit  rejoui,  (qu'elle  se  soit  rejouie),  eta, 

COMPOUND   OF   THE    IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  me  fusse  rejoui,  e,  that  I  (might)  have  rejoiced,' 
que  tu  te  fusses  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

PARTICIPLE. 
S'^tant  (m*etant,  etc.)  rejoui,  e,  having  rejoiced. 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS.  141 

WITH  INTERROGATION^ 
PRESENT. 

(Me  fejouis-je),  better:  est-ce  que  je  me  rejouis,  do  I  rejoice  f 
te  rejouis-tu  {or  est-ce  que  tu  te  rejouis),  dost  thou  rejoice"? 
se  rejouit-il  [or  est-ce  qu'il  se  rejouit)  ?  etc. 

nous  rejouissons-nous  ?  etc. 

vous  rejouissez-vous  ?  etc. 

se  rejouissent-ils  (elles) "?  etc. 

COMPOUND    OP   THE   PRESENT. 

Me  suis-je  rejoui,  e,  liave  I  rejoiced  1 

t'es-tu  rejoui,  e,  hast  thou  rejoiced  ? 

s'est-il  rejoui,  has  he  rejoiced  ? 

s'est-elle  rejouie,  has  she  rejoiced  ? 

nous  sommes-nous  rejouis,  ies,  have  we  rejoiced.f 

WITH   NEGATION. 
PRESENT. 

Je  ne  me  rejouis  pas,  /  do  not  rejoice* 
tu  ne  te  rejouis  pas,  etc. 

il  (elle)  ne  se  rejouit  pas,        etc. 
nous  ne  nous  rejouissons  pas,  etc. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT' 

Je  ne  me  suis  pas  r^oui,  e,  /  have  not  rejoiced* 
tu  ne  t'es  pas  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

il  (elle)  ne  s'est  pas  rejoui,  e,  etc. 

nous  ne  nous  sommes  pas  rejouis,  ies,  €tc% 

IMPERATIVE. 

Ne  te  rejouis  pas,  do  not  rejoice. 

ne  nous  rejouissons  pas,  let  us  not  rejoice 

ne  vous  rejouissez  pas,  do  not  rejoice^ 

INFINITIVE. 

Ne  pas  se  rejouir,  not  to  rejoice. 

ne  pas  s'etre  rejoui,'  e,  not  to  have  rejoiced* 


WITH  NEGATION  AND  INTERROGATION 
PRESENT. 

Est-ce  que  je  ne  me  rejouis  pas,  do  I  not  rejoice  f 
ne  te  rejouis-tu  pas,  dost  thou  not  rejoice? 
ne  se  rejouit-il  pas,  does  he  not  rejoice  ?  etc. 


142  XXXI.      TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 

COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Ne  me  suis-je  pas  rejoui,  e,  have  I  not  rejoiced? 
ne  t'es-tu  pas  rejoui,  e  ?  etc. 

ne  s'est-il  (-elle)  pas  rejoui,  e?  etc. 

ne  nous  sommes-nous  pas  rejouis,  ies  ?  etc. 

Many  verbs,  neuter  or  passive  in  English,  have  in  French  the  reflective 

form.     The  principal  are  :  — 

S'affliger,  to  he  sorry.  se  figurer,    J  .     /. 

s'apercevoir,  to  petxeive.  s'imaginer,  )      *^      ^' 

s'approcher,  to  come  near.  se  hater,        K        ,    r    . 

,     \,  ,,',       (to  make  haste. 

8  arreter,  to  stop.  se  depecher,  ) 

s'asseoir,  to  sit  down.  se  lever,  to  rise,  to  get  up. 

se  baisser,  to  stoop.  se  marier,  to  marry. 

se  coucher,  to  go  to  bed.  se  moquer,  to  mode,  scoff. 

se  depecher,  to  make  haste.  se  plaindre,  to  complain. 

s'ecrier,  to  exclaim,  cry  out.  se  promener,  to  take  a  vxdk, 

s'en  aller,  to  go  away.  se  repentir,  to  repent. 

s'endormir,  to  fall  asleep.  se  reposer,  to  rest. 

s'enrhumer,  to  catch  cold.  se  soumettre,  ko  submit. 

s'entretenir,  to  discourse  with.  se  souvenir,  to  remember. 

s'etonner,  to  wonder.  se  taire,  to  be  silent. 

s'eveiller,  to  awake.  se  tromper,  to  be  mistaken. 

se  fier,  to  trust.  .               se  vanter,  to  boast, 

Ex.  —  I  rise,  I  get  up,  je  me  Teve. 

I  have  risen  or  got  up,  je  me  suis  lev€. 

We  have  perceived,  nous  nous  sommes  apergus,  etc. 

Observe  also  these  expressions  :  — 

How  are  you,  comment  vous  portez-vous  ? 

I  am  well,  je  me  porte  Men. 

I  am  mistaken,  je  me  trompe. 

I  have  been  mistaken,  je  me  suis  iromp^. 

He  is  silent,  il  se  tait. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  conduit^,  the  behavior.  vaillamment,  bravely. 

la  foret,  the  forest.  fondre,  to  cast. 

le  boulet,  the  ball.  bien,  well ;  mieux,  better. 

le  titre,  the  right.  se  venger  de,  to  revenge  on. 

la  Boheme,  Bohemia.  se  conduire,  to  behave. 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS.  143 

tard,  late.  se  distinguer,  to  distinguish. 

U  mal,  the  evil.  enfermer,  to  shut  in. 

se  rendre,  to  surrender.  sauver,  to  save. 
se  coucher,  to  go  to  bed. 

READING    EXERCISE    31. 

Vous  vous  trompez,  Monsieur.  Je  me  suis  trompe  aussi.  H  y 
a  {it  zs)  tres-longtemps  que  nous  ne  nous  (each  other')  sommes 
vus.  Le  general  Ostermann  s'est  distingue  beaucoup  a  Fafiliire 
(battle)  de  Culm.  S'il  ne  s'etait  pas  defendu  si  vaillamment,  I'ar- 
mee  alliee  aurait  ete  enfermee  dans  les  montagnes  de  la  Boheme. 

Dans  une  bataille  ou  les  boulets  ennemis  volaient  (Jiew)  autour 
de  lui,  Napoleon  s'ecria :  Le  boulet  qui  doit  (is  to)  me  tuer,  n'est 
pas  encore  fondu  (cast) .  Pourquoi  vous  etes-vous  leve  si  tard  ?  Je 
me  suis  lev^  a  sept  heures,  Ne  vous  affligez  pas  tant,  mes  amis ; 
habituez-vouz  a  souffi'ir  avee  courage  les  maux  de  la  vie.  Vous 
auriez  ^te  sauve,  si  vous  vous  etiez  refugie  au  camp. 

THEME  31. 

1.  I  rejoice  greatly  (beaucoup)  to  see  you  (de  vous  voir). 
2.  Charles  has  wounded  himself  with  a  penknife.  3.  The  enemies 
have  surrendered.  4.  A  good  Christian  does  not  revenge  himself 
on  (de)  his  enemy.  5.  The  soldier  has  distinguished  himself;  he 
will  be  rewarded.  6.  Get  up  !  7.  I  shall  get  up  directly.  8.  Has 
my  brother  got  up  ?  9.  He  (has)  got  iip  at  six  o'clock.  10.  Be 
not  sorry,  children,  exclaimed  he,  we  shall  all  be  saved  !  11.  You 
are  mistaken,  Sir.  12.  Yes,  it  is  true  (vrai),  I  have  been  mista- 
ken. 13.  Why  do  you  rejoice  at  the  (du)  misfortune  of  others  ? 
14.  When  do  you  go  to  bed  ?  15.  I  go  to  bed  at  eleven  o'clock; 
but  yesterday  I  went  (have  gone)  to  bed  at  ten  o'clock.  16.  Make 
haste  !  17.  Where  is  your  mother?  18.  She  is  not  at  home  (a  la 
maison) ;  she  is  taking  a  walk.  19.  I  have  taken  a  walk  this 
morning.  20.  When  will  you  take  a  walk?  21.  I  shall  take  a 
walk  this  evening.  22.  How  are  you  to-day  ?  23.  I  am  well,  but 
my  brother  is  not  well.  24.  I  (have)  stopped  at  the  gate  (porte). 
25.  Rest  a  little,  and  come  near  the  fii-e  (du  feu). 


144                   XXXI.      TRENTE  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 
CONVERSATION. 

Vous  vous  ^tes  trompe,  mon  ami,  Je  ne  me  suis  pas  tromp^. 

n'est-ce  pas  ? 

Quand  vous   coucherez-vous,  mcs  Nous  nous  coucherons  tout  de 

enfants  ?  suite. 

A  quelle    heure  vous    etes-vous  Je  me  suis  couch^  h  dix  heures. 

couch^  hier? 

Et  votre  fiere  ?  Mon  frere  s'est  coucht^  a  onze 

heures. 

Monsieur  votre   pere    est-il   deja  Oui,  il  s'est  leve   aujourd'hui 

leve  ?  de  bonne  heure  {early) . 

Ou  etes-vous  done  restes  si  long-  Nous     nous     sommes     ^gares 

temps?  (^went  astray)  dans  la  foret. 

Ta  soeur  s'est-elle   lavee    {wash-  Je  crois  qu'elle  ne  s'est  pas  en- 

ed)  ?  core  lavee. 

Qui  s'est  lave  dans  cette  eau  ?  Moi. 

Pourquoi  vous  etes-vous  leves  si  Nous  ne  nous  sommes  pas  eveil- 

tard?  l^s  plus  tot  {earlier). 

Qui  veut  se  promener  avec  moi  ?  Ma  soeur  et  moi. 

Vous  §tes-vous  bien  amuse  ?  Oui,  assez  {pretty)  bien. 


BEADING    LESSON. 
LB   SANSONNET. 

Le  vieux  chasseur  Maurice  avait  dans  sa  chambre  un  sansonnet 
qu'il  avait  elev^,  et  qui  avait  appris  {learned)  a  articuler  quelques 
mots.  Quand  il  disait  par  exemple  :  **  Sansonnet,  ou  es-tu?  "  I'oi- 
seau  r4pondait  toujours :  *'  Me  voila  !  " 

Le  petit  Charles,  fils  du  voisin,  aimait  beaucoup  I'oiseau  et  lui 
faisait  {paid)  souvent  des  visites.  Un  jour  il  vint  voir  le  sansonnet 
pendant  que  le  chasseur  etait  absent ;  il  s'empara  bien  vite  de  I'oi- 
seau, le  mit  {put  it)  dans  sa  poche  et  voulait  s'esquiver  avec  son 
larcin. 

Mais  dans  ce  moment  le  chasseur  entra  chez  lui.    II  crut  {thought) 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  145 

faire  plaisir  au  petit  gar9on  en  demandant  (by  ashing')  comme  de 
coutume  :  "  Sansonnet,  ou  es-tu  ?  "  —  "Me  voila  !  "  cria  de  toutes 
ses  forces  (his  might)  Foiseau  qui  etait  cache  dans  la  poche  du 
petit  gar9on. 

C'est  ainsi  que  le  petit  voleur  ftit  trahi. 

Le  sansonnet,  the  starling.  vite,  quick. 

le  mot,  the  word.  -  la  poche,  the  pocket. 

me  voila,  here  I  am.  s'esquiver,  to  run  away, 

il  vint,  he  came.  le  larcin,  the  larceny. 

■pendant  que,  whilst.  de  coutume,  as  he  used  to  do» 

s'emparer,  to  lay  hold  of  trahir,  to  betray. 


X3;XII.    TRENTE-DEUXIEME    LE9ON. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

1.  Verbs  which  are  always  impersonal  form  their  compound  tenses 
"by  means  of  the  auxiliary  avoir.     The  principal  axe : 

Neiger,  to  snow ;  Pres.  il  neige,  it  snows. 

pleuvoir,  to  rain ;  il  pleut,  it  rains. 

greler,  to  hail ;  il  grele,  it  hails. 

tonner,  to  thunder ;  il  tonne,  it  thunders. 

faire  des  Eclairs,  to  lighten ;  il  fait  des  (fclairs,  it  lightens. 

gder,  to  freeze  ;  il  gele,  it  freezes. 

d€geler,  to  thaw ;  il  d€gele,  it  thaws. 

importer,  to  matter ;  il  importe,  it  matters. 
Third  singular  negative  is  n'importe,  no  matter. 

2.  Other  verbs  may  become  impersonal.     Ex. : 

//  suffit,  it  suffices.  il  convient,  it  is  convenient. 

il  semble,  it  seems.  il  arrive,  it  happens  (takes  etre), 

il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better.  il  s'agit,  it  is  tlje  question,  etc. 

il  me  tarde,  I  long.  il  reste,  there  remains. 

10 


146 


XXXir.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME    LEgON. 


MODF.T-R    OF 

CONJUGATION. 

1,  Neiger, 

to  snow. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVB. 

Present.              II  neige. 

Qa'il  neige. 

Imperfect.          //  neigeait. 

qu'il  neigedt. 

Preterite.            //  neigea. 

Future.               II  neigera. 

" 

Comp.  of  Pres.  II  a  neigd". 

qu'il  ait  neig€. 

"       "  Imp.  II  avail  neig^. 

qu'il  eut  neig€. 

"       **  Pret.  //  eut  neig^. 
**       "  Put.    H  aura  neig^. 

Interrogatively :  Neige-t-il  ?  neigeait-il  ?  a-t-il  neig^f  etc. 


Pres.  E  neig&rait. 


Pres.  Neigeant. 


CONDITIONAL. 

Comp.  II  aurait  neigd". 

PARTICIPLE. 

Comp.  Ayant  neig€. 


Indic. 


COND. 


2.  H  y  a,  there  is,  there  are, 

INFINITIVE     MOOD. 
Y  aTOir,  there  to  he. 

II  y  a,  there  is,  there  are. 

II  y  avait,  >    .  . 

_,  ^  '  >■  there  was,  there  were. 

II  y  eut,     > 

11  y  aura,  there  will  be. 

II  y  a  eu,  there  has  or  have  been. 

II  y  avait  eu,}    .        x.    i  -u 
--/  y  there  had  been. 

11  y  eut  eu,     ) 

II  y  aurait,  there  would  be. 

U  y  aurait  eu,  there  would  have  been. 

Y  a-t-il,  is  there  1  are  there  ? 

II  7i'y  a  pas,  there  is  or  are  not. 

N'y  a-t-il  pas,  is  or  are  there  not  ? 

Qu'il  y  ait,  that  there  (may)  be. 

Qu'il  y  eut,  that  there  (might)  be. 

Comp.  of  Pres.    Qu'il  y  ait  eu,  that  there  (may)  have  been. 

"      Imp.    Qu'il  y  eut  eu,  that  there  (might)  have  been. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Preterite. 
Puture. 
Comp.  of  Pres. 
Imp. 
«        Pret. 


Present. 

Comp. 
Interrogatively : 
Negatively : 
Negat.  interrogat. : 
SuBj.      Present. 

Imperfect. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  147 

Note  1.     This  verb  in  English  is  used  in  the  plural,  when  followed  by  a 
plural  substantive;  in  French,  it  remains  always  in  the  singular;  as. 
There  are  birds  which,  etc. ;  il  y  a  des  oiseaux  qui,  etc. 

Note  2.    It  often  happens  that  the  verb  il  y  a  is  rendered  ago,  these,  or 
for  these.     Ex. : 

I  saw  him  two  months  ago. 
Je  I'ai  vu  il  y  a  deux  niois. 

II  y  a  huit  jours  que  je  suis  malade. 
I  have  been  ill  these  eight  days. 

77  est  is  also  used  impersonally,  particularly  in  poetry,  in  the  sense  of 
ay  a. 

3.     11  fait  froid. 

Present,  II  fait  froid,  it  is  cold. 

Imperfect.  II  faisait  froid,  \  . 

■D     .     '.  Ti   j:.  y     •  j  1  It  was   cold. 

Preterite.  II  fit  froid,        3  ,. 

Future.  II  fera  froid,  it  will  be  cold,  etc. 

Comp.  of  Pres.    II  a  fait  froid,  it  has  been  cold,  etc. 
Thus  other  expressions  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather :  //  fait  heaUy 
it  is  fine  weather ;  il  fait  chaud,  it  is  warm ;  il  fait  jour,  it  is  daylight ,  etc. 
The  English  "i<  is  said"  is  rendered  in  French,  on  dit. 

4.  II  faut. 
INFINITIVE :  Falloir,  to  he  needful,  necessary. 
Indic.     Present.       //  faut,  it  is  necessary. 

Imperfect.   II  'fallait,  )  ^^  ^^  necessary. 
Preterite.     II  fallut,    ) 
Future.        //  faudra,  it  will  be  necessary. 
Comp.  of  Present.       II  a  fallu,  it  has  been  necessary. 
"        «  Imperfect.    Tl  avait  fallu,  |  .^  ^^  ^^^^  necessary. 
"       "  Preterite.     //  eut  fallu,      ) 

*'        "  Future.        E  aura  fallu,  it  will  have  been  necessary. 
CoND.      Present.       //yauc^raif,  it  would  be  necessary,  (...  ought  to). 
Comp.  II  aurait  fallu,  it  would  have  been  necessary. 

INTERRO  G  ATI  VELY. 

Faut-il?  fallait-il?  fallitt-il?  a-t-il  fallu  ?  (is  it  necessary  1  was  it  necessa- 
ry "?  has  it  been  necessary  ?) 
Sub  J.        Present.      Qu'il  faille,  that  it  (may)  be  necessary. 

Imperfect.  Qu'il  fallut,  that  it  (might)  be  necessary. 
Comp.  of  Present.      Qu'il  ait  fallu,  that  it  (may)  have  been  necessary. 

"        "  Imperfect.  Qu'il  eut  fallu,  that  it  (might)  have  been  necessary. 


148  XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  wanting.  Compound.  AyantfaUu. 

Eem.  1.  The  verb  falloir  is  absolutely  impersonal  throughout  all  its 
tenses.  When  its  subject  is  a  personal  pronoun,  as  :  /  must,  you  must,  etc., 
we  may  add,  for  the  first  person  me,  for  the  second  te,  for  the  third  /mi,  in 
the  plural  nous,  vous,  leur.  More  frequently,  however,  que  with  the  Sub- 
junctive mood  is  preferred.     Ex. :  — 

I  must  read :  il  mefaut  lire,  or  il  faut  queje  Use. 
thou  must  read :  il  te  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  tu  Uses. 
he  must  read  :  7    , ,  .  ^  H  faut  qu'il  Use. 

she  must  read :  |  ^  ^"'>"*  ^^^^'  «^  j  il  faut  qu'elle  Use. 
we  must  read :  il  nous  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  que  nous  lisions. 
you  must  read :  il  vous  faut  lire,  or  ilfaut  que  vous  Usiez. 
they  must  read :  il  leur  faut  lire,  or  il  faut  qu'ils  lisent. 
I  have  been  obliged  to, read :  il  m'a  fallu  lire,  etc. 

2.  "When  the  subject  is  a  noun,  que  with  the  Subjunctive  mood  must  be 
used.  It  must  further  be  observed  that,  when  the  verb  falloir  is  used  in  the 
Present  or  Future  tense,  the  following  verb  must  be  put  in  the  Present  of 
the  Subjunctive ;  but  when  it  is  in  the  Imperfect,  Preterite  or  Conditional, 
the  verb  following  it  must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive. 
Ex.:  — 

The  boy  must  work,  il  faut  que  le  gargon  tj-avaiUe. 

The  boy  will  be  obliged  to  work.  - 

//  faudra  que  le  gargon  travaille. 

The  soldiers  were  obliged  to  retire. 

Jl  fallait  or  il  fallut  que  les  soldats  se  retirassent. 

3.  "When  the  verb  il  faut  is  followed  immediately  by  a  noun  substantive, 
it  signifies  to  want ;  here  also  one  of  the  pronouns  me,  te,  lui,  nous,  vous,  leur, 
according  to  the  person,  must  be  inserted.     Ex. :  — 

I  want  (must  have)  a  hat,  il  me  faut  un  chapeau. 
He  wants  some  money,  il  lui  faut  de  Vargent. 
We  want  some  bread,  il  nous  faut  du  pain. 
Did  you  want  some  books,  vous  fallait-il  des  Uvres  ? 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  compte,  the  account,  bill.  la  chaise,  the  chair. 

la  redingote,  the  coat.  cesser,  to  leave  off,  to  cease. 

le  depart,  the  departure.  quitter,  to  leave. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  149 

la  rue,  the  street.  dessiner,  to  draw. 

le  sort,  (the)  fate.  -  partir,  to  set  out,  depart. 

la  chambre,  the  room.  honnete,  honest. 

manquer,  to  be  wanting.  mecontent,  e,  discontented. 

gouverner,  to  govern.  sagenyint,  adv.  wisely. 

READING  EXERCISE  32. 

II  pleut.  Je  crois  qu'il  pleuvra  demain.  J'entends  tonner.  II 
vaut  mieux  {it  is  better)  qu'il  pleuve.  II  a  neige  toute  la  nuit. 
II  y  a  des  hommes  qui  sont  toujours  mecontents.  II  fait  chaud ; 
il  faisait  trop  chaud  dans  votre  chambre.  II  n'y  avait  ni  hommes, 
ni  femmes,  ni  enfants.  II  faut  partir.  II  vous  faut  partir.  II 
fallait  venir  plus  tot  (^earlier').  Ne  faudra-t-il  pas  lui  pardonner ? 
11  faut  que  Charles  reste  a  la  maison.  II  fallut  que  Charles  restat 
h  la  maison.  II  me  fallut  lui  pardonner.  II  y  aura  cette  annee 
beaucoup  de  cerises.  II  faut  que  les  enfants  obeissent  a  I'instant 
(^instantly) .  II  y  a  eu  de  (a^)  tout  temps  des  flatteurs.  II  a  fallu 
qu'elle  payat  son  compte.  11  y  a  un  Dieu  qui  gouverne  tout 
sagement.  Qu'est-ce  qu'il  vous  faut  ?  II  me  faut  une  autre  cham- 
bre. 

THEME  32. 

1.  Does  it  snow?  2.  No,  it  does  not  snow,  it  rains.  3.  It  is 
cold  to-day.  4.  I  shall  not  leave  the  room.  5.  Yesterday  it  was 
(has  been)  very  cold,  and  it  (has)  snowed  a  great  deal  {beaucoup). 
6.  It  thunders  and  lightens.  7.  There  are  too  many  chairs  in  this 
room.  8.  There  was  much  wine  on  the  table.  9.  Is  there  money 
in  the  purse?  10.  There  are  six  francs  (francs')  [in  it].  11. 
There  will  be  a  great  many  nuts  this  year.  12.  There  are  streets  in 
London,  which  are  very  long.  13.  It  is  necessary  to  begin.  14. 
It  was  necessary  to  set  out.  15.  You  must  begin.  16.  He  must 
read.  17.  We  were  obhged  to  set  out.  18.  He  has  been  obliged 
to  speak.  19.  The  boy  must  work.  20.  The  girls  must  draw. 
21.  My  father  has  been  obliged  to  go  to  Paris.  22.  Your  uncle 
will  be  obliged  to  leave  London.  28.  The  soldiers  were  obliged  to 
leave  the  town.     24.  I  want  a  good  pen.     25.  Do  you  want  an- 


150  XXXII.      TRENTE-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

other  room  ?     26.  Yes,  I  want  a  larger  room.     27.  What  do  you| 
want  ?     28.  I  want  or  I  must  have  {dA  /')  money. 

CONVERSATION. 

Quel  temps  fait-il  aujourd'hui  ?  II  fait  beau  (mauvais)  temps. 

Pleut-il  ?  Oui,  il  pleut  tres-fort. 

Pleuvra-t-il  ?  Jq  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  pleuve. 

La  pluie  a-t-elle  cesse  ?  Pas  encore ;  il  pleut  sans  cesse. 

Que  vous  faut-il  ?  II  me  faut  une  redingote  neuve. 

Y  a-t-il  assez  de  vin  ?  Oui,  Monsieur,  il  y  en  a  assez. 

Y  avait-il  de  I'argent  dans  cette  *  II  y  avait  deux  francs, 
bourse  ? 

As-tu  paye  le  compte  ?  Oui,  il  m'a  fallu  le  payer. 

Faut-il  que  je  me  leve  mainte-  Oui,  il  faut  vous   lever   tout  de 

nant  ?  suite. 

Vous   a-t-il   fallu   partir  de   si  Le    depart    ^tait    fix4   a   quatre 

bonne  heure  (so  early)  ?    *  heures  et  demie. 

Qui  a  payd  le  diner  ?  Mon  pere  I'a  paye. 

Faut-il  lui  rendre  {return)  Par-  Oui,  rendez-le-lui. 

gent  ? 


READING  LESSON. 
PEODUCTIONS   DE   DIVERS    CLIMATS. 

La  providence  a  si  sagement  arrange  toutes  choses,  que  chaque 
climat  fournit  aux  habitants  ce  qui  leur  est  le  plus  indispensable. 
Dans  les  contrees  polaires  il  fait  si  froid,  qu'il  ne  pent  y  croitre  ni 
fruits,  ni  cereales,  ni  legumes.  La  nature  y  a  supplee  par  la 
grande  quantite  de  poissons  que  Ton  peche  dans  la  mer  et  dans  les 
lacs,  et  par  I'abondance  des  quadrupedes  qui,  a  la  verite  (indeed), 
sont  la  plupart  (mostly)  sauvages  et  feroces,  mais  qui  fournissent  aux 
habitants,  aguerris  (accustomed)  a  les  poursuivre  a  la  chasse,  de 
tres-belles  fourrures,  de  la  chair  mangeable,  des  os  et  des  nerfs  qu'ils 
emploient  pour  leurs  arcs  (hows)  et  pour  divers  ustensiles. 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS.  151 

Les  peuples  des  climats  chauds  ont  le  ver  a  sole  {silkworm), 
qui  se  nourrit  des  feuilles  du  murier  et  qui  leur  file  {spins)  un  le- 
ger  tissu  dont  on  fait  des  etofFes  convenables  a  la  temperature  du 
pays. 

Le  cotonnier  porte  des  gousses  renfermant  le  coton  dont  le  tissu 
fournit  egalement  (likewise)  les  plus  beaux  vetements.  Et  pour 
preserver  les  habitants  de  la  zone  torride  de  I'inflammation  d'un 
sang  trop  echauffe,  leurs  campagnes  et  leurs  jardins  leur  fournissent 
les  oranges,  les  citrons  et  les  olives  qui  les  rafraichissent. 

Fournir,  to  supply,  furnish.  la  chair,  the  flesh,  meat. 

le  besoin,  the  need,  want.  I'os,  the  bone. 

la  co7itr^e,  the  region.  Vustensile,  the  tool. 

croitre,  to  grow.  le  murier,  the  mulberry-tree. 

les  c^re'ales,  corn.  Jiler,  to  spin.     Idger,  light. 

les  legumes,  vegetables.  le  tissu,  the  texture. 

pecker,  to  fish.  convenable,  convenient,  fit. 

sauvage,  wild.  le  cotonnier,  the  cotton-plant. 

feroce,  ferocious.  la  gousse.,  the  pod,  husk. 

aguerris,  hardened.  le  vetement,  clothing. 

jjoursuivre,  to  pursue.  €chauffe,  heated,  hot. 

lafourrure,  fur,  pelt.  rafraichir,  to  cool,  refresh. 


XXXIII.    TRENTE-TROISIEME    LE9ON. 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS. 

Most  of  the  French  adjectives  become  adverbs  by  adding  the  syl- 
lable -ment,  according  to  the  following  rules  :  — 

1.    Adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel,  simply  add  the  final  syllable 
•ment,  as  :  — 

Facile,  easy ;  adv.  facilement,  easily. 
poli,  polite ;  adv.  poliment,  politely. 
vrai,  true ;  adv.  vraiment,  truly. 


152  XXXIII.      TRENTE-TROISIEME  LEgON. 

2.  Adjectives  which  do  not  end  in  a  vowel,  add  the  syllable 
'ment  to  their  feminine  termination,  as  :  — 

Haul,  f.  haute,  high ;  adv.  hautement,  aloud. 
doux,  f.  douce,  soft,  mild ;  adv.  doucement,  softly. 
franc,  f.  fmnche,  fraxik;  Sid\.  franchement,  frankly,  freely, 
heureux,  f.  heureuse,  happy ;  adv.  ketireusement,  happily. 

So  also  the  adjectives,  nouveau,  new  ;  fou,  foolish,  and  mou,  soft ;  adv. 
nouvellement,  follement,  molleinoit. 

3.  Adjectives  which  end  in  -ant  or  -ent,  become  adverbs  by 
changing  the  final  -ant  into  -amment,  and  -ent  into  -emment,  as  :  — 

Constant,  constant ;  adv.  constamment. 
prudent,  prudent ;  adv.  prudemment. 
patient,  patient ;  adv.  patiemment. 
Exceptions  to  this  rule  are :  lent,  slow,  adv.  lentement ;  and  present,  pres- 
ent, adv.  pr€sentement,  actually,  at  present. 

4.  The  following  adjectives  take  an  e  accented  before  the  final 
-ment.  Profond,  deep,  profondement;  commode,  comfortable, 
commodement ;  commun,  common,  communement ;  precis,  precise, 
precisement;  enorme,  enormous,  enormement ;  expres,  express, 
expressement ;  impuni,  unpunished,  impunement. 

5.  All  these  derived  adverbs,  as  well  as  some  others,  are  com- 
pared, as:  — 

COMP.  SUP. 

Facilement,  plus  facilement,  le  plus  facilement. 

commodement,  moins  commodement,  le  moins  commodement. 

souvent,  often  ;  plus  souvent,  le  plus  souvent. 

lonr/temps,  long  ;  plus  longtemps,  le  plus  longtempsi 

loin,  far ;  plus  loin,  le  plus  loin. 

6.  The  following  adverbs  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  their 
comparatives  and  superlatives  :  — 

COMP.  SUP. 

Bi'en,  well;  mieux,  hetter;  le  mieux,  (the)  beat. 

mal,  badly ;  pis,  worse ;  le  pis,  the  worst. 

peu,  little  ;  moins,  less  ;  le  moins,  the  least. 

beaucoup,  mnch;  plus,  more;  le  plus,  nxost. 

tant  mieux  is  rendered :  so  much  the  better. 
tant  pis,  so  much  the  worse. 


FORMATION  OF  ADVERBS.            153 

7.  When  either  le  phs  or  le  inoins  qualifies  a  verb,  adverb,  or  participle 
not  used  adjectively,  le  retains  the  masculine  form.  Ex. :  Une  lettre  €crite 
leplas  soigneusement. 

8.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  adverbially  without  taking  an  addi- 
tional termination,  as  :  — 

Vite,  quick,  fast.  foH,  very.  expres,  purposely. 

haut,  loudly.  soudain,  suddenly. 

bus,  in  a  low  voice.  droit,  straightways. 

VOCABULARY. 

L'etat,  m.  the  state.  ponctuellenient,  punctually. 

fdcM*  sony,  angry.  avoiier,  to  confess. 

€gal,  equal.  entretenu     (part.),   entertained, 

gend'reusement,  generously.  propre,  clean.                [amused. 

€loquevimcnt,  eloquently.  rarement,  seldom. 

€ternel,  eternal,     agir,  to  act.  malheureusernent,  unfortunately. 

marcher,  to  walk.  modestement,  modestly. 

negb'ger,  to  neglect.  probablement,  likely. 

occupd",  occupied.  extremement,  extremely. 

dessiner,  to  draw.  la  fortune,  property. 
oublier,  to  forget. 


READING  EXERCISE   33. 

Vous  le  trouverez  facilement.  Les  gens  paresseux  negligent 
ordinairement  lears  affaires.  Agissez  genereusement  envers  vos 
ennemis.  Dieu  a  sagement  distribu^  ses  dons.  Parlez  modestement 
de  vos  merites.  Get  homme  a  parle  tres-eloqnemment.  Henri  IV. 
etait  constamment  occupe  de  la  prosperite  de  ses  etats.  Le  voleur 
marcha  doucement ;  il  avait  probablement  peur  d'etre  entendu.  Je 
suis  extremement  faebe  d'apprendre  cette  nouvelle.  Nettoyez 
mieux  vos  habits.  "Vous  n'etes  pas  proprement  habille.  Ne  mar- 
chez  pas  si  lentement.  Les  enfants  qui  aiment  passionnement  le  jeu, 
negligent  souvent  leurs  taches  (tasks). 

•  When  meaning,  sorry,  it  takes  de  before  its  obj. :  meaning,  angry,  contre. 


154 


XXXIII.      TRENTE-TROISIEME  LEgON. 


THEME    33. 

1.  This  pupil  learns  {apprend)  easily,  but  lie  forgets  as  (aussi) 
easily  that  which  ho  learns.  2.  The  king  has  generously  pardoned 
(to)  his  enemies.  3.  Nobody  is  constantly  happy  in  this  world. 
4.  The  name  of  Shakspeare  will  live  (vivra)  eternally.  5.  Speak 
frankly.  6.  My  brother  is  constantly  occupied.  7.  Confess  freely 
your  faults.  8.  Unfortunately  I  have  not  found  him  at  home. 
9.  Speak  softly.  10.  The  artist  plays  admirably  (well).  11.  I 
have  seldom  received  letters  from  my  brother-in-law  (jbeau-frere) . 
12.  Everybody  must  punctually  observe  the  laws.  13.  If  you  fulfil 
faithfully  your  duties,  you  will  be  esteemed  by  {de)  everybody. 
11.  You  have  stayed  longer  than  your  brother.  15.  The  little  girl 
draws  very  well ;  she  draws  better  than  her  sister. 


CONVERSATION. 


Comment  parle  cet  homme  ? 

Avez-vous  des  nouvelles  de  votre 
frere  a  Paris  ? 


A-t-il  perdu  quelque  chose  ? 

Monsieur  M.  est-il  fache  ? 
Pourquoi  est-il  fache  ? 

Comment    faut-il    agir  ?      (^How 

must  people  act  ?  ) 
Charles,  tu  es  malade  ;  qu'as-tu  ? 


Vous   etes  probablement  le  frere 
de  Monsieur  Richard  ? 


II  parle  tres-eloqaemment  et 
tres-franchement. 

B  m'ecrit  (writes)  rarement. 
Heureusementjesais  (know) 
par  un  de  ses  amis  qu'il  se 
porte  bien. 

II  a  probablement  perdu  une 
partie  de  sa  fortune. 

Oui,  il  est  extremement  fache. 

U  est  fache  centre  son  fils  qui 
a  ete  me  chant. 

II  faut  toujours  agir  prudem- 
ment  et  honnetement. 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete  (head-ache) ; 
mais  heureusement  ce  n'est 
pas  grand'chose  {conse- 
quence). 

Non,  Madame,  mais  je  suis  son 
cousin. 


ADVERBS   OF  PLACE   AND   OF  TIME. 


155 


Comment  ce  general  a-t-il  agi  en-    II  agi  tres-genereusemont. 

vers  ses  ennemis  ? 
Pourquoi   marchez-vous   si   lente-     J'ai  mal  au  pied. 

ment? 
Cette  loi  est-elle  observee  ?  Elle  est  ponctuellement  obser- 

vee  de  tout  le  monde. 


XXXIV.     TRENTE-QUATRIEME   LE9ON. 


ADVERBS  OF  PLACE  AND  OF  TIME. 


1.  The  principal  adverbs  of  place  are  : 


Ou,  where  1  whither  ? 

par  oil,  which  way  1 

id,  here,     d'ici,  hence. 

la,  there,     de  la,  thence. 

la-Ixis,  there  below,  yonder. 

y,  there,  therein. 

par  id,  this  way.    par  la,  that  way. 

par-d,  par-la,  here  and  there. 

fa  et  la,  to  and  fro. 

ailleurs,  elsewhere. 

dessous,  underneath. 

dessus,  above. 

en  haut,  up,  up  stairs. 

en  bos,  down  stairs,  below. 

quelque  pnirt,  somewhere. 

2.  The  principal  adverbs  of  time 

Quand,  when  ? 

aujourd'hui,  to-day. 

hier,  yesterday. 

avant-hier,  the  day  before  yesterday. 

demain,  to-morrow. 


within,  inside. 


d'ou,  whence? 
dedans, 
en  dedans, 
dehors,  without,  out  of  doors. 
derriere,  behind. 
devant,  before. 
dega,  en  dega,  on  this  side. 
dda,  en  dela,  on  that  side. 
pres,  aupres,  near. 
proc/ie,  close  by. 
alentour,  round, about. 
partout,  everywhere. 
nuUe  part,  nowhere. 
jusgu'a,  as  far  as. 
jusgu'oit,  how  far  ? 
loin,  far,  far  oiF. 

are : 

un  jour,  one  day. 
autrefois,  jadis,  formerly. 
auparavant,  previously,  before. 
alors,  puis,  then. 
apres,  after,  afterwards. 


156 


XXXIV.      TRENTE-QUATEIEME   LEgON. 


apres-demain,  the  day  after  to-mor- 
row. 
enjin,  at  last,  at  length. 
tot,  soon,    plus  tot,  sooner. 
bientot,  soon,     trap  tot,  too  soon. 
tantot,  by  and  by. 
aussitot,  directly. 
turd,  late. 
d'abord,  at  first. 

d^sormais,     )  ,  «     , 

,    ^         ^  ('henceforth. 
dorenavant,  ) 

des-lors,  from  then. 

depuis,  since. 

When  and  m  wAzcA  are  rendered  by  ou 


jusqu'a,  until. 

ensuite,  aftcnvards. 

a  present,     } 

( now,  at  present. 
maintenant,  ) 

guelquefois,  sometimes. 

souvent,  often. 

longtemps,  long. 

tou jours;  always. 

dernierement,  I  ,  ^  ,        -  ,  ^ 

C  lately,  of  late. 
naguere,  ) 

deja,  already. 

encore,  still,  yet. 

jamais,  ever,    ne jamais,  never. 

,  after  a  noun  signifying  time  ox  place. 


PLACE  OF  ADVERBS. 

Rem.  1.  In  the  simple  tenses,  the  adverb  is  generally  placed  immediately 
after  the  verb  which  it  modifies  : 

She  always  cries,  die  pleure  toujours. 
I  often  take  a  walk  with  my  friend. 
Je  me  promene  souvent  avec  mon  ami. 
Rem.  2.  When  the  verb  is  in  a  compound  tense,  the  adverb  generally 
comes  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle  ;  as, 

Je  I'ai  toujours  respects,  I  have  always  esteemed  him. 
Je  me  suis  souvent  promen^  avec  mon  maitre. 
I  have  often  taken  a  walk  with  my  master. 
N.  B.  — Hier,  avant-hier,  aujourd'hui,  demain,  apres-demain,  tantot,  tot,  and 
tard,  always  follow  the  participle,  unless  placed  before  the  auxiliary. 


VOCABULARY. 


Le  temps,  the  weather. 

le  village,  the  village. 

la  grammaire,  the  grammar. 

content,  satisfied. 

U  chemin  de  fer,  the  railroad. 


le  hrouillard,  the  fog,  mist. 
I'ouvrage,  m.  the  work. 
diner,  to  dine. 
venir,  to  come. 
laisser,  to  leave. 


BEADING    EXERCISE   34. 

Le  temps  est  fort  doux  aujourd'hui.    Mon  cou8iii  est  enfin  arriv^. 
Tj' autre  jour  je  me  suis  egare  dans  la  foret.     Travaillez  d'abord  et 


ADVERBS   OF  PLACE   AND   OF  TIME.  157 

ensuite  jouez.  Avez-vous  jamais  vu  un  enfant  comme  celui-la  ?  En 
effet,  il  est  extremement  gros.  Le  brouillard  aura  bientot  disparu. 
D'ou  venez-vous  maintenant,  et  oil  avez-vous  ete  Lier  ?  Yoyez-vous 
ce  village  la-bas?  Eh  bien  (well),  j'y  ai  ete  hier  et  aujourd'hui. 
J'y  vais  quelquefois.  M'avez-vous  apporte  la  grammaire  dont  je 
vous  ai  parle  ?  Youlez-vous  venir  diner  avec  nous  demain  ?  De- 
main  je  ne  serai  pas  ici,  mais  apres-demain  ou  plus  tard.  Enfin 
mon  ouvrage  est  fini. 

THEME    34. 

1.  Where  is  my  brother?  2.  He  is  not  here;  he  is  elsewhere; 
he  is  perhaps  yonder.  3.  I  will  go  (^firai)  that  way.  4.  Carry 
all  that  up  stairs.  5.  How  far  did  you  go  yesterday  ?  6.  I  went 
as  far  as  London.  7.  I  shall  go  nowhere  to-day.  8.  That  village 
is  not  far ;  do  you  see  (yoyez-vous)  it  yonder  ?  9.  Where  is  my 
grammar?  10.  I  have  left  it  somewhere.  11.  Is  Edward  here? 
12.  No;  he  is  below.  13.  My  friend  will  not  stay  here  long.  14. 
I  saw  (have  seen)  your  sister  yesterday  at  the  play  {au  spectacle). 
15.  He  will  always  be  satisfied.  16.  Come  back  (revenez)  soon. 
17.  Did  you  know  [have  you  known  (connu)~\  him  formerly?  18. 
Yes,  I  have  known  him  long.  19,  Whence  does  the  letter  come  ? 
20.  It  comes  from  America.  21.  Your  dog  is  out  of  doors.  22. 
How  is  (s<3  porte)  your  aunt  to-day  ?  23.  She  is  better  to-day  than 
[she  was]  yesterday.  24.  I  hope  you  will  dine  with  us  to-morrow. 
25.  I  shall  go  soon  into  the  country  (a  la  campagne).  26.  We 
expected  him  the  day  before  yesterday.  27.  Formerly  there  were 
no  railroads.     28 .  Henceforth  I  shall  be  very  diligent. 


158 


XXXy.      TBENTE-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 


XXXV.    TRENTE-CINQUIEME    LE9ON 


ADVERBS    OF    NUMBER,   OF    QUANTITY,   OF 
NEGATION,   ETC. 
The  adverbs  of  number  are  : 


PremVerement,  firstly. 

deiixiemement,  ) 

,  ( secondly. 

secondeinent,     ) 

troisiemement,  thirdly. 

giiatriemement,  fourthly. 

cinquiemement,  fifthly. 


sixiemement,  sixthly,  etc. 

comhien  de  fois,  how  often  1 

tine  fois,  once. 

deux  fois,  twice. 

trois  fois,  three  times,  etc. 


The  prmcipal  adverbs  of  quantity  and  comparison  are 


Comment,  how  ? 

combien,  how  much  ?  how  many "? 

beaucoup,  much,  many. 

bien  (with  du,  de  V,  des  following)  a 

great  deal  oi'  many. 
trop,  too  much,  too  many. 
tant,  so  much,  so  many. 
assez,*  enough,  pretty. 
peu,  little,     un  peu,  a  little. 
ne — guere,  hardly. 
bien,  ^ 
tres,  >  very, 
/ort,  ) 
plus,  more. 
davantage,  still  more. 
moins,  less. 

IZ'^fait,    [q^ite,  wholly,  entirely. 


presque,  almost. 

environ,        1    , 

,     ( about. 
a  peu  pres,  ) 

si,  so.     ai}isi,  thus. 

aussi,  as. 

€galement,  likewise. 

autant,  as  much,  as  many. 

d'autant  plus,  so  much  the  more. 

plutot,  rather. 

surtout,  above  all. 

au  plus, 

tout  au  plus, 

du  moins,  au  moins,  at  least. 

ihment,  \ 

(  only. 
—  Que,  )       ^ 


at  most. 


ne  —  que. 
mime,  even. 
pas  mime. 


not  even. 


pas  seulement. 
The  adverbs  of  affirmation  and  negation  are  : 
Oui,  jes.    Si,  yes.  ne — pas,  not. 

certes,  certainly.  ne — plus,  no  more. 

peut-itre,  perhaps.  non  plus,  nor  —  either. 

*  Assez  precedes  in  French  the  noun  or  adjective  it  limits.    Ex. :  Assez  de  vin, 
assez  bon.    See  p.  32. 


ADVERBS  OF  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  ETC.     159 


eertainement,  |  ^^^^„.„|,^  ^^  ^^  „„^^       «e  —  point,  not  (at  all). 

not  at  all. 


I  certainly,  to  be  sure. 
assurement,    )  pas  du  tout, 

non,  no.  point  du  tout, 

presque  jamais,  scarcely  ever.  ne  —  rien,  nothing. 

There  are  many  adverbial  locutions  ;  those  most  in  use  are  : 

A  peine,  scarcely.  tout  a  coup,  suddenly. 

en  effet,  really.  tout  d'un  coup,  all  at  once. 

sur  le  champ,  directly.  a  droite,  to  the  right. 

peu  a  peu,  by  degrees.  ,       a  gauche,  to  the  left. 

dans  peu  or  sous  peu,  soon.  ensemble,  together. 

a  dessein,  on  purpose.  pele-mele,  pell-mell. 

en  meme  temps,  at  the  same  time.  d'avance,  beforehand,  in  advance. 

a  la  fois,  at  once,  at  a  time.  sans  doute,  no  doubt. 

de  bonne  heure,  early.  tout  a  I'heure,  1  directly,  imnj^diate- 

de  meilleure  heure,  earlier.  tout  de  suite,    )      ly. 

a  bon  march€,  cheap.  par  hasard,  by  chance. 

a  fond,  thoroughly.  en  attendant,  meanwhile. 

par  an,  yearly,    par  jour,  daily.  de  temps  en  temps,  >  from  time  to 

par  mois,  monthly.  de  temps  a  autre,    j      time. 

OF    NEGATION. 

1.  Not  is  translated  into  French  by  ne,  which  is  placed  before  the  verb, 
and  pas  or  point  after  it,  in  simple  tenses.     Ex.  : 

Je  ne  veux  pas,  I  will  not,  I  do  not  wish. 
Je  ne  sais  pas,  I  do  not  know. 

2.  In  compound  tenses,  ne  comes  before  the  auxiliary,  and  pas  after  it. 
Ex.: 

Je  n'ai  pas  vu,  I  have  not  seen. 
Elk  n'a  pas  parl€,  she  did  not  speak. 
Point  is  merely  a  stronger  negative  than  pas,  as  : 
II  n*ai  point  parU,  I  did  not  speak  (at  all). 

3.  Ne  is  employed  without  pas,  if  there  is  in  the  sentence  a  pronoun  or 
adverb  expressing  negation,  such  as  personne,  nul,  rien,  jamais,  ni,  ne — plus, 
■point,  guere.     Ex. : 

Je  ne  connais  personne,  I  know  nobody. 

Je  ne  veux  rien,  I  wish  for  nothing. 

Je  ne  sais  plus,  I  know  no  more. 

Elle  n'a  jamais  dit  cela,  she  never  said  so. 

4.  If  one  of  the  negations  is  followed  by  a  noun  in  the  partitive  sense, 
this  noun  is  simply  preceded  by  de : 


160  XXXV.      TRENTE-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

Affirmative :  Tai  du  pain,  I  have  some  bread.  s^ 

Negative :  Je  n'ai  pas  de  pain,  I  have  no  bread. 
Affirmative :  Avez-vous  de  V argent,  have  you  any  money  ? 
Negative :  Je  n'ai  point  d'argent,  I  have  no  money. 

5.  "With  the  infinitive,  ne — pas,  ne — point,  ne  —  rien,  etc.,  are  generally 
not  separated,  as : 

Ne  pas  se  venger,  not  to  revenge  one's  self. 
Ne  plus  €crire,  to  write  no  more. 
Ne  rien  manger,  to  eat  nothing. 

6.  Without  a  verb,  the  negatives  stand  without  ne,  as  : 

Pas  a  la  fois,  not  at  once.     Pas  moi,  not  I. 
Pas  beaucoup,  pas  trop,  pas  tant,  pas  aujourd'hui, 

7.  Non plus,  nor — either,  requires  the  full  negation  ne — pas  before  it,  as: 

.  Je  ne  le  veux  pas  non  plus,  nor  will  I  have  it  either. 

8.  If  nor  —  either  is  connected  only  with  a  noun  or  pronoun,  without  a 
verb,  the  noun  or  the  pronoun  is  preceded,  in  French,  by  ni,  as  : 

Nor  Charles  either,  ni  Charles  non  plus. 

9.  Observe  the  expression  ne — que  for  only,  as : 

Je  n'ai  que  deux  soeurs,  I  have  only  two  sisters. 
U  n'a  qu'un  morceau  de  pain,  he  has  only  a  piece  of  bread. 
Elle  n'a  apport^  qu'une  assiette,  she  brought  but  one  plate. 
U enfant  n'a  que  dix  ans,  the  child  is  only  ten  years  old. 
U  n'est  que  six  heures,  it  is  only  six  o'clock. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  fois,*  f.  the  time.  inout,  e,  unheard  of. 

le  crime,  the  crime.  amicalement,  friendly. 

travailler,  to  work.  €viter,  to  shun. 

laconique,  laconic.  la  soci€t€,  the  society. 

refuser,  to  refuse.  merci,  thank  you. 

READING  EXERCISE  35. 

Ce  crime  est  fout-a-fait  inoui.  Comment  vous  portez-vous  ?  Je 
me  porte  tres-bien.  Combien  d'aunes  de  ce  drap  vous  faut-il  ?  H 
m'en  faut  beaucoup;  il  m'en  faut  au  moins  trente  aunes.  Vous 
etes-vous  promene  longtemps  ?     Je  me  suis  promene  environ  deux 

*  Wlien  the  noun  times  denotes  repetition,  as  the  number  of  times,  it  is  trans- 
lated by  fois. 


ADVERBS  OF  NUMBER,  OF  QUANTITY,  ETC.     IGl 

heures ;  peut-etre  un  peu  moins.  Votre  tante  va-t-elle  souvent  au 
spectacle  ?  Elle  n'y  va  {goes)  presque  jamais,  et  mon  oncle  n'y  va 
pas  du  tout.  Monsieur,  vous  avez  peu  de  fautes  dans  votre  traduc- 
tion. Combien  en  ai-je  ?  Vous  en  avez  moins  que  votre  frere ; 
vous  n'en  avez  que  deux  ou  trois,  tout  au  plus  quatre.  J'ai  appris 
(lear7ied)  ma  lecon  par  coeur.  Habillez-vous  tout  de  suite.  C'est 
en  vain  que  vous  cherchez  a  le  sauver.  Marchez  a  droite ;  moi,  je 
marclierai  a  gauche.  Sans  doute,  cela  vaut  mieux.  J'ai  acbete  ce 
tableau  a  bon  marche. 

THEME  35. 

1.  How  much  sugar  have  you  bought?  2.  How  many  lessons 
a  {par)  week  have  you  ?  3.  You  eat  too  much ;  you  must  eat  less. 
4.  That  young  man  works  too  much.  5.  Give  him  a  little  money. 
6.  Give  me  more  time.  7.  There  were  many  ladies,  and  we  had  a 
great  deal  of  pleasure.  8.  Have  you  not  played  enough?  9.  I 
think  (that)  you  will  not  have  it.  10.  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  laconic 
man;  he  always  answers  yes  or  no.  11.  It  is  better  not  to  refuse 
him.  12.  I  have  only  one  brother,  and  my  cousin  has  only  one  sis- 
ter. 13.  She  is  only  five  years  old.  14.  I  have  never  seen  her. 
15.  She  never  comes  to  our  house  (chez  nous).  16.  We  certainly 
shall  go  out  (sortirons)  together.  17.  My  father  has  bought  a 
horse  very  cheap.  18.  Have  you  seen  anybody  ?  19.  I  have  seen 
nobody.  20.  The  thunder-storm  came  on  suddenly.  21.  I  got  up 
early;  earlier  than  my  brother.  22.  You  must  always  shun  the 
society  of  these  bad  people.  23.  Go  (allez)  to  the  right.  24.  I 
shall  go  to  the  left ;  we  shall  arrive  at  the  same  time. 

CONVERSATION. 

Comment  trouvez-vous  le  temps  Je  le  trouve  fort  beau  (or  bien 

aujourd'hui  ?  beau) . 

Voici  du  jambon.      En  voulez-  Donnez-m'en   un    peu,    s'il  vous 

vous  ?  plait  (  please) . 

En  voulez-vous  davantage  ?  Non,  merci,  j'en  ai  assez. 
11 


162 


XXXVI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME    LEgON. 


Sere:&-vous  chez  vous  (at  home) 

demain  matin? 
A  quelle  heure  avez-vous  dm4 

hier? 
Dinerez-vous  aujourd'hui   a  la 

meme  heure  ? 
Que  ferez-vous  (will  you  do) 

pendant  ce  temps  ? 
Avez-vous  fait  cela  a  dessein  ? 
Avez-vous  fini  votre  theme  ? 

Que  fait  cette  petite  fille  Ik-bas  ? 

Connaissez-vous  cet  ouvrage 
(work)  ? 

Avez-vous  lu  (read)  ce  livre  ? 

Quand  voulez-vous  venu-  jouer 
avec  moi  ? 

Comment  vous  portez-vous  ? 

Et  Monsieur  votre  pere,  com- 
ment se  porte-iril  ? 


Assur^ment,   je   serai    chez  moi 
toute  la  journee  (day). 

Hier  j'ai  dine  a  cinq  heures  pre- 
cises. 
,  Non,    aujourd'hui  je   ne   dmerai 
qu'a  six  heures. 

Je  me  promenerai  en  attendant. 

Non,  je  ne  I'ai  pas  fait  expres. 
Je  ne  I'aurai  guere  fini  avant  sept 

heures. 
Elle   cherche  des  fraises  (straw- 

herries) . 
Cet  ouvrage   m'est  tout-a-fait  in- 

connu. 
Je  I'ai  lu  plus  de  deux  fois. 
Je   finirai   d'abord   ma   tache   et 

apres,  nous  jouerons. 
Je  me  porte  a  merveille. 
II   se   porte  assez  bien.      II   est 

sorti  hier  pour  la  premiere  fois. 


XXXYI.    TRENTE-SIXIEME    LE9ON 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

The  principal  simple  conjunctions  are  :  — 


Et,  aild. 

et  —  et,  both  —  and. 

ou,  or. 

ou — ou,  either  —  or. 


pouHant,  yet,  still. 
n^amnows,  nevertheless. 
si,  if,  whether. 
sinon,  if  not. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  163 

ni — ni,  neither — nor.  comme,  as. 

que,  that,  than  (after  a  comp.).  or,  now. 

car,  for.  done,  consequently,  then. 

mats,  but.  puisque,  since,  as. 

cependant,  ) 


toutefois,     ">  quoique  (with  the  Subj.),  though, 

however. 


1.  Among  these  simple  conjunctions,  only  one  governs  the  Sub- 
junctive mood,  viz.  :  quoique,  though  or  although.  Ex. :  quoique 
Je  sois  malade,  though  I  am  ill. 

Por  the  Subjunctive  after  que,  see  P.  II.  L.  19. 

2.  Si  denotes  a  condition  or  supposition  :  sHl  vient,  if  he  comes ; 
si  V0U&  voulez,  if  you  like.  When  si  is  followed  by  an  Imperfect 
or  Pluperfect,  those  tenses  are  always  in  the  Indicative  mood.  (See 
P.  II.  L.  19.) 

If  I  had,  si  favais ;  If  I  were,  si  f€tais  ; 
If  I  had  seen  him,  si  je  I'avais  vu. 

Note.  The  i  in  si  is  cut  off  before  il  and  its,  but  nowhere  else,  as  :  s'il 
avait,  but  si  elle  avait,  etc. 

3.  The  conjunction  ni  —  ni  requires  ne  before  its  verb,  and  the 

noun  which  follows  it  takes  no  article,  if  used  in  the  partitive  sense, 

as:  — 

Je  n'ai  ni  pere  ni  mere,  I  have  neither  father  nor  mother. 

4.  The  conjunction  que  serves  to  connect  two  ideas  so  as  to  form 
of  the  two  one  sentence,  as  : 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison,  I  believe  you  are  right. 

In  English  the  conjunction  that  is  almost  always  understood,  whereas 
que  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  but  repeated  before  each  mem- 
ber of  the  proposition,  as  :  — 

Je  crois  que  vous  avez  raison  et  que  vous  rdussirez. 

I  think  you  are  right  and  that  you  will  succeed. 

5.  When  a  conjunction  governs  several  verbs,  it  is  placed  before 
the  first  verb  only,  and  que  is  used  before  the  other  verbs.  Ex. : 
As  he  is  diligent  and  takes  pains,  comme  il  est  applique  et  quHl 
prend  de  la  peine. 


164  XXXYI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME  LEgON. 

6.  Done  is  often  used  like  the  English  anxiliary  do,  to  urge  or  incite.  Ex.: 
Taisez-vous  done,  do  be  silent.  It  is  also  used  interrogatively :  C^est  done 
vous  qui  avez  fait  eela? 

VOCABULARY. 

Plier,  to  bend.  le  hien,  the  good. 

lever,  to  lift  up.  plus  — plus,  the  more  —  the  more. 

r^oile,  f.  the  star.  plus  —  moins,  the  more  —  the  less. 

€puis€,  e,  exhausted.  mains — moins,  the  less  —  the  less. 

ayare,  avaricious.  soil — soit,hQ,\t  —  or. 

sayaw^,  learned.  tantot — faji^d^,  sometimes — some- 

rompre,  to  break.  times,  now  —  then. 

habiter,  to  inhabit.  ni — non  plus,  nor  —  either. 

READING  EXERCISE  3R. 

L'ambition  et  I'avarice  sont  deux  grandes  sources  du  malheur  hu- 
main.  Les  discours  impies  (^impious)  gatent  a  la  fois  I'esprit  et  le 
coeur.  Cette  eau  est  froide  comme  de  la  glace.  Votre  tableau  est 
precieux,  mais  il  ne  me  plait  (please')  pas.  II  arriva  comme  je 
sortais.  EUe  n'est  ni  laide  ni  belle.  Vous  vous  amusez,  et  cepen- 
dant  le  temps  fait  (^Jlies).  Cet  homme  est  tres-fort,  et  pourtant  il 
ne  peut  pas  lever  ce  fardeau  (weight).  Ou  vous  me  paierez,  oa 
vous  irez  en  prison.  Donnez-moi  de  I'eau,  s'il  vous  plait.  Martin 
est  encore  bien  jeune.  n^anmoins  il  est  fort  sage.  Bienheureux  sont 
ceux  qui  aiment  la  paix,  car  ils  seront  appelles  les  enfants  de  Dieu; 
Vous  ne  le  savez  pas  ?  Ni  moi  non  plus.  Tantot  il  veut  une  chose, 
tantot  il  en  veut  une  autre. 

THEME  36. 

1.  Gold  and  silver  are  metals.  2.  Silver  is  less  useful  than  iron. 
3.  Mr.  A.  is  very  inconsistent  (inconsequent)  ;  he  is  sometimes  of 
one  opinion  (avis,  m.)  and  sometimes  of  another.  4.  I  like  you,  as 
I  know  (sais)  that  you  are  always  attentive.  5.  This  man  is  es- 
teemed by  everybody,  even  by  his  enemies.  6.  I  am  very  glad  to 
see  that  you  do  not  love  flattery.  7.  Some  one  has  done  it,  either 
you  or  your  brother.  8.  The  more  you  will  work,  the  more  you  will 
gain.     9.  This  horse  may  be  very  strong,  nevertheless  it  does  not 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


165 


please  me.  10.  The  longer  the  days  (are)  (constr.  the  more  the 
d.  are  long),  the  shorter  (are)  the  nights.  11.  Though  he  said 
(^dit)  (that)  he  had  no  appetite,  yet  he  ate  all  the  meat  and  bread. 
12.  Nobody  knows  whether  the  stars  are  inhabited  or  not.  13.  The 
reed  bends,  but  does  not  break.  14.  Do  not  bend  the  bow  too 
much,  otherwise  it  will  break.  15.  The  more  I  sang,  the  less  em- 
barrassed I  was.  16.  If  you  do  {faites}  it,  you  will  be  punished. 
17.  He  appeared  (^paraissaii)  very  modest,  although  he  was  very 
learned.  18.  In  order  to  be  learned,  you  must  study  much.  19. 
I  punish  him  as  he  deserves  (it).  20.  You  must  stay  at  home, 
since  you  are  not  quite  well.  21.  When  he  had  done  speaking 
(^Jini  de  parler),  he  was  quite  exhausted.  22.  If  I  had  had  faith- 
ful friends,  I  should  not  be  m  unhappy.  23.  You  will  be  happy, 
if  you  do  your  duty  (devoir') .  24.  I  was  sleeping  when  your  ser- 
vant entered  (entra). 


CONVERSATION. 

Etes-vous  heureux,  mon  ami  ?  Je  le   serais,  si'  j'avais  de  bons 

livres. 

Si  ce  n'est  que  cela,  je  peux  Je  vous  en  serais  tres-oblige. 

vous  en  donner.    En  voulez- 

vous  ? 

Quelles  sent  les  deux  grandes  L'ambition  et  I'avarice. 

sources     du     malheur     des 

hommes  ? 

Que  faiton  souvent,  quand  on  On  fait  souvent  des  sottises. 

est  jeune  ? 

Que  dit  Jesus-Christ  de  ceux  II  dit  qu'ils  seront  appeles  "  en- 

qui  aiment  la  paix  ?  fants  de  Dieu." 

Que  veut  cet  enfant  ?  II  veut  tantot  ceci,  tantot  cela. 

Comment     trouvez-vous    cette  EUe  n'est  ni  belle  ni  laide. 

demoiselle  ? 

Ne  pouvez-vous  pas  lever  cette  Je  ne  peux  pas  la  lever,  quoique 

pierre  ?  je  sois  tres-fort. 


166 


XXXVI.      TRENTE-SIXIEME   LEgON. 


Comment    Dieu    traite-t-il    les 

hommes  ? 
Quelle  propriete  a  le  roseau  ? 
Quand  faut-il  forger  le  fer  ? 


II  les  traite  comme  un  pere  traite 

ses  enfants. 
II  (se)  plie  et  ne  rompt  pas. 
Quand  il  est  cbaud. 


EEADENG  LESSON. 


LAFITTE. 


Lorsque  Jacques  Lafitte  vint  (came)  a  Paris,  il  se  presenta  chez 
M.  Perregaux  dans  I'esperance  d'obtenir  une  place  ;  mais  le  banquier 
lui  annonga  qu'il  etait  dans  I'impossil^lite  de  satisfaire  a  sa  demande, 
puisque  les  bureaux  etaient  au  complet. 

Lafitte,  decourage  par  ce  refus,  s'eloignait  tristement,  lorsqu'en 
traversant  la  cour  de  I'botel,  il  aperQut  a  terre  une  ^pingle ;  il  la  ra- 
massa  et  la  piqua  sur  sa  mancbe.  M.  Perregaux  ayant  vu  Taction 
du  jeune  soUiciteur,  en  fut  frappe  (struck) ,  et  pensa  qu'il  devait 
etre  done  d'un  esprit  d'ordre  et  d'economie.  II  le  fit  rappeler  et  lui 
dit  qu'il  pouvait  compter  sur  une  place  dans  sa  maison.  En  efFet, 
pen  de  jours  apres,  le  jeune  Bayonnais  entra  cbez  le  ricbe  banquier, 
et  chacun  salt  que,  plus  tard,  il  est  devenu  un  bomme  ricbe  et  cele- 
bre. 

L'esp&ance,  hope.  ramasser,  to  pick  up. 

le  bureau,  the  office.  la  manche,  the  sleeve. 

s'eloigner,  to  retire.  done,  endowed. 

une  epingle,  a  pin.  en  effet,  indeed. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PHRASES.  167 


XXXYII.    TRENTE-SEPTIEME    LEgON. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PHRASES. 

Most  of  these  are  adverbs  or  prepositions  united  with  que  or  de. 
Some  require  the  following  verb  in  the  Indicative  mood,  others  in 
the  Infinitive,  and  others  again  in  the  Subjunctive. 

1.    Conjunctive  phrases  with  the  Indicative :  — 

Ou  bien,  or,  else.  Aussi  bien  que,  as  well  as. 

ni — non  plus,  neither,  nor  either.        aussitot  que 


au  contraire,  on  the  contrary.  des  que,         j  ^^  ^^^^  ^^' 

non  seulement — mats  encore,  not        dememe  que,\ 

only  —  but  also.  ainsi  que,       y 

deplus,  moreover.  au  reste, ") 

autant  que,  as  much  as.  du  teste,  )       "^  "^  ^• 

apres  que,  after,  after  that.  de  la,  hence  it  follows. 

quand  mime,  although.  a  peine  —  que,  scarcely  —  as. 

si  toutefois,  if  however.  c'est  pourquoi,  therefore. 

c'est-a-dire,  namely.  par  consequent,  consequently. 

c'est  que,    ">  comme  si,  as  if. 

r  because.  ?      a       ^i_       •    .-, 

parce  que,  )  de  meme,  thus,  in  the  same  way. 

tandis  que,  whereas.  sans  cela,  otherwise,  else. 

pendant  que,  while,  whilst.  depuis  que,  since. 

tant  que,  as  long  as.  tout  —  que,  however  —  as. 

2.  With  the  Injinitive  mood:  — 

AJin  de,  in  order  to,  to.  de  peur  de,     ") 

a  moins  de,  unless.  de  crainte  de,  |  ^^  ®^ 

avant  de,  before.  loin  de,  far  from. 

au  lieu  de,  instead  of.  plutot  que  de,  rather  than. 

3.  With  the  Subjunctive  mood:  — 

AJin  que, ")            .  non  que,  not  that. 

pour  .que,  )  ^^^^'  ^^  ®*^^^  *^^**  nonobstant  que,   notwithstanding 

avant  que,  before.  that. 

a  moins  que,  t  Y                 ,  pour  peu  que,  however  little. 

que  —  ne,        y  un  ess,  till.  powryu  ^-ue,  provided  (that). 

t  Those  marked  with  a  f  require  ne  before  the  following  verb. 


168  XXXVII.      TRENTE-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

hien  que, ")  though,  quelque  —  que,  however  —  though. 

quoique,  >  although.  sans  que,  without  that. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  till,  until.  si  ce  n'est  que,  unless,  till. 

loin  que,  far  from.  soit  que,  whether  —  or. 

4.  Besides  the  above-mentioned  conjunctions,  there  are  other  con- 
junctive expressions  (locutions  conjonctives),  which  have  been 
borrowed  from  other  classes  of  words,  and  to  which  the  conjunction 
que  is  added.     Such  are  : 

A  condition  que,  on  condition  that 

de  peur  que,*  t    7  ^^^^ 

de  crainte  que,*^  )        * 

de  maniere  que,      ) 

,  ^  >•  so  as  to,  so  that 

de  or  en  sorte  que,  ) 

au  cos  que,  in  case  that.*  .... 

suppose  que,  supposing  that.*  .... 

malgrd'  que,  for  all  that,  notwithstanding.* 

toutes  les  fois  que,  as  often  as. 

peut-etre  que,  perhaps  that 

attendu  que,  considering  that 

a  ce  que,  according  as,  as  far  as,  etc. 

N.  B.  —  Those  marked  with  an  *  govern  the  subjunctive. 

VOCABULAEY. 

La  suite,  the  consequence.  pret,  ready. 

la  machine  a  vapeur,  the  engine.  la  princesse,  the  princess. 

la  m€moire,  the  memory.  la  guerre,  war. 

occuper,  to  occupy.  amhitieux,  ambitious. 

mettre,  to  put,  place.  Ve'ducation,  f.  education. 

preserver,  to  preserve.  regarder,  to  look  at. 

READING   EXEKCISE   37. 

Aussitot  que  la  machine  k  vapeur  fut  construite  (built) ,  elle  tut 
mise  en  mouvement  (^put  in  motion),  pour  Fessayer.  Quelque 
grande  que  soit  cette  faute,  il  faut  cependant  la  pardonner.  Des 
qu'il  me  vit  (saw)  il  courut  (ran)  k  moi.  Pendant  que  nous  etions 
occupes  a  faire  notre  tache,  on  cria  au  feu  (^fire)  !  La  memoire  de 
Henri  lY .  sera  toujours  chere  aux  Frangais  parce  qu'il  mettait  sa 
gloire  k  les  rendre  heureux.     Que  le  ciel  vous  preserve  d'un  pareil 


CONJUNCTIVE  PHRASES.  1^9 

(jsucJi)  malheur !  Le  malado  ne  boit  (^drinks)  ni  ne  mange.  Tant 
que  ma  mere  sera  a  la  campagne,  je  resterai  avec  elle.  Tandis  que 
nous  parlons,  le  temps  fuit.  Depuis  que  j'ai  perdu  moa  pere,  tout 
me  manque. 

THEME  37. 

1.  I  am  not  sorry,  on  the  contrary,  I  am  very  glad  (hien  aise) 
to  {de)  have  done  it.  2.  I  will  play,  as  soon  as  I  (shall)  have 
finished  my  exercise.  3.  There  will  always  be  wars  among  men, 
as  long  as  they  are  ambitious.  4.  After  (thai)  you  were  gone 
(sorti),  I  began  writing  («  ecrire).  5.  As  soon  as  my  education 
is  finished,  I  shall  go  to  Italy.  6.  In  order  to  learn  well,  wo  must 
{on  doit)  study  with  a  great  dpal  of  attention.  7.  In  order  to 
gain  friends,  we  must  be  honest.  8.  It  will  be  impossible  to  learn 
French,  unless  you  be  {Inf.)  diligent.  9.  Let  us  pray,  before  we 
begin  {Inf.).  10.  Bather  than  study,  he  loses  his  time.  11.  Far 
from  blaming  you,  I  praised  you.  12.  Come  here,  that  I  may 
speak  to  you.  13.  Send  me  your  book,  (in  order)  that  I  may  read 
it.  14.  I  will  be  ready  before  they  come.  15.  Unless  you  accom- 
pany me,  I  will  not  take  a  walk.  16.  Cato  killed  himself,  lest  he 
should  fall  into  (entre)  the  hands  of  Caesar.  17.  Though  that 
young  man  is  not  very  diligent,  [yet]  he  improves.  18.  Before 
you  begin  an  action,  consider  well  its  consequences.  19.  You  will 
never  be  respected  unless  you  fulfil  your  duties.  20.  He  will  give 
it  to  you,  on  condition  that  you  give  it  back  to  him.  21.  They 
beat  him  so  that  they  almost  killed  him. 


170  XXXVIII.      TRENTE-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

XXXYIII.   TRENTE-HUITlfeME   LE9ON. 


IRKEGULAR   VERBS.  — FIEST    CLASS. 

Those  verbs  are  commonly  called  irregular  which  deviate  from  the  three 
regular  conjugations.     This  deviation  is  of  three  kinds. 

1.  Such  verbs  as  take  the  termination  corresponding  to  the  ending 
of  their  Infinitive  mood,  but  change  their  root.  Ex. :  Of  the  verb  cotidre, 
to  sew,  the  radical  is  coud-,  this  final  d  is,  in  some  persons  and  tenses, 
changed  into  s,  for  instance  in  the  plural :  nous  cous-ons,  we  sew.  These  are 
the  least  difficult,  and  are  therefore  put  in  the  first  class. 

2.  Verbs  which  preserve  their  radical  syllable  throughout  unchanged, 
but  take  flexions  that  do  not  accord  with  the  ending  of  their  Infinitive* 
For  instance,  the  verb  cour-tr,  to  run,  ending  in  -ir,  ought  to  take  the  flex- 
ions of  the  second  conjugation  (Jinir).  But  this  is  not  the  case;  it  takes 
the  flexions  of  the  third  conjugation  (vendre) ;  the  Present  is  not  je  couris^ 
tu  courts,  etc.,  but  je  cours,  tu  cours,  etc. ;  P.  p.  couru  like  vendu.  Verbs  of 
this  kind  we  assign  to  the  second  class. 

3.  A  certain  number  of  verbs  offer  both  these  anomalies  at  the  same 
time;  i.  e.  they  undergo  some  changes  in  their  root,  and  are  conjugated 
with  other  flexions  than  those  corresponding  with  the  ending  of  their  Infin- 
itive. For  instance,  the  verb  mourir,  to  die,  ought,  according  to  its  Infini- 
tive termination,  -ir,  to  take  the  flexions  of  Jimr.  This  is  not  the  case ;  it 
is,  in  most  tenses,  conjugated  like  vendre;  and,  besides,  its  root  mour-  is,  in 
certain  tenses  and  persons,  changed  into  meur-,  as :  Pres.je  meurs,  tu  meurs, 
etc.  Such  verbs,  among  which  are  included  those  ending  in  -oir,  consti- 
tute the  third  class. 

To  facilitate  the  study  of  the  irregular  verbs,  it  is  essential  to  dis- 
tinguish the  primitive  tenses  from  the  derived  ones.  The  latter  have 
generally  a  regular  inflexion,  whereas  the  former  alone  are  subject  to 
irregularity.     As  already  mentioned,  the  primitive  tenses  are  : 

1.  77i£  Infinitive  mood. 

2.  The  Participle  present. 

3.  The  Participle  past. 

4.  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  nwod. 

5.  The  Preterite. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.      *  171 

From  these  the  other  tenses  and  moods  are  derived,  as  it  is  explained,  L. 
XX.  The  derivative  tenses  are  formed  regularly,  and  therefore  seldom 
mentioned  in  the  following  list. 

To  aid  the  pupil's  memory,  the  following  hints  will  prove  useful : 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  may  be  found  by  dropping  the  jfinal 
nt  of  the  third  person  plural  Indicative,  as :  from  Us  ^crivent  —  que  f€crive  ; 
from  Us  prennent  —  que  je  prenne;  from  Us  brnvent — que  je  hoive. 

2.  The  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative,  the  Participle  Present  and  the 
Imperfect  of  the  Indicative  have  the  same  radical,  as :  nous  mourons,  we 
die;  P.  pr.  mourant;  Imperf.  je  mourais;  —  nous craignons ;  P.  pr.  craignant; 
Imperf.  ye  craignais ;  -^nous  allons  ;  P.  pr.  allant;  Imperf.  faUais,  etc. 

3.  The  Future  and  Conditional  are  formed  from  the  Infinitive ;  the  fol- 
lowing, however,  have  an  irregular  formation,  —  je  courrai  (instead  of 
courirai),  je  mourrai,  je  verrai,  j'enverrai,  j'acquerrai,  je  pourrai,  je  saurai, 
je  voudini,  U  faudra,  je  viendrai,  je  tiendrai,  je  ferai,  and  j'irai. 

4.  When  the  Participle  past  ends  with  the  sound  of  i  {i,  is,  it,)  the  Pre- 
terite generally  ends  in  is.  Ex. :  Part.  p.  sorti,  gone  out;  Pret.  je  sortis ; 
—  Part.  p.  dit,  said;  Pret.je  dis;  —  Part.  p.  pris,  taken  ;  Pret.Je  pris,  etc. 

5.  But  when  the  Participle  past  ends  in  u,  the  Preterite  usually  ends  in 
us.  Ex. :  P.  p.  cru,  believed;  Pret.je  cms;  P.  p.  lu,  read;  Pret.  je  lus;  — 
P.  p.  connu,  known ;  Pret.  je  connus,  etc. 


A  LIST  OF  ALL  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  ACCORD- 
ING TO  THE  THREE  CLASSES  OF  IRREGULARITY. 

FIRST    CLASS. 

Containing  the  verbs  in  -re  which  take  the  terminations  of  the 
third  conjugation,  but  whose  radical  is  somewhat  changed. 

a.     (1  — 7.  Insertion  of  an  s.) 

1.  Luire,  to  shine.     Part.  pres.  luisant.     Part,  past,  \m. 
Pres.  Je  luis,  tu  luis,  il  luit,  nous  lui^ons,  reus  luisez,  ils  luisent. 
Subf.  Pres.  Que  je  luise.     Imperf.  Je  luisais. 

Pret.  wanting.     Put.  Je  luirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  Reluire,  to  glitter. 

2.  Suffire,  to  suffice.     P.  pr.  suffisant.   P.  p.  suffi, 
Pres.  Je  suffis,  tu  suffis,  il  suffit,  nous  suffisons,  etc. 


172  XXXVIII.     TRENTE-HUITIEME  LEgON.' 

Suhj.  Prcs.  Que  je  suffise.     Imperf.  Je  suffisais, , 
Pret.  Je  suflBs,  tu  suffis,  il  suffis,  nous  suffimes,  etc. 
Put.  Je  suffirai. 

In  the  same  manner :  Confire,  to  preserve,  to  pickle ;  and  circoncire,  to ' 
circumcise,  except  in  the  Part.  past.  The  Participle  of  the  former  is  conjit, 
of  the  latter  circoncis. 

3.  Nuire,  to  hurt.     P.  pr.  nui^ant.     P.  p.  xmi. 

Pros.  Je  nuis,  tu  nuis,  il  nuit,  nous  nuisons,  vous  nuisez,  ils  nui- 
sent.     S}ihj.  Pres.  Que  je  nui^e.     Imperf.  Je  nuisais, 
Pret.  Je  nuisis.     Fut,  Je  nuirai. 

4.  Cuire,  to  boil,  to  bake  (bread).  P.  pr.  cuisant.  P,  p. 
cmt. 

Pres.  Je  cuis,  tu  cuis,  il  cuit,  nous  cuisons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  cuisis.     Fut.  Je  cuirai. 
Thus  also :  Recuire,  to  boil  once  more. 

5.  Conduire^  to  conduct,  to  lead.     Se  conduire,  to  betave. 
P.  pr.  conduisant.     P.  p.  conduit. 

Pres.  Jo  conduis,  tu  conduis,  il  conduit,  nous  conduisons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  conduisis.     Fut.  Je  conduirai. 

Thus  :  Recondiiire,  to  reconduct,  to  see  home ;  -d^duire,  to  deduct ;  enduire, 
to  plaster ;  induire,  to  lead  into ;  introduire,  to  introduce ;  produire,  to  pro- 
duce ;  reprodtiire,  to  produce  again ;  reduire,  to  reduce ;  s€duire,  to  seduce ; 
traduire,  to  translate. 

6.  Instruire,  to  instruct.     P.  pr.  instruisant.     P.  p.  instrui^. 
Pres.  J'instruis,  tu  instruis,  il  instruit,  nous  instrui«ons,  vous  in- 

strui«ez,  ils  instruisent. 

Pret.  J'instruisis.     Fut.  J'instruirai. 

In  the  same  manner :  Construire,  to  build ;  d^ruire,  to  destroy. 

7.  Dire,  to  say,  to  tell.     P.  pr.  disant.     P.  p.  d\t. 

Pres.  Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit,  nous  disons,  vous  dites^  ils  disent. 

JSuhf.  Pres.  Que  je  disc. 

Pret.  Je  dis,  tu  dis,  il  dit,  nous  dimes,  vous  dites,  ils  dirent. 

Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  disse. 

Fut.  Je  dirai.     Imper.  Dis,  disons,  dites. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  173 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  redire,  to  say  again,  to  object. 

As  for  the  other  compounds  of  dire,  viz. :  Contredire,  to  contradict ;  df^- 
dire,  to  unsay;  and  se  dedire,  to  retract;  interdire,  to  forbid ;  medire,  to  slan- 
der ;  and  pr€dire,  to  foretell,  they  do  not  form  their  second  person  plural  of 
the  Present  Indicative  with  the  termination  -tes,  but  -sez,  as  :  vous  contre- 
disez,  voits  m^disez,  vous  interdisez,  etc. —  Alaudire,  to  curse,  takes  ss  in  the  fol- 
lowing forms  :  Pres.  plur.  nous  maudissons,  vous  matidissez,  Us  maudissent. 
Part.  pr.  maudissaiit.    Impcrf.  je  maudissais. 


VOCABULARY. 

Le  soleil,  the  sun.  modeme,  modem. 

un  rayon,  a  ray.  la  peche,  the  peach. 

Vespoir,  m.  hope.  la  v€rit€,  the  truth. 


let  dette,  the  debt. 


THEME  38. 


1.  The  sun  shines.  2.  Everything  shines  (glitters)  in  that 
house.  3.  It  is  not  suflBcient  (it  does  not  suffice)  to  understand  the 
ancient  languages,  it  is  also  necessary  to  study  the  modern  ones. 
4.  We  preserve  these  peaches  with  sugar.  5.  Have  you  pickled 
cucumbers  (des  concomhres)  ?  6.  Does  he  not  hurt  you  in  this  af- 
fair? 7.  All  his  property  will  not  suffice  to  {pour)  pay  his  debts. 
8.  Where  do  you  conduct  this  blind  [man]  ?  9.  I  conduct  him  to 
the  physician  (^chez  le  medecin).  10.  I  instinict  (the)  youth.  11. 
We  translate  English  into  French.  12.  The  boys  behaved  very 
well.  13.  You  will  hurt  me  more  than  any  other  person.  14.  This 
bread  is  well  baked.  15.  What  do  you  say  ?  16.  I  say  that  you 
are  (have)  right.  17.  We  say  the  truth.  18.  Tell  him  that  I  am 
here.  19.  I  shall  tell  (it)  him  directly.  20.  Never  contradict  any 
one  (^  per  Sonne)  in  (^en)  public.  21.  We  foretold  those  disasters 
(desastres),     22.  Let  us  curse  nobody. 


174  XXXIX.      TRENTE-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

XXXIX.     TRENTE-NEUYIEME     LE9ON 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — FIRST   CLASS   CONTINUED. 

h.     (8  — 17.  Change  of  the  final  consonant.) 

8.  Traire,  to  milk.     P.  pr.  trayant.     P.  p.  trait. 

Pres.  Je  trais,  tu  trais,  il  trait,  nous  tra^ons,  vous  trayez,  ils 
traient. 

Imperf.  Je  trayais.     Pret.  wanting.     Fut.  Je  trairai. 

Thus  also  :  Distraire,  tp  distract ;  extraire,  to  extract ;  soustraire,  to  suh' 
tract,  to  withdraw. 

9.  Suivre,  to  follow.     P.  pr.  suivant.     P.  p.  suivi. 

Pres.  Je  suis,  tu  snis,  il  sui^,  nous  suivons,  vous  suivez,  ils  sui' 
vent.     SuhJ.  Pres.  Que  je  suive. 

Pret.  Je  suivis.     Fut.  Je  suivrai. 
,    Imper.  Suis,  suivons,  suivez. 

Thus  :  S'ensuivre,  to  ensue ;  poursuivre,  to  pursue. 

10.  Vaincre,  to  conquer.     P.  pr.  vain^-want.     P.  p.  vaincu. 
Pres.  Je  vaincs,  tu  vaincs,  il  vainc,  nous  vain^-wons,  vous  vain- 

^wez,  ils  vaing-went. 

Pret.  Je  vain^'z^is.     Fut.  Je  vaincrai. 
Imper.  Vaincs,  vaingz^ons,  vain^'z^ez. 

In  the  same  manner :  Convaincre,  to  convince. 

11.  Coudre,  to  sew.     P.  pr.  cou^ant.     P.  p.  cousu. 

Pres.  Je  couds,  tu  couds,  il  coud,  nous  cousons,  vous  cousez,  ils 
consent.     Subj.  Pres.  Que  je  couse. 
Pret.  Je  cousis.     Fut.  Je  coudrai.    "^ 

Thus :  Decoudre,  to  unsew ;  recoudre,  to  sew  over  again. 

12.  Moudre,  to  grind.     P.  pr.  mouZant.     P.  p.  mou?u. 
Pres.  Je  mouds,  tn  mouds,  il  moud,  nous  mou/ons,  vous  mou/ez, 

ils  moufent.     Suhj.  Pres.  Que  je  raoufe. 
Pret.  Je  moulus.     Fut.  Je  moudrai. 


IRREGULAR  YERBS.  175 

In  the  same  manner:  Emoudre,  to  grind  (knives,  etc.),  to  sharpen,  and 
remoudre,  to  grind  again. 

13.  Resoudre,  to  resolve,  P.  pr.  reso^vant.  P.  p.  lesolu  (or 
r^sous). 

Pres.  Je  r^sous,  tu  r^sous,  il  resout,  nous  resolvons,  vous  resolvez, 
lis  resolvent.     Suhj.  Que  je  resolve. 
Pret.  Je  msolus,  tu  tqsoIus,  etc. 
Put.  Je  resoudrai.     Imper.  Resous,  resolvons,  resolvez. 

Thus !  Absoudre,  to  absolve,  and  dissondre,  to  dissolve. 
These  two  compounds  have  no  Preterite,  and  make  their  Participles  :  a6- 
souSy  f.  absoute,  and  dissous,  f.  dissoute. 

14.  Peindre,  to  paint.     P.  pr.  pei^want.     P.  p.  pein^. 

Pres.  Je  peins,  tu  peins,  il  point,  nous  pei^wons,  vous  pei^wez, 
ils  pei^went.     Suhj.  Que  je  pei^^ie. 
Imperf.  Je  pei^Tzais. 

Pret.  Je  pei^/iis,  tu  pei^Tzis,  il  pei^mt,  nous  pei^rmmes,  etc. 
Put.  Je  peindrai.     Imper.  Peins,  pei^wons,  peiywez. 

Thus :  Ceindre,  to  gird.  Feindre,  to  feign ;  depeindre,  to  depict.  Teindre, 
to  dye ;  deteindre,  to  discharge  color  ;  atteindre,  to  attain,  to  reach ;  e'teindre, 
to  extinguish.     Restreindre,  to  restrain.     Enfreindre  to  infringe,  to  trans- 


15.  Craindre,  to  fear.     P.  jor.  craiywant.     P.  jo.  crain^. 
jPres.  Je  crains,  tu  crains,  il  craint,  nous  crai^wons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  crai^rwis.     Put.  Je  craindrai,  etc. 

Thus  also :  Plaindre,  to  pity ;  se  plaindre,  to   complain ;  contraindre,  to 
compel,  to  constrain. 

16.  Joindre,  to  join.     P.  pr.  joi^want.     P.  p.  pint. 

Pres.  Je  joins,  tu  joins,  il  joint,  nous  joi^Tzons,  vous  joi^wez,  ils 
joiynent.     Suhj.  Que  je  joiy?2e. 
Pret.  Je  joignis.     Put.  Je  joindrai. 

Thus :    Rejoindre,  to  rejoin ;  enjoindre,  to  enjoin ;   disjoindre,  to  disjoin  ; 
Poiridre,  to  dawn,  break ;  Oindre,  to  anoint. 

17.  Ecrire,  to  write.     P.  pr.  ecrivant.     P.  p.  ecri^. 

Pres.  J'ecris,  tu  ecris,  il  6crit,  nous  ecrivons,  vous  ecri^^ez,  ils 
^crivent,     Suhj.  Que  j'ecrive,  etc. 


176  XXXIX.      TRENTE-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

Pret.  J'ecrivis,  tu  ecrivis,  il  ecrivit,  etc. 

Fut.     J'ecrirai.     Imper.  Ecris,  ecrirons,  ecrivez. 

Thus :  De'crire,  to  describe ;  circonscrire,  to  circumscribe ;  inscrire,  to  in- 
scribe; prescrire,  to  prescribe,  to  order;  rear  ire,  to  write  again,  to  answer; 
souscrire,  to  subscribe ;  transcrire,  to  transcribe. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  vache,  the  cow.  partir,  to  set  out. 

le  pr^ceptew,  the  tutor.  la  marcke,  course,  the  course. 

la  difficulte,  the  difficulty.  la  cendre,  the  ashes. 

la  vie,  the  life.  la  famee,  the  smoke. 

allemand,  German.  la  chandelle,  the  candle. 

le  meunier,  the  miller. 

THEME  39. 

1.  We  milk  the  cows.  2.  Soldiers  !  follow  me.  3.  I  will  lead 
you  to  (the)  victory.  4.  I  shall  follow  you.  5.  This  dog  follows 
me  everywhere.  6.  You  did  not  follow  the  lessons  of  your  tutor. 
7.  The  enemies  were  conquered.  8.  You  conquer  all  the  difficul- 
ties. 9.  That  did  not  convince  me.  10.  They  pursued  (Pret.)  the 
slave,  but  in  vain  {en  vain).  11.  She  was  sewing  her  gown.  12. 
These  handkerchiefs  are  badly  sewed.  13.  I  sewed  them  myself. 
14.  Does  the  miller  grind  the  corn?  15.  He  has  not  ground  it  this 
morning.  16.  He  will  grind  it  this  evening.  17.  I  fear  the  rain. 
18.  We  do  not  fear  death ;  why  should  we  fear  it?  19.  I  resolved 
{de)  to  set  out.  20.  We  pursued  our  course.  21.  I  have  at  last 
(enfin)  convinced  him  of  the  greatness  of  his  fault.  22.  The  wood 
which  is  burnt  (  qu'on  hrule)  resolves  itself  (se)  into  (en)  ashes 
and  smoke.  23.  We  pity  the  unfortunate.  24.  You  paint. 
25.  The  young  girl  feigned  to  be  ill.  26.  Put  out  the  candle  and 
go  to  bed  (aUez  vous  coucher).  27.  The  servant  feared  (de)  to 
displease  his  master  (a  son  maitre).  28.  Chai-les  wrote  his  trans- 
lation last  night  (Jiier  an  soir). 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  177 


XL.    QUARANTIEME    LE9ON 


nmEGULAR  VERBS. -^  FIRST  CLASS   CONTINUED. 

c.  CI8 — 26.   The  vowel  of  the  root  is  changed  into  u,  in  the 
Part,  past  and  in  the  Preterite. ) 

*18.    Lire,  to  read.     P.pr.  lisant.     P.p.  lu. 
Pres.  Je  lis,  tu  lis,  il  lit,  nous  lisons,  vous  lisez,  ils  llsent. 
Pret.  Je  lus,  tu  lus,  U  lut,  nous  lumes,  vous  lutes,  etc. 
Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  lusse. 
Fut.  Je  lirai,  tu  liras,  il  lira,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  dire,  to  elect ;  r^elvre,  to  reelect ;  relirey  to  read  over  again. 

19.  Poire,  to  drink.     P.  pr.  huvant.     P.  p.  hu. 

Pres.  Je  bois,  tu  bois,  il  boit,  nous  bwvons,  vous  bwvez,  ils 
boii'ent. 

Suhj.  Que  je  boire,  que  tu  boives,  qu'il  boive,  que  nous  bw^ions, 
que  vous  bwviez,  qu'ils  boii;ent. 

Imperf.  Je  buvais. 

Pret.  Je  bus,  tu  bus,  il  but,  nous  bumes,  vous  butes,  ils  burent. 

Fut.  Je  boirai,  tu  boiras,  etc. 

Imper.  Bois,  bwvons,  bwvez. 

20.  Croire,  to  believe,  to  think.     P.  pr.  croyant.     P.  p.  cru. 
Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  croyons,  vous  croyez,  ils 

croient. 

Suhj.  Que  je  crole,  que  tu  croies,  qu'il  croie,  que  nous  crqyions, 
que  vous  crqyiez,  qu'ils  croient. 

Pret.  Je  cms,  tu  crus,  il  crut,  nous  criimes,  vous  crutes,  ils 
crurent. 

Fut.  Je  croirai,  etc. 

Faire  accroire  qch.  a  qn.,  to  make  one  believ©. 
,    N.  B.  accroire  is  only  used  in  the  Infinitive. 
12 


178  XL.      QUARANTIEMB  LEgON. 

21.  Crottre,  to  grow.     P.  pr.  croissant.     P.  p.  cru. 

Pres.  Je  crois,  tu  crois,  il  croit,  nous  croi«5ons,  vous  croissez,  ils 
croi^sent. 

Pret.  Je  crus,  tu  crus,  il  crut,  nous  crumes,  etc, 
Fut.  Je  croitrai,  etc. 

Thus :  Accroitre,  to  increase  j  d^croitre,  to  decrease ;  rearoitre,  to  grow 
again. 

22.  Plaire,  to  please.     P.  pr.  plaisant.     P.  p.  plu. 

Pres.  Je  plais,  tu  plais,  il  plait,  nous  plaisons,  vous  plaisez,  ils 
plaisent.     Suhj.  Que  je  plaice,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  plus,  tu  plus,  il  plut,  nous  plumes,  vous  plutes,  ils  plu- 
rent.     Fut.  Je  plairai,  tu  plairas,  etc. 

Thus  :  Se  complaire,  to  delight  in  ... ;  d^plaire,  to  displease.  (S'il  voiuf 
plait  —  if  you  please.) 

23.  Taire,  to  conceal.     P.  pr.  taisant.     P.  p.  tu. 

Pres.  Je  tais,  tu  tais,  il  tait,  nous  taisons,  vous  taisez,  ils  taisent. 
/Subf.  Que  je  taise,  que  tu  taises,  qu'il  taise,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  tus,  tu  tus,  il  tut,  nous  tumes,  vous  tutes,  ils  turent. 
Fut.  Je  tairai. 

Thus  :  Se  taire,  to  be  silent.  Pres.  Je  me  tais,  I  am  silent.  Imper.  Tais-toi, 
taisez-vous.  Pret.  Je  me  tus,  I  was  silent.  Comp.  of  the  Pres.  Je  me  suis  tu, 
I  have  been  silent. 

24.  Paraitre,  to  appear.     P.  pr.  paraissant.     P.  p.  paru. 
Pres.  Je  parais,  tu  parais,  il  parait,  nous  paraissons,  vous  parais- 

5ez,  il  parai^sent.  Suhj.  Que  je  parai^se. 
Pret.  Je  parus,  tu  parus,  il  parut,  etc. 
Fut.  Je  paraitrai. 

Thus :  Apparaitre,  to  appear ;  comparaitre,  to  appear  before  the  judge ; 
disparaitre,  to  disappear ;  reparaitre,  to  reappear. 

25.  Paitre,  to  graze.     P.  pr.  paissant. 
Like  paraitre,  but  no  Pret. 

Thus :  Repaitre,  to  feed ;  with  the  Pret.  Je  repus.    Part.  repu. 

26.  Connaitre,*  to  know.     P.  pr,  connaissant.     P.  p.  connu. 

*  Connattre  ia  used  in  connection  with  knowledge  obtained  through  one  of  the 
five  senses,  —  savoir  in  other  cases. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  179 

Pres.  Je  connais,  tu  connais,  il  connait,  nous  connaissons,  vous 
connabsez,  etc, 

Pret.  Je  connus.     Put.  Je  connaitrai. 

Thus  :  M^connaitre,  to  mistake,  not  to  acknowledge ;  reconnoitre,  to  recog- 
nize, to  know  again,  to  acknowledge. 

VOCABULARY. 

La  conduite,  the  conduct.  le  jour,  the  daylight. 

triste,  sad.  sombre,  dark. 

le  traitement,  the  treatment.  impossible,  impossible. 


THEME  40. 

1.  What  are  you  reading  there?  2.  Why  did  you  read  my  let- 
ter? 3.  I  have  not  read  it,  and  I  shall  not  read  it.  4.  Head  over 
again  your  lesson.  5.  Dost  thou  drink  water  ?  6.  No,  1  drink 
"wine  and  water.  7.  When  you  are  thirsty,  what  do  you  drink? 
8.  We  drink  fresh  water.  9.  Do  you  believe  that ?  10.  No,  I  do 
not  believe  it.  11.  I  thought  (that)  you  had  written  your  exercise, 
but  I  see  (je  vois)  that  I  am  mistaken.  .12.  She  gi'ows  every  day. 
13.  These  trees  have  grown  T2i^\A\j  (rapidement) .  14.  He  did 
not  believe  what  I  said.  15.  I  (have)  thought  that  we  would  be 
here  before  six  o'clock.  16.  The  young  gentleman  pleased  by  his 
conduct.  17.  Be  silent,  Frederick.  18.  Tell  (to)  your  sister,  if 
you  please,  to  bring  me  her  French  grammar.  19.  Do  you  know  my 
brother?  20.  No,  I  do  not  know  him.  21.  You  appear  sad,  what 
is  the  matter  with  you  {qu^ avez-vous)  ?  22.  Such  a  treatment 
(has)  appeared  to  me  very  cruel.  23.  The  daylight  has  disap- 
peared. 


1 80  XLI.      QUABANTE  ET  tJNIEME   LEgON. 

XLI.    QUARANTE   ET   UNlfiME    LE9ON 


IRREGULAK  VERBS.  — FIRST  CLASS   CONTIISTJEI). 

27.  Fcdre,  to  do,  to  make.     P.  pr.  fai^ant.*  P.  p.  fait. 
Pres.  Je  fais,  tu  fais,  il  fait,  nous  faisons,  vous  faites,  ils  font. 
Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  fasse,  que  tu  fasses,  qu'il  fosse,  que  nous 

fassions,  que  vous  fassiez,  qu'ils  fassent. 

Imperf  Je  -faisais  (fesais) ,  tu  faisais,  il  faisait,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  fis,  tu  fis,  il  fit,  nous  fimes,  vous  files,  ils  firent. 

Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  fisse,  que  tu  fisses,  qu'il  fit,  que  nous  fis- 
sions, que  vous  fissiez,  qu'ils  fissent. 

Fut.  Je  ferai,  tu.  feras,  etc. 

Imper.  Fais,  fm'sons,  faites. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  fairs,  viz. :  d^faire,  to 
undo,  to  loosen  ;  contrefaire,  to  counterfeit;  rcfaire,  to  do  again;  sattsfaire, 
to  satisfy ;  surfaire,  to  exact,  ask  too  much. 

28.  Mettre,  to  put.     P.  pr.  mettant.     P.  p.  mis. 

Pres.  Je  mets,  tu  mets,  il  met,  nous  mettons,  vous  mettez,  ils 
mettent.     Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  mette. 
Imperf.  Je  mettais. 

Pret.  Je  mis,  tu  mis,  il  mit,  nous  mimes,  vous  mites,  ils  mirent. 
Imperf  Suhj.  Que  je  misse,  que  tu  misses,  qu'il  mit,  etc. 
Put.  Je  mettrai,  tu  mettras,  etc. 

Thus :  Admettre,  to  admit ;  commettre,  to  commit ;  demettre,  to  turn  out ; 
omettre,  to  omit ;  patnettre,  to  permit,  to  allow  ;  promettre,  to  promise ;  com- 
promettre,  to  compromise,  to  expose ;  remettre,  to  put  again,  to  replace,  to 
hand  over ;  soumettre,  to  submit ;  transmettre,  to  transmit,  to  send. 

Se  mettre  a  signifies  to  begin,  as  :  U enfant  se  mit  a  pleurer,  the  child  began 
crj'ing. 

29.  Prendre,  to  take.     P.  pr.  prenant.     P.  p.  pm. 
♦For  the  pronunciation  of  faisant&rxd  its  derivatives  see  p.  18. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  181 

Pres.  Je  prends,  tu  prends,  il  prend,  nous  prewons,  vous  prewez, 
ils  prewnent.  Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  pre?iwe,  que  tu  prenwes,  qu'il 
prewTie,  que   nous   prewions,  que   vous    premez,  qu'ils   prewnent. 

Imperf.  Je  prewais. 

Pret.  Je  pris,  tu  pris,  il  prit,  nous  primes,  vous  prites,  ils  pri- 
rent.     Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  prisse. 

Fut.  Je  prendrai.     Imper.  Prends,  prewons,  prewez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner  the  compounds  of  •prendre:  Apprendre,  to 
learn ;  de'sapprendre,  to  unlearn ;  rapprendre,  to  learn  over  again ;  compren- 
dre,  to  understand ;  entreprendre,  to  undertake ;  m€prendre,  to  mistake ;  re- 
prendre,  to  take  again,  to  reply,  to  chide-;  surprendre,  to  surprise. 

30.  N'attre*  to  be  born.     P.  pr.  naissant.     P.  p.  ne. 

Pres.  Je  nais,  tu  nais,  il  nait,  nous  nai«sons,  vous  naissez,  ils 
nais^ent.     Imperf.  Je  naissais. 

Pret.  Je  naquis  (I  was  bom),  tu  naquisj  il  naquit,  nous  naquu 
mes,  vous  naquites,  ils  naquirent, 

Fut.  Je  naitrai,  tu  naitras,  etc. 

Thus  also :  Renaitre,  to  be  bom  again. 

Remark.  When  the  person  used  as  subject  of  the  verb  is  living,  the 
present  instead  of  the  past  of  the  auxiliary  is  used  with  the  past  participle. 
Ex. :  Mon  pere  est  n€  en  Angleterre,  My  father  (still  living)  was  born  in 
England. 

31.  Vivre,  to  live.     P.  pr.  vivant.     P.  p.  vecu. 

Pres.  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vivous,  vous  vivez,  ils  vivent. 
Suhj.  Que  je  vive ;  hence  the  expressions :  Vive  !  pi.  vivent !  long 
live  ! 

Imper.  Vis,  vivons,  vivez.     Imperf.  Je  vivais. 

Pret.  Je  vecus,  tu  vecus,  il  vecut,  nous  vecumes,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  vivrai. 

Thus  also :  Survivre  {a  qn.),  to  survive;  revivre,  to  live  again. 

*  Verbs  marked  thus  *  take  etre  for  an  auxiliary,  instead  of  <woir. 


182  XLI.      QUAE  ANTE   ET   UNIEME 'LEgON. 

VOCABULARY. 

L*apres-midi,  f.  the  afternoon.  une  ligne,  a  line. 

le  ruban,  the  ribbon.  un  compagnon  de  voyage,  a  fellow- 

une  fois,  once.  traveller. 

paien,  pagan.  .  la  decision,  the  decision. 

desormais,  henceforward.  I'abondance,  f.  abundance. 

6b€issant,  obedient. 

THEME   41. 

1.  What  are  you  doing  there?  2.  I  am  writing  my  exercise. 
3,  Have  you  written  it?  4.  Yes,  I  have  written  it.  5.  Charles 
will  write  it  this  afternoon.  6.  These  pupils  make  a  great  many 
mistakes  in  their  exercises,  7.  Put  this  book  on  the  table.  8. 
Where  have  you  put  your  penknife  ?  9.  I  have  put  it  in  my  drawer 
(tiroir,  m.).  10.  Did  your  father  permit  you  to  go  to  the  theatre? 
11.  Yes,  he  has  allowed  it.  12.  He  allows  me  to  go  there 
{d'y  alter')  once  a  (^par)  week.  13.  The  servant  promised  hence- 
forward to  be  faithful  and  obedient.  14.  All  the  children  began  to 
cry.  15.  I  take  medicine.  16.  He  takes  cofFoe.  17.  We  take 
tea.  18.  The  children  take  milk.  19.  I  took  a  pen  and  wrote  a 
few  lines  to  my  father.  20.  Who  has  taken  my  pencil?  21.  I 
have  not  taken  it.  22.  Take  mine.  23.  Do  not  take  this  chair ; 
it  is  broken  (cassee).  24.  Do  you  understand  what  I  say?  25. 
I  understand  every  word.  •  26.  I  should  undertake  that  journey,  if 
I  had  a  fellow-traveller.  27.  We  submit  ourselves  to  your  decision. 
28.  Formerly  we  lived  in  the  country,  but  for  (^depuis)  several 
years  we  have  lived  (^Pres.  tense)  in  Geneva  (^Geneve).  29.  Many 
rich  people  live  in  abundance. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  183 


XLII.    QUARANTE-DEUXIEME    LE9ON, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — SECOND   CLASS. 

(32  —  41.     Verbs  ending  in  ir,  having  the  flexions  of  the  Third 
Conjugation.) 

32.  Fuir,  to  shun,  to  flee.     P.  pr.  fuyant.     P.  p.  fm. 

Pres.  Je  fuis,  tu  fuis,  ii  fuit,  nous  fuyons,  vous  fujez,  lis  fuient. 
Irrvperf.  Je  fuyais. 
Pret.  Je  fuis.     Put.  Je  fuirai. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  S'enfuir,  to  run  away.    Pres.  Je  w*en- 
fuis.     Comp.  of  the  Pres.  Je  me  mis  enfui,  I  have  run  awaj. 

33.  Vetir,  to  clothe.     P.  pr.  vetant.     P.  p.  vetw. 
Pres.  Je  vets,  tu  vets,  il  vet,  nous  vetons,  etc. 
Pret.  Je  vetis.     Fut.  Je  vetirai. 

Thus  also :  D^vetir,  to  divest ;  revetir,  to  invest. 

34.  Servir  (qa.),  to  serve,  to  help.     P.  pr.  servant.     P.  p. 
gervi. 

Pres.  Je  sers,  tu  sers,  il  sert,  nous  servons,  vous  servez,  ils  sei> 
vent.     Suhj.  Que  je  serve. 

Pret.  Je  servis.     Fut.  Je  servirai. 

Thus  also :  Desservir,  to  clear  the  table ;  se  servir  de,  to  make  use  of,  to 
use. 

35.  Dormir,  to  sleep.     P.  pr.  dormant.     P.  p.  dormi. 

Pres.  Je  dors,  tu  dors,  il  dort,  nous  dormons,  vous  dormez,  ils 
dorment.     Suhj.  Que  je  dorme. 
Pret.  Je  dermis,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus  :  Endormir,  to  lull  asleep ;  s'endormir,  to  fall  asleep ;  se  rendormir, 
to  fall  asleep  again. 

36.  Partir,  to  set  out,  to  leave.     P.  pr.  partant.     P.  p.  parti. 
Pres.  Je  pars,  tu  pars,  il  part,  nous  partons,  etc.,  like  servir. 
Thus :  Repartir,  to  set  off  again,  to  reply.    Not  to  be  confounded  with 

r€partir,  to  distribute,  which  is  regular. 


184  XLII.      QUARANTE-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

37.  Mentir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  mentant.     P.  p.  menti, 

Pres.  Je  mens,  tu  mens,  il  ment,  nous  mentons,  etc.,  like  servir 
Thus  also  :  D^nientir,  to  give  tho  lie. 

38.  Sejitir,  to  feci,  to  ^nell.     P.  pr.  sentant.     P.  p.  senti.. 
Pres.  Je  se?is,  tu  se7is,  il  5ew^,  nous  scntons,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus  :    Consentir,  to  consent ;  pressentir,  to  foresee ;  rsssentir,  to  feel. 

39.  aSc  repeniir  de  qch.,  to  repent.  P.  j9r.  se  repentant.  P.p. 
repenti. 

-  Pres.  Je  me  repens,  I  repent,  etc.,  like  sentir. 

40.  Sortir,  to  go  out.     P.  pr.  sortant.     P.  j9.  sorti. 
Pres.  Je  sor^,  tu  sors,  il  sort,  etc.,  like  servir. 

Thus :  Ressortir,  to  go  out  again.  Ressortir,  to  resort,  and  cissortir,  to 
assort,  are  regularly  conjugated  like  j^niV. 

41.  Courir,  to  run.     P.  j^r.  courant.     P.  p.  courw. 

Pres.  Je  cours,  tu  cours,  il  court,  nous  courons,  vous  courez,  ils 
courent.     Suhj.  Que  je  coure. 

Pret.  Je  qomtus,  tu  courus,  il  courut,  nous  courumes,  vous  cou- 
rutes,  ils  counirent. 

Fut.  Je  courrai,  tu  courras,  il  courra,  nous  courrons,  vous  cour- 
rez,  ils  courront.     Imper.  Cours,  courons,  courez. 

Thus :  Accourir,  to  run  to ;  concourir,  to  compete ;  discounr,  to  dis- 
course ;  encourir,  to  incur  ;  parcourir,  to  run  over  ;  recourir,  to  have  re- 
course ;  secourir,  to  relieve,  to  assist. 

42.  CueilUr,  to  gather.     P.  pr.  cueillant.     P.  p.  cueilli. 
Pres.  Je  cueillc,  tu  cueilles,  il  cueille,  nous  cueillons,  vous  cueil- 

lez,  ils  cueillent.     Suhj.  Que  je  cueille. 

Pret.  Je  cuoillis.     Imper.  Cueille,.  cueillons,  cueillez. 

Fut.  Je  cueillerai. 

Thus  :  AccueiUir,  to  receive  ;  recueillir,  to  gather. 

43.  Offrir,  to  offer.     P.  pr.  offrant.     P.  p.  offert. 
Pres.  J'offre,  tu  oSves,  il  offre,  nous  offrons,  etc. 

Pret.  J'offi'is.     Imper.  Offre,  ofirons,  offi-ez.     Fut.  J'ofirirai. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS.  185 

44.  Souffrir,  to  suffer.     P.  pr.  souffrant.     P.  p.  souffert, 
Pres.  Je  souffre,  tu  souffres,  etc.,. like  offrir. 

45.  Ouvrir,  to  open.     P.  pr.  ouvrant.     P.  p.  ouvert. 
Pres.  J'ouvre,  etc.,  like  offrir. 

Thus  :   Rouvrir,  to  open  again  ;   entr'ouvnr,  to  open  a  little. 

46.  Couvrir,  to  cover.     P.  pr.  couvrant.     P.  p.  convert. 
Thus :  D€couvrir,  to  discover ;  recouvrir,  to  cover  over. 

47.  TressailUr,  to  start,  to  tremble.  P.  pr.  tressaillant.  P. 
p.  tressailli. 

Pres.  Je  tressaille,  tu  tressailles,  il  tressaille,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  tressaillis,  etc. 

Fut.  Je  tressaillerai  and  je  tressaillirai. 

Thus  :   Assaillir,  to  assault.       ^ 

48.  SailUr,  to  put  out,  project.     P.  pr.  saillant.     P.  p.  sailli. 
Pres.  third  person,  il  saille,  pi.  ils  saillent.     Like  tressaillir / 

but  it  is  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  and  plural. 
Saillir  (=ja{ll{r),  to  gush,  is  regular. 

VOCABULARY.  ^ 

Du  mouton,  mutton.  fatigu^,  tired. 

la  voiture,  the  coach.  la  violette,  the  violet. 

m^priser,  to  despise.  la  livre,  the  pound". 

THEME  42. 

1.  The  enemy  flee.  2.  Let  us  shun  these  places.  3.  "^e  clothe 
the  poor.  4.  The  young  girl  was  clad  in  black.  5.  I  cannot  meet 
hun ;  he  shuns  me.  6.  Avoid  bad  company.  7.  Your  friend,  Mr. 
A.,  does  not  serve  me  well.  8.  I  made  use  of  your  coach.  9. 
Tell  me  what  he  has  done  to  you  ;  but,  above  all  {surtout) ,  do  not 
lie.  10.  He  who  lies  deserves  to  be  despised.  11.  I  go  out  every 
day.  12.  D,o  not  go  out,  Robert ;  it  is  too  cold.  13.  If  I  were 
as  ill  as  you,  I  would  not  go  out  of  my  room.  14.  I  feel  the  cold. 
15.  Do  not  make  any  (^de)  noise,  for  my  mother  is  asleep  (sleeps). 
IG.  I-hope  she  will  sleep  better io-ijigh^  (^cette  nuit).     17.  If  I  do 


186  XLIII.      QUARANTE-TEOISIEME   LEgON. 

not  walk  a  little,  I  shall  fall  asleep.  18.  Do  you  not  repent  of 
what  {de  ce  que)  you  have  done?  19.  I  always  repent  when  I 
have  done  wrong  (maT).  20.  Do  not  run  so  fast  (vite),  you  will 
be  tired.  21.  They  always  run  when  they  go  to  see  then:  aunt. 
22.  I  ran  faster  than  you.  23.  If  she  is  unhappy,  I  shall  relieve 
her.  24.  For  whom  are  you  gathering  these  violets?  25.  I  gather 
them  for  my  mother.  26.  The  young  lady  has  been  received  with 
the  greatest  kindness.  27.  I  always  offer  him  my  services.  28. 
He  offered  me  a  hundred  pounds  for  my  garden.  29.  What  are 
you  doing  there  ?     30.  I  cover  the  plants  with  (de)  snow. 


XLIII.   QUARANTE-TROISIEME   LE9ON. 


IRREaULAR  VERBS.  — THIRD   CLASS. 

(49  — 53.   Verbs  in  ir  changing  their  radical  vowel  and  taking  the  flexions 
of  the  third  Conjugation.) 

49.  Mourir*  to  die.     P.  pr.  mourant.     P.  p.  mort. 

Pres.  Je  meurs,  tu  meurs,  il  meurt,  nous  mourons,  vous  mourez, 
ils  meurent.  Suhj.  Que  je  meure,  que  tu  meures,  qu'il  meure,  que 
nous  mourions,  que  vous  mouriez,  qu'ils  meurent. 

Imper.  Meurs,  mourons,  mourez. 

Pret.  Je  mourns,  tu  mourns,  il  mourut,  nous  mourumes,  vous 
mourutes,  ils  moururent. 

Fut.  Je  mourrai,  tu  mourras,  il  mourra,  etc. 

Thus  also :  Se  mourir,  to  be  near  dying,  to  be  fainting.  Pres.  Je  me 
meurs,  etc. 

50.  BouilUr,  to  boil,  neut.  v.    P.  pr.  bouillant.    P.  p.  bouilli. 
Pres.  Je  bous,  tu  hous,  il  hout,  nous  bouillons,  vous  bouillez,  ils 

bouillent.  •  Suhj.  Que  je  bouille. 


IRREGUI.AR   VERBS.  187 

'  Pret.  Je  bouillis. 
Fut.  Je  bouilk'rai. 

To  boil,  as  an  active  verb,  is  rendered  faire  houillir,  as  :  To  boil  potatoes, 
faire  houiUir  des  pomm.es  de  terre. 

51.  Venir*  to  come.     P.  pr.  venant.     P.  p.  yenu. 

Pres.  Je  viens,  tu  v^ens,  il  v^ent,  nous  venons,  vous  venez,  ils 
v^ennent.  Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  v^enne,  que  tu  v^ennes,  qu'il  v*enne, 
que  nous  vcnions,  que  vous  veniez,  qu'ils  viennent.  Imperf.  Je 
venais. 

Pret.  Je  vins,  tu  vins,  il  vmt,  nous  vinmes,  vous  vmtes,  ils  vm- 
rent.  Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  vinsse,  que  tu  vinsses,  qu'il  vmt,  que 
nous  vinssions,  etc. 

Put.  Je  viendrai,  tu  vtendras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  vtendrais. 

Imper.  Viens,  venons,  venez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner:  Convenir,  to  agree,  to  suit ;  devenir*  to 
become  ;  intervenir*  to  intervene ;  parvenir*  to  attain,  to  reach ;  pr^venir, 
to  be  beforehand  with,  to  inform  ;  provenir*  to  arise,  spring  from,  to  pro- 
ceed ;  se  souvenir y  to  remember ;  survenir*  to  happen ;  subvenir,  to  relieve ; 
revenir*  to  come  back  (again). 

52.  Tenir,  to  hold.     P.  pr.  tenant.     P.  p.  tenw. 
This  verb  is  conjugated  like  venir,  as  : 

Pres.  Je  tiens,  tu  t^ens,  il  tient,  nous  tenons,  vous  tenez,  ils  iien- 
nent.     Suhj.  Que  je  tienne. 

Pret.  Je  tins,  tu  tins,  il  tint,  nous  ttmnes,  vous  tzntes,  ils  tin- 
rent.     Fut.  Je  tiendrai. 

Imper.  Tiens,  tenons,  tenez. 

Thus  also :  Appartenir,  to  belong ;  s'abstenir,  to  abstain ;  contemr,  to  con- 
tain ;  ddenir,  to  detain;  entretenir,  to  keep  up ;  rnaintenir,  to  maintain ;  o6- 
tenir,  to  obtain ;  retenir,  to  retain ;  soutenir,  to  sustain,  uphold,  support. 

53.  Acquerir,  to  acquire.     P.  pr.  acquerant.     P.  p.  acqms. 
Pres.  J^acquiers,  tu  acqmers,  il  acqmert,  nous  acquerons,  vous 

acquerez,  ils  acqmerent.  Pres.  Suhj.  Que  j'acqm'ere,  que  tu  ac- 
quteres,  qu'il  acquiere,  que  nous  acqu^rions,  que  vous  acqueriez, 
qu'ils  acqmerent. 


188  XLin.     QUARANTE-THOISIEME  LEgON. 

Pret.  J'acquis,  tu  acqu^s,  il  acqu^V,  nous  acqumcs,  vous  acquJ^e^, 
ils  acquiVen^.     J^p/.  /S'zfJ;'.  Que  j'acquisse. 

Fut.  J^acquerrai,  tu  acquerras,  il  acquerra,  etc. 

Imper.  Acqmers,  acquerons,  acquerez. 

Conjugate  in  the  same  manner :  Conquerir,  to  conquer ;  reconqw^rir,  to 
conquer  again ;  requerir,  to  request,  and  s'enquenr,  to  inquire.  Qu^rir,  to 
seek,  is  used,  in  familiar  conversation,  after  aller,  venir,  envoyer,  as  :  allez 
qu€rir,  go  and  seek. 

VOCABULARY. 

Le  chagrin,  grief.  Vassiduite,  f.  assiduity. 

maladie,  f.  disease,  illness.  des  connaissances,  f.  knowledge. 

douloureux,  -se,  painful.  la  chaleur,  the  heat. 

continuer,  to  continue.  la  partie,  the  part. 

la  parole,  the  word. 

THEME  43. 

1.  Your  friend  is  dying.  2.  Mrs.  A.  died  of  (c?e)  grief.  3. 
The  old  general  died  at  Paris  of  a  very  painful  disease.  4.  Take 
the  water  off  the  fire  ;  it  boils.  5.  Boil  that  meat  again,  it  has  not 
boiled  long  enough.  6.  Miss  Emily  is  coming.  7.  Dost  thou 
come  ?  8.  Yes,  I  come.  9.  Why  do  you  not  come  when  I  call 
you?  10.  He  came  to  see  me  every  morning.  11.  Come  back 
soon.  12.  I  shall  be  (come)  back  in  an  hour.  13.  Mrs.  B.  would 
have  come  to  us  if  it  had  not  rained  (plu).  14.  I  hope  you  will 
keep  your  word  and  (will)  come  to-morrow.  15.  I  maintain,  and 
will  always  maintain,  that  you  will  not  be  happy  without  virtue.  16. 
I  agree  that  Miss  L.  is  the  prettiest  of  the  family ;  but  she  is  so 
proud,  that  I  know  {sais)  not  what  will  become  of  her  (ce  qu'elle 
.  .  .).  17.  My  uncle  will  not  come  back  to-day.  18.  Mr.  S.  will 
not  obtain  that  situation  (^ place).  19.  If  you  study  much,  you  will 
acquire  knowledge.  20.  I  do  not  think  (that)  this  color  suits  (to) 
your  sister.  21.  That  hat  would  suit  you  very  well,  if  you  were  a 
little  taller.  22.  Alexander  the  Great  conquered  the  greatest  part 
of  Asia.     23.  Your  uncle  has  acquired  a  great  name  in  America. 

24.  The  young  man  did  not  survive  (outlive)  (to)  that  misfortune. 

25.  You  will  become  a  great  man,  if  you  continue  to  study  with  the 
same  assiduity. 


I 


V  IRREGULAR  VERBS.  189 

XLIY.   QUARANTE-QUATRlfeME  LE9ON. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS.  — THIRD    CLASS    CONTINUED. 

(54  —  66.    Verbs  in -wr.     Contraction  of  the  root  and  the  terminations, 
Part,  past  and  Pret.  in  m.) 

64.    Devoir,  to  owe,  (ought  to).     P.  pr.  devant.     P.  p.  du. 

Pres.  Je  dois*  tu  dots,  il  doit,  nous  devons,  vous  devez,  lis 
doivent.     Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  doive. 

Pret.  Je  dus,  tu  dus,  il  dut,  nous  diimes,  vous  dutes,  ils  durent. 
Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  dusse. 

Put.  Je  devrai,  tu  devras,  etc.     Cond.  Je  devrais.* 

Thus  also :  redevoir. 

55.  Recevoir,  to  receive.     P.  pr.  recevant.     P.  p.  regu. 
Pres.  Je  regois,  tu  regois,  il  regoit,  nous  recevons,  vous  recevez, 

ils  re^ozVent. 

Pret.  Je  re^ws,  tu  xq(^us,  il  iQ(^ut,  nous  rcQMwes,  vous  iQ^uteSy 
ils  Te<;uren(. 

Put.  Je  recevrai,  tu  recevras,  etc. 

Thus  also  :  Decevoir,  to  deceive ;  apercevotr,  to  perceive ;  concevoir,  to  con- 
ceive ;  percevoir,  to  collect. 

56.  Dechoir,  to  fall,  to  decay.     (No  P.  pr.)     P.  p.  dechu. 
Pres.  Je  dechois,  tu  dechois,  il  dcchoit,  nous  dccho^ons,  vous 

dechoyez,  ils  dechoient.     Subj.  Que  je  dechoie. 

Pret.  Je  dechus,  tu  d^chus,  il  d^chut,  nous  dechiimes,  vous  d^- 
chutes,  ils  deehurent. 

Put.  Je  decherrai,  tu  decherras,  ils  decherra,  nous  dech<?rrow5, 
vous  decherre^;,  ils  decherrow^. 

Thus  :  Echoir,  to  fall  to,  to  expire ;  P.  pr.  dch^ant ;  P.  p.  €chu.  It  is  now 
only  used  in  the  third  pcrs.  sing.:  il  or  -die  ^shoit,  il  ^chut,  etc.  Choir  is  only- 
used  in  the  Infinitive  mood. 

*  Je  dois,  followed  by  a  verb,  corresponds  to  the  English ;  Jam  to,  J  must.  Je 
devrais,  /  ought  to,  I  should. 


190  XLV.      QUARANTE-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

57.  Faloir,  to  be  necessary,  is  an  impersonal  verb,  the  conjuga- 
tion of  which  has  been  given  p.  147. 

Pres.  II  faut.     Imperf.  II  fallait,  etc. 

68.    Mouvoir,io  moYQ.     P.  jor.  mouvant.    P.  p.  mu. 

Pres.  Je  meus,  tu  mens,  il  meut,  nous  mouvons,  vous  mouvez, 
ils  meuvent.  Suhj.  Que  je  mewve,  que  tu  mewves,  qu'il  mewve, 
que  nous  mouvions,  que  vous  mouviez,  qu'ils  mewvent. 

Pret.  Je  mus,  tu  mus,  il  mut,  nous  mumes,  vous  mutes,  ils 
murent. 

Put.  Je  mouvrai. 

Thus  also :  Emouvoir,  to  move,  to  excite,  stir  up ;  s^^mouvoir,  to  be  moved, 
affected. 

59.  Pleuvoir,  to  rum  (impers.').     P.^r.  pleuvant.     P.  p.  plu. 
Pres.  II  pleut.     Suhj.  Qu'il  pleuve.     Imperf.  II  pleuvait. 
Pret.  II  plut.     Suhj.  Imperf.  Qu'il  plut. 

Put.  II  pleuvra. 

60.  Pourvoir^  to  provide.    P.  pr.  pourvoyant.    P.  p.  pounm. 
Pres.  Je  pourvois,  tu  pourvois,  il  pourvoit,  nous  pourvoyons,  vous 

pourvoyez,  ils  pourvoient. 

Pret.  Je  pourvus.     Put.  Je  pourvoirai. 

Thus  :  Pre'voir,  to  foresee,  which  makes  in  the  Pret.  je  previa. 

61.  Poui'oir,  to  he  aMe.     P.jor.  pouvant.     P.  p.  pu. 

Pres.  Jepeux  {or  }e  puis),  tu.  peux,  il  pent,  nous  pouvons,  vous 
pouvez,  ils  peuvent.  Pres.  Suhj.  Que  je  puisse,  que  tu  puisses, 
qu'il  puisse,  que  nous  puissions,  que  vous  puissiez,  qu'ils  puissent. 

Impf.  Je  pouvais. 

Pret.  Je  pus,  tu  pus,  il  put,  nous  pumes,  vous  putes,  ils  purent. 

Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  je  pusse. 

Put.  Je  pourrai,  tu  pourras,  il  pourra,  nous  pourrons,  vous 
pourrez,  ils  pourront.      Cond.  Je  pourrais. 

Note.  May,  expressing  a  wish,  is  rendered  by  the  Present  tense  of  the 
Subjunctive.     Ex.:  Puisse-t-il  etre  keureux,  may  he  be  happy ! 

*  Like  f>5  —  Voir,  except  the  Pret.  and  Fut. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  191 

.  62.    Savoir,  to  know.     P.  pr.  sacAant.     P.  p.  su. 

Pres.  Je  sm's,  tu  sais,  il  sait,  nous  savons,  vous  savez,  ils  savent. 
Subj.  Que  je  sache,  que  tu  sac^es,  qu'il  snche,  que  nous  sac//ions, 
que  vous  sacAiez,  qu'ils  sacAent.     Imperf.  Je  savais,  tu  savais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  sus,  tu  sus,  il  sut,  nous  sumes,  vous  sutes,  ils  surent. 

Put.  Je  sawrai,  tu  sawras,  etc. 

Imper.  Sache,  sachons,  sachez. 

"Wlien  the  woi'd  can  means  to  know  how,  it  is  rendered  in  French  by  sa?w, 
instead  of  poitvoir.  Ex.:  Saves-vous  parler  frangais  ?  Can  you  speak 
French  ? 

Note.  There  is  also  an  old  form  pf  the  Pros.  Ind.  Je  sache.  The  Cond. 
Je  ne  saurais  (without  pas)  signifies,  I  cannot,  as  :  Je  ne  saurais  vous  diref 
I  cannot  tell  you. 

63.  Valoir,  to  be  worth.     P.  pr.  valant.     P.  p.  valu. 

Pres.  Je  vaux,  tu  vaux,  il  vaut,  nous  valons,  vous  valez,  ils  va- 
lent.  Sul^.  Que  je  vaille,  que  tu  vailles,  qu'il  vaille,  que  nous 
valions,  que  vous  valiez,  qu'ils  vaillent: 

Imperf.  Je  valais. 

Pret.  Je  valus,  tu  valus,  il  valut,  nous  valumes,  etc. 

Put.  Je  vaudrai,  tu  vaudras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  vaudrais. 

Observe  the  expression  :  II  vant  mieux,  it  is  better,  etc.  Conjugate  in  the 
§ame  manner:  prevaloir,  to  prevail;  but  it  makes  the  Subj.  pres.:  Que  je 
private  (not  pr^vaille),  que  tu  pr^cales,  qu'il  private,  que  tious  pr€valions,  que 
vous  prevaliez,  qu'ils  prevalent. 

64.  Vouloir,  to  be  willing.     P.  pr.  voulant.    P.  p.  voulu. 
Pres.  Je  veux,  tu  veux,  il  veut,  nous  voulons,  vous  voulez,  ils 

veulent.  Subj.  Que  je  veuille,  que  tu  veuilles,  qu'il  veuille,  que 
nous  voulions,  que  vous  vouliez,  qu'ils  veuillent.  Imper.  (  Veuille), 
veuiUez,  be  so  kind  as. 

Imperf.  Je  voulais. 

Pret.  Je  voulus,  tu  voulus,  il  voulut,  nous  voulumes,  etc. 

Put.  Je  voudrai,  tu  voudras,  etc. 

Cond.  Je  voudrais,  I  should  like  to. 


192  XLir.      QUARANTE'^UATRTEME   LE^ON. 

The  first  person,  je  vmx,  is  mostly  used  to  imply  authority,  command. 
Je  desire  is  substituted  as  a  more  polite  expression  for  the  affinnative.  Jo 
nc  veux  pas,  is  used,  however,  for  the  neyatice. 

G5.     Voir,  to  see.     P.  pr.  voyant.     P.  p.  vu, 

Pres.  Je  vols,  tu  vois,  il  voit,  nous  voyons,  vous  voyez,  ils  voient. 

Jnipcrf.  Jo  voyais,  tu  voyais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  vis,  tu  vis,  il  vit,  nous  vimes,  vous  vites,  etc. 

Put.  Je  verrai,  tu  verras,  il  verra,  etc. 

Imper.  Vois,  voyons,  voyez. 

Thus  :  Eerolr,  to  see  again ;  entrevolr,  to  have  a  glimpse  of.  For  pour- 
voir  and  prtfvoir  sec  No.  oO.  Alter  voir  and  venir  voir  cjn.  are  rendered  :  to 
call  upon  a  person. 

66.    Sasseoir,  to  sit  do\^n.     P.  pr.  s'asscyant.     P.  p.  assis. 

Pres.  Je  m'assieds,  tu  t'assieds,  il  s'assicd,  nous  nous  asseyons, 
vous  vous  asseyez,  ils  s^asseient.    Or,  je  m'assois,  etc. 

Jmperf.  Je  m'asseyais.     Or,  je  m'assoyais,  etc. 

Pret.  Je  m'assis,  tu  t'assis,  il  s'assit,  nous  nous  assimes,  vous 
vous  assites,  ils  s'assirent. 

Put.  Je  massicrai,  tu  Vassieras,  il  s'assieray  etc.  Or,  je  m'as- 
mierai,  tu  t'asse/eras,  il  s'asse/era,  etc. 

Imper.  Assze^s-toi,  assc^owsrnous,  asseye2;-vous. 

VOCABULARY. 

Uri  panier,  a  basket.  ejoa/s,  thick. 

le  danger,  the  danger.  Vherhe,  f.  the  grass. 

/e  ressort,  the  spring.  humide,  damp. 

le  beau-frere,  the  brothcr-in-lavr.  Ze  bruit,  la  nouvelle,  the  report. 

r€p€ter,  to  repeat.  arreter,  to  stop. 

coupable,  criminal.  I'adresse,  f.  the  direction. 

/a  ^r/ace,  the  looking-glass. 

THEME  44. 

1.  I  am  to  copy  my  exercise.  2.  We  must  set  out.  3.  You 
ought  to  come  at  two  o'clock.  4.  I  receive  a  letter  every  day.  5. 
We  receive  our  money  from  the  banker  (du  banquier).  6.  My 
friend  received  a  basket  filled  with  grapes  (c/e  raisins^.     7.  The 


IREEGULAB  VEPBS.  103 

hunter  perceived  a  bird  on  a  tree.  8.  They  did  not  perceive  the 
danger.  9.  The  spring  which  moves  the  whole  machine  is  very- 
ingenious  (ingenieux).  10.  Does  it  rain?  11.  No,  it  does  not 
rain;  but  it  will  rain  this  evening.  12.  If  men  do  not  provide  for 
it  (^),  God  will  provide  for  it.  13.  Before  he  left  (avant  de  par- 
tir),  he  provided  for  («)  all.  14.  Can  you  come?  15.  I  cannot 
come,  but  my  brother  can  (come).  16,  We  could  see  nothing,  for 
it  was  dark  (il  faisait  nuit).  17.  I  could  do  it  myself,  if  I  had 
time.  18.  3Iay  you  be  happy  !  I  could  do  no  better.  19.  I  know 
that  he  is  your  friend,  but  I  did  not  know  that  he  was  your  brother- 
in-law.  20.  Do  you  know  why  he  has  (is)  not  come?  21.  No,  I 
do  not  know  (it).  22.  When  you  know  {Fut.)  your  lesson,  come 
and  repeat  it  to  me.  23.  These  pens  are  worth  nothing.  24.  It 
is  (vaut)  better  to  be  unfortunate  than  guilty.  25.  Can't  you  see 
that  star?  26.  I  do  not  see  it'.  27.  Sit  down  there  a  minute.  28. 
Wliy  do  not  you  sit  down?  29.  Let  us  sit  upon  the  grass.  30.  I 
would  sit  down  upon  the  grass,  if  it  were  not  so  damp.  31.  Can 
you  speak  French  ?  32.  I  can  read,  but  I  cannot  speak  [it].  33. 
Is  this  report  true?  34.  I  cannot  (Cond.)  tell  (it)  you.  35.  He 
does  not  choose  to  (will  not)  eat.  36.  If  I  chose  (would),  I  should 
tell  you  where  he  lives.  37.  What  would  you  have  me  do  (that  I 
should  do)  {Imperf.  Suhj.)  ?  38.  We  could  have  stopped  him,  if 
we  had  chosen.  39.  I  send  you  herewith  (ci-joint^  the  direction 
of  Mr.  L.  40.  I  have  found  tbe  ring  which  my  cousin  has  lost, 
and  I  shall  send  it  to  her. 
13 


194  XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

XLY.    QUARANTE-CINQUIEME    LE9ON. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  — THIRD  CLASS    CONTINUED. 

67.  Rire,  to  laugh.     P.  pr.  riant.     P.  p.  ri. 
Pres.  Je  ris.     Imperf.  Je  riais. 

Pr^t.  Je  ris,  tu  ris,  il  rit,  etc.     Fut.  Je  rirai. 

68.  Envoyer,  to  send.     P.  pr.  envoyant.     P.  p.  envoy^. 
Pres.  J'envoie.     Imperf.  J'envoyais.     Pret.  J'envoyai. 
Fut.  J^enverrat,  tu  enyerras,  etc.      Cond.  J'enverrais. 

69.  Aller*  to  go.     P.  pr.  allant.     P.  p.  alle. 

Pres.  Je  vais,  tu  vas,  il  va,  nous  allons,  vous  allez,  ils  vont. 
Pres.  Suhf.  Que  yaille,  que  tu  ailles,  qu'il  aille,  que  nous  alliens, 
que  vous  alliez,  qu'ils  aillent. 

Imperf.  J'allais,  tu  allais,  il  allait,  etc. 

Pret.  J'allai,  tu  alias,  il  alia,  nous  allames,  vous  allates,  ils 
allerent. 

Imperf  SuhJ.  Que  j'allasse,  que  tu  allasses,  etc. 

Imper.  Va,  allons,  allez.     Perf  Je  suis  alle,  I  have  gone. 

Fut.  J'irai  {^I shall  go),  tu  iras,  il  ira,  nous  ii-ons,  vous  irez,  ils 
iront.      Cond.  J'irais,  tu  irais,  etc. 

Conjugation  of  S^en  aller,  to  go  away. 

We  give  the  reflective  verb  S'en  aller,  to  go  away,  at  full  length,  because 
its  conjugation  is  rather  difficult  on  account  of  its  two  pronouns.  Observe 
that  en  is  never  separated  from  the  objective  m',  f,  s',  nous,  etc. ;  hence  it 
follows,  that  the  compound  or  Perfect  must  not  be  written :  Je  me  suis  en 
all€,  but  je  m'en  suis  alle,  tu  t'en  es  all€,  etc. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
PRESENT    TENSE. 

Je  m'en  vais,  I  go  away.  nous  nous  en  allons,tre  go  away. 

tu  t'en  vas,  etc.  vous  vous  en  allez,         etc. 

il  s'en  va,  etc.  ils  s'en  vont,  etc. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


195 


Meg.  Je  ne  m'en  vais  pas. 
tu  ne  t'en  vas  pas,  etc. 


M'en  vais-je,<?o  I  go  away%  etc. 
Ne  m'en  vais-je  pas  ?  etc. 


IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'en  allais,  tu  fen  allais.  M'en  allais-je,  did.  I  go  ofway% 


Je  ne  m'en  allais  pas. 


Je  m'en  allai. 

Je  ne  m'en  allai  pas. 

Je  m'en  irai. 

Je  ne  m'en  irai  pas. 

AFFIBMATIVB. 

Va-t'en. 

(qu'il  s'en  aille). 

allons-nous-en. 

allez-vous-en. 

(qu'ils  s'en  aillent). 


Ne  m'en  allais-je  pas  ? 

PEETERITE. 

M'en  allai-je  ? 

Ne  m'en  allai-je  pas  ? 

FUTURE. 

M'en  irai-je  ? 

Ne  m'en  irai-je  pas  ? 


IMPERATIVE. 


NEGATIVE. 


Ne  t'en  va  pas. 
(qu'il  ne  s'en  aille  pas), 
ne  nous  en  allons  pas. 
ne  vous  en  allez  pas. 
(qu'ils  ne  s'en  aillent  pas). 


COMPOUND   OF   THE   PRESENT. 

Je  m'en  suis  alM,  Ihave  gone  away,    nous  nous  en  sommes  all^s. 


tu  t'en  es  all^. 
il  s'en  est  alM. 
elle  s'en  est  all^e. 


vous  vous  en  etes  alle(s). 
ils  s'en  sont  alles. 
elles  s'en  sont  allees. 


NEGATIVELY. 


Je  ne  m'en  suis  pas  all^. 
tu  ne  t'en  es  pas  all^. 
il  ne  s'en  est  pas  all^. 


nous  ne  nous  en  sommes  pas 

alles. 
vous    ne    vous    en    §tes    pas 

all^(s). 
ils  ne  s'en  sont  pas  all^s. 


196 


XLV.      QUARANTE-CINQUIEME   LEgON. 


INTERROGATIVELY. 

M'en  suis-je  alle  ?  ^  nous  en  somraes-nous  alles  ? 

t'en  es-tu  alle?  vous  en  etes-vous  alle(s)  ? 

s'en  est-il  alle  ?  s'en,  sont  ils  alles  ? 

NEGATIVE-INTERROGATIVE. 

Ne  m'en  suis-je  pas  alle  ?  ne  nous  en  sommes-nous  p.  allt^s  ? 

ne  t'en  es-tu  pas  alle  ?  ne  vous  en  etes-vous  pas  alles  ? 

ne  s'en  est-il  pas  alle  ?  ne  s'en  sont-ils  pas  alles  ? 


COMPOUND    OF   THE   IMPERFECT. 

Je  m'en  ^tais  all^.  M'en  etais-je  alle  ? 

Je  ne  m'en  ^tais  pas  alle.  Ne  m'en  etais-je  pas  alle  ? 


Que  je  m'en  aille. 
que  tu  t'en  allies, 
qu'il  s'en  aille. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  allasse. 
que  tu  t'en  allasses. 
qu'il  s'en  allat,  etc. 

S'en  aller. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

que  nous  nous  en  allions. 
que  vous  vous  en  alliez. 
qu'ils  s'en  aillent. 

PERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  sois  alle. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que  je  m'en  fusse  all^. 

INFINITIVE. 

S'en  etre  alle. 


S'en  allant. 


PARTICIPLES. 

S'en  (^tant  alle. 


VOCABULARY. 


Oblige,  obliged. 

Jeudi  dernier,  last  Thursday. 

la  musique,  music. 

le  pavilion,  the  flag. 


sonner,  to  strike. 
la  sanM,  health. 
importuner,  to  importune. 
hisse,  hoisted. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS.  197 

THE3IE   45. 

1.  I  go  to  London.  2.  Thou  goest  to  Paris.  3.  He  goes  to 
Berlin.  4.  My  brother  has  also  gone  to  Berlin.  5  Wliere  are 
you  going?  6.  I  am  going  to  the  play  {an  spectacW).  7.  I  would 
go  with  you,  if  I  had  time.  8.  Why  are  they  going  away  so  soon?' 
9.  They  are  obliged  to  go  away.  10.  Will  not  your  mother  be 
angry  {fdchee),  if  you  go  away  before  her  ?  11.  I  told  her  that  I 
would  go  away  before  her,  and  she  has  permitted  (it  to)  me.  12. 
My  sister  and  I  (we)  went  to  the  concert  last  Thursday.  13.  If 
you  had  gone  (there,  y)  also,  you  would  have  heard  fine  music.  14. 
These  men  went  yesterday  from  house  to  (eri)  house.  15.  At  what 
o'clock  will  you  go  (away)  ?  16.  I  should  have  already  gone,  if  it. 
had  not  rained  so  fast  {fort).  17.  Is  he  really  gone  (away)? 
Yes,  he  went  (has  gone)  away  this  morning.  18.  Let  us  go  (away), 
it  is  going  to  (^7  va)  strike  three  o'clock.  19.  How  is  (yd)  your 
health?  20.  Thank  you,  it  is  not  very  good.  21.  I  wish  (should 
like  that)  the  boy  would  go  (away)  (^Imperf.  Subj.).  22.  I  wish 
they  would  go  away.     23.  Begone  (go  away),  you  importune  me. 


XLYI.     QUARANTE-SIXIEME     LE9ON. 


DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

Verbs  whereof  some  tenses  or  persons  are  wanting  are  defective 
verbs.     They  are  as  follows :  — 

70.  Braire,  to  bray. 

Pres.  II  brait,  ils  braient.     Fut.  II  braira. 
Cond.  II  brairait. 

71.  Bruire,  Uy  xo2lv.     P.  jor.  bruyant. 
Imperf.  II  bruyait,  pi.  ils  bruyaient.      -^ 

72.  Choir,  to  fall.     P.  p.  chu. 


198  XL VI.      QUARANTE-SIXIEME  LEgON. 

73.  Clore,  to  close.     P.  p.  clos. 
Pres.  Je  clos,  tu  clos,  il  clot. 

Fut.  Je  clorai,  tu  cloras,  etc.      Gond.  Je  clorais. 

74.  Eclore*  to  be  hatched.     P.  p.  eclos. 

Pres.  II  eclot,  pi.  ils  eclosent.  Suhj.  Qu'il  eclose,  pi.  qu'ils 
^closent. 

Fut.  H  eclora,  pi.  ils  ^cloront.  Its  compound  tenses  are  formed 
with  etre. 

75.  Faillir,  to  fail.     P.  pr.  (faillant.)     P.  p.  failli. 
Pres.  II  faut. 

Pre^.  Je  faillis,  tu  faillis,  il  faillit,  nous  failUmes,  vous  faillites, 
ils  faillirent. 

Perf.  J'ai  failli,  I  had  nearly. 
Thus  :  D€faillir,  to  faint. 

76.  Ferir  is  used  only  in  the  expression :  Sans  coup  ferir, 
without  striking  a  blow. 

77.  Frire,  to  fry.     P.  pr.  wanting.     P.  p.  frit. 
Pres.  Je  fris,  tu  fris,  il  frit.     Plur,  wanting. 

Fut.  Je  frirai.      Gond.  Je  frirais.     Perf.  J'ai  frit,  etc. 

78.  Gesir,  to  lie.     P.  pr.  gt'sant. 

Pres.  ci-^t,  ^ere  ?ees  ;  pi.  ci-gisent  (used  on  tombstones) .     Fur- 
ther :  nous  gisons,  vous  gisez,  ils  gisent. 
Imperf.  ci-gisait;  pi.  ci-gisaient. 

79.  Issir,  to  be  born,  is  used  only  in  the  P.  p.  issu. 

80.  Oiiir,  to  hear.     P.  p.  oui. 

Pret.  J'ouis,  tu  ouis,  etc.     Imperf.  Suhj.  Que  j'ouisse,  etc. 
Further  the  compound  tenses,  as :  Pm  om,  etc. 

81.  Sourdre,  to  rush  out  of  the  ground,  as  water,  has  only  the 
Infinitive  and  the  Present,  elle  sourd,  elles  sourdent. 

82.  Seoir,  to  fit.     P.  pr.  seant.     P.  p.  sis.. 

Ind.  pres.  II  sied.     Fut.  II  siera.      Gond.  II  sierait. 

83.  Surseoir,  to  put  off.     P.  ^.  sursis. 
Pres.  Je  surseois.     Pret.  Je  sursis. 

Note.  — Most  of  these  verbs  are  not  much  in  use. 


IRREGULAR  AND   DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


199 


AN   ALPHABETICAL    LIST    OF    ALL    THE    FRENCH 
IRREGULAIl    AND    DEFECTIVE    VERBS* 


CONTAINING   THEIR   FIVE   PRIMITIVE    TENSES. 


Infinitive. 
Absoudre 
Acquerir 
Aller 
Assaillir 
S'asseoir 
Atteindre 
Battre,seeL. 


Boire 

Bouillir 

Braire 

Bruire 

Ceindre 


Pres. 
j'absous 
j'acquiers 
je  vais 
j'assaille 
je  m'assieds 
j'atteins 

XXIII.,  Rem.  1, 
je  bois 
je  bous 
il  brait 

Imp.  il  bruyait 


^^uiuure  je  ceins 

Choir,  see  dechoir 
Circoncire 


Clore 

Conclure 

Concevoir 

Conduire 

Confire 

Connaitre 

Coudre 

Courir 

Couvrir 

Craindre 

Croire 

Croitre 

Cueillir 

Cuire 

Dechoir 

Devoir 

Dire 

Dormir 


je  circoncis 
je  clos 
je  conclus 
je  con9ois 
je  conduis 
je  confis 
je  connais 
je  couds 
je  cours 
je  couvre 
je  crains 
je  crois 
je  crois 
je  cueille 
je  cuis 
je  dechois 
je  dois 
je  dis 
je  dors 


Part.  pr. 

absolvant 

acquerant 

allant 

assaillarit 

s'asseyant 

atteignant 

buvant 
bouillant 

bruyant 
ceignant 


concluant 

concevant 

conduisant 

confisant 

connaissant 

cousant 

courant 

couvrant 

craignant 

croyant 

croissant 

cueillant 

cuisant 

devant 
disant 
dormant 


P.p. 

absous,  te 
acquis,  e 
alle,  e 
assailli,  e 
assis,  e 
atteint,  e 

bu,  e 
bouilli,  e 
wanting 


Pret. 
wanting 
j 'acquis 
j'allai 
j'assaillis 
je  m'assis 
j'atteignis 

je  bus 
je  bouillis 
wanting 


ceint,  e        je  ceignis 


circoncis 
clos 

conclu,  e 
con^u,  e 
conduit,  e 
confit,  e 
connu,  e 
cousu, e 
couru,  e 
couvert,  e 
craint,  e 
cru,  e 
cru,  e 
cueilli,  e 
cuit,  e 
dechu,  e 
dfi 

dit,  e 
dormi 


je  circoncis 

je  conclMs 
je  con9us 
je  conduisis 
je  confis 
je  connus 
je  cousis 
je  courus 
je  couvris 
je  craignis 
je  crus 
je  crus 
je  cuellis 
je  cuisis 
je  dcchus 
je  dus 
je  dis 
je  dormis 


No. 

13. 
53. 
69. 
47. 
66. 
14. 

19. 
50. 
70. 
71. 
14. 
66. 

2. 

73. 

L.  23. 

55. 

5. 

2. 
26. 
11. 
41. 
46. 
15. 
20. 
21. 
42. 

4. 
56. 
54. 

7. 
35. 


♦  The  derivatives  which  are  not  in  this  table  will  be  found  with  the  primitives 
under  their  respective  number. 


200 


XLVI.      QUARANTE-SIXIEME  LEgON. 


Echoir 

il  e'choit 

e'cheant 

echu 

il  e'chut 

56. 

Eclore 

il  eclot 

— 

eclos 

— 

74. 

Ecrire 

j'ecris 

ecrivant 

ecrit,  e 

j'ecrivis 

17. 

Envoyer 

j'envoie 

envoyant 

envoye 

j 'envoy  ai 

68. 

Eaire 

je  fais 

faisant 

fait,  e 

je  fis 

27. 

Eaillir 

— 

faillant 

failli 

je  faillis 

75. 

Ealloir 

il  faut 

— 

fallu 

il  flillut 

57. 

Eeindre 

je  feins 

feignant 

feint,  e 

je  feignis 

14. 

Eerir 

— 

— 

— 

— 

76. 

Erire 

je  fris 

— 

frit,  e 

— 

77. 

Euir 

je  fuis 

fuyant 

fui 

je  fuis 

32. 

Gesir 

il  git 

gisant 

— 

— 

78. 

Joindre 

je  joins 

joignant 

joint,  e 

je  joignis 

16. 

Issir 

— 

— 

issu,  e 

— 

79. 

Instruire 

j'instruis 

instruisant 

instruit,  e 

j'instruisis 

6. 

Lire 

jc  lis 

lisant 

lu,  e 

je  lus 

18. 

Liiire 

je  luis 

luisant 

lui 

— 

1. 

Mentir 

je  mens 

mentant 

menti 

je  mentis 

37. 

Mcttre 

je  mets 

mettant 

mis,  e 

je  mis 

28. 

Moudre 

je  mouds 

moulant 

moulu,  e 

je  moulus 

12. 

Mourir 

je  meurs 

mourant 

mort,  e 

je  mourus 

49. 

Mouvoir 

je  mens 

mouvant 

mu,  e 

je  mus 

58. 

Naitre 

je  nais 

naissant 

ne',  e 

je  naquis 

30. 

Nuire 

je  nuis 

nuisant 

nui 

je  nuisis 

3. 

Offrir 

j'ofire 

ofFrant 

offert,  e 

j'ofFris 

43. 

Oindre 

j'oins 

-     — 

oint 

j'oignis 

16. 

Ouir 

— 

— 

ou'i 

j'ouis 

80. 

OiLvrir 

j'ouvre 

ouvrant 

ouvert,  e 

j'ouvris 

45. 

Paitre 

je  pais 

paissant 

pu 

— 

25. 

Paraitre 

je  parais 

paraissant 

paru 

je  parus 

24. 

Partir 

je  pars 

partant 

parti 

je  partis 

36. 

Peindre 

je  peins 

peignant 

peint 

je  pcignis 

14. 

Plaindre 

je  plains 

plaignant 

plaint 

je  plaignis 

15. 

Plaire 

je  plais 

plaisant 

plu 

je  plus 

22. 

Pleuvoir 

il  pleut 

pleiivant 

plu 

il  plut 

59. 

Prendre 

je  prends 

prenant 

pris 

je  pris 

29. 

Poindre 

je  poins 

poignant 

(point) 

(je  poignis) 

16. 

Pourvoir 

je  pourvois 

pourvoyant 

pourvu,  e 

pourvus 

60. 

Pouvoir 

je peux  (puis)  pouvant 

pu 

je  pus 

61. 

Repentir,  se 

je  me  I'epens  repentant 

repenti 

je  me  repentis 

39. 

Restreindre 

je  restreins 

— 

restrcint 

jc  restreignis 

I4. 

Rire 

je  ris 

riant 

ri 

je  ris 

67' 

SUPPLEMENTARY   TENSES. 


201 


Rompre,  se 

Saillir 

Savoir 

Sentir 

Seoir 

Servir 

Sortir 

SoufFrir 

Sourdre 

Suivro 

Suffire 

Surseoir 

Taire 

Tcindre 

Tcnir 

Traire 

Tressaillir 

Valoir 

Vaincre 

Venir 

Vetir 

Vivre 

Voir 

Vouloir 


J L.  XXIII.,  Rem.  2. 
il  saille 
je  sais 
je  sens 
il  sied 
je  sers 
je  sors 
je  soufFre 
elle  sourd 
je  suis 
je  suffis 
je  surseois 
je  tais 
je  teins 
je  tiens 
je  trais 
je  tressaille 
je  vaux 
je  vaincs 
je  vicns 
je  vets 
je  vis 
je  vois 
je  veux 


saillant 

sachant 

sentant 

scant 

servant 

sortant 

sonffrant 

suivant 

suffisant 

sursoyant 

taisant 

teignant 

tenant 

trayant 

tressaillant 

valant 

vainquant 

venant 

vetant 

vivant 

voyant 

voulant 


sailli 
su,  e 
senti,  e 
sis,  e 
servi,  e 
sorti 


il  saillit 
je  sus 
je  sentis 

je  servis 
je  sortis 


souffert,  e    je  souftris 


suivi,  e 
suffi 
sursis 
tu,  e 
teint,  e 
tenu,  e 
trait 
tressailli 
valu 

vaincu,  e 
venu,  e 
vetu 
vecu 
vu,  e 
voulu,  e 


je  suivis 
jc  suffis 
je  sursis 
je  tus 
jc  teignis 
je  tins 

je  tressaillis 
je  valus 
je  vainquis 
je  vins 
je  vetia* 
je  vecus 
je  vis 
je  voulus 


48. 
62. 
38. 
82. 
34. 
40. 
44. 
81. 

9. 

2. 
83. 
23. 
14. 
52. 

8. 
47. 
63. 
10. 
51. 
33. 
31. 
65. 
64. 


XLYII.    QUARANTE-SEPTIEME    LEgON. 


HOW  TO  BENDER  DO,  BW,  SHALL,   WILL,  ETC.— 
SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 

The  auxiliaries  do,  will,  shall,  etc.,  in  answers,  are  often  used  in 
English  in  an  elliptical  manner,  when  in  French  the  principal  verb 
must  be  repeated,  and  a  noun  or  pronoun  supplied. 

Si,  "yes,"  is  generally  used  in  answers  instead  of  oui  in  replying  to  a 
question  in  which  there  is  a  negation,  or  in  contradiction  to  a  negative 
statement. 


202 


XLVn.      QUARANTE-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 


EXAMPLES : 


Avez-vous  du  pain  1    Oui,  fen  ai. 
Avez-vous  repondu  1      Oui,  j'ai  r€- 

pondu ? 
Acheteront-ils  ce  beurre?     Oui,  ils 

I'acheteront. 
Voulez  vous  le  lui  demander  ?  Oui, 

je  veux  bien. 
Etes-vous  Anglais  ?    Non  je  ne  /e 

suis  pas. 
Avez-vous  ete  k  Rome  ?    Non,  je 

n'y  ai  pas  c'tff. 
Est-ce  vous  qui  etes  venu  hier  soir  1 

Non,  ce  n'est  pas  moi. 
Ce  n'est  pas  ce  peintre  qui  a  fait 

votre  portrait  1    Si,  c'est  lui. 
Lui  rendrez-vous  son  portrait  ?  Cela 

va  sans  dire. 
Partira-t-il  ?     Oui,  il  partira. 
Iriez  vous  s'il  y  allait  ?    Mais  oui, 

je  leferais. 
Est-ce  la  mode?      Oui,    c'est  la 

mode. 
Pourquoi  vous  plaignez-vous  ?    Je 

ne  me  plains  pas ;  c'est  mon  frere 

qui  se  plaint.    II  se  plaint !   Oui, 

vraiment,  et  il  y  a   longtemps 

qu'il  se  plaint. 
J'ai  faim.     Vraiment  1     Oui,  bien 

faim. 
Doit-elle  venir  ce  soir  ?     Oui,  elle 

doit  venir. 


Have  you  any  breads     Yes,  I  have. 
Have  you  answered  ?     Yes,  I  have. 

Will  they  buy  that  butter  ?     Yes,  they 

will. 
Will  you  ask  him  for  it  ?     Yes,  I  will. 

Are  you  an  Englishman  ?    No,  I  am 

not. 
Have  you  been  in  Rome  ?    No,  I  have 

not. 
Was  it  you  who  came  last  night  ?      No, 

it  was  not  I. 
That  painter   did  not  take  your  like" 

ness,  did  he?     Yes,  he  did. 
Will  you  return  her  likeness    to    her? 

Of  course  I  will. 
Will  he  set  out  ?    Yes,  he  will. 
Should  you  go  there  if  he  did  1      Why, 

yes,  I  should. 
Is  it  the  fashion  ?     Yes,  it  is. 

"Why  do  you  complain?  I  do  not 
complain;  my  brother  does. — 
Does  he?  Indeed  he  does,  and 
he  has  complained  for  a  long 
time* 

I  am  hungry.  Are  you?  Yes, 
very. 

Does  she  intend  to  come  this  even- 
ing ?     Yes,  she  does. 


In  exclamations  the  auxiliary  must  be  translated  by  some  words 
expressive  of  the  meaning  implied  by  the  English  elhpsis.    Ex. :  — 

Son  associe  est  revenu  des  Indes.     His  partner  has  returned  from  India. 

Est-ce    possible,   vous    me    sur-        Has  he  ? 

prenez,  or  simply,  Ah !  vraiment ! 
J'ai  sommeil.     Ah  !  vraiment  ?  or,    1  am  sleepy.    Are  you  ? 

Allons  done,  vous  plaisantez. 


SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


203 


SUPPLEMENTAEY    TENSES. 

The  verbs  allery  devoir,  and  vmir  de  are  idiomatically  used,  forming,  with 
an  infinitive,  what  some  grammarians  have  called  "  Supplementary 
Tenses." 

Aller  and  devoir  before  an  infinitive  form  idiomatic  futures,  and  corre- 
spond to  the  English  verbs  to  go  and  to  he  (to  be  about  to),  in  a  like  position. 

Venir  de  forms  idiomatic  past  tenses,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  to 
have  just. 

CONJUGATION  OF  THE  SUPPLEMENTARY  TENSES. 


Je  vais 

avoir, 

Tu  vas 

chanter. 

II  va 

danser, 

Nous  allons 

finir, 

Vous  allez 

rendre. 

lis  vont 

recevoir, 

J'allais  avoir,  etc. 

Je  dois 

'    avoir, 

Tu  dois 

chanter, 

11  doit 

danser, 

Nous  devons 

'  finir. 

Vous  devez 

rendre. 

lis  doivent 

recevoir, 

Je  devais  avoir,  etc. 

Je  devrais  avoir,  etc. 

J'aurais  du  avoir,  etc. 

Je  viens  de  (d')  • 

avoir, 

Tu  viens 

chanter, 

11  vient 

danser, 

Nous  venons  " 

finir. 

Vous  venez    " 

rendre. 

lis  viennent 

" 

recevoir, 

/  am  going  "j  to  have. 
Thou  art  going  to  sing. 
He  is  going  to  dance. 

We  are  going  '  to  finish. 
You  are  going  to  render. 
They  are  going  J  to  receive. 

I  was  going  to  have,  etc. 


I  am 
Thou  art 
He  is 

We  are 
You  are 
They  are 


to  have, 
to  sing, 
to  dance, 
to  finish, 
to  render, 
to  receive. 


I  was  to  have. 

I  should  or  ought  to  have.. 

I  should  or  ought  to  have  had. 


I  have  just 
Thou  hast  just 
He  has  just 
We  have  just 
You  have  just 
They  have  just 


had. 

sung. 

danced. 

finished. 

rendered. 

received. 


Je  venais  d'  avoir,  etc 


I  had  just  had:,  etc. 


204  XLVII.      QUARANTE-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

These  last  tenses  may  be  expressed  hj  /aire  preceded  by  ne  and  followed 
by  the  conjunctive  que,  with  an  infinitive  preceded  hj  de  {ne  faire  quede). 
e.  g.  II  ne  fait  que  d'arriver.  He  has  but  just  arrived.  Je  ne  fais  que  de 
sortir.     I  have  but  just  gone  out. 

N.  B.  The  particle  de  is  here  indispensable,  because,  without  it  the  ex- 
pression would  have  quite  another  sense,  and  would  denote  a  continuation 
or  a  frequent  repetition  of  the  action.  Ex. :  Voiis  ne  faites  que  sortir.  You 
do  nothing  but  go  out.    Elle  ne  fait  que  jouer.    She  does  nothing  but  play. 


I>^TIT     II 


ELISION. 

The  vowels  a,  e,  i,  when  final,  are  sometimes  elided  before  a  word 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute ;  thus :  Vdme,  Vhomme,  s'il,  in- 
stead of  la  dme,  le  homme,  si  il. 

Elision  of  a.    A  is  elided  only  in  the  word  la.    Ex. :  Vamitie. 

Elision  of  e.  E  is  elided  in  the  nine  monosyllables  je,  me,  te, 
le,  de,  ne,  ce,  se  and  qzie.  Ex.:  faime;  c'est  Vhomme  quHl  nestime 
jpas. 

Exceptions.  —  1.  The  vowels  of  the  pronouns  le,  la,je,  and  cearc  never 
elided  when  they  come  after  the  verb.  Ex. :  Ai-je  un  livre ;  est-ce  elle.  The 
e  in  je  and  ce  is  not  pronounced,  however,  though  the  e  and  a  of  le  and  la 
are  in  voyez-la  aujourd'hui,  voyez-le  aujourd'hui.  ♦ 

2.   Before  out  and  onze  no  elision  takes  place :  je  crois  que  out ;  le  onze. 

The  E  is  elided  in  lorsque,  when ;  puisque,  since ;  quoique, 
though,  only  before  il,  elle,. on  and  un.  Ex.:  lorsquHU  puisqu'on, 
etc.  In  quelque  the  e  is  elided  only  before  un,  une,  and  autre.  Ex.: 
quelqu'un  ;  quelqu* autre.  In  entre  and  presque,  e  is  elided  only  when 
they  form  part  of  a  compound  word.     Ex.:  entr'acte,  presqu'Ue. 

Elision  of  ^.  I  is  elided  only  in  the  conjunction  si  before  il 
and  ils.     Ex.:  s'^7,  sHls. 


206  I.      PREMIERE  LEgON. 


PREMIERE    LE9ON. 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 

I.  EULES   ON  THE   GENDER  OF   SIMPLE  NOUNS. 
$1.  MASCULINE  BY  THEIR  SIGNIFICATION  ARE  : 

1.  The  names  of  all  masculine  beings,  as :  Henri,  Henry ;  Vein' 
pereur,  the  emperor ;  le  maitre,  the  master ;  le  Frangais,  the 
Frenchman;  le  taureau,  the  bull,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  metals,  trees,  shrubs,  seasons,  months,  and  dctys, 
as :  le  fer,  iron ;  le  chene,  the  oak ;  le  printemps,  spring  ;  le  joli 
Mai,  (the)  fine  May ;  (Ze)  lundi,  Monday,  etc. 

3.  All  words  that  are  made  substantive  by  prefixing  the  article, 
as:  le  vert,  the  green  (color);  le  Men,  the  good;  le  hoire  et  le 
manger,  drinking  and  eating ;  le  oui  et  le  non,  the  yes  and  no. 

4.  Nouns  expressing  professions,  titles,  or  qualities  which  belong 
generally  to  men  :  philosophe,  orateur,  etc. 

5.  The  names  generally  used  in  natural  history  to  designate  the 
different  species  of  animals :  un  quadrupede,  un  mammifere,  un 
herbivore,  etc. 

6.  The  names  employed  in  Chemistry  to  designate  simple  bodies 
and  most  of  their  compounds  :  Vor,  le  cuivre,  Vhydrogene,  Voxy- 
gene. 

7.  The  names  of  the  decimal  nomenclature  :  le  metre,  le  franc ^ 
le  centime,  etc. 

$2.  MASCULINE  BY  TERMINATION: 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  a  consonant  (except  those  in  aison,  ion,  and. 
eur). 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  any  vowel  except  e  miibo  and  e  preceded  by 
t  or  ti. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  e  mute  preceded  by  }>,  g,  I  (not  double),  /w, 


ON  THE  GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.        207 

r  (except  rr  not  preceded  by  u),s,  t  (not  double),  orw  (except 
those  in  ique) . 

To  any  rules  for  terminations,  there  will  be  found  many  exceptions. 
These  rules  are  general.  Most  of  the  exceptions  in  common  use,  the  pu- 
pil will  learn  as  they  occur  in  this  grammar. 

$3.  FEMININE  BY  SIGNIFICATION: 

1.  All  names  of  female  persons  and  animals,  as  :  Marie,  Mary; 
la  reine,  the  queen ;  la  Jille^  the  girl ;  la  jument,  the  mare,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  fruits,  flowers,  and  herbs,  as  :  la  poire,  the 
pear ;  la  pomme,  the  apple ;  la  rose,  the  rose ;  Vherhe,  the  grass. 

Except :  Le  marrm,  the  chestnut ;  le  citron,  the  lemon ;  le  raisin,  the 
grape ;  un  ahricot,  an  apricot ;  un  (Billet,  a  pink ;  le  lis,  the  lily,  and  a  few 
more,  on  account  of  their  masculine  termination. 

3.  The  names  of  countries,  places,  and  rivers  ending  in  e  mute, 
as :  la  France,  la  Prusse,  Vancienne  Rome,  la  Loire,  la  Seine, 
etc. 

Except :  Le  Hanovre,  le  Mexique,  le  Danube,  le  Rhone. 

$  4.    FEMININE  BY  TERMINATION: 

1.  Nouns  ending  with  e  mute,  not  included  in  the  masculine  ter- 
minations, as  :  la  vie,  life ;  Vepee,  the  sword. 

2.  Those  ending  in  aison,  ion,  and  eur,  as :  la  maison,  the 
house ;  la  religion,  la  grandeur. 

3.  Those  ending  in  e  preceded  by  t  or  ti,  as  :  la  heaute,  beauty. 

4.  These  five  words  ending  in  i  are  feminine  :  la  foi,  faith ;  la 
hi,  law ;  la  fourmi,  the  ant ;  la  merci,  mercy ;  Vapres-midi. 

5.  Most  nouns  ending  in  oire  (not  oir)  are  feminine,  as  :  la 
gloire,  glory ;  Vhistoire,  history ;  la  victoire,  victory  ;  la  machoire, 
the  jaw. 

6.  Gens.  This  word  presents  an  anomaly  in  gender.  It  is 
masculine,  but  when  an  adjective  precedes  it,  that  adjective  takes 
the  feminine  form,  if  its  termination  is  not  e  mute.  If  a  definitive, 
as  tout  or  certain,  precedes  this  adjective,  the  definitive  also  takes 


208  I.      PREMIERE    LEgON. 

the  feminine  foi-m.  In  all  other  cases,  gens  takes  a  masculine 
adjective,  as :  Toutes  les  vieilles  gens  sont  soupgonneux^  all  old 
people  are  suspicious.     But,  Tous  les  jeunes  getis. 

II.   GENDER   OF   COMPOUND   SUBSTANTIVES. 
This  depends  upon  the  manner  of  their  composition. 

1.  When  the  first  component  is  a  noun,  it  determines  the  gender 
of  the  whole,  as :  Le  chou-Jleur,  the  cauliflower ;  un  arc-en-ciel,  a 
rainbow ;  la  fete  Dieu. 

2.  When  they  consist  of  a  preposition  or  an  adjective  and  a  noun, 
the  gender  of  the  noun  remains  for  the  whole,  as :  Le  contre-coup^ 
the  counter-buff;  Vavant-hras,  m.  the  fore-arm. 

3.  Those  nouns  compounded  with  a  verb  and  noun  are  always  of 
the  masculine  gender,  as :  Le  porte-manieau,  the  portmanteau :  le 
tire-houchon,  the  corkscrew ;  le  porte-feuille,  the  portfolio  (though 
feuille  4s  feminine) . 

THEME  1. 

Indicate  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns,  by  placing  an  article, 
either  the  definite  or  the  indefinite,  before  them  : 

The  horse,  —  cheval.  The  pear, — poire.  The  metal, — metal. 
A  winter,  —  hiver.  Italy,  —  Italie.  The  cherry,  —  cerise.  The 
cherry-tree,  —  cerisier.  The  house,  —  maison.  The  vapor,  — 
vapeur.  The  walnut,  —  noix.  A  leaf,  — feuille.  The  truth,  — 
verite.  The  van-guard,  —  avant-garde.  The  cart,  —  charette. 
The  work,  —  travail.  The  shell,  —  coquille.  The  hat,  —  cha- 
peau.  The  shoe,  —  Soulier.  The  honey,  —  miel.  The  carpenter, 
—  charpentier.  The  nurse,  —  nourrice.  The  sun, — soleil.  The 
earth,  —  terre.  A  year,  —  annee.  The  life,  — vie.  The  feast, — 
fete.  The  treaty,  —  traite.  The  master-key,  —  passe-partout. 
The  spit,  —  tourne-hroche.     Christianity,  —  christianisme. 

III.  DOUBLE   GENDER   OF   SOME  NOUNS. 
1.    The  following  nouns  have  a  double  gender  : 
L'aide,  m.  the  assistant.  Uaide,  f.  the  help,  support. 

Vaiyle,  m.  the  eagle.  VaigUy  f.  the  standard. 


ON  THE  GENDEK  OF  SUBSTANTIVES.       209 

Vaune,  m.  the  alder-tree.  raune,  f.  the  ell,  yard. 

un  couple,  a  couple,  husband  and  wife,     wne  couple,  a  brace,  two  of  a  sort. 

un  enseigne,  an  ensign.  une  enseigne,  a  sign. 

le  garde,  the  keeper.  la  garde,  the  guard,  watch. 

le  guide,  the  guide.  la  guide,  the  rein  in  driving. 

le  livre,  the  book.  la  litre,  the  pound. 

le  manche,  the  handle.  la  manche,  the  sleeve. 

le  m€moire,  the  memorandum.  la  m(fmoire,  the  memory. 

le  mousse,  the  cabin-boy.  la  mousse.,  the  moss. 

Vorgue,  m.  sing,  the  organ.  les  orgues,  pi.  organ,  or  organs. 

le  page,  the  page  (of  a  prince).  la  page,  the  page  (of  a  book). 

un  paillasse,  a  merry  andrew.  une  paillasse,  a  straw-bed. 

PAques,  pi.  m.  Easter.  la  pdque,  the  Passover. 

le  pocle,  the  stove.  la  pocle,  the  frying-pan. 

le  poste,  the  post,  military  post.  la  poste,  the  post-offce. 

un  somme,  a  nap,  slumber.  la  somme,  the  sum. 

le  tour,  the  trick,  turn.  la  tour,  the  tower. 

le  trompette,  the  trumpeter.  la  trompette,  the  trumpet. 

un  voile,  a  veil.  une  voile,  a  sail. 

2.  There  are  in  French  some  nouns  which  have  no  particular 

form  for  the  feminine,  and  remain  always  masculine,  even  when 

applied  to  a  woman.     Such  are  : 

Un  auteur,      )  ,  ^  ^, 

rr    ...      >•  m.  and  f.  an  author,  a  writer. 

Un  ecnvam,  ) 

Un  orateur,  m.  and  f.  an  orator. 

Un  peintre,  m.  and  f.  a  painter. 

Un  sculpteur,  m.  and  f.  a  sculptor. 

Un  t€moin,  m.  and  f.  a  witness. 

Note.    Sometimes  the  word  femme  may  precede,  as  :   Une  femme  auteur ^ 

les  Jemmcs  poetes. 

3.  On  the  contrary,  there  are  a  few  feminine  nouns  which  apply 
also  to  male  individuals : 

La  caution,  the  bail.  la  basse,  the  base. 

la  pratique,  the  customer.  la  sentinelle,  the  sentry. 

IV.  FORMATION  OF  FEMININE  APPELLATIONS. 

1.  Male  appellations  which  are  originally  adjectives,  form  their 
feminine  according  to  the  rules  on  the  adjectives  (see  Part  I.,  L. 
XVI.),  as: 

14 


210                                 I.  PREMIERE   LEgON. 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 

Ze  Francais,  the  Frenchman.  La  Frangaise,  the  Frenchwoman. 

un  Russe,  a  Russian.           <  une  Russe,  a  Russian  lady. 

un  Juif,  a  Jew.  uneJuive,  a  Jewess. 

Vepoux,  the  husband.  V€pouse,  the  wife. 

le  venf,  the  widower.  la  veuve,  the  widow. 

2.  Those  ending  in  one  of  the  nasal  sounds  an,  on,  ten  (not  ^w), 
and  those  in  t  double  their  w  or  ^  before  the  feminine  e,  as : 

Le  paysan,  the  peasant.  La  paysanne,  a  peasant  woman. 

le  Hon.,  the  lion.  la  lionne,  the  lioness. 

le  chr€tien,  the  Christian.  la  chr^tienne,  the  Christian  woman. 

le  baron,  the  baron.  la  baronne,  the  baroness. 

3.  Many  nouns  ending  in  e  mute  form  their  feminine  in  esse,  as : 
Le  comte,  the  count.  La  comtesse,  the  countess. 

le  negre,  the  negro.  la  n€gresse,  the  negress. 

le  maitre,  the  master.  Za  maitresse,\hQ  mistress. 

le  prince,  the  prince.  la  princesse,  the  princess. 

4.  Those  in  -ewr  change  this  termination  into  -euse : 

Lie  danseur,  the  dancer.  La  danseuse,  the  dancer,  y. 

fe  chasseur,  the  hunter.  Za  chasseiise,*  the  huntress. 

5.  Many  in  -teur  change  it  into  -trice,  as : 
L'acteur,  the  actor.  L'actrice,  the  actress. 

/e  bienfaiteur,  the  benefactor.  /a  bienfaitrice,  the  benefactress. 

Ze  tuteur,  the  guardian.  Za  tutrice,  the  guardian,  /, 

6.  The  following  nouns  form  their  feminine  in  an  irregular  way : 
Le  dieu,  the  god.  La  de'esse,  the  goddess. 

le  due,  the  duke.  la  duchesse,  the  duchess. 

I'empereur,  the  emperor.  I'lmpdratrice,  the  empress. 

Ze  roi,  the  king.  Za  rei'ne,  the  queen. 

Ze  ^^ros,  the  hero.  Vheroine,  the  heroine. 

Ze  gouverneur,  the  tutor.  Za  gouvemante,  the  governess. 

Ze  serviteur,  the  man-servant.  Za  servante,  the  maid-servant.  ■ 

Ze  pccheur,  the  sinner.  Za  p^cheresse,  the  sinner  /. 

Ze  compagnon,  the  companion.  Za  compagne,  the  companion  yi 

Ze  ZoM/),  the  he-wolf.  Za  Zowye,  the  she-wolf. 

Ze  wiM/ef,  the  mule.  la  mule,  the  mule  J", 

le  dindon,  the  turkey-cock.  la  dinde,  the  turkey-hen. 
*  Chasseresse  is  a  poetical  form. 


ON  THE  GENDER   OF  SUBSTANTIVES.  211 

THEME  2. 

Form  and  write  the  feminine  of  the  following  masculine  nouns, 
according  to  the  above  rules  : 

The  neighbor,  le  voisin;^  f.  — .  The  hunter,  le  chasseur ;  f. 
— .  The  dwarf,  le  nain ;  f. — .  The  talker,  le  havard ;  f — . 
The  prisoner,  le  prisonmer ;  f.  — .  The  dumb  man,  le  muet ;  f. 
— .  The  teacher,  Vinstituteur ;  f.  — .  The  patient,  le  malade ; 
f.  — .  The  husband,  Vepoux;  f.  — .  The  master,  le  maitre ;  i. 
— .  A  musician,  un  musicien;  f.  — .  The  founder,  le  fonda- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  Englishman,  V Anglais  ;  f.  — .  The  German, 
VAUemand;  f.  — .  The  actor,  Vacteur;  f.  —r-.  The  inventor,  f 
Vinventeur ;  f.  — .  The  liar,  le  menteur  (root  ment-,  termination 
-eur)  ;  f.  — .  The  traitor,  le  traitre  ;  f.  — .  The  singer,  le  clian- 
teur ;  f.  — .  The  idler,  le  paresseux  ;  f  — .  The  lion,  le  lion  ; 
f.  — .     The  tiger,  le  tigre ;  f.  — . 

READING  LESSON. 

Un  honn^te  pere  de  famille,  charge^  de  biens  et  d'anndes,  voulut 
regler  d'avance^  sa  succession  entre  ses  trois  fils,  et  leur  partager 
ses  biens,  le  fruit  de  ses  travaux  et  de  son  Industrie.  II  en  fit  trois 
portions  ^gales,  et  assigna  h.  chacun  son  lot.  — Puis  il  leur  dit :  "  II 
me  reste  encore  un  diamant  de  grand  prix ;  je  le  destine  a  celui  de 
vous  qui  saura  le  mieux  le  meriter  par  quelque  action  noble  et  g^- 
nereuse,  et  je  vous  donne  trois  mois  pour  vous  mettre  en  etat  de 
Tobtenir." 

Aussitdt  les  trois  fils  se  dispersent,  mais  ils  se  rassemblent  au 
temps  prescrit.^  Ils  se  presentent  devant  leur  juge,  et  voici  ce  que 
raconte  I'aine^ :  "  Mon  pere,  un  Stranger  s'est  trouve  dans  des  cir- 
constances  qui  Font  oblige  de  me  confier^  toute  sa  fortune  :  il  n'avait 
de  moi  aucune  surete,  par  4crit,^  et  n'aurait  pu  produire  centre  moi 
aucune  preuve  du  depot  ;  mais  je  lui  ai  tout  remis  fidelement. 
Cette  fidelity  n'est>elle  pas  quelque  chose  de  louable^?  "  **  Tu  as 
fait,  mon  fils,"  lui  repondit  le  viellard,  "  ce  que  tu  devais  faire.  II 
serait  honteux  d'en  agir  autrement,  car  la  probity  est  un  devoir." 

1.  Laden.     2.  Beforehand.     3.  Prescribed,  appointed.     4.  The  eldest.     5.  To 
trust.    6.  In  writing.    7.  Laudable. 


212 


PEEMIERE  LEgON. 


CONVERSATION. 

Qui  VQulut  r^gler  sa  succession  ?        Un  honnete  pere  de  famille. 
Que  fit-il  h  cet  effet  (for  this  pur-    II  partagea  ses  biens  entre  ses 

pose)  ?  trois  fils. 

Que  lui  restait-il  ?  Un  diamant  de  grand  prix. 

A  qui  le  destina-t-il  ?  A  celui  d'entre  eux  qui  ferait 

une  action   noble    et    gene- 
reuse. 
Combien  de  temps  leur  donna-t-il    H  leur  donna  trois  mois    pour 


pour  cola  ? 
Que  firent  ensuite  les  fils  ? 


Quelle  avait  ete  Faction  de  I'aine  ? 


Que  lui  dit  le  viellard  ? 


obtenir  ce  prix. 
lis  se  disperserent,  mais  au  bout 

du  temps  present,  ils  revin- 

rent  a  la  maison. 
II  avait  remis  fidelement  a,  un 

etranger  la  fortune  que    ce- 

lui-ci  lui  avait   confiee   sans 

re^u  {receipt). 
Tu  n'as  fait,  mon  fils,  que  ce 

que  tu  devais  faire. 


FIN 


Le  second  fils  plaida^  sa  cause  a  son  tour,  a  peu  pres  en  ces 
termes  :  "  Je  me  suis  trouve,  pendant  mon  voyage,  sur  le  bord  d'un 
lac ;  un  enfant  venait^  imprudemment  de  s'y  laisser^  tomber ;  il  al- 
lait  se  noyer  f  je  Fen  ai  tire,  et  je  lui  ai  sauve  la  vie,  aux  yeux  des 
habitants  d'un  village  situe  au  bord  de  ce  lac  ;  ils  pourront  attestor 
la  verite  du  fait."* — "A  la  bonne  beure,"  interrompit^  le  pere. 
*'  mais  il  n'y  a  point  encore  de  noblesse  dans  cette  action ;  il  n'y  a 
que  de  Fhamanite." 

Enfin,  le  dernier  des  trois  freres  prit  la  parole.  "  Mon  pere," 
dit-il,  "  j'ai  trouve  mon  ennemi  mortel,  qui,  s'etant  egare  la  nuit, 
s'etait  endormi,  sans  le  savoir,  sur  le  penchant^  d'un  abime  f  le 
moindre  mouvement  qu'il  eiit  fait,  au  moment  de  son  reveil,^  ne 


ON  THE  GENDER  OP  SUBSTANTIVES.       213 

pouvait  manquer^  de  le  precipiter ;  sa  vie  etait  entre  mes  mains ; 
j'ai  pris  soin  de  Feveiller'*'  avec  les  precautions  convenables,  et  I'ai 
tire  de  cet  endroit^^  fatal." 

"  Ah  !  mon  fils,"  s'ecria  le  bon  pere  avec  transport,  et  en  I'em- 
brassant  tendrement,  "  c'est  k  toi,  sans  contredit,^^  que  la  bague^^ 
est  due." 

1.  To  plead.  2.  Had  just  fallen.  3.  To  be  drowned.  4,  The  fact.  5.  To  inter- 
rupt. 6.  The  slope.  7.  Abyss.  8.  Of  his  awakening.  9.  Fail.  10.  To  wake. 
11.  Place,  spot.    12.  Without  doubt.    13.  The  ring. 

CONVEESATION. 

Qu'ayait  fait  le  second  fils  ?  II  avait  sauve  un  enfant  qui  allait 

se  noyer. 
Qui  avait  vu  cela  ?  Les  habitants  d'un  village  situe  au 

bord  du  lac. 
Enfin,  quelle  avait  ^te  Faction     II  avait  retire  son  ennemi  endormi 
du  dernier  dcs  trois  freres  ?  au    bord    d'un    abime,   ou   le 

moindre  mouvement  I'eut  pre- 
cipite. 
Laquelle   de   ces   trois   actions     Celle  du  plus  jeune  fils. 

etait  la  plus  noble  ? 
Les    actions   des    deux   autres     Non,  la  premiere  etait  une  action 
n'etaient-elles  pas  nobles  et         de  justice,  la  seconde  une  action 
genereuses  ?  d'humanite. 

Et  qu'est-ce  queluiditle  pere?     II  s'ecria  avec  transport :  "  Moa 

fils,  c'est  a  toi,  sans  contredit, 
que  la  bague  est  due." 


214  II.      DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

II.    DEUXIEME    LE9ON, 


PLURAL    OF    NOUNS. 

~  (See  Part  I.  Lesson  2,  p.  30.) 

The  general  rules  on  this  subject  have  already  been  given  in  the  second 
lesson  of  Part  I.     We  have  to  add  here  the  following  particulars. 

1.  Nouns  of  two  and  more  syllables,  ending  in  -ant  and  -ent,  are 
spelled  by  some  French  writers  in  the  plural  -ens  and  -arts,  instead 
of  -ents  and  -ants,  as  :  momens  for  moments,  enfans  for  enfants. 
This  orthography,  however,  is  not  to  be  recommended. 

2.  The  following  nouns  in  al  and  ail  do  not  form  their  plural  in 
T,ux,  but  take  an  s. 

Le  hal,  the  ball.  V^ventail,  m.  the  fan. 

le  cat,  callus^  V€pouvantail,  m.  the  scarecrow. 

le  narval,  the  narwhal.  un  poi-tail,  a  portal,  front  gate. 

le  carnaval,  the  carnival.  le  poitrail,  the  poitrel. 

le  rd'gal,  the  regale,  treat.  le  serail,  the  seraglio. 

le  detail,  the  particulars.  rail,  garlic  (has  in  Plur.  both  les 

le  gouvemail,  the  helm,  rudder.  ails  and  les  aulx). 

Plural :  Les  bals,  les  cals,  les  details,  les  €ventaih,  etc. 

Note.   Le  h€tail,  cattle,  makes  in  the  plural  les  hestiaux. 

3.  The  usual  plural  of  del  is  cieux,  the  heavens ;  there  is,  how- 
ever, a  regular  plural,  les  dels,  meaning :  1,  the  testers;  2,  the  cli- 
mats ;  3,  the  skies  of  pictures. 

4.  L'ceil,  the  eye,  has  in  the  plural  les  yeux.-  Des  ceils  de  hceuf 
are  oval  or  round  windows.  Aieul,  has  ateuls  when  it  means  gfand- 
fatbers,  and  a'ieux  in  the  sense  of  ancestors. 

5.  How  compound  words  form  their  plural :  — 

1.  When  a  word  is  composed  of  a  substantive  and  an  adjective,  Or  of  two 
substantives,  both  take  thp-  mark  of  the  plural.     Ex.:  — 


PLURAL   OF  NOUNS.  215 

Zes  heau-s.-freres,  the  brothers-in-law. 

Les  belles-sceurs,  the  sisters-in-law. 

Les  chouyi-Jieurs,  the  cauliflowers. 

Les  chefs-lieux,  the  chief- towns  (of  counties). 

2.  But  when  a  word  is  composed  of  two  substantives  separated  by  a  pre- 
position, the  first  alone  takes  the  plural  termination.    Ex.:  — 

Les  ckefs-d'osuvre,  the  masterpieces. 
Les  arcs-en-cid,  the  rainbows. 

3.  When  a  word  consists  of  a  substantive  and  a  verb  or  preposition,  the 
substantive  alone  can  take  the  sign  of  the  plural,  if  requked  by  the  sense. 
Ex.:  — 

Les  tire-hottes,  tfie  boot-jacks. 
Les  essuie-mains,  the  towels. 
Les  garde-fous,  the  balusters. 

4.  "When  there  is  no  substantive  in  the  compound  word,  none  of  the 
components  can  take  the  mark  of  tMfe  plural.     Ex.:  — 

Les  passe-partout  {not  passe-partouts),  the  master-keys. 

Les  forte-piano,  the  pianos.  ' 

5.  The  words :  la  grand'mere,  the  grandmother ;  la  grand'tante,  grand- 
aunt  ;  la  grand'rue,  the  main  street ;  la  grand' route,  the  highway,  —  have,  in 
the  plural,  les  grand'meres,  les  grand'tantes,  etc. 

6.  The  following  nouns  take  in  the  plural  another  meaning  than 
in  the  singular : — 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Le  ciseau,  the  chisel.  les  ciseaux,  the  scissors. 

la  lunette,  the  telescope.  les  lunettes,  the  spectacles. 

le  fer,  iron.  les  fers,  the  fetters,  chains. 

la  grace,  grace,  pardon.  les  graces,  grace,  charms. 

le  gage,  the  pawn,  pledge.  les  gages,  the  wages. 

la  mesure,  the  measure.  les  mesures,  the  measures. 

la  viande,  meat.  les  viandes,  food. 

la  troupe,  the  troop.  les  troupes,  the  troops. 

la  lumiere,  the  light.  les  lumieres,  knowledge. 

I'aboi,  the  barking.  les  ahois,  agony. 

la  defense,  the  defence.  les  d€fenses,  the  tusks,  fangs. 

7.  Substantives  which  have  no  singular  in  French :  — 
Les  annales,  f.  annals.  les  gens,  m.  people. 

les  ancetres,  m.  ancestors.  les  hardes,  f.  clothes. 


216'  n.      DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

les  alentours,  m.  >  .  las  Ugiimes,  m.  vegetables. 

les  environs,  m.  )      ^  enviions.  ^^^  mathematiques,  f.  mathematics. 

les  broussailles,  f.  brushwood.  les  mate'riaux,  materials. 

les  d<fcombres,  m.  rubbish.  les  mcmrs,  f.  the  manners. 

les  debris,  m.  the  remains.  les  moucheites,  f.  the  snuffers. 

les  d€pens,  m.  cost.  des  moucheites,  a  pair  of  snuffers. 

les  entrailles,  f.  the  entrails.  les  pleurs,  f.  the  tears. 

les  frais,  m.  expenses.  les  tenebres,  f.  darkness. 

les  fun&ailles,  f.  funeral  rites.  les  vivre^,  m.  victuals. 

THEME  3. 
1.  We  had  many  balls  last  winter.^  2.  Are  these  fans  dear? 
3.  No,  they  are  not  dear.  4.  The  heavens  declare^  the  glory  of 
God.  5.  The  great  portals  of  those  churches  are  beautiful.  6.  We 
honor^  the  virtues  of  our  ancestors.  7.  The  eyes  of  (c?e  V)  man 
are  tl;e  mirror^  of  his  soul.  8.  The  eyes  of  a  mother  watch''  over 
her  child's  life.  9.  I  have  two  brothers-in-law  and  three  sisters-in- 
law.  10.  Those  pictures  are  masterpieces.  11.  I  want^  two  or 
three  towels.  12.  These  master-keys  must  be  very  old.  13.  Both 
my  (mes  deux)  grandaunts  are  dead ;  but  my  grandmothers  are 
still  alive  (^en  vie).  14.  Lend  me  your  scissors,  if  you  please. 
15.  The  fetters  are  made  of  iron.  16.  Do  you  know  the  environs* 
of  London?  17.  Yes,  I  know  them.  18.  Bring  me  a  pair  of 
snuffers.  19.  Do  you  like  vegetables  ?  20.  I  like  them,  when  they 
are  dry.  21.  I  found  this  ring''  under  the  rubbish  in  my  garden. 
22.  The  little  humming-birds  {oiseaux-mouches)  are  the  jewels^  of 
nature*  {Def.  art.).     23.  I  study^  mathematics. 

1.  Use  the  article,  see  Lesson  3.  2.  To  declare  —  Annoncer.  3.  Honoror.  4.  Mir- 
oir,m.  5.  Veiller.  6.  Ilmefaut(see  Part  1.  p.  148,  3).  7.  Bague,f.  8.  Bijou,  va. 
9.  Etudier. 


READING  LESSON. 

LE  CASTOR.      The  Beaver. 

Dans  le  nord  de  I'Amerique,  sur  les  bords  des  fleiives  et  des 
grands  lacs  du  Canada,  loin  des  grand'routes,  habite  le  castor.     La 

*In  these  Themes,  words,  the  last  letter  of  which  is  printed  in  italics,  are  the 
same  in  French  and  English. 


PLURAL  OF  NOUNS.  217 

partie  la  plus  singnliere  de  son  corps  est  sa  queue.^  Ses  pattes  de 
devant  {fore-feet)  sont  des  especes  de  mains,  dont  il  se  sert  fort 
adroitement^.  Les  castors  entreprennent  des  travaux  tres-conside- 
rables  pour  se  construire  des  habitations  solides  et  commodes.  Ce 
sont  des  cabanes  (huts)  ou  plutot  des  especes  de  maisonnettes  ba- 
ties  dans  I'eau,  avec  deux  issues,  I'une  pour  aller  a  terre,  I'autre 
pour  se  Jeter  a  I'eau.  La  forme  de  cet  ^difice^  est  presque  toujours 
ovale  ou  ronde ;  il  y  en  a  dejpuis  quatre  ou  cinq  pieds  jusqu'^  huifc 
ou  dix  de  diametre  et  de  deux  ou  trois  etages.*  Les  murailles*  ont 
jusqu'a  deux  pieds  d'epaisseur;®  elles  sont  elevees  a  plomb''^  sur  un 
pilotis,^  qui  sert  en  meme  temps  de  fondement  et  de  plancher  k  la 
maison. 

Les  castors  aiment  k  ronger^  continuellement  de  I'^corce  (bark) , 
et  ils  en  font  ample  provision  pour  se  nourrir  pendant  I'hiver. 
Chaque  cabane  a  son  magasin,  et  ils  ne  vont  jamais  piller^^  leura 
voisins.  Ces  cabanes  contiennent  quelquefois  jusqu'a  trente  castors, 
qui  vivent  toujours  en  paix  ensemble.  Si  quelque  castor  aperQoit 
un  ennemi,  il  donne  un  grand  coup,  de  sa  queue,  sur  I'eau.  A  ce 
signal,  tons  les  autres  plongent  dans  I'eau,  ou  se  refugient  dans  les 
cabanes. 

1.  Tail.     2.  Skilfully.    3.  Building.     4.  Floor,  story.    5.  The  walls.    6.  Thick- 
ness.   7.  Perpendicularly.    8.  Pale,  post.    9.  To  gnaw,    10.  To  plunder.  . 


CONVERSATION. 

Ou  habite  le  castor.  H  habite  dans  le  nord  de  I'Am^- 

rique,  sur  les  bords  des  fleuve^ 
et  des  lacs. 
Quelle  est  la  partie  la  plus  re-     C'est  sa  queue. 

marquable  de  son  corps  ?  , 

Comment  sont  ses  pattes  de  de-     Ce  sont  des  especes  de  mains  dont 

vant  ?  il  se  sert  fort  adroitement. 

Les   castors  que    font-ils  de  cu-    lis  batissent    des   cabanes   dans 


rieux 


?  i'eau. 


218 


III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 


De  quelle  maniere  les  batissent- 
ils? 

Quelle  est  la  forme  de  ces  mai- 
sonnettes ? 
Y  a-tril  plusieurs  etages  ? 

Les  murailles  sont-elles  solides  ? 

y  a-t-il  plusieurs  castors  dans 
un  tel  edifice  ? 

Que  font-ils  quand  un  ennemi 
approche  ? 


Us  font  deux  issues,  I'une  pour 
aller  a  terre,  I'autre  pour  se  Je- 
ter a  I'eau. 

La  forme  en  est  ordinairement 
ronde  ou  ovale. 

Oui,  les  cabanes  sont  de  deux  ou 
trois  Stages. 

Tres-^olides ;  elles  ont  jusqu'a 
deux  pieds  d'epaisseur. 

Ces  cabanes  contiennent  quelque- 
fois  jusqu'a  trente  castors  qui 
vivent  ensemble  en  paix. 

lis  se  jettent  tous  dans  I'eau,  ou 
se  refugient  dans  les  cabanes. 


III.    TROISIEME    LE9ON 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE. 


I.    THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    USED    IN    FRENCH   AND    NOT   IN 
ENGLISH  : 

1.    Before  abstract  nouns,  when  taken  in  their  whole  extent,  as 


Vamiti€,  f.  friendship. 
la  paresse,  idleness. 
Vamour,  m.  love. 
la  vieillesse,  old  age. 


la  hont^,  goodness. 

I'occupation,  f.  employment. 

la  patience,  patience. 

la  jeunesse,  youth. 
Examples :  —  • 

Le  temps  est  pre'cieux,  time  is  precious. 
Le  vice  est  odieux,  vice  is  odious. 
La  modestie  est  une  belle  vertu,  modesty  is  a  fine  virtue. 
Jj'oocupation  est  le  meiUcur  remede  contre  Vennui. 
Occupation  is  the  best  remedy  against  wearisomcness. 


-...,, 


USE   OF  THE   ARTICLE.  219 

2.  Before  collective  names  of  corporations,  bodies,  governments, 
sciences,  religious  creeds,  seasons,  metals,  etc.,  as: 

La  noblesse,  nobility.  le  christianisrm,  Christianity. 

le  gouvernement,  government.  le  judatsme,  Judaism. 

la  monarchie,  monarchy.  I'lnver,  m.  winter. 

I'Mstoire,  f.  history.  I'or,  m.  gold. 

la  geographic,  geography.  le  fer,  iron. 

3.  Before  words  which  represent  a  whole  genus  or  species,  as  : , 

L'homme  est  mortd,  man  is  mortal. 

Les  voix  des  animaux  sont  tres-diffe'rentes. 

The  voices  of  animals  are  very  different. 

4.  Before  the  following  and  other  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense : 
L'homme,  man.  la  hi,  law. 

les  hommes,  men.  le  sort,  fate.  * 

le  del,  heaven.  ,  I'usage,  la  coutume,  custom, 

la  terre,  earth.  les  mceurs,  manners. 

la  vie,  life.  la  faim,  hunger. 

la  mort,  death.  la  soif,  thirst. 

le  temps,  time.  le  diner,  dinner. 

le  malheur,  misfortune.  le  dejeuner,  breakfast. 

5.  When  particular  parts  or  quahties  of  an  organic  body  aro 
mentioned,  as : 

Ce  gargon  a  la  tete  tres-petite. 

This  boy  has  a  very  little  head. 

Cette  'femme  a  la  louche  petite  et  les  yeux  hleus. 

This  woman  has  a  little  mouth  and  blue  eyes. 

Le  hup  a  la  tete  longue,  le  nez  effile  et  les  oreilles  etroites. 

The  wolf  has  a  long  head,  a  thin  nose,  and  small  ears. 

La  JUle  aux  yeux  hleus,  the  blue-eyed  girl. 

6.  '  When  in  English  the  possessive  case  is  used,  as : 
My  father's  house,  la  maison  de  mon  pere. 

The  king's  palace,  le  palais  du  roi. 

7.  Before  adjectives  used  substantively,  as  ; 
J'airae  le  vert,  I  am  fond  of  green. 

Les  riches  ne  donnent  pas  toujours.  » 

Rich  men  do  not  always  give. 


220  III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

8.  Before  proper  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers,  moun- 
ta,ins,  and  winds,  as  : 

L'Angleterre  est  riclie,  England  is  rich. 

Le  mont  Vesuve,  Mount  Vesuvius. 

La  France  est  plus  gr-ande  que  Vltalie. 

France  is  larger  than  Italy. 

Note.  Further  particulars  on  proper  names  will  be  found  in  the  sixth 
lesson. 

'  9.    Before  nouns  of  dignity,  and  titles,  followed  by  proper  names, 
as : 

Admiral  Nelson,  Vamiral  Nelson. 
Professor  A.,  le  professeur  A. 

10.  The  definite  article  replaces  the  English  indefinite  article, 
"when  the  price  of  things  is  indicated,  as  : 

Three  francs  a  pound,  trois  francs  laoUvre. 
Five  francs  a  yard,  cinq  francs  le  metre. 

11.  In  the  following  phrases  the  definite  article  is  used  : 
A  l'€cole  —  a  V€glise,  at  or  to  school;  at  or  to  church. 

II  s'est  cass€  la  jamhe,  he  has  broken  his  leg. 

Uep€e  a  la  main,  a  sword  in  his  hand. 

Je  vous  souhaite  le  hon  jour,  I  wish  you  good  morning 
'''.     Je  n'ai  pas  le  temps,  I  have  not  time. 

n  n'a  pas  le  sou,  he  has  not  a  farthing. 

J'ai  mal  a  la  tete,  I  have  a  headache. 

J^ai  mal  aux  dents,  I  have  a  toothache. 
;     Soyez  le  hienvenu,  — la  hienvenue,  etc.,  be  welcome. 
t     La  semaine  pass^e  {dernier e),  last  week. 

12.  After  dont  between  nouns,  as  :  - 
Un  homme  dont  la  reputation  est  perdu,  est  malheureux, 

A  man  whose  good  reputation  is  lost  is  unhappy. 

^  II.       REPETITION    OP   THE   ARTICLE. 

The  article  must  be  repeated  in  French  before  every  substantive. 
Examples  : 

The  mind  and  heart,  V esprit  et  le  coeur* 

The  shoemaker,  hatter,  and  tailor. 

Le  hottier,  le  chapelier,  et  le  tailleur. 

I  have  bought  meat,  cheese,  and  fruits. 

J'ai  achet€  de  la  viande,  du  fromage  et  des  fruitst 


USE  OF  THE  ARTICLE.  221 

THEME  4. 

1.  Yirtue  is  the  highest^  good  (bien,  m.).  2.  Men  are  mortal. 
3.  Modesty  adorns^  youth.  4.  Human  life  is  short.  5.  Man  is 
liable^  to  a  variety  of  («  hien  des)  changes.*  6.  Gold  and  silver 
cannot  render*  man  happy.  7.  Men  of  {d'un)  real  genius^  are 
scarce.  8.  Black  and  white  are  two  opposite^  colors.  9.  Beauty 
and  wit^  are  valuable^  endowments  (avantages) ,  when  heightened 
(releves)  by  modesty.  10.  Iron  and  steel  are  more  useful  than 
gold  and  silver.  11.  How  much  a  pound  ?  12.  The  love  of  glory 
{Def.  art.),  the  fear  of  shame,^''  are  often  the  cause  of  great  valor. 
13.  Summer  is  warm,  but  winter  is  cold.  14.  The  instructions  of 
adversity  are  wholesome  (^salutaires) ,  though  unpleasing ;  ^^  the  les- 
sons of  prosperity  are  pleasing,  but  often  pernicious.  15.  Geograr 
phy  is  a  very  useful  science.  16.  Painting,^^  sculpture,  and  poe- 
try^^  belong  to  the  imaginatio/i.  17.  Good  and  bad  seem  to  be 
blended  (meles)  together  through  all  nature.  18.  Hypocrisy  is  an 
homage  which  vice  pays  (rend)  to  virtue.  19.  Do  you  know  Gen- 
eral Knox?  20.  Yes,  I  know  him.  21.  White  garments^*  are 
the  symbol  of  innocence.  22.  The  knife  and  fork  are  broken.  23. 
Let  us  go  to  church.  24.  The^  boys  were  at  school  this  morning. 
25.  Fear^*  and  ignorance  are  the  sources  of  superstitio/z.  26.  Good 
wine  is  sold  (se  vend)  [for]  four  shillings  a  bottle. 

1.  Grand.  2.  Orner.  3.  Sujet.  4.  Changement,  m.  5.  Rendre.  6.  Vrai  genie, 
7.  Oppose.  8.  Esprit.  9.  Precieux.  10.  La  honte.  11.  I>esagr6able.  12.  La 
jpeinture.    13.  La  poesie.    14.  Veiements.    15.  Peur,  f. 

III.       THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS     OMITTED  \ 

1.  Before  the  ordinal  numbers  which  come  after  the  names  of 
sovereigns,  as : 

Henry  the  Fourth,  Henri  quatre. 

Louis  the  Eighteenth,  Louis  XVIII  {dix-huit). 

George  the  Third,  George  trois. 

2.  Before  the  ordinal  numbers  used  in  quotations,  as : 
Book  the  first,  chapter  the  fifth. 
Livre  premier,  chapitre  cinq. 


222  III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

3.    Before  plus,  used  in  the  sense  of  the  more.     Ex. : 
Plus  je  la  vols,  plus  je  I'aime,  the  more  I  see  her,  the  more  I  love  her. 

IV.       THE   INDEFINITE   ARTICLE   IS    OMITTED   IN    FRENCH  I 

1.  Before  national  and  professional  names,  when  the  subject  is  a 
noun  or  personal  pronoun,  as : 

Je  suis  Anglais,  I  am  an  Englishman. 

Mon  pere  dlait  medecin,  my  father  was  a  physician. 

Note.  But  it  is  expressed  after  c'est  and  void  or  voila,  and  also  when  the 
noun  is  qualified. 

C'est  un  Anglais,  he  is  an  Englishman. 

Voici  un  officier,  here  is  an  ofiicer. 

M.  Dubois  etait  un  m€decin  distingu^,  Mr.  Dubois  was  a  distinguished  phy- 
sician. 

2.  It  is  also  omitted  in  appositions,  that  is,  when  a  substantive 
is  used  to  qualify  another,  as : 

L'avare,  comedie  par  Moliqfe,  the  Miser,  a  comedy  by  Moliere. 
Auguste,  Jils  de  M.  S.,  Augustus,  a  son  of  Mr.  S. 
Munich,  ville  d'Allemagne,  Munich,  a  city  of  Germany. 

3.  In  the  title  of  a  book  : 

A  French  grammar,  Grammaire  frangaise. 
A  history  of  England,  Histoire  d'Angleterre. 

4.  After  the  word  quel,  used  to  express  surprise  : 
What  a  noise  you  make  !  quel  bruit  vous  faites  ! 

5.  Before  the  words,  quantite,  a  quantity;  nombre,  a  numbc, 
force,  a  great  number,  when  they  are  used  adverbially.     Ex, : 

Je  I'ai  vu  nombre  de  fois,  I  have  seen  him  many  times. 
//  m'a  donn€  quantity  de  jolies  chases. 
He  gave  me  a  great  many  pretty  things. 

6.  The  indefinite  article  is  left  out  in  French  and  supplied  by 
par,  before  substantives  that  denote  time,  or  in  mentioning  what  is 
paid  for  salary,  wages,  etc. : 

Eive  guineas  a  month,  cinq  guin^espar  mois. 
So  much  a  lesson,  tant  par  lecon. 

7.  Sometimes  after  Jamais,  never,  as : 
Jamais  g€n€ral  ne  s'est  plus  distingu€. 

Never  has  a  general  distinguished  himself  more. 


USE   OF  THE  ARTICLE.  223 

8.   In  the  following  and  other  expressions,  in  which  the  noun  and 
verb  are  inseparably  connneeted  : 
Trouver  moyen,  to  find  (a)  means. 
Faire  signe,  to  make  a  sign. 
Faire  present,  to  make  a  present. 
Mettre  Jin,  to  put  an  end  or  stop. 
Livrer  hataille,  to  fight  a  battle. 
Prendre  exemple,  to  take  an  example. 
Bendre  service,  to  retider  a  service. 
Ne  dire  mot,  to  say  not  a  word. 

THEME    5. 

1.  Book  the  tenth,  chapter  the  third.  2.*  Charles  the  Seconc?, 
king  of  (c?')  Spain,  son  of  Philip  the  Fourth,  left  his  kingdom  (roy- 
aume)  to  Philip  the  Fifth.  3.  William  the  Third,  king  of  Eng- 
land, married  (^epousd)  the  princess  Mary,  daughter  of  James 
(^Jacques)  the  Second.  4.  Apelles  was  a  painter.^  5.  Socrates'* 
was  a  philosopher,  Cicero^  an  orator  (^-teur).  6.  Is  your  father  a 
physician?  7.  No,  sir;  he  is  a  lawyer  {avocat),  8.  Henry's 
uncle  is  a  skilful^  physician.  9.  Who  is  that  gentleman  ?^  10.  He 
is  {c'est)  an  officer.  11.  How  much  do  you  charge  {demandez- 
vous)  for  your  lessons?  12.  I  charge  ten  francs  a  lesson.  13.  A 
Grerman  Grammar.  14.  A  Roman  history,  from  the  foundation^  of 
Rome  to  {jusqu^a)  the  destructioTi  of  the  Roman  empire.  15. 
What  an  unhappy  situation  !  16.  How  much  does  the  bookseller^ 
pay  you  for  your  novels?^  17.  He  pays  me  five  crowns  {ecus)  a 
sheet.^  18.  We  went  to  Cae^z,  a  large  town  of  Normandy.^^  19. 
The  Duke  of  York,  a  prince  of  the  blood  royal.  20.  I  am  read- 
ing the  "  Misanthrope,"  a  comedy  by  Moliere.  21.  I  shall  find  a 
means  to  satisfy^^  him.  22.  He  said  not  a  word.  23.  Our  neigh- 
bor made  us  a  sign  to  leave^^  the  room. 

1.  Peintre.  2.  Socrate.  3.  Ciceron.  4.  Habile.  5.  Monsieur.  6.  Fondation, 
1.  Lihraire.  8.  Roman,  m.  9.  Feuille.  10.  De  Normandie.  11.  Satisfaire.  12, 
Quitter. 


224  III.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

V.   THE  ARTICLE  IS  OMITTED  IN  BOTH  LANGUAGES  I 

1.  In  many  proverbs,  as : 

Contentenient  passe  richesse,  content  surpasses  wealth. 
Pauvrete  n'est  pas  vice,  poverty  is  no  disgrace. 
Mauvaise  kerbe  croit  toujours. 

2.  In  enumerating  several  substantives  in  the  partitive  sense, 
when  summed  up  by  tons  or  rien,  as  : 

Homines,  femmes,  enfants,  tons  voulaient  le  voir. 
Men,  women,  children,  all  wished  to  see  him. 

3.  After  ni  —  ni,  soit  —  soit,  when  the  nouns  are  taken  in  the 
partitive  sense,  as :     ^ 

Ni  or  ni  argent,  neither  gold  nor  silver. 
Ni  prieres,  ni  menaces  ne  pouvaient  ['engager  a,  etc. 
Neither  prayers  nor  threats  could  induce  him  to,  etc. 
Soit  crainte,  soit  ignorance,  il  ne  voulait  rien  dire. 
Be  it  fear  or  ignorance,  he  would  say  nothing. 

4.  The  partitive  article  is  further  omitted  after  prepositions  when 
the  noun  following  forms  with  them  an  adverbial  phrase,  as  : 

Avec  plaisir,  with  pleasure.  par  jour,  daily,  a  day. 

avec  patience,  with  patience.  '         par  an,  yearly,  a  year. 

avec  soin,  with  care.  par  mois,  monthly,  a  month. 

avec  deqance,  elegantly.  sur  mer,  }  .  ^      , 

r  bv  water  bv  sea. 
sans  argent,  Avithout  money.  par  mer,  j    *^  '    J        ' 

sans  facons,  without  ceremonies.  sur  terre,  )  ,     ,      , 

.         .  ,  ,1  r  by  land. 

sans  peine,  without  trouble.  par  terre,  ) 

sans  peril,  without  danger.  sous  peine  de  mort,  on  pain  of  death. 

5.  No  article  is  used  before  -a  substantive  which  is  repeated  with 
a  preposition,  as : 

Promesses  sur  promesses,  promises  upon  promises. 
De  temps  en  temps,  from  time  to  time. 
De  siecle  en  siecle,  from  age  to  age. 

6.  In  the  following  expressions,  where  the  noun  forms  but  one 
idea  with  the  verb  antecedent,  as : 

Avoir  /aim,  to  be  hungry.     '^  prendre  patience,  to  have  patience. 

avoir  soif,  to  be  thksty.  prendre  soin,  to  take  care. 


USE   OF  THE  ARTICLE.  225 

avoir  soin,  to  take  care.  Jaire  grace,  to  grant  pardon. 

avoir  peur,  to  be  afraid.  /aire  attention,  to  pay  attention. 

avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  well.  faire  grand  cas,  to  value. 

avoir  pitie,  to  have  pity.  faire  peur,  to  frighten. 

avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed. '  faire  mention,  to  mention. 

avoir  raison,  to  be  right.  faire  fortune,  to  make  one's  fortune. 


avoir  tort,  to  be  wi'ong.  rendre  compt , 

'  to  account  for. 


avoir  sujet,  to  have  occasion  for.  rendre  raison,  ) 
avoir  dessein,  to  intend.  rendre  visite,  to  visit. 
avoir  envie,  to  have  a  desire,  a  mind.       porter  envie,  to  envy. 
avoir  besoin,  to  want.  courir  risque,  to  run  risk. 
avoir  coutume,  to  be  in  the  habit,  to    demander  pardon,  to  beg  one's  par- 
use,  don. 
prendre  part,  to  join.  demander  grace,  to  beg  for  grace. 
prendre  garde,  to  take  care.  ajouter  foi,  to  give  credit. 
prendre  conge',  to  take  leave. 

7.    Further,  after  many  verbs  which  are  followed  by  de,  a,  or  e», 
as :  — 

Combkr  de  bienfaits,  to  load  with  benefits. 
Vivre  de  pain,  to  live  upon  bread. 
Monter  a  cJieval,  to  mount  (get)  on  horseback. 
Monter  en  voiture,  to  enter  a  carriage. 
Tomber  de  cheval,  to  fall  from  Horseback. 
Descendre  de  cheval,  to  alight. 
Se  mettre  a  table,  to  go  to  dinner. 
Se  lever  de  table,  to  rise  from  dinner. 
Perdre  de  vue,  to  lose  sight  of. 
Mourir  de  faim,  to  die  of  hunger. 
Monrir  de  froid,  to  die  of  cold,  to  freeze. 
Trembler  de  peur,  to  tremble  with  fear. 
Etre  malade  de  chagrin,  to  be  ill  with  grief. 


THEME  6. 

1.  Charity^  begins  at  home  (par  soi-meme).  2.  Necessity  has 
no  law  (loi).  3.  Games,^  conversatio/i,  theatre,  nothing  diverts 
(distrait)  him.  4.  Nobody  was  satisfied ;  father,  uncles,  aunts  and 
brothers,  all  thought  themselves  (se  crurent)  neglected.^  5.  This 
man  has  neither  vices  nor  virtues ;  neither  talents  nor  defects.*  6.. 
15 


226  HI.      TROISIEME  LEgON. 

We  expected  our  friend  from  day  to  day.  7.  It  does  not  suffice  to 
heap  (^d'entasser)  facts^  upon  facts  to  load^  your  memory ;  you  must 
exercise'  also  your  judgment.^  8.  I  shall  do  it  with  pleasure.  9. 
One  florin  a  day.  10.  Ten  pounds  a  year.  11.  The  poor  woman 
was  starving  with  hunger  and  (with)  cold.  12.  You  are  always 
right ;  I  have  been  wrong.  13.  Have  pity  on  (de)  my  weakness.* 
14.  The  least  noise^'^  frightens  me.  15.  Thoso  whu»  speak  without 
reflection,  are  exposed  to  many  («  Men  des)  errors.  16.  I  must 
take  leave  of  you.  17.  Many  poor  people  live  on  (c?e)  bread  and 
potatoes  only.     18.  The  king  has  granted  {fait)  him  [his]  pardow. 

1.  Charite.     2.  Jeu^  m.     3.  Negliges.     4.  Defaut.     5.  Le  fait.    6.  Charger.    7. 
Exercer.    8.  Jugement.    9.  Faiblesse.    10.  Bruit,  va.. 


READING  LESSON. 
DEMOSTHijNB. 


Demosthene,  jeune  homme  d'Athenes,  avait  grande  envie  de  de- 
venir  orateur  habile ;  mais  la  nature  semblait  lui  en  avoir  refuse  tous 
les  moyens. 

D'abord  il  begayait^  a  I'exces ;  puis  il  ne  pouvait  prononcer  la 
lettre  R.  ;  ensuite  il  avait  une  voix  desagreable  et  glapissante,^  et  de 
faibles  poumons.^  D'autres  ajoutent  qu'il  avait  encore  la  mauvaise 
habitude  de  lever  I'epaule^,  quand  il  avait  prononce  trois  ou  quatre 
mots.  Aussi,  la  premiere  fois  qu'il  harangua  le  peuple,  il  s'en  tira 
si  mal,  qu'il  fut  siffle^. 

Tout  autre  que  lui  aurait  a  jamais  perdu  courage.  Mais  Demos- 
thene prit  patience  et  resolut,  en  d^pit^  de  la  nature,  de  devenir  boa 
orateur,  et  il  le  devint.     Ecoutez  comment  il  s'y  prit/ 

Quelquefois  il  allait  au  bori  de  la  mer,  dans  I'endroit  ou  les 
vagues^  venaient  se  briser  (break')  avec  fracas.*  La,  il  debitait^*  un 
discours  a  haute  voix,  pour  s'accoutumer  a  dominer  le  tumulte  d'une 
assemblee  populaire. 

D'autres  fois,  il  mettait  dans  sa  bouche  de  petits  cailloux  {peb- 
bles) ;  puis  il  courait  en  gravissant^^  une  montagne  et  en  declamant, 


USE   OF  THE  ARTICLE. 


227 


afin  de  se  contraindre^  a  prononcer  clairement  jusqu'a  la  moindre 
syllabe. 

Enfin,  on  dit  qu'il  s'exer9ait  a  parler  dans  une  cliambre  souter- 
raine,^^  et  que  pour  se  mettre  dans  la  necessite  de  rester  longtemps 
enferme,  il  s'etait  fait  raser^''  la  moitie  de  la  tete. 

II  se  plagait  des  heures  entieres  devant  un  miroir,  pour  se  donner 
une  bonne  contenance  et  des  gestes  convenables.  On  dit  qu'il  se 
mettait  aussi  I'epaule  nue  immediatement  sous  la  pointe  d'une 
epee,^*  afin  qu'elle  le  piquat,^''  toutes  les  fois  que,  d'apres  sa  mau- 
vaise  habitude,  il  ferait  son  mouvement  d'epaule. 

C 'est  par  des  exercices  soutenus^^  de  ce  genre,  joints  a  une  etude 
profonde  des  sciences,  qu'il  se  rendit  enfin  le  plus  grand  orateur  qui 
ait  existe ;  et  aujourd'hui  encore,  apres  tant  de  siecles,^^  ses  ha- 
rangues sent  admirees  comme  des  chefs-d'oeuvre  d'eloquence. 

1.  To  stammer.  2.  Shrill.  3.  Lungs.  4.  Shoulder.  5.  To  hiss.  6.  In  spite  of. 
7.  To  manage.  8.  The  waves.  9.  Noise.  10.  To  deliver.  11.  To  climb.  12.  To 
force.  13.  Subterranean.  14.  To  shave.  15.  A  sword.  16.  To  sting.  17.  Con- 
tinued.   18.  Century. 


CONVERSATION. 

« 

La   nature    avait-elle    favorise     Au    contraire,    elle    semblait   lui 
Demosthene?  avoir  refuse  tous    les    moyens 

de  devenir  orateur. 
Quels  di^fauts  avait-il  done  ?  II  begayait  et  ne  pouvait  pronon- 

cer la  lettre  r. 
Comment  ^tait  sa  voix  ?  Elle  etait  desagreable  et  glapis- 

sante. 
Comment  s'en  tira-t-il,  lorsqu'il     II  s'en  tira  si  mal  qu'il  fut  sifB4 
pronon9a    son    premier   dis-         (hissed). 
cours  ? 
Fut-il  decourage  par  co  resul-     Non,  il  ne  perdit  pas  courage;  au 
tat?  contraire,  il  persista   dans   son 

desscin. 
Et  comment  s'y  prit-il  ?         "        II  s'exer9ait  continuellement  et  do 

differentes  manieres. 


228  IV.      QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

Dites-moi  comment.  II  mettait  de  petits  cailloux  dans  sa 

bouche  pour  se  defaire  (rid  of) 
de  I'habitude  de  begayer. 

Esfc-ce  qu'il  r^ussit  dans  ses  ef-  II  r^ussit  si  parfaitement  qu'il  de- 
forts  ?  vint  a  la  fin  le  plus  grand  ora- 

teur  qui  ait  existe. 

Ses  harangues  existent-elles  en-  Oui,  elles  ont  ^te  conserv^es,  et 
core  ?  elles  sont  encore  aujourd'hui  ad- 

mirees  comme  des  chefs-d'oeuvre 
d'eloquence. 


lY.     QUATRIEME    LE9ON. 


SPECIAL  USE  OF  DE  AND  A. 

* 

In  general  we  may  say  de  is  used  when  made  of,  composed  of,  coming 
from,  belonging  to,  can  be  understood ;  whereas  a  is  employed  when  for  the 
purpose  of  is  meant. 

I.    DE   IS   USED  : 

1.  After  adverbs  of  quantity,  as  :  heaucoup,  peu,  plus,  moins, 
tant,  etc.     (See  Part  I.  L.  6,  p.  42.) 

2.  Before  a  limiting  word  which  follows  a  noun  used  partitively 
and  preceded  by  a  word  denoting  quality.     Ex. :  — 

II  y  cut  deux  hommes  de  tu^s,  there  were  two  men  killed. 
Void  qudque  chose  de  plus,  here  is  something  more. 
Void  un  homme  de  trop,  here  is  a  man  too  many. 
J'ai  deux  chambres  de  loupes,  I  have  two  rooms  let. 

Note.  The  noun  may  be  understood.  Ex.:  J'en  ai  une  de  lon€e.  Or 
Hen  or  personne  may  supply  the  place  of  the  noun  and  its  preceding  word^ 
Ex.:  //  n'y  a  personne  de  malade  chez  nous,  there  is  no  one  sick  at  our  house. 
Rien  de  bon,  nothing  good. 


SPECIAL  USE   OF  DE   AND   A.  229 

8.  As  in  English,  after  nouns  expressing  quantity,  number ^ 
measure,  weight,  etc.,  as  :  — 

Une  quantitede  noix,  a  quantity  of  walnuts. 
Unepaire  de  has,  a  pair  of  stockings. 
Une  livre  de  beurre,  a  pound  of  butter. 
Une  piece  de  toile,  a  piece  of  linen. 
Un  morceau  de  fromage,  a  piece  of  cheese. 
Une  main  de  papier,  a  quire  of  paper. 
Une  houteille  de  vin,  a  bottle  of  wine. 

4.  After  adjectives  denoting  dimension  or  age,  as  :  ■— 

A  wall  twenty  feet  high :  un  mur  haul  de  vingt  pieds  or  un  mur  qui  a  vingt 
pieds  DE  haut  or  de  hauteur. 

A  boy  ten  years  old,  un  (petit)  gargon  de  dix  ans. 

A  table  six  feet  long,  une  table  longue  de  six  pieds  or  de  six  pieds  de 
longueur. 

Note.  It  may  be  observed  here  that  with  adjectives  of  dimension,  the 
verb  to  he  may  be  rendered  in  French  by  avoir,  as  :  — 
This  tower  is  120  feet  high. 
Cette  tour  a  cent  vingt  pieds  de  hauteur. 

5.  When  an  English  adjective  is  rendered  in  French  by  a  noun, 
the  order  of  the  substantives  is  inverted  in  English.  In  French  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  c?e.     Ex.:  — 

A  witty  man,  un  homme  d'esprit, 

A  gold  watch,  une  montre  d'or. 

Silk  stockings,  des  has  de  soie. 

The  Russian  Ambassador,  Vamhassadeur  de  Russie, 

Irish  linen,  la  toile  d'Irlande. 

Spanish  wool,  la  laine  d'Espagne. 

Burgundy  wine,  le  vin  de  Bourgogne. 

6.  i>e  is  used,  as  in  English,  after  a  common  noun  followed  by 
its  proper  name .     Ex . :  — 

Le  royaume  d'Espagne,  the  kingdom  of  Spain. 
L'ile  de  Make,  the  island  of  Malta. 
La  ville  de  Londres,  the  city  of  London. 
Le  lac  de  Geneve,  the  lake  of  GcneVa. 

Except  the  combinations  with  mont,  rue,  place,  and  e'glise,  as :  le  Mont 
Blanc,  le  Mont  Etna,  rue  Richelieu,  place  Vendome,  I'dglise  Saint-Sulpice,  etc. 


230  IV.      QUATRIEME    LEgON. 

7.  After  many  adjectives  it  takes  the  place  of  the  English  with^ 
from,  of,  hy,  in,  etc.     (See  L.  8,  compl.  of  adj.  1.)      Ex.:  — 

Full  of  ardor,  plein  de  feu. 

Greedy  after  money,  avide  d'argent. 

Dresised  in  black,  vetu  de  noir. 

I  am  pleased  with  my  situation. 

Je  suis  content  de  ma  position. 

I  am  deprived  of  everything,  je  suispriv^de  tout. 

8.  JDe  is  used  for  than,  instead  of  que,  after  plus,  more,  and 
moins,  less,  when  these  adverbs  are  followed  by  a  numeral  adjective 
or  substantive :  — 

H  a  plus  de  six  ans,  he  is  more  than  six  years  old. 

9.  For  in,  after  a  superlative,  before  the  name  of  a  place  :  — 

Une  des  meilleures  institutions  de  Boston,  one  of  the  best  institutions  in 
Boston. 

Les  gav^ons  de  notre  ^cole,  the  boys  in  our  school. 

FRENCH   COMPOUND   NOUNS   WITH   DE. 

^  10.  English  nouns  compounded  with  two  substantives  are  gener- 
ally rendered  in  French  by  two  separate  substantives  joined  by  de, 
when  one  expresses  the  nature,  species,  or  quality  of  the  other. 
(Compare  p.  240,  2.)  In  French  the  order  must  be  altered,  the 
last  coming  first,  and  a  preposition  inserted.  Westminster  bridge, 
for  instance,  must  be  translated  as  if  it  were  bridge  of  Westminster : 
le  pont  de  Westminster. 

1 .  Z)e  is  used  when  coining  from,  belonging  to,  made  of  can  be  understood, 
as:  — 

A  toothache,  un  mal  de  dents. 

A  headache,,"Mn  mal  de  tete. 

The  town-hall,  I'hotel  de  ville. 

A  sea-fish,  un  poisson  de  mer. 

A  feather-bed,  un  lit  de  plumes. 

A  holiday,  un  jour  de  fete. 

A  gold  mine,  une  mine  d'or.  ,  ' 

The  moon-light,  le  clair  de  lune. 

A  masterpiece,  un  chef-d'ceuvre. 


SPECIAL   USE   OF  DE  AND   A.  231 

2.  When  in  the  English  word  the  second  component  denotes  a  person  or 
an  animal,  in  French  de  is  always  used,  as  :  — 
A  schoolmaster,  un  maitre  d'^cole. 
A  chambermaid,  une  femme  de  chamhre. 
The  dancing-master,  le  maitre  de  danse. 
The  music-mistress,  la  maitresse  de  musique. 
A  saddle-horse,  un  cheval  de  sdle. 
A  sea-fish,  un  poisson  de  mer. 

THEME    7. 

1.  Give  me  mucli  bread  and  little  meat.  2.  You  must  use  more 
prudence.  3.  I  have  bought  a  quantity  of  apples  and  pears.  4. 
You  make  too  much  noise.  5.  How  many  children  has  your  aunt? 
6.  She  has  four  children.  7.  You  have  eaten  too  many  cherries. 
8.  We  have  not  bread  enough.*  9.  Mr.  Henry  has  a  great  many 
friends.  10.  We  had  a  great  deal  of  pleasure.  11.  I  bought  a 
pound  of  cheese.  12.  We  want  a  dozen  pens,  a  bottle  of  ink,  and 
two  quires  of  paper.  13.  A  great  number  of  friends  remained 
attached^  to  me.  14.  They  have  built  a  wall  eighty  feet  long  and 
ten  feet  high.  15.  How  many  boys  were  there  killed  ?  16.  There 
were  six  killed  (see  §  2).  17.  How  many  soldiers  were  there 
wounded?  18.  There  were  six  books  lost.  19.  How  many  were 
there  found?  20.  How  many  rooms  are  there  let  in  that  house? 
21.  Have  you  anything  good?  22.  I  have  nothing  bad.  23. 
When  my  sister  was  a  gu-1  of  seven  years,  she  hved  with  my  mother 
in  Italy.  24.  Have  you  a  gold  or  a  silver  watch  ?  25.  My  watch 
is  of  gold.  26.  Irish  linen  is  as^  good  as  Dutch^  linen.  27.  I 
prefer  Burgundy  wine  to  Spanish  wine.  28.  The  kingdom  of  Spain 
is  larger  than  the  kingdom  of  Portugal.  29.  The  city  of  Paris  is 
older  than  the  city  of  Berliw.  30.  Is  that  gentleman*  your  music- 
master?     31.    No ;  he  is  my  writings-master. 

1.  Attaches.    2.  Aussi.    3.  D^Hollande.    4.  Monsieur.    5.  ]^criture,f. 


*  Assez,  enough,  is  placed  after  the  substantive  in  English,  and  always  before  in 
French. 


232 


IV.      QUATRIEME   LEgON. 


THEME  8. 


1.  To-morrow  is  (c'est)  a  holiday;  it  will  be  a  day  of  happi- 
ness.^ 2.  Human  life  is  full  of  disappointments.^  8.  Mr.  E. 
is  a  young  man  endowed*  with  {d')  wit^  and  judgment.  4.  We 
were  very  much  pleased  with  his  behavior.^  6.  I  was  in  England, 
but  I  have  not  seen  Westminster  bridge.  6.  Burgundy  wine  is 
very  dear.  7.  Spanish  wool  is  better  than  German  wool.  8.  I 
have  sold  my  gold  watch.  9.  Mr.  B.  always  wears^  silk  stockings. 
10.  My  sisters  and  I  (we)  have  taken^  a  walk  by  («w)  moonlight. 
li.  The  battle-field  was  covered  with  the  dead  and  dying.  12. 
This  girl  is  the  chambermaid  of  the  Duchess  of  L.  13.  Who  are 
these  gentlemen  ?  14.  One  is  my  music-master,  and  the  other  is 
my  sister's  dancing-master.  15.  Let  us  go  to  (allons  dans)  the 
dining-room;  dinner  is  served  (servi).  16.  I  shall  not  dine  to- 
day ;  I  have  a  bad^  headache. 

1.  Fete.  2.  Bonheur.  .3.  Revere.  4.  DouL  5.  Esprit,  6.  Conduite,  f.  7.  Por- 
ter.   8.  To  take  a  walk  =  se  promener.    9.  Violent. 

II,       SPECIAL   USE   OF    a. 

1.  The  preposition  a  alone  (without  article)  is  used  after  a  verb 
in  the  following  expressions : 

Condamner  a  mort,  to  condemn  to  death. 

Fermer  a  fief,  to  lock. 

Tomher  a  terre,  to  fall  to  the  floor  or  ground. 

Aller  a  pied,  to  go  on  foot,  to  walk. 

Aller  a  cheval,  to  ride,  to  go  on  horseback. 

Monter  a  cheval,  to  get  or  mount  on  horseback. 

Tomher  a  qenoux,     >        ,        .    , 

^  f  >•  to  kneel  down. 

be  mettre  a  genoux,  ) 

Se  mettre  a  table,  to  sit  down  to  dinner. 

2.  When  two  substantives  make  a  compound  word  in  English, 
theu-  order  is  inverted  in  French,  and  the  preposition  a  intervenes, 
when  the  one  expresses  the  use  of  the  other,  or  when  for  the  pur- 
pose of,  by  means  of,  may  be  understood : 

The  silk-worm,  le  ver  a  soie. 


SPECIAL   USE    OF  DE   AND  AT  233 

.    A  milk-pot,  un  pot  a  lait.* 

A  teacup,  une  tasse  a  tM. 

A  repeater,  une  montre  a  repetition. 

A  windmill,  un  mouUn  a  vent. 

A  paper-mill,  un  moulin  a  papier. 

A  powder-mill  (a  mill  for  powder),  un  moulin  a  poudre. 

Gunpowder,  de  la  poudre  a  canon. 

A  dining-room,  une  salle  a  manger. 

A  bedroom,  une  chambre  a  coucher. 

A  wineglass,  un  verre  a  vin.* 

A  coffee-cup,  une  tasse  a  caf€. 

A  steam-engine,  une  machine  a  vapeur. 

A  steamboat,  un  bateau  a  vapeur. 

Fire-arms,  des  armes  a  feu. 

3.   If  the  second  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  the  article 
is  commonly  inserted,  as : 

An  ink-bottle,  une  bouteille  a  Vencre  (ox  a  encre). 

A  water-jug  (pitcher),  une  cruche  a  Veau  (or  a  eau). 

4c.  When  the  compound  word  denotes  a  place  where  certain  things 
are  sold  or  kept  in  quantities,  the  article  is  also  used  with  a,  as  : 
The  horse-market,  le  march€  aux  chevaux. 
The  fish-market,  le  march€  aux  poissons. 
The  corn-market,  la  kalle  aux  bUs. 

5.  A  together  with  the  article  is  further  used  to  call  a  dish  or 
drink  after  its  principal  ingredient,  as : 

A  ^nilk-soup,  une  soupe  au  lait. 
Coffee  with  milk,  du  caf€  au  lait. 
A  cream-tart,  une  tarte  a  la  crime. 
A  pancake  with  herbs,  une  omelette  aux  fines  herbes. 

Note.    But  we  say  du  syrop  de  groseille,  not  sr/rop  a  groseille,  currant- 
syrup,  because  this  is  made  entirely  of  currants. 

6.  To  denote  the  different  kinds  of  hunting,  shooting,  etc.,  as : 

A  deer-hunt,  la  chasse  aux  chevreuils. 
Fox-hunting,  la  chasse  aux  renards. 

7.  ^  is  generally  employed  to  translate  expressions  in  which  with 

*  Un  pot  de  lait,  un  verre  de  vin,  signify  a  pot  of  milk,  a  glass  of  wine;  pot  au 
lait  refers  both  to  the  vessel  and  to  its  contents. 


234  IV.      QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

is  expressed  or  could  be  employed,  or  when  having  could  be  used, 
Ex.: 

Une  maison  a  deux  ^ages,  a  two-story  house. 
Un  cJiapeau  a  grands  lords,  a  broad-brimmed  hat. 
Une  voiture  a  deux  places,  a  double-seated  carriage. 

THEME   9. 

1.  I  have  bought  six  teacups ;  take^  them  into  the  dining-room. 
2.  Where  is  the  oiP-bottle  ?  3.  Who  has  broken  this  jlower-pot  ? 
4.  Bring  me  a  wineglass  and  two  teaspoons.  5.  Why  has  he 
been  condemned  to  death  ?  6.  He  has  committed^  a  murder.  7. 
Your  room  is  locked.  8.  Is  this  an  ink-bottle  ?  9.  No ;  it  is  a 
vinegars-bottle.  10.  Let  us  sit  down  (mettons-nous)  to  dinner.  11. 
Did  you  observe^  that  man  with^  black  hair  ?  12.  You  must  buy 
another  milk-pot.  13.  Is  this  the  corn-market'^  14.  I  always 
keep  (keep  always)  fire-arms  in  my  bedroom  for  my  safety  during 
the  night ;  but  I  have  no  gunpowder  at  present,  thus  (ainsi)  my 
fire-arms  are  useless.^ 

1.  Portez.    2.  Huile,  f.    3.  Commls,  P.  p.  of  commettre.    4.  Vinaigre,    5.  Remar- 
quer.    6.  Aux,  pi.     7.  Surete,  f.    8.  Inutile. 

THEME    10. 

1.  Whom  have  you  called  ?  2.  I  have  been  to  the  fish-market ; 
however  I  have  bought  no  fish,  because  it  was  too  dear.^  3.  I  went 
fox-hunting  yesterday,  and  to-morrow  I  shall  see  a  deer-hunt.  4. 
What  had  you  for  dessert  ?  5.  We  had  cherry-pie''  and  a  crearr? 
tart.*^  6.  Can  you  tell  me  where  the  hay-store  is?  7.  It  is 
near  the  horse-market.  8.  Who  invented  gunpowder'^  9.  Ber- 
thold  Schwarz,  a  German  monk.*  10.  The  poor  girl  has  broken  a 
milk-pot,  two  wineglasses,  and  several  teacups.  11.  The  Great 
Eastern  is  the  largest  steamship  in  the  (au)  world.  12.  Call  the 
milk- woman  f  I  must  buy  a  pot  of  milk. 

1.  Cher,    2.  Gateau.    3.  Crime,  f.    4.  Tourte,  f.    5.  Moine.    6.  Laitikre. 


NAMES  OF  COUNTRIES,  TOWNS,  ETC.  235 

Y.     CINQUIEME    LE9ON. 


PECULIARITIES  IN  THE  USE  OF  NAMES   OF 
COUNTRIES,   TOWNS,  ETC. 

(See  Part  I.,  L.  VII.) 

1.  As  mentioned  in  the  First  Part  (7tli  lesson),  the  definite  ar- 
ticle is  put  before  the  names  of  countries,  provinces,  rivers,  and 
mountains.  But  the  names  of  countries  and  islands,  which  have  the 
same  name  as  cities  situated  in  them,  such  as  Naples,  Bade,  Genes 
(Genoa),  Malte,  Gandie,  etc.,  are  used  without  the  article. 

Except,  however :  le  Hanovre  and  le  Luxembourg. 

2.  Further,  the  definite  article  is  always  retained  with  names  of 
countries  which  are  only  used  in  the  plural,  and  in  those  which  are 
compounded  with  an  adjective.     Ex.:  -^— 

The  productions  of  India,  les  productions  des  Indes. 
The  governor  of  the  Netherlands. 
Le  gouverneur  des  Pays-has. 
The  queen  of  Great  Britain. 
La  reine  de  la  Grande-Bretagne. 

3.  In  the  following  cases  de  only,  without  the  article,  is  used  be- 
fore names  of  countries  :  — 

1.   "When  sovereigns,  courts,  and  titles  are  spoken  of.    Ex.:  — • 
La  reine  d'Angleterre,  the  queen  of  England. 
Le  Grand-due  de  Bade,  the  grand-duke  of  Baden. 

Note.  With  the  names  of  some  countries  that  are  not  European,  the 
article  is  generally  used,  as  :  — 

L'empereur  de  la  Chine,  du  Br€sil,  etc. 

The  emperor  of  China,  of  Brazil,  etc. 

However,  with  Persia,  la  Perse,  and  Egypt,  VEgypte,  only  de  is  used  :  — 

Le  roi  de  Perse,  the  king  of  Persia. 


236  V.      CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

2.  WherQ  the  names  of  countries  hare  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  (see 
also  L,  IV.  4),  as  :  — 

L'argent  de  France,  French  money. 

La  soie  d'ltalie,  the  silk  of  Italy. 

Du  fromage  de  Suisse,  Swiss  cheese  (de  may  be  omitted). 

3.  After  the  verbs  :  venir,  to  come ;  revenir,  to  come  back,  to  return ;  ar- 
river,  to  arrive,  and  the  noun  le  retour,  if  the  name  of  the  country  is  femi- 
nine, as :  — 

//  est  venu  de  France,  he  has  come  from  France. 

Lorsque  je  revins  d'Espagne,  when  I  returned  from  Spain. 

A  mon  retour  d'ltalie,  on  my  return  from  Italy. 

But  if  the  same  is  masculine,  the  definite  article  is  used,  as :  — 

J*arnve  du  Tyrol,  du  Mexique,  du  Portugal,  etc. 

4.  After  words,  such  as  empire,  royaume  (kingdom),  ducM,  ville,  tie  (isle), 
as  in  English  (see  L.  IV.  6)  :  — 

L'empire  d'Autriche,  the  Empire  of  Austria. 
La  ville  de  Paris,  the  city  of  Paris. 

4.  Both  to  and  in  used  after  a  word  signifying  going,  coming, 
sending,  living,  being,  etc.,  before  names  of  countries  in  the  singu- 
lar, must  be  rendered  in  French  by  the  preposition  en,  without  any 
article.     Ex. :  — 

"We  are  going  to  America,  nous  allons  en  Am&ique. 

He  is  to  go  back  to  Belgium,  il  doit  retour ner  en  Bdgique. 

I  send  him  to  Switzerland,  je  I'envoie  en  Suisse. 

My  brother  is  in  America,  mon  frere  est  en  Am€rique. 

Rouen  is  in  France,  Rouen  est  situ^e  en  France. 

5.  If  the  name  of  the  country  be  accompanied  by  an  adjective, 
da7is  with  the  definite  article  must  be  used : 

Dans  la  Suisse  francaise,  in  French  Switzerland. 
Dans  VAllemagne  meridionale,  in  southern  Germany. 

6.  The  article  is  omitted  before  names  of  towns,  villages,  etc., 
as:  — 

Anvers,  Antwerp.  Livourne,  Leghorn. 

Athcnes,  Athens.  Lishonne,  Lisbon. 

Bruxelles,  Brussels.  Londres,  London. 

Douvres,  Dover.  Lyon,  Lyohs. 

Geneve,  Geneva.  Venise,  Venice. 


NAMES  OF  COUNTRIES,   TOWNS,  ETC.  237 

Note.   A  few  names  of  towns  are  preceded  by  the  article  :  — 
Le  Havre,  Havre.  la  Rochelle,  Rochelle. 

la  Ilaie,  the  Hague.  le  Caire,  Cairo,  etc. 

7.  The  names  of  rivers  and  mountains  are  preceded  by  the  defi- 
nite article,  as  in  English  : 

La  Seine,  the  Seine.  le  Tibre,  the  Tiber. 

le  Rhone,  the  Rhone.  le  Danube,  the  Danube. 

le  Rhin,  the  Rhine.  la  Moselle,  the  Moselle. 

les  Alpes,  the  Alps.  le  Righi,  the  Righi. 

8.  Both  to  and  at  or  in  before  names  of  places  are  rendered  by 
a.     Ex.:  — 

Are  you  going  to  Brussels,  allez-vous  a  Bruxelles  9 

He  was  at  Rome  and  Naples,  il  etait  a  Rome  et  a  Naples. 

9.  After  partir,  to  set  out,  to  leave,  the  preposition  pour  must 
be  used  before  names  of  countries  with  the  article,  before  names  of 
cities  without  it :  — 

Nous  partirons  pour  VEspagne  et  le  Portugal. 
We  will  set  out  {or  leave)  for  Spain  and  Portugal. 
Elle  est  partie  pour  Paris  et  Lyon. 
She  left  for  Paris  and  Lyons. 

THEME  11. 

1.  I  prefer  the  wines  of  Germany  to  the  wines  of  France.  2. 
We  shall  soon  go  to  Switzerland  and  Italy.  3.  Naples  may  (pent') 
be  called  a  paradise,^  from  its  («  cause  de  sa)  beauty  and  fertility.^ 
4.  This  merchant  has  bought  Italian  silk,  Spanish  wool,  and  French 
wines.  5.  My  grandfather  lives  in  the  West  Indies.^  6.  I  set  otlt 
for  Egypt  to-morrow.  7.  This  cheese  comes  from  Switzerland.  8. 
Cologne  is  situated*  on  (swr)  the  Rhine.  9.  The  Alps  are  higtier 
than  the  Pyrenees.  10.  The  emperor  of  Russia,  Peter^  the  Great, 
died  at  St.  Petersburgh  in  the  year  (en)  1725.  11.  Sicily  is  the 
granary^  of  (§  1)  Italy,  and  Italy  the  garden  of  Europe. 

1.  Paradis,  m.     2.  Fertility.     3.  Les  Indes  occidentales.     4.  Situee.    5.  Pierre, 
6.  Grenier.m.  . 


238  V.     CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

READING  LESSON. 
CHARLES     XII.     (Douze.) 

Charles  XII,  roi  de  Suede,  naquit^  a  Stockholm  le  27  Juin  1682. 
II  perdit  sa  mere  dans  sa  onzieme  annee,  et  avait  a  peine  quinze  ans 
lorsque  son  pere  mounit.  Selon^  le  testament  du  feu^  roi,  il  ne  de- 
vait  etre  majeur^  qu'apres  avoir  passe  sa  dix-huitieme  annee,  mais 
sur  la  proposition  du  ministre  Piper,  les  4tats  lui  defererent*  le 
gouvernement  deja  en  1697.  L'an  1700,  Pierre  I,  empereur  de 
Kussie,  Frederic  IV,  roi  de  Danemark,  et  Augus^e,  ^lecteur  de 
Saxe,  lui  d^clarerent  la  guerre. 

II  les  attaqua  I'un  apres  I'autre  et  remporta  d'abord^  des  victoires 
^clatantes,^  entre  autres  celle  de  Narva,  ou  il  d^fit^  avec  moins  de^ 
8,000  Suedois,  quatre-vingt  mille  Kusses,  dont  il  resta  plus  de  vingt 
mille  sur  le  champ  de  bataille,  tandis  qu'il  ne  perdait  que  six  cents 
hommes.  Mais  plus  tard,  lorsqu'il  penetra  en  Russie,  il  perdit  la 
bataille  decisive  de  Pultawa,  et  fut  contraint  de  se  refugier  sur  le 
territoire  turc  avec  une  faible  escorte  de  deux  cent  cuiquante 
Suedois. 

1.  Was  born.     2.  According  to.     3.  Late.     4.  Of  age.     5.  To  transfer.     6.  At 
first.    7.  Splendid.    8.  To  defeat.    9.  Than. 

CONVERSATION. 

Oil  naquit  Charles  XII?  Ce  roi  naquit  a  Stockholm. 

Dans  quelle  annee  ?  En  1682,  le  27  Juin. 

Perdit-il  ses  parents  de  bonne  Oui,  il  perdit  sa  mere,  quand  il 
heure  ?  avait  11  ans,  et  son  pere,  quand 

il  avait  15  ans. 

Quand  fufc-il  declare  majeur  ?        En  1697,  k  Page  de  quinze  ans  et 

demi. 

Qu'arriva-t-il  trois  ans  apres  ?        Pierre   I,    empereur  de    Eussie, 

Frederic  IV,  roi  de  Danemark, 
et  Auguste,  electeur  de  Saxe, 
lui  declarerent  la  guerre. 

Que  fit  Charles  XII  ?  II  les  attaqua  I'un  apres  I'autre  et 

les  defit. 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


239 


Quelle   est   sa    plus   eclatante 

victoire  ? 
Avait-il  beaucoup  de  soldats  ? 
Y  eut-il  beaucoup  de  tues  ? 


A-i>-il  toujours  ete  heureux  dans 

ses  batailles? 
A  quoi  fut-il  contraiht  ? 


Celle    de    Narva,    oh.    il    battit 

80,000  Russes. 
II  n'avait  que  8,000  Suedois. 
Les  Russes  perdirent  plus  de  vingt 

mille   hommes,  les   Suedois   a 

peine  six  cents. 
Non,  il  perdit  la  bataille  de  Pul- 

tawa. 
II  fut  contraint  de  se  refugier  sur 

le  territoire  turc,  avec  une  faiblo 

fiscorte. 


YI.     SIXIEME    LE9ON, 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES. 

(See  the  First  Part,  L.  XII.) 
1.    Possessive  adjectives  must  be  repeated  :  — 

1 .  Before  every  noun  of  the  same  sentence,  as  :  — 
My  brothers  and  sisters  have  arrived. 

Mes  freres  et  mes  somrs  sont  arrives. 

2.  Before  two  or  three  adjectives  qualifying  different  things :  — 
I  love  your  great  and  your  little  cliildren. 

JTaime  vos  grands  et  vos  petits  enfants. 

Note.  But  when  the  two  substantives  relate  to  the  same  person,  and 
when  the  two  or  three  adjectives  are  of  the  like  signification*  and  qualify 
the  same  object,  the  possessive  adjective  is  not  repeated.     Ex.:  — 

My  teacher  and  friend,  mon  pr^cepteur  et  ami. 

His  good  and  useful  advice,  ses  bons  et  utiles  conseils. 

*  If  they  have  a  contrary  signification,  tho  possessive  acUective  must  be  repeated, 

as :  Ses  bonnes  et  ses  mauvaises  pens^es  (tlioughts). 


240  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 

2.  Custom  requires  the  use  of  the  possessive  adjective  before  the 
names  of  relations  in  addressing  them  or  speaking  of  them.    Ex.:  — 

Aunt,  when  do  you  leave  ? 
Ma  tante,  quand  partez-vous  ? 

Cousin,  will  you  go  with  me  ? 

Mon  cousin  (ma  cousine),  voulez-vous  alter  avec  moi  f 

Father  is  not  at  home,  mon  pere  n'est  pas  a  la  maison. 

3.  When  in  English  the  possessive  pronouns  mine,  thine,  his, 
hers,  etc.,  preceded  by  the  preposition  of,  are  placed  after  a  noun  to 
which  they  relate,  they  are  rendered  in  French  by  mes,  tes,  ses,  etc., 
before  the  noun,  which  is  put  in  the  plural.     Ex.:  — 

A  book  of  mine,  un  de  mes  livres. 
A  friend  of  yours,  un  de  vos  amis. 

4.  When  the  verb  to  he  is  found  before  a  possessive  adjective  fol- 
lowed by  a  noun  in  the  possessive  case,  and  signifies  to  belong,  in 
French  a  must  be  used.     Ex. :  — 

This  book  is  my  father's,  ce  livre  est  h,  mon  pere. 

That  house  is  our  uncle's,  cette  maison-la  est  a  notre  oncle.  * 

5.  When  parts  of  the  body,  or  physical  and  intellectual  faculties 
are  spoken  of,  the  French  generally  use  the  definite  article  where  in 
EngHsh  the  possessive  adjective  is  used  (see  L.  III.  5.)     Ex.:  — 

I  have  a  pain  in  my  head,  fai  mal  a  la  tete. 

He  has  lost  his  senses,  il  a  perdu  V esprit. 

Note  1 .  If,  however,  there  were  an  ambiguity  to  be  feared,  the  posses- 
sive adjective  should  be  used  in  Erench  as  in  English. 

Note  2.  When  a  habitual  complaint  is  spoken  of,  the  possessive  ad- 
jective is  also  properly  used.     Ex.:  — 

His  headache  has  returned,  sa  migraine  Va  repris. 

6.  After  the  verbs  changer  and  redouhler  the  possessive  adjec- 
tive is  dropped  and  replaced  by  the  preposition  de,  as :  — 

He  has  changed  his  religion,  il  a  chang€de  religion. 

We  have  changed  our  opinion. 

Nous  avons  change  d' opinion  or  d'avis. 

They  redoubled  their  activity,  ils  redoublerent  d'activit^. 


POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVES.  241 

THEME  12. 

1.  My  father,  mother  and  sisters  are  in  the  country.  2.  His 
uncle  and  aunt  know  it.  3.  I  thank  you  for  {de}  your  good  and 
useful  services.  4.  He  is  a  friend  of  mine.  5.  I  found  a  pencil 
of  yours.  6.  Where  are  you,  daughter?  7.  Here  I  am,  mother. 
8.  Come,  friend,  let  us  work.  9.  He  will  never  betray^  me,  for  he 
is  my  friend  and  protector.^  10.  We  changed  our  mind^  when  we 
heard  that  news.  11.  He  tens'*  a  falsehood*  as  often  as  (toutes  les 
fois  qu')  he  opens  his  mouth.  12.  A  cousin  of  ours  came  yes- 
terday to  see  us.  13.  Give  me  my  dictionary  and  grammar.^  14. 
My  mother  has  [a]  pain  in  (a)  her  head.  15.  I  have  [a]  pain  in 
my  ear.^  16.  The  man  who  fell  from  the  roof^  of  our  house,  dislo- 
cated (se  demit)  his  wrist.^  17.  In  (a)  the  last  battle^  our  gen- 
eral lost  his  right  leg,  and  I  was  wounded^^  in  my  shoulder.^^ 

1.  Trahir.  2.  Protecteur.  3.  Avis,  m.  4.  Dire  un  mensonge.  5.  Grammaire^ 
f.  6.  Oreille.  7.  Toit^va..  8.  Poignet,m.  9.  Baiaille,f.  10.  JSZcsser,  reg.  v.  11. 
JEpauleyf. 

7.  When  in  EngHsh  the  word  own  is  found  alone,  i.  e.  without 
a  noun,  after  a  possessive  adjective,  the  latter  is  rendered  by  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun  :  le  mien,  le  tien,  le  sien  (^propre),  etc.,  or  in  the 
feminine  by  la  mienne,  la  tienne,  la  sienne  (^propre),  etc.    Ex.: — ■ 

The  daughter  of  his  friend  and  his  own. 
La  Jiile  de  son  ami  et  la  sienne  (propre). 

8.  The  indefinite  pronoun  one's  denoting  a  possession  is  trans- 
lated in  French  son,  sa,  ses.     Ex. :  — 

One  is  glad  to  find  one's  money  again. 

On  est  content  de  retrouver  son  argent.  ' 

9.  When  its  and  their  refer  to  a  thing  which  is  not  the  subject 
of  a  preposition  they  are  rendered  by  en  unless  preceded  by  a  prep- 
osition, in  which  case  sow,  sa,  ses,  leur,leurs  must  be  used.    Ex.:  — • 

I  like  this  country,  its  air  (Nom.)  is  healthy,  its  soil  fruitful,  etc. 
J'aime  ce  pays ;  I' air  en  est  sain,  le  sol  en  est  fertile. 
What  plant  is  this  ?  —  I  do  not  know  its  name. 
Qudle  est  cette  plante  ?  — Je  n'en  connais  pas  le  nom. 
16 


242  VI.      SIXIEME  LEgON. 

Look  at  these  trees  ;  what  is  their  height  ? 

Voyez  ces  arhres ;  qudle  en  est  la  hauteur  (^not  leur  A.)  1 

But  we  must  say  : 

Paris  a  ses  beaut^s. 

Paris  has  its  beauties. 

J'admire  la  grandeur  de  ses  rues. 

I  admire  the  size  of  its  streets. 

Ces  arhres  sont  remarquables  par  leur  hauteur. 

These  trees  are  remarkable  for  their  height. 

10.    Observe  the  following  gallicisms  :  — 

Let  me  soon  hear  of  you. 

Donnez-moi  bientot  de  vos  nouvdles. 

I  shall  go  to  meet  you,  j'irai  a  voire  rencontre. 

They  are  cousins  of  mine,  ce  sont  de  mes  cousins. 

With  regard  to  me,  —  to  you,  —  to  us. 

A  man  €gard,  a  voire  €gard,  a  noire  egard. 

THEME    13. 

1.  He  has  worked  much  more  for  our  good^  than  for  his  own.  2. 
Paris  is  a  large  city,  its  streets  are  too  narrow.^  3.  I  particularly* 
admire  (I  adm.  p.)  its  rich  stores.*  4.  Windsor  is  a  fine  town  ;  I 
admire  its  situatio?2,  walks^  and  streets.  5.  London  has  its  beau- 
ties. 6.  I  like  the  size^  of  its  streets.  7.  This  illness'^  is  danger- 
ous ;  I  know  its  origin^  and  effects.^  8.  This  is  {void)  a  fine  tree ; 
its  fruit  is  delicious.-^"  9.  Every  science  has  its  principles.  10. 
An  illustrious  ( — tre")  birth"  receives  from  virtue  its  most  shining^^ 
lustre.     11.  Mr  Dubois  has  sold  his  father's  house  and  his  own. 

1.  Le  Men.  2.  Etroit,  e.  3.  Surtout.  4.  Magasin.  m.  5.  Promenade,  f.  6. 
Grandeur,  f.  7.  Maladie,  f,  8.  Origine,  f.  9.  Effet,  m.  10.  Delicieux.  11. 
NaUsance,  f.    12,  Beau. 


READING  LESSON. 
EUDAMILAS. 


Eudamidas  de  Corinthe  fit,  en  mourant,  un  testament  qui  semble- 
rait  ridicule  h  tout  autre  qu'a  un  ami.     H  touchait  a  sa  derniere 


POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES.  243 

heure,  et  laissait  sa  mere  et  sa  fiUe  exposees  a  la  plus  craelle  indi- 
gence, n'ayant  pour  tout  bien  que  deux  fideles  amis,  Carixene  et 
Arethus,  Eudaraidas  ne  fut  point  alarme  ;  il  jugea  des  coeurs  de 
ses  amis  par  le  sien  propre,  et  il  fit  ce  testament  qui  ne  doit  jamais 
etre  oublie.  "  Je  legue^  a  Arethus  le  soin  de  nourrir  ma  mere,  et 
de  I'entretenir  dans  sa  vieillesse  ;  k  Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  ma 
fille,  et  de  lui  donner  une  dot^  convenable." 

Carixene  etant  mort  quelque  temps  apres,  Arethus  ex^cuta  la 
commission  de  tous  les  deux;  et,  pour  rendre  son  action  plus  il- 
lustre,  il  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la  sienne  en  un  meme  jour, 
et  leur  donna  a  toutes  deux  une  meme  dot.  Quant  a  (as  to)  la 
mere,  il  la  nourrit  jusqu'a  la  mort.  Si  la  g^ndrosite  d' Arethus  est 
digne  d'admiration,  la  noble  hardiesse^  et  la  confiance  du  testateur* 
Test  encore  davantage;  car  celui  qui  a  la  resolution  de  faire  un 
semblable*  testament,  est  capable  non-seulement  de  I'executer, 
mais  de  quelque  chose  encore  de  plus,  et  il  n'est  pas  douteux  qu'il 
n'eut  nourri  la  mere  de  son  ami,  et  mari4  sa  fille,  aussi  bien  que  la 
sienne  propre,  meme  sans  en  etre  prie. 
1.  I  bequeath.    2.  Dowry,  portion.    3.  Boldness.   4.  Testator.  5.  Such,  similar, 

CONVERSATION^. 

Que  fit  Eudamidas  de  Corinthe    II  fit  un  testament  remarquable. 

en  mourant  ? 
Etait-il  riche  ?  Au  contraire,  il  etait  tres-pauvre, 

mais  il  avait  deux  fideles  amis. 
Que  legua-t-il  done  h  ses  amis  ?    II  legua  a  son  ami  Arethus  le  soin 

de  nourrir  sa  vieille  mere,  et  h 
Carixene  le  soin  de  marier  sa 
fille. 
Devait-il  la  marier  sans  dot  ?         Non,  avec  une  dot  convenable. 
Les  deux  amis  ex(5cuterent-ils     L'un    d'eux,    Carixene,    mourut 
ce  que  le  testament  leur  im-         quelque  temps  apres. 
posa  ? 
Et  I'autre  que  fit-il  ?  Arethus  executa  la  commission  de 

tous  les  deux. 


244  VII.      SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

De    quelle    maniere    I'execu-    H  maria  la  fille  de  son  ami  et  la 
tartril  ?  sienne   en   un   meme  jour,    et 

leur  donna  h  toutes  deux  une 
dot  ^gale. 
Et  comment  agit-il  envers  la    II  la  nourrit  jusqu'a  la  mort. 

mere  d'Eudamidas  ? 
Comment  trouvez-vous  la  gen^-    Elle  est  digne  d'admiration. 
rosit^  d' Arethus  ? 


VII.     SEPTIEME    LE9ON. 


NUMERALS. 

(See  the  First  Part,  L.  XIII.) 

1.  When  the  cardinal  numbers  are  used  substantively  they  take 
the  masculine  article,  as  : 

Uh  un,  a  one.   .  Le  trois,  the  three. 

Ce  huit  est  mal  fait,  this  eight  is  badly  made. 

2.  A  and  one  before  hundred  and  thousand  are  not  translated. 
Ex.: 

A  hundred  and  twenty  horses,  cent  vingt  chevaux. 
In  the  year  one  thousand  one  hundred  and  sixty. 
L'an  (or  simply  en)  mil  cent  soixante. 

3.  Observe  the  following  expressions  with  numerals : 
Un  a  un,  one  by  one. 

Deux  a  deux,  two  by  two. 
,  L'un  apres  I'autre,  one  after  the  other. 
Vers  six  heures  or  vers  les  six  heures,  by  about  six  o'clock. 
Vers  midi  or  vers  le  midi,  towards  (by)  twelve  o'clock. 
Une  heure  et  demie,  one  hour  and  a  half  or  half-past  one. 
Deux  heures  moins  un  quaii,  a  quarter  to  two. 
Trois  heures  (et)  un  quart,  a  quarter  past  three. 


NUMERALS.  245 

Tons  les  deux  jours,  every  other  day. 

D'aujourd'kui  en  huit,  to-day  week. 

jyaujourd'hui  en  quinze,  to-day  fortnight. 

Dans  quinze  jours,  in  a  fortnight. 

Hy  a  huit  jours,  a  week  ago. 

Ily  aun  an,  a  year  or  a  twelvemonth  ago. 

4.  More  than,  and  less  than,  before  numbers  are  rendered  plus  de 
and  moins  de,  instead  of  plus  que  and  moins  que.     Ex. : 

I  have  spent  more  than  a  hundred  francs. 

J'ai  d€pens^  plus  de  cent  francs. 

You  have  not  less  than  ten  mistakes  in  your  exercise. 

Vous  n'avez  pas  moins  de  dix  fautes  dans  votre  theme. 

5.  Nearly,  before  a  number,  is  translated  pres  de.     Ex. : 
It  is  nearly  five  o'clock,  il  est  pres  de  cinq  heures. 

THEME  14. 

4 

1.  This  six  is  well  made,  but  this  nine  is  badly  made.  2.  Henry 
the  Fourth  was  one  of  the  greatest  kings  of  France.  3.  Numa 
was  one  of  the  seven  kings  of  Rome.  4.  America  was  discovered^ 
in  the  year  one  thousand  four  hundred  and  ninety-two.  5.  The 
shepherd^  has  sold  a  hundred  sheep.  6.  When  do  you  dine?  7. 
I  dine  at  twelve  o'clock,  sometimes  at  one  o'clock.  8.  I  sup^  at 
half-past  eight,  and  I  go  to  bed*  at  midnight.  9.  Is  it  four  o'clock? 
10.  No,  sir ;  it  is  a  quarter  to  four.  11.  I  must  go  out  at  a  quar- 
ter past  four.  12.  We  wentin  (ew^mmes)  one  by  one.  13.  My 
brother  will  set  out  this  day  week,  and  will  come  back  in  a  fortnight. 
14.  Has  Mr.  L.  three  children?  15.  No;  he  has  {en  a)  more 
than  three :  he  has  four  or  five.  16.  This  book  costs  less  than 
ten  francs.  17.  How  old  is  your  son  Charles?  18.  He  is  nearly 
fourteen  years  old.      19.   I  have  a  French  lesson*  every  other  day. 

1.  Fiet  decouverte.     2.  Le  berger.     3.  Souper.     4.  Se  coucher,     5.   Une  leqon 
de  franqais. 


246  VIII.      HUITIEME   LEgON. 


VIII.     HUITIEME    LE9ON. 


ADJECTIVES. 

See  Part  I.,  Lesson  XVI. 
AQBEEMENT   01   THE  ADJECTIVE   WITH   THE   NOUN. 

1.  In  Frencli,  the  adjective  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  noun  to  which  it  relates  : 

Une  feuille  verte,  a  green  leaf. 

De  bons  amis,  good  friends. 

Les  prunes  sont  mures,  the  plums  are  ripe. 

1.  If  it  belongs  to  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular,  it  must  be  in  the 
plural : 

Le  pauvre  et  le  riche  sont  €gaux  devant  Dieu. 

The  poor  and  the  rich  are  alike  before  God. 

tPai  troiwe  la  porte  et  la  fenetre  fermdes. 

I  found  the  door  and  the  window  shut. 

La  clemence  et  la  majesty  €taient  peintes  siir  son  front. 

Clemeney  and  majesty  were  imprinted  on  his  brow. 

2.  If  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders,  and  joined  by  et,  and,  the 
adjectives  must  be  in  the  masculine  plural  : 

Mon  frere  et  ma  sceur  sont  tres-heureux. 
My  brother  and  sister  are  veify  happy. 

3.  When  the  two  adjectives  are  joined  by  ou,  or,  or  when  the  conjunction 
is  left  out,  the  adjective  agrees  only  with  the  latter  noun : 

Un  chateau  ou  une  maison  ruinee. 
A  ruined  castle  or  house. 
Le  fer,  lajiamme  &:ait  toufe  prete. 
The  sword,  the  flame  was  quite  ready. 

2.  The  adjectives  demi,  half;  nu,  bare  ;  excepte,  except;  y  comr 
■pris,  included;  suppose,  supposed;  ci-joint,  inclosed,  annexed, 
are  invariable  when  they  precede  the  noun ;  demi  and  nu  are  then 
joined  with  their  noun  by  a  hyphen.     Ex. : 

Une  demi-heure,  half  an  hour 


ADJECTIVES.  247 

Marcher  nu-pieds,  to  walk  barefooted. 
Marcher  nu-tete,  to  walk  bareheaded. 
Excepts  les  deux  premieres  pages. 
Except  the  two  first  pages. 
Y  compris  la  somme  de  cent  francs. 
The  sum  of  a  hundred  francs  included. 
Suppose  ces  faits,  these  facts  supposed. 

But  they  must  agree  with  their  noun  when  they  follow  it,  as : 

Une  heure  et  demie,  an  hour  and  a  half. 

Avoir  les  jamhes  nues,  to  have  bare  legs. 

Les  deux  premieres  pages  exceptees. 

The  two  first  pages  excepted. 

Copie  de  ma  lettre  est  ci-jointe. 

A  copy  of  my  letter  is  annexed. 

3.  Feu,  late,  is  invariable,  like  the  preceding  ones,  when  it  is 
before  the  article  or  possessive  pronoun ;  when  it  follows,  it  varies,  as : 

Feu  la  reine  or  la  feue  reine,  the  late  queen. 
Feu  mes  tantes  or  mes  feues  tantes,  my  late  aunts. 

4.  Some  adjectives,  as  hon,  vite,  has,  etc.,  may  he  used  adverb- 
ially :  then,  of  course,  they  are  invariable.     Ex. : 

Ces  roses  sentent  tres-hon  (not  bonnes). 

These  roses  smell  very  sweet. 

Les  cerfs  courent  tres-vite,  the  stags  run  very  fast. 

5.  If  the  expression  avoir  Vair,  to  look,  is  followed  by  an  adjoo- 
tive,  this  latter  remains  unchanged  when  a  moral  or  intellectual 
quality  is  spoken  of,  as : 

Ces  dames  ont  I' air  hon. 

These  ladies  look  good-natured. 

But  if  a  bodily  or  organic  quality  is  mentioned,  or  when  the  adjec- 
tive refers  rather  to  the  subject  than  to  the  word  air,  the  adjective 
agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  In  this  latter  case,  the 
verb  etre  is  understood,  as ;  . 

Ces  pierres  ont  Vair  tres-dures. 

These  stones  seem  to  be  very  hard. 

Madame  F.  a  Vair  mecontente  (i.  e.  d'etre  m€contente). 

Mrs.  F.  appears  to  be  discontented. 

6.  If  a  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective  in  the  superlative. 


248  VIII.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

the  latter  always  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number.     When  the 
superlative  follows,  the  article  must  be  repeated  : 

La  plus  belle  femme,  the  handsomest  woman. 
Les  gens  les  plus  riches,  the  richest  people. 

THEME   15. 

1.  I  have  a  good  friend.  2.  The  leaves  are  green.  3.  These 
pears  are  riper  than  those  apples.  4.  His  brother  and  cousin  have 
arrived.  5.  Charles  and  Louisa  are  very  industrious.  6.  Men 
and  women  are  mortal.  7.  My  son  and  daughter  are  happy.  8. 
pis  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.  9.  Louis  XIV.  had  in  France  an 
absolute^  power^  and  authority  (autorite).  10.  She  left  her  room 
and  her  trunk^  open.  11.  I  found  the  windows  and  the  shutters* 
shut.  12.  Give  these  presents  to  the  most  industrious  pupils.  13. 
Miss  Emma  is  the  daughter  of  the  richest  man  in  (c?e)  this  town. 
14.  I  remained  there  (y)  [for]  half  an  hour.  15.  The  child 
slept  two  hours  and  a  half.  16.  I  have  read  the  whole  book,  ex- 
cept the  two  last  chapters.^  17.  The  late  queen  was  opposed'^  to 
that  measure.'"  18.  Why  do  you  go  barefooted  ?  19.  These  pears 
appear  to  be  ripe. 

1.  Absolu.     2.  Pouvoir,  m.     3,   Coffre,  m.     4.  Volet,  m.    6.  Chapitre,  m.     6. 
S'opposait.    7.  Mesure. 

B.       PLACE   OF   THE   ADJECTIVE. 

The  principal  rules  have  already  been  given  in  the  seventeenth 
Lesson  of  Part  I.     We  have  to  add  here  only  the  following. 

When  two  adjectives  refer  to  the  same  noun,  we  should  examine 
what  kind  of  adjectives  they  are. 

1.  If  both  of  them  are  such  as  precede,  when  single,  they  may 
both  remain  before  the  noun  if  one  of  them  forms  with  the  noun,  as 
it  were,  but  one  idea.     Ex. : 

Une  jolie  petite  JiUe*  a  pretty  little  girl. 

Z7n  beau  jeune  homme,^  a  handsome  young  man. 

*  In  Latin  filiola.  t  Youth  (juvenis). 


ADJECTIVES.  249 

2.  If  both  preceding  adjectives  axe  taken  in  their  full  sense,  they . 
must  be  joined  by  et,  and,  as  : 

Un  grand  et  beau  jardin,  a  large,  beautiful  garden. 

3.  An  adjective  usually  placed  before  the  noun,  when  connected 
by  a  conjunction  with  another  adjective  which  is  to  be  put  after  it, 
is  itself  placed  after  the  noun.     Ex. : 

Une  action  bdle*  et  courageuse. 
A  fine,  courageous  action. 
Une  femme  petite,  mais  Men  faite. 
A  short  but  well-made  woman. 

4.  In  English,  two  or  more  adjectives  may  qualify  a  substantive, 
without  a  conjunction ;  but  in  French,  et  (or  sometimes  mais)  is 
always  placed  before  the  last  of  the  adjectives,  if  these  follow  their 
noun.     Ex. : 

Une  dame  riche,  jeune  et  aimahle. 

A  young,  rich,  amiable  lady. 

Un  homme  instrv.it,  modeste  et  estim€  de  tout  le  monde. 

A  well-instructed,  modest,  and  generally-esteemed  man. 

THEME  16. 

1.  Charles  is  a  handsome  young  man.  2.  Henry  is- a  pretty 
little  boy.  3.  This  is  a  long  (and)  tedious^  book.  4.  My  friend 
is  an  amiable  and  virtuous  man.  5.  He  has  a  large  and  beautiful 
house.  6.  This  is  a  drowned^  man  or  woman.  7.  For  this  place 
I  want  an  aged  man  or  woman.  8.  Is  it  the  elder  brother  or 
sister  ?  9.  The  savage  hved  in  a  large,  damp^  cavern.  10.  Spain 
is  a  fertile  country,  but  badly  cultivated.'*  11.  A  plain,^  simple, 
and  natural  style  is  the  only  one  to  he  recommended.^  12.  Brave 
and  trusty^  men  are  generally  humane^  and  merciful.^  13.  This  is 
an  interesting^"  and  instructive  study.^ 

1.  Enmiyeux.  2.  Noye  e.  3.  Humide.  4.  Cultive  e.  5.  Uni.  6.  Recommanddble, 
?.  Constant.    8.  Humain.    9.  Misericordieux.    10.  Interessant.    11.  Etude,  f. 

*  ♦'  A  fine  action  "  would  be,  Une  belle  action. 


250  VIII.      HUITIBME  LEgON. 

C.       COMPLEMENT   OF   ADJECTIVES. 

The  complement  of  an  adjective  is  either  a  substantive  or  a  verb, 
preceded  by  one  of  the  prepositions  de,  a,  en,  etc. 

1.  Adjectives  and  participles  which  denote  plenty,  desire,  scar- 
city or  want,  and  most  of  those  followed  in  English  by  of,  with  and 
yrom, govern  in  French  by  means  of  the  preposition  de,  as : 

La  vie  est  pleine  de  miseres,  life  is  full  of  miseries. 

Le  jeune  homme  fut  combU  d'honneurs,  (loaded  witli  honors ) . 

2.  The  following  adjectives  govern  also  by  means  of  de : 

Capable,  capable.  las,  tired,  wearied. 

content,  contented,  pleased.  litre,  free. 

digne,  worthy.  mecontent,  discontented. 

exempt,  free.  satisfait,  satisfied. 

honteux,  ashamed.  sur,  sure,  etc. 

jaloux,  jealous. 

Ex. :  H  est  digne  de  recompense,  he  is  worthy  of  reward. 

3.*  Adjectives  denoting  fitness,  unfitness,  disposition,  inclination, 
readiness,  or  any  habit,  require  a  before  the  object.     Ex. : 

It  est  propre  k  tout,  he  is  fit  for  anything. 

Le  cheval  est  utile  a  Vhomme,  the  horse  is  useful  to  man. 

Note  1.  The  following  adjectives  are  followed  by  a  in  French  and  of  in 
English:  . 

Attentifa,  heedful  of ;  sensible  a,  sensible  of;  insensible  a,  insensible  of  or  to. 

Ex. :  Soyez  attentifs  au  danger,  be  heedful  of  (the)  danger. 

Je  suis  sensible  h,  votre  bont€,  I  am  sensible  of  your  kindness. 

Note  2.  Some  adjectives  are  followed  in  French  by  the  preposition  a, 
and  in  English  by  in  ;  such  are : 

Habile  a,  skilful  in.  patient  a,  patient  in. 

exact  a,  punctual  in.  impatient  a,  impatient  in. 

Ex. :  U  est  habile  h,  tout,  he  is  skilful  in  doing  all. 

Elle  est  exacte  k  son  service,  she  is  punctual  in  her  service. 

4.  The  following  adjectives,  which  are  followed  in  English  by  to 
or  towards  when  they  express  behavior,  require  in  French  the  prep- 
osition envers : 

*  To  this  rule  must  be  excepted  some  words  in  the  preceding  list,  $  2. 


ADJECTIVES.  251 

Affable  envers,  affable  to.  poli  envers,  polite  to. 

bon  envers,  (or  pour)  kind  to.  reconnaissant  envers,  thankful  to. 

juste  envers,  just  to.  respectueux  envers,  respectful  to. 

cruel  envers,  cruel  to.  g€nereux  envers,  generous  to. 

honnete  envers,  civil  to.  liberal  envers,  liberal  to. 

Ex. :  //  a  €t€tres-bon  envers  moi  (or  pour  moi). 

He  has  been  very  kind  to  me. 

Soyez  poli  envers  tout  le  monde. 

Be  polite  (civil)  to  everybody.  , 

5.  All  others  not  mentioned  in  the  foregoing  sections,  and  which 
take  in  English  the  preposition  to,  are  followed  in  French  by  a. 
Ex.: 

That  is  easy  to  say,  cela  est  facile  k  dire. 
•  Religion  is  necessary  to  man,  la  religion  est  necessaire  a  Vhomme. 

He  was  deaf  to  my  prayers,  il  €tait  sourd  a  mes  prieres. 

THEME    17. 

1.  We  were  loaded^  with  honors.     2.  The  basket^  is  full  of  fruit. 

3,   Do  not  be  so  greedy  of  (after)  riches.     4.    My  cousin  is  worthy 

of  your  friendship.      5.    Are  you  pleased  with  your  horse  ?     6. 

Human  life^  is  never  free  from  troubles.'*     7.    Voltaire  was  always 

greedy  of  praise  and  insatiable  of  glory.     8.  I  am  not  satisfied  with 

your  exercise.     9.   That  old  man  is  not  fit  for  that  place ;  he  is  not 

punctual  in  his  engagements.     10.   My  servant  is  always  ready  to 

do  his  duty.^      11.    Nature^  is  content  with  Httle.       12.    Many 

people  are  dissatisfied  with  their  condition.     13.    Let  ns  be  kind  to 

everybody.      14.    These  children  are  inclined^  to  idleness.^      15. 

That  is  easy  to  say,  but  difficult  to  do.     16.  Scipio  Africanus^  was 

respectful  ^0  his  mother,  liberal  to  his  sisters,  good  to  his  servants, 

just  and  affable  to  everybody.     17.  Children  must^  not  be  cruel  to 

animals.      18.   He  is  insensible  to  all  the  remonstrances^^  of  his 

friends. 

1.  Comble.    2.  Le  panier.     3.  Put  the  article.    4.  Peine,  f.     5.  Devoir,  m.     6. 
Enclin.    7.  Paresse,  f.    8.  Scipion  VAfricain.    9.  Doivent.    10.  Bemontrance,  f. 

D.      ADJECTIVES    OF   DIMENSION. 

1.  Adjectives  relating  to  the  dimenson  or  size  of  objects  are 
expressed  in  French  either  by  an  adjective  or  a  substantive.     Thus 


252  VIII.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 

long  can  be  rendered  by  the  adjective  long  or  tongue  (f.)  de,  or  by 
the  noun  de  longueur.  Observe  that  in  the  first  case  de  follows,  in 
the  second  precedes,  and  that  these  adjectives  are  placed  after  the 
substantive  and  before  the  dimension.     Ex. : 


A  .^  1.1    ^      ^    .  1  )  we  table  lonque  de  dix  pieds. 

A  table  ten  feet  long,  V  „     -^,.      .,   j  , 

)  une  table  de  dix  pieds  de  long 


.   ^  ,       ,     ,  -      1  .  1    7  une  tour  haute  de  cent  pieds. 

A.  tower  a  hundred  feet  nign,  >  ,        .     .  ,    ,   , 


une  table  de  dix  pieds  de  longueur, 
une  tour  haute  de  cent  piedt 
une  tour  de  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 

2.  The  verb  to  be  connected  with  such  adjectives,  must  be  ex- 
pressed by  etre  when,  in  French,  the  adjective  of  dimension  is  pre- 
ferred to  the  noun,  as  : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long. 
Cette  table  est  longue  de  dix  pieds. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  est  haute  de  cent  pieds. 

3.  But  the  verb  to  he  must  be  rendered  by  avoir  when  the 
dune'nsion  is  expressed  by  a  noun.     Ex. : 

This  table  is  ten  feet  long. 
Cette  table  a  dix  pieds  de  longueur. 
That  tower  is  a  hundred  feet  high. 
Cette  tour-la  a  cent  pieds  de  hauteur. 

4.  In  a  similar  manner  age  is  expressed  either  with  age  de 
and  the  verb  etre,  or  with  the  verb  avoir  without  the  verb  age. 
Ex.: 

A  boy  eight  years  old,  un  gargon  ag^  de  huit  ans. 

T         ,        ,  1  -,   Me  suis  dq€de  vinqt  ans. 

I  am  twenty  years  old,  V  •,   .    .    , 

)  J  at  vingt  ans. 

(The  latter  is  much  preferred.) 

5.  The  word  hg,  which  is  sometimes  used  in  English  after  a  com- 
parative, to  denote  how  much  a  thing  exceeds  another,  is  rendered 
by  de,  not  by  par.     Ex. : 

Charles  is  taller  than  I  by  three  inches. 
Charles  et  plus  grand  que  moi  de  trois  pouces. 


ADJECTIVES.  253 

THEME   18. 

1.  I  have  seen  a  tree  ninety  feet  high.  2.  We  have  a  house 
eighty  feet  long  and  forty-five  high.  3.  This  stick  is  three  feet 
long.  4.  This  plank^  is  two  inches^  thick. ^  5.  This  tree  is  fifty 
feet  high.  6.  London  bridge'*  is  nine  hundred  and  twenty  feet 
long,  fifty-five  high,  and  fifty-six  wide.^  7.  The  monument  of  Lon- 
don stands  (^est  place)  on  a  pedestaP  twenty  feet  high.  8.  This 
ditch  is  twelve  feet  deep.^  9.  The  famous  mine  of  Potosi  in  (dans 
le)  Peru  is  more  than  (^de)  fifteen  hundred  feet  deep.^  10.  My 
room  is  forty  feet  long  and  thirty  wide.  11.  The  walls  of  Algiers^ 
are  fourteen  feet  thick  and  thirty  feet  high.  12.  King  Street^  is 
about^^  a  mile^  and  a  half  long  and  sixty-five  feet  wide.  13.  My 
brother  is  elder  than  I  by  two  years.  14.  I  am  taller  than  Robert 
by  seven  inches.  15.  Westminster  bridge  is  forty-four  feet  broad  f 
the  free-way^^  under  the  arches  of  this  bridge  is  eight  hundred  and 
seventy  feet ;  it  consists^^  of  fourteen  piers,^*  thirteen  large  arches, 
and  two  small  ones ;  the  two  middle^^  piers  are  each  {chacun)  sev- 
enteen feet  wide,  and  contain  two  hundred  tons^^  of  solio?  stones. 

1.  Planche^  f.  2.  Pouce,  m,  3.  Epais,  4paisse.  4.  Le  pont  de  Londres.  6. 
Large  or — largeur.  6.  Piedestal.  7.  Profondeur.  S.Alger.  9.  La  rue  royale. 
10.  Environ.  11.  Mille,  m.  12.  The  free-way  =  le  passage.  13.  II  consiste.  14. 
PUe,  f.    15.  Du  milieu.    16.  Tonneau,  m. 


reading  lesson, 
l'el^iphant. 
L'^l^phant  est  le  plus  gros  des  quadrupedes ;  il  habite  les  forets 
epaisses,^  les  bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieux  humides.  Ses  jambes 
informes  soutiennent  un  corps  epais  et  lourd.^  On  aper9oit  a  peine 
sa  petite  queue,^  tandis  que  de  larges  oreilles  ombragent*  les  deux 
cotes  de  sa  tete.  Ses  yeux  sont  petits  en  proportion  de  son  corps 
enorme.  Son  nez,  qui  se  prolonge  de  plusieurs  pieds  et  qui  est  tres- 
flexible,  lui  sert  de  main.  A  I'aide  de  ce  nez,  qu'on  appelle  trompe,^ 
il  puise  {draws)  de  I'eau,  cueille  les  herbes  et  les  fleurs,  denoue^ 
les  cordes,  ouvre  et  ferme  les  portea,  debouche  les  bouteilles,  ramasso 


254 


Vm.      HUITIEME  LEgON. 


par  terre  la  plus  petite  piece  de  monnaie ;  en  un  mot,  il  fait  presque 
tout  ce  que  nous  faisons  avec  nos  doigts.  Quand  il  a  soif,  il  remplit 
d'eau  cette  trompe,  et  boit  ensuite  comme  s'il  vidait^  une  bouteille. 
H  se  nourrit  d'herbes,  de  feuilles,  de  fruits  et  de  riz  (rice).  II 
mange  environ  cent  cinquante  livres  d'herbes  par  jour. 

De  chaque  cote  de  sa  trompe  sortent  deux  enormes  dents  qu'on 
appelle  defenses.  Ces  defenses  sent  des  armes  terribles,  dont  il 
dpouvante^  les  plus  feroces  animaux.  Elles  fournissent  une  matiere 
pr^cieuse,  qu'on  appelle  ivoire,  et  pesent^  jusqu'a  cent  livres 
chacune. 

1.  Thick.    2.  Heavy.    3.  Tail.    4.  To  shade,  over-shade.    5.  Trunk  or  proboscis. 
6.  To  untie.    7.  To  empty.    8.  To  terrify.    9.  To  weigh. 


CONVERSATION. 

Que  savez-vous  de  I'^lephant  ?      L'eMphant  est  le  plus  gros  des 

quadrupedes. 
Ou  habite-t-il  ?  H  habite  les  forets  ^paisses,  les 

bords  des  fleuves  et  les  lieux 
humides. 
Qu'est-ce  qu'il  a  de  particulier  ?    II  a  une  trompe,  a  I'aide  de  la- 

quelle  il  puise  de  I'eau,  cueille 
les  herbes  et  les  fleurs,  denoue 
des  cordes,  etc. 
H  se  nourrit  d'herbes,  de  feuilles, 

de  fruits  et  de  riz. 
II  remplit  d'eau  sa  trompe  et  boit 

ensuite. 
Environ  150  livres  d'herbes. 
L 'ivoire  se  fait  des  defenses  de 
r  elephant   qui  pesent  jusqu'h 
cent  livres  chacune. 


De  quoi  se  nourrit-il? 

Quand  il  a  soif,  que  fait-il  ? 

Combien  mange-t-il  par  jour  ? 
D'ou  vient  I'ivoire  ? 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  255 


IX.    NEUYIEME    LE9ON, 


I.   PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

(See  Part  I.,  L.  XXIV.) 

1.  Conjunctive  pronouns,  in  the  first  and  second  persons,  should 
be  repeated  before  every  verb  in  a  simple  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Je  vous  aime  et  je  vous  aimerai  toujours. 
I  love  you  and  (I)  shall  always  love  you. 
Vmis  dites  et  vous  direz  toujours. 
You  say  and  (you)  will  always  say. 
Je  le  vois  et  je  I'entends. 

I  see  and  hear  it.    , 

II  nous  ennuie  et  nous  obsede  sans  cesse. 

He  wearies  (us)  and  besets  us  unceasingly. 

Note.  With  a  compound  tense,  or  when  the  pronouns  are  in  the  third 
person,  they  are  rarely  repeated,  though  more  frequently  than  in  English, 
as  :  — 

Je  Vai  vu  et  entendu. 

I  have  seen  and  heard  it. 

n  (fcoute  et  ne  peut  comprendre,  etc. 

He  listens  and  cannot  conceive,  etc. 

2.  When  an  emphasis  is  laid  upon  the  personal  pronoun,  it  must 
be  repeated  in  French,  but  then,  the  first  is  disjunctive.  Very  of- 
ten it  is  then  preceded  by  c^est,  or  for  the  third  person  plural,  by  ce 
sont.     Ex. :  — 

j"  moi,  je  le  dis. 
^     '  \  c*est  moi,  qui  le  dis.  * 

__   ,  ,  ,   ,  .     f  ^^h  ^^  ^  pr^endu  cda. 

He  has  pretended  this,  i    ,   ^  7  •      •         ,^    1      7 
^  '  (  c  est  lui  qui  a  pr€tenau  cda. 

__   .  (  nous  n'avons  pas  dit  cela,  nous. 

We  have  not  said  so,      ^  ,  j-^     7 

'      -(  nous,  nous  n  avons  pas  dit  cela. 
It  IS  not  wc  who  said  so,  J        ,    ^  •  ,-.     , 

'  (  ce  nest  pas  nous  qui  avons  dit  cela. 


256  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

<  eux,  Us  I'ont  fait. 
They  have  done  it,  j  ^^  ^^,^^  ^^^  ^^^  ;,^^^  f^^^ 

Note.  Observe  that  in  such  cases  the  verb  is  put  in  the  same  number 
and  person  as  the  pronoun  which  is  the  antecedent  of  the  relative  qui, 
as  :  — 

Is  it  I  who  told  this  news  ? 

Est-ce  moi  qui  ai  dit  cette  nouvelle  ? 

3.  When  a  verb  relates  to  subjects  of  different  persons,  it  is  put 
in  the  plural  with  nous,  if  one  of  the  several  subjects  is  in  the  first 
person,  —  or  with  vous,  if  the  subjects  are  in  the  second  and  third 
persons.     Ex.:  — 

My  brother  and  /  shall  go  into  the  country. 
Mon  frere  et  moi,  nous  irons  a  la  campagne,  or, 
Nous  irons  a  la  campagne,  mon  frere  et  moi. 
I  told  you  and  him  or  both  you  and  him. 
Je  vous  Vai  dit  a  toi  et  a  lui. 
You  and  your  friend  will  come  with  me. 
Vous  et  votre  ami,  vous  viendrez  avec  moi. 

4.  When  the  verb  governs  two  pronouns  (both  being  persons) 
one  in  the  Direct  Objective,  the  other  in  the  Indirect,  the  Indirect 
is  a  disjunctive  (see  p.  110).    Ex.:  — 

Je  vais  vous  presenter  a  lui. 

I  am  going  to  introduce  you  to  him. 

5.  A  personal  pronoun,  used  as  subject,  may  follow  the  verb 
after  aussi,  peut-etre,  encore,  toujours,  en  vain,  du  mollis,  or  au 
moins. 

THEME  19. 

1.  I  believe  and  shall  always  believe  that  you  were  {avez  e^t) 
wrong.  2.  He  says  so,  but  he  does  not  believe  it.  3.  I  honor 
and  respect  him,  but  I  do  not  love  him.  4.  We  come  and  go.  5. 
A  passionate^  temper^  renders  a  man  unfit^  for  business,*  deprives* 
him  of  his  reason,  and  makes  him  unfit  (makes  that  he  is  not  fit) 
(^propre)  for  society.'*  6.  I  have  always  loved  and  esteemed  her. 
7.  They  (on)  flatter®  and  praise  us.     8.  It  is  I  who  have  written  it. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  257 

9.  It  is  they  who  have  seen  it.      10.  They  and  my  brother  have 
come.     11    You  like  the  town  and  I  the  country. 

1.  Passionni.    2.  Caractere.    3.  Inepte.    4.  Put  the  definite  article.    6.  Priver. 
6.  Flatter. 

6.  When  two  personal  pronouns  limit  a  verb,  both  should  be  dis- 
junctive, and  therefore  after  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

I  forgive  both  you  and  her. 
Je  pardonne  a  vous  et  a  elle.* 

I  speak  to  him  and  not  to  you. 
Je  parle  h.  lui  et  non  h.  vous. 

7.'  The  pronouns  himself,  herself,  themselves,  when  with  a  re- 
flective verb,  are  expressed  in  French  by  se  ;  otherwise  by  lm-7iieme, 
elle-meme,  eux-memes,  elles-memes.     Ex.:  — 

He  (she)  does  not  know  himself  (herself). 

II  {die)  ne  se  connait  pas. 

They  highly  distinguished  themselves. 
lis  (elles)  se  distinguerent  beaucoup.    But : 

Has  he  done  it  himself  ?    Yes,  himself. 
L'a-t-il  fait  lui-meme  ?     Oui,  lui-meme. 

8.  Soi,  self,  is  of  both  genders,  and  is  used  of  things  as  well  as 
of  persons.     Ex.:  — 

II  est  sage  de  parler  rarement  de  soi. 
It  is  wise  to  talk  seldom  of  one's  self. 

9.  The  pronoun  itself,  preceded  by  a  preposition  and  relating  to 
an  inanimate  object,  is  expressed  by  soi,  when  the  antecedent  noun 
is  taken  in  an  abstract  sense.     Ex.:  — 

L'aimant  attire  le  fer  a  soi. 
The  loadstone  attracts  iron  to  itself. 
La  vertu  est  aimahle  en  soi. 
Virtue  is  amiable  in  itself. 


*  This  sentence  may  better  be  translated  thus :  Je  vous  pardonne  ainsi  qu%  ellCf 
and  the  following,  c'est  &  vous  que  je  parle,  etc. 


258  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

10.  But  it  IS  rendered  by  elle,  when  the  inanimate  object  is  of  an 
individual  nature  and  of  the  feminine  gender.     Ex.:  — 

La  riviere  entraina  tout  avec  die. 
The  river  carriod  everything  away  with  itself. 
Ces  raisons  sont  solides  en  dles-memes. 
Those  reasons  are  solid  in  themselves. 

11.  The  English  personal  pronouns  are  always  rendered  by  tho 
disjunctive  (moi,  toi,  lui,  etc.),  when  they  are  used  alone,  or  when 
after  a  preposition  or  after  que,  than.     Ex.:  — 

Qui  a  fait  ceh  ?    Moi,  lui,  die,  etc. 

Who  has  done  that  %    I,  he,  she,  etc. 

Vbulez-vous  oiler  avec  moi,  avec  lui,  avec  eux  ?  etc. 

Will  you  go  with  me,  with  him,  with  them  ■?  etc. 

Je  parte  de  toi,  d'elle,  d'dles,  de  vous,  etc. 

I  am  speaking  of  thee,  of  her,  of  them,  of  you,  etc. 

//  est  plus  jeune  que  moi. 

He  is  younger  than  I. 

THEME  20. 

1.  I  speak  to  you  and  to  him.  2.  I  forgive  [both]  you  and  him, 
because  I  hope  (that)  you  will  behave^  better  for  the  future  («  Vave- 
nir).  3.  The  governor  is  your  enemy;  if  you  apply^  to  him,  you 
will  never  succeed.^  4.  I  do  not  trust*  (to)  him,  but  I  should  trust 
(to)  his  brother.  5.  That  man  works  for  himself.  6.  Each  acts 
for  himself.  7.  If  you  do  this  for  him  and  for  her,  you  will  great^'" 
oblige  me.  8.  One  ought  not^  [to]  speak  of  one's  self,  unless  {qu') 
with  modesty.  9.  That  man  is  too  proud ;  he  does  not  know  him- 
self.    10.  The  moon  brought^  a  change^  of  weather  with  it  (§  10). 

1.  Se  conduire.    2.  S^addrsser  h  qn.    3.  Mussir.    4.  Se  fier  it  qn.  6.  On  ne  doit 
pas.    6.  Amena.    7.  Changement,  m. 


II.    PARTICULAR  USE  OF  EN  AND    Y. 

1.  The  pronouns  it  and  them,  used  with  regard  to  inanimate  ob- 
jects, are  rendered  by  en,  when  the  French  verb  requires  de  before 
an  object  which  follows,  whatever  preposition  may  be  used  in  Eng- 
glish.     Ex.:  — 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  259 

A-t-<m  parUde  mm  ouvrage  ?     Oui,  on  en  a  parU. 
Did  they  speak  of  my  work  1    Yes,  they  spoke  of  it. 
Voiis  m'avez  rendu  service.    Je  vous  en  remercie. 
You  have  done  me  a  service.    I  thank  you  for  it. 

2.  JSn  is  further  used  to  express  the  words  some  and  any,  when 
they  come  after  a  verb,  and  supply  the  place  of  an  antecedent  sub- 
stantive, as  :  — 

Void  dii  jambon  ;  en  veux-tu  ?    Donnez-m'en,  sHl  vous  plait. 

Here  is  ham,  will  you  have  some  ?     Give  me  some,  if  you  please. 

Tai  des  noix,  en  voulez-vous  ?    Donnez  m'en  trois. 

I  have  some  walnuts  j  will  you  have  any  ?    Give  me  three  of  them. 

Donnez-lui-en,  give  him  some. 

Offrez-leur-en,  offer  them  some. 

Note.  Observe  1,  that  when  used  with  another  personal  pronoun,  en  fol- 
lows that  pronoun ;  and  2,  that,  in  the  affirmative  Imperative,  moi  and  toi 
are  changed  into  m'  and  t*  before  en,  as :  donnez-m'en.  ' 

3.  J' stands  for  in  it,  into  it,  at  it,  to  it,  there,  and,  with  the 
verb  penser,  for  of  it,  about  it,  of  them.  Like  the  other  conjunc- 
tive pronouns,  it  is  placed  immediately  before  the  verb,  except  with 
the  affirmative  Imperative,  where  it  follows  it.*     Ex. :  — 

Votre  pere  est-il  au  jardin  ?     Oui,  U  y  est. 

Is  your  father  in  the  garden  ?    Yes,  he  is  in  it  (there). 

Allez-vous  au  spectacle  7    Non,  Monsieur,  je  n'y  vais  pas. 

Are  you  going  to  the  theatre?    No,  sir,  I  am  not 

Y  pensez-vous  ?    Je  n'y  pense  plus. 

Do  you  think  of  it  ?    I  do  no  more  think  of  it. 

Allez-y,  go  there. 

N'y  allez  pas,  do  not  go  there. 

Note.  Y"  must  always  refer  to  an  antecedent. 


*  Except  moi  and  toi  which  follow  the  word  y,  with  the  affirmative  Imperative, 
as :  Conduisez-y-moi,  rends-y-toi  (go  there),  whereas  we  say :  Conduisez-nous-y. 
Wlien  both  en  and  y  happen  to  be  governed  by  the  same  verb,  y  stands  before  en. 
Ex.:  Je  vous  y  enporterai,  I  will  bring  you  some  there.  But  conduisez-moi  la  is 
preferable  to  conduisez-y-moi. 


260  IX.      NEUVIEME  LEgON. 


THEME  21. 


1.  We  speak  of  it.  2.  You  speak  of  tliem.  3.  I  am  sorry  for 
it.  4.  I  have  heard  that  your  uncle  has  arrived,  and  I  am  very 
glad  of  it.  5.  She  spoke  to  him  of  it.  6.  Talk^  no  more  of  it,  for 
I  will  not  hear  of  it.  7.  Have  you  [any]  books?  8.  Yes,  I  have. 
9.  Have  you  bought  some  flowers?  10.  Yes,  I  have  bought  some. 
11.  Give  me  three  of  them,  if  you  please.  12.  You  have  bread, 
give  some  to  the  poor.  13.  I  thank  you  for  it.  14.  Do  not  thank 
me  for  it.  15.  I  study  that  language,^  I  know  its  rules  well. 
16.  Since'  you  have  no  apples  in  your  garden,  I  will  send  you 
some.  17.  If  I  had  money,  I  would  give  you  some.  18.  Send 
us  some.  19.  Send  me  none.  20.  Mr.  A.  is  a  true  friend ;  I 
shall  never  forget  the  services  which  I  have  received*  from  him. 
21.  Is  your  father  in  his  garden?  22.  Yes,  he  is  (in  it).  23. 
Po  you  agree^  to  it?  24.  Yes,  I  agree  to  it.  25.  Have  you^  just 
returned  from  the  country?  26.  No,  I  am  going  there.  27.  We 
shall  think  of  it.  28.  We  have  forced^  them  to  it.  29.  There  is 
a  ditch,^  take  care^  [not]  to  fall  into  it.  30.  Our  orchard^**  is  very 
fruitful,  we  see  all  sorts^^  of  fruits  in  it.  31.  It  is  (c'est)  a  good 
book,  one  {on')  reads  excellent  things  in  it. 

1.  Parler.   2.  Langue,t.   3.  Puisque.   4.  Regti.  5.  Consentir.   6.  Sevenez-vousl 
7.  Forces.    8.  Un  fossi.    9.  Prenez  garde.    10.  Verger.    11.  Toutes  sortes  de. 


III.    THE   SUPPLYING  PRONOUNS  LE,  LA,  LES. 

1.  The  pronouns  le,  la,  les  are  used  in  French  to  supply  the 
place  of  an  antecedent  substantive  or  adjective,  or  of  a  phrase.  In 
such  case,  their  equivalent  in  English  is  so  or  it,  either  expressed  or 
understood. 

2.  When  le  refers  to  a  noun  with  the  definite  article  or  possessive 
adjective,  it  takes  the  gender  and  number  of  that  noun.     Ex. :  — 

Etes-vous  la  mere  de  ces  enfants.     Oui,  je  la  suis. 
Are  you  the  mother  of  these  children  1    Yes,  I  am. 
Mesdemoiselles,  etes-vous  les  nieces  de  Madame  B.  ?     Oui,  Madame,  nous  les 
sommes. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  261 

Ladies,  are  you  Mrs.  B.'s  nieces  1    Yes,  madame,  we  are. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  domestiques  ?     Oui,  ce  les  sont. 
Are  those  your  servants  ?     Yes,  they  are. 
Sont-ce  la  vos  gants  neufs  ?    Non,  ce  ne  les  sont  pas. 
Are  those  your  new  gloves  ?    No,  they  are  not. 

3.  But  when  le  supplies  the  place  of  an  adjective,  of  a  noun 
used  adjectively,  or  of  a  phrase,  it  remains  unchanged.     Ex. :  — 

Depuis  quand  etes-vous  malade  ?    Je  le  suis  dspuis  huit  jours. 
How  long  have  you  been  ill  1    I  have  been  (so)  these  eight  days.     - 
Ces  dames  sont-elles  mariees  ?     Oui,  elles  le  sont 
Are  these  ladies  married"?     Yes,  they  are  (it  or  so). 
Etes-vous  chr€liens  ?     Oui,  nous  le  sommes. 
Are  you  Christians  ?    Yes,  we  are. 
II  le  /era,  s'il  le  peut,  he  will  do  it,  if  he  can. 

Note.  Le,  la,  les  must  be  used  (§2)  when  the  adjective  is  used  substan- 
tively, as : 
Mademoiselle,  etes-vous  la  malade  ?     Oui,  js  la  suis. 
Miss,  are  you  the  sick  one ?    Yes,  I  am  (she). 

4.  Le  should  also  be  inserted  in  sentences  containing  a  coraparar 
tive,  after  que  —  ne,  as  : 

H  est  maintenant  plus  actif  qu'il  ne  V^tait  auparavant. 
He  is  now  more  active  than  he  was  before.  • 
Elle  est  moins  riche  qu'on  ne  le  pense. 
She  is  not  so  rich  as  one  would  think. 

THEME   22. 

1.  Is  that  your  book  ?  2.  Yes,  it  is.  3.  Are  those  your  books? 
4.  Yes,  they  are.  5.  Are  you  the  mistress  of  the  house  ?  6.  No, 
I  am  not.  7.  Are  these  boys  the  pupils  of  Mr.  M.  ?  8.  Yes,  they 
are.  9.  Are  you  my  friend's  sisters?  10.  Yes,  we  are.  11.  You 
want  some  men  of  good  will?^  12.  We  are  all  so.  13.  Are  these 
your  horses  ?  14.  Yes,  they  are.  15.  Are  the  brothers  rich  ?  16. 
No,  they  are  not.  17.  Are  the  house  and  garden  large?  18. 
Yes,  they  are.  19.  Is  not  'this  pretty  girl  your  gardener's 
daughter?  20.  Yes,  madam,  she  is.  21.  We  need^  only  think 
ourselves  happy,  and  we  shall  be  so.  22.  Young  ladies,  are  you 
English?     23.  Yes,  we  are.     24.  Are  you  physicians'?     25.  Yes, 


2G2  IX.     NEUVIEME  LEgo^. 

sir,  we  are.  26.  Are  you  the  physicians?  27.  Yes,  sir,  we  are. 
28.  Is  he  sad? 3  29.  No,  he  is  not.  30.  Is  she  rich?  31.  Yes, 
she  is.  32.  Are  those  gentlemen  brothers?  33.  Yes,  they  are. 
34.  Are  you  still  my  friend?  35.  Yes,  I  am.  36.  Are  you  the 
sister  of  Mrs.  A.  ?  37.  Yes,  I  am.  38.  Are  you  the  ladies  whom 
my  mother  expects?  39.  Yes,  we  are.  40.  Because  she  is  pretty, 
she  must  not  imagine*  that  she  will  always  be  so.  41.  We  were 
embarrassed,''  and  are  so  yet  (encore).  42.  Children  ought  to 
(jdoiveni)  apply^  themselves  to  their  studies  as  much  as  they  can. 

1.  De  bonne  volonU.    2.  Nous  n^avons  gu'd  nous  croire.    3.  Triste.    4,  II  ne/aut 
pas  qu'elle  sHmagine,    5.  Embarrasses.    6.  S'appliquer, 


READING  LESSON. 

l'el:6phant.     (Contihuation.) 

L'el^phant  vit  (lives)  au  dela  de  cent  cinquante  ans,  quand  il 
est  libre.  Ces  animaux  marchent  ordinairement  de  compagnie ;  le 
plus  age  conduit  la  troupe  ;  le  second  d'age  marche  le  dernier ;  les 
jeunes  et  les  femelles  sont  au  milieu  des  autres ;  les  meres  portent 
leurs  petits  et  les  tiennent  embrasses  de  leurs  trompes. 

L 'elephant  dompte^  est  le  plus  doux  et  le  plus  patient  de  tous 
les  animaux.  ,  II  s'attache  k  celui  qui  le  soigne  ;  ^  il  le  caresse,  et 
semble  deviner^  tout  ce  qui  peut  lui  plaire.  En  peu  de  temps  il 
comprend  les  signes  et  meme  la  parole.  II  regoit  les  ordres  de  son 
maitre  avec  attention  et  les  execute  avec  prudence.  Un  Elephant 
domestique  rend  autant  de  service  que  six  bons  chevaux. 

lis  ne  cassent  rien  de  ce  qu'on  leur  confie.  lis  posent  doucement 
les  paquets  qu'ils  portent,  et  les  rangent  dans  I'endroit*  qu'on  leur 
montre.  lis  essaient  avec  leurs  trompes  flexibles,  s'ils  sont  bien  si- 
tues,  et  quand  un  tonneau*  commence  a  rouler,  ils  vont  d'eux-memea 
chercher  des  pierres  pour  I'etablir  solidement. 

1.  To  tame.   2.  To  take  care.   3.  To  guess.   4.  Place.   5.  Cask. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


263 


CONVERSATIOiq^. 


Quel  age  I'elephant  atteint-il  ? 
Se  laisse-t-il  dompter  ? 


L'elephant  est-il  intelligent  ? 
Se  rend-irutile  aux  hommes  ? 


Les  elephants  sont-ils  maladroits 
(awhward)  ? 

Que  font-ils   quand  un   tonneau 
commence  a  rouler  ? 


Ilvit  au  dela  de  150  ans. 
Oui;  et  quaud  il  est  dompte,  il 

est  le  plus  doux  de  tous  les 

animaux. 
Tres-intelligent ;    il    comprend 

les  signes  et  meme  la  parole. 
Un  seul  elephant  rend  autanfc 

de  service  que  six  bons  che- 

vaux. 
Non,  pas  du  tout;  ils  ne  cas- 

sent  rien  de  ce  qu'on  leur 

confie. 
lis  vont  chercher  des  pierres 

pour  I'etablir  solidement. 


X.     DIXIEME    LE9ON. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lesson  xxv. 

In  regard  to  the  interrogative  pronouns  lequd?  qui?  que?  and  quoi?  the 
following  observations  are  to  be  made :  — 

1.  Lequel,  which?  always  refers  to  some  noun  either  preceding 
or  immediately  following,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Ex.:  — 

Void  deux  routes,  laquelle  prendrez-vous  ? 

Here  are  two  routes ;  which  will  you  take  1 

Lesquels  de  vos  souliers  sent  d^chir^s  ? 

Which  of  your  shoes  are  worn  out  1 


264  X.      DIXIEME  LEgON. 

Note.  The  interrogative  adjective  what  joined  to  a  noun  is  always  ex- 
pressed by  quel,  f.  quelle.     Ex. :  — 

What  book  do  you  read  1  quel  h'vre  lisex-vous  ? 
What  are  your  reasons  ?  quelles  sont  vos  raisons  ? 

2.  The  interrogative  pronouns  who  ?  whose  ?  to  whom  ?  whom  ? 
are  expressed  by  qui  ?  de  qui  ?  (not  dont  ?  )  a  qui  ?  and  for  the 
objective  qui  f  (^que  as  an  interrogative  means  what,  never  whom) . 
Ex.  :  — 

Who  comes  ?  qui  vient  ? 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?  de  qui  parlez-vous  ? 

Whom  do  you  seek  ?  qui  cherchez-vous  ? 

3.  Instead  of  the  simple  qui?  the  form  qui  est-ce  qui,  who?  is 
often  used  for  the  Nom.,  and  qui  est-ce  que,  whom?  for  the  Dir. 
Obj.     Ex. :  •— 

Qui  est-ce  qui  vient  la,  who  comes  there  ? 

Qui  est-ce  que  vous  cherchez,  whom  are  you  looking  for  ? 

4.  The  same  is  the  case  with  que  ?  for  which  qu* est-ce  qui  ?  is 

often  used  in  the  Nom.,  and  qu^ est-ce  que  ?  in  the  Dir.  Obj.     The 

latter  has  a  still  stronger  form,  qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que     .  .  ?     This 

compound  form  is  generally  used  in  the  expression  what  is  that  ? 

and  also  when  a  simple  noun  follows,  e.  g.  :  — 

Qu' est-ce  que  cela  ?  )     ,       .     ,      „ 

^1  ,    .  ,   ,  ,    _  ^  what  IS  that? 

Qu  est-ce  que  c  est  que  cela  ?  ) 

Qu' est-ce  que  la  vie  1  )     ,       .    ,.„ 

n  y   *  >   .        1      •  o\  what  IS  life  1 

Qu  est-ce  que  c  est  que  la  vie  ?  > 

5.  -The  pupil  must  be  careful,  however,  not  to  confound  qui  est- 
ce  qui,  who  ?  with  qu' est-ce  qui,  what  ?  The  latter  is  used  for  the 
wanting  Nominative  of  the  conjunctive  pronoun  que.     We  say  :  — 

__,     ,         no     ,   ,  n  )  <7W^"  est-ce  qui  vous  a  offense? 

Who  has  offended  you  ?  ^  ^   .  ^     ^o 

)  qui  vous  a  ojfens^? 

Whereas  : 

What  (iVbm.)  makes  you  so  sad? 

Qu' est-ce  qui  vous  rend  si  triste  ? 

„,,    ^        •         ,  .        -        „  7  qu'est-ce  que  vous  faites  la  ? 
What  are  you  domg  there  ?  >-  -'       ^  .  ,,  •' 

)  que  faites  vous  la  ? 

„.,    ^  .    ^,  „  7  Q'w'v  a-t-il  de  nouveau  ? 

What  IS  the  news  ?  r     ,  ,  -,         i 

)  qu  est-ce  qu  il  y  a  de  nouveau  t 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  265 

6.  Que,  what  ?  as  the  conjunctive  fonn,  can  only  be  used  before 
the  verb  or  in  close  connection  with  it;  but  the  disjunctive  form 
quoi,  what?  stands  either  alone  or  after  a  preposition,  or  is  even 
used  as  an  interjection.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  cherchez  quelque  chose  ;  quoi  done  9 
You  are  looking  for  something ;  what  is  it  1 
A  quoi  pense-t-il,  of  what  does  he  think  7  .  . 

De  quoi  parle-t-on,  of  what  do  people  talk  ? 
Quoi !  vous  etes  mari^!  what !  you  are  married  ! 
Note.    Quoi  is  also  used  instead  of  qu'i/  a-t-il,  as  :  — 
Quoi  de  plus  magnijique  qu'une  belle  nuit  d'€t€!    (instead  of  qu'y  a-t-il  de 
plus  magnijique  !) 
What  is  there  more  splendid  than  a  beautiful  summer's  night  ? 

7.  In  antithetical  questions  with  or  (as  you  or  I?),  the  French 
usage  departs  very  widely  from  the  English,  inasmuch  as  the  con- 
trasted persons  or  objects,  instead  of  standing  in  the  Nominative  as 
in  English,  usually  follow  de.     Ex. :  — 

Qui  de  vous  ou  de  moi  remportera  le  prix  ? 
Who  will  take  the  prize,  you  or  1 1 
Qui  a  €t€  le  plus  appliqud'  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  ?  or 
Qui  de  toi  ou  d'Emile  a  €t^ le  plus  applique'? 
Who  has  been  the  most  diligent,  you  or  Emil  1 

8.  De  may  be  omitted,  however,  when  two  or  more  om's  occur, 
and  also  when  de  or  des  with  lequel  precedes.     Ex.  :  — 

Laquelle  des  deux  nations  €tait  la  plus  vertueuse,  les  Grecs  ou  les  Romains  9 
Which  of  the  two  nations  was  the  more  virtuous,  the  Greeks  or  the 
Eomans  1 

THEME    23. 

1.  Which  o/  jom  brothers  is  married?  2.  Which  of  your  sisters 
has  (est)  gonv  to  England  ?  3.  Of  all  these  pictures,  which  should 
you  lilve  bestV*  4.  Which  of  your  daughters  learns  Italian  ?^  5. 
Here  are  two  pencils;  which  will  you  take?  6.  What  countries 
did  Alexander  the  Great  conquer  ?  ^  7.  What  are  your  terms  ?  "*  8. 
Who  goes  there  ?  9.  To  whom  do  you  speak  ?  10.  For  whom  does 
a  miser^  hoard''  riches?^  11.  Who  will  be  bold^  enough  to  attack 
him?     12.  Who  are  these  women?     13.  Whose^  gloves  are  these? 


266  X.      DIXIEME  LEgON. 

14.  Here  are  two  grammars ;  to  which  do  you  give  the  preference  ? 

15.  Who  sustains^^  this  globe  in  the  air?  16.  What  is  more  pleas- 
ant than  to  do  good?^^  17.  What  is  human  life?  18.  What 
should  prevent^^  your  father  from  buying  {d'acheter)  this  house? 
19.  A  little  more  fame,^^  a  little  more  wealth,  —  what  does  all  this 
signify  ?^^  20.  What  are  you  speaking  of?  21.  Of  what  do  you 
accuse  me  ?  22.  On  (sur)  what  will  you  interrogate^^  him  ?  23. 
What !  Charles  has  been  arrested  !  ^^  24.  Which  of  you  has  been 
sick,  Emily  or  Emma  ?  25.  Which  was  the  greatest  man,  Alexan- 
der, Caesar,  or  Napoleon  the  First  ? 

1.  Le  mieux.  2.  Put  the  article.  3.  Put  has  conquered,  a  conquis.  4.  Condition^ 
f.  5.  L'avare,  m.  6.  Amasser.  7.  Hichesse.  8.  Hardi.  9.  See  p  264,  $  2,  2,  a  qui. 
10.  Soutenir.  11.  Du  Men.  12.  Empecher.  13.  Gloire.  14.  Signifier.  15.  Inter' 
roger.    16.  ArrUi, 


KEADING  LESSON.* 

SERViLius  SE  d:efend  devant  le  PEUPLE. 

*'  Si  I'on  m'a  fait  venu:  ici  pour  me  demander  compte^  de  ce  qui 
s'est  passe  dans  la  derniere  bataille  oil  je  commandais,  je  suis  pret 
k  vous  en  instruire ;  mais  si  ce  n'est  qu'un  pretexte  pour  me  faire 
p^rir,  comme  je  le  soupgonne,^  epargnez-moi*  des  paroles  inutiles : 
voila  mon  corps  et  ma  vie  que  je  vous  abandonne,  vous  pouvez  en 
disposer. 

''Quel  est  done  mon  crime?  Quelle  faute  ai-je  commise  jus- 
quMci?  On  m'accuse  d'avou:  perdu  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  le  der- 
nier combat.  Mais  quel  est  le  general  qui  puisse  livrer  des  ba- 
tailles  centre  une  nation  aguerrie,^  qui  se  defend  courageusement, 
sans  qu'il  y  ait  de  part  et  d'autre^  du  sang  de  repandu  ?  Quelle  di- 
vinite  s'est  eiigagee  envers  le  peuple  remain,  a  lui  faire  remporter 
des  victoires  sans  aucune  perte  ?  ^  A  qui  fera-t-on  croire  que  la 
gloire  s'acquiert^  autrement  que  par  de  grands  perils  ?     J'en  suis 

*  The  Conversation  on  this  Reading  Lesson  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  fol- 
lowing lesson. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  267 

venu  aux  mains  avec  des  troupes  plus  nombreuses  que  celles  que 

vous  m'aviez  confiees ;  j'ai  mis  en  deroute  leurs  legions,  qui,  a  la 

fin,  ont  pris  la  fuite.      Que  me  restait-il  a  faire  ?     Qui  d'entre  vous 

eut  pu  se  refuser  a  la  victoire  qui  marchait  devant  moi  ?     Etait-il 

meme^  en  mon  pouvoir  de  retenir  vos  soldats,  que  leur  courage  em- 

portait,  et  qui  poursuivaient  avec  ardeur  un  ennemi  efFraye  ?     Que 

dis-je?     Si  j'avais  fait  sonner^  la  retraite,   si  j'avais  ramene  nos 

soldats  dans  leur  camp,  de  quoi  ne  m'accuserait-on  pas  aujourd'hui  ? 

Lequel  de  vos  tribuns  aurait  approuvre  ma  conduite  ?     Ne  m'accu- 

seraient-ils  pas  d'intelligence  avec  les  ennemis  ?  " 

1.  Account.    2.  Suspect.    3.  Spare.  4.  "Warlike.    6.  On  both  sides.    6.  Loss.    7. 
Can  be  gained.    8.  Even.    9.  To  sound. 


XI.     ONZIEME-  LEgON. 


EELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 
(SeePartl.,  L.  XXIV.) 

1.  The  relative  pronouns  who,  which  and  that  are  rendered  by 
qui,  when  they  are  in  the  Nominative  case,  whether  the j .refer  to 
persons  or  things,  as  :  — 

The  man  who  works,  Vhomme  que  travaille. 
The  pen  which  is  on  the  table. 
La  plume  qui  est  sur  la  table. 

2.  The  same  pronouns,  when  in  the  Direct  Objective,  whom, 
which,  that,  are  expressed  by  que,  as  :  — 

The  man  whom  you  know,  Vhomme  que  vous  connaissez. 

The  book  which  I  have  lost,  le  livre  que  j'ai  perdu. 

Note.  Sometimes,  however,  lequel  must  be  employed  instead  of  qui  or 
que,  when  by  the  use  of  the  latter  an  ambiguity  might  arise.  In  such  a 
case  as  this  for  instance  :  Le  frere  de  Madame  Leheau  qui  hahite  Paris, 
where  two  persons  being  mentioned,  it  would  be  doubtful  whether  we  mean 


268  XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 

to  say  that  the  brother  or  the  lady  lives  in  Paris.     In  the  first  case,  we 
must  say :  — 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Lebeau  lequd  Fiabite  Paris, 
or  if  the  lady  is  meant : 

Le  frere  de  Mad.  Lebeau  laquelle  or  qui  habite  Paris. 
Por  the  latter  of  the  two  persons  qui  can  generally  be  used. 

3.  When  the  relative  pronouns  whom  or  which  follow  a  preposi- 
tion, they  are  usually  expressed  by  qui  in  speaking  of  persons,"* 
and  by  lequel  or  laquelle  (pi.  lesquels,  lesquelles)  in  speaking  of 
animals  and  things,  as  :  — 

The  little  boy  to  whom  I  give  the  book,  is  diligent. 

JLe  petit  gargon  a  qui  je  donne  le  livre,  est  appliqu€. 

The  Englishman  with  whom  I  travelled. 

L' Anglais  avec  qui  fai  voyag€. 

The  glory  to  which  heroes  sacrifice,  etc. 

La  gloire  a  laquelle  les  he'ros  sacrijient,  etc. 

The  cane  with  which  he  struck  me,  etc. 

La  canne  avec  laquelle  il  mefrappey  etc. 

4:.  The  relative  pronouns  whose,  of  whom  or  of  which  are  com- 
monly expressed  in  French  by  dont,  both  for  persons  and  for  ob- 
jects, as  :  — 

The  Frenchman  whose  brother  arrived  yesterday. 
Xe  Frangais  dont  le  frere  est  arrive hier  (see  L.  III.,  12). 
I  have  seen  the  garden  of  which  you  speak. 
J'ai  vu  le  jardin  dont  vous  parlez. 

5.  But  lequel  must  be  employed  when  the  noun  which  follows 
whose  is  governed  by  a  preposition. 
We  can  consequently  say  :  — 

The  man  whose  merits  are  known. 
L'homme  dont  les  m€rites  (Nom.)  sont  connus. 
The  author  whose  works  you  have  read. 


.  *  After  entre,  between,  andparmi,  among,  we  must  always  write  lesquels  or  les- 
guelles  whether  persons  or  things  be  spoken  of. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  269 

TJauteurdont  vous  avez  lu  les  ouvrages  (Dir.  Obj.).* 
But  we  must  say : 

The  man  of  whose  modesty  people  talk  so  much. 
L'homme  de  la  modestie  duqud  on  parle  tant. 
The  friend  to  whose  honesty  I  have  trusted,  has  deceived  me. 
L'ami  a  la  probity  duqud  je  me  suis  fie,  m'a  tromp^. 

6.  The  relative  pronouns  whom,  which,  and  that,  are  ofiten  left 
out  in  English,  but  in  French  qui  and  que  are  never  omitted. 
Example :  — 

The  boy  I  saw  with  you  yesterday. 

Le  gargon  que  j'ai  vu  hier  avec  vous. 

I  shall  send  you  the  books  you  have  chosen. 

Je  vous  enverrai  les  livres  que  vous  avez  choisis. 

THEME    34. 

1.  The  man  who  has  done  this  is  generally^  esteemed.  2.  The 
flocks^  which  graze ^  in  those  meadows*  are  mine  (a  moi).  3.  The 
watch  which  I  had  is  broken.  4.  The  books  which  you  read  are  good, 
but  difficult^  to  be  understood.  5.  The  sister  of  my  friend  who  ar- 
rived here  last  week,  is  very  ill.  6.  The  physician's  daughter  of 
whom  I  spoke  to  you  the  other  day,  has  married  Mr.  B.  7.  A  bird 
whose  wings  have  been  clipped,®  cannot  fly  any  more.  8.  Bees^ 
among  which  we  find  such  admirable  order,^  are  very  useful  insects. 
9.  The  professor^  to  whom  I  write,  is  very  learned.  10.  The  man 
you  respect  is  my  friend.  11.  Idleness  is  a  vice  to  which  young 
people  are  much  inclined.  12.  The  country  we  inhabit^''  is  beauti- 
ful and  fruitful.  13.  The  reasons  upon,  which  I  rely, ^^  are  unan- 
swerable.^^ 14.  Mr.  B.  is  a  man  to  whose  discretio/z  I  dare^^  not 
trust.  15.  He  who  gets^*  riches,  knows  not  for  whom  he  gets 
them.  16.  The  daughter  of  Minos  gave  a  thread ^^  to  Theseus,^®  by 
means  {au  moyen)  of  which  he  went  out^^  of  the  labyrinth 
{le  lahyrinthe), 

*  Observe  here  the  position  of  the  noun.  If  the  word  depending  upon  dont  is  a 
Direct  Objective,  it  must  stand  after  the  active  verb. 


2T0  XI.      ONZIEME    LEgON. 

1.  Generalement.  2.  Troupeau,  m.  3.  Paitre,  (see  p.  178,  No.  25).  4.  Prairie^ 
f.  5.  Difflciles  a  comprendre.  6.  Eognes.  7.  Les  dbeilles.  8.  Ordre,  m.  9.  Pro- 
fesseur.  10.  Hahiter.  11.  Je  me  fonde.  12.  Sans  repUque.  13.  Jle  n'ose  me  fler. 
14.  Amasser.    15.  ?7/i  j^Z.    16.  T^ese'e.    17.  >S'or«r. 

7.  Qwo/,  what,  is  also  used  as  a  relative,  but  only  in  connection 
with  a  preposition,  as :  — 

C'est  a  quoi  je  pense  le  moins. 

This  is  the  thing  of  which  I  think  the  least. 

Savez-vous  a  quoi  il  s'occupe  a  present  ? 

Do  you  know  what  he  busies  himself  with  now  1 

Apres  quoi,  after  which.     Sans  quoi,  otherwise. 

C'est  pourquoi,  on  that  account,  therefore. 

8.  The  adverbs  of  place  oii,  d'oii  and  par  oil,  are  also  often 
employed  instead  of  the  relative  pronouns  dans  lequel,  duquel,  par 
lequel,  etc.,  when  things  are  spoken  of,  as :  — 

L'emharras  ou  ("for  dans  lequel)  se  trouve  mon  pere. 
I     The  embarrassment  in  which  my  father  finds  himself. 
j     Le  village  par  ou  (^for  par  lequel)  nous  venons  de  passer. 

The  village  through  which  we  have  just  passed. 

9.  The  correlative  pronouns  he  who,  fern,  she  who,  pi.  they  who 
or  those  who,  are  rendered  by  celui  qui,  fern,  celle  qui,  pi.  masc. 
ceux  qui,  pi.  fern,  celles  qui.     Ex. :  — 

He  who  is  contented,  is  happy. 

Celui  qui  est  content  est  heureux. 

They  (or  those)  who  are  discontented,  are  unhappy. 

Ceux  qui  sont  m€contents,  sont  malheureux. 

Note  1.  Both  or  either  may  vary  according  to  the  verb  they  depend  on, 
{celui  qui,  celui  que,  etc. )  as  :  — . 

I  shall  give  it  to  him  whom  I  love  most. 

Je  le  donnerai  a  celui  que  j'aime  le  mieux. 

Note  2.  In  Erench  both  pronouns  must  be  joined,  and  no  inversion  can 
take  place  as  in  English.    Ex.:  — 

He  is  a  bad  citizen  who  rebels  against  his  country. 

Cdui  qui  se  revoke  contre  sa  patrie  est  un  mauvais  citoyen. 

10.  The  English  %vhat,  when  not  an  interrogative  pronoun,  but  a 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  271 

compound  relative  in  the  sense  of  that  which,  is  translated  by  ce 
qui  for  the  Nominative,  ce  que  for  the  Direct  Objective,  and  by  ce 
dont,  when  the  verb  takes  the  preposition  de,  as :  — 

What  is  fine,  is  not  always  good. 
Ce  qui  est  beau  n'est  pas  toujours  bon. 
I  shall  do  what  I  have  promised. 
Je  ferai  ce  que  j'ai  promts. 
I  have  sent  him  what  he  needed. 
Je  lui  ai  envoy€  ce  dont  il  avait  besoin. 

11.  When  ce  qui,  ce  que  or  ce  dont  begins  the  sentence,  c'est 
must  be  placed  before  the  second  clause,  except  (as  in  the  first  sen- 
tence above)  when  an  adjective  or  a  participle  follows,  as  :  — 

Ce  que  vous  pouvez  /aire  de  mieux,  c'est  de  partir  tout  de  suite. 
The  best  thing  for  you  to  do,  is  to  leave  immediately. 
Ce  qui  me  chagrine,  c'est  la  perte  de  mon  dome-stique. 
What  grieves  me,  is  the  loss  of  my  servant. 

12.  Proverbial  and  general  expressions  usually  commence  with  qui, 
whoever,  instead  of  celui  qui.    Ex.:  — 

Qui  court  deux  lievres,  n'en  prend  aucun. 

He  who  chases  two  hares  catches  none. 

Qui  casse  les  verres,  les  paie. 

Who(ever)  breaks  the  glasses  must  pay  for  them. 

Sauve  qui  peut !  let  him  save  himself  who  can ! 

THEME  25. 

1,  This  is  the  object^  at  which  he  aims.^  2.  The  study  to  which 
I  am  devoted,^  gives  me  great  pleasure.  3.  Nature,  whose  beauty 
we  daily "*  admire,  is  an  inexhaustible^  source  of  enjoyment^  for  us. 
4.  Your  pupil's  mother,  with  whom  I  was  speaking  yesterday, 
left^  this  morning.  5.  What  sort  of  a  Book  is  that  in  which  you 
are  reading?  6.  It  is  a  Eoman  History.  7.  There  is  nothing 
upon  (a)  which  I  think  more  frequently^  than  the  sad  fate^  of  my 
poor  friend.  8.  What  is  true  is  also  good.  9.  Virtue  and  freedom 
are  the  conditions  without  which  we  cannot  be  happy.  10.  Is  the 
house  in  which  you  live  on  the  highway  ?^'^     11.  No,  it  is  tolerably 


272  XI.      ONZIEME  LEgON. 

far ^^  from  it  (en).  12.  That  is  the  thing  about  which  I  would 
speak  with  you.  13.  The  thing  the  miser  thinks  least  about  (a)  is 
to  aid^^  the  poor.  14.  That  is  the  thing  with  which  he  struck  me. 
15.  It  is  an  illness  to  the  progress ^^  of  which  (§.  5)  one  cannot  ap- 
ply^* too  prompt  remedies.^''  16.  He  who  cannot  keep  a  secret,  is 
incapable  of  governing.^^  17.  That  which  most  deserves  our  respect 
is  virtue.  18.  What  I  most  wish,  is  to  see  you  happy.  19.  What 
I  like  most,  is  to  be  alone. 

1.  Le  but.  2.  Tendre.  3.  Devoud.  4.  Journellement.  5.  Inepuisahle.  6.  Le 
plaisir.  7.  Esipartie.  8.  Souvent.  9.  Le  sort.  10.  La  route.  11.  Assez  eloign^. 
12.  Assister.  13.  ProgrtSy  m.  H.  Apporter.  15.  Be  trop  prompts  remedes.  16. 
De  gouverner. 


READING  LESSON. 
SUITE   DE    "  SERVILIUS." 

*'  Si  vos  ennemis  se  sont  rallies,  s'ils  ont  ete  soutenus  par  un  corps 
de  troupes  qui  s'avangait  h  leur  secours ;  enfin,  s'il  a  fallu  recom- 
mencer  tout  de  nouveau  le  combat,  et  si,  dans  cette  derniere  action, 
j'ai  perdu  quelques  soldats,  n'est-ce  pas  le  sort^  ordinaire  de  la 
guerre?  Trouverez-vous  des  generaux  qui  veuillent  se  charger  du 
commandement  de  vos  armees,  h  condition  de  ramener  k  Rome  tous 
les  soldats  qui  en  seraient  sortis  sous  leur  conduite  ?  N'examinez 
done  point  si,  a  la  fin  d'une  bataille,  j'ai  perdu  quelques  soldats, 
mais  jugez  de  ma  conduite  par  ma  victoire. 

"S'il  est  vrai  que  j'ai  chasse^  les  ennemis  de  votre  territoire,  que 
je  leur  ai  tue  beaucoup  de  monde  dans  deux  combats,  que  j'ai  force 
les  debris'^  de  leurs  armees  de  s'enfermer  dans  leurs  places,*  que  j'ai 
enrichi  Rome  et  vos  soldats  du  butin^  qu'ils  ont  fait  dans  le  pays 
ennemi :  que  {let)  vos  tribuns  s'elevent,  et  qu'ils  me  reprochent  en 
quoi  j'ai  manque^  contre  les  devoirs^  d'un  bon  gen^r^l. 

"  Mais  ce  n'est  pas  ce  que  je  crains :  ces  accusations  ne  servent 
que  de  pr^texte  pour  pouvoir  exercer  impunement  leur  haine®  et  leur 
animosite  centre  le  senat  et  contre  I'ordre  des  patriciens.  Faut-il 
que  vous  ne  demandiez  jamais  rien  au  senat  qui  ne  soit  prejudiciable 


RELATIVE   PEONOUNS.  273 

au  bien  commun  de  la  patrie,  et  que  vous  ne  le  deinandiez  que  par 
des  seditions  ?  Si  un  senateur  ose'^  vous  representer  Finjustice  de 
vos  pretentions,  si  un  consul  ne  parle  pas  le  language  seditieux  de 
vos  tribuns ;  s'il  defend  avec  courage  la  souveraine  puissance  dont  il 
est  revetu,  on  crie  au  tyran,^^  A  peine  est-il  sorti  de  charge,  qu'il 
se  trouve  accable  d' accusations.  C'est  ainsi  que,  par  votre  injuste 
plebiscite,  vous  avez  6t^  la  vie  k  M^nenius,  aussi  grand  capitaine 
que  bon  citoyen.  Ne  devriez-vous  pas  mourir  de  honte  d'avoir  per- 
secute si  cruellement  le  fils  de  ce  Menenius  Agrippa,  a  qui  vous 
devez  vos  tribuns  et  ce  pouvoir  qui  vous  rend  a  present  si  furieux? 

"  On  m'en  voudra  peut-etre  de  la  liberte  avec  laquelle  je  vous 
parle  dans  I'etat  oti  je  me  trouve  k  present ;  mais  je  ne  crains  point 
la  mort :  ^3ondamnez-moi,  si  vous  I'osez ;  la  vie  ne  pent  etre  qu'k 
charge  k  un  general  qui  est  reduit  k  se  justifier  de  ses  victoires. 
Apres  tout,  un  sort  pareil  k  celui  de  Menenius  ne  pent  me  desho- 
norer." 

1.  The  fate.    2.  Driven  out.    3,  Komains.    4.  Fortresses.    5.  Booty.    6.  To  faU. 
7.  Duties.    8.  Hatred.    9.  Dare.    10.  Behold  the  tyrant. 

CONVERSATION. 

Qui  etait  Servilius?  Un  fameux  general  remain. 

Pourquoi    I'a-t-on    fait    venir    k    Pour  se  justifier  devant  le  peu- 

Kome  ?  •  pie. 

De  quoi  Favait-on  accuse  ?  On  I'avait  accus4  d'avoir  perdu 

trop  de  soldats  dans  un  com- 
bat. 
Est-il    possible    de   livrer    (une)     Non,  ce  n'est  pas  possible.     H 
bataille,    sans   qu'il  y    ait   du         doit  y  avoir  de  part  et  d'au- 
sang  de  repandu  ?  tre  du  sang  de  repandu. 

Peut-on    remporter    une    victoire     II  est  impossible  de  defaire  un 
sans  aucune  perte  ?  .  ennemi  nombreux  et  aguerri 

sans  perdre  du  monde. 
Comment  se  justifia  Servilius  du     II   rappela   aux  Remains  qu'il 
reproche  qu'on  lui  faisait  ?  avait  remporte   une  victoire 

decisive,  et  mis  en  deroute 
IS  les  legions  des  ennemis. 


274 


XII.      DOUZIEME  LEgON. 


Etait-il  en  son  pouvoir  de  retenir 
ses  soldats  ? 

Avait-il  manque  centre  les  devoirs 
d'un  bon  general  ? 

Si  Servilius  avait  fait  sonner  la 
retraite,  de  quoi  I'aurait-on  ac- 
cuse? 

Quels  services  avait-il  rendus  a 
(to)  Rome  ? 


Quand  un  senateur  etait  sorti  de 

charge,  que  faisaient  les  tribuns 

du  peuple  ? 
Quel    exemple    d'injustice     leur 

reprocha-t-il  ? 
Servilius  s'attendait-il  a  un   sort 

semblable  a  celui  de  Menenius? 


Non,  leur  courage  les  emportait, 
et  ils  poursuivaient  avec  ar- 
deur  I'ennemi  eflfray^. 

Non,  on  ne  lui  put  rien  re- 
procher. 

Les  tribuns  du  peuple  I'auraient 
accuse  d'intelligence  avec  les 
ennemis. 

II  avait  chasse  les  ennemis  du 
territoire  remain  et  enrichi 
Rome  du  butin  qu'il  rappor- 
tait  du  pays  ennemi. 

Us  I'accablaient  d'accusations. 


Celui  de  Menenius. 

Qui,  mais  il  dit  qu'un  sort  pa- 
reil  k  celui  de  Menenius  ne 
pourrait  le  deshonorer. 


XII.     DOUZIEME    LE9ON 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

In  regard  to  the  indefinite  pronouns  treated  of  in  Lesson  XXIX.,  Part 
I.,  the  following  peculiarities  are  to  be  observed :  — 

1.  The  word  on  derived  from  homme,  man  (Latin  ^omo),  serves 
to  render  all  vague  and  general  reports  expressed  in  English  by  thei/ 
say,  people  say,  it  is  said,  we  say,  etc.  The  verb  which  follows  is 
always  in  the  third  person  singular,  as :  — 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  275 

People  say,  it  is  said,  on  dit. 

One  cannot  have  everything,  on  ne  pent  pas  avoir  tout. 

Note  1.  When  in  English  the  passive  voice  is  used  in  this  sense,  the 
verb  must  be  changed  in  French  into  tlie  active  voice  with  on,  as  :  — 

It  is  said,  on  dit.  It  is  believed,  on  croit. 

I  was  told,  on  m'a  dit.  I  am  deceived,  on  me  trompe. 

Letters  have  been  received,  on  a  regu  des  lettres. 

Note  2.  For  the  cases  where  Von  is  used  instead  of  on,  see  Lesson 
XXIX.,  2. 

2.  Chacun,  e,  each,  has  for  the  English  his,  her,  or  its,  which 
follows  it,  son,  sa,  ses,  and  leur,  leurs,  for  their,  as  :  — • 

Put  these  books  each  in  its  place. 

Remettez  ces  livres  chacun  a  sa  place. 

The  judges  have  given  sentence  each  according  to  his  conscience. 

Les  juges  out  opines  chacun  selon  sa  conscience. 

The  bees  build  each  their  cells. 

Les  aheilles  bdtissent  chacune  leur  cellule. 

When  chacun  means  every  one,  everybody  (including  all),  it  is  always  mas- 
culine. Example  :  Chacun  a  son  tour.  But  when  used  relatively,  i.  e.,  in 
reference  to  a  part  of  mankind,  it  may  be  feminine.  Example :  Chacune 
de  nous  (f&nmes)  se  pr€tendait  sup€neure  aux  autres. 

3.  Aucun,  personne,  and  rien  do  not  require  ne  before  the  verb, 
in  a  sentence  interrogative  or  of  doubt :  aucun  then  stands  for  any, 
personne  for  anybody,  and  rien  for  anything.     Ex. :  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'il  y  ait  aucun  homme  sans  d^faut. 

I  do  not  think  there  is  any  man  without  a  fault. 

Je  doute  (ju'il  y  ait  rien  de  plus  beau. 

I  doubt  whether  there  is  anything  more  beautiful. 

Note.  Aucun  and  nul  are  not  used  in  the  plural,  except  before  nouns 
which  have  no  singular,  or  which  are  used  in  a  different  sense  in  the 
plural. 

5.  When,  however,  these  three  pronouns  serve  to  answer  a  ques- 
tion without  repeating  the  verb  used  by  the  inquirer,  they  retain 
their  negative  meaning,  as :  — 

Qu'avez  vous  ?  Rien.  Rien  du  tout. 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Nothing.  Nothing  at  all. 

5.  None,  not  one,  are  rendered  by  aucun  ne  and  pas  un  ne. 
Examples: — 


276  XII.     DOUZIEME  LEgON. 

None  of  you  were  there,  avicun  de  vous  n'y  ^tait. 

I  have  four  sisters ;  none  (not  one)  of  them  is  married. 

tTai  quatre  soeurs,  aucune  or  pas  une  n'est  marine. 

6.  Somehody,  some  one,  anybody,  and  any  one,  are  expressed  by 
quelqu'un  singular  and  masculine.     Ex. :  — 

Somebody  told  me  so,  qudqu'un  me  Va  dit. 

Do  you  know  any  one  here ?  Connaissez-vous  qudqu'un  id? 

7.  La  plupart,  most,  is  properly  a  collective  noun,  and  like  most 
other  collective  nouns  takes  the  plural  after  it.  This  requires  the 
verb  and  attribute  which  follow  to  be  put  in  the  plural.     Ex.  :  — 

La  plupart  de  ces  pommes  ne  sont  pas  encore  mures. 
Most  of  these  apples  are  not  yet  ripe. 

8.  Another  is  usually  expressed  by  un  autre,  and  others  (Nom. 
and  Direct  Obj.)  by  d'autres  or  les  autres.     Ex. :  —  ' 

Another  would  not  have  acted  so. 

Un  autre  n'aurait  pas  agi  ainsi. 

Charity  is  contented  that  others  be  preferred. 

La  charite  est  contente  que  les  autres  soient  pr€f^r€s. 

Buy  some  others,  achetez-en  d'autres. 

9.  Autrui,  others,  only  applies  to  persons ;  it  is,  however,  also 
taken  as  a  singular  in  the  sense  of  another.  It  is  employed  only 
after  a  preposition.  Consequently,  when  in  English  the  indefinite 
pronoun  others  occurs  in  the  Nom.  or  Dir.  Obj.,  it  must  not  be 
translated  by  autrui,  but  by  d'autres  or  les  autres  (§8).     Ex.  : — - 

Charity  rejoices  in  the  happiness  of  others. 

La  charite  se  rejouit  du  bonheur  d' autrui. 

Attendez  d'autrui  ce  que  vous  faites  a  autrui. 

Expect  from  others  the  same  treatment  which  you  give  them. 

10.  When,  however,  the  verb  in  the  latter  clause  governs  the  Dir. 
Obj.,  en  is  used  instead  of  S07i  or  ses.     Ex.:  — 

Souvent  nous  bldmons  les  defauts  d'autrui  sans  en  reconnaitre  les  bonnes  qua- 
lit€s  (without  acknowledging  their  good  qualities). 

11.  Tel  has  two  significations :  such  and  many  a  (rtian).    In  the 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  .  277 

foimer,  it  is  an  adjective  and  agrees  with  its  noun,  in  the  latter 
it  is  often  a  pronoun,  i.  e.  is  used  without  a  substantive.     Ex.:  — 

Telle  etait  la  difficult€  du  terrain  que,  etc. 

Such  was  the  difficulty  of  the  ground,  etc. 

Tel  park  de  choses  qu'il  n'entend  pas. 

Many  a  man  speaks  of  things  which  he  does  not  understand. 

12.  Such  a  must  be  rendered  by  un  tel,  une  telle.     Ex.:  — 

Un  td  homme,  such  a  man. 

Une  telle  femme,  such  a  woman. 

Un  tel  has  also  the  meaning  of  so  and  so,  as  :  — 

Chez  Monsieur  un  td ;  Madame  une  tdle. 

13.  Tel  que  has  the  meaning  such  as  or  just  as,  and  agrees  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers.     Ex.:  — 

Tdles  que  vous  les  voyez,  such  as  you  see  them  (fem.}. 

14.  Notice  also  the  expression  :  Iln'y  a  rien  de  td  que  ...  or 
il  n'est  rien  tel  que  .  .  .,  there  is  nothing  like.     Ex.:  — 

II  n^y  a  rien  de  tel  que  d^ avoir  une  bonne  conscience. 
There  is  nothing  like  having  a  good  conscience. 

THEME  26. 

1.  They  speak  of  peace.  2.  People  are  not  always  fortunate. 
8.  French  is  spoken  here.  4.  The  inventioTi  of  gunpowder  is  at- 
tributed^ to  to  Berthold  Schwarz  of  Friburg.^  5.  It  is  said  that 
the  queen  is  in  London.  6.  Everybody  has  his  faults.  7.  What 
is  the  price  of  each  of  these  medals?^  8.  My  children  have  each  a 
good  place.  9.  Ev^ry  one  has  his  [own]  manner  of  thinking*  and 
acting.  10.  I  do  not  know  any  of  his  friends.  11.  Would  any- 
body dare^  deny^  it?  12.  None  of  the  judges  were  against  you. 
13.  Of  all  the  nations  of  the  earth,  there  is  none  (not  one)  but  has 
(^qui  n'ait)  an  idea^  of  God.  14.  I  expect  somebody.  15.  Those 
apples  are  fine,  I  will  take  some.  16.  When  we  are  in  (eji)  town, 
we  have  almost  every  day  somebody  to  dine^  with  us.  17.  I  have 
lost  my  stick,  I  must  buy  another.     18.  Most  of  my  books  are 


278  XIII.      TREIZIEME  LEgON. 

new.  19.  Do  not  speak  ill  (mal)  of  others.  20.  Do  not  unto  (a) 
otters  what  thou  wouldst  not  they  should^  do  unto  thee.  21.  Many 
a  man  sows^*'  who  does  not  reap.^^  22.  There  is  nothing  like  being 
(^que  d'etre)  an  honest  man.  23.  You  must  take  them  such  as 
they  are. 

1.  Attribuer.  2.  Fribourg.  3.  Medaille,  f.  4.  De  penser  et  d>agir.  5.  Oser. 
6.  Nier.  7.  Idee,  f.  8.  A  diner.  9.  QuHls  te  fissent  a  toi  meme.  10.  Semer.  11. 
Mecolter, 


XIII.    TREIZIEME    LE9ON 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS,  CONTINUED. 

1.  L^un  et  r autre,  fem.  Fune  et  V autre  (plur.  les  uns  et  les  au- 
tres,  fem.  les  unes  et  les  autres),  both.  These  pronouns  agree  in 
gender  and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer ;  if  they  are 
preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposition  must  be  re- 
peated in  French  before  each  part.     Ex.:  — 

Both  are  gone,  Vun  et  Vavfre  sont  partis. 

I  will  do  it  for  them  both. 

Je  le  ferai  pour  Vun  et  pour  V autre. 

Note  1 .   "When  in  English  the  word  both  is  followed  by  a  noun,  it  is  ren- 
dered in  French  by  les  deux.    Ex.:  — 
•  I  use  both  hands,  je  me  sers  des  deux  mains. 

Note  2.   Both  followed  by  and  is  a  conjunction  and  is  commonly  omit- 
ted in  Erench,  as  :  — 

She  is  both  handsome  and  rich,  die  est  belle  et  riche. 

2.  L^un  ou  Vautre,  fem.  Vune  ou  Vautre,  either,  also  requires 
the  repetition  of  the  preposition,  as  :  — 

I  wiU  do  it  for  either. 

Je  le  ferai  pour  Vun  ou  pour  Vautre. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  279 

3.  Ni  Vun  ni  V autre,  fern,  ni  Vune  ni  Vautre,  neither^  requires 
ne  before  the  verb,  as  :  — 

Neither  has  obtained  the  prize. 

Ni  Vun  ni  Vautre  n'a  gagn€  le  prix. 

I  will  do  it  far  neither  of  them  (fern.). 

Je  ne  le  ferai  ni  pour  Vune  ni  pour  Vautre. 

4.  L^un  Vautre,  fern.  Vune  Vautre  (plur.  les  uns  les  autres,  fern. 
les  unes  les  autres),  one  another,  each  other.  The  first  of  the  two 
pronouns  is  always  the  subject  and  consequently  stands  in  the  Nom- 
inative in  French.  Active  verbs  then  require  se,  nous  or  vous  to 
be  prefixed,  although  no  reflective  pronoun  appears  in  English. 
When  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  in  English,  that  preposi- 
tion must  come  between  them  in  French.     Ex. :  — 

These  two  girls  love  each  other  tenderly.  i 

Ces  deux  jeunes  JUles  s'aiment  {Vune  Vautre)  tendrement. 

Charles  and  Henry  speak  ill  of  each  other. 

Charles  et  Henri parlent  mal  Vun  de  Vautre  (not  de  Vun  Vautre.) 

5.  The  word  the  same  is  expressed  by  le  meme  or  la  meme  for 
the  singular  and  by  les  memes  for  the  plural  of  both  genders,  wheth- 
er it  be  connected  with  a  noun  or  not,  as :  — 

Is  that  the  same  pencil  which  I  have  lent  you. 
Est-ce  le  meme  crayon  que  cdui  que  je  vous  ai  pret€? 
Yes,  it  is  the  same,  oui,  c'est  le  meme. 

6.  The  same,  meaning  the  same  thing,  is  expressed  by  la  meme 
chose.     Ex. :  — 

He  did  the  same,  il  a  fait  la  meme  chose. 

7.  When  meme  signifies  even,  it  is  an  adverb  and  invariable. 
It  may  be  placed  before  or  after  the  nouns.     Ex.:  — 

Vos  freres,  vos  amis,  vos  ennemis  meme. 

Your  brothers,  your  friends,  your  enemies  even. 

8.  Everything,  all,  are  expressed  by  tout  without  any  article, 
placed,  in  compound  tenses,  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  partici- 
ple, as :  — 


280  XIII.      TEEIZIEME  LEgON. 

I  have  lost  everything,  fai  tout  perdu. 
Everything  falls,  tout  tombe. 
All  have  perished  there,  tons  y  ont  p€ri. 
I  have  seen  them  all,  je  les  ai  toutes  vues. 

9.  Le  tout  stands  for  a  substantive  singular  and  masculine,  and 
answers  to  the  English  the  whole,  as :  — 

Le  tout  est  plus  grand  que  la  partie. 

The  whole  is  greater  than  a  part. 

Je  prendrai  le  tout,  I  will  take  the  whole. 

10.  The  English  words  all  that,  everything  that  and  whatever, 
are  rendered  in  French  by  tout  ce  qui  (Norn.),  or  tout  ce  que  (Dir. 
Obj.),  always  singular  and  masculine.     Ex.:  — 

I  like  all  that  is  fine,  j'aime  tout  ce  qui  est  beau. 
All  that  he  says  is  true,  tout  ce  qu'il  dit  est  vrai. 

11.  In  the  sense  of  quite,  entirely,  before  an  adjective  or  a  par- 
ticiple masculine  of  both  numbers,  and  before  an  adjective  feminine 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  h  mute,  tout  remains  uninflected ;  but  it 
is  declinable  before  an  adjective  or  a  participle  feminine  which  be- 
gins with  a  consonant,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender  and  number. 
Examples :  — 

Nous  fumes  tout  surpris,  we  were  quite  surprised. 

Ma  sceur  ^tait  tout  ^tonn^e. 

My  sister  was  quite  astonished. 

EJle  fut  toute  surprise,  she  was  quite  surprised. 

12.  When  tout  in  connection  with  que  stands  for  ...  as, 
although,  however,  it  is  used  as  a  conjunction  with  the  Indicative 
mood;  and  in  this  use  the  above-mentioned  rule  (§11)  also  holds 
good  (see  also  §  13).     Ex.:  — 

Tout  riches  que  vous  etes,  rich  as  you  are. 

Toutes  savantes  que  sont  ces  dames. 

Learned  as  these  ladies  are  (however  learned  these  ladies  are,  etc.). 

THE:ME   27. 

1.  Both  are  (^ont)  right.  2.  Both  serve  the  same  purpose.^  3. 
Do  you  speak  of  my  brother  or  of  my  sister  ?    4.  I  speak  of  both. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  281 

5.  Both  his  uncle  and  aunt  are  dead.  6.  Either  of  you  can  do  me  a 
great  favor.  7.  Yesterday  I  expected  my  two  best  friends,  but 
neither  of  them  came.  8.  Both  suspect^  him,  but  neither  will  say 
why.  9.  Fire  and  water  destroy^  each  other.  10.  Love ^  one  an- 
other, said  our  Lord.^  11.  They  speak  ill  of  one  another.  12.  It  is 
rare  to  hear  two  authors^  speak  well  of  each  other.  13.  This  poem 
is  the  same  that^  I  was  mentioning^  to  you.  14.  How  much  do  you 
ask  for  the  whole  ?  15.  I  will  not  sell  the  whole  ;  I  must  keep^  a 
part  for  myself.  16.  All  is  mutable ^°  in  this  world.  17.  Every- 
thing displeases ^^  you.  18.  He  has  taken  everything  for  himself. 
19.  All  is  not  gold  that  ghtters^^  (^transl:  All  that  (L.  XI.,  §  10) 
gUtters  is  not  gold).  20.  Whatever  is  good  in  itself  (e/i  so^) ,  is 
not  always  approved.-^^  21.  His  mother  was  {fut)  quite  cast 
down^^  at  that  news;  however,  sorry ^^  though  she  was,  she  received 
me  kindly,  and  desired^^  me  to  dine  with  her.  22.  This  fashion^^ 
is  quite  new.  23.  My  friend,  however  learned  he  may  be,  is  some- 
times mistaken.^^ 

1.  Usage,  m.     2.  Soupc^onner.     3.  Se  detruisent.     4.  Aimez-vous.     5.  Seigneur. 

6.  Auteur.  7.  Que  celui  dont.  8.  Parle.  9.  Garder.  10.  Variable.  11.  De- 
plaire.  12.  Brille.  13.  Approuver.  14.  Abattue.  15.  Affligde.  16.  Frier.  17. 
Mode,  f.    18.  Se  tromper. 


13.  Quelque  —  que,  however,  though  —  ever  so,  is  used  in  the 
same  sense  as  tout  —  que,  with  this  difFerenccjthat  tout  —  que  sup- 
poses something  more  true  or  real,  whereas  quelque — que  implies 
something  as  possibly  assumed,  and  on  this  account  always  governs 
the  Subjunctive.  Quelque,^  when  before  an  adjective  or  participle, 
remains  unchanged.  The  construction  of  the  sentence  is  as  fol- 
lows :  quelque  begins  the  clause,  the  second  place  is  taken  by  the 
adjective  or  participle,  then  follows  que,  then  the  pronoun,  then  the 
verb  in  the  Subjun(3tive  mood.     Ex.:  — 

12  8        4  5  10 

Quelque  habiles  que  vous  soyez. 
However  skilful  you  may  be. 

But  when  the  subject  is  not  a  pronoun,  but  a  substantive,  then  the 
verb  takes  the  fourth  place  and  the  noun  the  fifth.    Ex.:  — 


282  Xni.      TREIZIEME  LEQON. 

12  3       4  5 

Quelqm  louahle  que  soit  voire  conduite,  elle  sera  condamn^e. 
However  praiseworthy  your  conduct  maybe  —  or  though  your  conduct 
be  ever  so  praiseworthy,  —  it  will  be  condemned. 

14.  Quelque,  followed  by  a  substantive  and  any  other  verb  than 
to  he,  is  an  adjective,  and  therefore  takes  an  s  before  a  noun  plural. 
It  corresponds  with  the  English  whatever.  The  construction  is  : 
1,  quelque{s)]  2,  the  substantive;  3,  que ;  4,  the  pronoun;  5,  the 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  the  rest  as  in  English.     Ex. :  — 

1  2  8    4         6 

Quelques  richesses  qu'ils  aient  amass^es,  ils  ne  sont  pas  heureiix. 
Whatever  riches  they  may  have  collected,  they  are  not  happy. 
Quelques  fautes  qu'il  ait  commise^,  je  lui  pardonnerai. 
Whatever  faults  he  has  committed,  I  will  forgive  him. 

15.  Quel  que,  fern,  quelle  que,  must  be  divided  when  it  is  im- 
mediately followed  by  the  verb  to  he;  it  agrees  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  to  which  it  relates ;  it  likewise  requires  the 
verb  to  be  put  in 'the  Subjunctive  mood.     Ex.:  — 

Qudle  que  soit  voire  faute,  on  vous  pardonnera. 
Whatever  your  fault  may  be,  they  will  forgive  you. 
Quels  que  soient  les  ialents  de  voire  frere,  il  ne  re'ussira  pas. 
Whatever  your  brother's  talents  may  be,  he  will  not  succeed. 

,16.  The  English  ivhoever  and  whosoever  are  usually  rendered  by 
quiconque  when  they  mean  every  one  who  or  all  those  who. 
Examples :  — 

Quiconque  n'observera  pas  cette  hi,  sera  puni. 
Whoever  does  not  observe  this  law,  will  be  punished. 
Je  parle  a  quiconque  veut  m'entendre. 
I  speak  to  whomsoever  will  hear  me. 

17.  The  same  two  pronouns  ivhoever  and  whosoever  are  ex- 
pressed in  French  by  qui  que  ce  soit  (or  fut)  qui,  when  they  mean 
whatei^  may  he  the  person  who.  The  verb  is  in  the  Subj.  mood. 
Examples : 

Whoever  has  done  that,  he  is  a  man  of  talent. 

Qui  que  ce  soit  qui  ait  fait  cda,  c'est  un  homme  de  talent. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  283 

Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say  what  you  have  seen. 
Qui  que  ce  soit  que  (Dir.  Obj.)  vous  rencontriez,  ne  dites  pas  ce  que  vous 
avez  vu. 

18.  A  shorter  expression  for  qui  que  ce  soit  que  (not  qui^  is 
qui  que,  which  is  often  used,  except  before  il  and  ils : 

Qui  que  i^ous  soyez,  vous  etes  le  bienvenu. 

"Whoever  you  may  be,  you  are  welcome. 

Qui  que  vous  rencontriez,  ne  dites  pas,  etc.  / 

Whomsoever  you  meet  with,  do  not  say,  etc. 

19.  Nobody  whatever,  is  expressed  by  qui  que  ce  soit  and  ne 
before  the  verb.     Ex.:  — 

Let  nobody  whatever  enter  my  room. 

Ne  laissez  entrer  qui  que  ce  soit  dans  ma  chambre. 

I  trust  nobody  whatever. 

Je  ne  me  fie  a  qui  que  ce  soit. 

Note.  But  when  nobody  whatever  begins  the  sentence,  personne  is  used, 
as  :  — 
Nobody  whatever  has  spoken  ill  of  you. 
Personne  n'a  parU  mal  de  vous. 

20.  When  the  English  indefinite  pronoun  whatever  does  not 
mean  all  that  which  or  everything  which,  but  whatever  may  be  the 
thing  which,  it  is  rendered  into  French  by  quelque  chose  qui,  quoi 
que,  or  quoi  que  ce  soit  (or  fut)  qui  or  que.     Ex.:  — 

Whatever  may  be  said  to  you,  do  not  believe  it. 
Quelque  chose  qu'on  vous  disc,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or : 
Quoi  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas.     Or  : 
Quoi  que  ce  soit  qu'on  vous  dise,  ne  le  croyez  pas. 
Whatever  you  may  order,  I  will  do  it. 
Quelque  chose  que  vous  commandiez,  je  le  ferai.     Or : 
Quoi  que  ce  soit  que  vous  commandiez,  je  le  ferai. 

21.  Nothing  whatever,  not  anything  whatever,  is  translated  by 
quoi  que  ce  soit  or  fut,  and  ne  before  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Without  application,  it  is  impossible  to  succeed  in  anything  whatever. 
Sans  application  on  ne  peut  r€ussir  en  quoi  que  ce  soit. 


284  XIV.   QUATORZIEME  LEgON. 

THEME  28. 

1.  The  wise  man  does  not  fear  men,  however  powerful  they  may 
be.  2.  Men,  however  great  or  small  they  may  be,  are  never  suffi- 
ciently^ sensible  how  necessary  they  are  to  each  other.  3.  What- 
ever wealth^  you  may  have,  you  will  never  be  happy,  unless  you^ 
restrain  your  passions.  4.  Do  not  lose  [your]  courage,  whatever 
may  happen  to  you.  5.  Distrust^  every  one  who  (§  16)  speaks  ill 
of  his  friends.  6.  The  laws  condemn^  all  criminals,^  whoever  (§  15) 
they  may  be.  7.1  tell  it  to  every  one  who  will  hear.  8.  I  hope  that 
you  will  not  tell  my  secret  to  anybody  whatever.  9.  Regulus  did 
not  allow  himself  to  be  moved,^  whatever  the  promises  were  that  the 
Carthaginians^  made  him.  10.  Unfortunate  [man]  !  whoever 
(§  18)  you  are,  I  will  not  betray*^  you.  11.  Whatever  (§  20) 
may  happen  to  you  in  this  world,  never  murmur^*'  against  Divine 
Providence ;  for  whatever  we  may  suffer,  we  deserve^^  it.  12.  Of 
whomsoever  you  speak,  always  speak  the  truth.  13.  I  have  found 
nothing  whatever.  14.  I  complain^^  of  nothing  whatever.  15. 
Young  men  !  ^^  whatever  the  destiny^*  may  be  that  await*'^  you,  in 
whatever  region  of  the  earth  your  days  may  be^^  spent,  nature  will 
continually  offer  to  you  her  products^'^  and  her  wonders ;  ^^  you  will 
continually  be  sun'ounded^^  with  the  objects  of  your  study. 

1.  Asses.  2.  liichesse,  f.  3.  A  moins  que  vous  ne  reprimiez.  4.  Meflez-vous  de. 
6.  Condamner.  6.  Criminel.  7.  Ne  se  laissa  pas  ebranler.  8.  Carthaginois.  9. 
Trahir.  10.  Murmurer.  11.  Meriter.  12.  Se  plaindre  de.  13.  Gens.  14.  Le  sort 
15.  Attendre.  16.  Doivent  s^ecouler.  17.  Produits,  m.  18.  Merveilles.  19.  EntoU' 
res  de. 


XIY.     QUATOKZIEME    LE9ON 


ADYEKBS. 

See  Part  I.,  Lessons  XXI  and  XXXII. ' 

1.  As  already  observed,  the  manner  or  mode  of  the  action  is 
expressed  by  the  adverbs  of  quality  or  manner,  as : 


ADVERBS.  285 

n  agit  sagement  (not  sage),  he  acts  wisely. 
II  €crit  mal  (not  mauvais),  he  writes  badly. 

2.  There  are  certain  adjectives,  however,  which  are  used  instead 

of  the  adverb.     This  is  the  case  in  the  following  expressions  :  — 

Aller  vite,  to  walk  fast.  rester  court,       ) 

»^      ,      ^    ,  .  J  ,   r  to  stop  short. 

couter  Cher,  to  be  expensive.  aemeurer  court,  ) 

vendre  cher,  to  sell  dear.  payer  comptant,  to  pay  cash. 

seniir  bon,  to  smell  sweet.  marcher  droit,  to  walk  straight. 

sentir  mauvais,  to  smell  badly.  chanter  juste,  to  sing  correctly. 

trouver  bon,  to  approve.  chanter  faux,  to  sing  false. 

trouver  mauvais,  to  take  ill.  parler  haut,  to  speak  loud. 

voir  clair,  to  see  clearly.  parler  bas,  to  speak  low. 

tenir  ferme,  to  hold  fast.  /aire  e^pres,  to  do  on  purpose. 

3.  The   adjectives   in  this   case   remain,  of  course,  unchanged. 
Examples :  — 

Cette  montre  coute  trop  cher  (not  chere). 
This  watch  is  too  dear. 
Les  enfants  parlent  trop  haut  (not  hauts). 
The  children  speak  too  loud. 
La  chanteuse  a  chants  faux  (not  fausse). 
The  songstress  has  sung  false. 

Note  1.    In  speaking  of  the  state  of  the  health,  however,  the  adverb 
bien  or  mal  is  employed.     Ex. :  — 
Je  suis  bien,  I  am  well. 
Elle  se  trouve  mal,  she  finds  herself  ill. 

Note  2.   Observe  also  the  expressions,  Elle  est  bien,  she  is  pretty ;  and 
die  n'est  pas  mal,  she  is  not  bad-looking. 

4.  Some  adverbs  take  after  them  an  object  with  de  or  a,  in  case 
the  adjective  from  which  they  are  derived  also  takes  one.     Ex :  — 

Conforrriement  a  vos  ordres. 

In  conformity  with  your  orders. 

Independamment  de  mes  instructions. 

Independently  of  my  instructions. 

Cette  riviere  coule  parallelement  a  la  Vistule. 

That  river  flows  parallel  with  the  Vistula. 

THE3IE   29. 

1.  Do  not  go  so  fast.     2.  The  night  is  approaching  ;  I  no  longer 
(plTis)  see  clearly.     3.  The  rose  smells  sweet,  but  the  pink^  smells 


286  XIV.      QUATORZIEMB   LEgON. 

better.  4.  Do  not  speak  low  (in  a  whisper)  in  the  presence  of 
others.  5.  How  does  the  singer^  sing  ?  6.  She  sings  false  (incor- 
rectly). 7.  Do  not  speak  so  low ;  speak  louder,  so  that  you  can^  be 
understood.  8.  You  do  not  read  well,  and  you  write  no  (pas) 
better.  9.  To-day  I  am  not  very  well.  10.  Do  not  eat  so  fast. 
11.  This  merchant  sells  his  goods'*  very  dear.  12.  It  is  dark ;  I  do 
not  see  clearly.  13.  I  have  distributed^  the  money  according  to  (in 
conformity  with)  your  orders. 

1.  L^  (Billet.    2.  La  chanteuse.    3.  Qu'on  puisse  vous  comprendre.     4.  Marchan- 
dises.    5.  Distribuer. 


ADVERBS    OF    TIME,   ETC. 

1.  Observe  the  distinction  between  the  following  adverbs  :  —  1. 
Plutot  means  rather  (of  inclination)  ;  plus  tot,  sooner  (of  time). 

2.  Tout  a  coup  means  at  once,  suddenly,  unexpectedly ;  tout  (Tun 
coup  means  at  once,  i.  e.,  at  one  time ;  a  la  fois  means  altogether. 

3.  Immediately  is  translated  by  tout  de  suite,  tout  a  Vheure,  and 
also  by  sans  delai.  De  suite  means  successively,  one  after  the 
other.  4.  V autre  jour  means  the  other  day,  lately,  synonymous 
with  dernier ement.  On  the  next  day  is  le  lendemain.  5.  A  little 
while  ago  is  tantot ;  just  is  expressed  by  the  verb  venir  (see  Part 
I.  Lesson  XLVL).     Ex.:  — 

He  has  just  gone  out,  il  vient  de  sortir 

2.  Tres,  fort,  and  hien,  all  mean  very,  right ;  and  whether  one 
or  the  other  is  to  be  used  before  the  adjective  depends  upon  euphony 
alone.  Very  much,  with  verbs  is  generally  translated  by  heaucoup, 
and  sometimes  also  by  hien ;  but  never  by  tres  or  tres  heaucoup. 
Bien,  with  a  noun  in  the  sense  of  much  or  a  great  many,  must  be 
followed  by  de  with  the  definite  article  (see  Lesson  lY.,  §  1). 

3.  When,  in  interrogative  phrases,  is  rendered  by  quand.  In 
other  cases,  quand  refers  to  a  possible,  probable  fact ;  lorsque  to  a 
positive,  real  fact.  Quand  is  vague ;  lorsque  is  precise,  as  its  ety- 
mology shows,  alorsque,  i.  e.,  a  Vheure  que. 


ADVERBS.  '  287 

4.  Plus  and  davantage  both  mean  more.  Tlie  latter  always 
stands  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and  consequently  can  be  followed 
neither  by  a  noun  nor  by  a  comparison  with  than.  Than  after  plus 
and  mains  is  usually  que,  but  before  a  numeral  it  is  translated  by  de. 

5.  Adverbs  follow  the  simple  verb.  Do  not  say,  Ma  sceur  rare- 
ment  sort  le  matin  ;  but,  ma  sceur  sort  rarement  le  matin,  my  sis- 
ter seldom  goes  out  in  the  morning.  Je  pense  souvent  a  vous,  I 
often  think  of  you. 

In  connection  with  the  compound  tenses  of  the  verb,   the  adverb  is 
generally  placed  between  the  auxiliary  and  the  Participle  Past.    Ex. : 
Ma  sceur  a  beaucoup  voyag€. 
My  sister  has  travelled  a  great  deal. 

6.  But  adverbs  of  time  can  also  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
the  sentence,  when  an  emphasis  it  laid  upon  them.     Ex. :  — 

Bientot  je  le  vis  rqxiraitre,  I  saw  him  soon  reappear. 

THEME   30. 

1.  "We  often  put  off^  till  the  next  day  what  we  ought  to  do  at 
once.  2.  Fortune  is  so  fickle^  that  she  often  suddenly  deserts*  those 
that  she  has  favored*  the  most.  3.  A  single*  drop  of  vinegar  con- 
tains more  than  a  hundred  animalculae.^  4.  This  man  has  a  great 
many  faults.  5.  Children  must  obey  immediately.  6.  This  man 
has  been  very  much  regretted.^  7.  One  does  not  arrive  at  once  at 
the  highest  pinnacle®  of  fame.  8.  Mr.  M.  (has)  won  a  thousand  dol- 
lars at  one  time.  9.  He  undertakes  too  many  things  at  once.  10. 
Did  you  believe  this  man?  11.  At  first  (d^ahord)  I  was  not  will- 
ing to  believe  him.  12.  Good  taste^  is  rather  a  gift^^  of  nature, 
than  an  acquirement^^  of  ar^  13.  How  much  money  have  you  lent 
him  ?     14.  I  have  lent  him  more  than  eighty  florins. 

1.  Renvoyer  OT  differ er.  2.  Inconstant.  3  Abandonner.  4.  Favorises.  5.  Une 
seule  goutte.  6.  Animalcule,  m.  7.  Eegretter,  8.  Degre,  m.  9.  Gout,  m.  10. 
Don,  m.    11.  Acquisition,  f. 


288  "  XIV.      QUATORZIEME  LEgON. 

reading  lesson. 

Le  Connetable  de  Bouhbon  et  Bayard. 

(Dialogue.) 

Le  Connetable.  N'est-ce  pas  le  pauvre  Bayard  que  je  vols  au 
pied  de  cet  arbre,  etendu  sur  I'herbe,^  efc  perce  d'ua  grand  coup? 
Oui,  e'est  lui-meme.  Helas  !  je  le  plains.  En  voila  deux  qui  pd- 
rissent  aujourd'hui  par  nos  armes  :  Vandenesse  et  lui.  Ces  deux 
Frangais  etaient  deux  omements  de  leur  nation  par  leur  courage. 
Je  sens  que  mon  coeur  est  encore  touche  pour  sa  patrie.  Mais  avan- 
90ns  pour  Ini  parler.  Ah  !  mon  pauvre  Bayard,  c'est  avec  douleur 
que  je  te  vols  en  cet  etat. 

Bayard.     C'est  avec  douleur  que  je  vous  vols  aussi. 

Le  Con.  Je  comprends  bien  que  tu  es  fache  de  te  voir  dans 
mes  mains  par  le  sort^  de  la  guerre  ;  mais  je  ne  veux  point  te  trailer 
en  prisonnier,  je  te  veux  garder  comme  un  bon  ami,  et  prendre  soin 
de  ta  guerison,^  comme  si  tu  etais  mon  propre  frere.  Ainsi  tu  ne 
dois  point  etre  fache  de  me  voir. 

Bay.  He  !  croyez-vous  que  je  ne  sois  point  fache  d'avoir  obli- 
gation au  plus  grand  ennemi  de  la  France  ?  Ce  n'est  point  de  ma 
captivite,  ni  de  ma  blessure,*  que  je  suis  en  peine  :  ^  je  meurs  dans 
un  moment,  la  mort  va  me  delivrer  de  vos  mains. 

Le  Con.  Non,  mon  cher  Bayard,  j'espere  que  nos  soins  rcussi- 
ront  a  te  guerir. 

Bay.  Ce  n'est  point  la  ce  que  je  cherche,  et  je  suis  content  de 
mourir.  (  Jb  he  continued.^ 

1.  Grass.    2.  Fate.    .3.  Recovery.    4.  Wound.    5.  Sorry. 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  289 


XY.     QUINZIEME    LE9ON. 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS. 
(See  P.  I.,  L.  XXXII.) 

1.  It  is  necessary  in  the  first  place  to  distinguish  whether  the  n^* 
gal  ion  belongs  to  a  verb  or  not ;  if  not,  the  negative  particle  stands 
without  ne.  Not,  without  a  verb,  before  nouns,  is  translated  by  non 
or  non  pas.     Ex. :  — 

His  cruelty  and  not  his  pride. 

Sa  cruaute'et  non  Cor  non  pas)  son  orgueil. 

Not  in  connection  with  other  words  is  simply  pas :  — 
Not  much,  pas  beaucoup.  Not  I,  pas  moi. 

Not  so  much,  pas  taut.  Why  not,  pourquoi  jms. 

Not  at  all,  pas  du  tout  or  point  du  tout. 

N.  B.  Observe  the  following  expressions :  — 

Not  (nor)  — either,  non  plus. 

Nor  his  brother  either,  ni  son  frere  non  plus. 

Nor  I  either,  ni  moi  non  plus. 

Not  only  —  but,  non-seulement  —  mats.     (See  §  4 . ) 

2.  But  if  the  negation  belongs  to  the  verb  the  negative  particle, 
whatever  it  may  be,  is  invariably  accompanied  by  ne.     Ex.:  — 

Ne  lui  parlez  pas,  do  not  speak  to  him. 

Je  n'ai  rien  vu,  I  have  seen  nothing. 

Je  ne  Vai  plus,  I  have  it  no  more. 

Aucun  de  vous  n'y  €tait,  none  of  you  were  there. 

'Le  pauvre  homme  n'a  point  d' argent. 

The  poor  man  has  no  money. 

Je  ne  connais  personne  ici,  I  know  nobody  here. 

Ni  prieres  ni  *  menaces  ne  purent  I'attendrir. 

Neither  prayers  nor  threatenings  could  move  him. 

*  If  neither — nor  come  before  two  verbs  in  the  Indicative  mood,  the  former  is  ex- 
pressed simply  by  ne  before  the  first,  and  nor  by  ni  ne  before  the  second.     Ex.  :— 
I  neither  praise  nor  blame  him. 
Je  ne  le  loue,  ni  ne  le  bldme. 
19 


290  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgON. 

II  ne  suit  ni  lire  ni  €crire. 
He  knows  neither  how  to  read  nor  write. 
Nous  n'approuvons  nullement  voire  dessein. 
We  by  no  means  approve  of  your  design. 

Note.   When  the  verb  is  in  the  simple  Infinitive  nepas  or  ne  point  falso 
ne  jamais)  are  not  separated,  as  :  — 

Not  to  study,  ne  pas  €ttidier  or  ne  point  dudier. 

But  when  it  is  in  the  compound  Infinitive  it  is  optional  to  separate  them 
or  not,  as  :  — 


Not  to  have  studied. 


(  ne 
\n\ 


pas  (point)  avoir  ^udi€. 
avoir  pas  (point)  €tudi€. 


3.  The  words  no  more  or  not  any  more  (meaning  not  more)  are 
expressed  by  ne  before  tlie  verb  and  pas  plus  after,  when  more  is 
followed  by  than :  — 

He  is  no  more  than  fifteen  years  of  age. 
II  n'a  pas  plus  de  quinze  ans. 

But  they  are  rendered  by  ne  — plus  without  pas,  when  more  is  not  fol- 
lowed by  than.    Ex.:  — 

I  shall  read  no  more  (no  longer),  je  ne  lirai  plus. 

4.  Non  seulement,  not  only,  takes  no  ne  with  the  verb.     Ex. :  — 

Je  Vai  fait  non  seulement  pour  lui,  mais  aussi  pour  ses  enfants. 
I  have  done  it  not  only  for  his  sake,  but  also  for  his  children's. 

THEME   31. 

1.  I  do  not  speak.  2.  I  have  not  spoken.  3.  Have  you 
bought  this  book  ?  4.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  (P.  I.,  L.  XL  VIZ.).  5. 
It  is  your  friendship  which  I  seek,  not  my  interest.^  6.  Not  I.  7. 
Not  we.  8.  Are  you  tired?  9.  Not  at  all.  10.  I  was  not  there; 
nor  my  sister  either.  11.  This  peasant^  can  neither  read  nor  write. 
12.  The  boy  has  neither  paper^  nor  pens.  13.  I  have  never 
had  such  a  (un  si)  good  book.  14.  We  have  no  desire  at  all* 
to  do  it.  15.  The  speaker^  has  convinced®  not  only  his  friends 
but  also  his  adversaries.  16.  Charles  XII.  persisted  in^  never 
speaking  (never  to  speak)  French.     17.  I  have  no  more  hope. 

1.  Interet,  m.  2.  Paysan,  m.  3.  See  p.  224,  $  3.  4.  Nullement  envie.  5.  Voror 
teur,    6.  Convaincre.    7,  S'obstinaa, 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  291 

NE  USED  ALONE  WITHOUT  PAS. 

5.  The  negative  not  is  expressed  by  ne  without  pas  or  point 
with  the  three  verbs :  cesser^  to  cease ;  oser,  to  dare ;  pouvoir,  to 
be  able ;  when  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  as :  — 

Elle  ne  cesse  de  pleurer,  she  does  not  cease  crying. 
//  n'ose  revenir,  he  dares  not  come  back. 
Je  ne  puis  le  croire,  I  cannot  believe  it. 

Note  1 .    Cesser  takes  pas,  however,  when  a  time  is  specified,  as  :  — 
U  ne  cesse  pas  de  travailler  avant  huit  heures  du  soir. 
Note  2.  In  regard  to  pouvoir,  use  in  the  first  person  of  the  Present 
tense  either :  — 
Je  ne  puis  (without  |)as),  or :  Jene  peux  pas. 

6.  When  the  negative  use  of  savoir  means  to  he  uncertain,  i.  e. 
in  doubt,  it  does  not  take  pas.  In  the  same  way  pas  is  always 
omitted  in  the  expression  je  ne  saurais,  I  cannot.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  savais  que  dire,  I  did  not  know  what  to  say 
Je  ne  saurais  vous  donner  une  garantie, 
1  cannot  give  you  a  security. 

But  if  "  not  know  "  has  the  signification  of  not  to  have  learned,  not  to 
know  (a  language,  etc.),  then  samr  always  takes  ne  and  pas.    Ex.:  — 
Je  ne  sais  pas  nager,  I  cannot  swim. 
Ne  savez-vous  pas  I'allemand,  do  you  not  know  German  ? 

7.  In  sentences  depending  upon  prendre  garde,  to  take  care, 
there  is  no  pas.     Ex.:  — 

Prenez  garde  qu'il  ne  vous  trompe. 
Pas  is  used  however  if  an  infinitive  follows.    Ex.:  — 
Prenez  garde  de  ne  pas  tomber. 

8.  Of  two  negative  sentences  standing  in  immediate  connection 
with  each  other,  the  latter  loses  its  pas.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  connais  personne  qui  ne  fasse  quelquefois  des  fautes. 

Note  1.  Also  peu  and  sans  are  here  regarded  as  a  negation,  as  :  — 

Peu  s'en  faut  qu'il  ne  soit  tomh€,  he  was  very  near  falling. 

Sans  rien  faire,  without  doing  anything. 


292  XV.      QUINZIEME    LEgON. 

Note  2.  The  former  sentence  may  also  be  interrogative  if  only  the  idea 
of  negation  be  contained  in  it,  as  :  — 

Y  a-t-il  Cor  est-il)  un  liomme  qui  ne  croie  en  Dieu  ? 

9.  Do  not  put  pcis  after  que  ne,  when  used  instead  of  pourquoi 
pas.     Ex.:  — 

Si  vous  avez  froid,  que  ne  mettez-vous  votre  mant&m  ? 
If  you  are  cold,  why  not  put  on  your  cloak  ? 

10.  Nor  after  voila,  il  y  a  and  depuis  que,  when  the  verb  which 
has  the  idea  of  negation  is  in  the  compound  of  the  Present  or  in  the 
compound  of  the  Imperfect.     Ex. :  — 

Hy  a  deux  mois  que  je  ne  lui  ai  parle. 
U  a  bien  change  depuis  que  je  ne  I'ai  vu. 

11.  Pas  is  not  used  when  ne  is  connected  with  d^ autre  followed 
by  que,  as :  — 

Je  n'ai  d' autre  ambition  que  de  vous  rendre  heureux. 
I  have  no  other  ambition  than  to  make  you  happy. 

12.  Further  in  the  following  idioms  :  —    . 

N*avoir  garde,  to  take  care  not  to,  to  be  on  one's  guard. 

JVimporte,  it  does  not  matter. 

Ne  voir  goutte,  to  see  nothing  (at  all). 

Ne  dire  mot,  to  say  not  a  word. 

a  Dieu  neplaise  que,  etc.,  God  forbid,  etc. 

13.  A  moins  que  ^nd  conjunctions  expressing  fear,  take  ne  before 
the  following  verb  (in  the  subjunctive).     Ex.:  — 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez,  Unless  you  do  it. 

THEME    32. 

1.  Alcibiades  could  not  suflfer  that  his  country  should  obey^  a 
rival.^  2.  I  dare  not  enter^  his  room.  3.  It  is  no  more  than  a 
week*  since  I  saw  (^que  fai  vu)  your  uncle ;  he  has  gone  to  Amer- 
ica, you  will  see  him  no  more.  4.  I  cannot  (§  6)  tell  you  whether 
(s^)  my  father  is  at  home  or  not  (noji)]  I  have  not  seen  him  this 
morning.      5.  Take  care  lest  (^qtie,  %  7)  he  steal  your  money.      6. 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  293 

Take  care  not  to  "be  (to  come)  too  late.  7.  We  dare  not  tell  him  tMs 
news.  8.  There  is  no  enemy  who  is  (soit)  not  able^  to  injure.^  9. 
God  forbid  that  I  should  betray^  your  secret. 

1.  Imperf.  Subj.  2.  A  une  rivale.    3.  Entrer  dans.    4.  HuU  jours.    5.  En  4tat, 
6.  Be  nuire.    7.  Trahir, 


NEGATION  USED  IN  FRENCH,  AND  NOT  IN  ENGLISH.* 

14.  iVf?  is  moreover  often  employed  in  French  when  in  English 
no  thought  of  negation  is  to  be  discovered.     This  is  the  case  :  — 

With  the  affirmative  verb  of  a  comparative  clause  introduced 
by  que,  than,  when  the  verb  closely  follows  que.  Also  after 
verbs,  nouns,  and  conjunctions  expressing  fear  and  apprehension. 
Ex.:  — 

II  est  plus  ag€  que  je  ne  croyais. 

He  is  older  than  I  thought. 

Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

I  fear  he  may  come. 

II  pane  autrement  qu'il  n'agit. 

He  speaks  otherwise  than  he  acts. 
A  moins  que  vous  ne  le  fassiez. 
Unless  you  should  do  it. 

Note.    But  if  the  first  clause  of  the  sentence  be  negative,  que  of  the  lat- 
ter clause  is  not  followed  by  ne,  if  the  compared  action  is  not  doubtful,  as  : 
II  n'dcrit  pas  mieux  qu'il  parle. 

15.  The  verbs  douter,  to  doubt;  nier  and  disconvenir,  to  deny^ 
contester,  to  contest,  requne  ne  before  the  verb  (in  the  Subjunctive) 
of  the  dependent  sentence,  yet  only  when  these  verbs  themselves 
are  used  simply  negatively  or  simply  interrogatively.     Ex. :  — 

Je  ne  doute  pas )  ,  .         .   ^ 

Doutez-vous        \  ^"^  ''^^  ^'  '^'^  ^'«'-  ^^^ 

I  do  not  doubt  (do  you  doubt)  that  this  is  true. 

Niez-vous        7 

Je  ne  me  pas  \  ^"'^'^  ^^  '''^  ^^"^^^^'-  ^'^ 

Do  you  deny  (I  do  not  deny)  that  he  is  guilty? 

•  The  pupil  should  learn,  in  connection  with  this  lesson,  $  6,  L.  XJX. 


294  XV.      QUINZIEME  LEgON. 

16.  But  when  these  verbs  are  aflBrmative,  or  negative-interroga- 
tive, ne  is  not  inserted  in  the  second  clause.  Also  when  ne  pas 
douter  has  the  force  of  etre  sur.     Ex. :  — 

Je  doute  que  cda  soit  vrai  (without  ne). 
Ne  niez-vous  pas  qu'il  soit  coupable  ? 

17.  If  the  dependent  sentence  in  English  is  negative,  it  takes, 
of  course,  we — pas.     Ex.:  — 

I  fear  he  will  not  come,  je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne  pas. 
They  fear  the  fortress  will  not  have  ammunition  enough. 
On  craint  que  la  forteresse  n'ait  pas  assez  de  munition. 

18.  Empecher,  to  prevent,  to  hinder,  requires  ne  before  the  fol- 
lowing verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  as  ^  — 

J' empecherai  qu'il  ne  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 
Empechera-t-il        7 

II  n'empichera  pas  \  ^"^  '''^'  ^^  ^'  /«^^^*^- 

Will  he  prevent  you  (he  will  not  prevent  you)  from  doing  it  ? 

THEME  33. 

1.  He  is  more  wicked  than  I  thougnt.  2.  Henry  is  stronger 
than  he  was  last  year.  3.  Ireland  is  more  powerful,  at  present,  than 
were  the  three  kingdoms  at  (a)  the  death  of  queen  Elizabeth.  4. 
A  traveller  often  relates^  things  otherwise  than  they  are.  5.  I  fear 
lest  (jque)  some  misfortune  has  befallen^  my  son.  6.  I  fear  our 
master  will  come;  do  you  not  fear  he  will  come?  7.  He  denies 
that  his  brother  is  mixed  up^  in  that  affair.  8.  The  city  of  Paris 
has  become  much  more  beautiful  since*  you  saw  (have  seen)  it.  9. 
Do  you  fear  he  will  write  to  your  father  ?  10.  I  do  not  fear  it. 
11.  We  do  not  fear  that  the  battle  is  lost.  12.  Do  you  deny  that 
you  have  procured  [for]  him  the  means  of  flight?^  13.  I  do  not 
deny  that  I  have  given  him  some  clothes  and  some  money.  14.  I  will 
hinder  him  from  coming  back.  15.  I  doubt  whether  the  letter  has 
been  sent  to  him  (see  p.  275,  §  1,  Note  1).  16.  I  cannot  prevent 
him  from  loving  (that  he  loves)  pleasure*'  better  than  work.^ 

1.  Rapporter.     2.  Etre  arrivd  a.      3.  Meier.     4.  Depuis  que.     5.  Fuite,  f,    6. 
Put  the  def.  article. 


SYNTAX   OF  NEGATIONS.  295 

BEADING  LESSON. 

Le  Connetable  de  Bourbon  et  Bayard. 
(Suite.) 

Le  Con.  Qu'as-tu  done  ?  Est-ce  que  tu  ne  saurais  te  consoler 
d'avoir  ^t6  vaincu  et  fait  prisonnier  dans  la  retraite  de  Bonnivet  ? 
Ce  n'est  pas  ta  faute,  c'est  la  sienne :  les  armes  sont  journalieres 
{changing) .  Ta  gloire  est  assez  bien  ^tablie  par  tant  de  belles  ac- 
tions. Les  Imperiaux^  ne  pourront  jamais  oublier  cette  vigoureuse 
defense  de  M^zieres  contre  eux. 

Bay.  Pour  moi,  je  ne  puis  jamais  oublier  que  vous  ^tes  ce 
grand  connetable,  ce  prince  du  plus  noble  sang  qu'il  y  ait  dans  le 
monde,  et  qui  travaille  h  dechirer^  de  ses  propres  mains  sa  patrie  et 
le  royaume  de  ses  anc^tres. 

Le  Con.  Quoi !  Bayard,  je  te  loue,  et  tu  me  condamnes !  Je 
te  plains,  et  tu  m'insultes  ! 

Bay.  Si  vous  me  plaignez,  je  vous  plains  aussi;  et  je  vous 
trouve  bien  plus  k  plaindre  que  moi.  Je  sors  do  la  vie  sans  tache ; 
j'ai  sacrifie  la  mienne  k  mon  devoir,  je  meurs  pour  mon  pays,  pour 
mon  roi,  estime  des  ennemis  de  la  France,  et  regrette  de  tous  les 
bons  Frangais.  Mon  etat  est  digne  d'envie. 

Le  Con.  Et  moi,  je  suis  victorieux  d'un  ennemi  qui  m'a  ou- 
trage, je  me  venge  de  lui ;  je  le  chasse  du  Milanais  ;^  je  fais  sentir  a 
toute  la  France  combien  elle  est  malheureuse  de  m'avoir  perdu,  en 
me  poussant  k  bout.*     Appelles-tu  cela  etre  h  plaindre  ? 

Bay.  Oui,  on  est  toujours  k  plaindre  quand  on  agit  contre  son 
devoir.  II  vaut  mieux  perir  en  combattant  pour  la  patrie,  que  de 
la  vaincre  et  de  triompher  d'elle.  Ah  !  quelle  horrible  gloire  que 
celle  de  d^truire^  son  propre  pays  !  {To  he  continued.) 

1.  The  Imperialists,  Austrians.     2.  To  tear.    3.  From  the  Milanese  territory. 
4.  To  the  extreme.    5.  Destroy. 


296  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LEgON. 

XYI.     SEIZIEME    LE9ON. 


REMAUKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS. 

The  use  of  the  prepositions  is  of  too  various  a  nature  to  allow  of  its  being 
determined  by  definite  rules.  Their  departure  from  the  original  significa- 
tion can  only  be  shown  by  examples. 

Prepositions  must  generally  be  repeated  before  every  noun.  A^ 
de,  and  en  must  always  be  repeated. 

All  prepositions  except  en  govern  the  infinitive ;  en  is  followed  by 
the  present  participle.     Ex. :  —  ^ 

Pour  aller,  in  order  to  go.    En  allant,  in  going. 

I.  ON  THE  USE  OE  SOME  FRENCH  PREPOSITIONS. 

a. 
A  denotes  1st  place,  and  is  used  before  names  of  places  (not 
countries) ,  and  common  names ;  (in  English  at  or  in)  :  — 
a  Paris,  at  Paris,     a  Veglise,  at  church. 
a  la  campagne,  in  the  country,     a  Vombre,  in  the  shade. 
au  theatre  or  au  spectacle,  at  the  theatre. 
a  la  poste,  at  the  post-office. 
frapper  a  la  porte,  to  knock  at  the  door. 
a  la  main,  in  the  hand,     a  droite,  to  the  right. 

2.  Time:  — 

a  quelle  heure,  at  what  o'clock  ? 

a  deux  heures,  at  two  o'clock,     a  midi,  at  twelve  o'clock. 

au  commencement  de  la  legon,  at  the  beginning  of  the  lesson. 

a  temps^  in  time,     a  mon  arrivee,  on  my  arrival. 

a  la  pointe  du  jour,  at  daybreak. 

3.  Manner  and  instrument :  — 
a  la  mode,  in  fashion,  fashionably, 

a  pied,  on  foot,     a  cheval,  on  horseback. 

a  bras  ouverts,  with  open  arms. 

travailler  a  I'aiguille,  to  work  with  tjie  needle. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.         297 

peindre  a  Vhuile,  to  paint  in  oil. 

mesurer  a  I'aune,  to  measure  by  the  ell  (yard). 

deux  a  deux,  two  and  two. 

goutte  a  goutte,  drop  by  drop. 

a  bon  marche,  cheap. 

a  cinq  pour  cent,  at  five  per  cent. 

a  Vanglaise,  after  the  English  style. 

4.  Destination :  — 

Une  cuiller  a  th€,  a  teaspoon. 

Une  montre  a  repetition,  a  repeater  ("watch). 

5.  Direction,  especially  with  trie  verb  aller  or  se  rendre,  to  go, 
(the  English  to)  :  — 

Aller  a  Vienne,  to  go  to  Vienna. 

Nous  allons  a  la  campagne,  we  are  going  into  the  country. 

Aller  au  theatre,  to  go  to  the  theatre. 

Alter  a  la  chasse,  to  go  hunting,  etc. 

Dans,  en. 
Dans  means  both  in  and  into  a  (closed)  place ;  it  is  used  in  a 
more  determinate  sense  than  en,  and  is  always  followed  by  the  article 
or  another  determinate  word  (such  as,  this,  my,  which,  etc.) .    Ex. :  — 

Dans  la  {ma,  votre)  chamhre,  in  the  (my,  your)  room. 

Dans  ma  poche,  in  my  pocket. 

Dans  I'hiver  de  1850,  in  the  winter  of  1850. 

Dans  une  colere  affreuse,  in  a  dreadful  passion. 

II  est  dans  la  prison,  he  is  in  (the)  prison  (of  that  place). 

Eire  dans  la  ville,  to  be  within  the  town  (not  in  the  country). 

Observe  also  the  difference  in  the  following  expressions  :  — 

II  est  au  jar  din  and  il  est  dans  son  jar  din. 

Je  suis  a  la  maison  (at  home)  and  je  suis  dans  ma  maison. 

Dn  is  used  in  a  more  vague  sense,  and  is  followed  by  no  article.  It 
is  used  for  in  or  to  before  the  name  of  a  kingdom,  republic,  country, 
county,  or  province.     Ex. :  — 

En  liberie,  in  liberty.     En  colere,  in  a  passion. 

En  France,  in  or  to  France. 

En  Avril  or  au  mois  d'Avril,  in  April. 

En  €t€,  in  summer.    En  hiver,  in  winter. 


298  XVI.      SEIZIEME   LEgON. 

En  automne,  in  autumn  (T)ut  au  printemps,  in  spring. ) 

Eire  en  voyage,  to  travel  about. 

En  ces  tennes,  in  these  words. 

Vivre  en  paix,  to  live  in  peace. 

Eire  en  ville,  to  be  out,  to  be  from  home. 

II  est  en  prison,  he  is  in  prison  (he  is  a  prisoner). 

Note.  There  are  a  few  expressions  in  which  the  article  is  retained  after 
en ;  such  are,  en  V absence,  in  the  absence ;  en  I'honneur,  in  honor.  Only  I' 
and  la  are  thus  found  after  en,  never  le. 

Dans  and  en,  relating  to  time,  are  differently  used.  Dans  de- 
notes the  point  of  time,  en  the  duration.     Ex. :  — 

Dans  dix  minutes,  ten  minutes  hence. 

En  dix  minutes,  within  the  space  of  ten  minutes. 

Je  partirai  dans  huit  jours,  I  shall  set  out  in  a  week. 

M.  B.  reviendra  dans  deux  mois,  Mr.  B.  will  return  in  two  months. 

J'ai  appris  le  frangais  en  dix  mois,  I  learned  French  in  ten  months. 

JEntre,  parmi. 
Entre  answers  in  general  to  the  English  between,  betwixt,  and  ia 
said  of  two  objects  only.     Ex.  :  — 

Entre  la  porte  et  la  fenetre,  between  the  door  and  the  window. 

Entre  autres,  among  others. 

La  mere  tenait  Venfant  entre  ses  bras. 

The  mother  held  her  child  in  her  arms. 

Parmi  is  said  of  several  objects,  as  :  — 

Parmi  les  rochers,  among  the  rocks. 
Votre  grammaire  se  trouva  parmi  mes  livres. 
Your  grammar  was  found  among  my  books. 

Devant,  avant. 
Devant  is  a  local  preposition,  and  is  also  used  for  in  presence  of^ 

as:  — 
Nous  jouerons  devant  la  maison,  we  will  play  before  the  house. 
//  a  paru  devant  le  juge,  he  appeared  before  the  judge. 
Sur  le  devant,  in  the  front ;  la  porte  de  devant,  the  front  door. 

Avant  denotes  priority  of  time  and  order,  as  :  — 
Je  suis  arrive  avant  vous,  I  arrived  before  you. 
L'artide  se  met  avant  le  nom,  the  article  is  put  before  the  noun. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  299 

Avant  tout,  above  all. 

Avant  is  also  used  before  an  infinitive  with  de  :  — 

Avant  de  partir,  before  leaving. 

Envers,  vers. 
JEnvers,  towards,  to,  is  used  for  with  regard  to,  in  a  moral  sense, 
as:  — 

Sojjez  charitables  envers  les  pauvres,  be  charitable  towards  the  poor. 
Comportez-vous  Men  envers  lui,  behave  well  towards  him  (with  regard  to 
him). 

Vers  expresses  motion  and  is  put   before  names  of  places  and 
persons :  — 

Vers  la  colline,  towards  the  hill. 

II  s'avanga  vers  moi,  he  advanced  towards  me. 

Chez. 
Chez  migbt  be  rendered  in  English  by  at  the  house  of,  withy 
among,  etc.     Ex. :  — 

Chez  voire  pere,  at  your  father's. 

Chez  les  Romains,  among  the  Romans. 

Chacun  est  maitre  chez  soi,  everybody  is  master  in  his  own  house. 

Je  viens  de  chez  vous,  I  come  from  your  house. 

Ilors  de,  hors. 

1.  Bars  de  denotes  an  exclusion  from  a  place,  oitt  of,  outside  of, 
without.     Ex. :  — 

Hors  de  la  maison,  out  of  the  house. 
Hors  du  royaurne,  out  of  the  kingdom. 

Note.   In  this  signification  de  may  be  left  out,  as  :  Hors  la  maison,  hors 
la  harriere,  etc. 

2.  Hors  de  is  also  used  in  a  figurative  or  temporal  sense,  as :  — 
H  est  hors  de  danger,  he  is  out  of  danger. 

Hors  d'etat,  out  of  condition,  unable. 

3.  Hors  (without  de)  signifies  except,  besides :  — 

Hors  cela  nous  sommes  d' accord,  with  the  exception  of  that  we  are  agreed. 
Note.   In  this  sense  hormis  is  sometimes  used  for  hors,  more  frequently 


300  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LEgON. 

D^avec,  d'enfre,  de  dessous,  etc. 
Some  prepositions  are  preceded  by  de,  which  serves  to  indicate 
the  point  from  which  an  action  proceeds,  as : — 
Ma  separation  d'avec  mon  pere. 
My  separation  from  my  father. 
On  arracha  Venfant  (Ventre  les  bras  de  sa  mere. 
They  tore  the  child  from  the  arms  of  its  mother. 
On  le  tira  de  dessous  le  lit. 
They  drew  him  from  under  the  bed. 

Sans. 

Sans,  without,  is  sometimes  expressed  in  English  by  hut  for. 
Example  :  — 

Sans  hi,  je  serai  mort  de  faim. 
But  for  him,  I  shoiild  have  starved. 

Es. 

This  word  is  a  contraction  for  en  les.     It  is  used  for  university 
degrees.     Ex. :  — 

Bachdier  es  lettres,  bachelor  of  arts. 

THEME   34. 

1.  Where  are  you  going  ?  2.  I  am  going  into  the  country.  3. 
My  friend  arrived  in  the  beginning  of  summer;  he  was  received 
with  open  arms.  4.  Is  this  book  to  (a)  your  taste  ?^  5.  No,  I 
do  not  like  it.  {It  does  not  please  me).  6.  I  met  that  gentleman 
on  my  journey  in  Italy.  7.  Is  Mr.  A.  at  home?  8.  Yes,  sir;  he 
is  in  the  garden.  9.  In  the  absence  of  the  king,  who  is  now  in 
Italy,  these  affairs  must  be  suspended.^  10.  The  poor  man  had  to 
choose  between  slavery^  and  death.  11.  Why  has  she  been  so 
unjust  towards  her  parents?  12.  Did  you  arrive  before  or  after 
four  o'clock?  13.  Before  the  church  there  are  three  high  poplars.* 
14.  My  neighbor  was  kindly  disposed  towards  me.  15.  I  found 
this  letter  among  my  papers.  16.  Brandy  {Veau  de  vie)  is  the 
Bource  of  great  evils  among  that  people. 
1,  Chut,  m.    2.  Suspendre.    3.  Uesclavage,  m.    4.  Peuplier,  m. 


REMAEKS   ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.  301 

THEME   35. 

1.  They  (on)  told  me  amongst  other  things,  that  the  ship  had 
been  taken  by  the  enemy  (pL).  2.  The  old  man  was  unable  {not 
in  a  condition)  to  do  anything  for  her.  3.  He  has  sold  all  his 
horses,  except  one  or  two.  4.  Now  we  turn  to  (towards)  the  south. 
5.  Among  the  merchants  in  London,  there  are  many  beneficent^ 
men.  6.  He  lives  with  his  brother.  7.  The  tailor  will  come  to 
your  house  to-morrow.  8.  Where  do  you  come  from  ?  9.  I  come 
from  my  aunt's.  10.  The  wooden  horse  was  outside  the  walls^  of 
Troy.  11.  The  patient^  is  at  present  out  of  danger.  12.  Nobody 
besides  myself  was  present.  13.  Out  of  (sur)  sixty  soldiers  who 
tried  the  attack,  twenty-five  fell  into  {entre)  the  hands  of  the  enemy 
(pi).  14.  One  must  distinguish  true  friendship  from  {d'avec) 
(the)  false.  15.  The  dog  sprang  out*  from  under  the  table. 
1.  Bienfaisant.    2.  Les  murs  de  Troie.    3.  Le  malade.    4.  Sauter. 

n.     HOW  TO   EXPRESS    SOME  ENGLISH  PREPOSITIONS. 

Above. 

Above,  when  it  expresses  time  or  number,  so  as  to  signify  more 
than  or  longer  than,  is  rendered  in  French  by  plus  de.     Ex.  :  — 

The  fight  lasted  above  four  hours. 
Le  combat  dura  plus  de  quatre  heures. 
It  is  above  twenty  miles  from  here. 
II  y  a  plus  de  vingt  lieues  d'ici. 

About. 
1.  About,  in  the  sense  of  around,  is  to  be  rendered  by  autour 
de.     2.    In  the  signification  of  concerning,  it  is  touchant,  concer- 
nant,  sur,  or  simply  de.     3.   In  speaking  of  things  which  people 
carry  about  them,  it  is  translated  with  sur.     Ex. :  — 

1 .  All  thronged  about  the  prince. 

2'out  le  moride  se  pressa  autour  du  prince. 

2.  I  will  speak  to  him  about  our  affair  (business). 
.7e  lui  parlerai  touchant  (or  sur  or  de)  notre  affaire. 

3.  I  have  no  money  about  me,  je  n'ai  pas  d'argetU  sur  mm. 


% 


302  XVI.      SEIZIEME   LEgON. 

At 

1.  At  is  most  commonly  rendered  by  a  mth.  or  without  an  arti- 
cle. 2.  After  nouns  or  verbs  denoting  derision,  anger,  surprise, 
sorrow,  etc.,  at  is  rendered  by  de.  3.  It  is  translated  chez  when, 
in  English,  it  precedes  the  word  house,  either  expressed  or  under- 
stood.    Ex. :  — 

1.  We  were  at  dinner,  nous  €tions  a  diner. 

Do  you  play  at  cards,  jouez-vous  aux  cartes  ? 

2.  She  laughed  at  him,  die  se  moqua  de  lui. 
I  am  surprised  at  what  you  say. 

Je  suis  surpris  de  ce  que  vous  dites. 

3.  We  were  at  your  aunt's,  nous  €tions  chez  voire  tante. 

By. 

1.  By  denoting  the  agent  or  cause  is  translated  de  or  par  (see 
p.  135,  2).     Ex.  :  — 

Mr.  Bell  is  respected  by  everybody. 
M.  Bell  est  respects  de  tout  le  monde. 
Troy  was  destroyed  by  the  Greeks. 
Troie  fut  d€truite  par  les  Grecs. 

2.  In  affirmations  and  swearing  by  is  translated  par : 
He  swears  by  his  honor,  il  en  jure  par  son  honneur. 

3.  By,  after  the  verbs  to  sell,  to  buy,  to  work,  etc.,  preceding  a 
noun  of  weight  or  measure,  day,  week,  month,  or  year,  is  rendered 
in  French  by  a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex. :  — 

I  sell  the  tea  by  the  pound,  je  vends  le  th€  a  la  livre. 
We  work  by  the  hour  or  by  the  day. 
Nous  travaillons  a  I'heure  ou  a  la  journ€e. 

4.  When  preceding  a  numeral  immediately  followed  by  an  adjec- 
tive of  dimension,  hy  is  rendered  in  French  by  sur.     Ex. : 

This  room  is  fifteen  feet  long  by  ten  wide. 

Ceite  chambre  a  quinze  pieds  de  longueur  sur  dix  de  largeur. 

5.  By,  immediately  following  the  verbs  to  kill,  to  wound,  etc., 
is  translated  in  French  by  d'un  coup  de,  when  it  expresses  the  blow, 
wound,  firing,  etc.,  of  an  instrument  by  which  a  man  was  wounded, 
killed,  etc.     Ex. :  — 


EEMAEKS   ON  SOME  PREPOSITIONS.  303 

The  officer  was  wounded  by  a  bullet. 
L'officier  fut  blessed' un  coup  de  fusil. 
Achilles  was  killed  at  the  siege  of  Troy  by  an  arrow. 
Achille  fut  tue  au  siege  de  Troie  d'un  coup  de  fleche. 
Note.   If  the  blows  have  been  repeated,  a  coups  de  is  used,  in  which  case 
it  is  most  commonly  rendered  in  English  by  with.     Ex. :  — 
They  knocked  him  down  with  a  stick. 
lis  Vassommerent  a  coups  de  baton. 

THEME  36. 

1.  My  father  was  not  above  twenty-two  years  old  wlien  he  was 
married.^  2.  My  uncle's  country-house^  is  very  handsome ;  but  it 
cost  him  above  eighty  thousand  francs.  3.  It  is  above  a  year  since 
my  friend  set  off  for^  America.     4.  Rome  was  built  by  Romulus. 

5.  The  poor  man  has  been  driven  out*  of  his  house  by  his  creditors.* 

6.  I  will  get  up  to-morrow  at  six  o'clock.  7.  Were  you  at  Mrs. 
D.'s  ball  last  night?  8.  I  will  pay  you  at  the  end  of  this  month. 
9.  I  rejoice  greatly  at  your  good  luck.®  10.  She  always  smiles'"  at 
everything  that  is  said.  11.  Where  was  your  sister  this  morning? 
12.  She  was  at  her  aunt's.  13.  My  box^  is  a  foot  and  a  half  deep 
by  two  wide  and  four  long.     14.  Harold  was  wounded  by  an  arrow.^ 

15.  William  the  Second  was  killed  by  an  arrow  in  the  New-Forest. 

16.  He  is  so  strong  that  with  his  fist^^  (6,  J^ote)  he  could  knock 
down^^  an  ox.  17.  They  killed  the  dog  with  stones.  18.  The  sol- 
diers kill  one  another  with  bayonets.^ 

1.  To  be  married,  se  marier.  2.  La  maison  de  campagne.  3.  Pour.  i.  Chassi. 
6.  Creancier,  m.  6.  Bonheur.  7.  Sourire.  8.  Le  coffre.  9.  Fleche,  f.  10.  Le 
poing.    11.  Ahattre.    12.  La  haionette. 

From. 

1.  From,  preceding  the  name  of  a  person,  or  a  possessive  adjec- 
tive, or  a  personal  or  interrogative  pronoun  after  the  verbs  to  go,  to 
come,  to  send,  etc.,  is  generally  rendered  by  de  la  part  de.    Ex.  :  — 

Many  compliments  from  Dr.  O. 

Bien  des  compliments  de  la  part  de  Monsieur  le  docteur  0. 

I  come  from  him  or  her  (from  them),  etc. 

Je  viens  de  sa  part  {de  leur  part). 


304  XVI.      SEIZIEME  LE9ON. 

2.  From,  meaning  jfrom  some  one's  house,  is  in  Freacli  de  chez. 
Example :  — 

I  come  from  my  uncle's,  aunt's,  etc. 

Je  viens  de  chez  mon  oncle,  — de  chez  ma  tante,  etc.  , 

3.  From  —  ^0  is  rendered  by  c?e  —  en.     Ex.:  — 

He  went  from  street  to  street,  from  town  to  town,  etc. 
//  alia  de  rue  en  rue,  de  ville  en  ville,  etc. 

Note.  When  two  names  of  towns  or  villages  are  mentioned,  to  is  ren- 
dered by  a.    Ex. :  — 
From  Paris  to  Rouen,  de  Parts  a  Rouen. 

4.  From  is  rendered  by  depuis,  and  to  hj  Jusqu^a,  when  speak- 
ing of  extent  or  time.     Ex. :  — 

Prom  Easter  to  Christmas,  depuis  Pdques  jusqu'a  Noel. 

In. 

1.  In  —  dans  or  en,  see  these  words  in  the  first  part  of  this  Les- 
son. 

2.  In,  after  words  denoting  pain,  hurting,  etc.,  and  preceding  a 
possessive  adjective  with  any  part  of  the  body,  is  to  be  rendered  by 
a  with  the  definite  article.     Ex. :  — 

I  have  constantly  a  pain  in  my  head. 
J'ai  toujours  mal  a  la  tete. 

3.  In  adverbial  expressions  of  time,  in  is  not  expressed  in 
French.     Ex. :  — 

In  the  morning,  le  matin.    In  the  evening,  le  soir. 

On  or  upon. 

1.  On  or  upon  is  most  generally  sur.     Ex.  :  — 
He  climbed  upon  the  tree,  il  grimpa  sur  I'arbre. 

2.  After  the  verbs  to  play,  to  live,  to  depend,  and  the  like,  on 
or  upon  is  rendered  by  de.     Ex. :  — 

You  play  on  the  violin,  and  I  play  on  the  flute. 

Vous  jouez  du  violon  et  moi,  je  joue  de  la  flute. 

A  good  end  often  depends  on  a  good  beginning. 

Une  bonne  fin  depend  souvent  d'un  bon  commencement.  ^ 

The  prisoner  lives  on  bread  and  water. 

Le  prisonnier  vit  de  pain  et  d'eau. 


REMARKS  ON  SOME   PREPOSITIONS.  305 

3.  The  preposition  on,  before  the  days  of  the  week  and  with 

dates,  is  dropped  in  French.     Ex.  :  — 

Come  on  Sunday,  venez  dimanche. 
On  the  twelfth  of  May,  h  douze  mai. 

4.  Ow,  denotmg  time,  in  other  cases  is  translated  by  en. 

Over. 
This  preposition  is  commonly  rendered  in  French  by  sur,  but  it 
must  be  expressed  by  the  Part.  Past  of  the  verbs  passer,  jinir, 
achever,  when  it  denotes  an  action  ended,     Ex.  :  — 

As  soon  as  the  rain  will  be  over. 

Des  que  la  pluie  sera  pass€e. 

Is  dinner  over,  le  diner  est-il  Jini? 

With. 

1.  With  is  rendered  by  de  after  such  verbs  as,  to  die,  to  meddle, 
to  do,  to  dispense,  to  load,  to  cover,  to  fill,  and  after  some  adjec- 
tives, as :  pleased,  contented,  etc.  (see  p.  250,  §  1  and  2).    Ex.:  — 

He  died  with  cold,  il  mourut  de  froid. 

The  wagon  is  loaded  with  goods,  la  voiture  est  charg^e  de  marchandises. 

2.  With  is  expressed  by  a  and  the  article  before  nouns  denoting 
in  what  manner  a  thiag  is  done  or  made.     Ex.  :  — 

To  draw  with  a  pencil,  dessiner  au  crayon. 

To  fight  with  pistols,  se  hattre  au'pistolet. 

Note.  Charger  takes  a,  and  se  hattre,  au,  a  la,  a  V  (as  the  noun  may 
require),  before  the  names  of  materials  or  weapons  generally  used  for  loading 
fire-arras  or  for  fighting ;  otherwise,  with  is  rendered  by  avec.    Ex. :  — 

Charger  un  fusil  a  balles,  avec  des  pierres.  Se  hattre  a  I'dpee,  au  pistolet, 
avec  des  haches,  avec  des  martaux. 

The  ambiguous  English  sentence.  He  struck  the  man  with  a  wooden 
leg,  would  be  translated  into  French  by  Ilfrappa  Vhomme  a  lajamhe  de  hois, 
if  the  man  was  crippled ;  but  if  the  wooden  leg  is  the  weapon  of  attack, 
avec  is  used. 

3.  With  must  not  be  expressed  after  the  following  verbs  :  to 
meet  with,  rencontrer ;  to  trust  with,  confier  qch.  a  qn.  ;  to  supply 


306  XVI,     SEIZIEME  LEgON. 

witb,  fournir  qch.  a  qn.  ;  to  reproacli  with,  reprocher  qch.  a  qn. 
Examples :  — 

We  will  supply  htm  with  everything. 
Notts  lui  fournirons  tout. 
I  reproached  him  with  his  ingratitude. 
Je  lui  reprochai  son  ingratitude. 

Remark.   Prepositions  are  placed  in  French  before  the  words  they  gov- 
ern, though  in  English  they  are  sometimes  placed  after.    Ex. :  — 
Whom  do  you  speak  to,  a  qui  parlez-vous  ? 
What's  that  for,  pour  quoi  cda  7 
The  man  whom  you  are  interested  in. 
Uhomme  pour  qui  vous  vous  int&essez. 


THEME   37. 

1.  Gro  from  me  to  Mr.  S.,  and  tell  him  that  I  am  expecting  him. 
2.  From  whom  do  you  come  ?  3.  I  come  from  Miss  B.  4. 
Charles  was  wounded  in  his  arm,  and  not  {non)  in  his  leg.  5.  I 
have  very  often  a  pain  in  my  teeth.  6.  I  will  call  upon  you  in  the 
afternoon,  and  in  the  evening  (I  will)  go  to  the  play.  7.  Upon 
what  instrument  does  your  sister  play?  8.  She  plays  the  piano. 
9.  That  happened^  on  the  12th  [of]  March.  10.  I  am  in  the 
habit^  of  taking  a  cup  of  coffee  as  soon  as  dinner  is  over.  11.  Do 
not  meddle^  with  my  affairs ;  attend  to  your  own.  12.  Is  that 
house  covered  with  slate^  or  tiles  ?^  13.  It  is  covered  with  tiles. 
14.  This  picture  seems  to  be  done  with  chalk.^  15.  When  you 
meet  a  poor  man,  never  reproach  him  [with]  his  poverty.  16. 
France  extends'^  from  the  Khine  to  the  Atlantic^  Ocean.  17.  What 
does  he  complain^  of?  18.  We  have  travelled  from  Switzerland  to 
Italy.  19.  You  spend  all  the  day  in  going  (a  aller)  from  house  to 
house,  from  street  to  street,  from  place  to  place.  20.  Those  labor- 
ers^" work  from  (^depuis)  morning^^  to  night.^  21.  I  walk  every 
day  from  twelve  (midi)  to  three.  » 

1.  Se  passa.  2.  To  be  in  the  habit  of,  avoir  VTiabitude  de.  3.  Se  meler.  4.  Ar- 
daise,  in  singular.  5.  Tuile,  in  plural.  6.  Craie,f.  7.  S'etendre.  8.  V  Ocean  At' 
lantique.    9.  Se  plaindre  de  qch.    10.  Chivrier^  m.    11.  Put  the  article. 


USES  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION  QUE.  307 


XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME    LE9ON 


DIFFERENT  USES  OF  THE  CONJUNCTION    QUE, 

I.     QUE  WITH  THE  INDICATIVE. 

1.  The  conjunction  que  is  used  1.  to  join  the  two  terms  of  a 
comparison ;  2.  in  a  restrictive  sense,  for  but  or  only,  as : 

Elle  n'a  que  deux  freres,  she  has  only  two  brothers. 

2.  The  que  of  admiration  or  exclamation  expresses  wonder  or 
surprise;  it  answers  to  the  English  words  how,  how  much,  how 
many.      Ex.  :  — 

Que  vous  etes  heureux  !  how  happy  you  are ! 
Que  la  terre  est  petite  en  comparaison  avec  le  soleil ! 
How  small  is  the  earth  compared  with  the  sun ! 
Que  de  peine  vous  prenez  pour  moi  ! 
How  much  trouble  you  take  for  me ! 

3.  In  short  exclamations  que  is  inserted  after  the  noun  when  the 
verb  is  omitted.     Ex.  :  — 

Quel  beau  pays  que  I'ltalie  ! 

What  a  beautiful  country  Italy  is  I 

Quel  homme  que  ce  F€ndon  ! 

What  a  man  that  Fenelon  is  [or  was)  ! 

4.  It  stands  for  pourquoi  in  negative  exclamations,  as ;  — 
Que  ne  puis-je  vous  aider  !    why  can  I  not  assist  you  ! 

5.  The  French  paraphrase  of  a  sentence  with  c'^est  is  followed  by 
que,  whereas  in  English  this  is  not  expressed.     Ex.:  — 

C'est  une  belle  chose  que  la  discretion. 
Discretion  is  a  good  thing. 
C'est  une  chose  d^estable  que  la  haine. 
Hatred  is  a  detestable  thing. 

If,  however,  an  Infinitive  follows,  que  need  not  be  used :  — 


308  XYII.      DIX-SEPTIEME   LEgON. 

C'est  une  honte  (que)  d'ignorer  sa  langue  maternelle. 
It  is  a  shame  not  to  know  one's  mother  tongue. 

6.  Que  must  be  inserted  after  c^est-a-dire,  that  is  to  say,  when  a 
verb  follows.  Que  is  also  frequently  used  after  voila  and  peut-etre. 
Example :  — 

Vous  serez  parfaitement  lihres,  c'est-a-dire  que  vous  ne  dependrez  de  personne. 
You  will  be  perfectly  free,  that  is  to  say,  you  will  depend  upon  nobody. 

7.  In  the  expressions  :  que  out,  yes;  que  si!  0  yes  !  que  non, 
no;  ^-we  is  used  pleonastically.     Ex.:  — 

Je  dis  que  oui,  I  say  yes. 

8.  Que  stands  for  since  instead  of  depuis  que: 

Combien  y  a-t-il  que  votre  soeur  est  morte  ? 
How  long  is  it  since  your  sister  died  1 

9.  Que  is  used  for  when  after  a  peine,  scarcely,  and  in  the  sig- 
nification of  as  or  when,  after  the  specification  of  a  time,  in  which 
case  the  use  of  lorsque  would  be  incorrect.     Ex. :  — 

A  peine  ^ait-il  sorti,  que  la  maison  s'e'croula. 
Scarcely  was  he  gone  out,  when  the  house  fell. 
Un  matin  que  je  sortais  de  tres-bonne  heure. 
One  morning  as  I  went  out  early. 
Maintenant  que  vous  etes  en  France,  etc. 
Now  that  you  are  in  France.  ... 

10.  Que  corresponds  to  the  English  that  after  all  verbs  of  think- 
ing, feeling,  saying,^  as :  dire,  affirmer,  repondre,  declarer, 
croire,  penser,  sentir,  etc.,  smd  usually  takes  the  Indicative  when 
these  words  are  used  afiirmatively.  In  English  the  that  is  often 
omitted,  but  in  French  it  must  always  be  employed.     Ex.:  — 

Dites-lui  que  je  V attends. 

Tell  him  that  I  am  waiting  for  him. 

//  m'a  re'pondu  qu'il  n'en  savait  rien. 

He  answered  me  that  he  knew  nothing  of  it. 

On  croit  qu'dle  est  tres-riche. 

She  is  supposed  to  be  very  rich. 

*  Where  in  Latin  the  Ace.  is  used  with  the  Infinitive* 


USES  OP  THE   CONJUNCTION  QUE.  309 

Note.  Que  is  not  only  always  expressed  in  French,  but  repeated  before 
each  member  of  the  proposition.     Ex.:  — 

Je  crois  que  vous  vous  trompez  et  que  vous  ne  reussirez  pas. 
I  think  you  are  mistaken,  and  that  you  will  not  succeed. 

11.  In  many  cases  where  the  conjunction  is  repeated  in  English, 
the  French,  instead  of  repeating  it,  put  que  in  the  place  of  it.  This 
is  the  case  with  lorsque,  quand,  pendant  que,  tandis  que,  parce 
que,  tant  que  and  des  que.     Ex.:  — 

Lorsque  Vempereur  fat  revenu  et  qu'il  (and  when  he)  eut  visits  le  camp,  il 
re'solut  de  Uvrer  bataille. 

Tandis  que  Charles  XII  donnait  un  roi  a  la  Pologne  soumise,  que  le  Dane- 
mark  n'osait  le  troubler,  et  que  le  roi  de  Prusse  recherchait  son  amitie,  le  czar  de- 
venait  de  jour  en  jour  plus  redoutable. 


THEME  38. 

1.  I  am  much  younger  than  you.  2.  Caroline  is  only  seventeen 
years  old.  3.  How  pretty  she  is  !  4.  How  I  hate  flatterers  !^  5. 
How  small  is  the  part  of  the  world  which  we  inhabit  P  6.  What 
{que  de)  misfortunes  you  have  undergone  !  ^  7.  If  you  are  (avez) 
cold,  why  (§  4)  don't  you  put  on  your  cloak?  8.  It  is  a  very  dif- 
ficult thing  to  know  (§  5)  [how  to]  keep  what  one  has.  9.  Look, 
it  rains!  10.  Perhaps  he  will  come.  11.  I  believe  (that)  you 
are  right.  12.  He  told  me  that  he  had  not  yet  received  a  letter 
from  his  uncle.  13.  Are  you  ready?  14.  Ono!  (§7)  I  cannot 
finish  before  an  hour.  15.  Have  you  not  been  there  ?  16.  0  yes  ! 
17.  How  long  is  it  since  you  lost  your  father?  18.  One  day  when 
the  two  sparrows'*  had  flown  out,^  the  children  took  away*^  their  nest. 
^  19.  Tell  me  the  day  (on  which,  §  9)  you  think^  of  leaving.  20. 
I  think  he  is  not  at  home.  21.  Scarcely  is  he  out  of  bed  before  he 
beings  to  work.  22.  Why  (§  4)  did  you  not  tell  it?  23.  When 
you  have  acknowledged  your  faults,  and  (§11)  have  repaired* 
them,  I  will  forgive  you. 

^  1.  Flfitteur.    2.  Habiter.     3.  Eprouves.    4.  Le  moineau.     5.  Etaient  sortis.     6 

I        Enlever.    7.  Vous  comptez  partir.    8.  Repares. 


310  XYII.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LEgON. 

II.     QUE  WITH  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1.  "Que,  in  a  conditional  sense,  is  used  in  the  beginning  of  a  sen^ 
tence  for  the  word  whether,  and  in  the  middle,  to  avoid  the  repeti- 
tion of  si ;  in  both  cases  it  governs  the  Subjunctive  mood.    Ex. :  — 

Whether  he  come  or  not,  I  do  not  care. 

Qu'il  vienne  ou  non,  je  ne  m'en  sonde  pas. 

If  somebody  calls  and  I  am  out,  send  for  me. 

Si  quelqu'un  vient  me  voir  et  que  je  sois  sorti,  envoyez-moi  chercher. 

If  you  meet  her,  and  (if)  you  have  time  to  speak  to  her. 

Si  vous  la  rencontrez  et  que  vous  ayez  le  temps  de  lui  parler. 

2.  For  till,  instead  oijusqu^a  ce  que  after  attendre,  to  wait 
Example :  — 

Wait  till  it  gets  less  cold. 
Attendez  qu'il  fasse  mains  froid. 
You  must  wait  till  I  am  back. 
//  faut  attendre  que  je  sois  de  retour. 

3.  For  the  English  third  person  of  the  Imp^ative,  let  him  or  let 
them.     Ex. :  — 

Let  him  come,  qu'il  vienne. 

Let  them  do  it,  qu'ils  {qu'elles)  le  /assent. 

4.  For  that,  instead  of  pour  que,  qfin  que :  — 

Come  here  that  I  may  speak  to  you. 
Venez  ici  que  je  vous  parle. 

5.  Que  is  used  with  ne  for  the  English  hut  (or  but  that)  after 
verbs  expressing  doubt,  fear,  etc.  (see  p.  293,  §  15).     Ex.:  — 

I  don't  doubt  but  that  you  are  right. 
Je  ne  doute  pas  que  vous  n'ayez  raison. 

6.  In  the  same  manner  que  is  used  for  before,  instead  of  avant 
que  ;  for  unless,  instead  of  a  moins  que  ;  for  without,  instead  of  sans 
que,  and  for  yet,  instead  of  et  cependant.     Ex. :  — 

I  shall  not  go  out  before  you  are  in. 
Je  ne  soHirai  pas  que  vous  ne  soyez  rentr^. 


USES   OF  THE   CONJUNCTION   QUE.  311 

X  shall  not  pardon  you  unless  you  acknowledge  your  faults. 

Je  ne  vous  pardonnerai  pas  que  vous  ne  reconnaissiez  vos  fautes. 

He  takes  no  trip  without  some  accident  befalling  him. 

//  ne  fait  pas  de  voyage  qu'il  ne  lid  arrive  quelque  accident. 

Though  he  should  have  all  the  gold  in  the  world,  yet  he  would  not  be 
satisfied. 

II  aurait  tout  I'or  du  monde,  qu'il  ne  serait  pas  content. 

(For  the  use  of  que  instead  of  repeating  compound  conjunctions,  and  af- 
ter verbs  governing  the  Subjunctive,  see  Lesson  19,  on  the  Subjunqtivo 
Mood,  §  12). 

THEME   39. 

1.  Whether  it  rain  or  not,  I  must  go  out  directly.  2.  If  I  were 
rich  and  had  children,  I  would  give  them  a  good  educatioTi.  3. 
Whether  you  be  rich  or  poor,  you  should  {devez)  be  a  man  of  prob- 
ity. 4.  He  had  not  a  doubt  (^did  not  douhC)  but  that  this  was  his 
pursuer.^  5.  Wait  till  the  rain  is  over.  6.  A  miser^  might  have 
all  the  gold  in  the  world,  he  would  never  be  satisfied.  7.  You  shall 
not  go  out  before  it  is  light.^  8.  Let  him  have  his  share.*  9.  Come 
that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  that  thing  {eri).  10.  May  heaven 
bless*  you !  11.  May  the  earth  lie  lightly  on  him  (he  light^  to 
him).  12.  Let  him  employ  his  time  well.  13.  I  shall  not  leave 
the  house  {go  out)  before  you  pay  me.  14.  He  cannot  play  but 
he  hurts ^  himself.  15.  If  you  go  to  Paris  and  (§1)  will  take  me 
with  you,  I  shall  be  most  happy.^  16.  My  friend  says  he  will  not 
pay  the  bookseller^  before  he  has  received  all  the  books  (which)  he 
(has)  ordered.  17.  I  shall  put  oflf^"  my  journey;  I  shall  wait  till 
your  time  allows  you  to  accompany  me. 

1.  Persicuteur.  2.  Avare,  f.  3.  To  be  light  —/aire  jour.  4.  Part,  i.  5.  Benir, 
6.  Legere.  7.  Se  faire  mat.  8.  Most  happy  —  Enchante.  9.  Le  libraire.  10. 
Eemettre. 

BEADING   LESSON. 

Le    CONNI^TABLE   DE   BoURBON    ET   BaYARD. 

(Fin.) 

Le  Connet.     Mais  ma  patrie  a  ^t^  ingrate  apres  tant  de  services 

que  je  lui  avals  rendus.     Le  roi  m'a  fait  une  injustice  ^norme.    En 


312  XVII.      DIX-SEPTIEME  LE^ON. 

me  depouillant  ^  de  mon  bien,  on  a  detache  de  moi  jusqu'a  (even) 
mes  domestiques,  Matignon  et  d'Argouges.  J'ai  ete  contraint, 
pour  sauver  ma  vie,  de  m'enfuir  presque  seul.  Que  voulais-tu  que 
je  fisse? 

Bay.  Que  vous  soufirissiez  toutes  sortes  de  maux,  plutot  que  de 
manquer  a  la  France  et  a  la  grandeur  de  votre  maison.  Si  la  per- 
secution (Stait  trop  violente,  vous  pouviez  vous  retirer :  mais  il  valait 
mieux  etre  pauvre,  obscur,  inutile  a  tout,  que  de  prendre  les  armes 
centre  nous.  Votre  gloire  eut  ete  au  comble'Mans  la  pauvrete  et 
dans  le  plus  miserable  exil. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  ne  vois-tu  pas  que  la  vengeance  s'est  jointe  a 
r ambition  pour  me  jeter  dans  cette  extremite  ?  J'ai  voulu  que  le 
roi  se  repentit  de  m'avoir  traits  si  mal. 

Bay.  II  fallait  Ten  faire  repentir  par  une  patience  a  toute 
epreuve,  qui  n'est  pas  moins  la  vertu  d'un  heros  que  le  courage. 

Le  Conn.  Mais  le  roi,  etant  si  injuste  et  si  aveugl^^  par  sa 
mere,  meritaitril  que  j'eusse  de  si  grands  egards  pour  lui  ? 

Bay.  Si  le  roi  ne  le  meritait  pas,  la  France  entiere  le  meritait. 
La  dignity  mdme  de  la  couronne,  dont  vous  etes  un  des  h^ritiers,  le 
meritait.  Vous  vous  deviez*  k  vous-meme  d'epargner^  la  France, 
dont  vous  pouviez  etre  un  jour  roi. 

Le  Conn.  Eh  bien  1  j'ai  tort,  je  I'avoue ;  mais  ne  sais-tu  pas 
combien  les  meilleurs  coeurs  ont  de  peine  a  resistor  a  leur  ressenti- 
ment  ? 

Bay.  Je  le  sais  bien  :  mais  le  vrai  courage  consiste  "k  resistor. 
Si  vous  connaissez  votre  faute,  hatez-vous  de  la  reparer.  Pour  moi, 
je  meurs,  et  je  vous  trouve  plus  a  plaindre  dans  vos  prosperites, 
que  moi  dans  mes  soufFrances.  Quand  I'empereur  ne  vous  trompe- 
rait  pas,  quand  meme  il  vous  donnerait  sa  soeur  en  mariage,  et  qu'il 
partagerait  la  France  avec  vous,  il  n'efFacerait  point  la  tache^  qui 
deshonore  votre  vie.  Le  connetable  de  Bourbon  rebelle !  ah ! 
quelle  honte  !  Ecoutez  Bayard  mourant  comme  il  a  vecu,  et  ne  ces- 
sant  de  dire  la  verite. 

1.  strip.    2.  The  highest.    3.  Blinded.    4.  To  owe.    5.  To  spare.    6.  The  stain. 


USE   OF  THE  TENSES   OF  THE   INDICATIVE.  313 


XYIII.    DIX-HUITIEME    LE9ON. 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES   OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

I.  PRESENT  TENSE. 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  corresponds  to  the  English  pres- 
ent. In  French  there  is  only  one  form  of  this  tense,  as  :  Je  lis,  I 
read ;  faime,  I  like.  The  English  forms :  I  am  reading,  I  do  read, 
etc.,  must  therefore  always  be  translated  as  if  they  were  :  I  read,ye 
Us.     Ex. :  — 

The  childi*en  are  playing  in  the  gS,rden. 
Les  enfants  jouent  au  jardin. 
Nous  dinons  toiijours  a  deux  heures. 

2.  The  Present  tense  is  sometimes  employed  for  the  Future, 
when  speaking  of  actions  which  are  to  be  done  at  a  time  proximate 
or  near,  as  :  — 

Je  pars  demain,  I  (shall)  set  out  to-morrow. 

3.  It  is  also  used  in  a  narrative,  instegBd  of  the  Preterite,  in  or- 
der to  give  more  vivacity  to  the  description,  and  to  make  the  event, 
as  it  were,  present.  For  this  reason  it  is  called  also  the  historical 
or  narrative  Present.     Ex.:  — 

A  cette  nouvelle,  qu'il  repousse  avec  irritation,  Napoleon  descend  de  la  mon- 
tagne  du  Salut  et  s'approcke  de  la  MosJcwa  et  de  la  porte  Dorogomilow.  II 
s'arrete  (stops)  encore  a  Ventr€e  de  cette  harriere,  mats  inutilement.  Murat  le 
presse,  etc. 

Here  repousse,  descend,  s'approcke,  s'arrete,  presse  are  historical  Presents  (m- 
stead  of  repoussa,  descendit,  s'approcha,  s'arreta,  pressa).  It  is  particularly 
liked  for  euphony,  when  several  Preterites  of  the  first  conjugation  would  bo 
used.   Example :  — 

Mentor  range  les  soldats,  il  marche  a  leur  tete  et  s'avance  vers  les  ennemis  (in- 
Stead  of  rangea,  marcha,  s'avanga). 

4.  The  Present  tense  must  also  be  used  for  the  English  Perfect, 


314  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LE^ON. 

when  a  duration  of  time  is  expressed  in  which  the  condition  is  still 
continuing :  — 

How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

Depuis  qiiand  etes-vous  id  9 

Have  you  had  this  dog  long? 

Y  a-t-il  longtemps  que  vous  avez  ce  chien  ? 

I  have  had  him  these  two  years. 

Je  I'ai  depuis  deux  ans. 

If  the  Compound  of  the  Present  were  used  in  these  sentences,  it  would 
imply  that  the  condition  no  longer  existed.  II  y  a  deux  ans  qu'il  a  d^ 
mart,  would  be  absurd  in  French,  as  it  would  imply  that  he  was  alive  again. 

THEME  40. 

1.  Do  you  speak  French?  2.  Yes,  sir,  I  do.  3.  Is  it. raining? 
4.  No,  it  does  not  rain.  5.  I  do  not  hke  lazy  boys.  6.  I  cannot 
wiite  with  a  bad  pen.  7.  I  see  a  man  who  is  asleep.^  8.  What 
are  you  doing  ?  9.  I  am  reading  a  very  amusing  book ;  you  must 
read  it  also ;  to-morrow  I  shall  send  it  to  you.  10.  I  set  out  to- 
morrow for  Germany.  11.  I  shall  be  ready  in  a  moment.  12. 
How  long  have  you  been  (§  4)  in  Paris?  13.  I  have  been  here 
for  {depuis^  three  months.  14.  Have  you  had  this  stick ^  long? 
15.  I  have  had  it  for  more  than  {de)  four  years.  16.  Has  your 
father  known  that  gentleman  long?  17.  I  think  he  has  known  him 
for  a  year  or  two. 
1.  Qui  dort.    2.  Canne,  f. 


II.    PAST   TENSES. 

5.  The  Imperfect  tense  denotes  continuity  of  an  action  or  condi- 
tion, in  past  time.  It  is  therefore  used  to  express  what  was  custom- 
ary or  habitual.  It  is  also  used  in  descriptions  of  persons  and  of 
things,  in  expressing  physical  and  moral  qualities,  traits  of  charac- 
ter etc.*     Ex. :  — 

*  Hence  it  is  called  by  some  grammarians  the  simultaneous  past^  and  by  some 
tne  descriptive  tense. 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES   OF  THE  INDICATIVE.  315 

Henri  IV  €tait  un  hon  prince,  il  avait  de  belles  qualite's,  il  aimait  son  peuple  ct 
en  etait  aim€. 

Je  ne  savais  pas  cela. 

Pendant  mon  sejour  a  la  campagne  je  me  levais  tons  les  matins  a  cinq  heures 
et  je  faisais  de  longues  promenades. 

Calypso  ne  pouvait  se  consoler  du  depart  d'  Ulysse.  Sa  grotte  ne  resonnait 
plus  de  son  chant.  Les  nymphes  qui  la  servaient,  n'osaient  lui  parler.  Elle  se 
promenait  souvent  seule,  etc. 

Lorsquej'eiais  en  pleine  mer,  je  m'amusais  queJquefois  a  dessiner  les  beaux 
nuages,  semblahles  a  des  groupes  de  montagnes,  qui  voguaient  a  la  suite  les  uns  des 
autres,  sur  Vazur  des  deux. 

La  grotte  de  la  deesse  ^tait  sur  le  penchant  d'une  colline:  de  la  on  decouvrait 
la  mer ;  d'un  autre  c6t€  on  voyait  une  riviere  ou  se  montraient  des  ties  bordeesde 
hauts  peupliers  qui  portaient  leurs  tetes  superbes  jusque  dans  les  nues.  Les 
divers  canaux  qui  formaient  ces  iles,  semblaient  se  jouer  dans  la  campagne:  les 
uns  roulaient  leurs  eaux  claires  avec  rapidity ;  d'autres  avaient  une  eau  paisible 
et  dormante.  On  apercevait  de  loin  des  collines  et  des  montagnes  qui  se  perdaient 
dans  les  nues.  Les  montagnes  voisines  €laient  couvertes  de  pampres  verts  qui 
pendaient  en  festons:  le  raisin, plus  ^clatant  que  la  pourpre,  ne  pouvait  se  cacher 
sous  les  feuilles,  et  la  vigne  €tait  accabUe  sous  son  fruit. 

6.  When  two  occurrences  take  place,  that  which  is  interrupted 
by  the  other  and  which  was  lasting  before  the  other  happened,  must 
be  in  the  Imperfect  tense  :  — 

Je  dormais  (I  was  sleeping)  lorsqu'il  entra. 

Je  le  surpris  pendant  qu'il  ecrivait. 

Erom  this  we  see  that  whenever  in  English  the  Imperfect,  I  was,  with 
the  Part.  pres.  is  used  (I  was  sleeping,  I  was  writing,  etc.),  in  Ereuch  the 
Imperfect  tense  must  be  employed. 

7.  In  longer  narrations,  all  those  parts  which  do  not  form  the 
thread  of  the.  narrative,  but  serve  only  to  illustrate  the  principal 
facts,  and  which  are  only  explanatory  additions  or  observations  of  the 
writer,  are  in  the  Imperfect  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Au  temps  que  Vltalie  ^tait  frangaise,  une  sedition  €clata  (broke  out)  dans  un 
des  regiments  en  garnison  a  Livourne.  C'dait  une  affaire  grave :  c'^tait  beau- 
coup  plus  qu'une  mutinerie  de  soldats.  L'ejnpereur  parut  extremement  irrit^, 
lorsqu'il  apprit  cette  nouvelle.  Ses  ordres  €taient  pr€cis  et  terribles;  il  ne  voulait 
pas  de  conseils  de  guerre,  etc. 


316  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LE^ON. 

Etait,  elaient  and  voidait  serve  as  illustrative  additions  and  explanatory 
observations  of  the  writer  on  the  facts  expressed  by  the  verbs  €clata,  parut, 
apprit^ 

8.  After  the  conjunction  si,  if,  the  Imperfect  is  used  to  denote  a 
condition  or  supposition  (see  §  18).     Ex.: — 

Si  f  avals  de  Vargent.     Si  mon  frere  venait,  etc. 
II  me  demanda  si  f  avals  des  heures  lihres. 
He  asked  lite  if  I  had  some  hours  to  spare. 

9.  Sometimes  the  Imperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  Conditional, 
to  denote  that  something  would  have  happened,  had  not  another 
occurrence  prevented  it,  as  :  — 

J'etals  perdu,  s'il  ne  m'avalt  pas  retenu. 

I  should  have  been  lost,  if  he  had  not  held  me. 

Note.  In  a  similar  manner  the  expressions  :  sliould  have,  ought  to  have, 
and  could  have,  are  often  rendered  in  French  by  the  Imperfects :  //  fallait, 
je  devals,  il  pouvalt,  etc.     Ex.:  — 

Vous  devlez  me  le  dire  tout  de  suite. 

You  ought  to  have  told  me  directly. 

THEME  41. 

1.  Ca3sar  was  a  great  general.  2.  Henry  the  Fourth  was  a  good 
king,  he  loved  his  people.  3.  We  were  at  dinner  when  the  cou- 
rier^ arrived  {Pret.}.  4.  Tranquilhty  reigned  throughout  (^dans) 
the  whole  country.  5.  The  general  was  waiting  for  troops^  which 
were  to  {devaieiiC)  come.  6.  My  father  studied  (used  to  study) 
much  when  he  was  young.  7.  If  he  came  now,  he  would  find  me 
prepared.  8.  When  I  was  at  Paris,  I  went  every  morning  to 
take  a  walk  in  the  Champs-Ely  sees,  or  in  the  Bois  de  Boulogne  ; 
afterwards^  I  came  home,  where  I  employed*  myself  till  dinner, 
either  in  reading^  or  writing,  and  [in]  the  evening,  I  generally  went 
[for]  amusement^  to  the  French  Theatre  or  the  Opera.  9.  If  I 
were  in  France,  I  would  learn  French.  10.  If  he  had  something, 
ifle  would  give  it  to  you.  11.  I  asked  him  if  his  father  was  at 
uome.  12.  He  answered  that  he  did  not  know  it.  13.  I  thought 
you  were  wrong.     14.  I  observed  that  he  was  quite  pale.^ 

1.  Le  courier.  2.  Troupes,  pi.  f.  3.  Apres  cela.  4.  S^occuper.  5.  A  lire.  6. 
M  amuser.    7,  Pale, 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES   OF   THE  INDICATIVE.  317 

THE    PRETERITE. 

10.  Tkis  tense  (as :  XaUai,  je  vis,  je  regus,  etc.)  is  used  in 
French  to  express  a  particular  fact  or  event  entirely  elapsed,  which 
has  happened  but  once,  or  very  seldom,  at  a  definite  time.  It  is  the 
naiTative  or  historical  tense.     Ex.:  — 

Je  fits  a  Rome  V€t€  passe. 

II  partit  le  20  Ociobre. 

Les  Roinains  chasserent  Tarquin  de  Rome. 

Apres  la  mort  d'Aristide,  Clmx)n  prit  les  renes  du  gouvemement. 

Ce  fui  I'epoque  oil  la  Grece  commenga  a  produire  les  grands  hommes. 

Quand  les  ordres  de  Criton  furent  execute's,  un  domestique  apporta  la  coupe 
(cup,  goblet)  fatale. 

Le  premier  Octobre  1714  Charles  XII  quitta  enfin  la  Turquie.  Les  Turcs 
accompagnerent  le  roi  jusqu'a  la  frontiere  et  comblerent  ce  monarque  de  tons  les 
signes  de  leiir  respect  etde  leur  admiration.-  Pendant  cinq  jours  Charles  sup- 
porta  la  lenteur  qu'entraine  naturellement  un  long  cortege;  le  sixieme  jour  il per- 
dit  patience  et  con^ut  I'idee  de  continuer  le  voyage  avec  deux  compagnons.  Ac- 
coinpagn€  de  deux  colonels  su€dois,  il  abandonna  le  cortege.  Tous  trois  fran- 
chirent  la  frontiere  et  continuerent  le  voyage  a  cheval  avec  une  vitesse  extraordi' 
naire.     Apres  22  jours  Charles  arriva  devant  les  portes  de  Stralsund. 

11.  In  longer  narrations  all  the  facts  which  form  the  thread  of 
the  relation,  are  expressed  in  the  Preterite,  whereas  explanatory  re- 
marks serving  only  to  elucidate  or  complete  the  relation  of  the  facts, 
are  in  the  Imperfect  (see  §  7)  or  in  the  Pluperfect.     Ex.:  — 

Les  onze  magistrats  qui  veillaient  a  Vex€cution  des  criminels  se  rendirent  a  la 
prison  de  Socrate  pour  lui  annoncer  le  moment  de  son  trepas  (death).  Plu- 
sieurs  de  ses  disciples  entrerent  ensuite;  ils  latent  a  peu  pres  au  nombre  de 
vingt ;  ils  trouverent  aupres  de  lui  Xantippe,  son  spouse,  qui  tenait  le  plus  jeune 
de  ses  enfants  entre  ses  bras.  Des  qu'elle  les  apergut,  elle  s'^cria :  Ah !  voila 
vos  amis.  Socrate  pria  Criton  de  la  /aire  remener  chez  elle  (to  take  her 
home). 

Here  the  Preterites  rendirent,  entrerent,  trouverent,  apergut,  s'^cria  and  pria, 
express  the  facts,  whereas  qui  veillaient,  ils  etaient,  qui  tenait,  etc.,  are  inci- 
dental additions. 

12.  "When  two  facts  occur  together  so  that  one  is  interrupted  by 
the  other,  the  verb  which  expresses  the  interruption  is  in  the  Preter- 
ite, the  other  in  the  Imperfect.     Ex.:  — 


318  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LE9ON. 

Je  dormais  quand  il  entra. 

Je  d€jeunais  quand  vous  vintes  me  demander. 

I  was  breakfasting  when  you  came  to  ask  for  me. 

THEME  42. 

1.  I  saw  the  queen  of  England  last  year.  2.  My  aunt  died  the 
day  before  yesterday.  3.  Cato  killed  himself  lest  he  should  {de 
peur  de)  fall  into  the  hands  of  Caesar.  4.  Marius  was  ill-treated 
by  (de)  fortune ;  however  he  did  not  lose  [his]  courage.  5.  Rome 
was,  for  (pendant)  more  than  two  hundred  years,  the  mistress^  of 
the  world.  6.  King  Pepin  died  in  768 ;  Charlemagne,  his  fcon, 
succeeded  (him).  7.  We  set  off  as  soon  as  we  had^  the  order  for 
it  (en).  8.  My  brother's  servant  brought  me  a  letter  this  morning 
before  I  was  up.^  9.  Epaminondas  refused  the  presents  of  Darius. 
10.  The  Duke  of  Bouillon  was  obhged  to  give  the  town  of  Sedan 
to  Henry  the  Fourth ;  but  this  prince,  satisfied  with  his  submission,** 
gave^  it  him  back*  soon.  11.  Napoleon  was  born^  in  Corsica.^  12. 
When  some  one  represented  to  Napoleon  that  a  thing  was  impossi- 
ble, he  declared  that  this  word  was  not  French. 

1.  La  maitresse.  2.  Fret,  of  recevoir.  3.  Levd.  4.  Soumission,  f.  5.  Rendre, 
6.  Pret.  of  the  verb  naitre,  p.  181.    7.  En  Corse. 

THE    COMPOUND    OF    THE    PRESENT. 

13.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  (fai  vu,  fai  regu,  etc.)  is 
used  to  express  a  thing  as  having  taken  place  at  a  time  not  specified, 
or  in  a  period  not  fully  elapsed.     Ex.:  — 

J'ai  perdu  tons  mes  enfants. 

M.  Laurent  a  beaucoup  voyag^. 

Nous  avons  renonc€  (given  up)  a  nos  droits. 

Alexandre  le  Grand  a  detruit  V empire  des  Perses. 

L'avez  vous  vu  aujoud'hui  ?  —  Oui  je  Vai  vu  ce  matin. 

Nous  avous  eu  beaucoup  de  pluie  celte  ann€e. 

Note.  The  French  Perfect  corresponds  to  the  same  form  in  English  in 
all  cases,  except  that  given  under  the  Present  tense,  §  4,  in  such  phrases  as 
Depuis  quand  etes  vous  id,  how  long  have  you  been  here  1  But  the  French 
tense  is  much  more  frequently  used  than  the  English,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
following  paragraphs. 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES   OF  THE  INDICATIVE.  319 

14.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  translates  the  English  Imper- 
fect, whenever  this  does  not  denote  continuous  or  habitual  state  or 
action  (see  §§  5,  6,  7),  or  is  not  strictly  a  historical  past.  It  is  the 
tense  most  frequently  used  in  conversation.     Ex. :  — 

Did  you  see  him  yesterday  ? 

L'avez-vous  vu  hier  (not  le  vites-vous)  ? 

No,  sir,  I  did  not  see  him. 

Non,  Monsieur,  je  ne  I'm  pas  vu. 

Did  they  tell  him  to  come  at  six  ? 

Lui  a-t-on  dit  de  venir  a  six  heures  ? 

Yes  they  told  him  to  come  at  six  o'clock  precisely. 

Oui,  on  lui  a  dit  de  venir  a  six  heures  precises. 

Les  Frangais  ont  gag7i(f  la  hataille  de  Marengo. 

In  this  last  sentence,  gagrierent  would  he  perfectly  correct,  but  would  refer 
merely  to  an  historical  event  in  the  past,  with  no  bearing  upon  the  present. 
Ont  gagn€  connects  the  fact  stated  with  something  present,  either  in  the 
speaker  or  in  the  hearer. 

15.  The  Compound  of  the  Present  is  idiomatically  used  in  famil- 
iar conversation,  instead  of  the  Compound  of  the  Future,  as  : 

Avez-vous  bientot  Jini  votre  theme  ?     Oui,  je  I'ai  Jini  dans  un  moment. 
Will  yoii  soon  have  done  your  exercise  1     Yes,  I  shall  have  finished  it  in 
a  moment ;  instead  of  the  more  formal  Aurez-vous  Jini J'aurai  Jini. 

THEME  43. 

1.  The  horse,  when  he  has  run^  his  course ;  the  bee,  when  it  has 
made  its  honey ;  ^  and  the  good  man,  when  he  has  done  good^  to 
others,  do  not  make  a  noisy  boast*  about  it,  but  go  on^  repeating  the 
action ;  as  the  vine,^  in  its  season,  produces  new  clusters^  again. 
2.  Fenelon  preached  with  success  from  the  age  of  nineteen,  and 
wrote  many  works  which  are  admired  for  their  beauty  of  style  ;  but 
that  which  has  gained^  him  the  greatest  reputatio/i  is  his  "  Telma- 
chus,"^  where  he  has  displayed^®  all  the  riches  of  the  French  lan- 
guage. 3.  No  work  had  ever  a  greater  reputation  ;  it  is  written  in 
a  lively,^^  simple,  natural,  and  elegant  manner ;  its  fictions  are  well 
imagined,  the  moraP^  sublime,  and  the  political  maxims  (which)  it 
contains,  alP^  tend  to  the  happiness  of  mankind.^* 


320  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME   LEgON. 

1.  AchevL  2.  Miel,  m.  3.  Du  Men.  4.  Ne  s'en  vantent  pas.  5.  Contintier.  6. 
Vigne,  f.  7.  Grappe,  f.  8.  Lui  a  fait.  9.  Telemaque.  10.  Deployer.  11.  AnimL 
12.  ia  morale.    13.  Tevdre  a.    14.  Z>es  hommes. 

THE    COMPOUNDS    OF    THE   IMPERFECT  AND    OF    THE    PRETERITE. 

16.  These  tenses  arc  formed  from  the  Imperfect  and  Preterite, 
and  correspond  to  them  fully ;  only  that  they  represent  their  action 
as  having  taken  place  previous  to  some  other  event  refen-ed  to,  and 
cannot  be  used  entirely  independently,  but  usually  stand  connected 
with  a  conjunction  or  an  adverb  of  time.  If  this  conjunctive  clause 
expresses  a  definite  past  time,  the  Compound  of  the  Preterite  is 
employed,  especially  after  the  conjunctions  aussitot  que,  lorsque^ 
quand,  des  que,  a  peine,  hientot,  en  un  moment,  un  jour  que,  etc. 
Example :  —  ^ 

Aussitot  que  feus  termini  mes  affaires,  je  repartis. 

A  peine  eut-il  prononc€  ce  mot,  qu'il  s'en  repentit. 

Des  que  le  parhment  se  fut  assemble,  l'€meute  cessa. 

As  soon  as  the  parliament  was  assembled,  the  riot  ceased. 

It  is  here  not  to  be  overlooked  that  in  the  use  of  the  Compound  Preterite 
a  more  immediate  relation,  a  closer  connection  must  exist  between  the  two 
past  events. 

17.  With  the  Compound  of  tTie  Imperfect,  this  close  connection 
fails,  and  this  is  the  distinguishing  feature  of  this  tense,  which  is 
also  used  like  the  Imperfect  for  descriptions,  for  continuous  events, 
and  frequently  repeated  or  customary  previous  actions.     Ex. :  — 

Platan  avail  regu  de  la  nature  un  corps  robuste. 

J'avais  deja  termini  mes  affaires,  quand  je  regus  votre  lettre. 

A  la  campagne,  quand  j'avais  dine,  je  faisais  une  promenade  de  deux  lieues. 

18.  The  Compound  of  the  Imperfect  is  also  used  after  the  con- 
junction si,  if,  the  same  in  French  as  in  English  (see  §  9).     Ex. ; 

Si  vous  etiez  venu  plus  tot,  vous  m'auriez  trouve  a  la  maison. 
S'il  avait  parU  plus  haut  (louder),  je  I'aurais  compris. 

THEME   44. 

1.  The  Tyrians  had,  by  their  pride,^  offended  the  great  Sesostris, 
who  ruled  in  Egypt,  and  who  had  conquered  so  many  kingdoms. 
2.  The  wealth  which  they  had  acquired^  by  commerce,  and  the  strength 


USE  OF  THE  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE.     321 

of  the  impregnable^  city  of  Tyre,  lying*  in  the  sea,  had  lifted  up* 
the  heart  of  these  people.  3.  They  had  refused  to  pay  Sesostris 
the  tribute^  which  he  had  imposed  upon  them  (leur)  on  his  return 
from  his  conquests ;  ^  and  they  had  furnished  troops  to  his  brother, 
who  had  attempted^  to  kill  him  in  the  midst  of  the  festivities^  of  a 
great  banquet.  4.  As  soon  as  Sesostris  leamed^^  this,  he  deter- 
mined^^ to  humiliate  their  pride  and  to  destroy  their  commerce  upon  all 
seas.  5.  Julius  Caesar,  having  disembarked^^  in  Africa,  fell  [down] 
as  he  was  leaving  the  vessel ;  this  appeared  to  his  soldiers  a  very 
inauspicious^^  omen :  ^^  he,  however,  turned  the  feelings  of  the  army 
to  his  advantage  by  exclaiming  {en  s'ecrianf),  "It  is  now,  O 
Africa,  that  I  hold  thee." 

1.  Orgueil,  m.  2.  Acquises.  3.  Imprenable  (before  the  noun).  4.  Situee  dans. 
5.  Enfld.  6.  Le  tribut,  7.  Conquete,  f.  8.  Voulu.  9.  Joies.  10.  Apprendre.  11. 
Jl  resolut  d'humilier.    12.  Ayant  debarque.    13.  Un  presage  de  mauvaise  augure, 

in.      THE  FUTURE   TENSES. 

19.  The  Future  (Je  parlerai,  je  ferai,  etc.)  denotes  in  general 
future  events  or  circumstances,  as  :  — 

Charles  partira  demain. 

20.  It  must  sometimes  be  used  in  French  after  adverbs  of  time 
{quandy  lorsque,  etc.)  where  the  English  use  the  Present,  when  the 
idea  is  one  of  future  time.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  pouvez  venir  quand  vous  voudrez. 
You  may  come  when  you  like. 

21.  It  is  used  as  a  softened  form  of  the  Imperxitive,  implying  the 
expectation  of  fulfilment.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  m'€crirez  demain,  (do)  write  to  me  to-morrow. 
Vous  ne  tuerez  point,  thou  shalt  do  no  murder. 
Quand  vous  viendrez,  vous  apporterez  mon  livre. 
When  you  come  you  will  bring  my  book. 

Note  1.  When  shall  and  will  imply  determination,  they  are  rendered  by 
vouloir,  as  :  — 

I  will  do  it,  je  veux  le  faire. 
You  shall  do  it,  je  veux  que  vous  le  fa^siez. 
21 


322  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME  LEgON. 

22.  It  sometimes  has  the  sense  of  the  Imperative  in  sentences 
like  the  foUowmg  :  — 

Croira  qui  voudra  Vhistorien  CapitoUn  et  qudques  autres  €crivains  qui  font 
denser  les  €Uphants  sur  la  corde. 

Believe  who  will  the  historian  Capitolinus  and  several  other  writers,  who 
make  elephants  dance  on  a  rope. 

Note.  To  be  on  the  point  of  doing  something  is  expressed  in  French  by 
aller,  which  corresponds  precisely  with  the  English  to  be  going,  etc.  { See 
Part  I,,  Lesson  XL VI.)     Ex. :  — 

Are  you  going  to  write  to  him  ?  allez-vous  lui  ecrire  ? 

I  am  coming,  je  vais  venir. 

Napoleon  dit  a  ses  soldats,  "  Nous  allons  entreprendre  la  conquete  de  VEgypte. 
Les  peuples  avec  lesquds  nous  allons  vivre,  sont  Mahometans",  etc. 

^3.  The  Compound  of  the  Future  indicates  an  event  which  is  to 
precede  another  future  event  specified.     Ex  :  — 

Quand  faurai  termin€  mes  affaires,  je  partirai  tout  de  suite. 
Aussitot  que  je  serai  arrive,  j'irai  le  voir. 

24.  When  the  conjunction  si  signifies  whether,  expressing  uncer- 
tainty, the  future  can  be  used  after  it,  in  French  as  in  English.  Si 
is  never  followed  by  the  future,  unless  it  means  whether.     Ex.  :  — 

Je  ne  sais  si  mon  frere  viendra. 

I  do  not  know  if  my  brother  will  come. 

25.  When  si  signifies  on  condition  that,  the  English  Future  must 
be  rendered  by  the  Present.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  deviendrez  savant,  si  vous  €tudiez  bien. 

You  will  become  a  learned  man,  if  you  will  study. 

26.  The  Future  is  sometimes  used  to  imply  surmise.     Ex.  :  — 
Ou  est  man  argent  ?    L'aurai-je  peut-eire  perdu  ? 

Where  is  my  money  1    Have  I  perhaps  lost  it  ? 

27.  The  Conditionals,  je  parlerais,  faurais  parle,  are  used  in 
French  as  in  English,  in  conditional  sentences  :  — 

Je  serais  heureux  si  j'avais  des  amis. 
I  should  be  happy  if  I  had  some  friends. 

Note.   The  English  I  wish,  when  it  does  not  relate  to  something  past, 
is  often  translated  by  the  Conditional  of  vouloir,  je  voudrais.    Ex.  :  — 
I  wish  he  would  come  soon,  je  voudrais  qu'il  vint  bieniot. 


USE   OF  THE   TENSES   OF  THE   INDICATIVE.  323 

28.  After  si,  when  it  means  suppose  that,  the  English  Condi- 
tional must  be  rendered  by  the  Imperfect  (see  §  8).     Ex.  :  — 

Si  je  continuafts  mon  commerce,  je  deviendrais  riche. 
If  I  should  continue  my  trade,  I  should  become  rich. 

But  when  si  means  whether,  the   Conditional  is  also  used  in 
French :  — 
Je  ne  sai's  si  mon  oncle  viendrait,  en  cas  que  vous  V  invitassiez. 

29.  The  compound  Conditional  of  devoir,  pouvoir,  and  vouloir, 
followed  by  the  simple  Infinitive,  must  be  used  when,  in  Enghsh, 
the  auxiliaries  should,  ought,  could,  might,  are  followed  by  a  com- 
pound Infinitive     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  auriez  dii  €crire  une  lettre. 
You  ought  to  have  written  a  letter. 
J^aurais  pu  lui  donner  de  I'argent. 
I  could  have  given  him  some  money. 

THEME  45. 

1.  I  shall  go  to  London.  2.  The  bookseller  will  send  you  the 
book  to-morrow.  3.  When  I  am  in  the  country,  will  you  come  to 
see  me  ?  4.  I  shall  play  as  soon  as  I  have  finished  my  lesson.  5. 
There  will  always  be  wars  among  men,  as  long  as  they  are  (§  20) 
ambitious.  6.  I  hope  you  will  not  refuse  me  this  favor.  7.  When 
you  are  ready,  we  will  go  [and]  take  a  walk.  8.  I  do  not  know  if 
my  sister  will  consent  to  it  (y).  9.  If  your  person  were  as  gigan- 
tic^ as  your  desires,  the  whole^  world  could  not  contain  you ;  your 
right  hand  would  touch  the  east^  and  your  left  the  west*  at  the 
(en)  same  time,  said  the  Scythian^  ambassador  to  Alexander.  10. 
I  could  have  kept^  the  book  ;  nobody  would  have  known  it. 

1.  Gigantesque.    2.  Entier  (after  the  noun).    3.  Uorient,  m.    4.  Uoccident,  m. 
6.  Uavtibassadeur  des  ScytJies.    6.  Garder. 

THEME   46. 

1.  My  country  has  been  ungrateful^  to  me,  although  I  have  ren- 
dered it  (lui)  great  service  {pi.)-  2.  The  king  has  done  me  great 
injustice ;   he  has  robbed^  me  of  my  entire  fortune,  he  has  even 


324  XVIII.      DIX-HUITIEME   LE^ON. 

taken^  from  me  my  two  servants.  3.  I  have  been  compelled  to  flee, 
in  order  to  preserve*  my  life,  which  was  seriously  threatened.  4. 
What  was  to  be  done?^  5.  You  should  rather  ^have  endured' 
(§  29)  all  injuries  than  to  offend'^  against  France  and  the  greatness 
of  your  house.  6.  If  you  were  persecuted,  you  could  have 
retired ;  ^  it  would  have  been  (valu)  better  to  be  poor  and  unknown* 
than  to  take  up^°  arms  against  your  country.  7.  Even  in  poverty 
and  in  the  most  wretched^^  exile,  your  fame^^  would  not  have  been 
lost. 

1.  Ingrat.  2.  Privi.  3.  Wa  depmdlU  jusqu'a.  4.  Pour  sauver.  5.  Que  v(nt- 
liez-vous  que  je  fisse  ?  6.  Souffrir.  7.  Que  de  manquer  a.  8.  Vous  retirer  (reflec- 
tive verb).    9.  Ohscur.    10.  Prendre  les  amies.    11.  Miserable.    12.  Gloire,  f. 


READING  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRE    SELKIRK. 

Pendant  la  gnierre  pour  la  succession  d'Espagne,  quelques  parti- 
culiers^  equiperent  en  Angleterre  deux  vaisseaux  armateurs,  destines 
a  faire  des  prises^  dans  la  mer  du  sud.  Le  capitaine  Rogers  fut 
nomme  pour  les  commander.  lis  leverent^  I'ancre  de  Bristol  le  2 
Aout,  1708.  Au  mois  de  Janvier  de  I'annee  suivante  ils  se  ti-ou- 
vaient  du  cote  du  pole  antarctique.*  Rogers  doubla  le  Cap-Horn 
sans  prendre  terre  en  aucun  lieu  de  ces  parages^  jusqu'a  I'ile  de 
Juan  Femandes,  situee  dans  la  mer  du  sud,  a,  la  distance  de  cen<>- 
dix  lieues  du  Chili.  II  y  envoya  une  pinasse,^  qui  revint  au  vais- 
seau  avec  quantite  d'ecrevisses,^  et  un  homme  vetu  de  peaux  de 
chevres^  qui  paraissait  plus  sauvage  que  ces  animaux  memes. 
C'^tait  un  Ecossais,  nomme  Alexandre  Selkirk,  qui  avait  ete  maitre 
a  bord  du  vaisseau  *'  Les  Cinq-Ports,"  et  que  le  capitaine  Stradling 
avait  abandonne  sur  cette  lie  depuis  quatre  ans  et  quatre  mois. 
Voici  le  recit  que  ce  "malheureux  fit  de  ses  aventures  au  capitaine 
Rogers. 

"  Des  mon  enfance  j'ai  ete  eleve^  dans  la  marine.  Ayant  suivi 
le  capitaine  Stradling  dans  son  expedition,  j'eus  un  demel^^*'  avec 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  325 

liii,  ce  qui  I'engagea  a  me  debarqner  sur  cette  ile.  Je  resolus 
d'abord  d'y  rester,  plutot  que"  de  m'exposer  h  de  nouveaux  cha- 
grins, d'autant  plus  que  le  vaisseau  etait  en  mauvais  etat.  Cepen- 
dant  revenu  h  moimeme,  je  souhaitai  d'y  retoumer,  mais  le 
capitaine  n'y  voulut  pas  consentir." 

{To  be  continued.) 

1.  Private  men.    2.  Capture.    3.  To  weigh.    4.  South.    5.  Parts  of  the  sea.    6. 
Pinnace.    7.  Crab.    8.  Goat-skins.    9.  Brought  up.    10.  Quarrel.    11.  Rather  than. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Que  firent  quelques  particuliers  anglais  pendant  la  guerre  de  la 
succession  d'Espagne  ? 

Qui  commanda  les  deux  vaisseaux  ? 

Ou  prit-il  terre  pour  la  premiere  fois  ? 

Ou  est  situee  cette  ile  ? 

Qui  trouva-t-on  la  ? 

Qui  etait  cet  homme  ? 

Comment  y  etait-il  venu  ? 

Combien  de  temps  y  etait-il  reste  ? 

Pourquoi  avait-il  ete  debarqu4  par  le  capitame  ? 


XIX.     DIX-NEUYIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

1.  The  Subjunctive  is  in  most  cases  dependent,  and  is  therefore  used  in 
subordinate  clauses.  Whenever  in  French  a  subordinate  clause  is  depend- 
ent upon  a  leading  clause  which  contains  the  idea  of  something  not  yet 
having  an  actual  existence  for  the  speaker,  consequently  of  something  pos- 
sible or  uncertain,  its  verb  will  be  in  the  Subjunctive.  This  unreality  can 
apply  as  well  to  something  external,  i.  e.  to  actions  and  events,  as  to  some- 
thing internal,  i.  e.  to  conceptions  and  emotions.     This  is  the  general 


326  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LE^ON. 

ground  of  distinction  in  the  application  of  the  French  Subjunctive-  The 
two  languages  by  no  means  agree  in  this  point.  Many  verbs  in  English 
are  put  in  the  Future,  the  Conditional,  or  the  Present  Indicative,  which,  in 
French,  must  be  in  the  subjunctive.     Thus  for  instance :  — 

Je  ne  pense  pas  qu'il  soit  si  ag^. 
•    I  do  not  think  he  is  so  old. 
Nous  craignions  qu'il  ne  s'en  allot. 
We  feared  he  would  go. 

2.  But  before-  passing  to  the  rules  concerning  the  use  of  the  Sub- 
junctive, it  will  be  indispensably  necessary  to  understand  the  relation  of 
the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  to  those  of  the  Indicative  and  Conditional, 
without  which  the  clause,  dependent  upon  them,  cannot  be  properly  trans- 
lated.    The  following  rules  are  here  applicable  :  — 

1.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  is  in  the  Present  or  Future  Indica- 
tive, that  of  the  dependent  clause  will  be  in  the  Present  or  Compound  of 
the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive.    Ex.:  — 

Je  veux  qu'il  vienne*  I  wish  him  to  come. 

Connaissez-vous  gudqu'un  qui  sache  faire  cda  ? 

Do  you  know  anybody  who  knows  how  to  do  this  ? 

Je  ferai  en  sorte  que  tout  soit  pret. 

I  will  have  everything  ready. 

Jattendrai  que  mon  pere  soit  parti. 

I  will  wait  till  my  father  has  departed. 

2.  If  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause  be  in  a  past  tense  of  the  Indicative, 
or  in  the  Conditional,  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  follow  in  the 
subordinate  clause ;  or  if  the  subordinate  clause  contain  an  event  which  has 
already  taken  place,  the  Compound  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  must  be 
employed,  according  to  the  following  scheme  :  — 

Je  craignais 


Je  craignis 
J'ai  craint 
Javais  craint 
Je  craindrais 
Jaurais  craint 


qu'elle  n'arrivdt    demain  —  aujourd'hui,  —  trop    tard, — 
trop  tot,  etc. 


*  Observe  that  the  Present  and  Future  are  the  same  in  the  Subjunctive  Mood  in 
French;  the  context  alone  shows  of  which  of  the  two  we  speak.    Ex.:  — 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'elle  vienne. 
I  do  not  think  she  is  coming. 
Je  ne  crois  pas  qu'elle  vienne. 
I  do  not  think  she  will  come. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  327 


qu'ils  ne  f assent  arrives  hier — avant-hier,  —  la  semaine 
derniere,  etc. 


Je  craignais 
Je  craignis 
J^ai  craint  * 
J'avais  craint 
Je  craindrais 
J'aurais  craint 

3.  There  are  a  great  many  verbs  which  govern  the  verb  of  the 
subordinate  clause  in  the  Subjunctive  mood ;  they  may  be  divided 
into  four  classes,  viz. :  — 

1.  Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  desiring,  commanding  or  permitting. 

2.  Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  and  saying. 

3.  Verbs  expressing  fear,  doubt,  sorrow,  astonishment,  denial,  duty,  ne- 
cessity, joy,  or  delight. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs  which  do  not  express  jcertainty  or  probability. 

4.    Verbs  of  wishing,  willing,  commanding,  etc.     Such  are  ;  — 

Aimer,  to  like.  permettre,  to  permit,  allow. 

aimer  mieux,  to  prefer.  prier,  to  beg,  to  ask. 

d€fendre,  to  forbid.  recommander,  to  recommend. 

demander,  to  ask.  smihaiter,  to  wish. 

d^sirer,  to  wish  for,  to  desire.  souffrir,  to  suffer. 

exiger,  to  demand.  supplier,  to  beg,  request. 

wdonner,  to  order.  vouloir,  to  be  willing,  etc. 

Examples :  — 
Xordnnne  qu'il  sorte,  I  order  him  to  go  out. 
J'aime  qn'il  sort  conrageux,  I  like  him  to  be  brave. 
77  ve>it  que  je  dise  la  v€rit^  [Pres.  Subj.,  §  2,  1). 
He  wishes  rae  to  say  the  truth. 
II  viPxlait  que  je  lui  disse  la  v&it€  {Imperf.,  §  2,  2). 
He  desired  me  to  tell  him  the  truth. 
T^  roi  exigea,  que  je  partisse  tout  de  suite. 
The  king  demanded  that  I  should  leave  directly 

♦As  the  Compound  of  the  Present  belongs  to  Present  as  well  as  to  Past  time,  it 
can  be  tblJowed  also  by  the  Present  of  the  JSubjunctlve,  when  the  dependent  clause 
refers  to  Present  time.    Ex. :  — 

Dieu  nous  a  donne  la  raison  pour  que  nous  nous  en  sermons. 

God  has  given  us  reason  that  we  may  make  use  of  it. 


328  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

6.    Verbs  of  thinking,  believing,  saying,  etc. 

These  verbs,  and,  in  general,  all  those  which  express  the  intel- 
lectual faculties  of  the  mind,  govern  the  Indicative  when  they  are 
affirmatively  used,  and  most  commonly  the  Subjunctive  when  they 
are  used  negatively,  interrogatively,  or  are  preceded  by  the  conjunc- 
tion si.  If  I  say,  for  instance :  Je  crois  que  Charles  est  malade, 
I  represent  Charles's  illness  to  myself  as  a  reality,  and  consequently 
the  Indicative  is  required.  But  in  the  sentences  :  Je  ne  crois  pas 
que  Charles  soil  malade,  or,  croyez-vous  que  Charles  soit  malade  f 
an  uncertainty  is  expressed  in  regard  to  Charles's  illness,  and  the 
Subjunctive  must  be  used.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  crois  pas  que  le  concert  ait  lieu  ce  soir. 

I  do  not  think  that  the  concert  will  take  place  to-night. 

Pensez-vous  qu'il  puisse  apprendre  tout  cela. 

Do  you  think  he  can  learn  all  that  1 

Je  ne  dis  pas  qu'il  ait  tort. 

I  do  not  say  that  he  is  wrong. 

Partons,  si  vous  pensez  qu'il  fosse  beau  temps. 

Note  1 .  If  however  we  ask  a  question,  less  to  be  informed  of  a  thing 
than  to  inform  others  of  it,  the  second  verb  (having  the  sense :  Do  you 
know  ?)  is  put  in  the  Indicative,  and  not  in  the  Subjunctive.     Ex.:  — 

Vous  ai-je  dit  que  mon  frere  est  arriv€? 

Note  2.  Observe  that  the  verbs  of  knowing,  being  sure,  resolving,  etc., 
are  not  comprised  among  those  which  govern  the  Subjunctive.  They  gen- 
erally require  the  Indicative,  even  when  used  interrogatively  or  neg- 
atively :  — 

Je  savais  },.,... 

r  ■  r  quit  dait  ici. 

Je  ne  savais  pas  )  ^ 

Je  ne  sais  s'il  le  fera,  I  do  not  know  if  he  will  do  it. 
THEME  47. 

1.  I  wish  him  to  come  (that  he  c).  2.  The  law  requires  that 
thieves^  [should]  be  punished.  3.  I  demanded  that  he  should  pay 
me.  4.  Has  he  demanded  that  you  should  pay  the  bill?^  5. 
I  forbid  that  he  should  go  there.  6.  God  wills  that  we  love  our 
enemies.  7.  Caligula  wished  that  the  Romans  should  render  him 
divme  honors.^    8.  Your  father  expects  that  you  should  give  ^  an  ac- 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  329 

count  of  wbat  you  have  done.  9.  My  aunt  wishes  that  I  should 
set  out  to-morrow.  10.  Tell  him  to  wait.  11.  Augustus  com- 
manded in  his  will*  that  they  should  not  seek  to^  extend  the  empire. 
12.  Allow  me  to  tell  you  (allow  that  I  tell  y.)  the  truth.  13.  I 
will  be  obeyed  (that  one  ob.  me).  14.  Do  you  think  your  aunt 
will  come  by  herself  ?'^  15.  If  I  find  that  you  frequent  bad  com- 
pany, you  will  lose  my  friendship.  16.  Do  you  hope  they  (on) 
will  make  peace  ?  ^ 

1.  Les  voleurs.    2.  Le  compte.     3.  Bes  honneurs  divins.     4.  To  give  an  account, 
reiidre  compte.    5.  Testament,  m.    6.  A  etendre.    7.  Seule.    8.  La  paix. 


6.    The  Subjunctive  is  used  after  verbs  of  fear,  doubt,  sorrow, 
joy,  denial  or  hinderance,  astonishment,  etc.     Such  are  :  — 

Avoir  peur, ")  s*€tonner,  to  wonder. 

craindre,       \  empecher,  to  hinder,  prevent. 

dmter,  to  doubt.  nier,  to  deny. 

And  likewise  after : 

^tre  hien  aise,  to  be  glad.  itre  afflig€,  to  be  afflicted. 

etre  charm€,    ">  etre  fdche,  to  be  sorry. 

etre  enchante,  j"   ^    ^  ^^^  S  ^  •  ^^^g  etonne,  to  be  astonished. 

etre  content,  to  be  satisfied,  etre  surpris,  to  be  surprised. 

se  r€jouir,  to  rejoice.  regretter,  to  regret. 

trembler,  to  tremble.  se  plaindre,  to  complain. 

Examples :  — 

Je  crains  que  ma  mere  ne  soit  malade. 

I  fear  my  mother  is  ill. 

Je  ne  doutais  pas  qu'il  n'arrivdt  avant  vous. 

I  did  not  doubt  that  he  would  arrive  before  you. 

J'empecherai  qu'il  ne  *  sorte. 

I  will  hinder  him  from  going  out. 

Je  regrette  qu'il  soit  venu  trop  tard. 

Mon  pere  est  fdcM  que  je  ne  lui  aie  pas  ^crit  plus  tot. 

Je  suis  charm€  que  vous  soyez  venu  me  voir. 

Je  m'€tonne  qu'il  n'ait  pas  regu  ma  lettre. 

*  Concerning  the  particle  ne,  see  L.  XV.  $  15  - 18. 


330  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME    LEgON. 

Note  1 .    The  verbs  avoir  peur,  appr€hender,  craindre  and  trembler  require 
the  particle  ne  before  the  verb  in  the  Subjunctive  mood,  but  only  when 
these  verbs  themselves  are  affirmative  or  negative-interrogative.    Ex.:  — 
•  Je  crains  qu'il  ne  vienne. 

Ne  craignez-vous  pas  qu'il  ne  vienne  ? 
But  if  the  sentence  be  simply  negative  or  simply  interrogative,  ne  is  not 
used,  as  :  — 

Je  ne  crains  pas  qu'il  vienne. 

Craignez-vous  qu'il  vienne  ? 

Note  2,  If  after  those  verbs  mentioned  in  §  6,  we  wish  to  express  our- 
selves with  definiteness,  de  ce  que  is  used  instead  of  the  simple  que,  and  this 
is  followed  by  the  Indicative :  — 

II  est  fdcM  de  ce  que  vous  ne  lui  avez  pas  €crit. 

Je  me  plains  de  ce  qu'dle  m'a  oubli€. 

Note  3.  If  the  second  verb  is  negative  in  English,  ne — pas  must  be 
used  in  French,  as  :  — 
Je  tremble  qu'il  n' arrive  pas  a  temps. 

I  tremble  lest  he  may  not  arrive  in  time. 

7.   Subjunctive  after  Impersonal  verbs. 

A  verb  preceded  by  que  is  always  put  in  the  Subjunctive  after  the 
following  Impersonals :  — 

U  est  surprenant,  it  is  surprising.  il  plait,  it  pleases,  suits. 

il  convient,  it  is  proper.  il  est  fdclieux,  it  is  sad. 

il  faut,  it  must.  il  est  juste,  it  is  just,  right. 
il  importe,  it  is  important,  it  matters,     il  est  difficile,  it  is  difficult, 

it  concerns.  il  est  possible,  it  is  possible. 

il  suffit,  it  is  sufficient.  il  est  naturel,  it  is  a  matter  of  course. 

il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better.  il  se  peut,  il  peut  se  /aire,  it  may  be. 

And  likewise  after :  — 

II  est  temps,  it  is  time.  c'est  dommage,  it  is  a  pity. 

c'est  un  malheur,  it  is  a  misfortune,  etc.,  etc. 

Examples :  — 
U  faut  que  vous  partiez  tout  de  suite. 
You  must  leave  directly. 

II  est  possible  qu'il  revienne. 

It  is  possible  that  he  come  back. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD.  331 

C'est  dommage  que  vous  ne  soyez  pas  venu  plus  tot. 

It  is  a  pity  that  you  have  not  come  earlier. 

II  suffit  qu'il  ait  avou€  sa  faute. 

It  is  enough  that  he  has  confessed  his  fault. 

II  est  juste  que  vous  soyez  puni. 

It  is  right  that  you  be  punished. 

Further,  after  il  y  a,  and  all  impersonal  verbs  with  an  adjective 
denoting  evidence,  certainty,  or  probability,  when  they  are  used  'yn  a 
negative,  interrogative,  or  conditional  manner.     Ex. :  — 

Y  a-t-il  un  mortel  qui  puisse  dire  qu'il  est  toujours  heureux  1 

Is  there  a  mortal  who  can  say  that  he  is  always  happy  ? 

Est-il  sur  qu'il  ait  tort  1 

Is  it  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong  ? 

II  n'est  pas  sur  qu'il  ait  tort. 

It  is  not  certain  that  he  is  in  the  wrong. 

THEME  48. 

1.  I  doubt  whether  that  is  true.  2.  I  doubt  whether  your  uncle 
will  arrive  to-morrow.  8.  The  Egyptians  did  not  doubt  (see  Les- 
son XV.,  §  15)  that  certain  plants  and  animals  were  divinities.-^ 
4.  We  question  whether  riches  can  aflford^  happiness.  5.  I  did  not 
know  that  you  were  to  come.  6.  Do  you  doubt  that  I  am  your 
friend?  7.  I  do  not  doubt  that  you  are  my  friend.  8.  He  denies 
that  he  had  been  told  that.  9.  He  does  not  deny  that  he  has  been 
told  that.  ■  10.  It  is  time  for  us  to  go  (that  we  go)  home,  for  it 
begins  to  (a)  rain.  11.  It  is  evident  that  Greece  could  no  more 
defend  herself,  so  much  was  she  at  that  time  sunken.^  12.  It  is 
sufficient  if  you  tell  him  this.  18.  It  is  a  pity  that  you  did  not  go 
with  us;  you  would  have  enjoyed  yourself  much.  14.  It  is  not 
probable  that  they  will  do  it.     15.  I  must  go  to  (ew)  town. 

1.  Des  divinites.    2.  Accorder.    3.  Dechue. 


.  8.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  dependent  clauses  begin- 
ning with  qui,  que,  lequel  or  oil,  which  depend  upon  a  leading 
clause  in  which  a  wish,  doubt,  or  condition  is  implied,  especially 
after  an  Imperative.     Ex. :  — 


332  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME   LEgON. 

Lisez  des  ouvrages  qui  puissent  former  votre  gout. 

Read  such  books  as  can  form  your  taste. 

Choisissez  un  appartement  ou  vous  soyez  a  votre  aise. 

Choose  an  apartment  where  you  may  be  comfortable. 

lis  envoy erent  des  ddput^s  qui  consultassent  Apollon. 

They  sent  deputies  who  were  to  consult  Apollo. 

If,  however,  no  such  requirement  or  expectation  is  contained  in  the  lead- 
ing clause ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  matter  is  rather  regarded  as  something 
which  is  actual,  or  which  has  already  taken  place,  then,  of  course,  the 
Indicative  is  used.     Ex. :  — 

J'ai  love  un  appartement  ou  je  suis  hien  a  mon  aise. 

lis  envoyerent  des  deputes  qui  consulterent  Apollon. 

9.  A  verb  preceded  by  the  relative  qui  or  que  is  put  in  the  Sub- 
junctive after  the  Superlative,  when  the  relative  clause  only  express- 
es an  opinion,  as  :  — 

C'est  le  plus  beau  jardin  que  je  connaisse.  ^ 

This  is  the  most  beautiful  garden  I  know. 
C'est  une  des  dernieres  lettres  que  St.  Paul  ait  ecrites. 
This  is  one  of  the  last  letters  St.  Paul  has  written. 
La  meilleure  garde  qu'un  roi  puisse  avoir,  c'est  le  coeur  de  ses  sujets. 
The  best  guard  a  king  can  have  is  the  hearts  of  his  subjects. 
If,  however  the  thing  is  represented  as  certain  or  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the 
Indicative  follows.     Ex. :  — 

Souviens-toi  que  je  suis  le  seul  qui  t'a  d^plu  (displeased). 
Ne'ron  est  le  premier  empereur  qui  a  pers€cut^  I'Eglise. 

10.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  further  after  the  ordinal  numbers 
(as,  le  premier,  le  second,  le  dernier,  etc.),  and  after  unique^  seidj 
peu,  rien,  and  personne.     Ex.  :  — 

Vous  etes  le  premier  ami  que  j'  aie  rencontr€  a  Paris. 
You  are  the  first  friend  I  have  met  with  in  Paris. 
C'est  I'unique  espoir  qui  me  soit  reste'. 
This  is  the  only  hope  that  remains  to  me. 
11  y  a  peu  d'hommes  qui  sacheiit  supporter  I'adversit^. 
There  are  few  men  who  know  how  to  bear  adversity. 
Je  ne  connais  personne  qui  soit  aussi  heureux  que  lui. 
I  know  nobody  who  is  so  happy  as  he  is. 

Note.    Qui  and  que  do  not  govern  the  Subjunctive,  when  they  are  pre- 
ceded by  de  and  its  object,  to  which  they  refer.    Ex.  :  — 
Ne  dites  rien  de  ce  que  je  vous  ai  confie  (Ind.). 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  333 

THEME  49. 

I.  You  are  the  most  learned  man  I  know  in  this  town.  2.  Rob- 
ert is  the  only  friend  on  whom  I  can  depend.^  3.  Nero  was  the 
first  emperor  that  (has)  persecuted  the  Christians.  4.  I  seek  a 
servant  who  is  faithful.  5.  The  diamond  is  the  most  valuable^  stone 
we  know.  6.  You  are  the  first  German  I  have  met  with  in  China. 
7.  There  is  no  one  who  does  it  more  easily^  than  she.  8.  Is  this 
the  first  time  you  have  been  mistaken  ?  *  9.  I  wish  it  were  the  first 
time.  10.  Lucretius^  and  Pliny  were  the  only  natural  philosophers^ 
whom  the  Romans  had. 

1,  Compter.     2.  Precieux.     3.  Aisement.     4.  Se  tromper.    5.  Lucrece  et  Pline. 
6.  Naturalistes. 

II.  Subjunctive  after  conjunctions.  A  verb  is  put  in  the  Sub- 
junctive after  the  following  conjunctions  :  — 

Avant  que,  before.  non  que,         7       .  .-,    ^ 

^    '  ^    '  ^  not  that. 


.,1 


a  moins  que  {ne),  unless.  non  pas  que, 

ajin  que,  in  order  that.  pour  que,  in  oi'der  that. 

bien  que,  although.  pour  peu  que, )  ..  ... 

,     ^  ,     ° ,  ^.      ^     ^    '  yif  ever  so  httle. 

ae  peur  que  (ne),  lest,  si  peu  que,       ) 

de  crainte  que  {ne),  for  fear  that.  pourvu  que,  provided. 

de  maniere  {sorte)  que,  so  that.  que  —  ne,  till,  before. 

en  attendant  que,  till.  quel  —  que,       ">  however.      (Seep. 

en  {au)  cas  que,  in  case.  quelque  —  que,  )  282.) 

encore  que,  although.  quoique,  although. 

jusqu'a  ce  que,  until.  sans  que,  without. 

loin  que,  far  from,  sinon  que,  but  that. 

malgre  que,  for  all   that,   notwith-  si  tant  est  que,  if  so  be  that. 

standing  that.  soit  que  —  soit  que,  )  whether  —  or. 

nonobstant  que,  notwithstanding.  soit  que  —  ou  que,    )  be  it  that  —  or. 

suppose  que,  suppose  that. 

EXAMPLES. 

Rentrons  avant  qu'il  fasse  nuit. 

Let  us  go  home  before  it  gets  dark. 

AJin  que  {pour  que)  vous  le  sachiez. 

That  you  may  know  it. 

Je  ne  sortirai  d'ici  que  je  ne  sois  pay€. 

I  shall  not  go  away  from  here  before  I  am  paid. 


334  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME  LEgON. 

Qnoiqu'il  me  rait  promts. 

Although  he  has  promised  me. 

Pourvu  qu'il  y  consente. 

Provided  he  consent  to  it. 

Quelque  effort  que  fassent  les  hommes,  leur  neant  paratt  partout. 

Whatever  effort  men  may  make,  their  nothingness  appears  everywhere. 

A  moins  que  vous  ne  me  demandiez  pardon. 

Unless  you  ask  me  for  pardon. 

All   (§n)   cos  qu'il   mourut. 

In  case  he  should  die. 

Note.  The  Indicative  can  sometimes  be  used  after  avant  que,  jusqu'a  ce 
que,  sinon  que,  de  sorte  que,  hi  ce  n'est  que,  tdlement  que,  and  de  maniere  que, 
when  all  doubt  and  uncertainty  are  excluded,  and  the  clause  expresses  a 
fact.     Ex. :  — 

Je  gardai  mon  sang  froid,  jusqu  a  ce  que  je  Ventendis  calomnier  mon  frere. 

II  s'est  occupy  de  cette  affaire  de  maniere  [de  sorte)  qu'on  n'a  pu  le  hldmer. 

12.  In  the  same  manner  the  Subjunctive  is  employed  after  the 
simple  que,  when  used  instead  of  one  of  the  conjunctions,  mentioned 
in  §11.     Ex.:  — 

Je  ne  puis  vous  pardonner  avant  que  vous  me  fassiez  I'aveu  de  vos  fautes  et 
que  vous  me  promettiez  de  vous  corriger. 

I  cannot  pardon  you  before  you  confess  your  faults  and  promise  me  to 
improve. 

Venez  que  (instead  of  ajin  que)  je  vous  en  disc  la  raison. 

Come,  that  I  may  tell  you  the  reason  of  it. 

Son  esprit  est  toujours  actif,  quoiqu'il  soit  malade  et  qu'il  ne  puisse  travailler. 

His  mind  is  always  active,  although  he  is  sick  and  cannot  work. 

13.  The  conjunction  que,  used  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  si,  gov- 
erns the  Subjunctive.     Ex. :  — 

Si  je  ne  suis  pas  rentr€  a  quatre  heures  et  qu'on  vienne  me  demander,  etc. 
If  I  am  not  at  home  at  four  o'clock,  and  somebody  comes  for  me,  etc. 

14.  The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  after  attendre  ;  till  is  translated 
by  que,  and  not  by  jusqu^h  ce  que,  as  :  — 

Attendez  qu'il  revienne,  wait  till  he  comes  back. 

15.  Aside  from  the  instances  above-mentioned,  the  Subjunctive 
also  occurs  in  a  few  expressions  which  appear  either  the  expression 
of  a  wish  or  as  a  kind  of  third  person  Imperative.     Notice  espe- 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  335 

cially :   Dusse-Je  /   should  I  !     Puissiez-vous !    would   that  you ! 
Puissent-ih  1  may  they  .  .  .  .  !     Further :  — 

DievL  veuille  or  plut  a  Dieu,  would  to  Heaven. 

Vive  le  roi,  long  live  the  king ! 

Puissiez-vous  etre  heureux,  may  you  be  happy  ! 

Qu'on  amene  I'accus^,  let  the  culprit  be  brought  here ! 

Qu'ils  viennent,  let  them  come  ! 

Que  Dieu  vous  b^nisse,  God  bless  you ! 

Que  la  terre  hi  soil  le'gere,  may  the  earth  lie  lightly  upon  him ! 

A  Dieu  ne  plaise  que,  may  heaven  not  permit,  etc. 

THEME  50. 

1.  Before  war  was  declared,  the  Carthaginians  sent  once  more 
ambassadors  to  Rome.  2.  I  cannot  depend  on  your  promise,  unless 
you  give  me  the  necessary  security.^  3.  Caesar  went  by  forced^ 
marches  to  Vienne,  on  the  Rhone,  before  the  enemy  {plur.)  became 
aware^  of  his  approach.  4.  Get  up  early  to-morrow  morning,  that 
we  may  start*  in  good  time  («  temps).  5.  I  shall  not  yet  pass  to 
the  perusaP  of  this  author,  unless  you  advise^  me  [to]  it.  6.  Keep 
a  strict  watch^  over  all  your  senses,  lest  intemperance  get^  the  better 
of  you.  7.  Though  he  is  lazy,  yet  he  improves  a  little  {fait  quel- 
ques  progres).  8.  I  shall  wait  until  (§  14)  yoa  have  done.  9. 
Wait  till  the  rain  be  over  (passee).  10.  Although  Homer ,^  ac- 
cording to^*'  Horace,  slumbers^^  at  tunes,^^  he  is  nevertheless  (^7  n'en 
est  pas  moins)  the  first  of  all  poets.  11.  You  will  succeed,^^  pro- 
vided you  act  with  vigor.  12.  I  shall  soon  speak  French,  though  I 
am  convinced  that  it  is  a  difficult  language.  13.  I  shall  not  leave 
the  house  before  (que  —  ne)  you  sign"  this  paper.  14.  May  God 
protect^^  you.     15.  May  Heaven  preserve  us  from  war. 

1.  Garantie,  f.  2.  A  marches  forcees.  3.  S'apercevoir  de.  4.  Partir.  5.  Lec- 
ture, f.  6.  Conseiller.  7.  Veillez  avec  soin.  8.  To  get  the  better  of,  maitriser 
qn.  9.  Homere.  10.  Selon.  11.  Sommeiller.  12.  Quelque/ois.  13.  lieussir.  14, 
Signer,    15.  Proteger.  t 

THEME   51. 

1.  A  thoughtless^  man  knows  nothing,  though  he  have  read  a 
great  many  books ;  in  the  same  maimer  a  great  many  persons^  re- 


336  XIX.      DIX-NEUVIEME   LEgON. 

main  ignorant,  thougli  they  have  travelled  through  the  most  civilized 
countries.  2.  She  will  forgive  you,  provided  you  make  her  an 
apology.^  3.  If  somebody  comes,  and  I  am  not  at  home,  send  for 
me.  4,  I  shall  be  obliged*  to  do  it.  5.  We  should  be  obliged  to  do 
it.  6.  I  feared  you  would  have  complained  of  me.  7.  Our  cousin 
set  out  without  our  knowing  (w.  that  we  knew)  [of]  his  intentions. 
8.  I  do  not  beheve  he  has  studied  history.  9.  Do  you  think  they 
would  refuse  me,  if  I  requested  it  of  them  (s^  je  les  en  priais)  ? 
10.  May  all  nations  be  convinced^  of  this  truth !  11.  I  do  not 
think  he  is  so  old.  12.  Get  in^  without  his  seeing  you  (w.  that  he 
s.  y.).  13.  Go  gently/  lest  he  should  hear  you.  14.  Make 
haste,^  lest  they  should  set  off  without  you.  15.  I  do  not  deny  that 
it  may  be  so.  16.  We  do  not  fear  that  it  will  give  you  pain.^  17. 
Do  not  let^°  that  child  ride  this  horse ;  I  am  afraid  he  will  throw^^ 
him  off.  18.  We  ought  to  practise  what  the  gospeP^  teaches  us. 
19.  Shall*  I  read  the  letter  aloud?  20.  Yes,  if  you  please.  21. 
I  doubt  whether  the  young  man  would  have  succeeded,  had  it  not 
been  for^^  your  assistance. 

1.  Insouciant,  2.  Gens.  3.  Vos  excuses.  4.  Falloir.  5.  To  be  convinced,  se 
convaincre.  G.  Entrez.  7.  Doncement.  8.  Depechez-vous.  9.  Faire  cle  la  peine. 
10.  Per mettre     11.  Jeter  a  has.    12.  L'evangile,m.    13.  5aws,  see  p.  300. 


READING  LESSON. 
ALEXANDRE   SELKIRK. 
(Suite.) 

"  Abandonne  sur  cette  ile  deserte  avec  mes  habits,  un  lit,  un 
fusil,^  une  livre  de  poudre,  des  balles,  du  tabac,  une  hache,  un  cou- 
teau,  un  chaudron,^  une  bible  et  quelques  autres  livres ;  je  m'amusai 
et  poui-vus^  a  mes  besoins*  le  mieux  qu'il  me  fut  possible.  Mais 
durant  les  premiers  huit  mois  j'eus  beaucoup  de  peine  h  vaincre  la 
meiancolie  et  a  surmouter  I'horreur  que  me  causait  une  si  affi'euse 
solitude. 

*'  Je  fis  deux  cabanes^  a  quelque  distance  I'une  de  I'autre,  avec 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  337 

du  bois  de  piment  -^  je  les  couvris  d'une  espece  de  jonc^  et  les  doub- 
lai^de  peaux  de  chevres  que  je  tuais  a  mcsure  que  j'en  avais  besoin, 
tant  que  ma  poudre  dura.  Lorsqu'elle  approchait  de  sa  fin,  je  trou- 
vai  le  secret  de  tirer  du  feu  avec  deux  morceaux  de  bois  que  je 
frottais^  Fun  centre  I'autre.  Je  faisais  la  cuisine^'^  dans  la  plus  pe- 
tite de  mes  huttes,  et  dans  la  grande  je  dormais,  cbantais  des  psaumes 
et  priais  Dieu.  Le  malheur  m'avait  fait  connaitre  le  prix  de  la 
religion. 

"  Accable  de  tristesse,  manquant  de  pain  et  de  sel,  je  ne  man- 
geais  qu'a  I'extr^mit^,  lorsque  la  faim  me  pressait,  et  je  n'allais  me 
coucLer  que  lorsque  je  ne  pouvais  plus  soutenir  la  veille.^^  Le  bois 
de  piment  me  servait  k  cuire  la  viande,  et  k  m'eclairer,  et  son 
odeur^  aromatique  r^creait^^  mes  esprits  abattus. 

**  Je  ne  manquais  pas  de  poissons,  mais  je  n'osais  en  manger  sans 
sel,  parce  qu'ils  m'incommodaient,  k  la  reserve  ^*  des  ecrevisses  de 
riviere,  qui  sont  ici  d'un  gout  exquis,  et  aussi  grosses  que  celles  de 
mer.  Tantot  je  les  mangeais  bouillies,  et  tantot  grillees,^^  de  meme 
que  la  chair  des  chevres,  qui  n'a  pas  le  gout  si  fort  que  celle  des 
notres,  et  qui  donne  un  excellent  bouillon.^^  J'en  avais  tue  jusqu'^ 
cinq  cents.  Quand  ma  poudre  fut  finie,  je  les  prenais  k  la  course. 
Par  un  exercice  continuel  je  m'^tais  rendu  si  agile  que  je  courais  a 
travers  les  bois,  sur  les  rochers  et  les  collines  avec  une  vitesse  in- 
croyable.  Peu  s'en  fallut  un  jour  que  mon  agilit^  ne  me  coutat  la 
vie.  Je  poursuivais  une  chevre  avec  tant  d'ardeur  que  je  la  pris 
sur  le  bord  d'un  precipice  que  des  buissons^^  me  cachaient,  et  je 
culbutai^^  de  haut  en  bas  avec  elle.  Cette  chute  ^^  terrible  me  fit 
perdre  toute  connaissance.  Enfin  revenu  a  moi-meme,  je  trouvai  la 
chevre  morte  sous  moi,  et  j'eus  assez  de  peine  k  me  trainer^  a  ma 
cabane,  qui  en  etait  a  un  mille,^^  et  a  en  sortir  au  bout  de  dix 
jours."  {To  he  continued.^ 

1.  Gun.  2.  Kettle.  3.  From  ^owrvoir,  to  provide.  4.  Need,  want.  5.  Hut.  6. 
Pimenta.  7.  Rush.  8.  To  line.  9.  To  rub.  10.  To  cook.  11.  Watch,  watching. 
12.  Smell.  13.  To  revive.  14.  Exception.  15.  Broiled.  16.  Broth,  17.  Bushes. 
18.  To  tumble.    19.  Fall.    20.  To  drag.    21.  A  mile. 


338  XX.      VINGTIEME   LEgON. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Quels  efFets  (things)  lui  avait-oa  laisses  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  de  nourriture  spirituelle  ? 

Quel  fut  le  premier  soin  de  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  couvrit-il  les  cabanes  ? 

D'oii  tira-t-il  ces  peaux? 

Est-ce  qu'il  priait  aussi  Dieu  ? 

Avaitrii  de  quoi  faire  du  pain  ? 

Que  mangeaitril  done  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  de  poissou  ? 

N'y  avaitrii  pas  d'ecrevisses  ? 

Comment  les  mangeait-il  ? 

Eut-il  toujours  assez  de  poudre  ? 

Comment  prenait-il  alors  les  chevres  ? 

Etait-il  done  si  agile  ? 

N'eut-il  pas  d'accident  ^heux  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  remarque  le  precipice  ? 

Se  blessa-t-il  par  suite  de  cette  chute  ? 

Quand  il  revint  a  lui,  dans  quel  etat  se  trouvait-il 


XX.    YINGTIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 

1.  Tlie  Infinitive  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  noun.  It  is 
used  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  where  in  English  the  Part.  Pres. 
is  often  found.     Ex. :  — 

Secourir  les  pauvres  est  une  action  louable. 
To  relieve  the  poor  is  a  praiseworthy  action. 
M€dire  est  une  infamie. 
Calumaiatinff  is  shameful. 


THE   INFINITIVE.  339 

Note  1 .  In  some  instances  it  becomes  properly  a  noun  and  takes  the 
article  with  it,  as  :  le  manger,  le  hoire,  les  vivres  (victuals).  If  such  an  In- 
finitive is  amplified  by  means  of  other  words,  it  is  better  to  write  c'est  or 
e'^tait  instead  of  est  or  e'tait,  and  sometimes  also  voila.    Ex.:  — 

N' aimer  que  soi,  c'est  miner  peu  de  chose. 

To  love  no  one  but  one's  self  is  to  love  very  little, 

Note  2.  When  this  amplification  is  somewhat  long,  the  Infinitive  can- 
not remain  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  but  must  be  placed  after  the 
the  predicate,  and  takes  de  before  it.  In  order,  however,  not  to  confuse  the 
sense  and  the  construction  of  the  sentence,  ce  or  il  is  employed  as  a  merely 
introductory  subject ;  ce,  if  a  substantive  follows,  il,  if  an  adjective. 
Examples :  — 

C'est  un  honneur  d'etre  utile  a  sa  patrie. 

II  est  glorieux  de  mourir  pour  sa  patrie. 

Note  3.   If  this  antecedent  predicate  have  several  or  long  amplifications 

the  subject-infinitive  is  commonly  introduced  by  an  expletive  que.    Ex.:  — 

C'etaitune  grand  nouveaut€  pour  le  roi  que  d' entendre  parler  si  naturelle' 


2.  Where  two  imperatives  are  connected  in  English  by  and, 
if  the  first  is  a  verb  of  motion  the  second  must  be  translated  in 
French  by  the  Infinitive,  and  the  conjunction  omitted.     Ex.:  — 

Go  and  see  my  brother,  allez  voir  mon  frere. 
Go  and  do  it,  Allez  le  faire. 

3.  A  verb  immediately  preceded  by  and  depending  on  another 
verb  (auxiliaries  excepted),  or  following  a  preposition,  other  than 
en,  must  be  put  in  the  Infinitive  :  — 

Je  vous  le  ferai  savoir,  sans  etre  press€. 

4.  Comment,  how;  que,  what;  ou,  where ; pour qiioi,  why,  and 
a  few  other  words  similarly  used  in  interrogations,  are  often  followed 
by  the  Infinitive  instead  of  the  Indicative,  when  the  sense  will  not 
thereby  be  rendered  obscure.  Thus  "Pourquoi  aller?  "  may  mean 
*'  Why  do  you  go  ?  "  *'  Que  faire?  "  "  What  is  to  be  done  ?  " 
"  Que  dire ?' '   "  What  shall  I  say V " 

5.  The  Infinitive  without  a  preposition  is  used  in  French  after 


340  XX.      VINGTIEMB  LEgON. 

• 
verbs  of  motion,  as :  aller,  envoyer,  etc. ;  after  verbs  that  denote  a 
perception  of  the  senses,  as:  entendre,  sentir,  voir,  etc.,  and  after 
the  following  verbs :  — 

Affirmer,  to  aflfirm.  jurer,  to  swear. 

assurer,  to  assure.  laisser,  to  let,  to  permit. 

avouer,  to  confess.  nier,  to  deny. 

compter,  to  reckon,  intend.  oser,  to  dare. 

croire,  to  believe.  paraitre,  to  appear. 

daigner,  to  deign.  penser,  to  think. 

declarer,  to  declare.  pretendre,  to  pretend. 

desirer,*  to  wish.  pouvoir,  to  he  able. 

devoir,  to  be  obliged.  reconnaitre,  to  acknowledge. 

dire,  to  say.  savoir,  to  know. 

espe'rer,*  to  hope.  sembler,  to  appear,  to  seem. 

faillir,  to  miss.  souhaiter,*  to  wish. 

^tVe,  to  do.  soutenir,  to  maintain. 

falloir  (il  faut),  it  must.  te'moigner,  to  testify. 

s'imaginer,*  to  imagine.  vouloir,  to  be  willing. 

Examples :  — 
Venez  nous  voir  demain. 
Come  and  see  us  to-morrow. 
Je  cours  lui  apprendre  cette  nouvdle. 
I  hasten  to  tell  him  this  news. 
H  faut  envoyer  chercher  le  m€decin. 
We  must  send  for  the  doctor. 
Vous  osez,  —  daignez,  — d€sirez,  -etc.  lui  purler  ! 
You  dare,  —  deign,  — wish,  etc.'to  speak  to  him ! 
Je  croyais  — ,  je  d^sirais,  etc.  lui  rendre  un  service. 
I  thought — ,  I  wished — ,  etc.  to  render  him  a  service. 
Je  compte  — ,  j'espere,  etc.  aller  a  Paris. 
I  intend — ,  I  hope,  etc.  to  go  to  Paris. 
Je  ne  sais  pas  nager. 
I  cannot  swim. 
Croyez-vous  avoir  raison  ? 
Do  you  believe  you  are  in  the  right  ? 
Je  I'entends  venir. 
I  hear  him  coming. 


«  THE  INFINITIVE.  341 

Note  1.   After  the  above  four  verbs  marked,*  de  is  sometimes  used, 
especially  when  they  themselves  stand  in  the  Infinitive.    Ex. :  — 
Peut-on  esp&er  de  vous  voir  demain  ? 
Personne  ne  doit  s'imaginer  de  tout  savoir. 

Note  2.  The  verb  faire  is  used  for  to  do,  to  make  and  to  get.,  to  cause  ;  in 
all  these  cases  it  is  immediately  followed,  in  French,  by  the  Infinitive  active 
without  a  preposition :  — 

Je  ferai  hdtir  une  maison. 

I  will  cause  a  house  to  be  built. 

Voulez-vous  faire  laver  vos  gants  ? 

Will  you  have  your  gloves  washed  ? 

Je  lui  ferai  faire  un  theme. 

I  will  make  him  write  an  exercise. 

6.  The  simple  Infinitive^  is  governed  further  by  the  verbs: 
aimer,*  when  used  in  the  Conditional,  I  should  like ;  preferer,  to 
prefer  ;  Uimer  autant,  to  like  as  much ;  il  vaut  mieux,  it  is  better. 
Examples :  — 

tPaimerais  le  voir,  I  should  like  to  see  him. 

//  vavt  mieux  c€der,  it  is  better  to  yield. 

Je  jyrifere  rester  a  la  maison,  I  prefer  staying  at  home. 

Note.   When,  however,  in  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  a  second 
Infinitive  follows  que,  this  latter  takes  de  before  it.    Ex.:  — 
Jaime  mieux  m,ourir  que  de  trahir  mon  secret. 
I  will  rather  die  than  betray  my  secret. 

7.  The  Infinitive  is  used  after  every  preposition  except  en. 
Examples :  — 

Au  lieu  de  jouer,  instead  of  playing. 

Sans  alter,  without  going. 

Pour  voir,  for  the  purpose  of  seeing. 

THEME  52. 

1.  To  speak  too  much  is  dangerous.  2.  To  clothe^  the  poor  is  a 
good  work.^  3.  To  lie  is  to  disregard^  God  and  to  fear  men.  4. 
To  purchase  peace  of  an  enemy  is  to  give  him  the  means  of  carry- 

*  In  regard  to  aimer  with  d  consult  $  15  of  this  lesson. 


342  XX.      VINGTIEME  LE^ON.      ^ 

ing  on^  war.  5.  Can  you  inform  me  whether  the  courier  has 
arrived?  6.  He  has  not  yet  arrived.  7.  One  must  know  [how]  to 
keep^  a  secret.  8.  This  man  thinks  he  knows  {Jnf.')  everything. 
9.  We  hope  to  see  the  queen.  10.  When  do  you  intend  to  re- 
turn? 11.  I  do  not  know  precisely  f  but  I  hope  to  see  you  again 
soon.  12.  The  king  caused  the  brave  soldiers  to  be  rewarded.  13. 
It  is  much  better  to  keep  silent '^  than  to  say  such  things.  14.  The 
most  unfortunate  of  men  is  he  who  thinks  himself  to  be  such  (/'). 
15.  He  assured  us  that  he  had  been  there.  16.  To  yield*  to  ne- 
cessity is  not  to  be  [a]  coward.^  17.  Eating,  drinking,  and  sleeping 
were  his  only  occupations.  18.  I  hastened  to  communicate ^°  to  him 
this  intelligence.^^  19.  He  came  to  tell  me  that  he  had  won  noth- 
ing in  the  lottery.  20.  Who  would  not  rather  (like  to)  be  poor 
than  possess  unjustly  acquired  wealth  ?^^  21.  Bayard  said  to  the 
Constable  de  Bourbon  :  "  It  is  better  to  perish  fighting  {en  comhat- 
tant)  for  one's  (so)  country/^  than  to  conquer  and  (to)  triumph " 
over  it  (d'elle) . 

1.  Vetir.  2.  (Euvre,  f.  3.  M^priser.  4.  Continuer.  5.  Taire.  6.  Au  juste.  7. 
Se  taire.  8.  Ceder  a.  9.  Ldche.  10.  Communiquer.  11.  Nouvelle,  f.  12.  Des 
ricJiesses  mal  acqinses.    13.  Pairie.    14.  Triompher. , 


THE  INFINITIVE  PRECEDED  BY  DE. 

8.  After  a  substantive  which  the  verb  limits,  the  English  prepo- 
sition of  with  a  Pres.  Participle  (of  going,  of  seeing,  etc.)  is  gen- 
erally expressed  by  de  with  the  Infinitive.     Ex. :  — 

Le  de'sir  de  vous  voir,  the  desire  of  seeing  you. 

Sa  maniere  de  penser  et  d'agir  (of  thinking  and  acting). 

II  est  temps  de  partir,  it  is  time  to  set  out. 

J'ai  rhonneur  de  vous  saluer.  m 

9.  The  preposition  de  is  placed  before  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive, 
after  the  adjectives :  avide,  content,  mecontent,  las,  drgne, 
capable,  incapable,  etc.,  and  in  general  after  an  adjective,  whenever, 
by  inverting  the  sentence,  the  clause  containing  the  Infinitive  might 


THE   INFINITIVE.  343 

be  made  the  leading  term  of  an  assertion  expressed  as  subject  to 
some  tense  of  ^o  ^e.     Ex.:  — 

Je  suis  curieux  de  savoir. 

I  am  anxious  to  know. 
Etes-vous  las  de  travailler  ? 
Are  you  tired  with  working  ? 

Cet  homme  est  capable  de  vous  tromper. 
That  man  is  capable  of  deceiving  you. 
Vous  etes  tres-adroit  d'avoir  si  bien  re'ussi. 
You  are  very  clever  to  have  succeeded  so  well. 

10.  De  is  used  before  the  Infinitive  after  impersonal  verba, 
such  as  :  ^7  convient,  it  is  proper  ;  il  importe,  it  concerns  ;  '//  s'agity 
it  is  the  question ;  il  suffit,  it  is  enough  ;  il  me  tarde,  I  long,  and 
after  il  est,  il  etait  or  it  semhle  followed  by  an  adjective,  as  :  il  est 
facile,  il  etait  necessaire,  etc.     Ex. :  — 

//  m' importe  beaucoup  de  lui  dire  cela. 
It  concerns  me  much  to  tell  him  this. 

II  est  beau  de  pardonner  a  son  ennemi. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  pardon  one's  enemy. 

II  suffira  de  lui  parler. 

It  will  be  enough  to  speak  to  him. 

11.  De  is  used  after  que,  than,  in  a  comparison  of  predicates. 
See  Note,  §  6,  of  this  lesson. 

THEME  53. 

1.  You  have  no  cause^  to  be  angry  with  (contre^  me.  2.  Were 
you  at  the  concert  yesterday  ?  3.  I  did  not  have  the  pleasure  of 
seeing  you.  4.  The  way^  to  be  happy  is  to  be  virtuous.  5.  Have 
you  the  intention  of  selhng  your  horse  ?  6.  Not  at  all ;  I  intend 
to  keep  it.  7.  I  fear  losiag  (to  lose)  your  confidence.^  8.  It  is 
too  late ;  it  is  tune  to  go  to  bed.  9.  The  art  of  dancing  was  known 
to  the  ancients.     10.  It  is  disgraceful*  to  obey  (a)  one's  passions. 

11.  The  desire  of  appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  becoming  so.* 

12.  We  rejoice  greatly  to  see  you.     13.  It  is  agi-eeable  to  hear  the 
twitter^  of  the  birds.     14.  It  is  useless  to  warn^  him.     15.  It  is  a 


344 


XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 


beautiful  thing  to  forgive  one's  enemies.  16.  It  is  pleasant  to  live 
with  one's  friends.  17.  It  is  the  fate*^  of  all  human  things  to  be  of 
short  duration.®  18.  The  great  secret  of  being  happy  is  to  work 
and  to  be  virtuous.  19.  I  don't  approve  [of]  your  project  of  going 
to  Europe.  20.  Gentleness^^  is  the  surest  means  of  escaping  every 
offence.     21.  It  is  sad  to  have  no  friends  and  to  be  forsaken. ^^ 

1.  Avoir  sujet.  2.  Le  moyen.  3.  Conflance,  f.  4.  Honteux.  5.  De  le  devenir. 
6.  Le  gazouillement.  7.  Avertir.  8.  Le  sort.  9.  De  n'avoir  qvJ'une  courte  duree. 
10.  La  douceur.    11.  Abandonne. 

12.    De  is  further  used  before  the  Infinitive,  when  the  latter  is 
immediately  preceded  by  any  of  the  following  verbs :  — 


Abstenir  (s'),  to  abstain. 

accuser,  to  accuse. 

ackever,  to  finish. 

affecter,  to  affect. 

agir  (s')  (unip.),  to  be  the  question. 

ambitionner,  to  aspire  to. 

appartenir,  to  pertain,  to  become. 

applaudir  (s'),  to  rejoice,  exult. 

appr^hender,  to  apprehend. 

avertir,  to  warn. 

aviser  (s'),  to  determine. 

bldmer,  to  blame. 

bruler,  to  wish  ardently. 

censurer,  to  censure. 

cesser,  to  cease. 

chagiiner  (se),  to  grieve. 

charger,  to  commission. 

choisir,  to  choose. 

commander,  to  command. 

conjurer,  to  entreat. 

conseiller,  to  advise. 

convenir,  to  become,  to  suit. 

convaincre,  to  convince. 

corriger,  to  correct. 

craindre,  to  fear. 

decourager,  to  discourage. 

d^daigner,  to  disdain,  scorn. 

defendre,  to  forbid. 


to  leave  off. 


d€fendre  (se),  to  decline. 
defier,  to  challenge. 
d€pecher  {so,),  to  hasten. 
de'saccoutumer  (se), 
deshabituer  (se), 
de'sesperer,  to  despair. 
desirer,  to  desire.     De  is  often  omit- 
ted after  this  verb. 
d€soler  (se),  to  be  grieved. 
detester,  to  detest.    De  may  be  omit  • 
-  ted. 

d€tourner,  to  dissuade. 
devoir  (se),  to  owe  it  to  one's  self. 
diff€rer,  to  put  off. 
dire,  to  tell. 

disconvenir,  to  disown,  deny. 
discontinuer,  to  discontinue. 
disculper,  to  exculpate. 
dispenser,  to  excuse  from. 
dispenser  (se),  to  forbear. 
dissuader,  to  dissuade. 
douter^  to  doubt. 
e'crire,  to  write. 
efforcer  (s'),  to  endeavor. 
effrayer  (s'),  to  be  frightened. 
empecher,  to  hinder. 
empresser  (s'),  to  hasten. 
enrager,  to  be  enraged. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 


345 


entreprendre,  to  undertake. 

€pouvanter  {&'),  to  be  frightened. 

essayer,  to  try. 

dtonner  (s'),  to  wonder. 

€viter,  to  avoid. 

excuser  (s'),  to  excuse  one's  self. 

feindre,  to  feign. 

feliciter,  to  congratulate. 

Jinir,  to  finish. 

flatter  (se),  to  flatter  one's  self. 

freinir,  to  shudder. 

garder  (se),  to  take  care. 

gemir,  to  moan,  lament. 

glorijier  (se),  to  pride  one's  self. 

hasarder,  to  hazard,  to  risk ;  se  hasar- 

der  requires  a. 
hater  (se),  to  hasten. 
imputer,  to  impute. 
indigner  (s'),  to  be  indignant. 
ing&er  (s'),  to  intermeddle. 
inspirer,  to  inspire. 
jurer,  to  swear. 

manquer,  to  fail.  * 

m€diter,  to  contemplate. 
meler  (se),  to  concern  one's  self. 
menacer,  to  threaten. 
m&iter,  to  deserve. 
moquer  (se),  to  laugh  at. 
mourir  (fig.),  to  long. 
n€gliger,  to  neglect, 
wzer,  to  deny. 
o^V,  to  offer. 
(nnettre,  to  omit. 
ordonner,  to  order. 
■cublier,  to  forget. 
pardonner,  to  forgive. 
parler,  to  speak, 
/jasser  (se),  to  do  without. 
permettre,  to  permit. 
persuader,  to  persuade. 
piquer  (se),  to  take  pride  in. 
plaindre,  to  pity. 


plaindre  (se),  to  complain. 

prescrire,  to  prescribe. 

presser,  to  urge. 

presser  (se),  to  hasten. 

pr^sumer,  to  presume. 

joner,  to  pray,  entreat. 

promettre,  to  promise. 

proposer,  to  propose. 

proposer  (se),  to  purpose. 

protester,  to  protest. 

punir,  to  punish. 

rassasier  (se)^  to  be  sated. 

rebuter,  to  discourage. 

rebuter  (se),  to  be  weary. 

recommander,  to  recommend. 

refuser,  to  refuse. 

regretter,  to  regret. 

r^jouir  (se),  to  rejoice. 

remercier,  to  thank. 

repentir  (se),  to  repent. 

reprendre,  to  censure. 

r^primander,  to  reprimand. 

reprocher,  to  reproach. 

reprocher  (se),  to  reproach  one's  self. 

r€soudre,  to  resolve.    When  active, 

followed  by  c?e ;  passive,  by  a. 
ressouvenir  (se),  to  remember. 
nVe,  to  laugh. 
risquer,  to  venture. 
seoiV,  to  be  becoming. 
rougir,  to  blush. 
scandaliser  (se),  to  take  oflfence. 
sommer,  to  summon. 
souffrir,  to  suffer. 
souhaiter,  to  wish.    Z)e  may  be  sup- 


soupgonner,  to  suspect. 
souvenir  (se),  to  remember. 
suffire  (unip.),  to  suflSce. 
sugg&er,  to  suggest. 
supplier,  to  beseech. 
tdcJier,  to  endeavor. 


846  XX.  VINGTIEME    LEgON. 

tarder,  (unip.),  to  long.  se  troiiver  Men,  to  derive  benefit. 

tenter,  to  attempt.  se  trouver  mat,  to  fare  ill. 

trembler,  to  tremble.  vanter  (se),  to  boast. 


EXAMPLES. 

U  cesse  de  pleuvoir,  it  ceases  raining. 
Je  vous  conseille  de  pai-tir,  I  advise  you  to  set  out. 
Je  crains  de  vous  deranger,  I  fear  to  disturb  you. 
II  est  d€fendu  de  fumer  ici,  smoking  is  forbidden  here. 
Dites-lui  de  venir,  tell  him  to  come. 
Vous  m^ritez  d'etre  puni,  you  deserve  to  be  punished. 
//  risque  de  tout  perdre,  he  risks  losing  everything. 

La  forteresse  fut  somm€e  de  se  rendre,  the  fortress  was  summoned  to  sur- 
render. 

13.  After  the  following  prepositions  and  conjunctions :  — pres^ 
hors,  avant,  au  lieu,  loin,  afin,  a  moins,  de  crainte,  or  dt  peur, 
a  force  (by)  faute  (for  want  of) ,  plutot  que  (rather  than) .    Ex. :  — 

Avant  de  partir,  before  departing. 

Au  lieu  de  pleurer,  instead  of  crying. 

Loin  de  se  corriger,  far  from  amending  himself. 

A  force  de  prier,  by  much  entreaty. 

Dieu  nous  afflige  afin  de  nous  corriger,  God  sends  us  afflictions  (in  order) 
to  amend  us. 

Je  sors,  de  crainte  (or  depeur)  de  vous  ddranger,  I  go  for  fear  of  disturbing 
you. 

THEME  54. 

1.  I  advise  you  to  stay  here  and  (to)  begin  your  studies.  2.  I 
beg  you  to  come  at  six  o'clock.  3.  The  first  step^  towai-ds  good 
(vers  le  Men)  is  to  avoid  evil.  4.  It  is  (c'es^)  the  duty  of  a  Chris- 
tian^ to  please  God,  to  hurt  nobody,  and  to  do  good,  even  to  his 
enemies.  5.  He  is  not  able  to  go  so  far.  6.  You  are  very  amiable 
in  having  come  to  pay^  us  a  visit.  7.  It  is  dangerous  to  trust^  every- 
body. 8.  The  law  of  nature  forbids  us  to  do  injustice  {tort)  to 
others.  9.  A  simple  and  temperate  diet^  lays  the  foundation^  of 
firm  health,  [which  is]  capable  of  enduring^  the  greatest  hardships.^ 
10.  I  cannot  help^  recognizing  in  the  laws  of  nature  a  wonderful 


THE  INFINITIVE.  347 

art ;  and  I  hesitate  not  to  say,  in  the  language  of  Scripture ,^^  that 
every  star  hasteneth^^  to  go  whither  the  Lord  sendeth  it. 

1.  Le  pas.  2.  Chretien.  3.  Faire.  4.  Se  fier  a.  5.  Nourriture.  6.  Prepare. 
7.  Supporter.  8.  Les  fatigues.  9.  M'empecher.  10.  VEcriture  Sainte.  11.  Se 
depecher. 

THEME  55. 

1.  I  was  astonished,  after  such  news,  to  see  the  man  so  quiet. 

2.  Before  one  writes  {Inf.),  one  must  know  what  one  wishes  to  say. 

3.  Instead  of  working,  he  went  to  walk  that  day.  4.  I  longed^  to 
see  my  native  country^  again ;  accordingly^  I  determined  to  embark^ 
for  Europe.  5.  By  much  entreaty,  I  induced^  my  friend  to  accom- 
pany me.  6.  For  fear  of  offending  him,  I  preferred  to  remain^ 
silent.  7.  The  enemy  retired/  in  order^  to  make  beheve  that  he 
had  given  over^  the  siege.  8. -When  one  advised  Philip  to  expel^'' 
from  his  dominions^^  a  man  who  had  spoken  ill  of  him ;  "  I  will  take 
care^^  [not]  to  do  it,"  replied  Philip;  '*he  would  go  everywhere 
and  speak  ill  of  me." 

1.  II  me  tardait.  2.  Pays  natal.  3.  CPest  pourquoi.  4.  S'embarquer  pour.  5. 
Engager  a.  6.  3fe  taire.  7.  Reflective  vert>.  8.  AJin  de.  9.  Henoncer  a.  10. 
Chasser.    11.  Etat.    12.  -S'e  garder  Men. 

THE   INFINITIVE   WITH    «. 

We  place  the  preposition  a  before  the  Infinitive  of  a  verb :  — 

14.  When  the  English  Infinitive  is  passive,  or  can  be  changed  to 
the  passive  without  altering  the  sense.     Ex. :  — 

La  moisson  a  esp&er,  the  harvest  to  be  hoped  for. 
Cette  maison  est  a  vendre,  this  house  is  to  be  sold. 
Je  n'ai  pas  de  temps  a  perdre,  I  have  no  time  to  lose. 

15.  After  a  substantive,  when  the  following  verb  is  or  may  be 
expressed  by  in  with  the  Pros.  Part.     Ex. :  — 

J' aural  beaucoup  de  plaisir  a  vous  voir. 
I  shall  have  great  pleasure  in  seeing  you. 

16.  After  any  adjectives  which  take  a  verb  in  the  Infinitive  to 
complete  the  sense,  provided  the  verb  preceding  the  adjective  is  not 
used  impersonally.     Especially  after :  — 


348  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

Accessible,  accessible.  lent,  slow. 

ais^,  easy.  pret,  ready. 

attentif,  attentive.  prompt,  quick. 

bon,  good.  propre,  fit,  proper. 

dispose,  disposed,  inclined.  sensible,  sensible. 

difficile,  difficult,  hard.  sourd,  deaf. 

docile,  obedient.  utile,  useful. 

hahile,  skilful.  inutile,  useless. 

facile,  easy.  (See  also  L.  VIII,,  Gov.  of  Adj.) 

EXAMPLES. 

Cd.te  legon  est  facile  a  apprendre,  this  lesson  is  easy  to  learn. 

Ce  fruit  n'est  pas  bon  a  manger,  this  fruit  is  not  good  to  cat. 

Ce  theme  est-il  difficile  a  traduire  ?  is  this  exercise  hard  to  translate  ? 

Nous  sommes  disposes  a  croire  que,  etc.,  we  are  disposed  (inclined)  to  believe 
that,  etc. 

Soyez  prompts  a  faire  le  bien,  be  quick  to  do  good. 

Note.  Compare  the  following  sentences,  in  which  the  verb  preceding 
the  adjective  is  used  impersonally  (see  L.  XX.,  §  10).    Ex. :  — 

//  n'est  pas  facile  de  prononcer  ce  mot,  it  is  not  easy  to  pronounce  that 
word. 

II  est  difficile  de  vaincre  ses  passions,  it  is  difficult  to  conquer  one's  passions. 

II  semble  difficile  d' apprendre  cette  langue,  it  seems  difficult  to  learn  that 
language. 

The  other  way  would  be :  — 

Ce  mot  n'est  pas  facile  a  prononcer. 

Cette  langue  parait  difficile  a  apprendre,  etc. 

THEME  56. 

1.  This  wood  is  to  be  sold.  2.  These  rooms  are  to  let.  3.  We 
have  not  a  moment  to  lose.  4.  There  is  much  pleasure  in  taking  a 
a  walk.  5.  Is  this  house  to  sell  or  to  let  ?  6.  It  is  to  let.  7.  I 
perceived  in  him  a  kind^  of  repugnancy  to  learn  Greek.^  8.  You 
know  his  courage  in  facing^  dangers.  9.  This  girl  spends  all  her 
time  in  playing.  10.  -There  is  more  glory  in  dying  like  Nelson  than 
in  living  in  unmerited''  honor.  11.  Is  German  easy  to  learn?  12. 
It  is  not  so  easy  as  French.  13.  That  is  easy  to  say,  but  not  so 
easy  to  do.  14.  That  forest^  is  dangerous  to  pass.  15.  I  am 
ready  to  follow  you,  but  I  fear  that  you  are  not  fit  to  guide®  us. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 


349 


16.  Be  attentive  to  seize  the  opportunity/  17.  The  just  man  is 
slow  to  punish  but  quick  to  reward.  18.  Are  you  disposed  to  do 
what  I  tell  you?  19.  I  shall  be  quick  to  perform  what  you 
command  me. 

1.  Une  sorte  de  repugnance.     2.  Le  Grec.      3.  Affronter.      4.  Au  sein  des  hon- 
neurs  qu^on  n'a  pas  merites.     5.  Fortt,  f.    6.  Guider,  conduire.     7.  L^occasioth 


17.    The  following  verbs  also  govern  the  Infinitive  with  a  : 
Aba{sser{s'),  to  stoop. 
aboutir,  to  end  in. 
accorder{s'),  to  agree,  to  coincide. 
accoutumer,  to  accustom. 
achamer{s'),  to  strive  furiously. 


admettre,  to  admit,  to  permit. 
aguerrir{s'),  to  become  inured. 
aider,  to  help. 
aimer,  to  like  (v.  L.  XX.,  §  6). 


consentir,  to  consent. 

consister,  to  consist. 

conspirer,  to  conspire. 

consumer,  to  consume. 

contribuer,  to  contribute. 

convier,   to  invite.     Sometimes 
lowed  by  de. 

couter,  to  cost.     When  used  imper- 
sonally it  is  followed  by  de. 


fol- 


amuser{s*),  to  amuse  one's  self  with,    decider,  to  decide. 


animer,  to  animate,  to  incite. 
appliquer{s')y  to  apply  one's  self. 
apprendre,  to  learn,  to  teach. 
appreter{s'),  to  prepare. 
aspirer,  to  aspire. 
assigner,  to  assign,  to  summon. 


determiner,  to  determine. 
determiner [se) ,  to  resolve. 
disposer,  to  dispose. 
disposer  (se),  to  prepare  one's  self. 
divertir[se) ,  to  amuse  one's  self, 
donner,  to  give. 


assujettir{s'),  to  subject  one's  self  to.  employer,  to  employ. 


attacher{s*),  to  strive. 

attendre{s'),  to  rely  upon,  expect. 

atteyidre,  to  put  off,  delay. 

augment €r{s'),  to  increase. 

autoriser,  to  authorize. 

avder{s'),  to  debase  one's  self. 

avoir,  to  have. 

balancer,  to  hesitate. 

borner{se),  to  confine  one's  self  to. 

chercher,  to  seek. 

complaire{se) ,  to  delight  in. 

concourir,  to  concur. 

condamner,  to  condemn  :  also  the  rcf. 

condescendre,  to  condescend. 


encourager,  to  encourage. 

engager,  to  induce. 

enhardir,  to  embolden. 

enseigner,  to  teach. 

entendre{s'),  to  be  skilful,  to  be  a 

judge. 
entreprendre,  to  undertake. 
essat/er{s'),  to  attempt. 
donner{s'),  to  wonder. 
etre,  to  be. 

etHdier{s'),  to  make  it  one's  study. 
€vertaer{se) ,  to   strive  (may   be  fol- 

followed  by  pour), 
exceller,  to  excel. 


350 


XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 


exciter,  to  excite. 
exercer{s'),  to  practice. 
exhorter,  to  exhort. 
exposer{s')  to  expose  one's  self. 
hair,  to  hate. 

hahituer{s'),  to  become  used  to. 
hasarder[se),  to  venture. 
Msiter,  to  hesitate.  ,, 

induire,  to  induce. 
instruire,  to  instruct. 
interesser,  to  interest. 
inviter,  to  invite. 
jnettre,  to  set,  to  put. 
mettre{se),  to  begin. 
montrer,  to  show,  to  teach. 
obstiner{s'),  to  persist  in. 
offrir[s'),  to  offer  one's  services. 
opinidtrer{s' )  to  insist  upon. 
parvenu',  to  succeed  in. 
passer,  to  spend  (time,  etc.). 
pencher,  to  incline. 
penser,  to  think,  to  intend. 
pers€v€rer,  to  persevere. 
per  sister,  to  persist. 
plaire{se),  to  delight  in. 
plier{se),  to  bend,  bow,  comply. 
porter,  to  induce. 
pousser,  to  urge,  compel. 


prendre  plaiser,  to  take  pleasure. 

pr€parer{se),  to  prepare. 

pre'tendre,  to  lay  claim,  to  sue.  When 
signifying  io  mean,  <o  intend,  it 
governs  the  infinitive  without  a 
preposition. 

provoquer,  to  provoke. 

r€duire,  to  constrain. 

r€duire[se),  to  be  reduced. 

renoncer,  to  renounce. 

rdpugner,  to  be  repugnant. 

resigner{se) ,  to  be  resigned. 

re'soudre{se) ,  to  resolve. 

reste?-,  to  remain.     Also  used  imp. 

r€ussir,  to  succeed. 

risquer,  to  risk. 

servir,  to  serve. 

songer,  to  dream,  think,  purpose. 

suffire,  to  suffice.  May  be  followed 
by  pour.  When  used  imperson- 
ally, is  followed  by  (/e. 

tarder,  to  defer,  to  delay. 

tendre,  to  tend,  to  intend,  to  aim. 

fenir,  to  be  anxious,  desirous. 

travailler,  to  labor. 

y/ser,  to  aim. 

uouer,  to  devote. 


Examples :  — 
J'aime  a  danser,  I  like  to  dance. 
Mon  Jils  apprend  a  chanter,  my  son  learns  to  sing. 
Je  vous  autorise  a  vendre  mon  jardin. 
I  authorize  you  to  sell  my  garden. 

Notre  bonheur  consiste  a  viiyre  suivant  la  nature.  • 

Our  happiness  consists  in  living  according  to  nature. 
On  m'a  invito  a  /aire  une  promenade. 
I  have  been  invited  to  take  a  walk. 

18.    The  Infinitive  preceded  by  a  is  idiomatically  used  after  the 
verb  etre  to  translate  the  English  progressive  forms,  such  as :  /  am 


THE   INFINITIVE.  351 

singing,  I  was  writing,  etc.  The  French  Je  suis  a  chanter, 
J'etais  a  ecrire,  are,  however,  not  so  much  used  as  the  English 
participial  inflections,  which  are  generally  rendered  by  the  simple 
verb  Je  chante,  fecrivais,  etc. 

19.  The  Infinitive  with  a  also  occurs  in  abbreviated  expressions 
which  in  reality  are  simply  contracted  subordinate  sentences. 
Examples :  — 

A  V entendre,  on  dirait  qu'il  est  innocent. 

To  hear  him,  one  would  say  he  is  innocent. 

A  vous  voir,  on  croirait  .  .  . 

To  see  you,  one  would  think  .  .  . 

II  e'tait  le  premier  a  se  jeter  sur  I'ennemi. 

He  was  the  first  to  throw,  i.  e.  who  threw  himself  on  the  enemy. 

Je  ne  suis  pas  homme  a  me  laisser  offenser 

I  am  not  the  man  to  allow  myself  to  be  ofiended. 

Je  me  pJacai  de  maniere  a  pouvoir  tout  observer. 

I  placed  myself  in  such  a  posture  as  to  observe  everything. 

20.  Verbs  with  a  or  de.  The  following  verbs  require  either  a 
or  de,  according  to  the  sense  in  which  they  are  employed  :  — 

1.  Commencer,  to  begin,  is  generally  followed  by  a.    Ex.:  — 

On  a  commence  a  jouer,  they  have  begun  to  play. 

But  if  it  expresses  simply  a  fact  without  any  idea  of  continuation,  de  is 
used  after  it :  — 

Puisque  fai  commence  de  rompre  le  silence. 

Since  I  have  begun  to  break  the  silence. 

2.  Continuer  a  denotes  an  uninterrupted  continuation  of  the  action. 
Example ;  — 

Si  vous  continuez  a  travailler  si  fort,  vous  ruinerez  votre  sant^. 
If  you  continue  to  work  so  much  you  will  ruin  your  health. 

Continuer  de  denotes  an  action  repeated,  but  after  successive  interrup- 
tions.    Ex.:  — 

Mon  ami  continuait  de  m'^crire. 

My  friend  continued  to  Avritc  to  me. 

3.  Dcjier  requires  a  when  it  means  to  challenge,  to  provohe  (to  a  competi- 
tion), and  de  when  it  means  to  set  at  defiance,  or,  defy  to  do  something. 


352  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

4.  S'effbrcer,  synonymous  with  /aire  des  efforts,  to  exert  one^s  self,  to 
take  pains,  takes  a.    Ex.: — 

//  s'efforcait  a  faire  son  devoir. 
He  took  pains  (exerted  himself)  to  do  his  duty. 
S'efforcer  de  means  to  endeavor.    Ex.:  — 
Je  m'effbrcerai  d'obtenir  cette  place. 

I  shall  endeavor  to  get  that  place. 

5.  £tre,  to  be,  when  joined  to  ce,  is  followed  by  a  if  it  denotes  turn,  and 
by  de,  if  it  denotes  dutj/  or  right,  as  :  — 

C'est  a  vous  a  parler,  it  is  your  turn  to  speak. 

C'est  au  maitre  d'ordonner,  c'est  a  moi  d'oh€ir. 

It  is  for  the  master  to  command,  it  is  for  me  to  obey. 

6.  Laisser,  to  leave,  meaning  to  transmit,  is  followed  by  a;  meaning  to 
cease  or  alistain,  by  de;  and  when  used  in  the  sense  of  to  permit  [to  let),  it 
governs  the  next  verb  without  a  preposition. 

7.  Manquer  a  denotes  the  omission  or  neglect  of  a  duty :  — 
Pourquoi  avez-vous  manqu€  a  faire  votre  exercice  ? 

Why  have  you  neglected  to  do  your  exercise  1 
Manquer  de  signifies  to  fail,  to  be  on  the  point  of:  — 
J'ai  manqu^de  perdre  la  vie,  I  had  nearly  lost  my  life. 

8.  S'occuper  takes  a  in  the  sense  of  to  employ  one's  time,  to  work  at. 
Examples :  — 

//  s'occupe  a  lire,  he  occupies  himself  with  reading. 

L'auteur  de  "  Paul  et  Virginie "  s'occupait  a  recueillir  les  mat^riaux  de  cet 
ouvrage. 

The  author  of  "  Paul  and  Virginia  "  occupied  hiniself  in  collecting  the 
materials  of  this  work. 

S'occuper  de  signifies  mettre  ses  soins,  to  pay  attention  to,  to  think  much 
of.    Ex.:  — 

II  s'occupe  de  d^truire  les  abus. 

He  is  thinking  how  to  abolish  abuses. 

9.  Venir  governs  the  Infinitive  with  a,  when  it  signifies  to  happen. 
Example :  — 

S'il  venait  a  apprendre  que  vous  etes  id. 
If  he  happened  to  know  that  you  are  here. 

Venir  is  followed  by  de,  when  it  is  used  to  express  a  thing  just  happened 
(see  P.  I.,  L.  XL VII.).    Ex.:  — 


THE  INFINITIVE.  353 

Mes  sceurs  viennent  de  sortir. 
My  sisters  have  just  gone  out. 

10.    Jarc?er  a  signifies  to  delay.     Ex.:  — 
Ne  tardez  pas  a  lui  envoyer  de  Vargent. 
Do  not  delay  sending  him  some  money. 

Tarder,  as  an  impersonal  verb :  il  me  tarde,  1  long,  governs  the  Infin- 
itive with  c/e.     Ex.:  — 

II  me  tarde  de  le  revoir,  I  long  to  see  him  again. 

21.   The  following  eleven  verbs  may  take  either  a  or  de :  — 

Consentir,  to  consent.  s'enteter,  to  be  obstinate  in. 

contraindre,  to  compel.  essayer,  to  try.  . 

demander,  to  demand.  obliger,  to  oblige. 

forcer,  to  force.  oublier,  to  forget. 

s'empresser,  to  be  eager.  tdcher,  to  try. 
s'engager,  to  engage,  agree. 

Examples :  — 
U  ne  demande  qu'a  manger  et  a  boire. 
He  demands  nothing  but  to  eat  and  drink. 
Elle  demanda  au  ciel  de  lui  pardonner  sa  faute. 
She  prayed  to  heaven  to  forgive  her  fault. 
Le  banquier  s'engagea  a  {or  de)  payer  la  somme  de  mille  francs. 
The  banker  agreed  to  pay  the  sum  of  a  thousand  francs. 

THEME   57. 

1.  When  the  captain  began  to  speak,  all  the  soldiers  listened^ 
attentively.  2.  In  the  spring  the  trees  begin  to  cover  themselves 
with  leaves.  3.  They  continued  to  live  in  peace.  4.  We  have 
continued  to  write  to  him,  but  he  has  not  yet  answered  us.  6. 
The  unfortunate  never  fail  to  complain.  6.  I  have  failed  to  do 
what  I  had  promised  you.  7.  I  will  endeavor  to  satisfy  him.  8. 
It  is  long  before  he  comes  (he  delays  to  come) .  9.  I  long  to  have 
finished  my  work.  10.  At  last  I  longed  (^7  me  tarda)  to  see  again 
my  native  country.  11.  That  woman  is  occupied  only  with  iron- 
ing.^ 12.  Do  not  fail  to  be  here  at  a  quarter  to  six.  13.  Come 
[and]  see  us  this  evening.     14.  Is  your  brother  at  home  ?     15.  No, 

23 


354  XX.      VINGTIEME   LEgON. 

lie  lias  just  gone  out.    16.  We  have  just  received  your  letter.    17. 
He  agreed  to  inform  you  of  the  result.^ 
1.  Ecouter.    2.  Bepasser.    3.  Hesultat. 


INFINITIVE  WITH  THE  PREPOSITIONS  POUR,  PAR, 
APRES,  SANS. 

22.  Pour.  Whenever  the  EngHsh  to  before  an  Infinitive 
expresses  a  design  or  purpose,  and  can  be  changed  into,  in  order 
to,  pour  must  be  used.     Ex.:  — 

//  attend  de  I'argent  pour  payer  ses  dettes. 
He  is  expecting  money  to  pay  his  debts. 
J'ai  fait  mon  possible  pour  les  r^concilier. 
1  have  done  all  in  my  power  to  reconcile  them. 
Je  I'ai  fait  moi-meme  pour  ne  pas  vous  deranger. 
I  did  it  myself  not  to  disturb  you. 

23.  The  proposition  pour  is  also  used  after  the  adjective  follow- 
ing assez,  trop,  suffisant,  or  after  the  verb  sujffire.     Ex.:  — 

M.  R.  est  assez  riche  pour  acheter  cette  campagne. 
Mr.  R.  is  rich  enough  to  buy  that  estate. 
Caroline  est  trop  jeune  pour  faire  cet  ouvrage. 
Caroline  is  too  young  to  do  this  work. 

24.  The  French  usage  differs  from  the  English  in  employing  the 
Infinitive  instead  of  a  separate  clause,  when  the  dependent  clause 
has  the  same  subject  as  the  principal  clause  :  — 

Je  crois  etre  hless€,  I  think  I  am  wounded. 

Xespere  meriter  votre  confiance,  I  hope  I  deserve  your  confidence. 

Je  voudrais  etre  rir.he,  I  wish  I  were  rich. 

THEME   58. 

1.  I  travel  to  see  the  world.  2,  The  araiy  was  too  fatigued  to 
renew^  the  attack.  3.  I  will  do  everything  to  oblige  you.  4.  God 
has  not  given  us  hearts  to  hate  one  another.  5.  He  is  going  into 
the  country  to  shoot.^   6.  Some  people  are  hated  without  deserving^ 


THE   INFINITIVE.  355 

it.  7.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  humaij  heart  to  judge  well  of 
others.*  8.  After  having  terminated  some  affairs  at  home,  I  shall 
begin  by  paying^  some  visits.  9.  Nobody  can  be  happy  without 
practising^  virtue.  10.  If  the  emperor  Titus  passed  one  day  with- 
out doing  good^  to  («)  anybody,  he  used^  to  say :  "I  have  lost 
that  day." 

1.  Renouveler  Vattaque,    2.  Chasser.    3.  Meriter.    4.  Des  autres.    5.  Faire.    6. 
Fratiquer,    7.  Du  hien.    8.  II  avait  coutume. 


READING  LESSON. 

ALEXANDRE     SELKIRK. 

(Suite.^ 

**  Une  longue  habitude  me  fit  manger  la  viande  sans  sel  et  sans 
pain.  Dans  la  saison  j' avals  quantite  de  bons  navets^  qui  avaient 
ete  semes  par  1' equipage^  de  quelque  vaisseau  et  qui  couvraient 
plusieurs  arpents^  de  terre.  Je  ne  manquais  pas  non  plus  d'excel- 
lents  choux*  que  ie  cueillais  sur  une  espece  de  palmier  et  que  j'as- 
saisonnais  avec  le  fruit  du  piment,  qui  est  le  meme  que  le  poivre  de 
la  Jamaique,  et  dont  I'odeur  est  delicieuse. 

"  Mes  souliers  et  mes  habits  furent  bientot  uses  k  force  de  courir 
a  travers  les  bois  et  les  broussailles.*  Cependant  mes  pieds  s'endur- 
cirent^  si  bien  a  la  fatigue,  que  je  courais  partout  sans  peine. 

"!Revenu'  enfin  de  ma  melancolie,  je  me  divertissais  quelquefois 
h.  graver  mon  nom  sur  I'ecorce^  des  arbres  avec  la  date  de  mon  exil, 
ou  bien  k  chanter  et  h  dresser^  k  la  danse  des  chats  et  des  chevreaux. 
Lorsque  je  n'eus  plus  d'habits,  je  me  fis  un  juste-au-corps^*^  et  un 
bonnet  {cap)  de  peaux  de  chevres  que  je  cousis  ensemble  avec  de 
petites  courroies ;  ^^  un  clou^^  me  servait  d' aiguille.  Je  me  fis  aussi 
des  chemises  d'un  morceau  de  toile  que  j'avais.  Quand  mon  cou- 
teau  fut  us^  jusqu'au  dos,  j'en  forgeai  d'autres  avec  quelques  cercles 
de  fer  que  j'avais  trouves  sur  le  rivage,  et  je  les  aiguisai^^  sur  des 
pierres. 

"  C'est  ainsi  que  la  necessity  m'apprit  a  pourvoir  a  tous  mes 
besoins." 


356  XX.      VINGTIEME  LEgON. 

**  Pendant  mon  s^joui^*  dans  cette  ile  deserte,  j'ai  vn  plusieurs 
fois  des  vaisseaux  qui  passaient,  mais  il  n'y  en  eut  que  deux  qui 
vinrent  y  mouiller.^^  Incertain  de  quelle  nation  ils  ^taient,  je  m'en 
approchai  pour  les  examiner.  Mais  quelques  Espagnols  qui  avaient 
deja  mis  pied  a  terre,  ne  m'eurent  pas  plutot  aper^u  qu'ils  tirerent^® 
sur  moi  et  me  poursuivirent  jusque  dans  les  bois,  ou  je  grimpai  sur 
un  arbre.  Je  ne  fus  pas  decouvert,  quoiqu'ils  rodassent^'^  dans  les 
environs  et  qu'ils  tuassent  quantite  de  chevres  sous  mes  yeux. 
Enfin  j'aper9us  vos  navires  que  je  pris  aussitot  pour  anglais.  J'al- 
lumai  un  feu  sur  un  rocher  pres  du  rivage  pour  vous  donner  le  sig- 
nal de  ma  detresse.^^  Vous  me  comprites  et,  graces  a  votre  huma- 
nity, je  puis  esperer  de  revoir  ma  patrie." 

1.  Turnips.  2.  The  crew.  3.  Acre.  4.  Cabbage.  6.  Brushwood.  6.  To  harden. 
7.  Recovered.  8.  Bark.  9.  To  train.  10.  Jacket.  11.  Strap.  12.  A  nail.  13.  To 
sharpen.  14.  Stay.  15.  To  anchor.  16.  To  fire  or  shoot  at.  17.  To  run  about, 
ramble.    18.  Distress. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Comment  mangeait-il  la  viande  ? 

N'avait-il  pas  autre  chose  a  manger  ? 

Manquait-il  de  choux  ? 

Ou  les  cueillait-il  ? 

Avec  quoi  assaisonnait-il  ses  choux  ? 

Ayait-il  toujours  des  souliers  et  des  habits  ? 

Comment  se  divertissait-il  quelquefois  ? 

Lorsque  ses  habits  furent  uses,  que  fit  Selkirk  ? 

De  quoi  se  servit-il  pour  coudre  les  peaux  de  chevres  ? 

De  quoi  se  fit-il  des  chemises  ? 

Quand  son  couteau  fut  use,  que  fit-il  ? 

N'a-t-il  jamais  vu  de  vaisseaux  qui  passaient? 

De  quelle  nation  etaient-ils  ? 

Que  firenfc-ils  lorsqu'ils  Feurent  aper9U  ? 

Fut-il  decouvert  ? 

Qu'aper9ut-il  enfin? 

Pourquoi  alluma-t-il  un  feu  sur  le  rivage  ? 

Ce  signal  fut-il  remarque  ? 


THE   PRESENT  PARTICIPLE.  357 


XXI.     YINGT    ET    UNIEME    LEgON 


THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 


1.  The  Present  Participle  is  invariable  in  French.     Ex. :  — 

Une  femme  mourant  de  soif. 

A  woman  dying  of  thirst.  •» 

Une  preuve  convainquant  tout  le  monde. 

A  proof  convincing  everybody. 

Une  mere  consolant  sa  Jille. 

A  mother  consoling  her  daughter. 

Une  pluie  fecondant  la  terre. 

A  rain  fructifying  the  earth. 

2.  When  the  Present  Participle  loses  its  verbal  nature  and  be- 
comes a  participial  adjective,  it  follows  the  noun,  and  agrees  with  it 
as  an  adjective.     Ex. :  — 

Une  femme  mourante. 
A  dying  woman. 
Une  preuve  convainquante. 
A  convincing  proof. 
Des  paroles  consolantes. 
Consoling  words. 

3.  The  Present  Participle  is  often  used  in  English  as  a  substan- 
tive, which  is  not  the  case  in  French.  It  can  sometimes  be  rendered 
by  a  noun,  in  most  cases  by  the  Infinitive  (see  Lesson  XX.,  §  1). 
Examples :  — 

La  lecture  est  un  passe-temps  agr€ahle. 
Reading  is  an  agreeable  pastime. 
Sa  passion  dominante  est  la  chasse. 
His  ruling  passion  is  hunting. 
I  like  dancing,  faime  a  danser. 

4.  When  an  English  Present  Participle  has  reference  to  a  sub- 
stantive which  is  not  in  the  Nominative  Case,  it  is  rendered  in  French 


358  XXI.      VINGT  ET   UNIEME  LEgON. 

by  the  Present  or  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative,  -with  the  relative 
pronoun  qui  before  it.     Ex.  :  — 

H  portait  une  houteille  qui  contenait  du  poison. 

He  carried  a  bottle  containing  poison. 

6.  An  English  Present  Participle  preceded  by  any  preposition 
but  by  and  on  (§  7),  such  as,  of,  from,  before,  after,  for,  without, 
is  rendered  in  French  by  the  Infinitive  with  de,  a,  pour  or  sans  (as 
we  have  seen  before) .     Ex. :  — 

L'art  d'ecrire  est  tres-ancien. 

The  art  of  writing  is  very  old. 

Je  connais  sa  maniere  de  penser  et  d'agir. 

I  know  his  manner  of  thinking  and  acting. 

iVe  Vempechez  pas  de  faire  du  Men. 

Do  not  prevent  him  from  doing  good. 

Je  Vai  rencontre  avant  de  paitir. 

I  met  him  before  leaving. 

On  ne  pent  pas  trahir  la  ve'rite'  sans  se  rendre  coupable. 

One  cannot  speak  against  the  truth  without  being  guilty. 

6.  Sometimes  the  English  Present  Participle  is  used  substantively 
with  a  possessive  pronoun  before  it ;  then  it  must  be  rendered  in 
French  by  the  conjunction  que  and  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive, 
according  as  the  case  requires.     Ex. :  — 

Je  doute  qu'il  soit  un  honnete  homme. 
I  doubt  his  being  an  honest  man. 
Nous  avons  appris  qu'il  s'est  fait  soldat. 
We  heard  of  his  becoming  a  soldier. 

THEME   59. 

1.  Miss  Mary  is  an  obliging  young  lady.  2.  I  listened^  [to]  her 
encouraging  words.  3.  He  has  given  us  consoling  news.  4.  These 
books  are  very  interesting.  5.  That  mother,  in  her  supplicating^ 
attitude,  would  have  appeared  touching,  even  without  the  surprising 
eloquence  of  her  discourse.  6.  The  young  soldier,  preceding  all 
the  others,  seized^  the  standard.'*  7.  That  mountain,  commanding 
an  extensive*  view,  was  very  well  calculated^  for  our  observations. 
8.  Caroline,  weeping  bitterly,''  threw  herself  into  her  mother's  ai-ms. 


THE    PRESENT    PARTICIPLE.  359 

9.  I  have  seen  your  brother  (§  4)  playing  in  the  garden.  10. 
Alexander  asked  the  physicians  standing*  by  {autour  de)  him  if  he 
should  die  of  (de)  his  illness.  11.  The  soldiers  of  Alexander,  for- 
getting their  wives  and  children,  looked  upon^  the  Persian  gold  as^® 
their  plunder."  12.  It  ceased  raining.  13.  He  risked  losing  his 
life.  14.  I  am  afraid  of  losing  her  confidence.  15.  The  desire  of 
appearing  clever  often  prevents  one  from  becoming  so.  16.  He 
left^'^  without  paying  his  debts.  17.  I  heai'd  of  his  being  (§6) 
married.  18.  We  noticed^' his  looking  at  it  Qe).  19.  He  wrote 
to  me  without"  his  father's  knowing  it. 

1.  ^couter  qch.  2.  To  supplicate,  supplier.  3.  S'emparer  de  qch.  4.  Le  dra- 
peau.  5.  J^tendue,  f.  6.  Propre  a.  7.  To  weep  bitterly,  fondre  en  larmes.  8. 
Se  tenir.  9.  To  look  upon,  regarder  qch.  10.  Comme.  11.  Butin,  m.  12.  Par- 
tir.    IZ.  Remarquer.    14.  (5ans  gwe  with  the  Subj. 

THE  GERUND,— PRESENT  PARTICIPLE  WITH  EN. 

7.  The  Gerund  is  the  Present  Participle  with  the  preposition  en 
prefixed.  It  generally  denotes  1,  either  a  means  by  which  the  ob- 
ject of  the  leading  clause  is  attained,  or  2,  a  simultaneous  action, 
that  is,  an  action  during  the  transaction  of  which  another  is  acted  by 
the  same  subject.  It  is  always  invariable,  and  corresponds  to  the 
EngUsh  Present  Participle  preceded  by  the  prepositions  by,  in,  and 
on  or  while  ;  or  is  sometimes  rendered  by  the  simple  Participle  with- 
out preposition.     Ex. :  — 

1.  Denoting  a  means :  — 

On  se  forme  V esprit  en  lisant  de  bons  livres. 

"We  form  our  minds  by  reading  good  books. 

Nous  avons  obtenu  la  pair,  en  faisant  de  grands  saa'ijices. 

We  have  obtained  peace  by  making  great  sacrifices. 

H  se  sauva  en  sautant  par  la  fenetre. 

He  saved  himself  by  jumping  through  the  window. 

2.  Denoting  a  simultaneous  action  :  — 

Zm  d^esse  sourit  en  voyant  Td^maque. 

The  goddess  smiled  on  seeing  Telemachus. 

II  me  dit  cela  en  tremblant. 

He  trembled  as  he  told  me  this. 


360  XXI.      VINGT  ET  UNIEME  LEgON. 

Je  Vai  rencontre  en  allant  au  chateau. 

I  met  him  in  going  (as  I  was  going)  to  the  castle. 

Je  lis  le  journal  en  de'jeunant. 

I  read  the  paper  while  breakfasting. 

Note.  The  English  by  with  a  Participle  is  rendered  in  two  cases  only 
by  par  and  the  Infinitive,  viz.,  with  commencer,  to  commence,  begin,  and 
Jinir,  to  terminate  with,  to  do  something  at  last.    Ex. :  — 

Je  veux  commencer  par  reciter  ma  legon. 

I  wiU  begin  by  saying  my  lesson. 

II  Jinit  par  me  demander  pardon. 

At  last  he  begged  my  pardon  (he  ended  by  asking). 

8.    To  enforce  the  simultaneousness  of  the  two  actions,  tout  is 
often  placed  before  the  Gerund.     Ex. :  — 
Tout  en  pleurant  il  ne  put  s'empecher  de  rire. 
Whilst  crying  he  could  not  forbear  laughing. 

THEME  60. 

1.  We  learn  the  news  by  reading  the  newspapers.  2.  By 
observing  these  rules,  you  may  avoid  mistakes.  3.  By  studying 
much,  you  will  become  learned.  4.  More  glory  is^  acquired  by 
defending  one's  fellow-citizens^  than  by  accusing  them.  5.  In 
going ^  tliis  way  we  shall  meet  him.  6.  I  met  my  friend  as  I  was 
going  to  the  post-office.  7.  By  paying  all  his  debts,  he  reestab- 
lished"* his  credit.  8.  He  told  me,  trembling,  that  he  had  lost  all  his 
money.  9.  You  may  easily  get^  praise,  by  complying®  with  the 
(aux)  wishes  of  the  people^  with  whom  you  converse,  and  by  pre- 
ferring others  to  yourself. 

1.  On  acguiert.  2.  Concitoyen,  m.  3.  Prendre.  4.  JRetablir,  5.  Obtenir  des 
louanges.    6.  To  comply  with,  se  conformer  h  qch.    7.  Des  personnes. 


READING  LESSON. 

Gesler  conduit  Tell  a  Kusnach. 
Tell,  dans  la  barque,  etait  moins  emu  des  cris  des  soldats,  du 
bruit  des  vagues  ecumantes,  du  sifflement  des  vents  dechaines,  qu'il 


THE   PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  361 

ne  le  fut  en  decouvrant  las  caverne  de  Gnitli.  H  attendait  le  tre- 
pas/  et  ne  songeait  qu'a  I'avantage  que  son  pays  pourrait  tirer  de  la 
mort  du  gouveraeur.  II  jouissait  en  silence  de  la  peur,  des  gemis- 
sements,^  du  tourment  qu'eprouvait  Gesler,  lorsqu'un  des  rameurs, 
tout-a-coup  s'adressant  acet  homme  cmel:  "  Nous  sommes  perdus," 
dit-il,  "  il  n'est  plus  en  notre  puissance  de  maintenii-  au  milieu  des 
flots  la  barque  emportee^  par  le  vent  du  nord  qui,  dans  un  instant, 
va  la  briser  en  pieces  centre  les  rochers  du  rivage.  Un  seul 
homme,  le  plus  renomme,  le  plus  habile  de  nos  trois  cantons  dans 
I'art  de  braver  les  tempetes  du  lac,  pent  nous  sauver  de  la  mort. 
Get  homme  est  ici :  le  voilk !  le  voila  charge  de  tes  chaines ! 
Choisis,  Gesler,  choisis  promptement  entre  le  trepas  ou  sa  liberte." 

Gesler  fremit^  h  cette  parole.  Sa  haine  violente  pour  Tell  com- 
bat dans  son  ame  pusillanime  I'amour  memo  qu'il  a  pour  la  vie ;  il 
hesite  encore,  il  ne  repond  point,  mais  les  prieres,  les  murmures  des 
soldats  et  des  rameurs  qui  lui  demandent,  qui  te  pressent  de  sauver 
leurs  jours  et  les  siens,  en  delivrant^  son  prisonnier;  la  crainte 
d'etre  mal  obei,  s'il  se  refuse  aux  voeux  de  tons,  et  la  tempete  qui 
augmente,  determinent  enfin  Gesler.  **  Qu'on  brise^  ses  chaines," 
dit-il,  "  je  lui  pardonne  tons  ses  crimes,  je  lui  rends'  la  vie  et  la  li- 
berty, si  son  adresse  nous  amene  au  port." 

Les  soldats,  les  rameurs,  s'empressent®  de  rendre  libre  Guillaume. 
Ses  fers  sent  tombes,  il  se  leve,  et,  sans  prononcer  un  seul  mot,  il 
s'empare  du  gouvemail.^  Faisant  mouvoir  sous  sa  main  la  barque, 
comme  I'enfant  fait  plier  la  baguette^''  qu'il  tourne  a  son  gre,  il 
oppose  la  proue^  aux  deux  vents,  dont  les  forces  ainsi  divisees 
la  tiennent  en  equilibre.  Profitant  ensuite  d'un  moment  de 
calme,  il  tourne  de  la  proue  k  la  poupe,^^  maintient  la  barque  dans 
la  direction  qui  seule  pent  la  sauver,  fait  prendre  les  rames  a  deux 
seuls  rameurs,  dont  il  dirige  les  efforts,  et  s'avance,  malgre  les  vents, 
malgre  les  flots  et  la  tempete,  vers  le  detroit^^  qu'il  veut  repasser. 
Les  tenebres  ^*  empechent  Gesler  de  s'apercevoir  qu'il  retourne  aux 
memes  lieux  d'ou  il  est  parti.  Tell  continue  sa  marche ;  la  nuit 
presque  entiere  s'ecoule  ;^^  il  est  rentre  dans  le  lac  d'Uri,  il  aper9oit 
la  lueur  mourante  du  signal  donne  sur  le  mont  d'Altdorf.     C'esb 


362  XXI.     VINGT  ET   UNIEME  LEgON. 

cette  lueur^^  qui  lui  sert  d'etoile ;  il  connait  le  lac  depuls  longtemps, 
il  en  evite  les  ecueils,^^  il  s'approche  pourtant  du  rivage  qui  borde 
le  canton  de  Schwitz ;  il  pense  a  Werner  Stauffacher ;  il  calcule  que 
Werner  doit  etre  en  marche,  et  que  les  chemins  encombres  de 
neige,  le  forceront  de  cotoyer^^  le  lac.  Dans  ce  faible  espoir,  il 
navigue,  en  feignant  d'ignorer  les  lieux  oil  la  tempete  pousse  la 
barque,  en  augmentant  les  terreurs  de  Gesler  et  de  ses  soldats. 
(^To  he  continued.) 

1.  Death.  2.  Sighs.  3.  Carried  away.  4.  To  shudder,  tremble.  5.  To  liberate. 
G.  To  break  (see  p.  372,  $  15).  7.  I  give.  8.  See  p.  388,  %  9.  9.  The  helm,  rudder. 
10.  The  rod.  11.  The  prow.  12.  The  stern.  13.  The  strait.  14.  The  darkness. 
15.  To  pass  away.     16.  Light.     17.  Cliff.    18.  To  follow  or  march  along  the  coast. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Tell  etait-il  emu  de  quelque  chose  ? 
Qu'attendait-il  ? 
A  quoi  songeait-il  ? 
De  quoi  jouissait-il  en  silence  ? 

Qu'est-ce  qui  determina  enfin  Gesler  ^  delivrer  le  prisonnier  ? 
Que  dit  alors  un  des  rameurs  k  Gesler  ? 
Qui  etait  le  batelier  le  plus  habile  dans  les  trois  cantons  ? 
Le  rameur  nomma-t-il  cet  homme  ? 
Entre  quoi  Gesler  avait-il  a  choisir  ? 
Quel  parti  (decision)  prit-il  ? 
Que  firent  les  soldats  et  les  rameurs  ? 
Quand  les  fers  furent  otes,  que  fit  Tell  ? 
Quelle  manoeuvre  fit-il  apres  ? 
Kacontez  ce  que  fit  Tell  ensuite. 

Gesler  s'aper^ut-il  que  Tell  retoumait  vers  les  m^mes  lieux  d'oii 
Uf  etaient  partis  ? 

Vers  quel  lac  Tell  dirige-t^il  la  barque  ? 

De  quel  rivage  s'approche-t-il  ? 

A  qui  pense-t-il  ? 

Que  calcule-t-il  a  son  ^gard  ? 

Que  feint-il  ? 


THE   PAST  PARTICIPLE.  363 


XXII.     YINGT-DEUXIEME    LE9ON. 


THE  PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Every  possible  difficulty  in  regard  to  the  agreement  of  Past  Participle 
may  be  solved  by  the  application  of  one  of  the  three  following  rules  :  — 

1.  The  Past  Participle,  when  used  adjectively,  is  placed  after  the 
noun  and  agrees  with  it  as  an  adjective.     Ex.:  — 

Une  fleur  fi€trie,  a  withered  flower. 

Une  lettre  hien  €crite,  a  well  written  letter. 

Des  maisons  hien  meuhUes,  well  furnished  houses. 

2.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  etre  agrees 
•with  the  subject,  except  in  reflective  verbs.     Ex. :  — 

Cette  lettre  est  hien  ^crite,  this  letter  is  well  written. 
Mes  deux  tantes  sont  mortes,  both  my  aunts  are  dead. 
La  ville  fat  prise,  the  town  was  taken. 
La  nuit  sera  bientot  pass^e,  the  night  will  soon  be  over. 

3.  The  Past  Participle  accompanied  by  the  auxiliary  avoir  (and 
by  etre  in  reflective  verbs)  agrees  with  the  direct  object,  but  only 
when  that  direct  object  precedes.     Ex.:  — 

La  lettre  que  fai  regue. 

The  letter  I  have  received. 

Les  lettres  que  fai  regues. 

The  letters  I  have  received. 

I^es  dames  que  nous  avons  rencontr^es. 

The  ladies  we  have  met. 

Les  affaires  que  vous  avez  entreprises. 

The  affairs  you  have  undertaken.- . 

Oil  sont  les  livres  ?  — je  les  ai  perdus. 

Where  are  the  books  1    I  have  lost  them. 

Oil  est  ta  plume  ?  — je  Vai  perdue. 

Where  is  thy  pen  ?    I  have  lost  it. 

Ou  sont  les  fruits  que  vous  m'avez  envoy€s  f 

Where  are  the  fruits  you  sent  me  1 


364  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME   LEgON. 

But  there  is  no  agreement  in  the  participle  when  there  is  no 
direct  object,  or  when  the  direct  object  comes  after  the  participle. 
Example :  — 

tPai  re^u  une  lettre  —  deux  lettres. 

I  have  received  one  letter  —  two  letters. 

J'ai  rencontr^  une  dame  —  deux  dames. 

I  met  one  lady —  two  ladies. 

J'ai  perdu  les  livres. 

I  have  lost  the  books. 

J'ai  perdu  la  plume, 

I  have  lost  the  pen. 

Nous  avons  mang€. 

We  have  eaten. 

Us  out  repondu  a  notre  lettre. 

They  have  answered  our  letter. 

Mes  freres  avaient  dprmi. 

My  brothers  had  slept. 

4.  In  reflective  verbs,  as  etre  takes  the  place  of  avoir,  the  par- 
ticiple agrees  with  the  second  pronoun,  if  that  is  a  direct  object. 
Examples :  — 

lis  se  sont  presents. 
They  presented  themselves. 
Elle  s'est  hlessee. 
She  wounded  herself. 

But  when  the  second  pronoun  is  an  indirect  object,  the  participle 
remains  unchanged,  unless  the  direct  object  precedes,  as  in  verbs 
conjugated  with  avoir.     Ex. :  — 

Us  se  sont  presents  des  Jleurs. 

They  presented  flowers  to  each  othe?". 

Us  se  sont  ecrit  deux  lettres. 

They  wrote  a  letter  to  each  other. 

But  the  participle  must  agree  if  the  direct  object  (Jleurs,  lettres") 
precedes.     Ex.;  — 

Les  Jleurs  qu'ils  se  sont  presentees. 
Les  lettres  qu'ils  se  sont  Sorites. 


THE   PAST   PARTICIPLE.  .  365 

APPLICATION  OF  THE  ABOVE  RULES. 

As  the  application  of  the  above  rules  may  present  some  difficulty, 
special  rules  will  be  given,  though  all  that  follows  is  really  embraced 
in  §§  2  and  3. 

5.  The  Past  Participle  of  a  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  conju- 
gated with  avoir  never  agrees,  when  conjugated  with  etre  it  always 
agrees  with  the  subject.     Ex. :  — 

Les  deux  heures  que  fai  dormi. 

The  two  hours  during  which  I  slept;  que  is  equivalent  to  pendant 
lesquelles. 

lis  sont  tomb^s,  they  fell.     EUes  sont  tomb^es. 

Hence  also  the  Past  Part,  ete  is  always  invariable :  Elle  a  ete, 
Mies  ont  ete. 

6.  The  Past  Participle  of  an  impersonal  verb  is  always  invari- 
able, as : 

Les  pluies  qu'il  y  a  eu  cet  hiver. 
The  rains  we  have  had  this  winter. 

7.  A  Past  Participle  does  not  agree  with  en  (of  it,  of  them, 
some) ,  because  en  is  not  considered  as  a  du*ect  object.     Ex. :  — 

Avez-vous  des  Jleurs  ?  —  Oui,  il  nous  en  a  donn€. 

But  the  presence  of  en  does  not  prevent  the  participle  from  agreeing  with 
the  real  direct  object  if  that  precedes.     Ex. : 
La  bonne  opinion  que  fen  avais  congue. 
The  good  opinion  I  had  conceived  of  it. 

8.  A  Past  Participle  between  two  que^s  is  invariable.  Ex. : 
Les  livres  que  vous  avez  cru  que  Je  vous  donnerais,  the  books  you 
thought  I  would  give  you.  The  first  que  is  not  the  object  of  crw, 
but  of  donnerais. 

9.  The  Past  Participle  followed  by  an  infinitive  agrees  when  the 
object  that  precedes  is  governed  by  the  participle,  if  the  object  de- 
pends on  the  infinitive  the  participle  is  invariable.  Ex. :  La  dame 
que  fai  vue  peindre,  the  lady  I  saw  painting.  La  dame  que  fai 
vu  peindre  means.  The  lady  whom  I  saw  painted,  that  is,  whose 


366  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME  LEgON. 

portrait  I  saw  taken.  La  dame  quefai  entendue  chanter,  the  lady 
*I  heard  singing ;  but,  La  chanson  que  fai  entendu  chanter,  the 
song  I  heard  sung,  —  because  que  is  governed  not  by  entendu  but 
by  chanter.  For  the  same  reason  Je  les  ai  laisses  partir,  I 
allowed  them  to  go ;  but,  Us  se  sont  laisse  surprendre  par  Venne^ni  ; 
they  allowed  themselves  to  be  surprised  by  the  enemy.  In  this  last 
sentence  se  is  the  object  of  surprendre,  as  it  is  equivalent  to,  They 
allowed  the  enemy  to  surprise  them. 

10.  The  past  Participle  of  the  verb  faire  followed  by  an  infini- 
tive never  agrees,  because  faire  thus  connected  with  an  infinitive  is 
considered  for  all  purposes  of  government  as  forming  but  one  verb 
with  it.  Thus  mJele  fais  passer,  le  is  the  object  of  faire  passer  ; 
in  Je  lui  fais  passer  le  pont,  le  pont  is  the  direct  object,  and  lui 
and  not  le  must  be  used,  as  faire  passer  cannot  have  two  direct 
objects.  Hence  fait  is  invariable  in  the  phrase  :  Une  femme  s'est 
presefitee  a  la  porte,  je  Vai  fait  passer,  a  woman  presented  her- 
self at  the  door,  I  let  her  pass. 

11.  After  the  Past  Participles  du,pu,  and  voulu  an  infinitive 
may  be  understood,  in  which  case  they  remain  invariable,  as :  Je 
lui  ai  rendu  tous  les  services  que  fai  du  .  .  .  que  fai  pu  (that 
is  lui  rendre),  I  rendered  him  all  the  services  I  should  ...  I  could 
(render  him).  But,  Les  sommes  quHl  m'a  dues,  the  sums  he  owed 
me  —  dues  agrees  with  its  object  que  which  precedes. 

12.  The  Past  Participles  attendu,  excepte,  passe,  suppose,  and 
vu  are  sometimes  employed  as  prepositions.  They  then  precede  the 
noun  they  govern,  and  are  invariable. 

Other  instances  might  be  adduced,  but  a  strict  application  of  §§  1,  2,  3, 
and  4,  will  be  found  to  cover  all  cases  of  doubt. 

THEME  61. 

1.  She  is  loved.  2.  We  are  satisfied.  3.  My  sisters  are  satis- 
fied. 4.  My  aunt  has  arrived.  5.  My  cousins  {fern.')  have 
arrived.  6.  This  house  is  sold.  7.  The  two  houses  are  sold.  8. 
These  letters  are  written  very  well.     9.  My  mother  has  gone  out, 


THE  PAST  PAETICIPLE,  367 

and  my  sisters  have  also  gone  out.  10.  Mary's  grandmother  ap- 
pears afflicted.  11.  The  trees  have  been  felled.^  12.  Virtuous 
people  are  esteemed,  and  the  impious^  (are)  despised.  13.  The 
rule^  which  I  have  learned  is  very  easy.  14.  The  woman  I  have  seen 
is  very  handsome.  15.  Where  is  the  letter  which  you  have 
received?  16.  Here  it  is  {la  void)  ;  it  is  written  in  (en)  French. 
17.  The  horses  which  we  have  sold  were  very  old.  18.  How  many 
horses  have  you  sold  ?  19.  We  have  sold  them  all.  20.  Which 
house  have  you  taken?*  21.  How  many  books  has  he  bought? 
22.  Where  is  my  pen  ?  23.  I  have  not  seen  it.  24.  Where  are 
my  sisters  ?  25.  I  have  not  seen  them.  26.  Here  are  the  apples 
(which)  you  have  given  me;  I  have  not  eaten  them.  27.  The 
young  ladies  have  been  much  amused^  in  your  company.  28.  Gen- 
tlemen, you  are  mistaken.^  29.  She  has  repented  of  her  neglects 
fulness.^  30.  I  saw  (have  seen)  them  play  before  my  house.  31. 
The  singers^  whom  I  heard  singing  yesterday  were  Tyrolese.® 

1.  To  fell,  couper.    2.  Impie.    3.  Regie,  f.    4.  Louer.    6.  S'amuser.    6.  Se  tromr^ 
per.    7.  Negligence.    8.  Chanteur,  m.    9.  Tyroliens. 

THEME  62. 

1.  That  ^1  has  run  too  fast ;  she  is  out  of  breath.^  2.  My  aunt 
has  travelled  in  Italy.  3.  His  mother  (has)  lived^  in  this  house  for 
(pendant)  two  years.  4.  These  young  men  (gens)  have  studied 
French  and  Gennan.  5.  We  (have)  met  some  ladies  in  the  street. 
6.  Miss  Eliza  has  brought  a  bunch^  of  flowers.  7.  For  whom  has 
she  brought  them  ?  8.  She  (has)  brought  them  for  you.  9.  Have 
you  read  these  two  books?  10.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  yet  read  them. 
11.  I  have  read  another  book  which  your  brother  has  lent  me.  12. 
The  carpenter*  has  built  a  new  house,  and  he  has  sold  it  this  morn- 
ing to  Mr.  B.  13.  The  rain  which  has  fallen  this  morning  has 
spoiled  the  roads.  14.  We  have  bought  twenty  acres^  of  land.® 
15.  The  excessive  heat  which  we  had'^  last  summer  has  occasioned 
diseases.^  16.  There  came  a  person  that  I  did  not  know.  17. 
Why  are  these  plants  so  wet?^     18.  I  (have)  ordered^^  them  to  be 


368  XXII.      VINGT-DEUXIEME   LE^ON. 

watered.^**     19.  The  measures"  I  was  obliged^^  to  take  have  not  had 
the  expected  effeet.^^     20.  The  landlord^*  caused^^  them  to  be  paid. 

1.  Hors  (Vhaleine.  2.  Demeurer.  3.  Botiquet.  4.  Le  charpentier.  5.  Arpent, 
m.  6.  Terre.  7.  Put  the  Comp.  Pres.  of  the  impersonal  form  U  fait.  8.  Maladie, 
9.  Mouillees.  10.  Fairearroser.  11.  Mesure,  t.  12.  Faxt.  of  devoir.  13.  J^eif,  m. 
H.  Vaubergiste.    15.  Faire. 

THEME   63. 

1.  Where  is  your  gold  watch?  2.  I  have  sent  it  to  the  watch- 
maker.^ 3.  I  thought  you  had  allowed^  it  to  be  stolen.  4.  The 
two  horses  which  I  (have)  advised  you  to  buy  are  worth  (valeiit)  a 
thousand  francs.  5.  Happy  the  princes  who  have  always  used* 
their  power*  for  the  good^  of  their  people.  6.  You  must  (Jl  faut 
que  vous)  finish  the  letter  which  you  have  begun  to  write.  7.  The 
apples  which  T  have  forbidden  you  to  eat  are  not  ripe.  8.  How 
many  men^  commit  the  same  faults  which  they  had  resolved  to 
avoid.'  9.  We  have  showed®  him  all  the  honor  {pi.)  it  was  our 
duty  [to  show  him].  10.  My  friend  rendered  me  every  service^  he 
could.  11.  Have  you  bought  some  cigars?^''  12.  Yes,  I  have 
bought  [some].  13.  Are  not  these  trees  very  high  ?  14.  I  have 
seen  higher  ones.  15.  The  ship  which  we  saw  launched^^  has  now 
the  name  of  Arion.  16.  The  play^^  I  saw  performed^*  last  night 
has  been  very  much  applauded.  17.  Imitate  the  virtues  which  you 
have  heard  praised  {Inf.).     18.  We  used"  all  the  means  we  could. 

1.  Horloger.  2.  Laisser.  3.  Employer.  4.  Fouvoir,  m.  5.  Le  bien.  6.  Que 
d'kommes.  7.  Evitcr.  8.  Fait.  9.  Tous  les  services  qu\  10.  Cigarre,  m.  11.  Lan- 
cer.   12.  La  piece.    13.  Jouer.    14.  Employer. 


THE   PARTICIPLE   ABSOLUTE.  369 


XXIII.    YINGT-TROISIEME    LE9ON, 


THE  PARTICIPLE  ABSOLUTE. 

1.  The  Participle  Absolute  is  used,  as  in  English,  instead  of 
accessory  and  subordinate  clauses  beginning  with  a  conjunction 
which  have  the  same  subject  as  the  leading  clause.     Ex. :  — 

Regulus  s'e'loigna  de  Rome,  tenant  les  yeuxjix€s  a  la  teire,  et  laissant  safemrm 
et  ses  erifants. 

Uennemi,  voyant  (as  he  saw)  notre  petit  nomhre,  recommenga  le  combat. 

Neoptoleme,  poursuivant  son  discours,  me  dit,  etc. 

Le  charpentier,  laissant  son  outrage  a  moitie' fait,  alia  diner. 

L'empereur  Conrade,  ne  voulant  plus  tenter  la  fortune,  ahandonna  subitement 
la  Terre-Sainte,  etc. 

Ne  sacliant  que  /aire,  il  prit  ce  parti. 

2.  When  the  accessory  sentence  expresses  an  event  which  has 
taken  place  before  another  expressed  in  the  principal  sentence,  the 
compound  form  of  the  Participle  Absolute  (ayant  vu,  ayant  fait^ 
etc.)  is  used.     Ex. :  — 

Le  comte  de  Toulouse,  ayant  somm€  (having  summoned)  la  ville  de  se  ?-endre, 
la  declara  sa  possession. 

Le  roi  ayant  tout  sacrifi€  pour  le  bonheur  de  son  peuple,  fut  enjin  la  victime 
de  ses  bonnes  intentions. 

Lyeandre  ayant  fait  un  riche  butin  (booty)  dans  fa  prise  d'Athenes,  envoya  a 
Lace'de'mone  tout  Vor  et  Vargent  qu'il  avait  pris. 

THEME    64. 

1.  As  the  two  combatants  would  not  yield, ^  they  were  pierced 
with  wounds.^  2.  As  Mentor  heard  the  voice  of  the  goddess  who 
was  calling  her  nymphs  into  the  wood,  he  waked^  Telemachus.  3. 
Grantor,  seeing  that  I  was  already  very  near  him,  redoubled  his  zeal, 
and  attempted*  to  barricade  my  way.  4.  That  mountain,  command- 
ing an  extensive'  view,  was  well  calculated^  for  our  observations.  5. 
I  cannot  accompany  you  into  the  country,  having  some  business  that 
24 


370  XXIII.      VINGT-TROISIEME  LEgON. 

requires  my  presence  here.  6.  How  many  people  do  we  see,  who, 
knowing  the  value  of  time,  waste^  it  improperly.^  7.  Wishing  to 
make  something  of  my  son,  I  have  put  him  into  your  hands.  8. 
Newton,  having  taken  the  average^  of  years  during  which  the  kings 
of  the  various^^  countries  have  reigned,  reduced  each  reign  to  about 
twenty-two  years.  9.  Napoleon,  seeing  that  the  battle  of  Waterloo 
was  lost,  di-ew  his  sword  and  wished  desperately^^  to  fling  himself 
into  the  tumult  of  the  battle.  10.  Franklin,  [after]  having  looked 
everywhere  for  employment,^^  reentered  at  the  printer^^  Keimer's. 

1.  Cider.  2.  Be  coups.  3.  Eveiller.  4.  Chercher  a  barrer.  5.  Etendu.  6. 
Propre  a.  7.  Perdre.  8,  Mai  a  propos.  9.  Le  terme  moyen.  10.  Different.  11. 
En  desespiri.    12.  De  Voccupation.    13.  Chez  Vimprimeur  K. 

3.  The  Participle  Absolute  can  also  be  used  in  the  place  of  sub- 
ordinate sentences  beginning  with  a  conjunction,  if  they  have  a  dif- 
ferent subject.     Ex. :  — 

Le  roi  etant  mort,  son  Jils  lui  succ€da. 

The  king  being  dead  his  son  succeeded. 

La  ville  at/ant  ete  prise,  les  soldats  la  pillerent. 

The  town  being  taken,  the  soldiers  pillaged  it. 

Le  repas  €tant  fini,  nous  nous  mimes  en  route. 

When  diner  was  over,  we  set  off. 
J^tant  is  sometimes  omitted.    Ex. :  — 

Lie  repas  fini  (for  etant  fini),  nous  nous  mimes  en  route. 

When  dinner  was  over,  we  set  off. 

L'ope'ration  acheve'e,  le  roi  remonta  a  chevaL 

The  operation  being  performed,  the  king  mounted  again  on  horseback. 

Cette  disposition  finite,  nous  entrames  dans  la  salle  de  reception. 

When  this  arrangement  was  made,  we  entered  the  parlor. 

THEME    65. 

1.  My  mother  being  ill,  I  cannot  go  out  to-day.  -2.  Franklin, 
seeing  that  all  his  efforts  were  useless,  went  back  to  his  country,  in 
order  to  brave  the  storm^  with  his  countrymen.  3.  Wishing  to  see 
him,  I  went  to  his  house.  4.  Mary  and  her  brother  Henry,  per- 
ceiving a  pretty  butterfly,^  endeavored  to  catch^  it.  5.  The  gates 
being  closed,  we  could  not  enter.  6.  Philip  sent  deputies  to  the 
Scythians,*  demanding  (^pour  demander)  a  part  of  the  expenses^  of 


THE  PARTICIPLE  ABSOJ.UTE.  371 

the  seige ;  the  Scythians,  alleging^  the  barrenness''  of  their  land, 
replied  that,  having  no  riches  sufficient  to  satisfy  so  great  a  king, 
they  thought  [it]  more^  unfit  to  pay  but^  a  part,  than  to  refuse  the 
whole.  ^^  '  7.  The  wound  still  bleeding,^^  she  fainted.^^  8.  Every- 
body will  respect  the  magistrates  who,  forgetting  their  own  interest, 
observing  the  law,  favoring^^  virtue  and  restraining^*  vice,  seek  the 
welfare^^  of  their  country. 

1.  L'orage.,  m.  2.  Papillon,  m.  3.  Attraper.  4.  Scythe,  m.  5.  Les  frais.  6, 
AlUguer.  7.  La  sUriliU.  8.  Moins  convenable.  9.  De  ne  payer  qu''une  partie. 
10.  Le  tout.  11.  Saigner.  12.  S'evanouir.  13.  Favoinser.  14.  Reprimer.  15.  Lt 
Oien, 


READING  LESSON. 

GESLER   CONDUIT   TELL  A   KUSNACH. 

(Fin.) 

Enfin  I'orient^  se  colore,  et  la  tempete  semble  s'appaiser  aux  pre- 
miers rayons  de  I'aurore.  Le  jour  naissant  decouvre  a  Tell  les 
roches  voisines  d'Altdorf,  avant  que  le  tyran  ait  eu  le  temps  de  les 
reconnaitre ;  Guillaume  y  dirige  sa  barque  et  la  fait  marcher  plus 
rapidement.  Gesler,  dont  la  ferocite  revient  a  mesure  que  le  dan- 
ger s'^loigne,  observe  avec  des  yeux  sombres.  II  veut,  mais  il 
n'ose  pas  encore  le  faire  charger  de  liens.^  Ses  soldats  et  ses  mate- 
lots^  reconnaissent  bientot  ou  ils  sent,  en  instruisent  le  gouvemeur, 
qui  s'avan^ant  vers  Tell  avec  colere,  lui  demande  d'une  voix  terrible, 
pourquoi  la  barque,  qu'il  a  guidee,  a  repris  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Guillaume  sans  lui  repondre,  pousse  la  barque  droit*  k  un  rocher 
peu  eloign^  de  la  rive,^  saisit  d'une  main  prompte  Fare  et  la  fleche* 
qu'un  archer  tenait  a  la  main,  et,  rapide  comme  I'eclair,  s'elance^  de 
la  barque  sur  le  rocher.  La,  sans  s'arr^ter,  il  saute  sur  un  autre 
roc,  gravit®  aussitot  la  roche  escarpee,^  et  se  montre  sur  le  sommet, 
semblable  a  I'aigle  des  Alpes  quand  il  se  repose  aupres  des  nuages, 
et  qu'ii  promene  ses  yeux  per§ants  sur  les  troupeaux  des  vallons. 

Le  gouverneur  etonne  pousse  un  cri  de  fureur,  de  rage.  II  com- 
mando aussitot  qu'on  debarque,  et  que  ses  soldats,  disperses,  envi- 
ronnent  de  toutes  parts  le  roc  oil  il  voit  le  heros.     On  obeit ;  lea 


372  XXin.      VINGT-TEOISIEME    LEgON. 

archers  descendent  et  preparent  deja  leurs  arcs ;  Gesler,  qui  marche 

au  milieu  d'eux,  veut  que  leurs  fleches  reunies  s'abreuvent  toutes 

du  sang  de  Guilkume.     Guillaume  aussi  a  ses  desseins.    II  ne  s'ar- 

rete,  il  ne  se  montre  que  pour  attirer  Fennemi.     II  laisse  approcher 

cette  troupe  armee  jusqu'a  la  juste  distance  ou  son  trait^  pent  dou- 

ner  la  mort.     II  regarde,  fixe  Gesler,  pose  sa  fleche  sur  sa  corde,  et, 

I'adressant  au  coeur  du  gouverneur,  il  la  fait  voler^°  dans  les  airs. 

La  fleche  vole,  siffle,"  frappe  au  milieu  du  coeur  de  Gesler.     Le 

tyran  tombe,  begaie  sa  fureur,  et  son  ame  s'exhale  au  milieu  des 

imprecations.     Tell  a  deja  disparu ;  plus  leger  que  le  faon,^^  s'est 

precipite  du  sommet  du  roc,  il  court,  il  vole  sur  la  glace ;  il  gagne, 

traverse  des  sentiers^'^  deserts,  et  preud  le  chemin  d'Altdorf. 

Florian. 
1.  The  east.    2.  Fetters,  chains.     3.  Sailor.    4.  Straight.    5.  Bank.    6.  Arrow. 
7.  Jumps.    8.  To  climb  up.    9.  Steep.    10.  To  fly.    11.  To  hiss.    12.  The  fawn.    13. 
Path. 

QUESTIONNAIRE. 

Que  decouvre  le  jour  naissant  a  Tell  ? 
Que  fait  Gesler  ? 

Quelle  etait  1 'intention  de  Gesler  ? 

De  quoi  les  soldats  et  les  matelots  instruisent-ils  le  gouverneur  ? 
Quand  Gesler  aperyut  les  roches  d'Altdorf,  que  demanda-t-il  k 
Tell? 

Guillaume  lui  fit-il  une  reponse  ? 

Ou  pousse-t-il  la  barque  ? 

Que  saisit-il  d'une  main  prompte  ? 

Oil  s'elance-t-il  de  la  barque  ? 

A  qui  ressemble-t-il  quand  il  se  montre  sur  le  sommet  ? 

Qu'est-ce  que  le  gouverneur  commande  alors  ? 

Futril  obei  ? 

Gesler  que  veut-il  ? 

Jusqu'ou  Tell  laisse-t-il  approcher  la  troupe  ? 

Qui  veut-il  frapper  ? 

Sa  fleche  I'a-t-elle  atteint  ? 

Que  fait  Tell  alors? 

Quel  chemin  Tell  prend-il  ? 


GOVERNMENT   OF   VERBS. 


373 


XXIV.     VINGT-QUATRIEME    LE^ON. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  VERBS. 

1.  Many  verbs  which  in  English  require  a  preposition,  such  as 
at,  of,  from;  to,  with,  for,  etc.,  take  in  French  a  direct  object. 
Such  are  :  — 


approuver,  to  approve  of. 
attendre,  to  wait  for. 
chercher,  to  look  (seek)  for. 
connaitre,  to  be  acquainted  with, 

know. 
corisid&er,  to  look  upon. 
d€sirer,  to  wish  for. 
devenir,  to  become. 
€couter,  to  listen  to. 


envoyer  chercher,  to  send  for. 
esp€rer,  to  hope  for. 
expier,  to  atone  for. 
to    fournir,  to  supply  with. 
prier  Dieu,  to  pray  to  God. 
regarder,  to  look  at. 
rencontrer,  to  meet  with. 
r€soudre,  to  resolve  upon. 


Examples :  — 
Attendez-vous  voire  frere,  are  you  waiting  for  your  brother  ? 
Qu'etes-vous  devenu,  what  has  become  of  you  ? 
//  faut  envoyer  chercher  le  m€decin,  we  must  send  for  the  doctor. 

2.    The  following  verbs  which  in  English  usually  require  a  direct 
object  take  in  French  the  preposition  a :  — 

Apprendre  ">  qch.  a  qn.,  to  teach  one  permettre  a  qn.,  to  allow  one. 

enseigner     )  something.  plaire  a  qn.,  to  please  one. 

conseiller  qch.  a  qn.,  to  advise.  rem^diera  qch.,  to  remedy. 

convenir  a  qn.,  to  suite  any  one.  renoncer  a  qch.,  to  renounce,  abdicate 


d€plaire  a  qn.,  to  displease  one. 

d€sohdr  aqn.,  to  disobey  one. 

dire  a  qn.,  to  tell  some  one. 

faire  tort  a  qn.,  to  wrong  one. 

se  Jier  a  qn.,  to  trust  one. 

nuire  a  qn.,  to  hurt,  injure  one. 

ob^ir  a  qn.,  to  obey  one. 

ordonner  a  qn.,  to  order. 

pardonner  a,  to  pardon,  forgive  one. 

parvenir  a  qch.,  to  attain. 


something. 
re'stgner  a  qch..,  to  resign  something. 
r^sister  a  qn.,  to  resist  one. 
ressemhler  a  qn.,  to  resemble  one. 
subvenir  a,  to  relieve. 
succe'der  a,  to  succeed. 
se  soustraire  a,  to  keep  out  of  the 

way. 
survivre  a,  to  outlive,  survive. 
toucher  a  qch.,  to  touch  something. 


374  XXIV.      VINGT-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

Examples :  — 
Pouvez-vous  enseigner  le  latin  a  mon  Jils  ? 
Can  you  teach  my  son  Latin  1 
U  faut  oh€ir  a  vos  parents. 
You  must  obey  your  parents. 
On  ne  pent  pas  plaire  a  tout  le  monde. 
You  cannot  please  everybody. 
Ne  vous  fiez  pas  a  lui. 
Do  not  trust  him. 

THEME   66. 

1.  Who  teaches  your  brother  French?  2.  Mr.  R.,  who  is  a  very 
good  teacher.  3.  This  ribbon  does  not  please  my  sister.  4.  You 
have  wronged  your  neighbor;  you  have  hurt  his  credit  ;^  at  least  he 
says  so  Qe).  5.  A  good  christian  forgives  his  enemies.  6.  Miss 
Mary  resembles  her  mother  [very]  much.  7.  Will  you  allow  your 
pupils  to  to  take  a  walk  this  afternoon  ?  8.  Yes,  I  will  allow  them 
to  go  with  you.  9.  Children  must  obey  their  parents.  10.  The 
officer  disobeyed  the  orders  of  the  king.  11.  The  son  succeeded 
his  father.  12.  The  riches  of  the  count  would  have  relieved  the 
wants  ^  of  the  poor.  13.  He  who  wishes  to  please  everybody,  runs 
the  risk^  of  pleasing  (c?e  ne  plaire)  nobody.  14.  Louis  the 
Fourteenth  survived  his  son,  the  dauphi/i,  and  his  grandson.*  15. 
Do  not  touch  anything. 
1.  Credit,  m.    2.  Besoin,  m.     3.  Courir  risque.    4.  PetU-fils. 


3.  Verbs  which  require  in  English  the  prepositions  ©/"and  from 
are  generally  followed  in  French  by  de.  Besides  these,  the  follow- 
ing also  require  de :  — 

Accahler  de,  to  overwhelm.  approcher  de,     ) 

s'acquitter  de  qch,  to  discharge.  s^approcher  de,  j        approacn. 

s'affliger  de,  to  be  afflicted  at.  s'armer  de,  to  arm  one's  self  with. 

s'apercevoir  de,*   to  remark,  to  per-  avoir  besoin  de,  to  want,  to  require. 

ceive.  avoir  pitiede,  to  pity. 

*  Apercevoir,  when  not  a  pronominal  verb,  governs  the  direct  object  and  applies 
to  visible  things,  as :  J^apergus  une  flamme. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VERBS. 


375 


avoir  or  prendre  soin  de,  to  take  care 

of. 

bruler  de,  to  burn  with. 

charger  de,  ) 

,7      T    r  to  load  with. 
combler  de,  ) 

se  contenter  de,  to  be  satisfied  or  con- 
tented with. 
couvrir  de,  to  cover  with. 
se  dejier  de,  } 
sem^fierde,\^''^'^^'''^' 
d€pendre  de,  to  be  dependent  on. 
envelopper  de,  to  wrap  up  in. 
/aire  de,  to  do  with  (to  make  use  of). 
/aire  present  de,  to  present  with. 
feiiciterqn.  deqch.,  to  congratulate  on. 
fourmiller  de,  to  swarm  with. 
honorer  de,  to  honor  with. 
jouir  de  qch.,  to  enjoy. 
m€dire  de  qn.,  to  traduce,  to  slander. 
se  meler  de  qch.,  to  meddle  with. 
se  moquer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at. 


mourir  de,  to  die  of. 

munir  de,  to  furnish,  provide  with. 

se  passer  de  qch.,  to  do  without. 

perir  de,  to  perish  or  die  of. 

profiler  de  qch.,  to  profit  by. 

pourvoir  de,  to  provide  with. 

punir  de  qch.,  to  punish  for. 

r^compenser  de  qch,,  to  reward  for. 

regarder  de,  to  regard  with. 

se  rejouir  de,  to  rejoice  at. 

remercier  de  qch.,  to  thank  for  some- 
thing. 

remplir  de,  to  fill  with. 

se  repentir  de,  to  repent. 

rire  de,  to  laugh  at. 

se  souvenir  de,  to  remember,  to  recol- 
lect. 

sourire  de,  to  smile  at. 

triompher  de,  to  triumph  over. 

se  tromper  de,  to  mistake. 


Examples :  — 
Approchez-vous  du  feu,  come  near  the  fire. 
Je  me  suis  d€fi€  de  ses  promesses. 
I  distrusted  his  promises. 
On  m'accabla  de  reproches. 
They  overwhelmed  me  with  reproaches. 
Elle  sourit  de  noire  embarras. 
She  smiled  at  our  embarrassment. 


THEME   67. 

1.  He  was  overwhelmed  with  reproaches.^  2.  You  must  dis- 
charge that  obligation.  3.  Death  pities  nobody,  neither  rich  nor 
poor.  4.  Come  near  the  window.  5.  Nature  wants  few  things. 
6.  She  is  contented  with  little.  7.  Have  you  not  perceived  this 
mistake?  8.  No,  sir,  I  have  not  perceived  it  (en).  9.  The 
ground''  was  covered  with  snow.    10.  The  general  honored  me  with 


376  XXIV.       VINGT-QUATRIEME   LEgON. 

his  friendsliip.  11.  Your  brother  presented  me  with  this  silver  pen- 
holder.' 12.  The  impious*  mock  at  virtue  and  religio?z.  13.  Do 
not  meddle  with  my  affairs.  14.  Distrust  that  man  ;  he  will  laugh 
at  your  benefits^  when  he  no  longer  requires  them.  15.  Never  tra- 
duce (slander)  anybody.  16.  Mr.  A.  is  a  very  strong  man;  he 
enjoys  good  health.  17.  If  he  repents  his  faults,  I  will  pardon 
him.  18.  I  cannot  do  without  his  help.®  19.  I  hope  (that)  you 
will  profit  by  this  experience.  20.  Remember  your  promise.  21. 
I  remember  that  story  very  well.  22.  Everybody  rejoices  at  that 
victoiy.' 

1.  Jieproche,  m.    2.  Laterre.    3.  Porte-plume,  m..    4.  Jmpie.   5.  Bienfait,ra..   6. 
Secours,  in.    7.  Victoire,  f. 

4.    Verbs  with  different  governments.     The  following  verbs  have 
different  governments  according  to  their  different  significations :  — 

1.  Abuser  qn.,  to  deceive. 

abuser  de  qch.,  to  abuse,  to  misuse. 

2.  Assister  qn.,  to  assist,  to  help. 
assister  a  qch.,  to  be  present  at. 

3.  Changer  qch.,  to  change,  to  alter,  to  exchange. 

changer  de  qch.,  to  change,  to  change  one  thing  for  another. 
changer  en,  to  turn  into. 

4.  Convenir  de  qch.,  to  agree  (construed  with  etre). 
convenir  a  qn.,  to  suit. 

5.  Croire  qn.,  to  believe  some  one. 
croire  qch.,  to  believe  something. 
croire  a  qch.,  to  believe  in  something. 
croire  en,  to  believe  in. 

6.  Demander  qn.,  to  ask  or  inquire  for  some  one. 
demander  qch.,  to  ask  for  somothing. 
demander  a  qn.,  to  ask  a  person. 

demander  qch.  a  qn.,  to  ask  something  of  some  one  or  to  ask  some  one 
for  something. 

7.  Echapper  and  s'^chapper  de,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  out  of. 
€chapper  a,  to  escape  from,  i.  e.  to  avoid,  to  be  preserved  from. 

8.  Se  fdcher  de  qch.,  to  be  sorry  for. 

"       "      contre  qn.,  to  be  angry  at. 

9.  Insulter  qn.  or  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  to  offend  by  insults. 
insulter  a  qn.  or  a  qch.,  to  deride,  to  scorn,  to  insult. 

10.  Jouer  a  qch.,  to  play  at  a  game. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  VERBS.  377 

jouei'  de  I'argent,  to  play  for  money. 

jouer  d'uji  instrument,  to  play  (on)  an  instrument. 

86  jouer  de  qn.,  to  laugh  at,  to  deceive. 

11.  Manquer  (neuter  verb  without  a  government),  to  be  wanting  or  miss- 

ing. 
manquer  qn.  or  qck.,  to  miss,  to  fail  in. 
manquer  de  qch.,  to  be  wanting  in,  to  be  short  of. 
manquer  a  qn.  or  a  qch.  (also  contre  qch.),  to  fail  in,  to  omit. 

12.  R^pondre  a  qch.,  to  answer. 
r€pondre  de  qch.,  to  answer  for. 

13.  Satisfaire  qn.,  to  satisfy,  to  content. 

satisfaire  a  qch.,  to  fulfil  duties  to  .  .  .  ,  to  satisfy. 

14.  S^vir  qn.,  to  serve  one,  to  be  at  one's  service. 
servir  de  qch.,  to  serve  as  something,  for  some  one. 

15.  Souscrire  qch.,  to  subscribe,  to  sign. 
souscrire  a  qch.,  to  approve  of,  to  subscribe  to. 

16.  User  qch.,  to  use  up,  to  wear  out. 
us&r  de  qch.,  to  make  use  of,  to  use. 

Examples :  — 

On  a  chang€les  conditions,  they  have  altered  the  conditions. 
Tai  change  de  logement,  I  have  taken  other  lodgings. 
Que  demandez-vous,  what  do  you  ask  for  ? 
Demandez  a  voire  mere,  ask  your  mother. 

J'ai  demands  mon  argent  a  mon  oncle,  I  have  asked  my  money  of  my 
uncle. 
R^pondez  a  ma  question,  answer  my  question. 
Pouvez-vous  repondre  de  sa  probite,  can  you  answer  for  his  honesty  ? 

5.    Special  remarks  on  some  verbs. 

1.  Acheter  qch.  a  qn.,  to  buy  something  of  some  one. 

2.  Aider  qn.,  to  succor,  to  support,  to  give  means  of  doing, 
aider  a  qn.,  to  help,  to  aid  physically  in  doing  something. 

3.  Applaudir,  to  applaud  something,  governs  the  dir.  obj. 
applaudir,  to  applaud  a  person,  governs  the  ind.  obj. 

4.  Approcher  qch.  (active  verb),  to  approach,  to  advance,  to  bring  or  push 

near. 
approcher  qn.,  to  approach  —  to  have  free  access. 
approcher  de  qn.  or  de  qch.,  to  approach  some  one  or  something,  to  go 

or  draw  nearer  (see  §  3). 

5.  Emjjrunter,  to  borrow,  governs  the  indirect  object  of  the  person  when 


378  XXIV.      VINGT-QUATRIEME  LEgON. 

represented  by  a  personal  pronoun  (such  as  lui,  leur,  nous,  etc.).  But 
it  requires  a  or  de  when  the  person  is  expressed  by  a  noun  (as :  a 
or  de  mon  frere,  of  my  brother. 

6.  En  croire  qch.,  to  trust,  to  depend  upon. 

7.  H^riter  qch.  de  qn.,  to  inherit  something  from  some  one.     If,  however, 

no  person  is  mentioned,  the  thing  follows  the  preposition  de. 

8.  Persuader  qn.  de  qch.,  to  convince  a  person  of  the  truth  of  a  thing. 
persuader  qch.  a  qn.,  to  persuade  one  to  do  something. 

9.  Redoubler  qch.  (dir.  obj.),  means  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  reiterate. 
redoubler  de  qch.,  to  redouble,  i.  e.  to  augment  in  force. 

10.  Penser  a  means  to  have  one's  mind  upon. 
penser  de,  to  have  an  opinion  of. 

Examples :  — 
Approchez  la  table,  approach  the  table  (bring  it  nearer). 
Tout  le  monde  pent  approcher  notre  prince. 
Everybody  has  free  access  to  our  prince. 
iVe  vous  approchez  pas  tant  du  hord. 
Do  not  go  so  near  the  edge. 
Pensez  a  moi,  think  of  me.  • 

Que  pensez-vous  de  cela,  what  do  you  think  of  that  1 

6.  On  the  verb  faire.  The  verb  faire  when  followed  by  an 
Infinitive  with  a  dir.  obj.,  requires  the  person  in  the  ind.  obj.,  the 
two  verbs  being  considered  as  one  verbal  expression  the  sense  of 
which  is  is  always  active.  The  reason  of  it  is  that  an  active  verb 
cannot  have  two  direct  complements  (see  L.  XXII,  10).     Ex.  :  — 

Je  lui  ai  fait  €crire  cinquante  mots. 
I  have  made  him  write  fifty  words. 
Sa  mere  lui  a  fait  raconter  cette  histoire. 
His  mother  caused  him  to  relate  that  story. 

But  if  there  be  no  direct  object  after  the  Infinitive  that  follows 
/aire,  the  person  stands  in  the  direct  object.     Ex.:  — 

Je  les  ai  fait  partir,  I  have  made  them  depart. 
Nous  les  avons  fait  renoncer  a  leur  pretentions. 
We  have  made  them  abandon  their  pretentions. 

7.  The  verbs  ecouter,  entendre,  laisser  and  voir,  also,  are  some- 
times used  in  this  manner,  as  :  — 


GO.YERNMENT   OF  VERBS.  379 

Je  lui  at  vu  maltraiter  son  chien. 
I  saw  him  ill-treat  liis  dog. 

But  this  ie  not  generally  adopted,  and  it  is  better  to  say :  — 
Je  I'ai  vu  maltraiter  son  chien. 
J'ai  vu  le  petit  gargon  (dir.  obj.)  maltraiter  son  chien. 

8.    When  the  Infinitive  is  followed  by  a  subordinate  sentence  with 
que,  the  indirect  object  is  preferred,  as  :  — 
"   Je  lui  at  entendu  dire  qu'il  partirait. 

I  heard  him  say  that  he  was  going  to  leave. 

J'ai  entendu  dire  a  son  pere  qu'il  lui  pardonneratt. 

I  heard  his  father  say  that  he  would  forgive  him. 

THEME  68. 

1.  The  jailer^  has  deceived  the  prisoner  with  respect  to  (swr)  the 
lot^  which  awaited  him.  2.  Have  you  not  abused  our  patience  ? 
3.  We  have  abused  it  (en).  4.  The  hour  from  10  to  11  does  not 
suit  my  sister.  6.  We  have  agreed  on  the  price. ^  6.  Let  us 
always  assist  the  poor.  7*  I  could  not  be  present  at  the  funeral.* 
8.  I  have  changed  my  opinion.  9.  Could  you  change  me  this 
napoleon?  10.  Industry  is  the  true  philosopher's^  stone  that 
changes  all  metals  into  gold.  11.  Whom  have  you  asked  for  ?  12. 
I  inquired  for  my  eldest^  brother.  13.  Have  you  asked  your  friend 
for  money?  14.  I  have  not  asked  him  for  any.  15.  Do  not  be- 
lieve that  man,  he  is  a  liar.^  16.  I  do  not  believe  in  his  promises. 
17.  We  believe  in  God.  18.  The  little  bird  has  escaped  from  his 
cage.  19.  Can^  you  play  at  chess  ?^  20.  No,  Sir,  but  I  will 
play  at  cards  with  you,  if  you  like.^^  21.  I  play  (on)  the  violin 
and  my  sister  plays  on  the  piano.  22.  We  often  play  together. 
23.  I  was  too  late,  I  missed  the  train.^^  24.  A  soldier  must  {doit) 
not  fail  in  courage.  25.  The  pupil  redoubled  his  applicatio?i,  when 
he  heard  that  a  prize ^  would  be  given.  26.  The  man'  is  too  poor, 
he  cannot  satisfy  his  creditors.^^  27.  Do  you  make  use  of  specta- 
cles?^^ 28.  Yes,  I  always  wear  spectacles;  I  am  short-sighted.^* 
29.  Malie  him  read  a  chapter  ^^  or  two.     30.  I  made  him  relate^^ 


380  XXV.      VINGT-ClNQtJlfiME  LEQCN. 

the  story  a  second  time.     31.  Charles  the  XII  made  all  that  mul- 
titude cross  ^^  the  river,  without  retaining  ^^  a  single  soldier  prisoner. 

1.  Le  geolier.  2.  ie  sort.  3.  Prix,  m.  4.  Funerailles,  f.  pi.  5.  Philosophe,  m. 
6.  Aine.  7.  Menteur.  8.  Savoir.  9.  ^wa;  echecs.  10.  FoMtoir.  11.  ie  convoi. 
12.  Creancier.  13.  Lunettes,  f.  pi.  14.  J'ai  ia  tn<e  ftosse.  15.  Chapitre,  m.  16. 
BoGonter.    17.  Repasser.    18.  /Saws  en  retenir. 


XXY.    YINGT-CINQUIEME    LE9ON 


IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS. 

Idioms  are  modes  of  speaking  peculiar  to  one  language,  which 
Cannot  be  literally  translated  into  another. 

Avoir,  to  have. 
Avoir  vingt  ans,  to  be  twenty  years  old. 
Avoir  mal  aux  yeux,  to  have  sore  eyes. 
Avoir  mal  a  la  tete,  to  have  a  {or  the)  headache. 
J'ai  froid  aux  mains,  my  hands  are  cold. 
Vous  avez  beau  parler,  it  is  in  vain  for  you  to  talk. 
J'ai  de  la  peine  a  le  croire,  I  can  hardly  believe  it. 
Avoir  froid,  to  be  cold,  — cluxud,  to  be  warm. 
Avoir  honte,  to  be  ashamed. 
*    Avoir  raison,  —  tort,  to  be  right,  —  in  the  wrong; 
Avoir  bonne  mine,  to  look  well. 
N' avoir  que  faire  de,  to  have  no  occasion  for. 
Avoir  grand  soif,  — faim,  to  be  very  thirsty,  —  hungry. 
Avoir  quelque  chose,  to  have  something  the  matter  with  one. 
Avoir  peur,  to  be  afraid. 
Avoir  sommeil,  to  be  sleepy. 
Avoir  soin,  to  take  care. 
Avoir  besoin,  to' have  need,  want. 
Avoir  sujet,  to  have  reason. 
Avoir  regret,  to  regret. 
Avoir  envie,  to  desire. 


IDIOM ATICAL   EXPRESSIONS.  381 

Avoir  coutume,  to  be  accustomed. 

Avoir  lieu,  to  take  place. 

Avoir  beau,  to  be  in  vain. 

L'avoir  bdle,  to  have  a  favorable  opportunity  to  do  it. 

Mre,  to  be. 
Etre  en  €lat  de,  to  afford. 
Eire  a  son  aise,  to  be  in  good  circumstances. 
Etre  mal  avec  quelqii'un,  to  be  out  of  favor  with  some  one. 
Etre  de  moiti€,  to  go  halves. 
Etre  a  la  port^e,  to  be  within  reach. 
Etre  sur  le  point  de,  to  be  very  near  to,  to  be  going  to. 
II  en  est  de  .  .  .  ,  it  is  with,  it  is  the  case. 
Etre  ricke  de,  to  be  worth,  to  possess.     When  a  person  is  the  subject, 

valoir  is  never  used  in  this  sense. 
H  est  riche  de  douze  mille  piastres,  he  is  worth  twelve  thousand  dollars. 
Etre  en  retard,  to  be  late. 
Etre  a  meme  de,  to  be  able  to. 
Etre  en  peine  de,  to  be  uneasy  about- 
Etre  en  vie,to  be  alive. 
Etre  en  chemin  pour,  to  be  on  the  way  to* 
Etre  au  fait,  an  courant  de,  to  be  familiar  with. 
Etre  a  la  veille  de,  on  the  eve  of. 
Etre  de  trop,  to  be  in  the  way. 
Etre  Men  avec,  to  be  on  good  terms  with. 
Etre  brouill€  avec,  on  bad  terms  with. 

Etre  aux  prises  avec,  to  be  in  open  rupture,  quarrel  or  battle  with. 
Etre  d'avis,  to  be  of  opinion. 
Y  etre,  to  be  at  home. 
Etre  d' accord,  to  be  in  tune. 

Ce  piano  n'est  pas  d'accord,  this  piano  is  not  in  tune. 
Nous  sommes  d'accord,  we  agree. 
Vous  n'y  etes  pas,  that  is  not  it. 

Faire,  to  do,  to  make. 

Faire  savoir  qn.,  to  let  one  know,  to  send  word. 

Faire  chaud,  faire  froid,  to  be  warm,  —  cold  (of  the  weather). 

Se  faire  des  amis,  to  get  friends. 

Faire  faire,  to  get  made. 

Faire  semblant  de,  to  pretend. 


382  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME  LEQCN. 

Faire  attention,  to  pay  attention. 

Faire  cos  de,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

Faire  un  tour  de  promenade,  to  take  a  walk. 

Faire  voile  or  mettre  a  la  voile,  to  set  sail. 

Faire  de  son  mieux,  to  do  one's  best. 

Ne  faire  que,  to  do  nothing  but. 

C'en  est  fait  de  moi,  I  am  undone,  it  is  over  with  me. 

Vous  feriez  mieux  de  rester,  you  had  better  stay. 

Faites-moi  grace  de  tons  ces  details,  spare  me  particulars. 

Faire  raccommoder,  to  have  mended 

Faire  la  cuisine,  to  cook. 

Faire  tort  a,  to  injure. 

Faire  bouillir,  to  boil. 

THEME  69. 

1.  How  old  was  your  father  wlien  he  died  ?  2.  He  was  seventy. 
3.  And  your  mother?  4.  She  was  almost^  eighty.  5.  I  do  not 
remember  to  have  ever  been  so^  thirsty  as  I  was  yesterday.  6. 
Warm  yourself,  if  you  are  cold ;  my  feet  are  not  cold,  because  I 
have  walked  much,  but  my  Ijands  are  so  cold,  that  I  cannot  write. 
7.  There  are  some  walks  ^  in  our  park  which  are  three  hundred  feet 
long.  8.  You  are  in  the  vrrong,  and  he  is  in  the  right.  9.  It  is 
in  vain  for  you  to  ask  money  from  a  miser,  he  will  ne^er  give  you 
any.  10.  Is  it  cold  this  morning?  11.  Yes  sir,  it  is  very  cold; 
however,  I  do  not  think  it  is  quite  so  cold  as  it  was  yesterday.  12. 
The  weather  is  very  inconstant;  it  was  hot  yesterday,  it  is  cold 
to-day;  it  rained  this  morning;  it  is  fine  weather  now,  but  perhaps 
it  will  rain  again  before  (it  be  ^)  night. 
1.  Pres  de.    2.  Si.    3.  Allee,  f.    4.  Faire  (Subj.). 


Donner,  to  give. 

Donner  dans  le  pi^ge,  to  be  caught  in  the  snare. 

Donner  sur  le  jardin,  to  look  out  on  the  garden. 

Donner  carte  blanche,  to  give  full  powers. 

Donner  sur  I'ennemi,  to  fall  upon  the  enemy. 

Ne  savoir  ou  donner  de  la  tete,  to  know  not  what  way  to  turn. 

Ce  vin  donne  a  la  tete,  that  wine  flies  up  to  the  head. 


IDIOMATICAL  EXPRESSIONS.  383 

Donner  un  coup  ck  main,  to  help. 

Donner  a  pleines  mains,  to  give  largely. 

Se  donner  des  airs,  to  take  a  great  deal  on  one's  self. 

Se  donner  la  peine,  to  take  the  trouble. 

Jouer,  to  play,  etc. 

Jouer  d'un  instrument,  to  play  (upon)  an  instrument* 

Joueraqudquejeu,  to  play  at  some  game. 

Jouer  une  piece  de  theatre,  to  act  a  play. 

Jouer  un  tour  a  qn.,  to  serve  (play)  one  a  trick. 

Se  parte)',  to  be  (in  reference  to  health). 

II  se  porte  bien,  he  is  well. 

Aimer  mieux,  to  have  rather,  to  choose  rather. 

AHer  a  bride  abattue,  to  go  at  full  speed. 

Dormir  la  grasse  matinee,  to  sleep  very  late. 

Prendre  en  mauvaise  part,  to  take  amiss. 

S'y  bien  prendre,  to  go  the  right  way  to  work. 

S'y  prendre  mal,  to  go  the  wrong  way  to  work. 

Se  passer  de,  to  do  without. 

Trouver  mauvais  que,  to  take  ill  if. 

Trouver  son  maitre,  to  meet  with  one's  match. 

Trouver  a  redire,  to  find  fault  with. 

Savoir  bon  gr€,  to  be  thankful  for. 

Tenir  parole,  to  keep  our  word. 

Ne  tenir  qu'a,  to  be  in  a  person's  power. 

II  ne  tient  pas  a  moi  que,  it  is  not  my  fault. 

S'en  tenir  a,  to  stand  to. 

Faire  tenir,  to  forward. 

Venir  a  bout  de,  to  bring  about,  to  accomplish. 

En  vouloir  a,  to  have  a  spite  against,  to  be  vexed  with. 

Je  voudrais  pouvoir,  I  wish  I  could. 

II  y  va  de  votre  vie,  your  life  is  at  stake. 

Venir  de,  to  have  just  done  something. 

En  venir  aux  mains,  to  come  to  blows. 

THEME   70. 

1.  How  do  you  do  this  morning?  2.  I  am  very  well,  I  thank 
you.  3.  And  how  does  your  sister  do  ?  4.  She  is  not  well ;  she 
has  been  ill  for  these  two  months,  and  I  fear  she  will  never  be  well 
again.     5.  And  your  brothers,  how  are  they  ?     6.  The  youngest  ia 


381  XXV.      VINGT-CINQUIEME  LEgON. 

very  well,  but  I  do  not  know  how  the  eldest  does,  because  we  have 
not  heard ^  of  Mm  for^  these  two  months;  he  was  very  well  when 
he  wrote  to  us  last.^  7.  It  is  with  the  diseases  of  the  heart  as  with 
those  of  the  body,  some  are  real,^  and  some  imaginary.  8.  It  is 
with  men  of  learning  as  with  ears^  of  corn;  they  raise  their ^  heads 
while  they  are  empty,  and  when  they  are  full,  they  begin  to  droop/ 
9.  It  is  with  your  son  as  with  other  children.  10.  I  do  not  think 
it  will  be  with  my  son  as  it  was  with  yours. 

1.  Avoir  de  ses  nouvdles.     2.  For  these— depuis.     3.  La  derniere  fois.    4.  lieel. 
5.  Epis  de  hie,     6.  Def.  Art.    7.  Fencher, 

THEME  71. 

1.  I  have  great  pain^  in  my  side.  2.  He  has  sore  eyes.  3.  He 
has  a  sore  foot.  4.  My  lips  are  sore.  5.  She  had  the  toothache 
yesterday,  now  she  has  a  headache ;  to-morrow,  perhaps,  she  will 
have  the  ear^-ache.  6.  When  I  was  young,  I  often  had  the  head- 
ache. 7.  Why  do  you  not  eat,  if  you  are  hungry?  8.  I  am  not 
very  hungry,  I  can  wait  [till]  dinner  time,^  but  I  am  very  thirsty, 
and  I  will  thank*  you  for'^  a  glass  of  wine.  9.  It  is  very  cold 
to-day.  10.  It  was  cold  yesterday.  11.  It  will  be  hot  soon.  12. 
I  am  thirsty.  13.  He  is  hungry.  14.  My  sister  is  not  well,  she 
has  not  been^  well  for  three  weeks,  she  has  a  headache  to-day. 
15.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  rise  this  morning?  16.  I  rose  at 
four  o'clock.  17.  It  is  in  vain  for  you  to  say  so,  I  do  not  believe 
you. 

1.  Bien  mal.    2.  Oreille.    3  Le  diner,    i.  Prier.    6.  De  me  donner.    6.  Se  pot'' 
ter,  use  the  Present  tense. 


ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


OF  THE  WORDS  THAT  OCCUR  IN  THE  THEMES. 


Able  (to  be),  pouvoir.  irr.  see  p.  190. 

About,  environ,  see  also  p.  301. 

Absolve,  V.  a.,  absoudre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Abstain,  8''abstenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Abundance,  abondance,  f. 

Abuse,  dire  des  injures,  maltraiter. 

Accept,  agreer,  accepter. 

Accompany,  accompagner. 

Account,  compte,  m. 

Acquaintance,  connaissance,  f. 

Acquire,  acquerir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Act,  agir. 

Action,  action,  f. 

Admirable,  admirable. 

Admiral,  amiral,  m. 

Admit ,  admettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Advantafje,  avantage,  m. 

Affair,  affaire,  f. 

Afraid  (to  be),  avoir  peur. 

After,  apres. 

Afternoon,  apres-midi,  m.  f. 

Again,  encore. 

Against,  contre. 

Age,  age,  m,  [old  age,  vieillesse,  f.j 

Agree,  convenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Agreeable,  agreoble. 

Agriculture,  agriculture,  f. 

Alike,  pareil. 

All,  tout ;  all  that,  tout  ce  qui,  see  p.  127. 

Alley,  allce. 

Allow,  permettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Almost,  presque. 

Already,  deja. 

Also,  aussi. 

Always,  toujours. 

Ambitious,  ambitieux. 

Amiable,  aimable. 

Among,  parmi. 

Amuse,  amuser,  entretenir. 

Ancestors,  ancetres,  aieux. 

And,  et. 

Anger,  colere. 

Angry,  f ache. 

Auigry  (to  be),  se  fdcher. 

A.nimal,  animal. 

25 


Anoint,  oindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Answer,  v.,  repondre. 

Answer,  n.,  reponfie.  f. 

Any  (with  neg.),  aucun,  pas  de. 

Anybody  (after  neg.),  personne. 

Any  more  (after  nog.),  plus. 

Appear,  paraitre,  irr.  see  p.  178, 

Appetite,  appetit,  m. 

Apple,  pomme,  f. 

Apply  to,  s^adresser. 

Approach,  approcher, 

April,  avril,  m. 

Arm,  b7'as,  m. 

Army,  armee,  t. 

Arrive,  arriver. 

Art,  art,  m. 

Artist,  artiste. 

As,  comme;  (so)  as  —  as,  aussi — que. 

Ashamed,  honteux. 

Ashes,  cendre,  f. 

Ask,  demander. 

Assiduity,  assiduite. 

Assist,  assister,  secourir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Assistance,  secours,  m. 

Astonishing,  ttonnant. 

At,  a,  en  ;  see  p.  302 :  at  home,  h  la  mat- 

son ;  at  your  house,  chez  vous ;  at  first, 

d'abord',  at  once,  tout  d'un  coup  i  at 

all,  dutout. 
Attack,  attaquer. 
Aiiam,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p.  175;  parve- 

nir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Attention,  attention,  f. 
Attentive,  attentif. 
Attract,  attirer. 
Au<?ust,  aotit,  m. 
Aunt,  tante,  f. 
Author,  auteur. 
Avarice,  avarice,  f. 
Avaricious,  avaricieux. 
Avoid,  eviter. 
Avow,  avouer. 


B. 


Bad,  mauvais. 
Ball,  balle,  f.,  bah  m. 

885 


386 


VOCABULARY. 


Bark,  aboyer. 

Barley,  orge,  f. 

Battle,  baiaille,  f. 

Be;ird,  barhe,  f. 

Beat,  hittre,  see  p.  107,  f  rapper. 

Beautiful,  beau. 

Because,  parce  que. 

Become,  devenir,  \vv.  see  p,  187. 

Bed  (to  sro  to),  se  coucher. 

Bee,  abeille,  f. 

Beer,  biere,  f. 

Before,  aviint,  devant,  see  p.  298. 

Bog,  prier,  meudier, — for  a  thing,  de- 

vmnder,  soIUciter. 
Begin,  commencer,  se  mettre  a,  see  p.  180. 
Behind,  derriere. 
Believe,  croire,  irr,  see  p.  177. 
Belong,  appartenir,  irr.  seep.  187. 
JJetter,  meilleur,  superieur. 
Better,  adv.,  mieux,  to  be  better,  valoir 

mieux. 
Between,  e«<rg. 

Beyond,  au-defsus,  au  dela;  dela,  outre. 
Big,  grand,  gros. 
Bite,  mordre. 
Bird,  oiseau,  ra. 
Bitter,  ntner. 
Black,  noir. 
Blame,  bldmer. 
Blood,  sang,  m. 
Blush,  rougir. 
Boarding-house,  pension,  f. 
Body,  corps,  m.      Everybody,  chacun, 

toiit  le  monde.    Nobody,  per'sonne. 
Boil,  bouilUr,  irr.  see  p.  18(5. 
Bonnet,  chapeau,  m. 
Book,  Uvj'e,  m. 
Boot,  botte,  f. 
Born  (to  be),  naitre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 

Boy,  garcon,  m. 

Box,  'bolte,  cassette,  f. 

Bottle,  bouteille,  f. 

Brave,  brave,  courageux. 

Bray,  braire,  del".,  see  p.  197. 

Bread,  pain. 

Break  rompre,  see  p.  107,  casser,  brlser. 

Breakfast,  dejeuner. 

Bring,  apporfer. 

Brotlier, /rere,  —  in  law,  beMU-frere. 

Build,  bdtir,  construire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Burn,  bruler. 

Business,  affaires^  occupation,  f. 

But,  mais. 

Butter,  beurre,  m. 

Buy,  acheter. 

By,  par,  see  p.  302. 


Cabbage,  chou,  m. 

Calf,  veau,  m. 

Call,  appeler,  —  to  mind,  rappeler. 

Camel,  chameau,  m. 

Can,  seep.  190-1. 

Candle,  chandelle,  f. 

Cane,  canne,  f. 


Cap,  casqueite,  f. 

Carnival,  car  naval,  m. 

Care,  soin,  ni.     ' 

Carriage,  voiture,  f. 

Carry,  porter. 

Cast,  Jeter. 

Castle,  chateau. 

Cat,  chat  m. 

Cattle,  betail,  m.,  pi.  bestiaux. 

Cease,  cesser. 

Celebrated,  celehre. 

Chair,  chaise  f. 

Chamber,  chambre,  f. 

Chase  chasse,  f. 

Chastise,  chatter. 

Clieese,  fromage,  m. 

Cherry,  cerise,  f. 

Ciiild,  enjant,  m.  f. 

Choose,  choisir. 

Church,  eglise,  f. 

City,  ville,  f. 

Class,  classe,  f. 

Clean,  net. 

Clean,  v.,  nettoyer. 

Cloak,  manteau,  m. 

Cloth,  drop,  m. 

Clothe,  vetir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 

Cloud,  nuage,  m. 

Coacli,  carrosse,  m. 

Coast,  cote,  f. 

Coat,  habit,  m. 

Colfee,  cafe,  m. 

Gold, /raid. 

Colorj  cnuleur,  f. 

Come,  ve7iir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  arriver,  — 

down,    descendre,  —  in,    entrer,  —  ia 

again,  r entrer. 
Comfort,  v.,  consoler. 
Comfort,  n.,  agrement,  m. 
Command,  oriire,  m. 
Command,  v.,  commander,  ordonner. 
Commence,  commencer. 
Commerce,  commerce,  m. 
Complain,  se  jilaindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Compel,  contraindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Comrade,  camarnde.  m. 
Conceal,  cacher,  taire,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Conceive,  conctvoir,  irr.  see  p.  189. 
Conduct,  n.,  conduite. 
Conduct,  v.,  conduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Confess,  avouer. 
Confidence,  confiance,  f. 
Conflagration,  Incendie,  m. 
Conquer,  vaincre,  irr.  see  p.  174;   con' 

qtierir,  irr.  see  p.  188. 
Conqueror,  vainquetir,  m. 
Con.sent,  consentir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Consequence,  suite,  f. 
Consider,  considerer. 
Constrain,  contraindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Construct,  construire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Contain,  renfermer,  contenir,  irr.  see  p. 

187. 
Contented,  content. 
Continue,  continuer. 
Convince,  convaincre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Cook,  cuire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 


VOCABULARY. 


387 


Cool, /rm's,  fern,  fraiche. 

Copy-book,  cahier,  m. 

Corn,  ble,  m.,  —  market,  halle  aux  bles. 

Correct,  corriger. 

Cost,  couter. 

Country,  pays,  m.,  campagne,  f. 

Courage,  courage,  m. 

Course,  cours,  m. 

Cousin,  cousin,  m.,  cousine,  f. 

Cover,  couvrir,  irr.  see  p.  385. 

Cow,  vache,  f. 

Creator,  createur,  m. 

Creditor,  creancier,  m. 

Crime,  crime,  m. 

Cry,  crier,  pleurer. 

Cup,  coupe,  tasse,  f. 

Currant,  groseille,  f. 

Custom,  coutume,  f. 

Cut,  couper,  tailler. 


Damp,  Tiumide. 

Danger,  danger,  m. 

Dark,  sombre. 

Daughter,  ^Zte,  f. 

Dawn,  v.,  j)oindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Day,  JoMr,  m.  journec,  f.  day-light,  Jot/r. 

Deaf,  sourd. 

Dear,  cfter. 

Death,  Tworf,  f. 

Debt,  dette,/. 

Deceive,  tromper,  decevoir,  irr.  see  p. 
.189. 

December,  dicembre,  m. 

Decision,  decision,  f. 

Deer,  chevreuil,  cerf,  m. 

Defect,  defaut,  m. 

Defend,  defendre. 

Delight,  sej)laire  a,  irr.  see  p.  178. 

Demolish,  demolir. 

Deny,  wier,  disconvenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Depart,  partir,  irr.  p.  183. 

Departure,  depart,  m. 

Depend,  dependre. — upon  or  on,  comp- 
ter 8ur. 

Depict,  depeindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Describe,  decrire,  irr.  see  p.  176. 

Deserve,  meriter. 

Desire,  ctesir,  m. 

Despise,  mepriser. 

Destroy,  detruire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Die,  mourir,  irr.  see  p.  186. 

Difficult,  difficile. 

Difficulty,  difflculte,  f. 

Diligent,  appliqud. 

Dine,  v.,  diner. 

Dinner,  n.,  diner,  m. 

Direct  (a  letter),  adresser. 

Directly,  tout  de  suite,  a,  IHnstant, 

Direction,  adresse,  f. 

Disappear,  disparattre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 

Discontented,  mecontent. 

Discover,  decouvrir,  irr.  see  p.  185. 
inventer. 

Disease,  maladie,  f. 


Displease,  deplaire,  irr.  see  p.  178. 

Dissatisfy,  mecontetiter. 

Dissolve,  dissoudre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Distinguish,  distinguer. 

Distress,  affliger. 

Divide,  diviser,  partager. 

Do, /aire,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Dog,  chien,  m. 

Door,  porte,  f,  door- way,  portail. 

Doubt,  douter. 

Doubtful,  douteux. 

Draw,  tirer,   attirer,  —  after,  entrainer 

—  (pictures),  dessiner —  upon  one's  self, 

s^attirer. 
Dream,  songer,  rever. 
Dress,  habiller,  purer,  vetir. 
Drink;  boire,  irr.  see  p.  177. 
'Dro\>,goutte,  f. 
Drunk  and  drunken,  ivre. 
Dry,  sec. 

Duck,  canard,  m.  •    " 

Dumb,  mu^t. 
During,  pendant. 
Dust,  poussiere,  f. 
Duty,  devoir,  m. 
Dwell,  demeurer,  habiter. 
Dye,  teindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 


E. 

Ear,  oreille,  f. 

Early,  de  bonne  heure. 

Earth,  terre,  f. 

Easily,  facilement. 

Easy,  aise,  facile. .  • 

Eat,  manner. 

Edition^  edition,  impression,  f. 

Educate,  clever. 

Education,  education,  f. 

Effort,  effort,  m. 

Egg,  aetif,  m. 

Elect,  elire,  irr.  see  p.  177. 

Elephant,  elephant,  m. 

Ell  (measure),  aune,  f. 

Elm  (tree),  orme,  m. 

Eloquently,  eloquemmenf. 

Embarrass,  embarrasser,  deranger. 

Embellish,  embellir. 

Employ,  employer. 

End,  n.,  bout,  m.  (object)  j^w,  f.  hut^  m. 

End,  v.,finir,  cesser. 

Enemy,  ennemi,  m. 

Engine  (steam),  machine  a  vapeur. 

Enough,  assez. 

Enricli,  enrichir. 

Enter,  entrer. 

Entertain,  entretenir,  am/user. 

Entertaining,  amusant. 

Envy,  envie,  f. 

Equal,  egal,  pareil. 

Equality,  egalite,  f. 

Error,  faufe,  erreur,  f. 

Escape,  echapper,  se  sauver,  see  p.  105., 

fair,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Esteem,  estimer. 
Evening,  soir,  m.  soiree,  f. 


388 


VOCABULARY. 


Event,  4v4nement,  m. 

Ever,  jamais. 

Everybody,   cJiacun,  tout   le   monde,— 

thing,  timt,  —  where,  partout. 
Evil,  77ial,  m. 
Example,  exemple,  m. 
Execute,  executer,  s'aquitter  de. 
Exercise,  exercice,  theme,  m. 
Exhaust,  epuiser. 
Exist,  exister. 

Expect,  attendre,  s^atfendre  a. 
Extinct,  eteint.  To  become  —  s'eteindre. 
Extinguish,  efeindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Extract,  exfraire,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Extreme,  extreme. 
Eye,  ceil ;  pi.  yeux,  m. 


Fable,  fable,  m. 

Face,  face,  f.  visage,  m.  figure,  f. 

Fail,  faillir^  def.  see  p.  197,  manquer. 

Faint,  defatUir,  def.  see  p.  197. 

Faithful,  fidele. 

Fall,  tomber,  choir,  dechoir,  def.  see  p. 
189. 

Fall,  chxite,  f. 

False,  faux. 

Falsehood,  mensonge,  m. 

Familj^,  famille,  f. 

Fan,  evantail,  m. 

Far,  loin,  from  far,  de  loin. 

Fat,  gras. 

Fate,  sort. 

Facner,  pere, in-law,  beau-pere,  god- 
father, parrain. 

Yault,  faute,  f.  defaut,  m. 

Fear,  peur,  crainte,  f. 

Fear,  craindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Fearful,  craintif. 

Feather,  plume,  f. 

February,  fevrier,  m. 

Feed,  nourrir,  {graze)  paitre,  irr.  see  p. 
178. 

Feel,  sentir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Feign,  feindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Fellow-traveller,  compagnon  de  voyage. 

Ferocious,  feroce. 

Fertilize,  fertiliser. 

Few,  peu,  a ,  quelques. 

Field,  champ. 

Fight,  combattre. 

Fill,  emplir,  remplir,  rassasier,  combler. 

Find, trouver. 

Fine,  beau. 

Finish,  finir,  terminer,  achever. 

Fire,  feu,  m. 

Flag,  pavillion,  drapeau,  m. 

Flatter,  flatter. 

Flatterer,  flatteur,  m. 

Flee,  fair,  s''enfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 

Flesh,  chair,  f. 

Florin,  florin,  m. 

F\our,  farine,  f. 

Flourish,  fleurir,  see  p.  102. 

Flower,  fleur,  f. 


Fly,  mouche,  f. 

Fly,  fair,  s'enfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183,  voler. 

Fog ^  brouiUard,  m. 

Follow,  stiivre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 

Folly,  sottise,  folie,  f. 

Kool,  sot,  imbecile,  fou. 

Foolishness,  sottise,  betise. 

Foot,  pied,  m. 

For,  prep.  pour. 

For,  conj.  car,  as ,  quant  a. 

Forbid,  dsfendre,  God— —I  d  Dieu  ne 

plaise ! 
Forehead,  front,  m. 
Foreign,  etranger. 
Foresee,  prevoir,  irr.  see  p.  192,  pressen- 

tir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Forest,  foret,  f. 
Forget,  oublier.  ^ 

Forgive,  pardonner. 
Fork,  fourchette. 
Formerly,  autrefois. 
Forsake,  abandonner. 
Fortnight,  quinze  jours. 
Fortune,  fortune,  f. 
Forward,  and  forwards,  en  avant,  sur  le 

decant. 
Found,  fonder. 
Freeze,  geler. 
Frequently,  souvent. 
Fr es h ,  frais ,  fern,  fraiche. 
Friday,  vendredi. 
Friend,  ami,  m.  amie,  f. 
Friendly,  amical. 
Friendship,  amitie.  ^ 
Fruit,  frxiit,  m.         "  . 

Full,  plein. 

Fulfil,  remplir,  satisfaire. 
Furniture,  meubles,  pi.  m. 


G. 

Gain,  gagner, (a  victory)  rempor- 

ier,  —  (affection,  hatred)  attirer. 

Game,  jeu,  (chase)  gibier. 

Gape,  bdiller. 

Garden,  jardin,  m. 

Gardener,  jardinier,  m. 

Gate,por^e,  f. 

Gather,  cueillir,  recueillir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

General,  general,  m. 

Generous,  genereux. 

Genius,  genie,  m. 

Gentleman,  gentilhomme. 

Gentleness,  douceur,  f. 

Get  up,  se  lever. 

Gift,  don,  m. 

Girl,^Z^e,  f. 

Give,  donner. 

Glad,  aise,  content. 

Gladly,  volontiers,  avec  plaisir. 

Glass,  verre,  m. 

Glitter,  reluire,  irr.  see  p.  171. 

Glory,  gloire,  f. 

Glove,  gant,  m. 

Go,  alter,  irr.  see  p.  194, —away  (set 
out),  8'en  aller,  partir,  irr.  see  p.  183, 


VOCABULARY. 


389 


—  far  from,  s^ eloigner  de,  — for,  aller 
chercher,  —  on,  continuer,  —  out,  sor- 
iir,  irr.  see  p.  184, —  out,  eteiiidre,  irr. 
see  p.  175. 

God,  Dieu,  m. 

Gold,  or,  m. 

Good,  n.,  le  Men. 

Good,  ad.,    bon,    sage.      To   be for 

nothinpr,  ne  valoir  rien. 
Good- will  i  bienveillance,  f.-  * 

Goodness,  bonte,  f. 
Govern,  gouverner. 
Gown,  robe,  f. 
Grammar,  grummaire,  i. 
Grandfather,  grand-pere,  aiend. 
Grandmother,  grand'mere. 
Grant,  accorder. 
Grass,  herbe,  verdure,  f. 
Graze,  paltre,  irr.  see  p.  178. 
Great,  grand. 
Green,  vei^t. 

Grief,  douleur,  f,  peine,  f. 
Grind,  moudre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 

Ground,  terre.    On  the a,  par  terre. 

Grow,  croitre,  irr.  see   p,   178,  —  lean, 

maigrir,  —  old,  vieillir  — pale,  pdllr, 

—  red,  rougir,  —  tall,  grandir,  —  thin, 
maigrir,  —  worse,  empirer. 

Guilty,  coupable. 


Hail,  n.,  grele,  f. 

Hail,  v.,  greler. 

Half,  n.,  nioitie,  f. 

Half,  ad.,  demi. 

Hand,  main,  f. 

Handkerchief,  mouchoir,  m. 

Handsome,  beau. 

Happen,   arriver,  survenir,  irr.  see  p. 

187. 
Happily,  heureusement. 
Happiness,  bonheur,  m. 
Happy,  heureux. 
Hard,  dur,  difficile. 
Hardly  at  all,  ne  —  guere,  —  ever,presque 

jamais. 
Hare,  lievre,  m. 
Harvest,  moisson,  rdcolte. 
Haste,  and  Hasten,  hater,  se  depecher, 

s'empresser. 
Hat,  chapeau,  m.     To  put  on  one's  — , 

mettre  son  chapeau,  se  couvrir.     To 

take  off  oDe's.  hat,  oter  son  cliapeau,  se 

decouvrir. 
Hate,  ha/ir,  see  p.  102. 
Hatred  haine,  f. 
Hay,/oftt,  m. 
Head,  tete,  f. 
Heal  guerir. 
Health,  sanU,f. 

Hear,  entendre,  outr^  def.  see  p.  198. 
Heart,  cceur,  m. 
Heat,  chaleur,  f. 
Heaven,  del,  pi.  ciev,x,  m. 
Heavy,  lour  id,  pesant. 


Helm,  gouvernail,  m. 

Henceforward,  desormais,  dor4navant. 

Here,  id,  y. 

Heretofore,  autrefois. 

Hide,  cacher. 

High,  haut,  elev4. 

Hill,  colline,  f.  cotecm,  m.,  montagne,  f. 

Hinder,  empecher. 

History,  histoire,  f. 

Hit,  frapper,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Hive,  ruche,  f. 

Hoist,  hisser. 

Hold,  tenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 

Hole,  trou,  m. 

Holiday,  conge,  m. 

Home,  au  logis,  a  la  maison,  chcz  soi,  see 

p.  37. 
Honest,  honnete. 
Honor,  honneur.  m. 
Hope,  n.,  espdrance,  f.,  espoir,  m. 
Hope,  v.,  esperer. 
Horse,  cheval,  m. 
Hot,  chatid. 
Hour,  heure.  f. 
House,  maison,  f. 
How,    comment,    combien,    que,  —  long 

(since  when)?  depuis  qu^ndl  —  many 

(much)  combien. 
However,  quelque. 
Human,  humain. 
Hunger, /aim,  f.     To  be  hungry,  avoir 

faim. 
Hunter,  chasseur,  m. 
Hunting,  chasse,  f. 

Hurt,  nuire,  irr.  see  p.  172,  blesser,  gdter. 
Husband,  mariy  epbux. 


Ice,  glace,  f. 

Idea,  idee,  f. 

Idle,  pai-esseux,. 

If,  si. 

Ill,  adj.,  malade. 

Ill,  adv.,mal. 

Illness,  maladie,  f. 

Image,  image,  f. 

Imagine,  imaginer. 

Immortal,  immortel. 

Importune,  importuner. 

Impossible,  impossible. 

In,  en,  dans,  see  p.  297,  and  p.  304. 

Inch,  pouce,  m. 

Increase,  accroitre,  croitre,  irr.  see  p. 

178,  augmenter. 
Incredible,  incroyable. 
Inconstant,  inconstant. 
Incur,  s^attirer,  encourir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Indeed,  vraiment. 
Infamous,  infdm,e. 
Infringe,  enfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Inhabit,  habiler^  demeurer. 
Inhabitant,  habitant,  m. 
Injure,  nuire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Ink,  encre,  f. 
Inkstand,  encrier,  m. 


390 


VOCABULARY. 


Inquire,  s^enquerir,  irr.  see  p.  188. 

Inquisitive,  curieux. 

Inscribe,  inscrire,  irr.  see  p.  176. 

Instruct,  instruire.  irr,  see  p.  172. 

Interrupt,  interrompre. 

Into,  dans,  see  p.  297. 

Introduce,  presenter,  introduire,  irr.  see 

p.  172. 
Invent,  inventer. 
Invite,  inviter. 
Iron,/er,  m. 
Island,  lie,  f. 
Ivory,  ivoire,  m. 


January,  Janvier,  m. 

Jealous,  jaloux. 

Jealousy,  jalousie,  f. 

Jewel,  bijou,  m. 

Join,  joindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Joy,  joie,  f. 

July,  juillet,  m. 

June,  juin,  m. 

Just,  juste. 

Justice,  justice,  f. 


K. 

Keep,  tenir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  (observe)  ob- 
server. 

Kill,  tuer. 

Kindness,  bonte. 

King,  roi,  m. 

Kingdom,  royaume,  m. 

Kitchen,  cuisine,  f. 

Knee,  genou,  m. 

Knife,  couteau,  m. 

Know,  connaitre,  irr.  see  p.  178,  savoir, 
irr.  see  p.  191. 

Knowledge,  science,  f.,  savoir,  m.,  cow- 
naissance,  f. 


Labor,  n.,  travail,  m.,  pi.  aux. 
Labor,  v.,  travaiUer. 
Laborious,  laborieux. 
Laconic,  laconiqv^. 
.  Lady,  dame,  f. 
Lamb,  agnenu,  m. 
Language,  langue,  f.,  langage,  m. 
Land,  ^erre,  f. 
Large,  gros,  grand. 
Last,  V  .durer,  continuer. 
Last,  adj.,  dernier,  passe. 
Lasting,  durable. 
Late,  adj.,/eM,  see  p.  247. 
Late,  adv.,  tard,  en  retard. 
Laugh,  rire,  irr.  see  pp.  194  and  107. 
Law,  loi,  f. 
Lawyer,  avocat.  m. 
IjSiZYiParesseux, 


Lead,  n.,plomb,  m. 

Lead,  v.,  mener,  —  into,  induire  en,  irr. 

see  p.  172. 
Leaf,  feuille,  f. 
League,  Ueue,  f. 

Learn,  apprendre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 
Learned,  savant. 
Least,  le  moindre.     At  the  — ,  du  moiws, 

(at  all  events),  au  moins,  in  the — , 

dti  tout.     ■ 
Leave  (of  absence),  conge,  m. 
Leave,  v.,  quitter,  laisser,  cesser.    Take 

—  of,  prendre  conge  de. 
Left,  gauche,  f. 
Leg,  jambe,  f. 
Lend,  prefer. 
Less,  mains. 
Let,    laisser,  —  us  •  go,     allons,  —  him 

know,  faites-lui  savoir,  (to  hire)  louer. 
Letter,  lettre,  f. 
Liar,  menteur,  m. 
Liberty,  liberie,  f. 
Lie,  gesir,  def.  see  p.  198. 
Lie,  mentir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Life,  vie,  f. 
Lift  up,  lever,  eUver. 
Like,  parell,  adv.,  comme. 
L,ike\y,  probable,  vraisemblable. 
Lily,  lis,  m. 
Limit,  limiter,  borner,  restreindre,  see 

p.  175. 
Line,  ligne,  f. 
Linen,    toile,  f.      Unbleached—,    toile 

ecrue. 
Lion,  lion,  m. 
Listen,  ecotiter. 

Little,  tidi; petit,  a,6.v.,peu,  ne  —  guere. 
Live,  vivre,  irr.  see  p    181,  (dwell),  de- 

meurer,  habiter. 
Loadstone,  aimant,  m. 
Lock,  serrure,  f. 
Locksmith,  serrurier,  m. 
Long,  adj.,  long,  fem.  tongue,  adv.,  long- 

temps,  depuis  longtemps. 
Look  at,  regarder,  —  for,  chercher. 
Looking-glass,  miroir. 
Lose,  perdre. 
Loss,  perte,  f. 
Love,  n.,  am,our,  m. 
Love,  v.,  aimer,  —  dearly,  cherir. 
Low,  bas. 
Luxury,  luxe,  m. 


M. 

Mad,/oM,  insensS. 

Madam,  Madame. 

Magnificent,  magnifique. 

Maintain,  maintenir,  irr.  see  p.  187, 
nourrir. 

Make, /aire,  irr.  see  p.  180,  —  up  a  quar- 
rel, a/Ms^er  une  querelle,  —  haste,  se 
depecher. 

Man,  homme,  m. 

Manners,  mceurs,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


391 


Many,  plusieurs,  beaucoup,  Men  des.    So 

— ,  tant,  tavt  rfe,  autaut.  As  —  as,  au- 

tant  que.    Too  — ,  trop. 
Map,  carte,  f. 
March,  mars,  m. 
Marriage,  mariage,  m. 
Marry,  viarier,  tpouser,  se  marier. 
Master,  n.,  niaitre,  m. 
Master,  v.,  dompter,  s^emparer  de. 
Matter,  matiere,  i'.,  affaire,  f.,  chose,  t. 
May,  7nai,  m. 

Meado\v,  2)re,  m.,  prairie,  f. 
Moal,  repus,  m.,farine,  f. 
Mean,  has. 
Means,  moyen,  m. 
Meat,  viande,  f. 
Meddle,  se  meler  (de). 
Medicine,  inMecine. 
Meet,  rencontrer. 
Melt,  fo7idre. 
Member,  niembre,  m. 
Memory,  mtmoire. 
Mend,  raccommoder,  —  a  pen,  tailler. 
Merchant,  negociant. 
Messenger,  messager. 
Metal,  mttal,  m. 
Middle,  milieu,  m. 
Mild,  doux. 
Milk,  lait,  m. 
Miller, mewuier,  m. 
Mind,  esprit,  m. 
Minute,  minute,  f. 
Miss,  Mademoiselle. 
Misfortune,  malheur,  m. 
Mislead,  egarer.  induire  en  erreur. 
Mist,  hrouillard,  m. 
Mistake,  v.,  se    tromper,    mdconnaitre, 

irr,  see  p.  179,  meprendre,  irr.  see  p. 

181. 
Mistake,  n.,  erreur,  f.,  faute,  f. 
Mistrust,  se  mcfier  de,  se  defter  de. 
Mock,  se  mx)quer  de,  rire  de,  irr.  see  p. 

194. 
Modern,  moderne. 
Modest,  modeste. 
Modesty,  modestie,  f. 
Moment,  moment,  instant,  m. 
Monday,  lundi,  m. 
Money,  argent,  m. 
Month,  mois,  m. 
Moon,  lune,  f. 
More,  plus. 

Morning,  matin,  matinee. 
Mortal,  mortel. 
Mother,  mere,  f.,— in  law,  belle-mere. 

Grandmother,  grand^mere. 
Motive,  motif,  m. 
Mourning,  deuil,  m. 
Mouse,  houris,  f. 
Mouth,  botiche,  f. 

Move,  mouvoir,  emouvoir,  irr.  see  p.  190. 
Much,  beaucoup,  bien  de.    Too  — ,  trop. 

How  — ,  combien.    As  — ,  tant,  autant. 

As  —  as,  autant  que. 
Mud,  boue,  f. 
Murder,  assassiner. 
Music,  musique,  f. 


Mnslin,  mousseline,  f. 
Mutton,  mouton,  m. 


N. 


Nail,  ongle,  m.,  (of  metal)  clou^xa.. 

Naked,  nu. 

Name,  nom,  m. 

Napkin,  serviette,  f. 

Nature,  nature,  f. 

Naughty,  mechant. 

Near,  procJte,  pres,  aupres.  He  is  pretty 

near  it,  il  ne  s^enfaut  guere. 
Nearly,  presque,  a  peu  pres. 
Neat,  propre. 

'N aatly,  propremenf,  joliment. 
Necessary,  micessaire,  to  be,  —  falloir, 

irr.  see  p.  190. 
Neglect,  n.,  negligence,  f,  , 

Nejj^lect.  v.,  negliger. 
Neighbor,  voisin,  m.,  voisine,  f. 
Neither  —  nor,  ni  —  ni. 
Never,  ne — jamais. 
Now,  neuf,  nouveau,  frais. 
News,  nouvelle,  f. 
Hext,  prochain,  suivant. 
'N\ce,joli,  gentil. 
Niece,  niece,  f. 
Night,  nuit. 
No,  non,  point. 
No,  nul,  aucun. 
Nobility,  noblesse,  f. 
Noise,  bruit. 
Noon,  midi,  m. 
Nose,  nez,  m. 
Not,  no7i,  non  pas,  ne  — pas,  —  at  all, 

point  du  tout, 
NothinT,  ne  —  rien. 
Notwithstanding,  nonobstant. 
Nourish,  nourrir. 
November,  novembre,  m. 
Now,  maintenant,  a  present. 
Number,  nombre,  numero,  m. 


Oak,  cTiene,  m. 

Oats,  avoine,  f. 

Obedient,  obtissant. 

Obey,  obdir. 

Oblige,  obliger,  /aire  un  plaisir,  rendre 

un  ban  office. 
Obliging,  obligeant. 
Observe,  observer. 
Ohifi\n,  obtenir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  rempor- 

ter,  acqudrir. 
Occupy,  occuper. 
October,  oriobre,  m. 
Odious,  odieux. 
Of,  de. 

Oflend,  offenser. 
Offer,  n.,  offre,  f. 

Ofler,  v.,  offrir,  irr.  see  p.  184,  proposer. 
Often,  souvent. 
Oil,  huile. 


392 


VOCABULARY. 


Old,  vieux,  (vieil),  age,  —  age,  vieP^t^se, 
f.  How  —  are  you,  quel  age  avez- 
vousl 

Omit,  omettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

On,  sur. 

Once,  une  fois,  —  on  a  time,  autrefois. 
At  — ,  de  suite.  All  at  — ,  tout  a  coup, 
tout  d'un  coup. 

Only,  adj.,  seul,  unique. 

Only,  adv.,  ne  —  que. 

Open,  ouvrir,  irr.  see  p.  185. 

Open,  adj.,  ouverf,  sincere,  franc. 

Openness,  sincerite,  f. 

Opportunity,  occasion,  f. 

Oppose,  s^opposer. 

Opposite,  vis-a-vis,  oppose. 

Or,  ou. 

Orange,  orange,  f. 

Order,  n.,  ordre,  m. 

Order,  v.,  presci'ire,  irr.  see  p.  176. 

Otlier,  autre. 

Otherwise,  autrement. 

Ought.    See  Owe. 

Over,  sur,  au-dessus.  To  be  all  —  mud, 
etre  tout  convert  de  boue.  It's  all  over, 
c'est  fait,  or  e'en  est  fait  de.  .  . 

Overtake,  atteindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Owe,  devoir,  irr.  see  p.  189. 

Owl,  hibou,  m. 

Own,  propre. 

Owner,  proprietaire. 

Ox,  bcsuf,  m. 


Pagan,  paten,  m. 

Pain,  peine,  f.      On  —  of  death,  sous 

peine  de  mort. 
Painful,  penible. 
Paint,  peindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Painter,  peintre,  m. 
Painting,  tableau,  m. 
Palace,  palais,  m. 
Pale.  pale. 
Paper,  papier,  m. 
Pardon,  pardonner. 
Parent,  pere,   mere.     Parents,  pere  et 

mere. 
Part,  partie,  f.    To  take  —  in,  se  meler 

de. 
Party,  partie,  m.  ^ 

Pstss,  passer.  ^ 

Passage,  passage,  m. 
Patient,  malade,  m. 
Pay,  payer. 
Peace,  paix,  f. 
Peach,  peche,  f. 
Pear,  poire,  f. 
Peasant,  paysan,  m. 
Pebble,  caiUou,  m. 
Peculiar,  particulier. 
Pen,  plume,  f.,  —  holder,  porte-plume. 
Pencil,     crayon,    m.,   —    case,   porte- 

crayon. 
Penknife,  canif,  m. 
People,  peuplCf  gens. 


Perceive,  apercevoir,  irr.  see  p.  189. 

Perform,  faire,  s^acquitter  de. 

Perish,  pirir. 

Permit,  permettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Persecute,  perse'cuter. 

Persecutor,  persecuteur,  m. 

Person,  personne,  f. 

Persuade,  /^erswarfer. 

Picture,  tableau,  m. 

Piece,  morceau,  m.,  piece^  f. 

Pierce,  percer. 

Pig,  cochon,  m. 

Pin,  epingle. 

Pitiless,  impitoyable. 

Pity,  n.,  pitie,  f.    It  is  a  — ,  &est  dom 

mage. 
Pity,  v.,  plaindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Place,  n,,  lieu,  m.,  place,  f. 
Place,  v.,  placer,  mettre,  irr.  see  p.  180, 
Plain,  plaine,  campagne,  f. 
Plan,  plan,  projet,  m. 
Plank,  planche,  f. 
Phmt,  plante,  i. 
Plate,  assiette,  f. 
Play,  n.,    jeu.,  m.,  comedie,  —  thing, 

joujou,  m. 
Play,  v.,  jouer. 
Player,  jouer,  m. 
Please,  plaire  a,  irr.  see  p.  178.    If  you 

please,  s'i/  vous  plait. 
Pleasure,  plaisir,  m.    To  take  pleasure 

in,  se  plaire  a  .  .  . 
Plum,  prune,  f. 
Plunder,  butin,  m. 
Pocket,  poche,  f.,  —  handkerchief,  mour 

choir,  m.,  —  book,  porte-feuille. 
Poet,  poete. 

Poison,  v.,  empoisonner. 
Polite,  2)oli. 
Foliteuess,  politesse,  f. 
Pond,  etang,  m. 
Poor,  pauvre. 
Pope,  pape,  m. 
Poplar,  peuplier,  m. 
Populous,  peuple. 
Portion,  part,  f.,  portion,  f. 
Post-office,  poste,  f. 
Potato,  pomme  de  terre,  f. 
Pound,  livre,  f. 
Powerful,  puissant. 
Praise,  louer. 
Pray,  prier. 
Precious,  precieux. 
Prefer,  preferer. 
Prescribe,  prescrire,  irr.  see  p.  1^6,  o>*- 

donner. 
Presence,  presence,  f. 
Present,  present. 
Preserve,  preserver,  (pickle)  confire,  irr. 

see  p.  172. 
Pretence,  pretexte,  m. 
Pretend,  feindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Pretty,  adj.,  joli,  gentil. 
Pretty,  adv.,  a'^sez.    He  is  pretty  near  it, 

II  ne  s^en  faut  guere. 
Prey,  proie,  f. 
Pride,  orgueil,  m. 


VOCABULARY. 


393 


Principle,  principe,  m. 

Print,  imprimer. 

Printing,  imprimerie,  f. 

Prison,  prison,  f. 

Prodigious,  jjrodigieux. 

Produce,  lyroduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Project,  projet,  m. 

Promise,  n.,  promesse,  f. 

Promise,  v.,  promettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 

Proper,  convenable. 

Property,  proprit'^e,  f..  Men,  m. 

Proposal,  proposition,  f. 

Propose,  proposer. 

Prove,  prouver, 

Punctually,  ponctiiellement. 

Punctuality,  exactitude,  f. 

Punish,  puiiir. 

Punishment,  punition,  f. 

Pupil,  eleve,  m.  and  f. 

Purchase,  acheter. 

Purchasiy,  acheteur,  m. 

Purpose,  but,  m.,  dessein,  m.    On — ,  ex- 

pres,  a  dessein. 
Purse,  bourse,  f. 

Pursue,  poursuivre,  irr.  see  p.  174, 
Put,  mettre,  irr.  see  p.  180. 


Q. 

Quarrel,  querelle,  f. 
Queen,  reine,  f. 
Question,  n.,  question,  f. 
Question,  v.,  interroger. 
Quiet,  tranquille. 
Quite,  toutf  tout  a  fait. 


R. 

Railroad,  chemin  de  fer,  m. 

Rain,  n.,  pluie.  f. 

Rain,  v.,  pleuvoir,  irr.  see  p.  190. 

Rainy,  pluvieux. 

Raise,  elever,  lever. 

Rare,  rare. 

Rashness,  temerite,  i. 

Ray,  rayon,  m. 

Reach,  mteindre,  irr.  see  p.  175,  parve- 

mir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Read,  lire,  irr.  see  p.  177.    To  —  again, 

retire. 
Ready,  pret. 
Reaper,  moissoneur. 
Reason,  raison,f. 
Rebuild,  reb'Hir. 
Recall,  rappeler.    To  —  to  mind,  se  rap- 

pder. 
Receive,  recevoir,  irr.  see  p.  189,  accueil- 

lir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Recognize,  reconnaitre,  irr.  €ee  p.  178. 
Recollect,  se  rappeler. 
Recompense,  recompense. 
Recover,  se  porter  mieux,  gu4rir. 
Red,  rouge. 


Reduce,  reduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Reed,  roseau,  m. 

Keel,  chanceler. 

Reflect,  rejlechir. 

Refuse,  refuser. 

Regular,  regulier. 

Keign,  regne,  m. 

Rejoice,  se  rejouir. 

Relate,  rapporter,  raconter. 

Relieve,  secourir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 

Rely,  compter,  s'appuyer. 

Remain,  r ester,  deuieurer. 

Remedy,  reniede,  m. 

Remember,  se  souvenir,  irr.  see  p.  187,  se 

rappeler,  —  me  to  Iiim,  rappetez-moi  A 

son  souvenir. 
Rend,  dc'chirer. 
Render,  rendre. 
Renounce,  renoncer  d. 
Repair,  rvparer. 

Kepeat,  rdpiter,  redire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Repent,  se  repentir,  irr.  see  p.  184. 
Report,  n.,  bniit,  m. 
Report,  v.,  rapporter,  raconter. 
Repose,  v.,  se  reposer. 
Represent,  representer. 
Reproach,  v.,  reprocher,  bldmer. 
Reproduce,  reproduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Require,  demander. 
Resemble,  ressembler. 
Reside,  demeurer. 
Resolution, /erme^^,  f. 
Resolve,  resoudre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Rest,  n.,  repos. 
Rest,  v.,  reposer,  s'appuyer. 
Restless,  inquiet. 

Restrain,  restreindre,  irr.  see  p.  176, 
Return,  retourner,  revenir. 
Reveal,  reveler. 
Revenge,  vengeance,  f. 
Reward,  n.,  recompense,  f, 
Reward,  v.,  recompenser. 
Ribbon,  ruban,  m. 
Rice,  riz,  m. 
Rich,  riche. 

Riches,  richesse,  f..  Mens,  m.,  pi. 
Ridiculous,  ridicule. 
Right,  titre,  m.,  raison,  f.    You  are  iu 

the  — ,  vous  avez  raison. 
Ring,  sonner. 
Ripen,  murir. 
Risp,  se  lever. 
Risk,  hazarder. 
River,  jleuve,  m.,  riviere,  f. 
Road,  chemin,  m.,  route,  f. 
Rob,  voler. 
Robber,  voleur,  m. 
Roof,  toit,  m. 
Room,  chambre,  f. 
Rose,  rose,  f. 
Rotten,  pourri. 
Round,  adv.,  autour. 
Ruler,  regie,  f. 
Run,  courir,  irr.  see  p.  184,  —  away, 

s^enfuir,  irr.  see  p.  183,  —  to,  accourir, 

—     over,    parcourir,     —     aground, 

echouer. 


394 


VOCABULARY. 


S. 

Sacred,  sacre. 

Sad,  fdcheux,  triste. 

Sadness,  tristesse,  f. 

Sage,  n  ,  sage,  m. 

Salt,  set,  m. 

Same,  mvme. 

Satin,  satin,  m. 

Satisfy,  satisfaire,  in.  see  p.  180. 

Saturday,  suinedi,  m. 

Savage,  sauvage. 

Sr.ucer,  soucoi/pe,  t. 

Save,  sauver. 

Say,  dire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

Scarce,  scarcely,  a  peine. 

Scholar,  ecolier,  m.,  eleve,  m. 

School,  ecole,  f. 

Scold,  grander. 

Scratch  out,  rayer. 

Seal,  cacheter. 

Season,  saison,  f. 

Seduce,  seduire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 

See,  voir,  irr.  see  p.  192. 

Seek,  chercher. 

Seem,  2)araitre,  irr.  see  p.  178,  sembler. 

Seize,  saisir. 

Seldom,  rarement. 

Self,  meme. 

Sell,  vendre. 

Send,  envoyer,  irr.  see  p.  194,  —  away, 

renvoyer,  conegdier,   —  for,  envoger, 

chercher. 
Sense,  sens,  m. 
Sentiment,  sentiment. 
September,  septembre. 
Servant,  domestique. 
Serve,  servir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Set  off,  out,  partir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Sew,  coKdre,  irr.  see  p.  174. 
Shade,  shadow,  ombre,  f. 
Shame,  hovte,  f. 
Sliare,  partager. 
Shed,  verser,  repandre. 
Sheep,  mouton,  ra. 
Sheet,  feuille,  f.  (of  a  bed),  drap,  m. 
Shine,' briller,  luire,  irr.  see  p.  171. 
Shirt,  chemise,  f. 
Shoe,  Soulier,  m. 
Shoemaker,  cordonner. 
Shop,  boutique. 
Short,  court. 
Show,  montrer. 
Shower,  ondce,  f. 
Shrub,  arbuste,  m. 
Shun,  eviter,  fair,  irr.  see  p.  183. 
Shut,  fermer,  —  in,  enfermer. 
Sick,  malade. 
Side,  cote,  m. 
Sight,  vue,  f. 
Silence,  silence,  m. 
Silk,  soie,  f. 
Silly,  niais. 
Silver,  argent,  m. 
Simple,  simple. 
Since,  depuis. 
Sincere,  sincere. 


Sincerity,  sincerite,  f. 

Sing,  chanter. 

Singular,  singulier. 

Sir,  monsieur. 

Sister,  sceur,  — -in  law,  helle-sceur. 

Sit  (down),  s'asseoir,  irr.  see  p.  192. 

Skate,  patiner. 

Skin,  peau,  f. 

Slander,  v.,  medire  (de). 

Sleep,  v.,  dormir,  irr.  see  p.  183. 

Slide,  glis'-.er. 

Small,  petit. 

Smoke,  fumte,  f. 

Snow,  n.,  neiger,  f.,  —  flakes,  des  flocons 

de  neige. 
Snow,  v.,  neiger. 
So,  ainsi,  —  many,  tant  de. 
Soap, savon,  m. 
Sober,  sobre. 
Soft,  doux. 

Soil,  v.,  souiller,  salir. 
Soldier,  soldat,  m. 
Some,  du,  de  la,  des,  quelque. 
Something,  quelque  chose. 
Son,  Jils,  m. 
Soon,  bientot. 

Sorrow,  douleur,  f.,  chargin,  m. 
Sorry,  fdche  {de). 
Soul,  dine,  f. 
Source,  source,  f. 
South,  SM^,  mifZi,  m. 
Speak,  parler,  —  ill  of,  medire  (de). 
Spell,  epeler. 
Spite,  malice,  f.    In  —  of,  en  depit  de, 

malgre. 
Spoil,  corrompre. 
Spoon,  cuiller,  cuillere,  f, 
Sport,  jeu,  m. 
Spread,  etendre,  repandre. 
Spring,  printemps,  m.,  ressort,  m. 
Stagger,  chanceler. 
Stain,  n.,  tache,  f. 
Stain,  v.,  tacher. 
Stairs,  escalier,  m. 
Stake,  pieu,  m.     Our  life  is  at  — ,  il  y  va 

de  notre  vie. 
Star,  etoile. 

State,  etat,  m,,  condition,  f. 
Stay,  Tester,  demeurer. 
Step,  2ias,  m. 

Stick,  baton,  m.  , 

Still,  encore,  tougours. 
Stint?,  piquer. 
Stocking,  bas,  m. 
Stone,  pierre,  f. 
Stop,  arrefer. 
Storm,  tempete,  f. 
Strange,  etrange. 
Stranger,  etranger. 
Strawberry, /raise,  f. 
Street,  rwe,  f. 
Strength, /orce,  f. 

SivVke,  f rapper,  (of  a  clock)  sonner. 
String,  cordon,  m. 
Strong,  fort. 
Study,  n.  etude,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


395 


Stuff,  etoffe,  f. 

Subdue,  subjuger,  dompter. 

Submit,  soumettre,  irr.  see  p.  ISO. 

Subtract,  soustraire,  irr.  see  p.  174. 

Succeed,  reussir. 

Success,  succes,  m. 

Successful,  heureux.     To  be  — ,  reussir. 

Such,  tel. 

Suffer,  souffrir,  irr.  see  p.  185,  endurer, 

subir. 
Suffice,  sufflre,  irr.  see  p.  171. 
Sufficiently,  assez. 
Su<?ar,  Sucre,  m. 
Suit,  convenir,  irr.  see  p.  187. 
Summer,  ete,  m. 
Sun,  soleil. 
Superfluous,  superflu. 
Support,  v.,  appuyer,  soutenir,  irr.  see 

p.  187. 
Suppose,  supposer. 
Sure,  sur. 
Surprise,  etonner,  surprendre,  irr.  see 

p.  181. 
Surprising,  surprenant,  etonnant,  mer- 

veilleux. 
Surrender,  se  rendre,  livrer. 
Surround,  environner,  entourer. 
Sword,  epee,  f. 
Swim,  nager. 
Symbol,  symbole,  f. 


Table,  table,  f. 

Taint,  corrompre. 

Take,  prendre,  irr.  seep.  180,  —  part  in, 

se  meler  de ;  —  charge  of,  se  charger 

de ;  —  away,  oter,  enlever. 
Talent,  talent,  m. 
Talk,  causer. 
Task,  tdche,  f. 
Taste,  n.,  gout,  m. 
■Taste,  V,,  gouter. 
Tea,  the,  m. 
Teacher,  maitre. 
Tear,  larme,  f.    To  burst  into  — ,  fondre 

en  larmes. 
Tear,  v.,  dechirer. 
Tell,  dire,  irr.  see  p.  172. 
Than,  que,  de. 
Thank,  remercier.     I  —  thank  you,  je 

vous  remercie,  or  simply,  merci. 
That,  ce,  cela. 
Thaw,  degeler. 
Then,  adv.,  alors,  puis. 
Then,  conj,,  done. 

There,  la,  y.     There  is,  there  are,  il  y  a. 
Thick,  epais.    An  inch  thick,  epais  a?un 

pouce. 
Thief,  voleur,  m. 
Thimble,  de  {a  coudre),  m. 
Thing,  chose,  f. 
Tliink,  penser. 
Thorn,  epine,  f. 
Thought,  pensee. 
Threat,  menace,  f. 


Through,  d  tr avers,  au  travels  de,  par. 

Thumb,  pouce,  m. 

Tliunder,  n.,  tonnerre,  m. 

Thunder,  v.,  tonner. 

Thursday,  jeudi,  m. 

Thus,  ainsi. 

Tiger,  tigre,  m. 

Till,  jusqu'd. 

Time,  temps,  m.,  fois,  f.,  see  p.  160. 

Timid,  timide. 

Tired,  las,  fatigue. 

To,  a.  To-day,  aujourd'hui.  To-mor- 
row, demain.  Tlie  day  after  to-mor- 
row, apres-demain. 

Too,  trop,  —  much,  many,  trop. 

Tooth,  dent,  f. 

Toward  and  Towards,  vers,  sur,  envers. 

Towel,  essuie-mains,  m. 

Tower,  tour,  f. 

Town,  ville,  f. 

Tradesman,  marchand. 

Tragedy,  tragedie,  f. 

Transgress,  enfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  175. 

Translate,  traduire,  irr.  see  p.  170,  trans- 
ferer. 

Translation,  traduction,  version,  i 

Travel,  voyager. 

Traveller,  voyageur,  m. 

Treasure,  treso'r,  m. 

Treat,  trailer,  —  ill,  maltraiter. 

Treatment,  traitement. 

Treaty,  traite,  m. 

Tree,  arbre.  m. 

Tremble,  trembler,  tressaillir,  irr.  see  p. 
185. 

Trouble,  n.,  peine,  f. 

Trouble,  v.,  troubler,  inquieter. 

True,  vrai,  veritable. 

Trust,  avoir  con  fiance,  se  fler^  croire, 
ajouter  foi,  s'en  rapporter  a. 

Truth,  verite,  f. 

Try,  essayer. 

Tuesday,  mardi,  m. 

Tutor,  precepteur,  tuteur,  m. 

Tyrant,  tyran,  m. 


u. 

Ugly,  laid,  vilain. 

Umbrella,  parapluie,  m. 

Unbleached,  ecric. 

Uncle,  oncle,  m. 

Understand,  compendre,  irr.  see  p.  181, 

entendre. 
Undertake,  entreprendre,  irr.  see  p.  181. 
Undo,  defaire,  irr.  see  p.  180,  perdre. 

miner. 
Unfortunate,  matheureux. 
Ungrateful,  ingrat. 
Unhappy,  mal'heureux. 
Unheard  of,  inoui. 
Unknown,  inconnu. 
Unless,  a  moins  que,  de. 
Unsettled,    irresolu,    incertain,    incon- 

slant. 
Unstitch,  decoudre. 


396 


VOCABULARY. 


Upon,  sur. 

Vprightness,  proMte,  f. 
U.*e,  n.,  usqge,  m.    To  make  —  of  any- 
thing, se  servir  de. 
Use,  employer. 
Useful,  utile. 
Usually,  ordinairement. 


V. 

Vainly  (in  vain),  en  vain. 

Valley,  vallee,  f. 

Valor,  valeur,  f.,  hravouref  f.,  courage, 

n\. 
Variety,  varitte. 
Velvet,  velours,  m. 
Verb,  verhe,  m. 
Verse,  vers,  m. 
Very,  tres,  fort.  Men. 
Vessel,  vaisseau,  m. 
Vice,  vice,  m. 
Victory,  victoire,  f. 
Village,  village,  m. 
Vinegar,  vinaigre,  m. 
Violate,  enfreindre,  irr.  see  p.  176. 
Violet,  violette,f. 
Virtue,  vertu,  f. 
Virtuous,  vertueux. 
Visit,  visite,  f. 
Voice,  voix,  f. 
Volume,  volume,  tome,  m. 
Vow,  n.,  vceu,  m. 
Vow,  v.,  vouer. 
Voyage,  n.,  voyage,  m. 
Voyage,  v.,  voyager. 


w. 

Wait,  attendre. 

Walk,  marcher,  se  promener. 

Wall,  mur,m. 

Walnut,  noix,  f. 

Want,  n.,  manque,  f.,  faute,  f. 

Want,  v.,  vouloir,  avoir  envie,  manquer. 

War,  guerre,  f. 

Warm,  chaud. 

Watch ,  montre,  f. 

Water,  eau,  f. 

Weak,  faible. 

Weariness,  ennui,  m. 

Wearisome,  ennuyeux. 

Weary,  adj.,  las,  fatigue. 

Weary,  v.,  ennuyer. 

Weather,  temps,  m. 

Wednesday,  mercredi,  m. 

Week,  semaine,  f. 

Weep,  pleurer. 


Well,  Men.    To  be  well  (in  health),  se 

porter  Men. 
What,  que,  quoi,  quel. 
Wheat,  froment.  bid,  m. 
When,  quand,  lorsque. 
Where,  oit. 
Wliip,  fouet,  m. 
White,"  6ZaHC. 
Who,  qui,  lequel  etc. 
Whole,  tout. 

Whose,  de  qui,  dont,  see  p.  126. 
Why,  jiourquoi. 
Wicked,  mtchant. 
Wife,  femme. 
Willing,  pret.     To  be  — ,  vouloir,  irr. 

see  p.  lyi. 
Willingly,  volontiers. 
Win,  gagner. 
Wind,  vent,  m. 

Wind  up  a  watch,  remonter  une  montre. 
Window,  fenetre,  croiste,  f. 
Wine,  viii,  m. 
Winter,  hiver,  m. 
Wipe,  essuyer. 
Wisdom,  sagesse. 
Wise,  sage,  savant. 
Wish,  souhaiter,desirer,  vouloir ^irr.  see 

p.  191.    I  should  — ,  je  voudrais. 
With,  avec. 
Without,  sans. 
Witness,  temoin,  m. 
Wonderful,  admirable,  merveilleux. 
Wood,  bois,  m. 
Wool,  laine,  f. 
Word,  mot,  m.,  parole,  f.  To  keep  one's 

— ,  tenir  sa  parole. 
Work,  n.,  travail,  ouvrage,  m. 
Work,  v.^travaitler. 
World,  monde,  m. 
Worse,  adj.,  pire. 
Worse,  adv.,  pis. 
Worth,  digne.    To  be  — ,  valoir,  irr.  see 

p.  191. 
W^ound,  n., plate,  blessure. 
Wound,  v.,  blesser. 
Wretched,  malheureux,  miserable. 
Write,  dcrire,  irr.  see  p.  175. 
Writing,  n.,  ecriture,  f. 
Wrong,  tort,  m.     To  be  in  the  — ,  avoir 

tort. 


Year,  an,  m.,  annee,  f. 
Yes,  out. 
Yesterday,  hier. 
Yet,  encore. 
Yield,  ceder. 
Young,  jeune. 
Youth,  jeunesse,  f. 


i 


UUBINO'S   CATALOGUE 


STANDARD  EDUCATIONAL  WORKS, 


PRINCIPALLY    FOR 


PUBLISHED   AND   FOR   SALE  BY 

S.    R.    TJRBnsrO,    13,    Sclxool    street,    Boston. 

in.    "W.    CI3:RISTE:I^,1^^,    763,    Broadway,    ilSTew    York. 

m.   LEYFOLDT,   13S3,    Clxestniat    Street,   Bliiladelplxia. 


The  object  of  this  series  is  to  furnish  the  American  Student  with  cheap,  neat,  and  correct 
editions  of  the  latest  and  most  approved  Text  Books  and  Modern  Classical  Works,  from  the 
most  elementary  to  the  most  advanced,  for  the  study  of  Foreign  Languages. 

Upwards  of  thirty  volumes  have  been  published  within  the  past  year;  and  it  is  the  desire 
of  the  Publishers  that  the  series  should  be  completed  as  speedily  as  is  consistent  with  a 
judicious  selection,  and  with  the  correctness  so  important  in  works  for  educational  purposes. 


|r«|. 


OTTO'S  FRENCH  CONVERSATION  GRAMMAR.  A 
new  and  practical  method  of  learning  the  French  Language.  By  Rev.  Dr.  EMIL 
OTTO.  Thoroughly  revised  by  Feed:  Bocher,  Instructor  in  French  at  Harvard  College. 
12mo,  cloth.    Price  $1.75. 

L'lNSTRUCTEUR    DE    L'ENFANCE.      (A  first  Book  for 
Children  to  study  French.)    By  L.  BONCOEOR.    12mo,  cloth.     Price  80  cents. 

ELEMENTARY     FRENCH     READER;     OR,    LESSONS 
AND    EXERCISES    IN    FRENCH    PRONUNCIATION,    for    the    use    of    American 
Schools.     By  MAD.  M.  GIBEllT.    12mo,  boards.     Price  40  cents. 

LUCIE:    FAMILIAR    CONVERSATIONS    in    French    and 
English,  for  Children.     12mo,  cloth.     Price  90  cents. 


N 


EW  GUIDE  TO  MODERN  CONVERSATION,  in  French 

and  English.    By  WHITCOMB  AND  BELLENGER.    16mo,  cloth.     Price  «1.00. 


6'  TANDARD    KB  UCA  TIONA  L     WORKS. 


SADLER'S   Cours  de   Versions;    or,  Exercises    for  Translating 
English  into  French.     First  American  from  the  fifteenth  Paris  Edition.    Annotated 
and  revised  by  Prof.  C.  F.  GILLETTE.     16mo.     Price  f  1.25. 

TI^SOFS    FABLES    IN    FRENCH;    with    a   description    of 

J\  A      fifty  Animals,  mentioned  therein,  and  a  French  and  English  Dictionary  of  all  the 
words  contained  in  the  Work.    New  revised  Edition.     16mo,  cloth.     Price  75  cents. 

HISTOIRE     DE     LA     M^^RE    MICHEL    ET    DE     SON 
CHAT.      Par  EMILE  DE  LA  BEDOLLIERE.     With  a  French  and  English  Vocabu- 
lary.    By  MADAME  C.  R.  CORSON.    16mo,  cloth.     Price  75  cents. 

LA   MERE    L'OIE.      Poesies,  Chansons  et  Rondes  Enfantines. 
Avec  Illustrations.    (In  preparation.) 

PETIT     TRESOR     POETIQUE      des     Jeunes     Personnes ; 
precede  d'un  traite  de  versification   et  de  literature,  et  de  notices  biographiques. 
Par  MAD.  C.  R.  CORSON.     (In  preparation.) 

LE    PETIT    ROBINSON    DE    PARIS.       Par    MADAME 
EUGENIE  FOA.      12mo,  cloth.     Price  90  cents. 

TROIS    MOIS    SOUS    LA    NEIGE.       Journal    d'un    Jeune 
Habitant  du  Jura.       Par  JAQUES    PORCH  AT.       16mo,   cloth.       Price    90    cents. 
Ouvrage  couronne  par  I'Academie  Fran<^aise. 

L 'HISTOIRE    DE   FRANCE.     Racontee  a  la  Jeunesse.     Par 
M.  LAMi:  FLEURY.     16mo,  cloth.     Price  $1.50. 

LE     CLOS     POMMIER.        Nouvelle.        Par    AMEDEE 
ACHARD.     12mo,  cloth.     Price  90  cents. 


s 


OIREES    LITTERAIRES.      Causeries  de  Salon.      Par 

MADAME  C.  R.  CORSON  (nee  Rollin).    16mo,  cloth.     Price  80  cents. 


Mlqt  Smes  0f  P0ten  ixm\  |faj|i 

With  English  Notes,  by  Prof.  Ferdinand  Bocher,  Instructor  in  French  at 
Harvard  College.     12mo. 


^L 


L 


A    BATAILLE    DE    DAMES,    ou,   Un    Duel   en   Amour. 

Comedie  en  trois  actes.     Par  SCRIBE  ET  LEGOUV:fe.     Price  30  cents. 
II. 

A    MAISON    DE    PENARVAN.     Comedie  en  quatre  actes. 

Par  JULES   SANDEAU.      Price  30  cents. 


L 


III. 
A   POUDRE   AUX   YEUX.       Comedie  en  deux  actes.     Par 

MM,  EUGENE  LABICHE,  et  EDOUARD  MARTIN.     Price  30  cents. 


FOREIGN    LANGUAGES. 


IV. 

LES    PETITS    OISEAUX.      Comc^die    en   trois   actes.      Par 
MM.   EUGENE  LABICHE  et  DELACOUR.    Price  30  cents. 


It 


IN  preparation: 
OMAN      D'UN      JEUNE     HOMME      PAUVRE.       Par 

OCTAVE  FEUILLET. 

COLLEGE    SERIES    OF   MODERN   ENGLISH    PLAYS. 
With  French  Notes,  for  Translating  into  French. 

LA   PETITE   MAMAN.     Com^die.     Par   MME.   DE   M... 
LE  BRACELET.      Drame.     Par    MADAME    DB    GAULLE.      12mo,    paper.      Price 
25  cents. 

LA   VIELLE    COUSINE.       Par   E.   SOUVESTRE.      LES 
RICOCHETS.    Comedies.    12mo,  paper.    Price  25  cents. 

COMME    ON    FAIT    SON   LIT    ON   SE    COUCHE.     Par 
M.  :fiMILE  SOUVESTRE.     12mo,  paper.     Price  25  cents. 

OTTO'S    GERMAN    CONVERSATION    GRAMMAR.      A 
new  and  practical  method  of  learning  the  German  Language.    By  Rev.  Dr.  EMIL 
OTTO.      Sixth  Edition.    1  vol.,  12mo,  cloth.     Price  $2.00. 

INTRODUCTORY     GRAMMAR      OF     THE      GERMAN 
LANGUAGE.      By  E.   C.  F.   KRAUSS.     12mo,  cloth.     Price  90  cents. 

THE  GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH   INTERPRETER.     With 
a  literal  and  free  translation.      12mo,  cloth.      Price  60  cents. 


G 


D 


RIEB'S     DICTIONARY     OF     THE     ENGLISH     AND 

GERMAN     LANGUAGES.      Two  vols.,  royal  8vo  (over  2,400  pages),  half  bound. 
Price  $12.00. 

OEHLSCHL^GER'S    PRONOUNCING    GERMAN    Dic- 
tionary.   16mo  (841  pages),  cloth.    Price  $1.50. 

IE    IRRLICHTER.      Ein    Marchen    von    der    Verfasserin 

der  "Prinzessin  Ilsb."    12mo.    Price  50  cents. 

YERGISSMEINNICHT.       Eirie    Arabeske    von    GUSTAV 
ZU  PUTLITZ.     With  English  Notes.     12mo.     Price  40  cents. 

LA  RABBIATA.  — DAS  M^DCHEN  VON  TREPPI.    Zwei 
Novellen  von  PAUL  HEYSE.    12mo.     Price  35  cents. 
THE  SAME.     Translated  into  English.     (In  preparation.) 

IMMENSEE.       Novelle    von   THEODOR    STORM.       With 
English  Notes.     12mo.      Price  40  cents. 
THE  SAME.      Translated  into  English.    By  H.  Clark.    16mo.     Price  30  centri. 
THE  SAME.      Printed  on  Tinted  Paper.    Cloth,  top  gilt.     Price  90  cents. 


STANDARD    EDUCATIONAL     WORKS. 


SCHILLER     UND     SEINE     ZEIT.        Von     JOHANNES 
SCHERll.    12mo,  cloth  (over  600  pages).    Price  $1.75. 

THE    POETRY    OF    GERMANY.     Selections  from  the  most 
celebrated  Poets,  translated  into  English  verse,  with  the  original  text  on  the  opposite 
page.    By  ALFRED  BASKERVILLE.    12mo,  cloth  (664  pages).     Price  $2.00. 

READY   IN    OCTOBER: 

GOETHE'S      FAUST.       With    English    Notes.       In    cloth. 
Price  $1.00. 

SCHILLER'S   WILHELM  TELL.     With  English  Notes.     In 
cloth.    Price  75  cents. 

WILHELMI.      Einer    muss    heirathen,  Benedix,    Eigensinn. 
Price  30  cents. 


Italian;. 

B.    CUORE.     Italian    Grammar.       12mo,  cloth.      Price 

$2.00. 


ltiBaIton«s. 

pHAUCER'S   LEGENDE   OF   GOODE  WOMEN.     Edited, 

V^       with  an  Introduction,  and  notes  glossarial  and  critical,  by  HIRAM  CORSON.    16mo, 
cloth.     Price  $1.00. 

LANDMARKS     OF     ANCIENT     HISTORY.       By    Miss 
YONGE,  author  of  "  The  Heir  of  Redclyffe."    16mo,  cloth.     Price  $1.00. 

DR.   RIMMER'S  ELEMENTS  OF  DESIGN.     With  thirty- 
six  Plates.    Price  $3.00. 


in.    AV.    CECRISTTGRnsr,    7'63,    Broadway,    I^^ew    York.  ' 

S.    R.    TJRJBIIS'O,    13,    Scttool    Street,    Boston. 

in.    LIT:^^I»0LI3T,   13S3,    Cliestiaiat    Street,   Pliiladelphia. 

Ke».D  constantly  on  hand,  an  extensive  stock  of  Foreign,  Educational, 
Classical,  and  Miscellaneous  Literature. 

GiK^.ISW^RS*      3l)@TB©N;A.iCiS,     BE^.Laa^iS*     m     ALL     LANatfAGES, 

ORDERS   FOR  WORKS    NOT    IN   STOCK   PROMPTLY   ATTENDED   TO. 

List  of  New   Books    forwarded   gratis    when    reciuested. 

Regular     Importations     frotn     Eiirox)e,        Orders     Forwarded      WeeMy. 


YB  36368 


924164 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


